Customer ledger /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Customer ledger Customer ledger - overview /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-overview page By using the Customer ledger workspace, you can maintain complete and structured information about customers and salespersons, and track all sales, commissions, and incoming payments from customers. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Customer ledger - overview By using the Customer ledger workspace, you can maintain complete and structured information about customers and salespersons, and track all sales, commissions, and incoming payments from customers. With a variety of time-saving automation functionalities and reporting options, the Customer ledger workspace of Visma Net streamlines your entire receivable process and gives you the ability to reduce input error rates. The primary functionalities of the Customer ledger workspace are described briefly below and extensively in other topics in this section. ## Customer ledger multi-currency options Each customer account has a default currency assigned to it. Invoices will be generated in this customer's default currency unless currency overriding is allowed. The system automatically computes realised gains or losses when payments are received from foreign customers. Users can revalue outstanding foreign currency invoices in the base currency as often as needed by using the Currency management workspace. ## Customer defaults and overrides During Visma Net implementation, you can establish customer classes, which provide suitable default values to ease data entry. If you set up a default customer class that holds data common to most customers, users can add new customers more quickly. Also, when users enter documents, they specify a customer and most of the elements will be automatically filled in with the default values of the customer. This makes input of documents much easier and saves time. ## Multiple document and payment types With the Customer ledger workspace, your company's personnel can create manually or generate sales invoices for sold goods and services provided. You can correct invoices by using credit notes and purchase debit notes. Users can account for goods and services paid by cash and returned for cash with **cash sale** and **cash return** documents, respectively. Payments of various types made by different methods and prepayments can be entered and posted as they are received. For more information, see the following topics: + [About types of customer ledger documents](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-customer-ledger-documents/about-types-of-customer-ledger-documents/) + [About the preparation of deposits](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/track-cash-payments/about-the-preparation-of-deposits/) ## Payment application When entering a customer payment, you can apply it to open invoices and notes of the customer including credit notes. To reduce the time required to match payments to invoices,Visma Net gives you the ability to automatically apply customer payments and prepayments to the oldest outstanding invoices, notes, or overdue charges. If a payment was applied incorrectly, you can void the application of the payment or the entire payment. For more information, see [About automatic payment application](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-payments-and-applications/about-automatic-payment-application/). ## Rounding of invoice totals If the functionality of rounding of the document amounts is activated in your system, you can set up the rules and the precision to be used to automatically round the amounts of invoices. Notice that the rounding rules and the rounding precision that you specify for invoices are the same for all currencies. For more information, see the following topics: + [About rounding of document amounts](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/about-rounding-of-document-amounts/) + [Set up document amount rounding](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/set-up-document-amount-rounding/) ## Workflow options In Visma Net, you can configure the document processing workflow to match the policies established in your organisation. You can use multiple options that control processing and multiple processing forms. Newly entered documents can be released immediately or placed on hold and then reviewed by an authorised user before being released. Also, you can configure the workflow in such way that the documents are automatically posted on release, or that posting can be performed only by authorised users. ## Sending documents electronically With Visma Net, you can set up sending released documents, such as invoices or notes, electronically to customers who want to receive documents by email. Also, you can configure sending such emails to employees who work with specific customers. For customers who do not want to receive documents electronically, you can continue to print documents for sending them via postal services. For more information, see [Manage mailings - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-mailings/manage-mailings-overview/). ## Recurring invoices Schedules can be used to create and maintain recurring invoices, such as invoices for regular jobs or services your company provides for customers. After a recurring invoice is entered and assigned to a schedule, you will not need to re-enter the entire invoice each time it needs to be generated. For more information, see [About schedules for recurring documents](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-customer-ledger-documents/about-schedules-for-recurring-documents/). ## Payment terms You can define payment terms, which can be associated with specific customers. The payment terms, which are applied to incoming payments, define the due dates and the cash discounts available in case invoices are paid ahead of due dates. For details, see [About payment terms](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/payment-terms/about-payment-terms/). ## Debt collection Whenever customer payments are not immediately bound to the delivery of goods and services, businesses need complete and continuous tracking of outstanding debts. In Visma Net, it is easy to configure statement cycles and print statements, so customers have a detailed record of their balances with a specific branch or the entire organisation. Credit verification rules can be defined for each customer class and for each individual customer. Overdue charges can be applied if payments are late. A sequence of dunning letters can be configured to remind customers about unpaid invoices, and a credit hold can be applied to customers once the last letter has been generated. To learn more, see [Manage credit policy - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/manage-credit-policy-overview/). ## Write-offs After a certain period of time, a credit on your books should be written off and considered income. You can write off customer credits and balances that are less than the tolerance limits you have defined for the customers. For more details, see [Write-off methods - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/write-off-methods/write-off-methods-overview/). ## Salespersons and commissions In Visma Net, you can create accounts for each salesperson and assign default commission percentages. Sales commissions are calculated automatically, based on total sales or payments minus total returns during the sales commission period. See [Manage commissions - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-commissions/manage-commissions-overview/) for additional details. ## Contracts Many businesses use contracts if they provide goods and services to the customers during the specified period of time. For example: To maintain and repair a product during the manufacturer’s warranty period or after it has expired. In Visma Net, you can configure contract templates to provide typical settings for contracts. Contract settings are used for contract renewals (if they're permitted) and for recurring invoicing in accordance with the contract's invoicing schedule. For more information, see [Manage contracts - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/manage-contracts-overview/). ## Customer ledger security options To restrict users' access to some customer accounts, you can include the customer accounts and the users authorised to work with them in restriction groups. This functionality can be used to properly organise the work of salespeople. ## Audit trail Invoices have unique IDs that have been generated in accordance with the assigned number series, along with the customers' document reference numbers. These functionalities provide an easy-to-follow audit trail while preventing duplicate entries and payments. ## Other functionalities and options In addition to the functionalities already discussed, you can use the following capabilities to organise the collection process in the most convenient and effective way for your business: + Create and maintain an unlimited number of customer accounts. + Attach scanned images or electronic versions of customer original documents to payments, notes, and prepayments or to lines of the documents + Organise and store comprehensive customer information, including multiple invoicing and shipping addresses and associated general ledger accounts. + Run multiple reports displaying customer balances, ageing periods, statements, and transaction registration information. + Use inquiries, which display current customer information in a variety of ways: + Outstanding balances for a customer or customers by period and by currency. + Documents that are past due for a specific customer and overdue charge amounts owed by the customers. + Commissions payable to salespersons and their details, including sales amounts, return amounts, and total commissions. Migrate documents to Visma Net /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/migrate-documents-to-visma-net section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Migrate documents to Visma Net Migrate documents to Visma Net /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/migrate-documents-to-visma-net/migrate-documents-to-visma-net page If you need to move historical data to Visma Net, you can enter fully or partially settled documents into the system. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Migrate documents to Visma Net If you need to move historical data to Visma Net, you can enter fully or partially settled documents into the system. If you need to move historical data to Visma Net, you can enter fully or partially settled documents into the system. To load documents without affecting the General ledger, you have to first activate migration mode. You activate this mode in the Customer ledger workspace or in the Supplier ledger workspace (or both), depending on the documents to be migrated. ## Activating migration mode in the Customer ledger workspace To turn on migration mode in the Customer ledger workspace, you use the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. In this window, in the **Posting settings** section of the **General settings** tab, you select the **Activate migration mode** check box; you then click **Save** in the window toolbar. You can select or clear this check box at any time. ## Activating migration mode in the Supplier ledger workspace To turn on migration mode in the Supplier ledger workspace, you use the [Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-ledger-preferences-ap101000/) window. In this window, in the **Posting settings** section of the **General settings** tab, you select the **Activate migration mode** check box; you then click **Save** on the form toolbar. You can select or clear this check box at any time. When entering a document to the system in migration mode, you need to specify the open balance of the document, its original amount, and the document date. When these documents are released, migrated documents update customer or supplier balances but do not update the General ledger.

Related pages

Concepts

About processing documents in migration mode /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/migrate-documents-to-visma-net/about-processing-documents-in-migration-mode page Before you start the migration process in Visma Net, you need to prepare the list of all Customer ledger and Supplier ledger documents that you want to migrate to the system. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About processing documents in migration mode Before you start the migration process in Visma Net, you need to prepare the list of all Customer ledger and Supplier ledger documents that you want to migrate to the system. Before you start the migration process in Visma Net, you need to prepare the list of all Customer ledger and Supplier ledger documents that you want to migrate to the system. This list can contain all outstanding documents, including the closed ones (if needed). For each document, you need to specify its original amount, document date, currency, exchange rate, and balance open on the migration date. > [!NOTE] > The documents added when migration mode is activated do not update the General ledger. ## Types of Customer ledger and Supplier ledger documents that can be migrated The following types of Customer ledger documents can be entered in the migration mode: Invoice : , **Debit note**, and **Credit note**: You add these documents by using the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window. Payment : , **Prepayment**, and **Customer refund**: You add these documents by using the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window. Cash sale : and **Cash return**: You add these documents by using the [Cash sales (AR304000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/cash-sales-ar304000/) window. The following types of Supplier ledger documents can be entered in the migration mode: Invoice : , **Purchase credit note**, and **Credit adjustment**: You add these types of documents by using the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window. Check : , **Prepayment**, and **Supplier refund**: You add these types of documents by using the [Supplier payments (AP302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-payments-ap302000/) In migration mode, you add the needed documents with the **On hold** or **Balanced** status. These documents can be edited and released only when migration mode is activated. ## Entry of a document's open balance When you are adding an Customer ledger or Supplier ledger document, you specify the open balance of a migrated document on the document entry window as follows: + In the **Balance** field, which is available for editing in the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) and [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) windows + In the **Available balance** field in the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window + In the **Unapplied balance** field in the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window When you save a document, the system validates that the open balance does not exceed the document's original amount; if it does, the system displays an error. An open balance that you specify in a document in migration mode will be displayed in the **Migrated balance** field on the **Financial details** tab on the document entry window once you save a document. This field is available for migrated documents only. ## Release of migrated documents The release of migrated Customer ledger documents causes customer balances to be updated; similarly, the Supplier ledger documents update supplier balances. These released documents do not produce batches in the General ledger. Thus, on the **Financial details** tab of the corresponding document entry windows, instead of the link to the General ledger batch, the **Migrated** word will be displayed for a migrated document in the **Batch no.** field (note that the name of the field varies depending in the window). > [!NOTE] > Migrated documents cannot be edited and released when migration mode is deactivated, and regular documents cannot be edited and released when migration mode is activated.

Related pages

Concepts

Customer ledger preferences /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-preferences section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Customer ledger preferences Click the links below to learn more about a topic you are interested in. Use the breadcrumb links in the upper left corner to see your location, navigate backwards or go to the starting point. About Customer ledger preferences /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-preferences/about-customer-ledger-preferences page In the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window you can customise the Customer ledger workspace to your company's requirements. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About Customer ledger preferences In the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window you can customise the Customer ledger workspace to your company's requirements. For more information: [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/). The settings information for the customer ledger is organised in five tabs. ## General settings On the **General settings** tab, you can set or change your company's settings for + number series + posting and retention + data entry + data processing + commission settings for salespersons + default write-off reason codes + VAT recalculations ## Price/discount settings On the **Price/discount settings** tab, you can set or change your company's settings for + default rate types + price retention + discount application ## Dunning settings To start producing dunning letters, on the **Dunning settings** tab you define the process settings that are appropriate for your company. Then you run the process when needed. As a result of the process, you have prepared dunning letters that you can email or print and send by postal mail to your customers. ### Dunning process settings You can select how the system will prepare dunning letters through grouping overdue documents by: + Customer account (the **By customer** option). This is the default. + Customer account and the dunning level of a document (the **By document** option). ### Dunning fee settings When dunning letters are sent, they have a cost. You can specify the amount of this dunning fee for each level. In the **Dunning fee item** field you specify a dedicated non-stock item that provides an account and a subaccount to register the collected fee. When a dunning letter of a particular level is released, the system generates an invoice for the customer with the fee amount specified for that level. This invoice is created with the **Balanced** status. You can adjust the fee amount, if needed, and then release the invoice in the **Invoices** window. If you want the dunning fee documents to be automatically released, select the check box **Automatically release dunning fee documents**. The documents will never be printed, emailed, or sent to AutoInvoice since the fees are charged on the dunning letter itself. If the dunning fee amount is set to zero, no invoice is generated. The dunning fee amount is specified on the **Dunning letter** report. You can send a dunning letter to a customer that contains invoices which do not have the same dunning level. The invoices are grouped by dunning level, but the dunning fee is the one of the highest dunning invoice and not the sum of the dunning fees for each level. ### Include other unpaid documents Select the **Include other unpaid documents** check box if you want the system to automatically include documents that are not yet overdue in the list of due documents in a dunning letter. The option is selected by default. ### Exclusion from the dunning process You can exclude a customer from the dunning process, regardless of which dunning process you have selected. To do this for a customer, deselect both the **Send dunning letters by email** and **Print dunning letters** check boxes on the **Invoicing settings** tab in the **Customers** window. If you prepare dunning letters by document, you can exclude a particular document from the dunning process by selecting the check box **Exclude from the dunning process** in the **Dunning info** section of the document in the **Invoices** window. ### Dunning letter levels Visma Net assigns to each document the dunning letter level that is equal to the level of the last dunning letter that included this document. If the document has not been included in a dunning letter yet, the system sets the dunning level for that document to 0. You can send to a customer a dunning letter that contains invoices which do not have the same dunning level. The invoices are grouped by dunning level. ## Mailing settings On the **Mailing settings** tab, you can set or change your company's settings for the format of dunning letters, invoices, expiry notes, and statements, as well as for default recipients. ## Payment settings On the **Payment settings** tab, you can set or change your company’s CID definition. It is possible to set up one definition for domestic payments and one for international payments.

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

Add a payment message prefix /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-preferences/add-a-payment-message-prefix section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Add a payment message prefix ## Before you start [Add a payment method and a bank account to a customer](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/add-a-payment-method-and-a-bank-account-to-a-customer/). 1. Go to the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. 1. Go to the **General information** tab. 1. In the **Customer refund settings** section, fill in the **Payment message prefix** field. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). ## What is next? Make sure you have created and released the credit note(s), payment(s) and/or prepayment(s) to be refunded. For step-by-step instructions on how to create a credit note, see [Create a credit note](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/create-a-credit-note/). For step-by-step instructions on how to create a payment or prepayment, see [Enter a payment document](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/enter-a-payment-document/). For step-by-step instructions on how to release these documents, see [Release a payment document](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/release-a-payment-document/). To create a customer refund for a document and send it for payment via AutoPay, go to [Process a customer refund](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/online-help/o2c/ar50300s-process-customer-refund-task/).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Set up invoice mailing in the Customer ledger preferences /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-preferences/set-up-invoice-mailing-in-the-customer-ledger-preferences section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Set up invoice mailing in the Customer ledger preferences 1. Go to the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. 1. Go to the **Mailing settings** tab. 1. In the **Default sources** table, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) and select **INVOICE** on the new row. 1. In the **Default email account** column, select the email account from which the invoices will be sent. 1. In the **Report** column, select the report to be used for generating the invoice, which will be sent as an attachment. 1. In the **Notification template** column, select the **InvoiceNotification** template, which will be used to compose the body of the email. 1. In the **Format** column, select the attachment format. If the format specified in this mailing does not match the format preferences of a contact, the attachment will be sent in the format preferred by the contact. 1. Select the **Active** check box for the mailing. 1. In the **Default recipients** table, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) to add a new row. 1. In the **Contact type** column, select **Invoicing**. The person who is displayed in the **Attention** field, in the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window on the **Invoicing settings** tab, will be the recipient for the dunning letters. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). You can also configure dunning letter mailing for: One customer, see: [Set up invoice mailing for a customer](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/set-up-invoice-mailing-for-a-customer/). Customer classes, see: [Set up invoice mailing for a customer class](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-classes/set-up-invoice-mailing-for-a-customer-class/).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Create a new payment configuration /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-preferences/create-a-new-payment-configuration section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create a new payment configuration 1. Go to the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. 1. Go to the **Payment settings** tab. 1. Click Insert. 1. Optional: If you have multiple branches, you can add different settings for each branch. 1. In the **Payment method** field, you can select the payment method to which you want your configuration to apply. 1. In the **Description** field, add a name for your new configuration. 1. In the **Reference modulus** drop-down list, select a modulus for your new configuration. 1. In the table below, under **Element**, you choose which elements will make up your new configuration. 1. You can add new elements by clicking ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. Under **Number of positions**, fill in the number of digits the element should have. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). Make overdue and dunning settings in the Customer ledger preferences /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-preferences/make-overdue-and-dunning-settings-in-the-customer-ledger-preferences section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Make overdue and dunning settings in the Customer ledger preferences ## Before you start [Configure an overdue charge code](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/overdue-charges/configure-an-overdue-charge-code/) ## Activate processing settings for overdue charges 1. Go to the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. 1. [Select processing options for overdue charges](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-preferences/select-processing-options-for-overdue-charges/). 1. Click the **Dunning settings** tab. 1. In the **Dunning process** field, select one of these options: + **By customer** - The system prepares reminders by grouping overdue documents by customer account. If you select this option, the system selects the **Automatically release dunning letters** check box, and sets it to read-only. See: [Prepare dunning letters by customer](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-dunning-letters/prepare-dunning-letters-by-customer/). + **By document** - The system prepares dunning letters by grouping overdue documents by customer and by document dunning level. See: [Prepare dunning letters by document](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-dunning-letters/prepare-dunning-letters-by-document/). > [!NOTE] > We recommend that you keep the default option, which is **By document**. You can switch from **By customer** to **By document**, but the other way around is not recommend. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) to add a new line in the table. The system adds a new dunning letter level and suggests a value to use for days past due and days to settle. You can change these values. 1. In the **Days past due** field, select how many days after the payment is due that you want to send out the first dunning letter. 1. In the **Description** field, enter a free text to describe what kind of reminder this is. 1. In the **Dunning fee** field, enter the fee for this dunning letter level. 1. In the **Report text code** field, select one oft he available values. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). ## Select mailing settings 1. Go to the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. 1. Go to the **Mailing settings** tab. 1. In the **Default sources** table, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) and select **DUNNINGLETTER** on the new row. 1. In the **Default email account** column, select the email account from which the letters will be sent. 1. In the **Report** column, select the report to be used for generating the dunning letter document, which will be sent as an attachment. 1. In the **Notification template** column, select the **DunningLetterNotification** template, which will be used to compose the body of the email. 1. In the **Format** column, select the attachment format. > [!NOTE] > If the format specified in this mailing does not match the format preferences of a contact, the attachment will be sent in the format preferred by the contact. 1. Select the **Active** check box for the mailing. 1. In the **Default recipients** table, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) to add a new row. 1. In the **Contact type** column, select **Invoicing**. > [!NOTE] > The person that is displayed in the **Attention** field, in the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window on the **Invoicing settings** tab, will be the recipient for the dunning letters. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). ## What is next? [Calculate overdue charges](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/overdue-charges/calculate-overdue-charges/)

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Set up dunning letter mailing in the Customer ledger preferences /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-preferences/set-up-dunning-letter-mailing-in-the-customer-ledger-preferences section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Set up dunning letter mailing in the Customer ledger preferences 1. Go to the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. 1. Go to the **Mailing settings** tab. 1. In the **Default sources** table, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) to add a new row. 1. Select **DUNNINGLETTER**. 1. In the **Default email account** column, select the email account you want to use as your sender address. 1. In the **Report** column, select the report you want to use to generate the dunning letter document, which will be sent as an attachment. 1. In the **Notification template** column, select the **DunningLetterNotification** template, which will be the template for the body of the email. 1. In the **Format** column, select the attachment format. If the format you specify here is different from a contact's format preferences, the system will use the contact's preferences. 1. Select the **Active** check box for the mailing. 1. In the **Default recipients** table, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) to add a new row. 1. In the **Contact type** column, select **Invoicing**. In the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window on the **Invoicing settings** tab, you can see the name of the dunning letter recipient in the **Attention** field. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). You can also configure dunning letter mailing for: One customer, see: [Set up dunning letter mailing for a customer](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/configure-mailing-settings-for-dunning-letters-for-a-customer/). Customer classes, see: [Set up dunning letter mailing for a customer class](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-classes/set-up-dunning-letter-mailing-for-a-customer-class/).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Select processing options for overdue charges /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-preferences/select-processing-options-for-overdue-charges section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Select processing options for overdue charges 1. Go to the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. 1. Go to the **General information** tab. 1. In the **Data processing settings** section, select one or more of the following options: + **Apply payments to overdue charges first**: If you select this check box, the system applies payments first to the overdue charge documents and then to the invoices and notes. + **Set default overdue charges by statement cycle**: This check box defines whether the overdue charge code is provided by the **statement cycle** or the **customer class**. If you select this check box, the system will use the overdue charge code assigned to the statement cycle. If you do not select it, the system will use the overdue charge code assigned to the customer class. + **Calculate on overdue charges documents**: If you select this check box, the system configures all overdue charges to be compound charges (charges calculated on charges). 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Apply line discount to Item price or Extended item price /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-preferences/apply-line-discount-to-item-price-or-extended-item-price section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Apply line discount to Item price or Extended item price 1. Go to the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. 1. Go to the **Price/discount settings** tab. 1. In the **Apply line discount to** drop-down list, select **Item price** or **Extended item price**. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Change the setting for automatic posting on release /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-preferences/change-the-setting-for-automatic-posting-on-release section If you do not want the payments, invoices, and credit notes to be posted and closed automatically in the general ledger after you have released them in the customer ledger, you can change the default setting in the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Change the setting for automatic posting on release If you do not want the payments, invoices, and credit notes to be posted and closed automatically in the general ledger after you have released them in the customer ledger, you can change the default setting in the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window. For more information: [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/). 1. Go to the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. 1. Go to the **General information** tab. 1. In the **Posting and retention** area, deselect the **Automatically post on release** check box. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). To be able to post released documents after you have deselected this option, go to the [Post transactions (GL502000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/post-transactions-gl502000/) window in the general ledger and post them manually.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Round invoice amount to the nearest whole number /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-preferences/round-invoice-amount-to-the-nearest-whole-number page In the customer ledger preferences you have the option of rounding the sales invoice amount. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Round invoice amount to the nearest whole number In the customer ledger preferences you have the option of rounding the sales invoice amount. Follow the steps below to round the amount to the nearest whole number. 1. Go to the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. 1. On the **General settings** tab, find the section **Data entry settings**. 1. In the **Rounding rule for invoices** drop-down list, select the option **Nearest**. The **Use currency precision** option means that the invoice amount is rounded to the precision supported for the currency used on the invoice. 1. In the **Rounding precision** drop-down menu, select the option **1.00**. Customer classes /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-classes section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Customer classes Click the links below to learn more about a topic you are interested in. Use the breadcrumb links in the upper left corner to see your location, navigate backwards or go to the starting point. Create a customer class /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-classes/create-a-customer-class section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create a customer class 1. Go to the [Customer classes (AR201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-classes-ar201000/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. Enter the next free **Class ID**. The fields marked with \* are mandatory. > [!NOTE] > If you are unsure of the next free number, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to open the **Select - Class ID** window. 1. In the **Description** field, enter the name or description of your new customer class. 1. Add the rest of the information for this specific customer class. First on the **General information** tab, and then continue with the other tabs. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Create a customer class template /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-classes/create-a-customer-class-template section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create a customer class template 1. Go to the [Customer classes (AR201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-classes-ar201000/) window. 1. In the **Class ID** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select the customer class you want to use as a template. 1. Make any changes to the settings, to fit your new template. 1. Click ![icon-clipboard-with-arrow](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-clipboard-with-arrow.png) and from the drop-down list select **Save as template...**. 1. If a separate window does not open, go to the [Document templates (SM209020)](/visma-net-erp/help/management/management-windows/document-templates-sm209020/) window. 1. In the [Document templates (SM209020)](/visma-net-erp/help/management/management-windows/document-templates-sm209020/) window, enter a name for the template you have created, and click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Use a template to create a new customer class /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-classes/use-a-template-to-create-a-new-customer-class section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Use a template to create a new customer class 1. Go to the [Document templates (SM209020)](/visma-net-erp/help/management/management-windows/document-templates-sm209020/) window. 1. Click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select the customer class template you want to use. 1. Click **Save to clipboard**. 1. Go to the [Customer classes (AR201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-classes-ar201000/) window. 1. Click ![icon-clipboard-with-arrow](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-clipboard-with-arrow.png) and from the drop-down list select **Paste from** [name of template]. > [!NOTE] > You may have to click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) to empty the fields before you can paste the template into the fields. 1. Enter the next free **Class ID**. The fields marked with \* are mandatory. > [!NOTE] > If you are unsure of the next free number, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to open the **Select - Class ID** window. 1. In the **Description** field, enter the name of your customer class. 1. Change the settings to fit your new customer class. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Copy one customer class to a new one /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-classes/copy-one-customer-class-to-a-new-one section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Copy one customer class to a new one 1. Go to the [Customer classes (AR201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-classes-ar201000/) window. 1. Next to the **Class ID** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select the customer class you want to use as a basis to create a new customer class. 1. Click ![icon-clipboard-with-arrow](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-clipboard-with-arrow.png) and from the drop-down list select **Copy**. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. Click ![icon-clipboard-with-arrow](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-clipboard-with-arrow.png) and from the drop-down list select **Paste**. 1. Change any settings to fit the new customer class. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Edit or delete customer classes /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-classes/edit-or-delete-customer-classes section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Edit or delete customer classes ## Edit a customer class 1. Go to the [Customer classes (AR201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-classes-ar201000/) window. 1. In the **Class ID** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select the customer class you want to make changes to. 1. Make your changes. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). ## Delete a customer class 1. Go to the [Customer classes (AR201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-classes-ar201000/) window. 1. In the **Class ID** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select the customer class you want to delete. 1. Click ![icon-delete](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-delete.png). 1. Click **OK**.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Set a customer class as default /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-classes/set-a-customer-class-as-default section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Set a customer class as default 1. Go to the [Customer classes (AR201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-classes-ar201000/) window. 1. You are here: The **General information** tab. 1. Find the area Data entry. 1. In the **Default customer class ID** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select the customer class you want to use as default. 1. If you need to make changes to the default customer class, click ![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png). 1. In the [Customer classes (AR201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-classes-ar201000/) window, make your changes and click **Save and close**. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Set customer class print and email preferences /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-classes/set-customer-class-print-and-email-preferences section You can send documents to your customers in different ways, and set-up these options for each customer class individually. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Set customer class print and email preferences You can send documents to your customers in different ways, and set-up these options for each customer class individually. 1. Go to the [Customer classes (AR201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-classes-ar201000/) window. 1. In the **Class ID** field, select the customer class for which you want to configure the settings. 1. On **General information** tab, in the **Default print and email settings** section, select the option that suits the customer class the best: 1. **Print invoices** - to be printed, and then posted as a letter. 1. **Send invoices by email** - to be attached and sent in an email. 1. **Send invoices to AutoInvoice** - if you want invoices for this customer class to be sent directly to AutoInvoice. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). You can also set the print and email preferences individually for each customer: see [Set customer print and email preferences](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/set-customer-print-and-email-preferences/)

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Send invoices by email /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-classes/send-invoices-by-email section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Send invoices by email 1. Go to the [Customer classes (AR201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-classes-ar201000/) window. 1. In the **Class ID** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select the customer class for which invoices should be sent by email. 1. Go to the **General information** tab. 1. Under **Default print and email settings**, select **Send invoices by email**. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Set up invoice mailing for a customer class /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-classes/set-up-invoice-mailing-for-a-customer-class section If you are setting up invoice mailings settings for one customer, you can consider to do this in the Customers (AR303000) window, see Set up invoice mailing for a customer. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Set up invoice mailing for a customer class If you are setting up invoice mailings settings for one customer, you can consider to do this in the Customers (AR303000) window, see Set up invoice mailing for a customer. For more information: [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/), [Set up invoice mailing for a customer](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/set-up-invoice-mailing-for-a-customer/). ## Before you start If you are setting up invoice mailings settings for one customer, you can consider to do this in the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window, see [Set up invoice mailing for a customer](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/set-up-invoice-mailing-for-a-customer/). 1. Go to the **[Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/)** **[Customer classes (AR201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-classes-ar201000/)** window. 1. In the **Customer number** **Class ID** field, select the customer for which you want to configure the mailing. 1. Go to the **Mailing settings** tab. 1. In the **Mailings** table, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) and select **INVOICE** on the new row. 1. In the **Email account** column, select the email account from which the invoices will be sent. 1. In the **Report** column, select the report to be used for generating the invoices, which will be sent as an attachment. 1. In the **Notification template** column, select the **InvoiceNotification** template, which will be used to compose the body of the email. 1. In the **Format** column, select the attachment format. > [!NOTE] > If the format specified in this mailing does not match the format preferences of a contact, the attachment will be sent in the format preferred by the contact. 1. Select the **Active** check box for the mailing. 1. In the **Recipients** table, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the **Contact type** column, select **Invoicing**. > [!NOTE] > The person that is displayed in the **Attention** field, in the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window on the **Invoicing settings** tab, will be the recipient for the dunning letters. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Set up dunning letter mailing for a customer class /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-classes/set-up-dunning-letter-mailing-for-a-customer-class section You can also configure dunning letter mailing for one customer. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Set up dunning letter mailing for a customer class You can also configure dunning letter mailing for one customer. 1. In the **Customer number** **Class ID** field, select the customer for which you want to configure the mailing. 1. Go to the **Mailing settings** tab. 1. In the **Mailings** table, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) to add a new role. 1. Select **DUNNINGLETTER**. 1. In the **Email account** column, select the e-mail account you want to use as your sender address. 1. In the **Report** column, select the report you want to use to generate the dunning letter document, which will be sent as an attachment. 1. In the **Notification template** column, select the **DunningLetterNotification** template, which will be the template for the body of the email. 1. In the **Format** column, select the attachment format. If the format you specify here is different from a contact's format preferences, the system will use the contact's preferences. 1. Select the **Active** check box for the mailing. 1. In the **Recipients** table, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) to add a new row. 1. In the **Contact type** column, select **Invoicing**. In the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window on the **Invoicing settings** tab, you can see the name of the dunning letter recipient in the **Attention** field. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). See: [Configure mailing settings for dunning letters for a customer](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/configure-mailing-settings-for-dunning-letters-for-a-customer/)

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Make settings in the Customer classes window /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-classes/make-settings-in-the-customer-classes-window section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Make settings in the Customer classes window ## Before you start [Add a text for dunning letters and reminders](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-dunning-letters/add-a-text-for-dunning-letters-and-reminders/) ## Activate overdue charges and write offs for a customer class 1. Go to the [Customer classes (AR201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-classes-ar201000/) window. 1. Select a **Class ID**. 1. Go to the **General information** tab. 1. In the **Default financial and payment settings** section, select the **Apply overdue charges** check box. 1. Select the **Enable write-offs** check box. 1. In the **Write-off limit** field, enter the amount limit. 1. Go to **General ledger accounts** tab. 1. Enter the accounts and the subaccounts for write-offs. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). ## Select dunning letter/reminder texts 1. Go to the [Customer classes (AR201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-classes-ar201000/) window. 1. Select a **Class ID**. 1. Click the **Report text settings** tab. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) in the **Report text settings**. 1. In the **Notification ID** column, select **Dunning letter**. 1. If this is the first line you are adding, the **Level** column displays the number 1 automatically. 1. In the Report text code column, select the reminder text that you created in the previous process step. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). 1. Optional: Repeat the procedure to add more than one reminder/dunning letter level. In step 5, remember to change the number 1 to the next unused number for dunning letters. > [!NOTE] > If you have decided to have two or three reminders before you send the invoices to debt collection, inform the customer in the last letter that the invoice will be sent to the debt collector if you have not received their payment by the due date. ## What is next? [Configure an overdue charge code](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/overdue-charges/configure-an-overdue-charge-code/)

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Validate customer data in the Customer list /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-classes/validate-customer-data-in-the-customer-list section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Validate customer data in the Customer list You can make settings in the [Countries/counties/postcodes (CS20400S)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/countries-counties-postcodes-cs20400s/) and [Customer classes (AR201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-classes-ar201000/) windows, so that the system validates the data that comes in via AutoInvoice to the [Customer list (AR40101S)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-list-ar40101s/). Fields that are missing information will be marked with ![icon-error-exclamation](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-error-exclamation.png). 1. Go to the [Customer list (AR40101S)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-list-ar40101s/) window. 1. Select a **Customer class**. 1. Select a **Country**. 1. Select the correct check box for **AutoInvoice validation**. 1. The system validates the list of customers and the ![icon-error-exclamation](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-error-exclamation.png) is displayed where information is missing for customers that have the option **Send to AutoInvoice** set. > [!NOTE] > You can select a customer in the table and click **View customer** to go to the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window and look at the details for a specific customer.

Related pages

Windows

About export types /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-classes/about-export-types page Export types determine the automatically suggested sales account and VAT category on sales or customer invoice lines and sales order lines. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About export types Export types determine the automatically suggested sales account and VAT category on sales or customer invoice lines and sales order lines. You can set an **Export type** in the [Customer classes (AR201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-classes-ar201000/) and [Customer locations (CR303010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-locations-cr303010/) windows. ## Export type on customer location When you have a customer with a location in a different country than the main location, requiring a different VAT calculation and sales account, you can give the location the appropriate export type. The system reads the **Export type** value from the customer location first, and if not set, from the customer class. ## Export type determines sales account and VAT category Export types determine the: + sales account on sales documents + VAT category on sales documents for lines with item IDs Generally, each **Export type** corresponds to one sales account and VAT category , according to the following table: |Export type|Sales account|VAT category| |---|---|---| |**Domestic**|**Sales account**|**Sales VAT category**| |**Domestic exempt VAT**|**Sales - non-taxable account**|**Exempt VAT sales VAT category**| |**EU**|**Sales - EU account**|**Sales EU VAT category**| |**Export**|**Sales - export account**|**Export VAT category**| There are situations where the above table does not apply. For more information, see: [Suggested sales account](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/about-suggested-sales-accounts/) and [Suggested VAT category](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/about-suggested-vat-categories/).

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

Manage customers /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage customers About customer account setup /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/about-customer-account-setup section Here are the high-level steps for creating a customer account: 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About customer account setup Here are the high-level steps for creating a customer account: After you have done preliminary configuration, creating a customer account is a matter of investing the time needed to type the customer's contact information and make any needed adjustments in the settings for this customer. In this topic, you will read about how to set up a customer account and how to further adjust the settings of each customer. ## Setting up the customer account Here are the high-level steps for creating a customer account: 1. You open the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window, and in the window toolbar, you click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). The default customer class is initially assigned to the new customer account, so the elements have the values that were specified for the default customer class. If you want the settings for this customer to be based on a different (more specific) customer class, select that class, and the elements will be populated with the values specified for the selected class. 1. You adjust the settings for this customer as needed and fill in information (such as details about payment methods and addresses) that was not defined in the selected customer class. One example is the payment method: If the customer class does not define a default payment method, you should specify one. Also, a default payment method may require you to provide customer-specific information, such as the card number. You can override any value, making it specific to the customer. 1. When you have finished changing and adding customer details, make sure that all required settings have been filled in and save the new customer account. You can use the copy-and paste functionality in Visma Net to create similar customer accounts. But if you have to override many values similarly for multiple customers, consider creating a new customer class. ## Using and maintaining customer information When you have finished with the initial setup of a customer account, the account contains all the information the system needs to process the customer's documents. When you enter customer documents in the Customer ledger workspace, you should first select the customer. Once you do, the system fills in appropriate elements in the window with the settings specified for the customer's account. Over time, customers may change their addresses, payment methods, and preferred carriers. You can update customer accounts quickly as you learn about these changes.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

About customer locations /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/about-customer-locations page If the Business account locations functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window, you can specify more than one location for a customer account, and each location can have specific settings. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About customer locations If the Business account locations functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window, you can specify more than one location for a customer account, and each location can have specific settings. For more information: [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/). If the **Business account locations** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window, you can specify more than one location for a customer account, and each location can have specific settings. Locations, which are maintained in the [Customer locations (CR303010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-locations-cr303010/) window, provide appropriate customer default information for sales orders and invoices. In this topic, you will read about the main location and the default location, as well as the values provided by locations for sales orders and invoices. ## Main and default locations When you create a customer account in the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window, the system creates the main location for the customer automatically by using all the settings you have specified on the **Delivery settings** tab. (This is the case whether or not the **Business account locations** functionality is enabled.) The main location has **MAIN** as its ID, which cannot be modified. You can specify that the identifier of the branch the user is currently signed in is used by default as the identifier of the customer’s main location instead of the **MAIN** location. To do this for all customers of a class, you select the **Default location ID from branch** check box in the [Customer classes (AR201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-classes-ar201000/) window. Once you create the main location, it is automatically marked as the default location on the **Locations** tab of the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window. If additional locations have been added to the customer account, you can make another location the default location by selecting the location and clicking **Set as default** in the table toolbar. When you create a new location, the address and contact information of the main location are used by default, and the general ledger accounts and location settings (the settings grouped under the **Location settings** section) of the default location are used by default. You can replace any of these settings for the new location. The settings of the default location are used when you create new customer documents, as described in the next section. ## Location and customer documents When you enter a customer document (that is, an invoice, payment, cash sale, or sales order), you should first select the customer. When you do, certain elements in the window are filled in with the settings associated with the customer's default location. If you select a location other than the default one, the values will change to those associated with the selected location. The selected location provides default values for the customer's documents: the VAT zone, the shipping instructions, and the sales account and corresponding subaccount. Also, for sales orders, the location provides the shipping address and contact information. You can override any of the default values. For new invoices and sales orders entered into the system, tax settings are by default those in both the VAT zone of the customer location and the product category associated with the items specified as the document details. The system creates the resulting list of applicable taxes automatically and shows it on the **VAT details** tab of [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) or [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/). ## Location and discounts Each customer's location can be also associated with a customer price class, which is used as a condition to be met for discount application. You can specify different customer price classes for different locations to make your pricing policy more flexible.

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

About export types /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/about-export-types page Export types determine the automatically suggested sales account and VAT category on sales or customer invoice lines and sales order lines. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About export types Export types determine the automatically suggested sales account and VAT category on sales or customer invoice lines and sales order lines. You can set an **Export type** in the [Customer classes (AR201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-classes-ar201000/) and [Customer locations (CR303010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-locations-cr303010/) windows. ## Export type on customer location When you have a customer with a location in a different country than the main location, requiring a different VAT calculation and sales account, you can give the location the appropriate export type. The system reads the **Export type** value from the customer location first, and if not set, from the customer class. ## Export type determines sales account and VAT category Export types determine the: + sales account on sales documents + VAT category on sales documents for lines with item IDs Generally, each **Export type** corresponds to one sales account and VAT category , according to the following table: |Export type|Sales account|VAT category| |---|---|---| |**Domestic**|**Sales account**|**Sales VAT category**| |**Domestic exempt VAT**|**Sales - non-taxable account**|**Exempt VAT sales VAT category**| |**EU**|**Sales - EU account**|**Sales EU VAT category**| |**Export**|**Sales - export account**|**Export VAT category**| There are situations where the above table does not apply. For more information, see: [Suggested sales account](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/about-suggested-sales-accounts/) and [Suggested VAT category](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/about-suggested-vat-categories/).

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

Create a customer /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/create-a-customer section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create a customer ## Before you start To make it easier to create customers, you can first create customer classes and select one as your default. This way the customers you create afterwards will already have some default information filled in. See [Create a customer class](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-classes/create-a-customer-class/). > [!NOTE] > If you do not want to use the default customer class for the customer you are creating, you can select a different one on the **General settings** tab, in the section **Financial settings**. Visma Net immediately changes the related information. 1. Go to the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) to create a new customer, and enter the **Customer name**. The next available **customer number** is automatically added to the new customer when you save. The default **Status** for the new customer is **Active**. The fields marked with \* are mandatory. 1. [Add general information for a customer](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/add-general-information-for-a-customer/) on the **General information** tab. 1. Add information on the **Invoicing settings** tab. 1. Add information on the **Delivery settings** tab. 1. On the **General ledger accounts** tab, check or select the customer ledger accounts/subaccounts you want to use for the general ledger transactions for the customer. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). > [!NOTE] > The system automatically adds the **customer number** when you save.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Delete customer /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/delete-customer section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Delete customer 1. Go to the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window. 1. In the **Contact ID** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select the customer you want to delete. 1. Click ![icon-delete](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-delete.png). 1. Click **OK** to confirm that you want to delete the current customer.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Make customer-specific changes /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/make-customer-specific-changes section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Make customer-specific changes ## Before you start To make it easier to create customers, you can [Create a customer class](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-classes/create-a-customer-class/) and set one as default. Customer classes have a number of default settings, so many fields will automatically be filled in. However, you can still edit some of the automatically filled-in fields in order to set individual preferences. 1. Go to the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window. 1. In the **Customer no.** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select the customer you want to make changes to. 1. Make your changes. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Add general information for a customer /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/add-general-information-for-a-customer section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Add general information for a customer ## Before you start [Create a customer](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/create-a-customer/) In some of the steps in this procedure, you only have to check that the information is correct for the customer you are creating. 1. You are here: On the **General information** tab. 1. In the **Main address** section, add the address information. 1. In the **Main contact** section, fill in the **Attention**, **Email** and **Phone** fields. 1. In the **Financial settings** section, select the **Customer class**. 1. Select the **Terms** for the customer class. 1. Select the **Currency ID** and the other currency settings. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Connect contact to customer /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/connect-contact-to-customer section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Connect contact to customer 1. Go to the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window. 1. In the **Customer no.** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select the customer you want to add a contact to. 1. In the **Contacts** tab, click **Add contact**. 1. In the **Contacts** window, either 1. click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) in the **Contact ID** field, to select an existing contact. or 1. enter the **Last name** of a new contact. 1. Then enter as much information as possible on the remaining tabs. The fields marked with \* are mandatory. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png) or **Save and close**

Related pages

Tasks

Add delivery settings for a customer /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/add-delivery-settings-for-a-customer section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Add delivery settings for a customer ## Before you start [Create a customer](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/create-a-customer/) [Add general information for a customer](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/add-general-information-for-a-customer/) [Add invoicing settings for a customer](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/add-invoicing-settings-for-a-customer/) In some of the steps in this procedure, you only have to check that the information is correct for the customer you are creating. 1. Go to the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window. Click on the **Delivery settings** tab. 1. Optional: In the **Shipping address** section, you can add an address that differs from the main address - for delivery. If the address is the same, select the **Same as main** check box. 1. Optional: In the **Shipping contact** section, you can add a contact that differs from the main contact - for delivery. If the contact is the same, select the **Same as main** check box. 1. In the **Default location settings** section, enter a **Corporate ID** and/or a **VAT registration ID**. 1. Optional: If yo have enabled the Warehouses functionality in your system, select the **Warehouse** and other shipping information in the **Shipping instructions** section. 1. Fill in any other fields you think is relevant for this customer. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Add invoicing settings for a customer /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/add-invoicing-settings-for-a-customer section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Add invoicing settings for a customer ## Before you start [Create a customer](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/create-a-customer/) [Add general information for a customer](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/add-general-information-for-a-customer/) In some of the steps in this procedure, you only have to check that the information is correct for the customer you are creating. 1. Go to the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window. Click on the **Invoicing settings** tab. 1. Optional: In the **Invoice address** section, you can add an address that differs from the main address - for invoicing. If the address is the same, select the **Same as main** check box. 1. Optional: In the **Invoice contact** section, you can add a contact that differs from the main contact - for invoicing. If the contact is the same, select the **Same as main** check box. 1. Optional:In the **Parent account** field, you can select a bank account to be the parent account of the currently selected customer account. > [!NOTE] > This field and a list of accounts are only available if the **Consolidate balance** and **Consolidate statements** check boxes are selected for the selected customer account. 1. In the **Print and e-mail settings** section, it is important to decide how you want to send different customer documents. For example, you should not select both **Print invoices** and **Send invoices by e-mail** for the same customer. Print and email settings: 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). ## What is next? [Add delivery settings for a customer](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/add-delivery-settings-for-a-customer/)

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Prepare to use electronic invoices for customers /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/prepare-to-use-electronic-invoices-for-customers page When you enter the organisation number and the VAT registration number for the customer, and if this number exists in the AutoInvoice portal, Visma Net sets up the customer automatically so that you can send electronic invoices to this customer. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Prepare to use electronic invoices for customers When you enter the organisation number and the VAT registration number for the customer, and if this number exists in the AutoInvoice portal, Visma Net sets up the customer automatically so that you can send electronic invoices to this customer. If the organisation number and the VAT registration number does not exist in the AutoInvoice portal, you have to select the **Send to AutoInvoice** check box manually in the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window. The setting in the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window is set dependent on the customer setting, so that all invoices you send to your customer will automatically be sent as electronic invoices via AutoInvoice if this check box is selected. If you for some reason cannot send one particular invoice electronically to a customer, you can send it either by email or regular mail; you go to the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window on the **Invoice address** tab, and deselect the **Send to AutoInvoice** option. The following procedures describe how you set up AutoInvoice for a new or for an existing customer. [Prepare to use AutoInvoice for a new customer](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/prepare-to-use-autoinvoice-for-a-new-customer/) [Prepare to use AutoInvoice for an existing customer](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/prepare-to-use-autoinvoice-for-an-existing-customer/)

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Add a payment method and a bank account to a customer /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/add-a-payment-method-and-a-bank-account-to-a-customer section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Add a payment method and a bank account to a customer ## Before you start For the previous step, see: [Enable batch payments](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/manage-payment-methods/enable-batch-payments/). 1. Go to the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window. 1. In the **Customer no.** field, select the customer you want to refund. 1. On the **Payment methods** tab, click **Add payment method**. 1. In the **Payment method** column, select the method of payment. 1. In the **Cash account** column, select the cash account. 1. In the **Value** column, fill in the bank account to want to refund to. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png), or **Save and close**. The payment method is now linked to the customer. > [!NOTE] > If you go to the **Invoicing settings** tab, the selected payment method is displayed in the **Default payment method** section. ## What is next? [Add a payment message prefix](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-preferences/add-a-payment-message-prefix/).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Set up invoice mailing for a customer /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/set-up-invoice-mailing-for-a-customer section If you are setting up invoice mailings settings for a number of customers, you can consider to do this in the Customer classes (AR201000) window, see Set up invoice mailing for a customer class. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Set up invoice mailing for a customer If you are setting up invoice mailings settings for a number of customers, you can consider to do this in the Customer classes (AR201000) window, see Set up invoice mailing for a customer class. For more information: [Customer classes (AR201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-classes-ar201000/), [Set up invoice mailing for a customer class](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-classes/set-up-invoice-mailing-for-a-customer-class/). ## Before you start If you are setting up invoice mailings settings for a number of customers, you can consider to do this in the [Customer classes (AR201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-classes-ar201000/) window, see [Set up invoice mailing for a customer class](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-classes/set-up-invoice-mailing-for-a-customer-class/). 1. Go to the **[Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/)** **[Customer classes (AR201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-classes-ar201000/)** window. 1. In the **Customer number** **Class ID** field, select the customer for which you want to configure the mailing. 1. Go to the **Mailing settings** tab. 1. In the **Mailings** table, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) and select **INVOICE** on the new row. 1. In the **Email account** column, select the email account from which the invoices will be sent. 1. In the **Report** column, select the report to be used for generating the invoices, which will be sent as an attachment. 1. In the **Notification template** column, select the **InvoiceNotification** template, which will be used to compose the body of the email. 1. In the **Format** column, select the attachment format. > [!NOTE] > If the format specified in this mailing does not match the format preferences of a contact, the attachment will be sent in the format preferred by the contact. 1. Select the **Active** check box for the mailing. 1. In the **Recipients** table, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the **Contact type** column, select **Invoicing**. > [!NOTE] > The person that is displayed in the **Attention** field, in the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window on the **Invoicing settings** tab, will be the recipient for the dunning letters. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Configure mailing settings for dunning letters for a customer /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/configure-mailing-settings-for-dunning-letters-for-a-customer section If you want to make settings for dunning letter mailing for more than one customer, you can do this in the Customer classes (AR201000) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Configure mailing settings for dunning letters for a customer If you want to make settings for dunning letter mailing for more than one customer, you can do this in the Customer classes (AR201000) window. For more information: [Customer classes (AR201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-classes-ar201000/). ## Before you start If you want to make settings for dunning letter mailing for more than one customer, you can do this in the [Customer classes (AR201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-classes-ar201000/) window. See: [Set up dunning letter mailing for a customer class](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-classes/set-up-dunning-letter-mailing-for-a-customer-class/). 1. In the **Customer number** **Class ID** field, select the customer for which you want to configure the mailing. 1. Go to the **Mailing settings** tab. 1. In the **Mailings** table, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) to add a new role. 1. Select **DUNNINGLETTER**. 1. In the **Email account** column, select the e-mail account you want to use as your sender address. 1. In the **Report** column, select the report you want to use to generate the dunning letter document, which will be sent as an attachment. 1. In the **Notification template** column, select the **DunningLetterNotification** template, which will be the template for the body of the email. 1. In the **Format** column, select the attachment format. If the format you specify here is different from a contact's format preferences, the system will use the contact's preferences. 1. Select the **Active** check box for the mailing. 1. In the **Recipients** table, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) to add a new row. 1. In the **Contact type** column, select **Invoicing**. In the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window on the **Invoicing settings** tab, you can see the name of the dunning letter recipient in the **Attention** field. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Set up e-mail invoices for one customer /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/set-up-e-mail-invoices-for-one-customer section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Set up e-mail invoices for one customer 1. Go to the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window. 1. In the **Customer no.** field, select the customer. 1. Go to the **General information** tab. 1. Under **Main contact**, enter the customer's email address. 1. Go to the **Invoicing settings** tab. 1. Under **Print and email settings**, select **Send invoices by email**. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Set customer print and email preferences /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/set-customer-print-and-email-preferences section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Set customer print and email preferences ## Before you start You send invoices and credit notes to your customers in different ways, and you can set the option the customer prefers, for each customer. You can also set preferences for print and emailing for a customer class. For more information, see [Set customer class print and e-mail preferences](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-classes/set-customer-class-print-and-email-preferences/). 1. Go to the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window. 1. Go to the **Invoicing settings** tab, and look for the **Print and email settings** section. 1. Select one of the available options: + **Print invoices** - print out and send the invoice by letter. + **Send invoice to AutoInvoice** - send the invoice electronically with AutoInvoice. + **Send invoices by email** - attach the invoice to an email. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Enable write-offs for customer /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/enable-write-offs-for-customer section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Enable write-offs for customer ## Before you start To make it easier to create customers, you can [Create a customer class](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-classes/create-a-customer-class/) and set one as default. Customer classes have a number of default settings, so many fields will automatically be filled in. However, you can still edit some of the automatically filled-in fields in order to set individual preferences. 1. Go to the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window. 1. Go to the **General information** tab. 1. Under **Financial settings**, select the **Enable write-offs** check box. 1. Fill in the **Write-off limit** field. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). > [!NOTE] > If you do not enter a limit, Visma Net is not able to perform write-offs.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Prepare to use AutoInvoice for a new customer /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/prepare-to-use-autoinvoice-for-a-new-customer section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Prepare to use AutoInvoice for a new customer 1. [Create a new customer](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/create-a-customer/). 1. Go to the **Delivery settings** tab. 1. Under **Default location settings**, enter the **Corporate ID** and the **VAT registration ID**. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). 1. Go to the **Invoicing settings** tab. 1. Check that the **Send invoices to AutoInvoice** check box has been selected. If it is not selected, you can select it manually and click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). 1. Go to the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window, the **Invoice address** tab. 1. Under the **AutoInvoice** section, check if the **Send to AutoInvoice** check box has been selected. If it is not selected, you can select it manually and click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). Prepare to use AutoInvoice for an existing customer /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/prepare-to-use-autoinvoice-for-an-existing-customer section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Prepare to use AutoInvoice for an existing customer 1. Go to the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window. 1. In the **Customer no.** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select the customer you want to send electronic invoices to. 1. Go to the **Invoicing settings** tab. 1. Under **Print and email settings**, select the **Send invoices to AutoInvoice** check box. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). Preliminary configuration /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/preliminary-configuration section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Preliminary configuration About preliminary configuration /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/preliminary-configuration/about-preliminary-configuration page You need to perform the following steps before you start setting up customer accounts: 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About preliminary configuration You need to perform the following steps before you start setting up customer accounts: Visma Net provides multiple tools that you can use to successfully interact with your customers and to maintain accurate and up-to-date information about these customers. Before you begin entering customer accounts, you need to perform certain planning and configuration tasks. In this topic, you will read about the steps you should perform before you start setting up customer accounts. ## Overview of the preliminary configuration process 1. You plan customer accounts and the supporting entities. During this step, you will not yet act upon your plans; you are gathering information and making decisions that will affect configuration. 1. You set up the entities you need for successful management of customer accounts. 1. You set up the customer classes that will make it easier for users to set up accounts. 1. You adjust the settings of the Customer ledger workspace to ease the entry and maintenance of customer accounts. After you have finished the preliminary configuration, setting up customer accounts is a quick and easy process.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

Visma Net entities needed for customer account setup /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/preliminary-configuration/visma-net-entities-needed-for-customer-account-setup page Before you start setting up customer accounts in Visma Net, you need to configure the entities that will ease the processes of customer account creation and maintenance. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Visma Net entities needed for customer account setup Before you start setting up customer accounts in Visma Net, you need to configure the entities that will ease the processes of customer account creation and maintenance. Before you start setting up customer accounts in Visma Net, you need to configure the entities that will ease the processes of customer account creation and maintenance. As you configure these entities, you should use the information that you gathered when you planned customer accounts. In this topic, you will find the list of Visma Net entities you need to configure to ease the processes of customer account creation and maintenance. Some of these entities are required, while others are optional, as indicated in the list. ## Needed Visma Net entities The needed entities in Visma Net may include the following: + Customer identifiers (optional): You should make sure that the segmented key used as a template for identifiers of customer accounts suits your needs, and adjust the **BIZACCT** segmented key (or the **CUSTOMER** key) if needed. + General ledger accounts (required): You need to create the general ledger accounts and subaccounts (if applicable) to be used to record sales and cash discounts, unless you plan to use accounts and subaccounts that already exist. You will need to select these already-defined accounts when you create customer accounts. For details, see: [Add an account to the chart of accounts](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-chart-of-accounts/add-an-account-to-the-chart-of-accounts/). + Statement cycle (required): You need to set up at least one statement cycle that will be assigned to a customer class (and therefore to all customers that are assigned to this class). For details, see: [Statement cycles - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/statement-cycles/statement-cycles-overview/). + Payment methods (required): You need to define at least one payment method to be used for customer payments. For details, see: [Manage payment methods - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/manage-payment-methods/managing-payment-methods-overview/). + Payment terms (optional): You should set up each needed set of payment terms that will define the due dates of documents. When you set up customer classes, you can assign the appropriate payment terms to classes, which in turn will cause the payment terms to be assigned by default to all new customers of this class. For details, see: [About payment terms](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/payment-terms/about-payment-terms/). + Overdue charges (optional): You can set up overdue charges, which define additional charges that customers will incur for open documents that are past due and assign the charges to a customer class (which causes them to be assigned by default to all new customers of this class). For details, see: [About overdue charges](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/overdue-charges/about-overdue-charges/). + Mailings (optional): You can set up multiple mailings to notify customers about their balances, invoices, sales orders, and other information you want to send to customers on a regular basis. For details, see: [About mailings for customers](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-mailings/about-mailings-for-customers/). ## Next steps in preliminary configuration When you have finished creating the entities mentioned above, you should proceed with setting up customer classes, which are a key entity in Visma Net. Customer classes are used to provide default values, thus speeding the creation of customer accounts and other customer classes. See [About customer classes](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/preliminary-configuration/about-customer-classes/) for details about how to determine which classes you want to create, how to create these classes, and what default values they provide.

Related pages

Concepts

About customer classes /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/preliminary-configuration/about-customer-classes page A customer class groups customers that have similar characteristics. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About customer classes A customer class groups customers that have similar characteristics. A customer class groups customers that have similar characteristics. You can divide customers into classes based on the types of goods or services the customers buy or on other properties, such as the customers' currency and payment methods. You specify a customer class when you create a customer account, which causes the system to fill in the values of the class for the customer. Any of these default values can be overridden. Generally, the first customer class you define is the default customer class. When you create a customer class, the values of the default customer class are automatically filled in, but any of them can be overridden. The default customer class is initially specified as the customer class for a new customer account, but you can change it to any other class. In this topic, you will read about the default customer class, customer classes in general, and the default values provided by customer classes. Separate sections describe the currency and printing settings that are provided by the customer class. ## Default customer class When you set up customer classes, we recommend that you first create the default customer class: the customer class that has values that are shared by most customer classes and customers. You define the default customer class (and all other classes) in the [Customer classes (AR201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-classes-ar201000/) window, and then specify the class as your default customer class in the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. When you create a new customer class, the elements of this class will be automatically populated with the values specified for the default customer class, which speeds data entry. You can override these values as needed. ## Other customer classes You also create non-default customer classes by using the Customer classes window. As mentioned above, when you create a customer class, it is initially populated with the values of the default customer class, any of which can be overridden. In addition to using the default customer class, you can create a new customer class based on an existing customer class by using commands from the **Edit** menu in the Customer classes window. You can copy the settings of a particular customer class and paste them to create another class, or you can create a template for multiple similar customer classes. ## Default values provided by the customer class Customer classes provide default values for individual customer accounts, so users can create customer accounts more easily. When you create a customer class, you must specify the class ID and description, and you can decide which additional elements to specify for the class, including the following: + General settings: The country of customers, the taxation settings (including the VAT zone for the class), and the salesperson responsible for dealing with customers of the class + Delivery elements: The carrier whose services will be used, and the shipping terms + Credit verification settings: The credit verification rules and the credit limit + Financial settings: The Payment info from AutoPay payment terms, the statement cycle, the payment method, the overdue charges, and the currency + Print and email details: The statement type; whether customers' documents should be sent electronically or by postal mail + General ledger accounts: The accounts from the chart of accounts and the subaccounts (if any) to be used to record your operations with the customers of the class + Mailings: The list of mailings to which you want to subscribe customers of the class When you create a new customer account by using the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window, by default, the elements of this window have the values that were specified for the default customer class. If the new customer should be assigned to a more specific class, select the class, which changes the default values to those that were specified for the selected class. You can override any value provided by the class. With customers, as with classes, you can use the copy-and-paste functionality to create similar customer accounts. If you have to override many values of the customer account similarly for multiple customers, consider creating a new customer class with those values specified. ## Default currency settings A customer class can hold the default currency and the default currency rate to be used for customer accounts. We recommend that you select a foreign currency for a customer class only if most customers of the class use this currency. By default, users may not override the currency on customer documents, to reduce the chance of input errors related to currency choice. If some customers may use a non-default currency and non-default rate type on individual documents, you can allow currency and rate overriding for those customers by selecting the **Enable currency override** and **Enable rate override** check boxes in the Customers window. If want to allow override of the currency and the rate by default for all customers of the class, select these check boxes in the Customer classes window for the customer class. ## Default printing and emailing settings A customer class can provide the default settings that permit or deny mass-printing and emailing of invoices, notes, and statements. Settings that control printing and emailing preferences of customers are located under the **Print and email settings** section on the **Invoicing settings** tab of the Customer classes window. For instance, if you want to be able to print at once the invoices for all customers of a customer class by using the Send invoices window, you must select the **Print invoices** check box for the customer class. This makes the documents of these customers available for mass-printing. You can override this setting for individual customers of the class, if needed. ## Preferred locale setting You can group the customers who prefer the same language to one customer class. For this class, you specify a locale that is associated with the language in the **Locale** field of the Customer classes window. > [!NOTE] > The system will assign the locale to the new customer accounts automatically when you select the customer class for the account in the Customers window. For existing customers, you need to manually select the preferred locale for each account. Assigning a locale to a customer account allows you to print documents for the customer in preferred language. ## Next steps in preliminary configuration Once you have defined the default customer class and all other customer classes that will be used to ease the entry of new customer accounts, you have defined all the Visma Net entities that you need to set up before you begin creating customer accounts. Next, you need to consider Customer ledger settings as they relate to customer management and make any needed adjustments, as described in [About adjusting customer ledger preferences](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/preliminary-configuration/about-adjusting-customer-ledger-preferences/).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

About adjusting customer ledger preferences /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/preliminary-configuration/about-adjusting-customer-ledger-preferences page Initial configuration of the Customer ledger workspace was performed during implementation. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About adjusting customer ledger preferences Initial configuration of the Customer ledger workspace was performed during implementation. Initial configuration of the Customer ledger workspace was performed during implementation. This topic describes settings in the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window that you should reconsider because they control customer settings and your interactions with customers. You should review these settings, which are described below, and change them as needed before you begin setting up customer accounts. ## Speeding data entry To help make data entry easier and more error-proof, you can use the following settings in the Customer ledger preferences window: Default customer class ID : Here you specify the customer class whose values are shared by most customer classes and customers. Then when you create a new customer class or a new customer account, the corresponding elements in the window will be populated with the values of the default customer class automatically, thus speeding data entry. (You should have already specified the default customer class, as described in Customer classes, and used it to ease the creation of other customer classes.) Combine sales sub. from : In this field, you can specify the rule to create the default sales subaccount (if subaccounts are used in your system) for use on customer ledger documents. This default subaccount can have its values for different segments taken from different subaccounts related to the document. For each segment of the resulting sales subaccount, you can specify from which subaccount, such as the company's branch, customer location, stock item, or employee account, the segment value should be copied. For details, see: [About combined subaccounts](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-subaccounts/about-combined-subaccounts/). Balance write-off reason : and **Credit write-off reason code**: In these fields, you specify the reason codes to be used by default for writing off credits and balances. The system will fill in the reason codes specified here in the **Reason code** field in the [Write-off balances and credits (AR505000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/write-off-balances-and-credits-ar505000/) window when you select the type of write-off operation, as well as in the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window. For details on write-off functionality, see: [Write-off methods - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/write-off-methods/write-off-methods-overview/). ## Managing credit policy To configure the options related to implementing your company's credit policy for all customers, you can specify the following settings: Hold document on failed credit check : You select this check box if you want new invoices and notes to be placed on hold for customers that have failed the credit check. If the check box is not selected, new documents can be saved and processed regardless of the credit check result, although the system warns the user about the customers that have failed their credit check. For details on credit verification, see [About credit verification](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/about-credit-verification/). Age credits : You select this check box if you want the balances of credit notes and open payments to be taken into account when a customer statement is generated. For details, see [Statement cycles - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/statement-cycles/statement-cycles-overview/). Set default overdue charges by statement cycle : You select this check box to use the overdue charges specified for the statement cycle assigned to a customer account instead of the overdue charges specified for the customer class that is also assigned to the customer account. Calculate on overdue charges documents : You select this check box if you want overdue charges to be calculated on overdue charge documents as well as on invoices. Apply payments to overdue charges first : You select this check box if you have enabled automatic payment application for a customer account or you have selected the **Auto-apply payments** check box in the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window and want new payments to be applied first to overdue charges and then to outstanding invoices. For details on the processing of overdue charges, see [About overdue charges](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/overdue-charges/about-overdue-charges/). ## Printing and emailing documents To make the printing and emailing of invoices and notes a required step before these documents are released, you should select the following check boxes: **Require invoice/note printing before release** and **Require invoice/note emailing before release**. When you create an invoice for a customer that prefers to receive a printed copy of the documents or the **Print invoices** check box is selected for the customer in the Customers window, the invoice is created with the **Pending print** status. After you have printed the invoice, its status is changed to **Balanced** and you can release it. To print customer ledger documents, use the [Send invoices (AR508000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/send-invoices-ar508000/) window. ## Preparing consolidating statements and dunning letters Depending on the policies established in your company, you can prepare a single consolidated statement for each customer or prepare multiple statements for each branch of your company. To prepare consolidated statements for all customers, select the **Consolidate statements for all branches** check box, and in the **Statement from branch** field, select the branch that will be specified as the sender. You can prepare consolidated dunning letters as well. To prepare consolidated dunning letters for all customers, select the **Consolidate dunning letters for all branches** check box, and in the **Dunning letter from branch** field, select the branch that will be specified as the sender. ## Managing mailings To inform your customers of past-due invoices, purchase debit notes, and overdue charges, you can configure the sequence of dunning letters on the **Dunning settings** tab of the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. You can specify the sending criteria for each letter in the sequence. Also, you can define the number of days you offer a customer to settle the due document before the next letter is sent. If a customer account has at least one due document that meets the specified criteria, you can prepare and send a dunning letter. Note that you need to configure a corresponding mailing to be able to prepare and send dunning letters. For details, see [Manage dunning letters - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-dunning-letters/manage-dunning-letters-overview/). To inform your customers of new invoices, their balance, and the expiration of a credit card, you can configure multiple mailings. The list of predefined mailings is available on the **Mailing settings** tab of the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. On this tab, you can modify the list of mailings as it to be copied to a new customer class and configure the basic settings of each mailing. Also, if the Inventory workspace is activated, the mailings listed on the **Mailing settings** tab of the [Sales order preferences (SO101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-order-preferences-so101000/) window are also copied to a new customer class. For details on configuring mailings, see [Manage mailings - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-mailings/manage-mailings-overview/). ## Proceeding with customer account setup Now that you have finished with the preliminary configuration steps, you can easily and efficiently create customer accounts, as described in [About customer account setup](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/about-customer-account-setup/).

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

Add customer locations /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/preliminary-configuration/add-customer-locations section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Add customer locations 1. Go to the [Customer locations (CR303010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-locations-cr303010/) window. 1. Click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select the customer you want to add a location for. The main location defined in the **Customers** window is displayed in the window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) to add a new location for this customer. 1. In the **Location ID** field, enter an ID for the new location. You can use both letters and numbers. 1. On the **General information** tab, deselect the **Same as main** check boxes if you want to enter new information in the **Location contact** and the **Location address** sections. 1. Fill in the other optional fields that you want to use for this specific location. 1. Go to the **General ledger accounts** tab and specify the general ledger accounts if necessary. Deselect the **Same as default location** check box to change the accounts. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

Manage parent-child relationship /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-parent-child-relationship section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage parent-child relationship Manage parent-child relationships - overview /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-parent-child-relationship/manage-parent-child-relationships-overview page If your company deals with companies with franchises or multiple branches, you might want to configure parent-child relationships in Visma Net between the customer accounts that represent these companies. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage parent-child relationships - overview If your company deals with companies with franchises or multiple branches, you might want to configure parent-child relationships in Visma Net between the customer accounts that represent these companies. You can use this functionality if **Parent-child customer relationship** is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. In the following topics, you will read about how to set up and maintain parent-child relationships between customer accounts. ## Topics + [About setting up parent-child relationships](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-parent-child-relationship/about-setting-up-parent-child-relationships/) + [About balance consolidation](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-parent-child-relationship/about-balance-consolidation/) + [About credit policy application](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-parent-child-relationship/about-credit-policy-application/) + [About removing relationships](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-parent-child-relationship/about-removing-relationships/)

Related pages

Concepts

About setting up parent-child relationships /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-parent-child-relationship/about-setting-up-parent-child-relationships page In this topic, you will read about how to set up a parent-child relationship between customer accounts when you create these accounts. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About setting up parent-child relationships In this topic, you will read about how to set up a parent-child relationship between customer accounts when you create these accounts. You can use this functionality if **Parent-child customer relationship** is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. ## Set up the parent-child relationship Go to the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window, and perform the following steps in order to configure parent-child relations between customer accounts that you are defining: 1. Set up a customer account that represents the parent company (which the organisation might refer to as the head office or main branch). In the **Parent info** section on the **Invoice settings** tab, you specify whether you need the companies to have a consolidated balance, consolidated statements, and a shared credit policy by selecting or clearing the **Consolidate balance**, **Consolidate statements**, and **Share credit policy** check boxes. The values of these check boxes will provide the default values for the corresponding check boxes of the child customer accounts. 1. Set up customer accounts that represent child companies, which are generally subsidiaries that are controlled by the parent company. During setup, for each child company, you specify the parent account in the **Parent account** field. In the **Parent info** section of the **Invoice settings** tab, you adjust the values of the **Consolidate balance**, **Consolidate statements**, and **Share credit policy** check boxes, if needed. Additionally, you can select **Consolidate invoices** if you want invoices to be sent to the parent. > [!NOTE] > Only a two-level hierarchy is supported. With the exception of the details described above, the setup of parent and child customer accounts does not differ from the setup of independent customer accounts. Also, you can set up a parent-child relationship between existing customer accounts. For each parent account, you can view the list of its child accounts on the **Child accounts** tab of the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

About balance consolidation /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-parent-child-relationship/about-balance-consolidation page The balances of child customer accounts can be included in the balance of the parent customer account. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About balance consolidation The balances of child customer accounts can be included in the balance of the parent customer account. The balances of child customer accounts can be included in the balance of the parent customer account. To set this up, for the child accounts whose open documents can be paid with the payments of their parent, you select the **Consolidate balance** check box in the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window (in the **Parent info** section of the **Invoicing settings** tab). With this check box selected, the system includes the balances of child accounts in the parent balance; you can view this consolidated balance in the **Consolidated balance** box in the top part of the corresponding parent account. In this topic, you will read about how payment application is handled for the parent and child customer accounts and what reports you can use to analyse financial data. ## Payment application With the parent-child relationship between customer accounts set up and the **Consolidate balance** check box selected for child accounts, when you create a payment or a prepayment for the parent account in the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window, you can apply this payment to the open documents of both the child accounts and the parent account. On the **Documents to apply** tab of the window, you can add rows with the open documents of a child account or click the **Load documents** button on the table toolbar. When you click the button, the **Load options** dialog box opens; in the **Include child documents** field, you can select the types of documents to be loaded. If the **Auto-apply payments** check box is selected for the parent account on the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window and no documents for application are specified for the payment on the **Documents to apply** tab of the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window, the system will automatically apply the payment to the oldest open documents (if any) of the parent account only. If you want the system to include open documents of child accounts in the process of automatic payment application, you can use the [Apply payments automatically (AR506000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/apply-payments-automatically-ar506000/) mass-processing window. In this window, in the **Include child documents** field, you can select the types of open documents of child accounts that should be included in the process of automatic payment application. The system will process first the open documents of the child accounts and then the open documents of the parent account. Also, you can apply open payments, prepayments, and credit memos of the parent account while you are creating an invoice or debit memo for the child account on the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window. If you plan to clear the **Consolidate balance** check box for a child account for which it has been selected, first make sure that all applications of a parent payment to a child document are released or reversed (if needed). You cannot save changes in the parent-child relationship if any applications of this type are not released. However, you can reverse the application of a parent payment to child invoice or memo after the relationship was changed or removed. ## Generation of consolidated reports With the **Parent-child customer relationship** functionality enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window, you can generate reports that group child accounts (or their documents) under the parent account and show individual account balances along with the consolidated balance of the group. > [!NOTE] > Only child accounts that have the **Consolidate balance** check box selected are grouped under their parent account, and their balances are consolidated with the parent balance. The following Visma Net reports have a check box (either **Group by parent account** or **Consolidate data by parent account** ) that you select to generate reports regarding parent-child relations: + [Balance by general ledger account (AR632000) report](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/balance-by-general-ledger-account-ar632000/) + [Balance by customer (AR632500) report](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/balance-by-customer-ar632500/) + [Balance by customer (currency) (AR633000) report](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/balance-by-customer-currency-ar633000/) + [Aged past due (AR631000) report](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/aged-past-due-ar631000/) + [Aged past due (currency) (AR631100) report](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/aged-past-due-currency-ar631100/) + [Aged outstanding (AR631500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/aged-outstanding-ar631500/) + [Aged outstanding (currency) (AR631600) report](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/aged-outstanding-currency-ar631600/) + [Aged period sensitive (AR630500) report](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/aged-period-sensitive-ar630500/)

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

About credit policy application /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-parent-child-relationship/about-credit-policy-application page You can decide whether to apply the credit policy of the parent account to the new sales orders and invoices of the child accounts. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About credit policy application You can decide whether to apply the credit policy of the parent account to the new sales orders and invoices of the child accounts. You can decide whether to apply the credit policy of the parent account to the new sales orders and invoices of the child accounts. The credit policy is a combination of the credit management tools configured for a customer account in Visma Net. For details, see: [Manage credit policy - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/manage-credit-policy-overview/). In this topic, you will read about managing credit policy for the parent and child customer accounts. ## Credit policy application For a child customer account, if you have selected the **Consolidate balance** check box on the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window (in the **Parent info** section of the **Invoicing settings** tab), the **Share credit policy** check box becomes available for selection on this window. If you select the **Share credit policy** check box for the child account, the credit policy configured for its parent account will be applied to the new sales orders and invoices of the child accounts. With the **Share credit policy** check box selected for a child account, the settings under the **Credit verification rules** section on the **General information** tab of the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window are unavailable and are filled with the corresponding values configured for the parent account. If you change the credit policy configuration for the parent account, the system will reflect these changed settings in its child accounts that share the credit policy. > [!NOTE] > If you clear the **Share credit policy** check box for a child account, the settings under the **Credit verification rules** section of this window become available but retain their values, except for **Credit limit**, which is set to zero. ## Credit hold application With the **Share credit policy** check box selected for a child account, you cannot put the child account on credit hold individually. If you change the status of the parent account to **Credit hold**, the system will put on credit hold all child accounts that share a credit policy with the parent account. > [!NOTE] > If a child account has had the **Hold** or **Inactive** status, its status remains unchanged when you put on credit hold its parent account. Releasing related accounts from credit hold works similarly to putting these accounts on credit hold. If you release a parent account from credit hold, its child accounts that have the **Share credit policy** check box selected are released from the credit hold as well. If you use the [Manage credit holds (AR523000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/manage-credit-holds-ar523000/) window to put an account on credit hold, the list of accounts on this window will not include child accounts with the **Share credit policy** check box selected. ## Generation of consolidated statements Customers that have a multi-branch hierarchy may want to receive consolidated statements. To arrange that, for child accounts, you select the **Consolidate statements** check box in the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window (in the **Parent info** section on the **Invoicing settings** tab). For the child accounts, the settings related to sending the statements (under the **Print and e-mail settings** section on the **Invoicing settings** tab of the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window) are unavailable and are filled with the corresponding values configured for the parent account. > [!NOTE] > If you clear the **Consolidate statements** check box for a child account, the settings related to sending the statements become available but retain their values. With this configuration, only the parent account is available for statement generation in the [Prepare statements (AR503000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/prepare-statements-ar503000/) window. The system uses the statement cycle assigned to the parent account. When you are preparing statements for the parent account, the system includes all documents of child accounts in the statement. The documents in the statement are grouped by customer account. If the type of the statement is **Open items**, the system will also print the corresponding subtotal balances for each account involved. ## Generation of consolidated dunning letters If the **Dunning letter management** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window, the system consolidates the overdue documents of a parent account and its child accounts that have the **Share credit policy** check box selected. The system sends the dunning letters to the parent account contact. For the child accounts, the settings related to sending the dunning letters (under the **Print and e-mail settings** section on the **Invoicing settings** tab of the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window) are unavailable and are filled with the corresponding values configured for the parent account. > [!NOTE] > If you clear the **Share credit policy** check box for a child account, the settings related to sending the dunning letters become available but retain their values. With this configuration, only the parent account is available for dunning letter generation in the [Prepare dunning letters (AR521000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/prepare-dunning-letters-ar521000/) window. The system uses the parent-child group data to generate dunning letters. The documents in the dunning letter are grouped by customer account. > [!NOTE] > The calculation of overdue charges (if configured) is performed for each customer account individually, regardless of the configuration of parent and child accounts. Separate overdue charge documents are issued to customer accounts.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

About removing relationships /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-parent-child-relationship/about-removing-relationships page The structure of companies may change over the time, and such changes need to be reflected in the customer accounts in the system. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About removing relationships The structure of companies may change over the time, and such changes need to be reflected in the customer accounts in the system. In this topic, you will read about how to remove parent-child relationships and how this will affect the accounts and documents of the involved customers. ## Delete the relationship You can delete the parent-child relationship between customer accounts at any time. For the child customer account for which you want to sever this relationship, you delete the account selected in the **Parent account** field in the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window (in the **Parent info** section on the **Invoicing settings** tab) and save your changes; this removes the relationship. > [!NOTE] > Before you delete the relationship, make sure that all payment applications of a parent payment to a child document are released or reversed (if needed). You cannot save changes in the parent-child relationship if any applications of this type are not released. However, you can reverse the application of a parent payment to child invoice or memo after the relationship was changed or removed. ## Impact on the accounts involved The deletion of the relationship affects the following aspects of the customer accounts involved: Balance : The balance of the former child account remains equal to the total of its open documents. The consolidated balance of the parent account is decreased by the amount of the balance of the former child account. Status : The status of child accounts is not changed. For example: If the parent account was placed on credit hold, all its child accounts that shared a credit policy were on credit hold as well. After the deletion of the relationship, you should make any needed adjustments to the status of each customer account. Credit policy : If the credit policy was shared, the settings under the **Credit verification rules** section on the **General settings** tab of the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window become available for the child accounts but retain their values, except for **Credit limit**, which is set to zero. Statements : The statements are prepared for each account individually according to the statement cycle set for an account. Dunning letters : The dunning level of the child documents is set to zero and when preparing dunning letters, the system treats the child accounts as accounts that have never been processed before. The dunning level of the parent documents is not changed. Documents for which the **Revoked** check box has been selected (both of parent and child accounts) remain marked as revoked. Sending of documents : The settings under the **Print and email settings** section on the **Invoicing settings** tab of the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window become available for the child accounts but retain their values. Invoice information : If you had selected that the child customer's invoices should be sent to the parent account, the invoice contact, address, payment terms and method will now be retrieved from the child account instead.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

Manage credit policy /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage credit policy Manage credit policy - overview /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/manage-credit-policy-overview page Businesses do not always pay their suppliers immediately for received goods or services. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage credit policy - overview Businesses do not always pay their suppliers immediately for received goods or services. Businesses do not always pay their suppliers immediately for received goods or services. To avoid running out of cash, your company may need to set up proper management of customer credit. Credit management tools may include tools for managing customer credits, tracking customers' outstanding balances, and treating bad debts. With Visma Net, you can use the following credit management tools: + **Payment terms** You configure payment terms to define documents' due dates. Payment terms may be used for giving a customer discount for early payment. For details on configuring and applying payment terms, see: [About payment terms](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/payment-terms/about-payment-terms/). + **Credit verification** You can enable a credit check process for each customer that automatically puts overdue invoices on hold and forbids the issuing of new invoices for a customer that has failed a credit check. For details on configuring and applying credit verification rules, see: [About credit verification](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/about-credit-verification/). + **Customer credit hold** You can manually put a customer on hold any time you consider it necessary. For more information, see: [About customer credit hold](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/about-customer-credit-hold/). + **Overdue charges** You can configure additional charges to be applied to outstanding balances of customers who are consistently paying too late or not paying in full. For details on configuring and applying overdue charges, see: [About overdue charges](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/overdue-charges/about-overdue-charges/). + **Statement cycles** You can configure customer statement cycles to provide customers with information about their balances with your organisation. For details, see: [Statement cycles - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/statement-cycles/statement-cycles-overview/). + **Dunning letters** You can configure a series of dunning letters to remind customers about overdue invoices. For details on configuring customer notifications, see: [Manage dunning letters - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-dunning-letters/manage-dunning-letters-overview/). + **Direct write-off method** You can use the direct write-off method to handle expenses that are required to run the business or that have been incurred in the operation of the business. For details on configuring and using direct write-offs, see: [Write-off methods - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/write-off-methods/write-off-methods-overview/). > [!NOTE] > We do not recommend that you use the direct write-off method for handling bad debts as it often violates the matching principle of accounting because it recognises bad debt expense that is partly related to a previous accounting period. + **Allowance method** You can handle bad debts by using the allowance method. The allowance method is a better alternative to the direct write-off method because it follows the matching principle of accounting. For details on configuring and using allowance method, see: [Write-off methods - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/write-off-methods/write-off-methods-overview/). The following topics will help you to configure and use the credit management tools of your choice. ## Topics + [About payment terms](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/payment-terms/about-payment-terms/) + [About credit verification](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/about-credit-verification/) + [About customer credit hold](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/about-customer-credit-hold/) + [About overdue charges](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/overdue-charges/about-overdue-charges/) + [Statement cycles - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/statement-cycles/statement-cycles-overview/) + [Write-off methods - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/write-off-methods/write-off-methods-overview/)

Related pages

Concepts

About customer credit hold /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/about-customer-credit-hold page You may encounter an unfortunate situation when a customer has not paid for a long time and has not responded to any inquiries or requests for payment. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About customer credit hold You may encounter an unfortunate situation when a customer has not paid for a long time and has not responded to any inquiries or requests for payment. You might have notified the customer about due invoices with a series of dunning letters or in some other way. You can put a hold on the customer's credit until the issue is resolved. An employee who is authorised to manage customer credit can apply credit holds to the customers involved by using the [Manage credit holds (AR523000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/manage-credit-holds-ar523000/) window. Once a credit hold has been applied to a customer account, no new sales orders or invoices can be created for this customer. An authorised user can manually release a customer from credit hold by changing the customer status from **Credit hold** to **Active**. To do this, the authorised user's role should have access to the **Status** field of the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

Payment terms /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/payment-terms section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Payment terms About payment terms /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/payment-terms/about-payment-terms page Payment terms define the specific details of the seller's payment requirements that the buyer should meet in order to purchase goods on credit. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About payment terms Payment terms define the specific details of the seller's payment requirements that the buyer should meet in order to purchase goods on credit. Payment terms define the specific details of the seller's payment requirements that the buyer should meet in order to purchase goods on credit. These details include the date when a payment should be made, the conditions for cash discounts when any outstanding balance is paid early, and the setting that determines whether an outstanding balance is to be paid as a single instalment or in multiple instalments. In this topic, you will read about how to set up payment terms and assign them to business accounts (customers and suppliers), and how to configure instalment buying and cash discount offering. Also, the topic explains the details of calculating the payment periods and cash discount periods. ## Plan payment terms You need to plan the payment terms your company offers to customers, as well as outline the details of the payment terms offered to your company by suppliers, which are already defined, in preparation for entering them into the system. We recommend that you decide on the following points when you plan each set of payment terms: + The length of the payment period and the ways its due date is calculated. + The cash discount conditions and the way they are affected by the length of the payment period. + The number of instalments and the instalment payment schedule (if the company offers instalment buying). > [!NOTE] > You can configure a cash discount for only a single-instalment payment. If your company has been operating for some time, you already have established payment terms. We recommend that you compare the payment terms your company offers to customers and the payment terms offered to your company by suppliers, because in Visma Net, you can use the same payment terms for both customer payments and payments to suppliers, if needed. ## Set up payment terms These are the general steps you need to perform to create a set of payment terms by using the [Payment terms (CS206500)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/payment-terms-cs206500/) window: 1. You specify a descriptive ID for the payment terms you want to configure. The length of an ID can be up to 10 Unicode symbols. > [!NOTE] > We do not recommend using any special symbols in the IDs of entities. 1. You define the scope of the payment terms: whether they apply to only customer documents, only supplier documents, or both types of documents. 1. You configure how a due date is calculated for a document. 1. Optional: You configure the cash discount conditions. 1. Optional: If needed, you change the default instalment type of payment terms, which is **Single**, to **Multiple** and define the number of instalments and their payment schedule. ## Configure the assignment of payment terms By using the payment terms that have been manually or automatically assigned to a document, the system calculates the due date of the document. If a cash discount is applied, the system also calculates the end date of the cash discount period and the cash discount amount for the document. In Visma Net, you can assign payment terms to the following types of documents: + Customer ledger: Invoices, debit notes, and overdue charges + Supplier ledger: Purchase invoices and credit adjustments To make the system automatically assign payment terms to customer documents, you assign the payment terms to customer classes, and by default, a customer is assigned the payment terms specified for the customer class it belongs to. You can manually specify the payment terms for each customer (or override the class setting) by using the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window. When you create a document and select a customer, the system automatically associates with the document the payment terms specified for the customer. (The payment terms for the document can also be overridden.) Automatic assignment of payment terms to supplier documents is configured similarly to automatic assignment of payment terms to customer documents, with terms being assigned to supplier classes. You also can manually specify or change the payment terms for each supplier by using the [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) window. ## Set up due date calculation Certain settings specified for the payment terms in the [Payment terms (CS206500)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/payment-terms-cs206500/) window determine the payment period: the time interval that starts when a customer purchases a product or a service (on the document date) and ends when the customer's payment is due. In Visma Net, you do not specify the length of the payment period; you instead specify the way the document due date will be calculated based on the date of the document's creation. By specifying the appropriate **Due date type** setting in the [Payment terms (CS206500)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/payment-terms-cs206500/) window, you can calculate the due date based on one of the following factors: + **A day in a month** (the **Day of next Month**, **End of month**, **End of next month**, and **Day of the month** options): You can specify a day of the month (in the **Due day 1** field) to be the due date for all documents issued before this day, or the end of the current or next month can be the due date. + **A fixed number of days** (the **Fixed number of days** and **Fixed number of days starting next month** options): You can specify the period of time (in the **Due day 1** field) that is used to calculate the due date, based on the document date or the first day of the next month. (To determine the due date of the document, the system adds the specified number of days to either the document date or the first day of the next month.) + **Multiple custom dates** (the **Custom** option): With this option selected, you can set two time intervals for the document dates and specify a due date for each interval. The parameters for configuring the first interval are **Due day 1**, **Day from 1**, and **Day to 1**, and the parameters for configuring the second interval are **Due day 2**, **Day from 2**, and **Day to 2**. The following rules are applied to each set of days: + The end day should be greater than the start day. + If the value of the **Due day N** parameter is greater than (or equal to) the value of the **Day to N** parameter, the due date will be in the current month. + If the value of the **Due day N** parameter is less than the value of the **Day to N** parameter, the due date will be in the next month. > [!NOTE] > **Attention**: > If a document date doesn't match either interval, the due date > won't be calculated. > For example: If a document is dated 1/31/2018 and the intervals > are 1–15 and 16–30, then the due date won't be calculated for the > document. For more examples of the ways a payment period is calculated, see: [Examples of credit and cash discount periods.](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/payment-terms/examples-of-credit-and-cash-discount-periods/) ## Configure instalment payments Outstanding balances can be paid in a single instalment or multiple instalments. To configure instalment payments, select the **Multiple** option in the **Instalment type** list. By default, the instalment type for new payment terms is **Single**. You then specify the number of instalments, the frequency or schedule, and the instalment method. You can configure either an instalment frequency or an instalment schedule. To configure a frequency, in the **Instalment frequency** field, you can select the interval between instalments. The following payment frequency options are available: Weekly : Instalments will be one week apart. Monthly : Instalments will be one month apart. Semi-monthly : Instalments will be a half a month apart. To determine how the amounts of instalments are calculated for the selected frequency, select one of these options in the **Instalment method** list: Equal parts : The document total amount (with all the applicable taxes added) is divided into equal parts. VAT in first instalment : The amount of the document (the total before VAT) is divided into equal parts, and the VAT amount is added to the first instalment. To configure an instalment schedule, you leave the **Instalment frequency** field blank and select the **Split by percent in table** instalment method. The instalment amounts are calculated according to the percentages that you specify for each instalment in the **Instalments schedule** table. For each instalment, you can specify the number of days from the due date and the percent of the total document amount. The first instalment (which is due on the due date) should have **0** in the **Day** column, and other instalments' dates are specified with the respect to the due date. ## Configure a cash discount You can configure a cash discount for only single-instalment payment terms. The cash discount is available for a time interval (that is, the cash discount period) that starts on the document date and ends in the number of days specified in the **Cash discount settings** section. The cash discount period falls within the payment period. If custom due dates are set, discount settings are applied to both intervals. The length of the cash discount period is defined by the following parameters: Discount type : This parameter defines the method of calculating the end date of the discount period (which is similar to the method of calculating the due date). The option you select in the **Due date type** field determines the options available for selection in the **Discount type** field. If the **End of month** option is selected in the **Due date type** field, configuration of a cash discount is not available. Discount day : This parameter determines the number of days or the particular day of the month, depending on the method selected in the **Discount type** field. For examples of the ways a cash discount period is calculated, see [Examples of credit and cash discount periods.](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/payment-terms/examples-of-credit-and-cash-discount-periods/) A cash discount is an amount that is calculated by applying the percent specified in the **Discount %** field to the total amount of the document. When you enter a payment for the document during the cash discount period, the system deducts the calculated discount amount from the total amount of the document and generates the payment for the amount or the result of the deduction. If a cash discount is applied to a document, it may or may not affect how the system calculates the taxable amount of a document. You may indicate to the system how to calculate the taxable amount for a VAT application in the [VAT (TX205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/vat-tx205000/) window. For details about how the system calculates a taxable amount of a document if a cash discount should be applied to the document, see: [About VAT settings.](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/manage-taxes/about-vat-settings/)

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Examples of credit and cash discount periods /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/payment-terms/examples-of-credit-and-cash-discount-periods section In this topic, you can find examples that demonstrate how the credit period and cash discount period are calculated based on the calculation method of the applicable payment terms. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Examples of credit and cash discount periods In this topic, you can find examples that demonstrate how the credit period and cash discount period are calculated based on the calculation method of the applicable payment terms. ## Structure of these examples Each section describes a particular method of calculating the length of credit period and discount period defined by the payment terms. You select the calculation method in the **Due date type** field in the [Payment terms (CS206500)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/payment-terms-cs206500/) window. In each section, the first column of the table lists the options that you can select in the **Discount type** field, based on the method selected for due date calculation. The second column contains sample settings for each option that you could use to configure the payment terms in the [Payment terms (CS206500)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/payment-terms-cs206500/) window, as well as the document date from the Visma Net window used to create the document. The third column displays the resulting payment period and cash discount period for the document date specified in the sample settings. This column includes a diagram that shows the resulting credit period and cash discount period. The legend of the diagram is as follows: + ![AR_CrT_StartEnd](/media/visma-net-erp/AR_CrT_StartEnd.png): Starting and ending dates of the credit period + ![AR_CrT_CreditPeriodDay](/media/visma-net-erp/AR_CrT_CreditPeriodDay.png): Days of the credit period + ![AR_CrT_DiscountPeriodDay](/media/visma-net-erp/AR_CrT_DiscountPeriodDay.png): Days of the cash discount period ## Due date type: Fixed number of days With the **Fixed number of days** calculation method, the payment is due a fixed number of days after the sale or purchase. You specify the number of days in **Due day 1**. |Discount type|Sample settings|Result| |---|---|---| |**Fixed number of days**|In the Payment terms window: + **Due day 1**: **30** + **Discount day**: **7** In the document creation window: + **Document date**: **1/1/2021**|Credit period: 1/1/2021–1/31/2021 Cash discount period: 1/1/2021–1/8/2021 ![AR_CrT_FixedNDays](/media/visma-net-erp/AR_CrT_FixedNDays.png)| ## Due date type: Day of next month With the **Day of next month** calculation method, the payment is due on a particular day of the next calendar month after the month of the document date. You specify the day in **Due day 1**. In this example, the value of the **Due day 1** parameter is greater than the number of days in the next month (February); therefore, the system uses the last date in the next month for the calculation of the credit period. |Discount type|Sample settings|Result| |---|---|---| |**Day of next month**|In the Payment terms window: + **Due day 1**: **30** + **Discount day**: **7** In the document creation window: + **Document date**: **1/1/2021**|Credit period: 1/1/2021–2/29/2021 Cash discount period: 1/1/2021–2/7/2021 ![AR_CrT_DayNextMonth_1](/media/visma-net-erp/AR_CrT_DayNextMonth_1.png)| |**End of month**|In the Payment terms window: + **Due day 1**: **30** + **Discount day**: **N/A** In the document creation window: + **Document date**: **1/1/2021**|Credit period: 1/1/2021–2/29/2021 Cash discount period: 1/1/2021–1/31/2021 ![AR_CrT_DNM_EOM](/media/visma-net-erp/AR_CrT_DNM_EOM.png)| |**Day of the month**|In the Payment terms window: + **Due day 1**: **30** + **Discount day**: **7** In the document creation window: + **Document date**: **1/1/2021**|Credit period: 1/1/2021–2/29/2021 Cash discount period: 1/1/2021–1/7/2021 ![AR_CrT_DNM_DoM](/media/visma-net-erp/AR_CrT_DNM_DoM.png)| ## Due date type: End of next month With the **End of next month** calculation method, the payment is due at the end of the next calendar month after the month of the document date. For this calculation method, note that the credit and cash discount periods are equal if the **End of next month** option is selected in the **Discount type** field. |Discount type|Sample settings|Results| |---|---|---| |**Day of next month**|In the Payment terms window: + **Due day 1**: **N/A** + **Discount day**: **7** in the document creation window: + **Document date**: **1/1/2021**|Credit period: 1/1/2021–2/29/2021 Cash discount period: 1/1/2021–2/7/2021 ![AR_CrT_DayNextMonth_1](/media/visma-net-erp/AR_CrT_DayNextMonth_1.png)| |**End of month**|In the Payment terms window: + **Due day 1**: **N/A** + **Discount day**: **N/A** In the document creation window: + **Document date**: **1/1/2021**|Credit period: 1/1/2021–2/29/2021 Cash discount period: 1/1/2021–1/31/2021 ![AR_CrT_DNM_EOM](/media/visma-net-erp/AR_CrT_DNM_EOM.png)| |**End of next month**|In the Payment terms window: + **Due day 1**: **N/A** + **Discount day**: **N/A** In the document creation window: + **Document date**: **1/1/2021**|Credit period: 1/1/2021–2/29/2021 Cash discount period: 1/1/2021–2/29/2021 ![AR_CrT_ENM_ENM](/media/visma-net-erp/AR_CrT_ENM_ENM.png)| |**Day of the month**|In the Payment terms window: + **Due day 1**: **N/A** + **Discount day**: **7** In the document creation window: + **Document date**: **1/1/2021**|Credit period: 1/1/2021–2/29/2021 Cash discount period: 1/1/2021–1/7/2021 ![AR_CrT_DNM_DoM](/media/visma-net-erp/AR_CrT_DNM_DoM.png)| ## Due date type: Day of the month With the **Day of the month** calculation method, the payment is due on a particular day of the current calendar month, if the invoice is issued before this day. If the invoice is issued after this Day of the current calendar month, then the payment is due on the day of the next calendar month. You specify the day in **Due day 1**. |Discount type|Sample settings|Result| |---|---|---| |**Day of the month**|In the Payment terms window: + **Due day 1**: **30** + **Discount day**: **7** In the document creation window: + **Document date**: **1/1/2021**|Credit period: 1/1/2021–1/30/2021 Cash discount period: 1/1/2021–1/7/2021 ![AR_CrT_DOM_DOM](/media/visma-net-erp/AR_CrT_DOM_DOM.png)| ## Due date type: Fixed number of days starting next month With the **Fixed number of days starting next month** calculation method, the payment is due a fixed number of days starting the first day of the next calendar month after a sale or purchase. You specify the number of days in **Due day 1**. |Discount type|Sample settings|Result| |---|---|---| |**Fixed number of days starting next month**|In the Payment terms window: + **Due day 1**: **30** + **Discount day**: **7** In the document creation window: + **Document date**: **1/1/2021**|Credit period: 1/1/2021–3/2/2021 Cash discount period: 1/1/2021–2/8/2021 ![AR_CrT_FNDNM_FNDNM](/media/visma-net-erp/AR_CrT_FNDNM_FNDNM.png)| ## Due date type: Custom With the **Custom** calculation method, you set two time intervals for the document dates and specify a due date for each interval. The parameters for configuring the first interval are **Due day 1**, **Day from 1**, and **Day to 1**, and the parameters for configuring the second interval are **Due day 2**, **Day from 2**, and **Day to 2**. The sample settings here define the following intervals: 1–15 and 16–31. The due date for the first interval is the 10th of the next month for documents issued between day 1 and day 15 of the current month. The due date for the second interval is the 25th of the next month for documents issued between day 16 and day 31 of the current month. For this calculation method, note that the system shortens the cash discount period to be equal to the credit period if the **End of next month** option is selected as the **Discount type**. |Discount type|Sample settings|Results| |---|---|---| |**Day of next month**|In the Payment terms window: Interval 1: + **Due day 1**: **10** + **Day from 1**: **1** + **Day to 1**: **15** Interval 2: + **Due day 2**: **25** + **Day from 2**: **16** + **Day to 2**: **31** **Discount day**: **7** In the document creation window: + **Document 1 date**: **1/1/2021** + **Document 2 date**: **1/16/2021**|### Document 1 Credit period: 1/1/2021–2/10/2021 Cash discount period: 1/1/2021–2/7/2021 ![AR_CrT_Custom_DNM](/media/visma-net-erp/AR_CrT_Custom_DNM.png) ### Document 2 Credit period: 1/16/2021–2/25/2021 Cash discount period: 1/16/2021–2/7/2021 ![AR_CrT_Custom_DNM_2](/media/visma-net-erp/AR_CrT_Custom_DNM_2.png)| |**Fixed number of days**|In the Payment terms window: Interval 1: + **Due day 1**: **10** + **Day from 1**: **1** + **Day to 1**: **15** Interval 2: + **Due day 2**: **25** + **Day from 2**: **16** + **Day to 2**: **31** **Discount day**: **7** In the document creation window: + **Document 1 date**: **1/1/2021** + **Document 2 date**: **1/16/2021**|### Document 1 Credit period: 1/1/2021–2/10/2021 Cash discount period: 1/1/2021–1/8/2021 ![AR_CrT_Custom_FND_1](/media/visma-net-erp/AR_CrT_Custom_FND_1.png) ### Document 2 Credit period: 1/16/2021–2/25/2021 Cash discount period: 1/16/2021–1/23/2021 ![AR_CrT_Custom_FND_2](/media/visma-net-erp/AR_CrT_Custom_FND_2.png)| |**End of month**|In the Payment terms window: Interval 1: + **Due day 1**: **10** + **Day from 1**: **1** + **Day to 1**: **15** Interval 2: + **Due day 2**: **25** + **Day from 2**: **16** + **Day to 2**: **31** **Discount day**: **N/A** In the document creation window: + **Document 1 date**: **1/1/2021** + **Document 2 date**: **1/16/2021**|### Document 1 Credit period: 1/1/2021–2/10/2021 Cash discount period: 1/1/2021–1/31/2021 ![AR_CrT_Custom_EOM_1](/media/visma-net-erp/AR_CrT_Custom_EOM_1.png) ### Document 2 Credit period: 1/16/2021–2/25/2021 Cash discount period: 1/16/2021–1/31/2021 ![AR_CrT_Custom_EOM_2](/media/visma-net-erp/AR_CrT_Custom_EOM_2.png)| |**End of next month**|In the Payment terms window: Interval 1: + **Due day 1**: **10** + **Day from 1**: **1** + **Day to 1**: **15** Interval 2: + **Due day 2**: **25** + **Day from 2**: **16** + **Day to 2**: **31** **Discount day**: **N/A** In the document creation window: + **Document 1 date**: **1/1/2021** + **Document 2 date**: **1/16/2021**|### Document 1 Credit period: 1/1/2021–2/10/2021 Cash discount period: 1/1/2021–2/10/2021 ![AR_CrT_Custom_ENM_1](/media/visma-net-erp/AR_CrT_Custom_ENM_1.png) ### Document 2 Credit period: 1/16/2021–2/25/2021 Cash discount period: 1/16/2021–2/25/2021 ![AR_CrT_Custom_ENM_2](/media/visma-net-erp/AR_CrT_Custom_ENM_2.png)| |**Day of the month**|In the Payment terms window: Interval 1: + **Due day 1**: **10** + **Day from 1**: **1** + **Day to 1**: **15** Interval 2: + **Due day 2**: **25** + **Day from 2**: **16** + **Day to 2**: **31** **Discount day**: **7** In the document creation window: + **Document 1 date**: **1/1/2021** + **Document 2 date**: **1/16/2021**|### Document 1 Credit period: 1/1/2021–2/10/2021 Cash discount period: 1/1/2021–1/7/2021 ![AR_CrT_Custom_DOM_1](/media/visma-net-erp/AR_CrT_Custom_DOM_1.png) ### Document 2 Credit period: 1/16/2021–2/25/2021 Cash discount period: 1/16/2021–2/7/2021 ![AR_CrT_Custom_DNM_2](/media/visma-net-erp/AR_CrT_Custom_DNM_2.png)| |**Fixed number of days starting next month**|In the Payment terms window: Interval 1: + **Due day 1**: **10** + **Day from 1**: **1** + **Day to 1**: **15** Interval 2: + **Due day 2**: **25** + **Day from 2**: **16** + **Day to 2**: **31** **Discount day**: **7** In the document creation window: + **Document 1 date**: **1/1/2021** + **Document 2 date**: **1/16/2021**|### Document 1 Credit period: 1/1/2021–2/10/2021 Cash discount period: 1/1/2021–2/8/2021 ![AR_CrT_Custom_FNODSNM_1](/media/visma-net-erp/AR_CrT_Custom_FNODSNM_1.png) ### Document 2 Credit period: 1/16/2021–2/25/2021 Cash discount period: 1/16/2021–2/8/2021 ![AR_CrT_Custom_FNDSNM_2](/media/visma-net-erp/AR_CrT_Custom_FNDSNM_2.png)|

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Configure single-instalment payment terms /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/payment-terms/configure-single-instalment-payment-terms section You use the Payment terms (CS206500) window to define each set of payment terms, including due dates and conditions for cash discounts when an outstanding balance is paid early. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Configure single-instalment payment terms You use the Payment terms (CS206500) window to define each set of payment terms, including due dates and conditions for cash discounts when an outstanding balance is paid early. For more information: [Payment terms (CS206500)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/payment-terms-cs206500/). You use the [Payment terms (CS206500)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/payment-terms-cs206500/) window to define each set of payment terms, including due dates and conditions for cash discounts when an outstanding balance is paid early. For a set of payment terms, you can specify the payment as a single instalment (described in this topic) or as multiple instalments (described in [Configure multiple-instalment payment terms](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/payment-terms/configure-multiple-instalment-credit-terms/)). 1. Go to the [Payment terms (CS206500)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/payment-terms-cs206500/) window. 1. In the **General information** section, in the **Terms ID** field, type the ID of the payment terms. The ID may contain up to ten characters. > [!NOTE] > We do not recommend using any special symbols in the IDs of entities. 1. In the **Description** field, type the description of the terms. 1. In the **Visible to** field, select the visibility of these payment terms (that is, under what circumstances they are listed and available for selection). The following options are available: + **All**: The terms can be assigned to both suppliers and customers. + **Suppliers**: The terms can be assigned to suppliers only. + **Customers**: The terms can be assigned to customers only. + **Disabled**: The terms are removed from the selection lists for both suppliers and customers. 1. In the **Instalment type** field of the **Instalments settings** section, select **Single**. 1. In the **Due date type** field of the **Due day settings** section, select the due date type. For detailed descriptions of the options, see: [About payment terms](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/payment-terms/about-payment-terms/). 1. Depending on the due date type, specify the values of the other available elements (if any) in the **Due day settings** section. 1. Optional: In the **Cash discount settings** section, enter the settings that affect the discount for an early payment: 1. In the **Discount type** field, select the discount date type. The availability of options depends on the option selected as the **Due date type**. 1. In the **Discount day** field, specify the number of days or the particular day of the month, depending on the option selected in the **Discount type** field. (This field is unavailable for some **Discount type** options.) 1. In the **Discount %** field, specify the percent to be applied to the document total amount to calculate the discount percentage. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). Configure multiple-instalment credit terms /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/payment-terms/configure-multiple-instalment-credit-terms section You use the Payment terms (CS206500) window to define each set of payment terms. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Configure multiple-instalment credit terms You use the Payment terms (CS206500) window to define each set of payment terms. For more information: [Payment terms (CS206500)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/payment-terms-cs206500/). You use the [Payment terms (CS206500)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/payment-terms-cs206500/) window to define each set of payment terms. For a set of payment terms, you can specify payment as a single instalment (described in [Configure single-instalment payment terms](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/payment-terms/configure-single-instalment-payment-terms/)) or as multiple instalments (described in this topic). 1. Go to the [Payment terms (CS206500)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/payment-terms-cs206500/) window. 1. In the **General information** section, in the **Terms ID** field, type the ID of the payment terms. The ID may contain up to ten characters. > [!NOTE] > We do not recommend using any special symbols in the IDs of entities. 1. In the **Description** field, type the description of the terms. 1. In the **Visible to** field, select the visibility of these payment terms (that is, under what circumstances they are listed and available for selection). The following options are available: + **All**: The terms can be assigned to both suppliers and customers. + **Suppliers**: The terms can be assigned to suppliers only. + **Customers**: The terms can be assigned to customers only. + **Disabled**: The terms are removed from the selection lists for both suppliers and customers. 1. In the **Instalment type** field of the **Instalments settings** section, select **Multiple**. 1. In the **Instalment method** field, select the instalment method, which determines how the system calculates the instalment amounts. 1. If you selected the **Equal parts** or **VAT in first instalment** instalment method, do the following: 1. In the **Number of instalments** field, type the number of instalments. 1. In the **Instalment frequency** field, select the instalment frequency. 1. If you selected the **Split by percent in table** method, do the following for each instalment: 1. In the **Instalments schedule** table toolbar, click **![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png)**. 1. In the **Days** column, type the number of days from the due date on which this particular instalment is due. 1. In the **Percent** column, type the percent of the instalment. 1. In the **Due date type** field of the **Due day settings** section, select the due date type. For detailed descriptions of the options, see: [About payment terms](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/payment-terms/about-payment-terms/). 1. Depending on the due date type, specify the values of the other available elements (if any) in the **Due day settings** section. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). Disable credit terms /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/payment-terms/disable-credit-terms section You use the Payment terms (CS206500) window to define each set of payment terms, as well as to change the target audience for which the terms are visible or disable a particular set of payment terms. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Disable credit terms You use the Payment terms (CS206500) window to define each set of payment terms, as well as to change the target audience for which the terms are visible or disable a particular set of payment terms. For more information: [Payment terms (CS206500)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/payment-terms-cs206500/). 1. Go to the [Payment terms (CS206500)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/payment-terms-cs206500/) window. 1. In the **General information** section, in the **Terms ID** field, select the ID of the payment terms that you want to disable. 1. In the **Visible to** field, select the **Disabled** option. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

About credit verification /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/about-credit-verification page Although accurate evaluation of customers' credit worthiness is required, employees may perform it outside of the system by gathering data on the financial health of potential customers, including their current credit score. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About credit verification Although accurate evaluation of customers' credit worthiness is required, employees may perform it outside of the system by gathering data on the financial health of potential customers, including their current credit score. In Visma Net, you can configure credit verification rules to prevent risky customers (such as those who pay too late) from accruing debts that cannot be paid. ## Credit verification application in the Customer ledger Credit verification is invoked each time a user creates an invoice for a customer in Customer ledger. When you create an invoice and the customer fails the credit check, the system checks the value of the **Hold documents on failed credit check** check box in the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window, which defines what happens to new invoices if the credit check fails: + If the check box is selected, you may save the document (invoice or debit note) with the **On hold** status, but the document cannot be released until the credit violation is resolved. + If the check box is cleared, you can save new documents with the **Balanced** status and process them regardless of the credit check result, although the system warns users about customers that have failed their credit check. ## Credit verification application in sales If the Sales workspace is enabled, credit verification is invoked each time you create an invoice that originates in the Sales workspace. When you create an invoice by using the [Customer invoices (SO303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/customer-invoices-so303000/) window and the customer fails the credit check, the system checks the value of the **Hold invoices on failed credit check** check box in the [Sales order preferences (SO101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-order-preferences-so101000/) window. This check box defines what happens to new invoices if the credit check fails: + If the check box is selected, the invoice gets the **Credit hold** status and can be saved with only the **Credit hold** or **On hold** status. For invoices with the **Credit hold** status, in the [Process sales invoices (SO505000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/process-sales-invoices-so505000/) window, you can perform the **Release from credit hold** action. When the action is completed, the system saves the invoice with the **Balanced** status and you can process it further. + If the check box is cleared, you can save new documents with the **Balanced** status and process them regardless of the credit check result, although the system warns users about customers that have failed their credit check. Credit verification is invoked for orders that are based on an order type that has the **Hold document on failed credit check** check box selected in the [Order types (SO201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/order-types-so201000/) window. For an order of such a type, when you create a sales order and try to change the status of the sales order to **Open**, the system performs a credit check of the customer, and if the customer fails the credit check, the document gets the **Credit hold** status (and can be saved with only the **Credit hold** or **On hold** status). For orders with these statuses, in the [Process orders (SO501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/process-orders-so501000/) window, you can perform the **Release from credit hold** action. This initiates credit checks for each order selected, and if the credit check is successful, the order receives a status of **Open**. ## Credit verification rule setup You can set credit verification rules for individual customers and for groups of customers. To provide default credit verification settings for groups of similar customers, you can specify credit rules by customer class in the [Customer classes (AR201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-classes-ar201000/) window. If needed, you can disable or redefine the default rules for individual customers by using the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window. In the **Credit verification** field in these windows, you can select one of the following options: Credit limit : If the customer's total outstanding balance is greater than the amount specified in the **Credit limit** field, the system generates a warning. If the value in the **Over-limit amount** field is also exceeded, the system puts new invoices on hold or issues a warning, depending on the **Hold documents on failed credit check** setting and (if the Sales workspace is used) the **Hold invoices on failed credit check** setting. Days past due : Payment terms are defined and due dates are calculated based on the customer's terms. If the customer has a document that is past due by more days than the number of days past due specified in the **Credit days past due** field, the system puts new invoices on hold or issues a warning, depending on the **Hold documents on failed credit check** setting and (if the Sales workspace is used) the **Hold invoices on failed credit check** setting. Limit and days past due : Both types of rules are applied: The customer's debt should not exceed the credit limit, and the payment date should not exceed the due date of an invoice by more days than the specified number of days past due. If either rule is violated (or both rules are), the system puts new invoices on hold or issues a warning, depending on the **Hold documents on failed credit check** setting and (if the Sales workspace is used) the **Hold invoices on failed credit check** setting. Disabled : No credit rules are to be applied. You can view the unused credit limit of a customer in the **Remaining credit limit** field on the **General settings** tab of the Customers window.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

Overdue charges /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/overdue-charges section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Overdue charges About overdue charges /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/overdue-charges/about-overdue-charges page In Visma Net, you can set up the functionality that makes the system to calculate overdue charges and show them on customer statements to inform customers of additional charges they have incurred for documents that are past due. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About overdue charges In Visma Net, you can set up the functionality that makes the system to calculate overdue charges and show them on customer statements to inform customers of additional charges they have incurred for documents that are past due. You can define multiple overdue charge codes (particular overdue charge IDs) with their own rates and other settings that affect when and how overdue charges are applied. Thus, you can adjust Visma Net to fit your existing policies and any policies you want to implement in the future. The system calculates overdue charges for all customer accounts for which overdue charges are assigned, except for accounts with the **Inactive** or **On hold** status in the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window. This functionality is available only if the **Overdue charges** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. ## Set up the overdue charge collection process You perform the following steps to configure the collection and processing of overdue charges: 1. In the [Overdue charges (AR204500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/overdue-charges-ar204500/) window, you configure at least one overdue charge code, which defines the calculation method and the criteria for collecting charges. For details, see [About overdue charge code definition](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/overdue-charges/about-overdue-charge-code-definition/). 1. In the [Customer classes (AR201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-classes-ar201000/) window, you do the following for each customer class whose customers you want to be subject to overdue charge collection: 1. Select the **Apply overdue charges** check box. 1. Associate the overdue charge code you created with the customer class by specifying the code in the **Overdue charge ID** field. When a new customer account is created in the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window and a customer class is selected, the customer class supplies the default value of the **Apply overdue charges** check box (on the **General info** tab). You can change this default value for any customer account. If the customer account is subject to overdue charge collection (that is, if this check box is selected for the customer), for all of the customer's debit documents, the system displays the **Apply overdue charge** check box on the **Financial details** tab of the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window. By default, the check box is selected, but you can clear the check box for a particular document. The following options, located in the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window, affect all customers that are subject to overdue charges and can be set to fit your company's policies: Apply payments to overdue charges first : If this check box is selected, payments will be applied first to overdue charges and only then to outstanding invoices, starting with those having the earliest dates. Payment can be applied to a particular invoice only if the **Apply payments automatically** check box is selected for a customer in the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window. Calculate on overdue charges documents : If this check box is selected, overdue charges will be calculated on overdue charge documents as well as on invoices; thus, the amount of overdue charges compounds. After configuration is done, you use the [Calculate overdue charges (AR507000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/calculate-overdue-charges-ar507000/) window to process the overdue documents of customer accounts that are associated with the statement cycle you select in this window. For details, see [Calculate overdue charges](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/overdue-charges/calculate-overdue-charges/). ## Set up the calculation of overdue charges by statement cycle By default, the system uses the overdue charge code specified in the applicable customer class to calculate overdue charges. Alternatively, you can indicate to the system that the code should be taken from the applicable statement cycle to calculate charges. Customer accounts are initially assigned the statement cycle, if any, specified for their customer class. But specifying a statement cycle in a customer class is not mandatory, as it is for a customer account. Additionally, for each customer, you may override the statement cycle that was assigned by default. Therefore, customer accounts within the same customer class may have different statement cycles. You perform the following steps to set up overdue charge calculation by using the code specified in the statement cycle: 1. In the [Statement cycles (AR202800)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/statement-cycles-ar202800/) window, you specify an overdue charge code for each statement cycle used in the system. You may associate different codes with different statement cycles or use the same code for all statement cycles. 1. In the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window, you select the **Set default overdue charges by statement cycle** check box, to indicate to the system that the source of the overdue charge code is the statement cycle of the customer account. After you have performed these configuration steps, the system will use the overdue charge code assigned to the applicable statement cycle to calculate overdue charges for customers and documents included in the charge collection process. ## Process overdue documents You process the calculation of the overdue charges for the overdue documents (that is, invoices and debit notes) in the [Calculate overdue charges (AR507000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/calculate-overdue-charges-ar507000/) window. In this window, once you specify the criteria in the selection area, the system displays the documents that comply with the following requirements: + The customer of the document is subject to overdue charges or the **Apply overdue charges** check box is selected for the customer account in the **General info** tab of the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window. + The document is subject to overdue charges or the **Apply overdue charge** check box is selected for the document on the **Financial details** tab of the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window. To run the calculation process, you click **Calculate** on the window toolbar. If the **Calculate on overdue charges documents** check box is cleared in the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window, the system calculates simple charges by doing the following: + Checking whether an invoice or a debit note is past due by using the associated credit terms + Calculating the charges for the days past due (if there are no previous overdue charges for the document) + Calculating the charges since the date of the last overdue charges (if overdue charges have been recorded for the document) After the calculation is done, the system displays the list of overdue documents with the relevant details for each document, including the amounts of calculated overdue charges. You review the calculation results and process either the overdue documents you select (by using the unlabelled check boxes) or all of the documents by clicking either **Process** or **Process all** in the window toolbar. The result of processing is a customer ledger document of the **Overdue charge** type with the **Balanced** status (or the **On hold** status if **Hold documents on entry** is selected in the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window). If the system finds multiple overdue documents for the same customer account, it creates for this customer one document of the **Overdue charge** type that lists the charge amounts for each invoice. You further process this document of the **Overdue charge** type by using the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window. If the **Calculate on overdue charges documents** check box is selected in the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window, the system searches for documents of the **Overdue charge** type as well and calculates charge amounts the same way as it does for the invoices and debit notes. ## Release documents of the Overdue charge type You release a document of the **Overdue charge** type by using the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window. When you release an overdue document, the system generates a batch with the general ledger transactions. One transaction debits the customer ledger account referred to in the original document (which is usually the default customer ledger account for the customer), and the other transaction credits the Overdue charges account specified in the [Overdue charges (AR204500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/overdue-charges-ar204500/) window for that charge, as shown in the following table. |Account|Debit|Credit| |---|---|---| |Customer ledger account|Amount|0.0| |Overdue charges account|0.0|Amount| If the system finds an unreleased overdue charge document for an overdue document (among other overdue documents of the particular customer), this document is marked with an error and no new overdue charge document is created for overdue documents of this customer account. You can select this document and click **View last charge** to view and release the existing overdue charge document. Then you can calculate and process overdue charges for overdue documents of this customer account again. Overdue charges may be numbered differently from invoices or notes. VAT are not calculated on overdue charges, and discounts are not applicable to overdue charges. ## Exclude a customer or a document from the charge collection process To exclude a customer account from the charge collection process, you clear the **Apply overdue charges** check box for the customer account on the **General info** tab of the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window. To exclude a particular document from the process, you clear the **Apply overdue charge** check box for the document on the **Financial details** tab of the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window. Note: This check box is displayed for the document only if the customer of the document is included in the charge collection process. About overdue charge code definition /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/overdue-charges/about-overdue-charge-code-definition section By using the Overdue charges (AR204500) window, you can create an unlimited number of overdue charge codes or particular overdue charge entities with their own rates and settings. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About overdue charge code definition By using the Overdue charges (AR204500) window, you can create an unlimited number of overdue charge codes or particular overdue charge entities with their own rates and settings. For more information: [Overdue charges (AR204500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/overdue-charges-ar204500/). By using the [Overdue charges (AR204500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/overdue-charges-ar204500/) window, you can create an unlimited number of overdue charge codes or particular overdue charge entities with their own rates and settings. Overdue charges are applied in either the base currency or the currency of the overdue document. ## Preliminary configuration steps Before you start setting up overdue charge codes, you need to perform the following steps: 1. You create the following entities (or determine which existing entities you will use), which you need for collecting and recording the overdue charges: + A general ledger account of the **income** type and a corresponding subaccount (if applicable in your system) to record each overdue charge and each overdue fee, if you plan to charge one. You can use the same account for recording all overdue charges and overdue fees or create separate accounts for each overdue charge and each overdue fee. For details, see: [Add an account to the chart of accounts](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-chart-of-accounts/add-an-account-to-the-chart-of-accounts/). + Payment terms that provide a schedule for paying overdue charge documents. The payment terms used for overdue charges should be created without discounts. You can create just one set of payment terms for overdue charge documents or multiple sets. For details, see: [About payment terms](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/payment-terms/about-payment-terms/). 1. You plan the overdue charge code or codes needed to suit your company's credit policy. The planning includes the following for each overdue charge code: + Selecting the calculation method to be used with the code + Deciding on the amount of the overdue charge + Deciding on the amount of the overdue fee, if you plan to charge one + Defining the criteria for creation of a document of the **Overdue charge** type for this code The following sections provide detailed information about the settings of the overdue charge codes. ## Calculation methods The system provides three calculation methods you can use to define the amount that is subject to overdue charges based on the number of days after the due date. The charges can be calculated either for open documents (those that are not fully paid) or for closed documents (those that are fully paid). The base all the methods use for calculation is the open balance of the overdue document. The figure below and the examples show how interest is calculated when you use the different calculation methods. Note that the examples are in US dollars. ![Click to zoom in](/media/visma-net-erp/ovedue-charges-calculation-methods.png) For each overdue charge code, you select one of the following options in the **Calculation method** field in the Overdue charges window: Interest on open entries : : The overdue document is subject to charges until it is closed. To calculate the charges for the days past due, the system uses the document’s open balance as of the date of calculation. If overdue charges have been recorded for the document, the system calculates the charges for the number of days since the date of the last overdue charges. The system calculates overdue charges as follows (the blue lines in the related figure): 1. On the first calculation of charges, the system applies charges to the $500 open entries for 10 days overdue. 1. On the second calculation of charges, the system applies charges to the $100 open entries for 30 days overdue. 1. On the third calculation of charges, the system does not apply charges because the document is fully paid. Interest on open, partially paid and paid entries : : The overdue document is subject to charges until it is closed. To calculate the charges for the days past due, the system uses the document’s open balance for each of these days. If overdue charges have been recorded for the document, the system calculates the charges for the number of days since the date of the last overdue charges. The system calculates overdue charges as follows (see the green lines in the figure): 1. On the first calculation of charges, the system applies charges to the $500 for 10 days overdue. 1. On the second calculation of charges, the system applies the sum of charges to the $500 for 12 days overdue, to the $200 for 7 days overdue, and to the $100 for 11 days overdue. 1. On the third calculation of charges, the system applies charges to the $100 for 16 days overdue. Interest on paid entries : : The overdue document becomes subject to charges the moment it is closed. To calculate the charges for the days past due, the system uses the document’s open balance for each of these days. 1. The system calculates overdue charges when the document is fully paid (the point when the charges are calculated for the third time in the figure). 1. The charges are the sum of charges applied to the $500 open balance for 22 days overdue, to the $200 open balance for 7 days overdue, and to the $100 open balance for 27 days overdue (the pink lines in the figure). The calculation method is used along with the charging method, described in the next section of this topic, to determine how overdue documents are charged for a particular overdue charge code. ## Charging methods A charging method defines how the system charges an overdue document. An overdue charge can be defined either as a fixed amount or as a percentage (annual rate) on an open balance for the number of days late. If the overdue charge is a percentage, the following formula is used to calculate overdue charges, based on the number of days past due. ``` Charge amount = (Percent rate) \* (Number of days past due) \* Open balance / (365 \* 100) ``` A percentage can be configured with a fixed minimum amount or a threshold amount. If you configure a percentage with a fixed minimum amount, the system charges an overdue document for at least the fixed minimum amount. If you configure a percentage with a threshold amount, the system charges a document only if the calculated charge amount is greater than or equal to the threshold amount. For details, see the following subsections of this topic: ### Charging a percentage with a minimum amount If you define an overdue charge as a percentage on an open balance for the number of days late with a minimum amount specified, the system charges a document as follows: + If the charge amount is less than the specified minimum amount, the system charges the document for the minimum amount. + If the charge amount is greater than or equal to the specified minimum amount, the system charges the document for the calculated charge amount. To charge a percentage with a minimum amount, in the **Charging settings** section in the Overdue charges window, you do the following: + In the **Charging method** field, you select the **Percent with min. amount** option. + In the **Min. amount** field (which appears once you have selected this charging method), you specify the minimum amount an overdue document should be charged. + In the **Total threshold** field, you specify the minimum amount of the overdue charge document; if the total amount of the lines of the overdue charge document is less than the total threshold amount, the document will not be created. + In the table (which appears once you have selected this charging method), you specify percent rate (or rates) with the date when the rate becomes effective. ### Charging a percentage with a threshold amount If you define an overdue charge as a percentage on an open balance for the number of days late with a threshold amount specified, the system charges a document as follows: + If the charge amount is less than the specified threshold amount, the system does not charge the document. + If the charge amount is greater than or equal to the specified threshold amount, the system charges a document for the calculated charge amount. To charge a percentage with a threshold amount, in the **Charging settings** section in the Overdue charges window, you do the following: + In the **Charging method** field, you select the **Percent with threshold** option. + In the **Threshold** field (which appears once you have selected this charging method), you specify the amount of charges that should define whether to charge a document. + In the **Total threshold** field, you specify the minimum amount of the overdue charge document; if the total amount of the lines of the overdue charge document is less than the total threshold amount, the document will not be created. + In the table (which appears once you have selected this charging method), you specify a percent rate (or rates) with the date when the rate becomes effective. ### Charging a fixed amount An overdue charge can be defined as a fixed amount. To define an overdue charge as a fixed amount, in the **Charging settings** section in the Overdue charges window, you do the following: + In the **Charging method** field, you select the **Fixed amount** option. + In the **Amount** field (which appears once you have selected this charging method), you specify the fixed amount of the charge for overdue documents. + In the **Total threshold** field, you specify the minimum amount of the overdue charge document; if the total amount of the lines of the overdue charge document is less than the total threshold amount, the document will not be created. Thus, if an open balance of an overdue document is greater than zero, the system charges the specified fixed amount. ## Overdue fee Some companies charge a fixed amount (a fee) for processing documents of the **Overdue charge** type. In these cases, a customer must pay the fee amount in addition to the amount of calculated overdue charges. A fee is charged for each overdue charge document. An additional line with the fee amount is added to the document. If your company charges a fee for processing late documents, in the Overdue charges (AR204500) window, for any overdue charge code, specify the following settings: Fee amount : The fixed amount to be charged for a document of the **Overdue charge** type. A customer pays the amount in addition to the amount of the overdue charges. Fee account : ( **Fee subaccount** ): The account (and subaccount, if applicable) to which fee amounts are recorded. You can leave these fields empty if your company does not charge fees for overdue charge documents.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

About the criteria for creating an overdue charge document /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/overdue-charges/about-the-criteria-for-creating-an-overdue-charge-document page The processing of overdue documents creates documents of the Overdue charge type. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About the criteria for creating an overdue charge document The processing of overdue documents creates documents of the Overdue charge type. When the system finds a customer's overdue document, the system adds this document as a line item to the document of the **Overdue charge** type (which is created once any overdue document is found). If the system has found multiple overdue documents of a customer, the system creates a document of the **Overdue charge** type with multiple lines. These documents of the **Overdue charge** type, also referred to as overdue charge documents, can be viewed in the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window. You can set up a threshold amount that defines the amount of charges that should initiate the generation of an overdue charge document. You specify this threshold amount in the **Total threshold** field in the [Overdue charges (AR204500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/overdue-charges-ar204500/) window. > [!NOTE] > The overdue fee is not included in the overdue charge document amount that is compared to the threshold. With the total threshold specified, the system decides whether to create an overdue charge document as follows: 1. It finds an overdue document of a customer or multiple documents of the customer. 1. It calculates the charge amount for each overdue document it found. 1. It compares the total amount of the calculated charges to the threshold amount, and then the system proceeds as follows: + If the total amount is greater than the threshold amount, the system creates an overdue charge document for the customer. + If the total amount is less than the threshold amount, the system does not create an overdue charge document for the customer. For example, suppose that your company collects overdue charges only if the charge amount is greater than €10; you thus specify 10 in the **Total threshold** field. Further suppose that your company charges a fixed charge amount of €1. If a customer has at least 10 overdue documents, the system will create an overdue charge document to debit the customer account. If your company instead charges an annual rate, the system behaves in the same way. If the total of calculated percentages for a customer's overdue documents is greater than €10, the system creates an overdue charge document for the customer. In addition to setting a threshold for the overdue charge amount, you can set a minimum amount and a threshold amount for adding a document as a line to the overdue charge document. You can configure the line threshold for only a charge that is defined as a percentage. To do this, you set up an overdue charge code on the [Overdue charges (AR204500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/overdue-charges-ar204500/) window and specify the **Charging a percentage with a minimum amount** or **Charging a percentage with a threshold amount** charging method. For details, see [About overdue charge code definition](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/overdue-charges/about-overdue-charge-code-definition/). ## Overdue fee collection You may want to charge your customers an additional fee each time overdue charges are calculated. In the **Overdue fee settings** section of the [Overdue charges (AR204500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/overdue-charges-ar204500/) window, you can specify the amount of the overdue fee and the account and subaccount to register the collected fee to. The fee is recorded as a separate line in the document of the **Overdue charge** type in the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Example of how to apply calculation methods /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/overdue-charges/example-of-how-to-apply-calculation-methods page This topic provides examples of the overdue charge calculation methods that can be set in the system. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Example of how to apply calculation methods This topic provides examples of the overdue charge calculation methods that can be set in the system. Suppose that a customer's invoice is due on April 1; its open balance is €500 as of the due date. The customer paid the invoice after the due date with three payments: €300 on April 22, €100 on April 29, and €100 on May 26. The system calculates overdue charges on the 10th day of each month. The overdue charge amount is an annual rate of 10% and no thresholds are configured. The system calculates the overdue charges differently, as described in the following sections of this topic, depending on the calculation method set for the overdue charge code in the [Overdue charges (AR204500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/overdue-charges-ar204500/) window. ## Interest on balance If you select **Interest on balance** in the **Calculation method** field in the [Overdue charges (AR204500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/overdue-charges-ar204500/) window, the system calculates the overdue charges as follows: 1. On the first calculation of overdue charges, the system applies overdue charges to the €500 open balance for 10 days overdue and creates an overdue charge document in the amount of 0.1 \* 10 \* €500 / 365 = €1.37. 1. On the second calculation of overdue charges, the system applies overdue charges to the €100 open balance for 30 days overdue and creates an overdue charge document in the amount of 0.1 \* 30 \* €100 / 365 = €0.82. 1. On the third calculation of charges, the system does not apply overdue charges because the document is fully paid. Overall, the system debited the customer's account for an additional €2.19 in overdue charges. ## Interest on prorated balance If you select **Interest on prorated balance** in the **Calculation method** field in the [Overdue charges (AR204500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/overdue-charges-ar204500/) window, the system calculates the overdue charges as follows (see the green lines in the figure above): 1. On the first calculation of overdue charges, the system applies overdue charges to the €500 open balance for 10 days overdue and creates an overdue charge document in the amount of 0.1 \* 10 \* €500 / 365 = €1.37. 1. On the second calculation of overdue charges, the system applies the sum of charges to the €500 open balance for 12 days overdue, to the €200 open balance for 7 days overdue, and to the €100 open balance for 11 days overdue; it then creates an overdue charge document in the amount of (0.1 \* 12 \* €500 / 365) + (0.1 \* 7 \* €200 / 365) + (0.1 \* 11 \* €100 / 365) = €1.64 + €0.38 + €0.3 = €2.32. 1. On the third calculation of charges, the system applies overdue charges to the €100 open balance for 16 days overdue and creates an overdue charge document in the amount of 0.1 \* 16\* €100 / 365 = €0.44. Overall, the system debited the customer's account for an additional €4.13. ## Interest on arrears If you select the **Interest on arrears** option in the **Calculation method** field in the [Overdue charges (AR204500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/overdue-charges-ar204500/) window, the system calculates overdue charges when the document is fully paid (in the figure, the point when the charges are calculated for the third time). The overdue charges are the sum of charges applied to the €500 open balance for 22 days overdue, to the €200 open balance for 7 days overdue, and to the €100 open balance for 27 days overdue. The system creates an overdue charge document in the amount of (0.1 \* 22 \* €500 / 365) \+ (0.1 \* 7 \* €200 / 365) + (0.1 \* 27 \* €100 / 365) = €3.01 + €0.38 + €0.74 = €4.13. Overall, the system debited the customer's account for an additional €4.13.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Configure an overdue charge code /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/overdue-charges/configure-an-overdue-charge-code section In this window, you configure an overdue charge code that defines the calculation method, the criteria of collecting charges, and the type of charge collection (fixed amount or percentage). 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Configure an overdue charge code In this window, you configure an overdue charge code that defines the calculation method, the criteria of collecting charges, and the type of charge collection (fixed amount or percentage). 1. Go to the [Overdue charges (AR204500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/overdue-charges-ar204500/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) add a new code. 1. In the **Overdue charge ID** field, type an ID for your code. Have a look at the existing codes before you decide on a number or text, so that you don't use the same as an existing ID. You can use both numbers and letters. 1. Optional: Enter a **Description** and select a **Calculation method**. For more information about each calculation method, see [About overdue charges](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/overdue-charges/about-overdue-charges/). 1. In the **Terms** field, select the terms for the payment. 1. Optional: select the **Base currency** check box if you want the system to calculate the overdue charge by using the base currency. 1. In the **Overdue charge account** field, select an overdue charge account. 1. In the **Overdue charge subaccount** field, press **F3** to choose a subaccount. If you do not use subaccounts, press and hold 0 until all sections in the field are filled. 1. Optional: In the **VAT code** field, select the VAT category. 1. Optional: If your company charges an overdue fee, in the **Overdue fee settings** section, enter the following details: + In the **Fee amount** field, type the amount of the overdue fee. + In the **Fee account** field, specify the account to which the overdue fee should be recorded. + In the **Fee subaccount** field, specify the subaccount to which the overdue fee should be recorded. + In the **Fee description** field, type the description of the overdue fee. 1. In the **Charging settings** section, do the following: + In the **Total threshold** field, specify the amount of the overdue charges that should initiate the generation of a document of the **Overdue charge** type. + In the **Charging method** field, select the method that the system should use to charge overdue documents. The following options are available: + **Fixed amount**: If you select this option, you need to specify the fixed amount in the **Amount** field, which appears when you select the **Fixed amount** charging method. + **Percent with threshold**: If you select this option, you need to specify the percentage in the Rates table and the threshold amount in the **Threshold** field. Both of these elements appear once you select the **Percent with threshold** charging method. + **Percent with min. amount**: If you select this option, you need to specify the percentage in the **Rates** table and the minimum charge amount in the **Min. amount** field. Both of these elements appear once you select the **Percent with min. amount** charging method. For details, see: [About overdue charge code definition](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/overdue-charges/about-overdue-charge-code-definition/). What is next? [Make overdue and dunning settings in the Customer ledger preferences window](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-preferences/make-overdue-and-dunning-settings-in-the-customer-ledger-preferences/)

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

Calculate overdue charges /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/overdue-charges/calculate-overdue-charges page You calculate overdue charges for customer ledger documents by using the Calculate overdue charges (AR507000) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Calculate overdue charges You calculate overdue charges for customer ledger documents by using the Calculate overdue charges (AR507000) window. For more information: [Calculate overdue charges (AR507000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/calculate-overdue-charges-ar507000/). You calculate overdue charges for customer ledger documents by using the [Calculate overdue charges (AR507000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/calculate-overdue-charges-ar507000/) window. Once the overdue charges are calculated, you process selected overdue documents to create open customer ledger documents with the **Overdue charges** type. The overdue charges are based on the settings specified in the [Overdue charges (AR204500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/overdue-charges-ar204500/) window. 1. Go to the [Calculate overdue charges (AR507000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/calculate-overdue-charges-ar507000/) window. 1. In the **Overdue charge date** field, select the date for when you want to calculate and process overdue charges. 1. **Optional:** In the **Period** drop-down list, change the financial period to the one that you want to post the document's transactions to. 1. In the **Statement cycle** drop-down list, select a statement cycle. Leave this field blank if you want to calculate overdue charges for all statement cycles. If the check box **Set default overdue charges by statement cycle** is selected in [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/), you have to specify the statement cycle. 1. Optional: To narrow the document results listed in the table after calculation, select a customer class in the **Customer class** drop-down list and a customer account in the **Customer** drop-down list. These drop-down lists are only displayed if the check box **Set default overdue charges by statement cycle** is not selected in [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/). 1. Click **Calculate** to calculate the overdue charges. The system now lists the overdue documents and their details, including the number of days past the due date and the charge amounts. 1. In the toolbar, do one of the following: + Click **Process all** to create overdue charges documents for all listed documents. + Select check boxes for individual documents and click **Process** to create overdue charges documents for only specific documents. When you have completed this procedure successfully, Visma Net creates customer ledger documents with the type **Overdue charges** and the statuses **On hold** or **Balanced**, depending on the following settings in the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window: **Hold documents on entry** and **Hold document on failed credit check**. If the system finds an unreleased overdue charge document for an invoice during overdue charge processing, the invoice is marked with error and no new overdue charge document is created. You can select an invoice with error and click **View last charge** to view and release an existing overdue charge document. Then you can calculate and process overdue charges for this invoice again.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

Statement cycles /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/statement-cycles section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Statement cycles Statement cycles - overview /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/statement-cycles/statement-cycles-overview page In Visma Net, you can configure statement cycles for collection procedures. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Statement cycles - overview In Visma Net, you can configure statement cycles for collection procedures. At the end of a statement cycle, you prepare statements and send them to your customers. Statements provide customers with records of their financial activity for a specific period and include the ending balance. Customers can reconcile the balances of their accounts with the information in the statements. ## Statement cycle definition You use the [Statement cycles (AR202800)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/statement-cycles-ar202800/) window to create new statement cycles and modify existing ones. For each statement cycle, you define the following: + The schedule. You can generate statements once or twice a month. The **Prepare on** setting offers the following options: + **End of month**: If you select this option, statements will be generated on the last day of each month. + **Fixed day**: If you select this option, statements will be generated on a particular day of each month. If you select this option, you use the **Day of month** field to specify the number of this day (such as **15** if invoicing occurs on the 15th day of each month). + **Custom**: If you select this option, statements will be generated on the two days of the month that you specify. If you select this option, you use the **Day of month** and the **Day of month 1** fields to specify the numbers of these two days. + The ageing periods. You can set up four aging periods for each cycle, to group the sums of the balances of open invoices and debit notes by the number of days they are past due. You use the **Ageing settings** section of this window to define the maximum number of days past the due date for each ageing period and the description of the period. If you want aging periods to take into account the balances of credit memos and open payments, select the **Age credits** check box on the **General settings** tab of the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. The system also uses the aging period settings in customer ledger ageing reports, which you can analyse to identify potential cash flow problems. + The statement processing options of the cycle. You can use the following options to implement your company's policies: + **Require overdue charges calculation before statement**: If you select this check box, when you try to prepare statements, the system checks whether overdue charges have been calculated and, if not, issues a warning that overdue charges should be calculated before the statements are created. + **Require payment application before statement processing**: If you select this check box, when you try to prepare statements, the system checks whether all customer payments are applied and, if not, issues a warning that payments should be applied to invoices before statements are created. + The overdue charges of the cycle. The **Apply overdue charges** and **Overdue charge ID** settings define, respectively, whether calculation of overdue charges is required for customers assigned to the statement cycle and which overdue charges should be used; these settings apply only if the **Set default overdue charge by statement cycle** check box on the **General settings** tab of the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window is selected. If the check box is cleared, the overdue charges defined for the customer class are instead applied. You can assign a statement cycle to a customer class by using the [Customer classes (AR201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-classes-ar201000/) window or directly to a customer by using the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window. ## Statement type Visma Net offers two types of statements: Open item : The statement lists only open documents of the customer through the date when the statement was prepared. Balance brought forward : The statement lists all documents recorded during the last statement cycle period. Also, the amount outstanding from the previous statement is shown at the beginning of the statement. You can assign either statement type to customer classes and to individual customers. You use the **Statement type** field to set this option for a specific customer class in the [Customer classes (AR201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-classes-ar201000/) window and for an individual customer in the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window. ## Multi-currency and consolidated statements By default, the statements are prepared in the base currency; the **Customer statement** (AR641500) report is used. For foreign customers, you can specify that statements should be created in multiple currencies; in this case, the **Customer statement currency** (AR642000) report is used. For customers of a specific customer class, you can specify whether to create the statements in multi-currency format, by using the **Multi-currency statements** check box in the [Customer classes (AR201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-classes-ar201000/) window. For particular customers of the class, you can override the class setting by using the option with the same name in the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window. Depending on the policies established in your company, you can prepare a single consolidated statement for each customer or prepare multiple statements for each branch of your company. To prepare consolidated statements for all customers, select the **Consolidate statements for all branches** check box on the **General settings** tab of the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. If you want to prepare consolidated statements, in the **Statement from branch** field, you should also select the branch that will be specified as the sender.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

About the statement processing workflow /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/statement-cycles/about-the-statement-processing-workflow page As described in Statement cycles - overview, the configuration of statements involves creating statement cycles, assigning cycles to customer classes and customers, and deciding whether you need consolidated statements. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About the statement processing workflow As described in Statement cycles - overview, the configuration of statements involves creating statement cycles, assigning cycles to customer classes and customers, and deciding whether you need consolidated statements. For more information: [Statement cycles - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/statement-cycles/statement-cycles-overview/). This topic describes how the processing of statements unfolds. The statement processing workflow consists of the following stages (each of which is described in detail later in this topic): ## Configure customer preferences (optional) When you create a customer, it gets the default statement processing settings of the customer class it belongs to. For each customer, you can change the following settings related to statement processing: Statement type : You specify what type of statement a customer prefers, balance-forward or open-item. For details, see [Statement cycles - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/statement-cycles/statement-cycles-overview/). Print statements : You select this check box if you want to make statements of this customer available for mass-printing in the [Print statements (AR503500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/print-statements-ar503500/) window. For details, see [Print customer statements or send them by email](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/statement-cycles/print-customer-statements-or-send-them-by-email/). Send statements by email : You select this check box if you want to make statements of this customer available for mass-emailing in the [Print statements (AR503500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/print-statements-ar503500/) window. For details, see [Print customer statements or send them by email](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/statement-cycles/print-customer-statements-or-send-them-by-email/). Multi-currency statements : You select this check box if you want statements of this customer to be created in multi-currency format. Such statements are displayed for mass-processing (printing or emailing) if the **Foreign currency statements** check box is selected in the [Print statements (AR503500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/print-statements-ar503500/) window. For details, see [Statement cycles - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/statement-cycles/statement-cycles-overview/). If needed, you can modify the **Customer statement** (AR641500) report (for local customers) or the **Customer statement (currency)** (AR642000) report (for foreign customers) to format the statements to better meet your needs. ## Prepare statements (required) Before you prepare statements, make sure that you have applied open payments from customers to the corresponding invoices (if any) and calculated any overdue charges to avoid incorrect calculation of aged balances. You use the [Prepare statements (AR503000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/prepare-statements-ar503000/) window to prepare statements for all statement cycles or for only selected ones. The system prepares statements in the appropriate format required for printing them or sending them by email to customers. When statements are prepared, you can view them, regenerate them (if, for instance, you have discovered that a document was missing), print them, or send them by email. Because the process of generating statements may require significant time, you should schedule it to be performed at the most convenient time. For details on preparing statements, see [Prepare customer statements](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/statement-cycles/prepare-customer-statements/). ## Viewing statements (optional) You can preview a statement that you have printed or emailed by using the [Print statements (AR503500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/print-statements-ar503500/) window. Also, Visma Net provides the following inquiries that display a detailed statement history: + By statement cycle: [Statement history summary (AR404000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/statement-history-summary-ar404000/) + By customer: [Customer statement history (AR404600)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-statement-history-ar404600/) ## Regenerate statements (optional) Prepared statements will not be affected by new transactions. If you discover some missing documents after the customer statements have been generated, you can create and release these documents and then regenerate the statements. Printed and emailed versions of the updated statement are marked with appropriate notes if previous statement versions have been printed or emailed already (the **Printed** and **Emailed** check boxes, respectively, of a statement are selected). You can regenerate statements by using the following windows: + [Print statements (AR503500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/print-statements-ar503500/). You use the **Regenerate statement** action in this window to regenerate statements for customers of a particular statement cycle. + [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/). You use the **Regenerate last statement** action in this window to regenerate the most recent statement of the selected customer. + [Statement cycles (AR202800)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/statement-cycles-ar202800/). You use the **Regenerate last statement** action in this window to regenerate statements of the selected statement cycle. ## Print statements (optional) You can print statements on paper to send them to customers by postal mail, by using the [Print statements (AR503500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/print-statements-ar503500/) window. The **Print statement** action marks processed statements as printed or the **Printed** check box of each statement is selected automatically. For details, see [Print customer statements or send them by email](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/statement-cycles/print-customer-statements-or-send-them-by-email/). ## Email statements (optional) You can generate emails with statements by using the [Print statements (AR503500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/print-statements-ar503500/) window. The **Email statement** action marks processed statements as emailed or the **Emailed** check box of each statement is selected automatically. The system generates the body of the email and the attachment according to the settings of the **STATEMENT** mailing. For details, see [About mailings for customers](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-mailings/about-mailings-for-customers/).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

About statement schedule types /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/statement-cycles/about-statement-schedule-types page You can schedule preparation of statements for the selected cycle ID with the help of the options in the Schedule type field: 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About statement schedule types You can schedule preparation of statements for the selected cycle ID with the help of the options in the Schedule type field: Weekly : Statements will be generated each week, on the day specified in the **Day of the week** field. Twice a month : Statements will be generated twice a month, on the days specified in the **Day of month 1** and **Day of month 2** fields. Fixed day of month : Statements will be generated each month, on the day specified in the **Day of month 1** field (such as 15 if invoicing occurs on the 15th day of each month). End of month : Statements will be generated on the last day of each month. End of financial period : Statements will be generated on the last day of each financial period of the current year or on the end date specified for the financial period in the [Financial periods (GL201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/financial-periods-gl201000/) window.

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

Choose a statement cycle for overdue charges /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/statement-cycles/choose-a-statement-cycle-for-overdue-charges section These settings only apply if the Set default overdue charge by statement cycle check box on the General settings tab in the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window is selected. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Choose a statement cycle for overdue charges These settings only apply if the Set default overdue charge by statement cycle check box on the General settings tab in the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window is selected. For more information: [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/). If you deselect the check box, the system applies the overdue charges defined to the customer class. 1. Go to the [Statement cycles (AR202800)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/statement-cycles-ar202800/) window. 1. In the **Cycle ID** field, select a cycle ID. 1. Select the check box **Require payment application before statement processing**. 1. Select the **Apply overdue charges** check box. 1. Optional: Select the check box **Require overdue charges calculation before statement**. 1. In the **Overdue charge ID** field, select an **overdue charge ID**. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). For released documents of customer accounts where this check box is selected, you can change this default value on the **Financial details** tab in the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

Prepare customer statements /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/statement-cycles/prepare-customer-statements page You can prepare customer statements by using the Prepare statements (AR503000) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Prepare customer statements You can prepare customer statements by using the Prepare statements (AR503000) window. For more information: [Prepare statements (AR503000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/prepare-statements-ar503000/). You can prepare customer statements by using the [Prepare statements (AR503000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/prepare-statements-ar503000/) window. Customer statements will be prepared in the appropriate format to be printed or sent by email. (You can also prepare statements to be sent in both formats.) The statement format depends on the customer settings. ## Before you start Before you prepare customer statements, make sure the payment application process has been performed for the customer accounts associated with the appropriate statement cycles, as described in: [About Apply payments automatically](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/about-apply-payments-automatically/). 1. Go to the [Prepare statements (AR503000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/prepare-statements-ar503000/) window. > [!NOTE] > You can use filtering to narrow the documents that are listed when you open the window. 1. Do one of the following: + To prepare statements for all statement cycles, click **Process all** in the window toolbar. + To prepare statements for only selected statement cycles, select the appropriate unlabelled check boxes and click **Process** in the window toolbar. > [!NOTE] > If the process of statements preparation was interrupted for some reason, the system will prepare statements for all customer accounts selected during the next run of the process.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Prepare statements /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/statement-cycles/prepare-statements section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Prepare statements ## Before you start The system prepares the statements in the format you have specified for each customer, for example to be sent by email or to be printed. 1. Go to the [Prepare statements (AR503000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/prepare-statements-ar503000/) window. 1. Select a date in the **Prepare for** field. All statement cycles whose next statement date is before or the same as the date in this field are loaded to the table along with the newly created statement cycles with blank next statement dates. You can also prepare the statements in advance. 1. Optional: To include future statement cycles, you can change the date in the **Company** drop-down list in the top right corner. Click the arrow and change the date. 1. Select the check boxes for the cycles you want to process and click **Process**. If you want to process all the cycles, leave the check boxes unmarked and click **Process all**. 1. When the processing is finished, in the left column on each cycle's row. ![icon-confirmation](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-confirmation.png) is displayed ## What is next? Continue to the Print statements window to print or email your statements. See [Print statements](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/statement-cycles/print-statements/).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Print statements /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/statement-cycles/print-statements page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Print statements ## Before you start Before you can print statements, you have to prepare them. See [Prepare statements](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/statement-cycles/prepare-statements/). 1. Go to the [Print statements (AR503500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/print-statements-ar503500/) window. 1. In the **Actions** field, select what you want to do. The default action is **Print statement**, but you can also email or regenerate statements or decide not to print or email them. 1. In the **Statement cycle** field, select the statement cycle you want to process. You can only process one cycle at a time. 1. In the **Message** field, you can write a message that will be printed to all customer statements. 1. Click **Process**. The statement will be displayed and you can review it before you print or email it. To set up or change your printing preferences for a customer, see: [Set customer print and email preferences](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/set-customer-print-and-email-preferences/).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Print customer statements or send them by email /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/statement-cycles/print-customer-statements-or-send-them-by-email page You can print customer statements (to send them to customers by postal mail) and send statements by email in the Print statements (AR503500) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Print customer statements or send them by email You can print customer statements (to send them to customers by postal mail) and send statements by email in the Print statements (AR503500) window. For more information: [Print statements (AR503500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/print-statements-ar503500/). You can print customer statements (to send them to customers by postal mail) and send statements by email in the [Print statements (AR503500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/print-statements-ar503500/) window. The window lists only statements that were previously prepared. For details, see: [Prepare customer statements](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/statement-cycles/prepare-customer-statements/). 1. Go to the [Print statements (AR503500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/print-statements-ar503500/) window. 1. In the top part, select the statement cycle for which customer statements will be processed. 1. In the **Statement date** field, check the date of the customer statements to be sure that it is the date you want to use. 1. In the **Actions** field, do one of the following: + To print statements to send them to customers by postal mail, select **Print statement**. As a result, the system displays the list of customers (for the selected statement cycle) that prefer to get a printed version of a statement or customers that have the **Print statement** check box selected in the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window. + To send statements to customers electronically by email, select **Email Statement**. As a result, the system displays the list of customers (for the selected statement cycle) that prefer to get a statement by email or customers that have **Send statements by email** check box selected in the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window. 1. In the window toolbar, do one of the following: + To process all the listed statements, click **Process all**. + To process only selected statements, select the unlabeled check boxes for the statements and click **Process**.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Write-off methods /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/write-off-methods section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Write-off methods Write-off methods - overview /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/write-off-methods/write-off-methods-overview page You can use write-off functionality to implement the direct write-off and allowance methods. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Write-off methods - overview You can use write-off functionality to implement the direct write-off and allowance methods. In this topic, you will read about how write-off methods are used and what transactions are generated when you implement the direct write-off or allowance method. ## Direct write-off method Your business may use the direct write-off method for financial reporting when you can determine that an amount will be uncollectible in the period when the sale took place and that the amount represents an insignificant amount, as with bank charges. The direct write-off method ignores VAT amounts previously paid to a tax authority on the documents being written off. You may need to manually record the written-off amounts and the corresponding VAT amounts to use them for adjustments to the tax return. In the direct method, a write-off requires a journal entry that increases an expense account (the Balance write-off account) and a journal entry that decreases accounts receivable for the customer. You configure a reason code that determines the expense account and then write off an amount from a customer invoice by using this reason code. Accounts are affected as shown below. |Account|Debit|Credit| |---|---|---| |Balance write-off account|Amount|0.0| |Customer ledger account|0.0|Amount| If you write off customer credits, the amount will be recognised as income, and the customer balance of accounts receivable will be increased. You configure a reason code that determines the income account and then write off an amount from a customer invoice by using this reason code. Accounts are affected as shown in the following table. |Account|Debit|Credit| |---|---|---| |Credit write-off account|0.0|Amount| |Customer ledger account|Amount|0.0| If a customer pays a debt that has been written off, you enter the payment as usual and do not apply it to any document. You then write off the payment by using a document of the **Credit write-off** type. ## Allowance method The allowance method is based on the idea that some of customer debts will not be paid, although companies don't know in advance which customers will not pay. This method involves using two special accounts: + Allowance for doubtful accounts: This contra asset account to accounts receivable contains the estimated amount of the debts that will not be collected. The estimate may be a percentage of sales or an amount based on an ageing analysis of sales receivables. + Bad debts expense: This is a temporary expense account that reports credit losses for only the period shown on the income statement. The allowance method is used as follows: At the end of the accounting period, you estimate the amount to become uncollectible in accounts receivable and manually update accounts by using the [Journal transactions (GL301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/journal-transactions-gl301000/) window. Accounts are affected as shown below. |Account|Debit|Credit| |---|---|---| |Bad debts expense|Amount|0.0| |Allowance for doubtful accounts|0.0|Amount| You configure a reason code that points to the Allowance for doubtful accounts account. When a specific customer's account is identified as uncollectible, you write off debts by using this reason code. Accounts are affected as shown below. |Account|Debit|Credit| |---|---|---| |Allowance for doubtful accounts|Amount|0.0| |Customer ledger account (customer account)|0.0|Amount| Under the allowance method, a write-off does not change the net realisable value of sales receivables. It simply reduces sales receivables and the allowance for bad debts by equivalent amounts.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

About write-off setup /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/write-off-methods/about-write-off-setup page Setting up write-off functionality is similar for the direct write-off and allowance methods. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About write-off setup Setting up write-off functionality is similar for the direct write-off and allowance methods. To use the functionality of write-offs, you need to configure the following entities: + General ledger accounts to record balance and credit write-offs to. + Reason codes to point to the general ledger account and subaccount where write-offs are to be recorded. + Customer accounts with write-off functionality enabled and write-off limits specified. If these accounts already exist, you just need to change their settings. In this topic, you will read about setting up write-off functionality and additional information that you may need during configuration. ## Write-off process setup To use the write-off functionality, you perform the following steps: 1. You configure the general ledger accounts and subaccounts to be used for writing off expenses by using the [Chart of accounts (GL202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/chart-of-accounts-gl202500/) window as follows: + For the direct write-off method, you configure an expense account (for instance, the Balance write-off account) and subaccounts (if needed). + For the allowance method, you configure a contra asset account to accounts receivable (for instance, Allowance for doubtful accounts) and an expense account (for example, Bad debts expense) and subaccounts (if needed). 1. In the [Reason codes (CS211000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/reason-codes-cs211000/) window, you configure reason codes that point to the general ledger accounts you have configured in Step 1: + For the direct write-off method, you create a reason code that points to the expense account and subaccount to be used for writing off expenses. You can configure different reason codes to distribute write-offs to different accounts or use one reason code for all such expenses. + For the allowance method, you create a reason code that points to the contra asset account (Allowance for doubtful accounts) and subaccount. Then you write off bad debts by using this reason code directly from an invoice and make the entries manually for the contra asset account in the [Journal transactions (GL301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/journal-transactions-gl301000/) window. For details, see [Add a reason code](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/write-off-methods/add-a-reason-code/). 1. You enable write-off functionality for a group of customer accounts by using the [Customer classes (AR201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-classes-ar201000/) window or individually for a customer account by using the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window. For details, see [Enable or disable write-offs](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/write-off-methods/enable-or-disable-write-offs/). ### After configuration is done, you can + Write off balances directly from an invoice when you apply a payment to it by using the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window. + Write off balances or credits of several documents at once by using the [Write-off balances and credits (AR505000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/write-off-balances-and-credits-ar505000/) window. + Write off balances directly from an invoice when you apply a payment (created to match a bank transaction) to it by using the [Process bank transactions (CA306000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/process-bank-transactions-ca306000/) window. ## Default reason codes By using the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window, you can specify the reason codes to be used by default for writing off credits and balances. The system will fill in the reason codes specified here in the **Reason code** field in the [Write-off balances and credits (AR505000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/write-off-balances-and-credits-ar505000/) window, as well as in the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window, when you select the type of write-off operation.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Add a reason code /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/write-off-methods/add-a-reason-code section You define reason codes on the Reason codes (CS211000) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Add a reason code You define reason codes on the Reason codes (CS211000) window. For more information: [Reason codes (CS211000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/reason-codes-cs211000/). You define reason codes on the[Reason codes (CS211000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/reason-codes-cs211000/) window. For each reason code, you must specify with what transaction it will be used. The transaction type determines the Visma Net workspace the reason code can be used in. You can define the reason codes for the following types of transactions originated from the Customer ledger workspace: credit write-off and balance write-off. Before doing the following, make sure that the General ledger accounts and subaccounts you are going to use for write-offs are configured. 1. Go to the [Reason codes (CS211000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/reason-codes-cs211000/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the **Reason code** field, type the identifier of the reason code. An alphanumeric string of up to 10 characters may be used. 1. In the **Description** field, type a short description of the reason code. 1. In the **Usage** field, select the option indicating where the reason code will be used: + To use the reason code for writing off credits, select **Credit write-off**. + To use the reason code for writing off balances, select **Balance write-off**. 1. In the **Combine sub. from** field, construct a subaccount mask. Point to each segment and press F3 to open the list of options. 1. In the **Account** field, select the account to be updated by the transaction amount for transactions marked by the reason code. 1. In the **Subaccount** field, specify a subaccount according to the mask. Point to each segment and press F3 to open the list of options. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Create reason codes /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/write-off-methods/create-reason-codes section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create reason codes 1. Go to the [Reason codes (CS211000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/reason-codes-cs211000/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the **Reason code** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to see the next free number for you to enter in this field. 1. Enter the number in the **Reason code** field. 1. Enter a **Description** for your reason code. 1. In the **Usage** field select one of the following usages: 1. **Sales** 1. **Issue** 1. **Receipt** 1. **Adjustment** 1. **Transfer** > [!NOTE] > To create reason codes for write-offs, see: [Create reason codes for write-offs](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/write-off-methods/create-reason-codes-for-write-offs/). 1. In the **Account** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select the account that the reason code will affect. 1. In the **Subaccount** field, enter the subaccount that the reason code will affect. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). > [!NOTE] > Reason codes are also used for stocktaking reviews. The default code for a stocktaking review is **4**.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Enable or disable write-offs /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/write-off-methods/enable-or-disable-write-offs section You can define write-offs to be enabled by default for customers grouped under a particular class or modify the default setting for a particular customer of the class. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Enable or disable write-offs You can define write-offs to be enabled by default for customers grouped under a particular class or modify the default setting for a particular customer of the class. You use the [Customer classes (AR201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-classes-ar201000/) window to configure default write-off settings for each class and the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window to override default class settings for particular customers. ## Set the default write-off settings for customers of a customer class 1. Go to the [Customer classes (AR201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-classes-ar201000/) window. 1. In the **Class ID** field, select the customer class that you want to enable or disable write-offs for. 1. On the **General information** tab, in the **Default financial and payment settings** area, do the following: 1. Select the **Enable write-offs** check box if you want to allow write-off operations for customers of this customer class or clear the check box to disable write-offs for customers of the class. 1. If you have enabled write-offs for the class, in the **Write-off limit** field, type the maximum value that may be written off for each application line for documents of customers of the class. All balances and credits that are less than this value may be written off. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). You can then change default write-offs settings for each customer individually. ## Override default write-off settings for a customer 1. Go to the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window. 1. In the **Customer number** field, select the customer that you want to enable or disable write-offs for. 1. On the **General settings** tab, in the **Financial settings** area, do the following: 1. Select the **Enable write-offs** check box if you want to allow write-off operations for the selected customer or clear the check box to disable write-off operations. 1. If you have enabled write-offs for the class, in the **Write-off limit** field, type the maximum value that may be written off for each application line. All balances and credits that are less than this value may be written off. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Create reason codes for write-offs /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/write-off-methods/create-reason-codes-for-write-offs section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create reason codes for write-offs ## Before you start In the [Reason codes (CS211000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/reason-codes-cs211000/) window you can create reason codes for **Balance write-offs** and **Credit write-offs**. These are used in the [Write-off balances and credits (AR505000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/write-off-balances-and-credits-ar505000/) and [Process bank transactions (CA306000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/process-bank-transactions-ca306000/) windows. > [!NOTE] > Reason codes are mandatory for performing write-offs on your invoices or credit notes > [!NOTE] > Reason codes are also used for stocktaking reviews. The default code for a stocktaking review is **4**. 1. Go to the [Reason codes (CS211000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/reason-codes-cs211000/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the **Reason code** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to see how many reason codes already exist: use the next available number for your new reason code. 1. In the ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) -field, fill in the number of your new reason code. 1. In the **Description** field, enter the reason for your write-off. 1. In the **Usage** field select one of the following: 1. **Balance write-off** - to write-off an underpayment. or 1. **Credit write-off** - to write-off an overpayment. 1. In the **Account** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select the account the reason code will affect. 1. In the **Subaccount** field, enter the subaccount the reason code will affect. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Write off balances and credits /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/write-off-methods/write-off-balances-and-credits page By using the Write-off balances and credits (AR505000) window, you can view the balances and credits (of appropriately low amounts) of customers for which write-offs are allowed. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Write off balances and credits By using the Write-off balances and credits (AR505000) window, you can view the balances and credits (of appropriately low amounts) of customers for which write-offs are allowed. For more information: [Write-off balances and credits (AR505000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/write-off-balances-and-credits-ar505000/). By using the [Write-off balances and credits (AR505000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/write-off-balances-and-credits-ar505000/) window, you can view the balances and credits (of appropriately low amounts) of customers for which write-offs are allowed. You can select the documents to be written off. ## Before you start Make sure that reason codes are properly configured and write-offs are enabled. For details, see: [About write-off setup](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/write-off-methods/about-write-off-setup/). ## Write off small balances 1. Go to the [Write-off balances and credits (AR505000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/write-off-balances-and-credits-ar505000/) window. 1. In the **Type** field, select one of the following options: + To write off underpayments: **Balance write-off** + To write off overpayments: **Credit write-off** 1. In the **Doc. date** field, select the date when the write-off will be performed. The system automatically fills in the **Post period** field based on the selected document date. 1. In the **Branch** field, select the branch for which you want to display data. The field is automatically filled with the branch you have access to. 1. Optional: In the **Customer** field, select the customer for which you want to write off small balances from the list of customers for which write-offs are permitted. 1. In the **Reason code** field, select the reason code you want to mark write-off transactions with. The reason code defines the account and subaccount to be used for writing off credits or balances. The field is automatically filled with the default reason code specified in the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. In the table, the system lists the documents for which the balance amount (underpayment or overpayment, depending on the selected write-off type) is below the limit. After you increase the limit amount, you can write off the balances that exceed the default limit. 1. To write off balances for documents, do one of the following: + To write off the small balances for particular documents, select the unnamed check box in the document row for each document, and then click **Process** in the window toolbar. + To write off the small balances for all listed documents, click **Process all** in the window toolbar. After processing has been successfully completed, you can view the batch in the [Journal transactions (GL301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/journal-transactions-gl301000/) window.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Write-off underpayments or overpayments /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/write-off-methods/write-off-underpayments-or-overpayments section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Write-off underpayments or overpayments ## Before you start To be able to write off, you have to enable this in the settings for your customer: [Enable write-offs for customer](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/enable-write-offs-for-customer/). 1. Go to the [Write-off balances and credits (AR505000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/write-off-balances-and-credits-ar505000/) window. 1. In **Type**, select the write-off operation you want to use: 1. **Balance write-off** - to write-off an underpayment. 1. **Credit write-off** - to write-off an overpayment. 1. Select a **customer** by clicking ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg). 1. Optional: Select a **post period** by clicking ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg). 1. Select a **reason code** by clicking ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg). If there is no relevant reason code: [Create reason codes for write-offs](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/write-off-methods/create-reason-codes-for-write-offs/). 1. Go to the table, and select the invoices you want to process. 1. Click: 1. Process the selected invoices, or 1. Process all in the list of invoices / credit notes, and create batches with status **Posted** or **Unposted**. The write-offs are posted to the general ledger.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Multiple price lists /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/multiple-price-lists section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Multiple price lists Manage sales prices - overview /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/multiple-price-lists/manage-sales-prices-overview page Visma Net provides the following mechanisms for maintaining sales prices: 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage sales prices - overview Visma Net provides the following mechanisms for maintaining sales prices: Default prices : By using this straightforward mechanism, you define and maintain a price for each individual item, manually or by using import scenarios. The default price is used for sales. You can use discounts with these prices, if needed. With this mechanism, the retention of price changes is not supported. Price lists : By using this mechanism, you can implement different pricing strategies. You can define a base price list, price lists that apply to a group of customers and a particular customer, promotional price lists, and prices that depend on the quantity of the product. To avoid inconsistency, you should choose just one mechanism for maintaining prices of stock items. Prices defined for the same stock item by using both mechanisms are independent and there is no synchronisation between them. In these topics, you will read about price lists and how you can use them to easily implement any pricing strategy that will increase sales and help your company meet its changing objectives. For details on configuration and maintenance of the default prices, see: [About default prices](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-costs/about-default-prices/).

Related pages

Concepts

About multiple price lists /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/multiple-price-lists/about-multiple-price-lists page In Visma Net, you can maintain multiple price lists for various customer price classes and in multiple currencies, and you can update the lists any time. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About multiple price lists In Visma Net, you can maintain multiple price lists for various customer price classes and in multiple currencies, and you can update the lists any time. A price list is a list of sales prices for goods or services. The prices are expressed in a specific currency and intended for either customers of a specific customer price class or a particular customer. You configure price lists in the Customer ledger workspace, so that even if the Inventory module is not included in your license, you can define non-stock items and maintain prices for them. The system automatically applies these prices to the non-stock items listed on an invoice when the document is being saved. If the Inventory module is enabled in your system (which means that you can configure stock items too), the system applies sales prices to stock and non-stock items on sales orders. In this topic, you will read about price lists, price records, and rules of price application. ## Price list definition In Visma Net, a price list is a selection of records that meet user-defined criteria. By using the [Sales prices (AR202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-prices-ar202000/) window, you define this selection criteria and get the list of records. If you want to use the obtained list of records for editing and mass-calculation of prices, you may create a sales price worksheet based on the selection, by using the **Create price worksheet** button in the window. For details about using worksheets, see [Sales price worksheets (AR202010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-price-worksheets-ar202010/). You can select prices by criteria related to the price record: type, code, stock identifier, and date. You can also select prices by criteria related to stock or item class, price class, work group, and manager responsible for pricing some of the items on the list. The stock-related settings are specified for each item on the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) or [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) window. ## Price record definition In Visma Net each price record is a combination of the price type, price code (if applicable), stock item, unit of measure, price, and currency. Each combination must be unique at any given time. For details, see [About effective period of prices](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/multiple-price-lists/about-effective-period-of-prices/). You can create multiple price records for the same stock item by changing any component of its price record. Additionally, you may create records for promotional prices and for prices that depend on the volume of products being sold. ## Rules for automatic price selection As you have seen in the previous example, you can define multiple prices, each with a different goal, for one stock item. When a user modifies the quantity in a sales order or an invoice, the system searches for applicable prices (that is, those that are valid at the invoice date) for each item as follows: > [!NOTE] > Once the system finds an applicable price, it searches no further. 1. Promotional customer-specific price 1. Customer-specific price 1. Promotional price specific to the customer price class 1. Price for the customer price class 1. Promotional base price 1. Base price 1. Default price > [!NOTE] > If price tiers are defined in the applicable price list, the system applies the price from the tier that applies to the item quantity. A user can update the prices and discounts for an existing document with the **On hold** or **Balanced** status by clicking **Recalculate prices and discounts** (in the **Actions** menu in the window toolbar of the data entry window used to create the document). This option should be used if prices and discounts may have changed since the document was first entered or modified.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

About sales price types /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/multiple-price-lists/about-sales-price-types page In general, by using the price list pricing mechanism, you can create sales prices of the following types: 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About sales price types In general, by using the price list pricing mechanism, you can create sales prices of the following types: + Base: Prices aimed to all customers. These prices are used if no more specific prices are defined. + Specific to a customer price class: Prices aimed to customers that belong to a particular price class. + Specific to a customer: Prices aimed to a particular customer. + Promotional: Prices aimed to draw customers' attention. + Volume-dependent: Prices that depend on the volume of products being sold. > [!NOTE] > A price can be of multiple types simultaneously, for example, promotional, volume-dependent, and specific to a customer. In this topic, you will read about how you create a sales price of each listed type. ## Price types and codes Price types and codes are used to specify the target audience of the price. Each price record you define for a stock item must be assigned a price type and code (components of a price record). You select one of the following price types: + **Base**: You use this price type for prices that you want to include in a base price list. Prices from this price list are used if there are no more specific prices defined (promotional or specific to customers). This price type does not have any price codes. + **Customer price class**: You use this price type for prices that you want to include in a price list aimed at customers of a particular customer price class. This price type also requires a price code to be specified. The price codes are identifiers of customer price classes defined in the system. > [!NOTE] > You use the [Customer price classes (AR208000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-price-classes-ar208000/) window to define a customer price class or a group of customers that may be offered special prices because of their buying habits. For instance, you could define as a class those customers that buy the largest quantities and are offered the most competitive prices. By default, all customers of the same customer price class are charged the same price for the same item. + **Customer**: You use this price type for prices that you want to include in a price list aimed at a particular customer. This price type also requires a price code to be specified. The price codes are identifiers of customer accounts defined in the system. This price type might be needed if you have customers that have unique buying habits even among customers of the same price class, or customers who buy especially large volumes of products. > [!NOTE] > If you set up especially low prices for some customers or if you generally prefer to use customer-specific prices rather than configure customer-specific discounts, you can use the **Ignore line discounts if the Customer-specific price is available** option to instruct the system not to apply the line-level discounts when it applies the customer-specific prices. The option is located on the **Price/discount settings** tab of the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. By using the described price types and codes, you can create different price lists in the [Sales prices (AR202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-prices-ar202000/) window or the [Sales price worksheets (AR202010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-price-worksheets-ar202010/) window. You can sort price records by their type and code, and the resulting selection is a price list that applicable to a group of customers or to a particular customer. ## Promotional prices If your company uses promotions to draw customer attention to new products or to clear some inventory, in Visma Net, you can define promotional prices or temporary prices for specific items. Such prices should have expiration dates after which they are not used. You can define promotional prices one by one by selecting the **Promotion** check box for price records and specifying expiration dates in the [Sales prices (AR202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-prices-ar202000/) window. You can also define promotional prices in bulk by using the functionality of the [Sales price worksheets (AR202010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-price-worksheets-ar202010/) window. ## Volume-dependent prices If your license includes the **Volume pricing** functionality, you can enable it in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. The prices (sales prices and purchase prices) that had been defined before the functionality has been enabled will be automatically redefined as prices for the zero-quantity tiers. Once you have been using the functionality, you should not disable it, because enabling the functionality causes certain changes in the database that cannot be rolled back by disabling the functionality. Consider a simple example of defining sales prices for tiers based on quantities. Your company sells an item at a base price of €100, but you want to encourage your customers to buy more of the item. If the **Volume pricing** functionality is not enabled, the same price is used, regardless of the quantity of the item being purchased. With the functionality enabled, you can define the following quantity tiers: + 0 units: €100 per unit + 5 units: €95 per unit + 10 units: €80 per unit + 50 units: €75 per unit By using the [Sales prices (AR202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-prices-ar202000/) window or the [Sales price worksheets (AR202010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-price-worksheets-ar202010/) window, you can add four price records for the same stock item and specify the break quantity for each price record (in the **Break qty** column) and the respective price. The system selects the prices for items on the document lines by the item quantities and the available price tiers: If a customer buys 4 items, the total is €400 ( €100 per unit); if the customer buys 50 units, the customer total is €3750 (€75 per unit). The process of updating tiered prices is similar to that of updating regular sales prices. Generally, for each tier, you should specify the new break quantity, the price, and the date (we recommend using the same date for all tiers of the price). You can redefine the same number of tiers or add new tiers.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

About effective period of prices /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/multiple-price-lists/about-effective-period-of-prices page A price is effective during some period of time. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About effective period of prices A price is effective during some period of time. In each price record, you define this period with the effective date and the expiration date; both dates are included in the effective period. The period can be open (no effective date or expiration date is specified) or closed (both dates are specified). In this topic, you will read about how the system validates a price record (regular and promotional), both when you add it manually and when you add it by using the worksheet functionality. ## Price record validation when you add the record manually When you add a new price record for a stock item by using the [Sales prices (AR202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-prices-ar202000/) window, the system checks whether the record overlaps in time with existing records that have the same price type, code (if applicable), and currency. If the new record duplicates an existing one, the system flags the record with an error when you attempt to save your changes, until you adjust the date range either of the new record or of an existing one. Consider the following example: In one record, you define a base price in dollars for an stock item that is effective on 04.08.2020, with no expiration date specified. Suppose that you add for the same stock item a record with a new base price in Euros that will be effective on 06.08.2020. The system warns you that the new record duplicates the existing one and cannot be saved. ## Overlap in effective periods To successfully save your changes, you need to close the open period of the existing price record or specify an expiration date that is before the effective period of the new record. In this example, an expiration date of 05.08.2020 is used to fix the overlap. Then you can save the new record. ## Price record validation when you add the record by worksheet By using the [Sales price worksheets (AR202010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-price-worksheets-ar202010/) window, you can add records in bulk or mass-update records by recalculating prices. When you release a worksheet for which you have added new records or updated existing ones, the system checks whether each record overlaps in time with existing records that have the same price type, code (if applicable), and currency, but the check is done within the records of the selected worksheet. The system does not warn you that price records in the worksheet overlap in time with the sales price records; it solves any overlapping automatically. The way the system automatically fixes overlap depends on whether the **Overwrite overlapping prices** check box is selected: + If it is cleared, the system automatically closes the open period of the price record with which a new record overlaps. (That is the same operation that you have to perform manually when you add the price record by using the [Sales prices (AR202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-prices-ar202000/) window.) + If it is selected, the system removes the price records with which a new record overlaps completely and adjusts the periods of the records with which a new record overlaps partially. Consider the following example: Two customer-specific prices are defined for an stock item. The first (€20000) price is effective from 17.08.2020 through 25.8.2020. The second (€22000) price is effective starting on 26.8.2020. Suppose that you want to update prices for this stock item by adding a new price, €23000, which is effective starting on 20.08.2020. The new price record overlaps partially (from 20.08.2020 through 25.8.2020) with the first one shown above and completely (from 26.08.2020 indefinitely into the future) with the second one. Suppose that you create a worksheet with the new price record and select the **Overwrite overlapping prices** check box. When you release the worksheet, the system adjusts the effective period of the first record and overwrites the second one with the new record. ## Validation of promotional price records Promotional price records may overlap in time with non-promotional price records. When you add records manually by using the [Sales prices (AR202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-prices-ar202000/) window, the system validates promotional price records in the same way as it validates regular prices. When you update promotional prices by using the [Sales price worksheets (AR202010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-price-worksheets-ar202010/) window, the **Overwrite overlapping prices** check box is selected by default and cannot be cleared. That is, the system always removes price records with which a new record overlaps completely and adjusts the periods of the records with which a new record overlaps partially.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

About sales price calculation /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/multiple-price-lists/about-sales-price-calculation page Pricing policy is a major factor affecting a company's total income, profit, and competitiveness. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About sales price calculation Pricing policy is a major factor affecting a company's total income, profit, and competitiveness. Companies generally set prices that cover their production costs and bring some profit, while also being low enough to motivate customers to buy more frequently and in greater quantity than they otherwise would. At times, companies pursue short-term pricing strategies for certain products. In Visma Net, you can manually set prices on a per-record basis, or you can mass-calculate sales prices by using the price basis you specify. If your business needs to maintain prices that include a VAT, as with value-added taxes (VATs), you can configure the system to exclude the VAT from the price on sales orders if this VAT does not apply or to recalculate the VAT if a discount was applied. For details, see [About inclusive VAT support](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/manage-defaults/about-inclusive-vat-support/). In this topic, you will read about the price basis used to calculate prices and how to maintain VAT-inclusive prices. ## Price basis While some companies use a cost-plus approach in calculating sales prices, others set prices to achieve specific profit goals. In Visma Net, you can use the approach that makes the most sense at a particular time. In Visma Net, the options for the price basis can be divided into the following groups: + Inventory-related: A cost-plus basis (the **Last cost + mark.up %** or **Avg./std. cost + mark-up %** option) or the manufacturer's suggested retail price ( **MSRP** ). You specify values for these options by using the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window for stock items. For non-stock items only the **Avg./std. cost + mark-up %** option is applicable, and the system uses instead of the average or standard cost the current cost of a non-stock item, which is specified in the **Current cost** field in the [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) window. + Price record-related: The item's current price ( **Source price** ) or pending price ( **Pending price** ). You specify values for these options by using the [Sales price worksheets (AR202010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-price-worksheets-ar202010/) window. Before you start price calculation, make sure that the option you want to use as a price basis has the correct values. ## Calculate prices By using the [Sales price worksheets (AR202010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-price-worksheets-ar202010/) window, you can perform mass calculation of prices for all records in the selected worksheet. > [!NOTE] > Only pending prices can be calculated; the prices that are currently in effect cannot be modified. To calculate the pending prices for the price records in the worksheet, you use the **Calculate pending prices** dialog box, which you invoke by clicking the **Calculate pending prices** button on the table toolbar. In the dialog box, you can select one of the following price bases, in accordance with your company's pricing policies: + **Last cost + mark-up %**: To calculate each pending price based on the stock item's last cost plus the mark-up percentage specified for the item. > [!NOTE] > The option is not applicable for non-stock items. + **Avg./std. cost + mark-up %**: To calculate each pending price based on the stock item's average or standard cost increased by the mark-up percentage specified for the item. In case of non-stock items, the system uses the current cost, instead of the average or standard cost. + **Source price**: To calculate each pending price based on the item's source price (displayed in the **Source price** column). + **MSRP**: To calculate each pending price based on the manufacturer's suggested retail price of the item. + **Pending price**: To calculate the new pending price based on the earlier pending price of the item. If value-added (or similar) taxes are enforced for your business, you can apply a specific percentage to the basis you select to cover additional unassigned costs or to include a specific VAT. Also, you can change the number of decimal places when you calculate pending prices. For a price list intended for end customers, you may want to set prices expressed in integers or with fewer decimal places than are used by the currency for which you calculate pending sales prices. ## Minimal mark-up validation You can configure minimal mark-up validation for prices on the **General settings** tab of the [Sales order preferences (SO101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-order-preferences-so101000/) window. In the **Validate min. profit margin** field, you can select one of the following options: No validation : No mark-up validation is performed for new pending prices. Warning : The system will display a warning when a user enters a pending price that is below the price with the minimum mark-up. Set to minimum : The system will automatically set the price to the value with the minimum mark-up if a user enters a pending price below the price with the minimal mark-up. The mark-up percentage defined for an item class in the [Item classes (IN201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/item-classes-in201000/) window is used as a default value for items of the class. You can override the item class setting for a particular stock item by defining the mark-up percentage on the **Price/cost information** tab for non-stock items by using the [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) window, and for stock items by using the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window. ## VAT-inclusive prices Your company may need to maintain prices that include a VAT. Such prices are typical in countries where value-added taxes are enforced. Among your company's customers may be end customers that must pay a VAT and retail customers that are exempt from paying the VAT. To maintain price lists with taxes included and to prevent charging VAT-exempt customers, take the following steps: + In the [Sales prices (AR202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-prices-ar202000/) window, create a price list with the VAT amount added to prices. + Specify the VAT included in the prices in the **VAT** column of the same window. + Assign customers exempt from the VAT to a VAT zone that doesn't include this VAT, and customers that pay this VAT to a zone that includes it. When you save a sales order created for a customer, the system creates the list of applicable taxes by using the VAT category of each item and the VAT zone of the customer. For each item on the order, the system performs checks and handles prices accordingly: + If the VAT included in the price applies to the line item, the price is used as-is and the VAT is processed as inclusive. + If the VAT included in the price does not apply to the line item, the VAT amount is excluded from the price.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

Sales price worksheets /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/multiple-price-lists/sales-price-worksheets section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Sales price worksheets Click the links below to learn more about a topic you are interested in. Use the breadcrumb links in the upper left corner to see your location, navigate backwards or go to the starting point. About Sales price worksheet - overview /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/multiple-price-lists/sales-price-worksheets/about-sales-price-worksheet-overview page A sales price worksheet is a tool used to update sales price records in bulk. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About Sales price worksheet - overview A sales price worksheet is a tool used to update sales price records in bulk. In Visma Net, you use the [Sales price worksheets (AR202010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-price-worksheets-ar202010/) window for this purpose. You can edit records one by one or apply changes to multiple records at once. Prices defined in a worksheet become effective only when you release the worksheet. In general, you perform the following steps to update sales prices by using the [Sales price worksheets (AR202010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-price-worksheets-ar202010/) window: ## 1. Create a worksheet You create a new worksheet by using the **Add new record** button in the [Sales price worksheets (AR202010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-price-worksheets-ar202010/) window toolbar. Each worksheet has a reference number that the system generates according to the number series defined in the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. A worksheet is created with the **On hold** status and the **Hold** check box selected, which indicates that a user can edit the worksheet but cannot release it yet. You can edit the price records of existing worksheets that have the **On hold** or **Open** status. Also, you can click the **Create price worksheet** button in the [Sales prices (AR202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-prices-ar202000/) window to create a worksheet that is populated with the price records you have selected in this window. ## 2. Populate a worksheet You decide which price records you want to update and add these records to a worksheet. You can populate a worksheet by performing any of the following actions, each of which adds new records to the existing list: + Adding the new price records one by one, by using a standard button in the table toolbar + Deleting the price records one by one, by using a standard button in the table toolbar + Uploading price records from an Excel file, by using a standard button in the table toolbar + Uploading the list of items with their default price information from the Inventory workspace by using the **Add item** button in the table toolbar + Making a copy of existing price records by using the **Copy prices** button in the table toolbar You can edit the added price records and then add more new price records to the worksheet, or window the list of price records first and then proceed to editing. The worksheet should have the **Hold** check box selected (which gives it the **On hold** status). ## 3. Edit price records You can edit price records by performing any of the following actions: + Editing components of price records one by one, including creating tiered prices and changing a unit of measure or price type and code (if needed). Also, you can enter the new prices for the stock items in the list in the **Pending price** column. + Calculating the new pending prices for all price records in the worksheet by using the selected price basis. You can base sales prices in price lists on the manufacturer's suggested retail prices (MSRP), standard or average costs, mark-ups set for particular item classes or inventory price classes, or other rules. To ensure that the appropriate mark-up is achieved, you can configure the system to warn users, when they modify a sales order, that the price is lower than the required minimum mark-up percentage. For details, see [About sales price calculation](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/multiple-price-lists/about-sales-price-calculation/). + Making all the records in the worksheet promotional, by selecting the **Promotional** check box and specifying the expiration date in the top part of the window. When you have finished editing price records, you should clear the **Hold** check box, which gives the worksheet the **Open** status, indicating that the worksheet is ready to be released. With this status, you still can edit price records one by one, but you cannot use mass-editing tools. ## 4. Update price records The price records listed in the worksheet are added to the sales prices records when you release the worksheet by clicking **Release** in the window toolbar. Prices in the released worksheet become effective on the date you have specified in the **Effective date** field of the worksheet. When you release a worksheet, the system validates records, ensuring that the following criteria are met: + Pending prices should be set for all records. If you do not want to update a price, delete the row from the table or specify the current price in the **Pending price** column. + Regular prices for the same combination of a price type, price code, item ID, UoM, and currency may not overlap in time. + Promotional prices for the same combination of a price type, price code, item ID, UoM, and currency may not overlap in time. Note: Promotional and regular prices for the same combination of price type, price code, item ID, unit of measure, and currency may overlap one another in time. For details on price record validity, see [About effective period of prices](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/multiple-price-lists/about-effective-period-of-prices/).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

About Sales price worksheets /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/multiple-price-lists/sales-price-worksheets/about-sales-price-worksheets page By using a sales price worksheet, you can make changes to your prices in a batch. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About Sales price worksheets By using a sales price worksheet, you can make changes to your prices in a batch. ## Before you start If you want to maintain your sales prices using the Sales price worksheets window, you should not use the default prices in the Non-stock items and Stock items windows. See: [Maintain default prices for non-stock items](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stock-and-non-stock-items/maintain-default-prices-for-non-stock-items/) and [Maintain default prices for stock items](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stock-and-non-stock-items/maintain-default-prices-for-stock-items/). You can create a worksheet with promotional prices, and set an expiration date for the promotion. You can also use a worksheet to calculate the pending prices for multiple items by using a price basis you specify yourself. To populate a worksheet, you can manually add new rows, upload prices from an Excel or a.csv file, or use the **Add item** and **Copy prices** buttons. See: [Import data from a local file to a table](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/online-help/shared-files/import-data-from-file-to-table-task/). When you use the **Customer** or **Customer price class** price type, you must also select a **price code**.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Create a sales price worksheet /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/multiple-price-lists/sales-price-worksheets/create-a-sales-price-worksheet section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create a sales price worksheet 1. Go to the [Sales price worksheets (AR202010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-price-worksheets-ar202010/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. Write a **description** for the new sales price worksheet. 1. To add items to the worksheet, you can: + Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) in the table toolbar and select the **item ID** you want to add to the worksheet. + Click **Add item** in the table toolbar. In the **Add item to worksheet** pop-up window, you can select the desired **item IDs** and click **Add** or **Add and close**. + Click **Copy prices** in the table toolbar. In the pop-up window, you can select the source and destination price type of the items you want to copy to the new price worksheet, and define the effective date of the prices. Click **Copy** to copy. + Click ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) to open the **File upload** dialog box. You can locate and import local files, Excel spreadsheets (.xlsx), and.csv files. See: [Import data from a local file to a table](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/online-help/shared-files/import-data-from-file-to-table-task/). 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). If you want to use promotional prices, select the **Promotional** check box and enter the promotion's **expiration date**.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

Add records for multiple items to a worksheet /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/multiple-price-lists/sales-price-worksheets/add-records-for-multiple-items-to-a-worksheet section Use this window to add price records for particular items to a worksheet by copying their default prices. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Add records for multiple items to a worksheet Use this window to add price records for particular items to a worksheet by copying their default prices. 1. Go to the [Sales price worksheets (AR202010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-price-worksheets-ar202010/) window. 1. By using the standard functionality of the window, create a new worksheet or open an existing one. 1. In the table toolbar, click **Add item**. 1. In the **Add item to worksheet dialog box**, do the following: 1. To view the list of stock items for which you want to create price records, specify selection criteria in the Selection area. The following criteria are available: + **Item**: Start typing in the field, and the system displays the list of stock items that contain the string in their ID or description. Alternatively, you can select the stock item. + **Item class ID**: Select the ID of the class of stock or non-stock stock items that you want to add to a worksheet. Leave the field blank to add items of multiple item classes. + **Price class ID**: Select the item price class of the items that you want to add to a worksheet. You can leave the field blank to add items in multiple item price classes. + **Product manager** and **Me**: You can use these criteria as follows: + Select the **Me** check box to add items assigned to you. + Clear the **Me** check box and select a username to add items assigned to the user. + Leave the field blank to add items assigned to multiple users of the selected price work group or all groups. + **Work group** and **My**: You can use these criteria as follows: + Select the **My** check box to add items assigned to your price work group (or to a selected user in the group). + Clear the **My** check box and select a price work group in the field to add items assigned to the price work group (or to a particular price manager, if you select one, in the selected group). + Leave the field blank and clear the check box to add items assigned to multiple price work groups. 1. In the **Price type to add** section, do the following: Values specified in this section will be applied to all new price records if you click **Add** or **Add and close**. 1. In the **Price type** field, select the type of the price. The following options are available: + **Base**: Select this price type to add base price records. Base prices are used if there are no more specific prices defined (promotional or customer-specific). For this price type, you do not need to enter a price code. + **Customer**: Select this price type to add customer-specific price records. For this price type, you must select a price code in the **Price code** cell. In this case, the price code is an identifier of a customer account defined in the system. + **Customer price class**: Select this price type to add price records specific to a price class. For this price type, you must select a price code in the **Price code** cell. In this case, the price code is an identifier of the customer price class defined in the system. 1. If you have selected *Base* in the **Price type** field, skip this step; otherwise, in the **Price code** field, select a price code. 1. In the **Currency** field, select the currency of the price. The list of available currencies is defined in the Currency management workspace. 1. In the table, select the unlabeled check boxes next to the stock items for which you want to add price records. 1. Do one of the following: + Click **Add** to add price records for the selected stock items and proceed with the item selection. + Click **Add and close** to add price records for the selected stock items and close the dialog box + Click **Cancel** to close the dialog box without adding price records for the selected stock items. 1. In the window toolbar, click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

Add a record to a worksheet /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/multiple-price-lists/sales-price-worksheets/add-a-record-to-a-worksheet section On the Sales price worksheets (AR202010) window, you can add new price record to a worksheet. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Add a record to a worksheet On the Sales price worksheets (AR202010) window, you can add new price record to a worksheet. For more information: [Sales price worksheets (AR202010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-price-worksheets-ar202010/). 1. Go to the [Sales price worksheets (AR202010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-price-worksheets-ar202010/) window. 1. By using the standard functionality of the window, create a new worksheet or open an existing one. 1. In the table, do the following: 1. Add a row. In the **Price type** column of the new row, select the type of this price, which is one of the following options: + **Base**: Select this price type to add a base price record. Base prices are used if there are no more specific prices defined (promotional or customer-specific). For this price type, you do not need to specify a price code. + **Customer**: Select this price type to add a customer-specific price record. For this price type, you must select a price code in the **Price code** column. In this case, the price code is an identifier of a customer account defined in the system. + **Customer price class**: Select this price type to add a price record specific to a price class. For this price type, you must select a price code in the **Price code** column. In this case, the price code is an identifier of a customer price class defined in the system. 1. If you have selected the **Base** option in the **Price type** column, skip this step; otherwise, in the **Price code** column of the row, select a price code (as described in the previous sub step). 1. In the **Item ID** column, select the identifier of the stock item you want to add the price for. When you make this selection, the system fills in the **Description** column with the description of the selected stock item. It also fills in the **Source price** column with the default price of the item. 1. In the **UoM** column, select the unit of measure in which you want to sell the stock item. The list of available units of measure for a stock item is defined in the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window for stock items (if the Inventory module is enabled) and the [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) window for non-stock items. 1. Optional: In the **Break qty.** column, specify the minimum quantity of the product for which this price is valid. This column is displayed if the **Volume pricing** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. 1. In the **Pending price** column, specify the sales price for the selected stock item. 1. In the **Currency** column, select the currency in which the price is expressed. The list of available currencies is defined in the Currency management 1. Optional: In the **VAT** column, select the VAT whose amount is included in the sales price. 1. In the window toolbar, click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

Copy prices to a worksheet /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/multiple-price-lists/sales-price-worksheets/copy-prices-to-a-worksheet section You can use the Sales price worksheets (AR202010) window to copy to a worksheet the price records of items that meet particular criteria. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Copy prices to a worksheet You can use the Sales price worksheets (AR202010) window to copy to a worksheet the price records of items that meet particular criteria. For more information: [Sales price worksheets (AR202010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-price-worksheets-ar202010/). You can use the [Sales price worksheets (AR202010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-price-worksheets-ar202010/) window to copy to a worksheet the price records of items that meet particular criteria. For the copied price records, you can change the currency, price type, and code. 1. Go to the [Sales price worksheets (AR202010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-price-worksheets-ar202010/) window. 1. By using the standard functionality of this window, create a new worksheet or open an existing one. For details, see: [Create a worksheet](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/multiple-price-lists/price-list-maintenance/create-a-worksheet/). 1. Click **Copy prices** in the table toolbar. 1. In the **Copy prices dialog box** that is brought up, do the following: 1. In the **Source** area of the dialog box, specify the selection criteria the system uses to window the list of stock items for which you want to copy price records: + In the **Price type** field, select one of the following options as the type of the price records to be copied: + **Base**: To copy base price records. For this price type, you do not need to specify a price code. + **Customer**: To copy customer-specific price records. For this price type, you must select a price code in the **Price code** field. In this case, the price codes are the identifiers of the customer accounts defined in the system. + **Customer price class**: To copy price records specific to a price class. For this price type, you must select a price code in the **Price code** field. In this case, the price codes are the identifiers of the customer price classes defined in the system. + If you have selected **Base** in the **Price type** field, skip this step; otherwise, in the **Price code** field, select a price code, as described above. + In the **Source currency** field, select the currency of the price records to be copied. + In the **Effective as of** field, select the date that the effective date of the item prices should match. + Optional: Select the **Promotional prices** check box if you want to copy promotional price records. 1. In the **Destination** area, do the following: The values specified in this area will be applied to all new price records when you copy the prices. 1. In the **Price type** field, select the type of the price, which is one of the following options: + **Base**: To add base price records. Base prices are used if there are no more specific prices defined (promotional or customer-specific). For this price type, you don't need to specify a price code. + **Customer**: To add customer-specific price records. For this price type, you must select a price code in the **Price code** field. In this case, the price codes are the identifiers of the customer accounts defined in the system. + **Customer price class**: To add price records specific to a price class. For this price type, you must select a price code in the **Price code** field. In this case, the price codes are the identifiers of the customer price classes defined in the system. 1. If you have selected **Base** in the **Price type** field, skip this step; otherwise, in the **Price code** field, select a price code, as described above. 1. In the **Destination currency** field, select the currency of the price. 1. If the **Source currency** and **Destination currency** values differ, in the **Currency conversion** area, do the following: + In the **Rate type** field, select the rate type to be used for currency conversion. + In the **Currency effective date** field, select the date when the exchange rate for the destination currency becomes effective. 1. Do one of the following: + Click **Copy** to add to the worksheet the copied price records with the new values and close the dialog box. + Click **Cancel** to close the dialog box without adding price records. 1. In the window toolbar, click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

Add promotional prices /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/multiple-price-lists/sales-price-worksheets/add-promotional-prices section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Add promotional prices 1. Go to the [Sales price worksheets (AR202010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-price-worksheets-ar202010/) window. 1. By using the functionality of this window, create a new worksheet or open an existing one. For details, see: [Create a worksheet](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/multiple-price-lists/price-list-maintenance/create-a-worksheet/). 1. Populate the worksheet with the price records you want to make promotional by using any of the following procedures: + [Add a record to a worksheet](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/multiple-price-lists/sales-price-worksheets/add-a-record-to-a-worksheet/) + [Add records for multiple items to a worksheet](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/multiple-price-lists/sales-price-worksheets/add-records-for-multiple-items-to-a-worksheet/) + [Copy prices to a worksheet](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/multiple-price-lists/sales-price-worksheets/copy-prices-to-a-worksheet/) 1. Update prices with the values that are becoming promotional, by specifying their values in the **Pending price** column for each record or by following the [Calculate pending prices in a worksheet](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/multiple-price-lists/sales-price-worksheets/calculate-pending-prices-in-a-worksheet/) procedure. 1. Select the **Promotional** check box to mark all price records in the worksheet as promotional. 1. In the **Effective date** field, select the date when the defined prices should become effective. For details, see: [About effective period of prices](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/multiple-price-lists/about-effective-period-of-prices/). 1. In the **Expiration date** field, select the date when the defined prices expires. 1. In the window toolbar, click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). You can release the worksheet to make defined promotional prices effective.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

Calculate pending prices in a worksheet /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/multiple-price-lists/sales-price-worksheets/calculate-pending-prices-in-a-worksheet section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Calculate pending prices in a worksheet ## Before you start Be sure that you have a populated worksheet with the **Hold** status that includes the records for which you want to calculate prices, and that this list of price records meets your requirements. Also, make sure that the options you want to use as a price basis have the correct values. 1. Go to the [Sales price worksheets (AR202010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-price-worksheets-ar202010/) window. 1. By using the standard functionality of this window, create a new worksheet and populate it with the price records or open an existing worksheet. For details, see: [Create a worksheet](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/multiple-price-lists/price-list-maintenance/create-a-worksheet/). 1. Click the **Calculate pending prices** button in the table toolbar. 1. In the **Calculate pending prices dialog box** that is brought up, do the following: 1. In the **Price adjustment** area of the dialog box, specify the price increase or decrease as a percentage of the basis. Do the following: + In the **% of original price** field, enter the percentage at which the new pending prices will be calculated by using the selected price basis. + In the **Decimal places** field, type the number of places after the decimal point that will be shown for prices. + Select the **Update with zero price when basis is zero** check box if you want the pending price parameter of the price record to be updated with the value zero if the selected price basis for this record is zero. 1. In the **Price basis** area, specify the basis for calculating new pending prices by selecting one of the following options: + **Last cost + mark-up %**: Select this option if you want to calculate prices based on the stock items' last costs increased by the mark-up percentage specified for the items. > [!NOTE] > The option is not applicable for non-stock items. + **Average/standard cost + mark-up %**: Select this option if you want to calculate prices based on the stock items' average/standard costs increased by the mark-up percentage specified for the items. In case of non-stock items, the system uses the current cost, instead of the average or standard cost. + **Source price**: Select this option if you want to calculate prices based on the item's source price (displayed in the **Source price** column). + **MSRP**: Select this option if you want to calculate prices based on the manufacturer's suggested retail price. + **Pending price**: Select this option if you want to recalculate pending prices based on currently pending prices. + **Replacement cost**: An option that you select to calculate pending prices based on the item's replacement cost. 1. Do one of the following: + Click **Update** to update the pending prices with the new values. + Click **Cancel** to close the dialog box without updating price records. 1. In the window toolbar, click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). After you have updated the price records with the new pending prices, you can release the worksheet to make effective the pending prices of the items.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

Calculate pending prices for items /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/multiple-price-lists/sales-price-worksheets/calculate-pending-prices-for-items page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Calculate pending prices for items 1. Go to the [Sales price worksheets (AR202010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-price-worksheets-ar202010/) window. 1. In the **Reference no.** field, select the price list for which you want to calculate pending prices. 1. In the **Effective date** field, enter a date from which the pending prices will be effective. It's automatically set to today's date. 1. Optional: When you select the option **Overwrite overlapping prices**, the prices whose effective dates overlap with the effective dates of the worksheet will be overwritten by the prices in the worksheet. 1. Click **Calculate pending prices**. 1. In the pop-up window, select the percentage of the price adjustment in the **% of original price** field. For example: if you want to raise the prices by 10%, enter 110. 1. Select the **price basis** of the adjustment. 1. Click **Update**. 1. Deselect the **Hold** check box. 1. Click **Release**. The pending prices will become effective on the date you entered in the **Effective date** field. > [!NOTE] > If you want to use promotional prices, select the **Promotional** check box and enter the promotion's **expiration date**. Price list maintenance /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/multiple-price-lists/price-list-maintenance section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Price list maintenance About Sales prices /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/multiple-price-lists/price-list-maintenance/about-sales-prices page In the Sales prices (AR202000) window, you can maintain and review the sales prices for your non-stock items. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About Sales prices In the Sales prices (AR202000) window, you can maintain and review the sales prices for your non-stock items. For more information: [Sales prices (AR202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-prices-ar202000/). If you are using the Inventory module, you can also maintain your stock items. In addition, you can maintain your customer-specific or customer price class-specific prices. The built-in **BASE** class is used for all customers that are not assigned to any specific price class. For more information on how to use customer price classes, see [Add a customer price class](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/multiple-price-lists/price-list-maintenance/add-a-customer-price-class/). The changes you make in this window will become effective immediately: you are not able to retain a price history. If the option **Always calculate the price from the base currency** in the Customer ledger preferences window is selected, the price in any foreign currency is calculated based on the price expressed in the base currency. ## Manage sales prices Visma Net provides the following mechanisms for sales prices management: 1. **Default prices**: Define and maintain the default sales price for each individual item in the Non-stock items or Stock items windows. See: [Maintain default prices for non-stock items](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stock-and-non-stock-items/maintain-default-prices-for-non-stock-items/) and [Maintain default prices for stock items](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stock-and-non-stock-items/maintain-default-prices-for-stock-items/). You can use discounts with these prices. 1. **Sales prices**: Implement different pricing strategies. You can define a base price list, price lists that applies to a customer class or a particular customer, promotional price lists, and prices that depend on the quantity of the product. See: [Maintain and review sales prices](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/multiple-price-lists/price-list-maintenance/maintain-and-review-sales-prices/). 1. **Sales price worksheets**: Use the list of records created in the Sales prices window to edit and mass-calculate prices with Sales price worksheets. See: [Create a sales price worksheet](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/multiple-price-lists/sales-price-worksheets/create-a-sales-price-worksheet/). You can edit records one by one, or to apply changes to multiple the records at once. You can also calculate pending prices for your items. See: [Calculate pending prices for items](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/multiple-price-lists/sales-price-worksheets/calculate-pending-prices-for-items/). If you are using Sales prices and/or Sales price worksheets to maintain your sales prices, do not use the default prices, and vice versa.

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

Add a price record /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/multiple-price-lists/price-list-maintenance/add-a-price-record section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Add a price record 1. Go to the [Sales prices (AR202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-prices-ar202000/) window. 1. In the table, do the following: 1. Add a row. In the **Price type** column of the new row, select one of the following price types: + **Base**: A base price record. Base prices are used if there are no more specific prices defined (promotional or customer-specific). You do not need to specify a price code for this price type. + **Customer**: A customer-specific price record. For this price type, you must select a price code in the **Price code** column. In this case, the price code should be an ID of a customer account defined in the system. + **Customer price class**: A price record specific to a price class. For this price type, you must select a price code. In this case, the price code should be an ID of a customer price class defined in the system. 1. If you have selected the **Base** option in the **Price type** column, skip this step; otherwise, in the **Price code** column of the row, select a price code. 1. In the **Item ID** column, select the ID of the item you want to add a price for. The **Description** column is filled in by default with the description of the selected item. 1. In the **UoM** column, select the unit of measure in which you want to sell the item. The list of available units of measure for an item is defined by using the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window for stock items (if the Inventory module is enabled). For non-stock items, the units of measure are defined in the [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) window. 1. Optional: In the **Promotion** column, if you want to mark the price record as promotional, select the check box. 1. Optional: In the **Break quantity** column, specify the minimum quantity of the product for which the price is valid. This column is displayed if the **Volume pricing** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. 1. In the **Price** column, specify the sales price for the selected stock item. 1. In the **Currency** column, select the currency in which the price should be expressed. The list of available currencies is defined in the Currency management workspace. 1. In the **Effective date** column, select the date when the defined price becomes effective. For details, see: [About effective period of prices](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/multiple-price-lists/about-effective-period-of-prices/). 1. Optional: In the **Expiration date** column, select the date when the defined price expires. 1. In the window toolbar, click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Create a worksheet /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/multiple-price-lists/price-list-maintenance/create-a-worksheet section You can create a sales price worksheet in two different ways: 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create a worksheet You can create a sales price worksheet in two different ways: + To create a new worksheet that is populated with the price records you have selected, you use the [Sales prices (AR202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-prices-ar202000/) window. + To create a new empty worksheet to be populated, you use the [Sales price worksheets (AR202010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-price-worksheets-ar202010/) window. ## Create a populated worksheet 1. Go to the [Sales prices (AR202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-prices-ar202000/) window. 1. In the Selection area of the window, specify the criteria that the price records to be listed should meet. We recommend that you specify the date for which you want to get the price records in the **Effective as of** field. The database may contain price records that differ only by price and date. When you try to create a worksheet, the system will force you to specify the date for which you want to get price records if the resulting list of records contains such similar records. 1. If needed, adjust the resulting list of price records by deleting or adding particular records. 1. In the window toolbar, click the **Create price worksheet** button. This brings up the [Sales price worksheets (AR202010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-price-worksheets-ar202010/) window, where you can continue working with a price worksheet containing all prices matching the criteria that you have selected in the [Sales prices (AR202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-prices-ar202000/) window. By default, the new worksheet has the **On hold** status and the current business date. ## Create an empty worksheet 1. Go to the [Sales price worksheets (AR202010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-price-worksheets-ar202010/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) in the window toolbar. 1. Optional: In the **Reference no** field, specify the ID. If the field contains the `` placeholder, it means that the system will automatically generate a new number when you save the worksheet. 1. Optional: In the **Description** field, type the description of the new worksheet. 1. In the window toolbar, click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). The new worksheet has the **On hold** status and the current business date, which can be changed any time.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Add a customer price class /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/multiple-price-lists/price-list-maintenance/add-a-customer-price-class section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Add a customer price class ## Before you start Customer classes group customers by the price level that is offered to them. If you do not create price classes, all customers are assigned to the BASE price class. 1. Go to the [Customer price classes (AR208000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-price-classes-ar208000/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) to add a new row. 1. Enter a unique identifier for the price class. You can use up to 10 characters, both letters and numbers. 1. Enter a detailed description of the class. You can use up to 50 characters, both letters and numbers. 1. In the **Sort order** column, enter a number that will represent the order in which the class will be displayed on reports. > [!NOTE] > The price class with the lowest value will be displayed in the first row of the price classes table in the [Customer price classes (AR208000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-price-classes-ar208000/) window. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

Edit or delete a customer price class /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/multiple-price-lists/price-list-maintenance/edit-or-delete-a-customer-price-class section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Edit or delete a customer price class 1. Go to the [Customer price classes (AR208000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-price-classes-ar208000/) window. 1. Select a row that you want to edit. 1. To edit a price class, double-click in the columns you want to change. 1. Make your changes. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). To delete a row, select it, click ![icon-delete](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-delete.png) and then ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

Maintain and review sales prices /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/multiple-price-lists/price-list-maintenance/maintain-and-review-sales-prices section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Maintain and review sales prices 1. Go to the [Sales prices (AR202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-prices-ar202000/) window. 1. Go to the drop-down list, and select the **price type** you want to review the sales price information for. 1. Use the other fields to filter your item list. > [!NOTE] > If you leave them empty, you will get a list with the sales prices of the selected type for all items. 1. Optional: In the **Item class** field, select the item class for which you want to review sales price information. You can also click **Me** to filter on the prices you have entered as a price manager, or **My** to filter on the price work groups you belong to. 1. Manually define new prices for the items you wish to edit. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) in the table toolbar, to add a new item. 1. Fill in the information for the item. 1. Optional: You can define promotional prices by selecting the **Promotion** check box for the desired items. Enter the promotional price in the **Price** field and the period of the promotion in the **Effective date** and **Expiration date** fields. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). > [!NOTE] > To add the items and their prices to a price list, click **Create price worksheets**. This will open the Sales price worksheets window. For more information, see [About Sales price worksheets](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/multiple-price-lists/sales-price-worksheets/about-sales-price-worksheets/).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Manage discounts /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-discounts section In Visma Net, your company can configure discounts of various types, which can be applied to sales orders if the Inventory functionality (which includes the Inventory, Inventory, and Purchases workspaces) is enabled in your system. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage discounts In Visma Net, your company can configure discounts of various types, which can be applied to sales orders if the Inventory functionality (which includes the Inventory, Inventory, and Purchases workspaces) is enabled in your system. If the Inventory functionality is not enabled, discounts can be applied to invoices. These topics gives an overview of the discount-related functionality. About discounts /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-discounts/about-discounts page Discounts can be used as effective tools of your organisation's overall marketing strategy, for example, to stimulate sales of new products, promote new branches of the organisation, and accelerate sales of the items that are becoming obsolete. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About discounts Discounts can be used as effective tools of your organisation's overall marketing strategy, for example, to stimulate sales of new products, promote new branches of the organisation, and accelerate sales of the items that are becoming obsolete. In Visma Net, your company can configure various types of discounts: unconditional or condition-based, simple or tiered, and applied automatically or manually. ## Documents to apply discounts You configure discounts in the Customer ledger workspace, so that even if the Inventory module (which includes the Inventory, Inventory, and Purchases workspaces) is not included in your license, you will be able to configure discounts. If the Inventory module is not enabled, the system automatically applies the best discounts to an invoice when the document is being saved. If the Inventory module is enabled in your system, the system applies discounts to sales orders. ## Stages of configuring discounts You can create discounts in the following two stages: 1. Designing **discount codes** by using the [Discount codes (AR209000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/discount-codes-ar209000/) window, where for each discount code you specify the type of the discount and the type of conditions for this discount application. 1. Creating **discount series** for each discount code by using the [Discounts (AR209500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/discounts-ar209500/) window. A discount series defines a particular discount percent, fixed amount, or quantity of a free item; the series also defines the particular conditions of application. For more information, see [About discount series](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-discounts/about-discount-series/). This topic describes the options available at the stage of designing the discount codes. ## Types of discounts In Visma Net, you can create discounts of the following general types: Line-level discounts : that apply to a document line: These discounts may be based on the line amount or quantity of the line, and they can be expressed as percentages or fixed amounts. Line-level discounts can be applied to the price of item or extended price of the item (line amount), depending on the option selected on the **Price/discount settings** tab of the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. Group-level discounts : that may apply to multiple lines of the same order. These discounts may be based on the amount or quantity that is the sum of multiple lines, and they can be expressed as percentages, fixed amounts, or specific quantities of free items. Because some of the discounts can be free items, the system cannot determine which of the group discounts is the best, so it applies all of those discounts that are applicable by the discount conditions. Document-level discounts : that apply to the document total: These discounts may be based on the document total, and they can be expressed as percentages or fixed amounts. ## Conditional and unconditional discounts You can configure the discounts of all levels to be applied unconditionally or to be applied only if specific conditions are met. In the Discount codes window, for each discount code, you can specify whether the discount is unconditional or is based on specific conditions; for conditional discounts, you can select the type of conditions to be used to determine whether a particular document is affected by the discounts with this discount code. ### The document-level discounts can have the following types of conditions + **Customer and branch** + **Customer** + **Customer price class** + **Customer price class and branch** ### The line-level and group-level discounts can have the following types of conditions + **Warehouse** + **Warehouse and item** + **Warehouse and customer** + **Warehouse and item price class** + **Warehouse and customer price class** + **Item** + **Item price class** + **Customer** + **Customer and item** + **Customer price class** + **Customer and item price class** + **Customer price class and item** + **Customer price class and item price class** + **Branch** + **Unconditional** Once you have defined the discount codes, when you create discount series in the [Discounts (AR209500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/discounts-ar209500/) window, you can specify particular conditions of the selected type. For instance, if a document-level discount is intended to promote a new branch to valuable customers, you can specify this branch and the particular customer class as conditions for this discount series. If you need to clean up a warehouse, you can create discounts that apply only to orders to be fulfilled from this particular warehouse. ## Automatic and manual discounts The discounts with the **Manual** check box selected will not be applied automatically or selected as the best available when the user saves the document. Manual discounts can be configured, for example, for rebates or for coupons. You can apply a manual discount to a particular document by using the appropriate window, which can be one of the following windows: + Customer invoices + Cash sales + Sales orders + Sales invoices ## Discount series The particular details and conditions of application for each discount code are defined by discount series, which you can create by using the [Discounts (AR209500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/discounts-ar209500/) window. For more information, see [About discount series](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-discounts/about-discount-series/). You can decide whether you want to use auto-numbering for the series associated with each discount code. If you do, the system will assign a series ID to each series automatically. By default, the discount code is used as a prefix for generating series IDs; alternatively, you can specify (in the **Last number** column) another string to be used as a prefix for auto-numbering.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

About discount series /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-discounts/about-discount-series page Many companies offer their customers discounts that depend on the total quantities of items, the quantities of specific items, the document total amounts, or specific line amounts. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About discount series Many companies offer their customers discounts that depend on the total quantities of items, the quantities of specific items, the document total amounts, or specific line amounts. In Visma Net, you create discounts in the following stages: 1. Defining discount codes for all types of discounts used in your organisation by using the Discount codes (AR209000) window. A discount code defines broad characteristics of the discount, such as whether it is applied automatically or manually, what level the discount is applicable at ( **Document**, **Group** of lines, or **Line** ), and whether it is unconditional or conditional. If a discount code is conditional, you also specify on this window what types of conditions (customer, item, customer price class, warehouse, or item price class) should be used to determine whether the discount can be applied to a document. For more information, see [About discounts](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-discounts/about-discounts/). 1. Creating multiple discount series for each discount code by using the [Discounts (AR209500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/discounts-ar209500/) window. A discount series defines the particular discount percent or the fixed discount amount applicable to a document if the document details match the discount application conditions. Discount series may define discounts that are **updatable** or **promotional** and **simple** or **tiered**. Multiple series of the same discount can be effective at the same time only if they have non-intersecting sets of conditions. For instance, you could define a line-level discount that is conditional and applies to items, and you can configure the discount series to have the same start date but apply to different items. ## Discount series details For each discount code, you can create multiple discount series by using the [Discounts (AR209500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/discounts-ar209500/) window. Generally, you should enter a unique ID for each series. If auto-numbering is configured for the discount code, when you create a new series for this discount code, the system assigns its series ID automatically. By default, the discount code is used as a prefix for generating series IDs. If auto-numbering is not configured for the discount code, you should enter a unique ID for each series. For each discount series, you specify the following: + Whether the discount is a promotional discount (and has an expiration date) or an updatable discount. + How the discount is expressed: as a percentage, an amount, or a certain quantity of a free item. + What are the particular items, customers, item classes, warehouses, and so forth to which the discount may be applied; the types of conditions are defined by the discount code. For instance, if the discount code was defined for discounts to be applied to items, the [Discounts (AR209500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/discounts-ar209500/) window will have the **Items** tab, which you can use to list the particular items to which each series is applicable. + How the discount is tiered (if applicable): by amount (for discount codes of all types) or by quantity (for only discount codes of the **Line** and **Group** types). Each discount series has an effective (start) date and can be applied only on or after this date. ## Simple and tiered discounts Within a series, you can configure a **simple** discount, which is applicable to any amount or quantity, or a **tiered** discount, for which you can specify different per cents or fixed amounts based on the quantities of items or on the amounts. To configure tiers for a discount, you specify break points that define the ranges of amounts or quantities for which different discount per cents, amounts, or quantities of free items are applicable. This section gives some examples of discount series. See [About discount calculation](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-discounts/about-discount-calculation/) for more details about how discount amounts are calculated. A simple series can be defined in the following way: Whether the series break points are specified as amounts or quantities, set **0** as the first and only break point. An example of how you define such a series for a document-level discount based on the total amount follows: + 0: 10% discount Then, if conditions of the discount application are met for a document, no matter what the document total is, the discount of 10% will be applied. + 100 units: 5% discount + 200 units: 7% discount + 300 units: 10% discount Consider a series for a fixed-amount discount based on the document total, with tiers defined by amounts (in U.S. currency). The series can be specified as follows: + €1000: €10 discount + €2000: €25 discount + €3000: €40 discount ## Updatable and promotional discounts A discount series can define an **updatable** discount or a **promotional** discount. Promotional discounts are effective over a limited time, so such series should have start dates and expiration dates. After the expiration date, the promotional discounts are not applicable. > [!NOTE] > To create a promotional series, always select the **Promotional** check box. Updatable series or series for which the **Promotional** check boxes are not selected—have only start (effective) dates. However, for each updatable series, you can have multiple versions: + The **active** version, which is the one that defines the discount currently in effect + The **pending** version, which is the one that defines the discount to be in effect starting on the **Pending** date + The **last** version, which is the one that defined the discount that was in effect before the current discount You cannot create all of these versions for the series at the same time. For the series, you can specify new break amounts (or quantities) as pending amounts (or quantities), and the new effective date as the pending date. When the new start date has arrived, you can update the current series with the pending values. Once you update the series by using the [Update discounts - reference information](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/update-discounts-ar502500/) window, the currently active series version becomes the last version, and the pending version becomes the active one.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

About customer discounts and series for discounts /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-discounts/about-customer-discounts-and-series-for-discounts page You use this window to define the series for the customer discount codes that you have set up. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About customer discounts and series for discounts You use this window to define the series for the customer discount codes that you have set up. See: [Add discount codes](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-discounts/add-discount-codes/). A **discount series** specifies how the system calculates a discount, based on the amount or quantity of the line item or on the document-amount. It is made up out of a list of break points. Each breakpoint specifies a range of line amounts, line quantities, or document amounts qualified for the specific discount amount or percentage. Many companies offer their customers discounts based on the total quantity of all items, specific items, the total document-amount, or amount of specific lines. ## The stages of defining customer discounts In Visma Net, you create discounts in two stages: 1. In the Discount codes window, define the following characteristics for all types of discounts used in your organisation. + Unconditional or conditional + Conditions + Automatic or manual + Application level (documents, groups, or lines). For more information, see [The principles of customer discounts](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-discounts/the-principles-of-customer-discounts/). 1. In the Discounts window, create discount series for each discount code. A discount series defines a discount that can be updated or is promotional, and simple or tiered. Multiple series of the same discount can only be effective at the same time if they have non-intersecting sets of conditions. For example: a line-level discount is defined as a conditional discount that applies to items. You can configure the series to have the same start date, but apply to different items. ## About the different discount series For each discount code, you can create multiple discount series, as long as you use a unique identifier for each series. If you have configured auto-numbering for the discount code, the system automatically assigns its series ID when you create a new series for this discount code. By default, the discount code is used as a prefix for generating series IDs. Alternatively, you can specify another string to be used as a prefix for auto-numbering. For each discount series, you specify the following: + How the discount is tiered: **by amount** (for discount codes of all types) or **by quantity** (only for the line and group discount code types). + How the discount is expressed: as a percentage, as an amount, or as a certain quantity of free items. + Whether the discount is a promotional discount with an expiration date, or whether it is an updatable discount. + Which conditions apply. The types of conditions are defined by the discount code. For example: if you have decided that the discount code should apply discounts to specific items, you can see the **Items** tab in the Discounts window. On this tab, you can create a list of items to which each series is applicable. Each discount series has an effective (start) date and will apply only on and after this date. ## Simple and tiered discounts You can enter a simple discount within a series that you can apply to any amount or quantity, or enter a tiered discount based on quantities of items/amounts. In order to configure tiers for a discount, you specify break points to define a range of amounts or quantities. For each range you can apply different discount percentages, amounts, or quantities of free items. For more information on how the system calculates discount amounts, see [Calculate document-level discounts with tiers defined by amounts](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-discounts/calculate-document-level-discounts-with-tiers-defined-by-amounts/) and [Calculate line-level discounts for tiers defined by amounts](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-discounts/calculate-line-level-discounts-for-tiers-defined-by-amounts/). If you want to specify the series break points as amounts or quantities, you set 0 as the first break point, as in the following example: + 0: 10% discount As an example of tiered discounts, consider a discount that is based on the quantity of goods purchased. If you want a discount series with three tiers you can specify it like this: + 100 units: 5% discount + 200 units: 7% discount + 300 units: 10% discount Consider a series for a discount based on the document total and tiered by amount (in GBP). You can specify the series as follows: + £1000: £10 discount + £2000: £25 discount + £3000: £40 discount ## Updateable and promotional discounts A discount series can define updateable or promotional discounts. Promotional discounts are effective for a limited time period. You need to set start dates and expiration dates. After the expiration date, the promotional discounts no longer apply. > [!NOTE] > If you want to create a promotional series, select the **Promotional** check box in the Discounts window. If you **do not** select the **Promotional** check box, it means series can be updated. They only have the start (effective) date. However, for each series that can be updated, you can have multiple versions: + The active version: the discount that is currently in effect. + The pending version: the discount will be in effect starting on the pending date. + The last version: the discount that previously was in effect before the current discount. You cannot create all such versions of a series at the same time. You can specify new break amounts (or quantities) as pending amounts (or quantities) and the new effective date as the pending date. Then, when the new start date arrives, you can update the current series with the pending values. Once you update the series in the **Update discounts** pop-up window in the Discounts window, the active series version becomes the last version, and the pending version becomes the active one.

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

About Discount codes /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-discounts/about-discount-codes page In this window you can add, edit, view, and delete the discount codes defined in your company. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About Discount codes In this window you can add, edit, view, and delete the discount codes defined in your company. To complete the discount configuration, you must specify discount series for each discount code in the [Discounts (AR209500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/discounts-ar209500/) window. See: [The principles of customer discounts](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-discounts/the-principles-of-customer-discounts/). Click one of the drop-down lists below for more information about that subject. ## The order in which Visma Net applies customer discounts When you save a document, customer discounts of all levels are applied to the document automatically, except for the discounts marked as manual. This topic tells you in which order the system applies the discounts. ## The application order for automatic discounts You do not have to specify the order of application for automatic discounts. The discounts are always applied in the following order: Line-level : (applied to each line of the document) For each document line, the system checks if there are applicable line-level discounts, and picks the one with the largest discount amount. Group-level : (applied to multiple lines of the document) The system checks which group discounts that may be applicable, and applies all of them. Document-level : (applied to the total amount) There can be only one best document-level discount; that is why group-level discounts (that apply to multiple lines of the document) are often used as document-level discounts. Several options affect the order of discount application and the calculation of the discounts: Exclude from discountable amount : If you use this option (available for line-level discounts), you can exclude the discountable amount of the line-level discount from the discountable amount for higher-level discounts (group or document). For example: by using this option, you can exclude items with a special 75% clearance discount defined at the line level from the basis for the usual 5% document discount the customer receives on orders that exceed £2000. Skip document discount : This option is available for group-level discounts. If you design a group-level discount to apply to multiple lines and significantly reduce the document total, select this option to exclude a document-level discount from the documents to which this group-level discount has been applied. ## How discounts and customer specific prices interact In Visma Net, you can define special prices for particular customers. You can enter and maintain such prices by using the [Sales prices (AR202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-prices-ar202000/) window. If customer specific prices are available for items listed on a customer document, the system replaces the general sales prices with customer specific prices. If you want to use customer specific prices as an alternative to discounts, you can select the check box **Ignore line discounts if the customer specific price is available** in the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. The system only applies line-level discounts to lines with generally priced items (if applicable). In both cases, group- and document-level discounts are applied as usual. ## About applying manual discounts If you select the **Manual** check box in the [Supplier discount codes (AP204000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-discount-codes-ap204000/) window, the discount will not be applied automatically, or selected as the best-available when you save the document. You can use manual discounts for example for rebates or for coupons. Automatic discounts are applied when you save the document, but you apply a manual discount to documents in one of these windows: + [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) + [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) + [Customer invoices (SO303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/customer-invoices-so303000/) You can apply manual line-level discounts to a document on the **Document details** tab in the correct window by selecting the discount code on a specific line. When you select the code and the system applies the discount, the other discounts are recalculated as well. To apply manual group-level or document-level discounts, you select each manual discount by its code in the table on the **Discount details** tab in the correct window. If you change the line quantities while you are adding manual discounts, the system recalculates manual discounts; they will not be replaced by automatic discounts, even if the latter results in a bigger discount. > [!NOTE] > You can always go to the **Discount details** tab in the windows mentioned above, to view the details of the document-level and group-level discounts that were applied to a document. ## Validation of discount limit You can configure the system to validate the percentage allowed for discounts on orders (or invoices). When the total discount percent calculated for the group-level and document-level discounts exceeds the established limit for customers of a specific customer class, you will get a warning. You specify the limit (as a percent) in the **Group/document discount limit (%)** field in the [Customer classes (AR201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-classes-ar201000/) window. ## About applying extra manual discounts When all automatic discounts have been applied, you can apply manual discounts (without discount codes). You specify manual discounts for specific document lines on the **Document details** tab in these windows: + [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) + [Cash sales (AR304000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/cash-sales-ar304000/) + [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) + [Customer invoices (SO303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/customer-invoices-so303000/) To apply a manual discount, you can enter either the discount percent or the discount amount — the system automatically recalculates other related values. ## About refreshing discounts and prices on documents You can update the discounts for documents that have been on hold for some time, if you know the prices or discounts have been updated, or new discounts have been defined in the system. To update the prices and discounts, select the action **Recalculate prices** in the respective windows. You can also choose whether you want to replace manual discounts by automatic discounts or not. If you are not satisfied with the result, you can apply the manual discounts.

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

About discount application /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-discounts/about-discount-application page When a user saves a document (that is, a sales order or invoice), discounts of all levels are applied to the document automatically, except for the discounts for which the Manual discount check box is selected in the Discount codes - reference information window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About discount application When a user saves a document (that is, a sales order or invoice), discounts of all levels are applied to the document automatically, except for the discounts for which the Manual discount check box is selected in the Discount codes - reference information window. For more information: [Discount codes - reference information](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/discount-codes-ar209000/). This topic provides details about the automatic and manual application of discounts. ## Application of automatic discounts For automatic discounts, you don't have to specify the order of their application. When the user saves a document, the system always applies automatic discounts in the following order: + **Line-level** (applied to each line of the document) For each document line, the system checks applicable line-level discounts and picks the one with the largest discount amount. + **Group-level** (applied to multiple lines of the document) The system checks for applicable group-level discounts and applies all of them. + **Document-level** (applied to the document total amount) There can be only one (the best) document-level discount, which is why group-level discounts (that apply to multiple lines of the document) are often used as document-level discounts. For example, if you create a group-level discount that is applicable to a specific customer price class, it will work as a document-level discount affecting each line of a document. The following options, which are located in the [Discount codes - reference information](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/discount-codes-ar209000/) window, affect the order of discount application and the calculation of the discounts: Exclude from discountable amount : If you select this option, available for line-level discounts, you can exclude the discountable amount of the line-level discount from the discountable amount for higher-level (group or document) discounts. For instance, by using this option, you can exclude items with a 75% clearance discount defined at the line level from the basis for the usual 5% document discount that the customer receives on orders exceeding €2000. Skip document discount : This option is available for group-level discounts. If you design a group-level discount to be applicable to multiple lines and significantly reducing the document total, select this option to not apply a document-level discount to the documents to which this group-level discount has been applied. ## Interaction between discounts and customer-specific prices In Visma Net, you can define special prices to be used for particular customers. You can enter and maintain such prices by using the [Sales prices (AR202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-prices-ar202000/) window. If customer-specific prices are available for items listed on a customer document, the system replaces the general sales prices with customer-specific prices. If you want to use customer-specific prices as an alternative to discounts, you can select the **Ignore line discounts if the customer-specific price is a Available** option on the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. With this option selected, the system will apply line-level discounts only to lines with generally priced items (if applicable). In both cases, **Group-** and **Document-level** discounts are applied as usual. ## Application of manual discounts The discounts with the **Manual** check box selected in the [Discount codes - reference information](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/discount-codes-ar209000/) window will not be applied automatically or selected as the best available when the user saves the document. You can configure manual discounts, for example, for rebates or coupons. While automatic discounts of all levels are applied when a document is being saved, the user can apply a manual discount to the document in the appropriate window, which can be one of the following windows: + [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) + [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) + [Customer invoices (SO303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/customer-invoices-so303000/) A user can apply manual line-level discounts to a document on the **Document details** tab of the appropriate window by selecting the discount code in the particular line. After the code has been selected and the discount amount has been calculated, the system calculates other discounts. To apply manual group-level or document-level discounts, the user selects each manual discount by its code in the table on the **Discount details** tab of the appropriate window. If the user changes the line quantities when adding manual discounts, manual discounts will be recalculated. (They will not, however, be replaced by automatic discounts even if the automatic discounts would result in a greater discount amount.) ## Details of discounts applied to documents The users can view the details of the document-level and group-level discounts, automatic or manual, that were applied to the document on the **Discount details** tab of the respective data entry window (listed in the previous section). ## Discount limit validation You can configure the system to validate the percentage allowed for discounts on orders (or invoices) and issue a warning when the total discount percent calculated for the group-level and document-level discounts exceeds the established limit for customers of specific customer class. To do this, specify the limit (as a percent) in the **Group/document discount limit (%)** field in the Customer classes (AR201000) window. ## Refreshing prices and discounts on documents For documents with the **On hold** status, the users may periodically refresh the prices and discounts if they suspect that the prices or discounts were updated or new discounts have been defined in the system. To update the prices and discounts, the user can use the **Recalculate prices** dialog box, which opens when the user selects **Recalculate prices** on the **Actions** menu of the window toolbar of the respective window. In the dialog box, the user can select whether to replace manual discounts with automatic discounts. If the user is not satisfied with the result, the user can apply the manual discounts. ## Application of auxiliary manual discounts Manual discounts (without discount codes) are applied when all automatic discounts have been applied. You can specify the manual discount for particular document lines by using the **Document details** tab of the appropriate data entry windows: + [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) + [Cash sales - reference information](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/cash-sales-ar304000/) + [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) + [Customer invoices (SO303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/customer-invoices-so303000/) To apply a manual discount, you can enter either the discount percent or the discount amount. The system will recalculate other related values automatically.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

About discount calculation /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-discounts/about-discount-calculation page With the algorithms Visma Net uses to calculate discounts, you can give the customer the maximum discount available for the ordered goods. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About discount calculation With the algorithms Visma Net uses to calculate discounts, you can give the customer the maximum discount available for the ordered goods. When you enter a discount series in Visma Net by using the [Discounts (AR209500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/discounts-ar209500/) window, you can specify the same discount for all amounts or quantities, or you can create tiers by specifying **break points**, with each break point defining the minimum discountable quantity or amount for a new tier. You can express the particular discounts for these tiers as well as for discounts without tiers as percentages, fixed amounts, or certain quantities of free items. When you create discounts in the [Discounts (AR209500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/discounts-ar209500/) window and specify break points as the discountable quantities of the item, you should specify the quantities in the units of measure (UoMs) defined as base units of the item. Even if you do not specify UoMs, the system calculates discounts as if the quantities were specified in base units. The sections below describe how, based on the discount type and the selected options, the system calculates the discount amounts or the quantities of free items. ## Calculation of document-level discounts with tiers defined by a Amounts For **document-level** discounts, the tiers can be created only by break points defined as amounts, while the discount can be defined as a fixed amount or a percentage of the document amount. When the system processes a sales order or an invoice and finds a matching discount (based on the application conditions), the system compares the discountable amount to the break points in the discount series as follows: 1. The document amount is compared to the first break point. If the amount is less than the first break point in the series, the discount equals zero, and no further comparison is performed. 1. The document amount is compared to the next break point. If the amount is greater than or equal to this break point but less than the next break point, the system calculates the discount as follows: + If the discount is a fixed amount, the fixed amount for this tier is deducted from the document amount. + If the discount is a percentage, the percent (specified for this tier) of the document amount is calculated and deducted from the document amount. + If the discount is a quantity of a free item, the quantity defined for this tier is used. + No further comparison is performed. 1. Comparison continues similarly, with Step 2 repeated until a discount is found or the last break point is checked. This topic covers examples of tiered discounts. In these examples, amounts are in Euros. ### Example 1 If a series for a document-level discount has tiers defined by amounts with the discounts expressed as percentages, the discount amount corresponding to the appropriate tier is subtracted from the document total. Suppose that the series is specified with the following break points: + €1000: 5% + €2000: 7% + €5000: 10% For a document with a €900 total, the discount is €0, while for a document with a €2500 total, the discount is €175 (7%). For a document with total of €9000, the discount is €900 (10%). ### Example 2 Suppose that a series for a document-level discount is broken down by amount, with the discounts expressed as fixed amounts that are subtracted from the total amount. Further suppose that the series is specified with the following break points: + €1000: €100 + €2000: €225 + €3000: €350 Customers receive a discount of €0 for orders with amounts less than €1000. The discount for an order with a total between €1000 and €1999.99 is €100, the discount for an order between €2000 and €2999.99 is €225, and the discount for an order of €3000 or more is €350. ## Calculation of line-level discounts for tiers defined by amounts Tiers for line-level discounts can be defined by amounts or by quantities. The method of calculation of line-level discounts depends on the option you select in the **Apply line discount to** field on the **Price/discount settings** tab of the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. You can apply the discounts to prices of items or extended prices of items (line amounts before taxes), and the selected option affects the discount calculation. Both methods are described in this section. ### Discounts applied to extended prices If the system is configured to apply line discounts to extended prices of items and the tiers are defined by line amounts, the system performs discount calculation as follows: 1. The line amount (that is, the extended price of the item) is compared to the first break point. If the amount is less than the first break point in the series, the discount equals zero, and no further comparison is performed. 1. The line amount is compared to a next break point. If the amount is greater than or equal to this break point but less than the next break point, the system calculates the discount as follows: + If the discount is a fixed amount, the fixed amount for this tier is deducted from the line amount. + If the discount is a percentage, the percent (specified for this tier) of the line amount is calculated and deducted from the line amount. + No further comparison is performed. 1. Comparison continues similarly, with Step 2 repeated until a discount is found or the last break point is checked. #### Example 3 A customer buys an item whose unit cost is €95. If the series for the line-level discount has tiers defined by the amounts, with the discounts expressed as percentages, the discount amount (calculated by using the percent defined for the appropriate tier) of the item's extended price is subtracted from the extended price. Suppose that the series is specified with the following break points: + €1000: 5% + €2000: 10% + €5000: 20% For a line with 10 items (which means that the extended price is €950), the discount is €0. For a line with 20 items (for an extended price of €1900), the discount is €95 (5%). And for a line with 60 items (and an extended price of €5700), the discount is €1140 (20%). ### Discounts applied to unit prices If the system is configured to apply line discounts to item prices, for discounts with break points defined as amounts, you should specify the break points to be compared to prices. The system performs this discount calculation as follows: 1. The line item's price is compared to the first break point. If the item price is less than the first break point in the series, the discount equals zero, and no further comparison is performed. 1. The item price is compared to a next break point. If the price is greater than or equal to this break point but less than the next break point, the system calculates the discount as follows: + If the discount is a fixed amount, the fixed amount for this tier is deducted from the item's unit price, and the extended price is recalculated. + If the discount is a percentage, the percent (specified for this tier) of the unit price is calculated and deducted from the item's unit price. + No further comparison is performed. 1. Comparison continues similarly, with Step 2 repeated until a discount is found or the last break point is checked. If the system is configured to apply line discounts to item prices and a series is broken down by the quantity of the item, the line quantity of the item is compared to the quantities selected as break points, and the discount is calculated as follows: + If the discount is defined as a percentage, the specified percent is deducted from the item price and then the discounted price is multiplied by the item quantity. + If the discount is defined as a fixed amount, the specified fixed amount is deducted from the item price and then the discounted price is multiplied by the item quantity. #### Example 4 A customer buys different items with prices of €95, €210, and €600. If a series for a line-level discount has tiers defined by the amounts with the discounts expressed as percentages, the discount amount (calculated as the percent defined for the appropriate tier) of the item price is subtracted from the price. Suppose that the series is specified with the following break points: + €100: 5% + €200: 10% + €500: 20% For a line with 10 units of the item priced at €95, the discount will be €0. For a line with 20 units of the item priced at €210, the discount will be €21.10 per unit with the discount for the line at €21.0 multiplied by the quantity. And for a line with one item prices at €600 the discount will be €120 per unit. ## Discount calculation for prorated discounts Discount series can be prorated if the **Prorate discounts** option is selected in the [Discounts (AR209500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/discounts-ar209500/) window. For prorated discount series, the discount amount (or the quantity of free items) is calculated so that the customer won't try to split a sales order to get greater discount amount or a larger quantity of free items. The **Prorate discounts** option is applicable to discount series with discountable quantities or discountable amounts. For instance, you can configure a discount described as “Get €5 off for every 10 units purchased." ### Example 5 Consider a prorated group-level discount with tiers based on quantity. The series defines the discount with the following tiers: + 10 units: 1 unit of the free item + 20 units: 2 units of the free item + 40 units: 3 units of the free item To determine the discount for a discountable quantity larger than one break point but less than the next break point, the system treats the discountable quantity as a combination of break point quantities and uses the largest possible break point quantities. It then calculates the discount according to the break points used. For this example, a sales order for 50 units would yield 4 units of the free item, computed as 3 (for 40 units) plus 1 (for 10 units). For an order of 70 units, the discount is calculated as 6 units of the free item: 3 as the discount for 40 units, plus 2 as the discount for 20 units, plus 1 as the discount for 10 units.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

The principles of customer discounts /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-discounts/the-principles-of-customer-discounts page In Visma Net, you can maintain customer discounts in order to stimulate sales of new products, promote new branches of the organisation, and accelerate sales of the items that are becoming obsolete. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # The principles of customer discounts In Visma Net, you can maintain customer discounts in order to stimulate sales of new products, promote new branches of the organisation, and accelerate sales of the items that are becoming obsolete. ## Overview of discounts ### Types of customer discounts You can configure various types of discounts: unconditional or condition-based, simple or tiered, and automatic or manual (including rebates and coupons). ## Prerequisites Make sure that your license includes the **Customer discounts** functionality and that you have activated it (see [Enable or disable customer discounts](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-or-disable-customer-discounts/) ). You can configure customer discounts in the Customer ledger workspace. This means that even if you do not have the Inventory workspace as part of your license, you can configure customer discounts. The system automatically applies customer discounts to each sales invoice when the document is saved. If your company uses the Inventory module, the system applies discounts to sales orders. ## Stages of configuring customer discounts 1. In the [Discount codes (AR209000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/discount-codes-ar209000/) window, you define customer discount codes, and specify the discount types and their conditions. 1. In the [Discounts (AR209500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/discounts-ar209500/) window, you create discount sequences for each discount code. ## Types of discounts - on the line, group or document level There are three general types of customer discounts in Visma Net: Line-level discounts : (apply to a document line) These discounts may be based on the line amount or quantity, and can be expressed as percentages or fixed amounts. They can be applied to the item price or extended item price (line amount), depending on the option you have selected on the **Price/discount settings** tab in the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. Group-level discounts : (apply to multiple lines of the same order) These discounts may be based on the amount or quantity that is the sum of multiple lines. They can be expressed as percentages, fixed amounts, or specific quantities of free items. Because some of the discounts can be free items, the system cannot determine which of the group discounts is the best, so it applies all of those discounts that are applicable by the discount conditions. Document-level discounts : (apply to the total of the document) These discounts may be based on the document total. They can be expressed as percentages or fixed amounts. In the [Discount codes (AR209000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/discount-codes-ar209000/) window, you can specify for each discount code whether the discount will be unconditional or whether it will have specific conditions. For conditional discounts, you can select the type of conditions to be used to determine whether a particular document is affected by the discounts with this discount code. Then, when you create discount sequences in the [Discounts (AR209500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/discounts-ar209500/) window, you can specify particular conditions of the selected type. For example: If a document-level discount is intended to promote a new branch to valuable customers, you can specify this branch and customer class as conditions for this discount sequence. If you need to clean up a warehouse, you can create discounts that apply only to orders to be fulfilled from this particular warehouse. ## Automatic and manual discounts If you create discount codes and select the **Manual** check box in the [Discount codes (AR209000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/discount-codes-ar209000/) window, the system will not automatically apply the manual discount, nor will it select it as the best-available when a user saves the document. You can configure manual discounts for rebates or for coupons. While the system applies automatic discounts of all levels when you save the document, you can apply a manual discount to a specific document in one of these windows: + [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) ( Financials ) + [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) + [Customer invoices (SO303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/customer-invoices-so303000/) On the **Document details** tab in any of these windows, you can apply line-level discounts; just select the **Manual discount** check box for a specific line and select the discount code. On the **Discount details** tab, you can apply manual group- and document-level discounts. ## Discount sequences Discount sequences define the particular application details and conditions for each discount code. You create these sequences in the [Discounts (AR209500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/discounts-ar209500/) window. For each supplier discount code, you can decide whether you want to use auto-numbering for the sequence associated with this discount code. If you do, the system automatically assigns a sequence ID to each sequence. By default, the supplier discount code is used as a prefix when the system generates sequence IDs. Alternatively, you can specify another prefix to use for auto-numbering. For more information about discount sequences, see: [About customer discounts and sequences for discounts](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-discounts/about-customer-discounts-and-series-for-discounts/). Set up a discount series /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-discounts/set-up-a-discount-series section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Set up a discount series 1. Go to the [Discounts (AR209500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/discounts-ar209500/) window. 1. Click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select the **Discount code** you want to use. 1. In the **Series** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) and select a series number from the list or enter a new number manually. > [!NOTE] > If the **Auto numbering** for the discount is selected in the [Discount codes (AR209000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/discount-codes-ar209000/) window, the system will automatically create a new series for you. The field will display **<NEW>** before you save. 1. In the drop-down list **Discount by**, select whether the discount should be specified by **Percent** or **Amount**. 1. In the drop-down list **Break by**, choose a range for the series in the form of **Quantity** or **Amount**. 1. If the series is active, select the **Active** check box. 1. If the series is a promotional discount, select the **Promotional** check box. > [!NOTE] > For promotional discount series, you must specify the effective date and the expiration date. 1. If you want the discount to be prorated, select the **Prorate discount** check box. This requires that you have chosen **Amount** in the **Discount by** drop-down list. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Add discount codes /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-discounts/add-discount-codes section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Add discount codes 1. Go to the [Discount codes (AR209000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/discount-codes-ar209000/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the **Discount code** column, enter a unique code for the discount. You can use letters and numbers, up to 10 characters. 1. In the **Description** column, enter a brief description of the discount. You can use letters and numbers, up to 250 characters. 1. Select the right **Discount type**. 1. From the drop-down list in the **Applicable to** column, select the entity that you want to be applied to the discount. > [!NOTE] > Depending on your discount type, you will get different options. 1. You can further specify the discount code by selecting one or more check boxes in the next columns. **Example**: If you want the system to automatically generate series IDs, based on the created discount code, select **Auto numbering**. The series will then be displayed in the **Last number** column. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Tasks

Add customers to a discount series /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-discounts/add-customers-to-a-discount-series section On the Customers tab you can make a list of the customers you want to apply the discount series to. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Add customers to a discount series On the Customers tab you can make a list of the customers you want to apply the discount series to. 1. Go to the [Discounts (AR209500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/discounts-ar209500/) window. 1. In the **Discount code** field, select a discount code that is applicable to customers. The **Customers** tab will now be visible. 1. On the **Customers** tab, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. Click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to find the customer that you want to use this discount series for. 1. Click **Select**. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Add discount breakpoints /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-discounts/add-discount-breakpoints section You use the Discount breakpoints tab to create a breakdown sequence defined in accordance with the choices you made when you Set up a discount series. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Add discount breakpoints You use the Discount breakpoints tab to create a breakdown sequence defined in accordance with the choices you made when you Set up a discount series. For more information: [Set up a discount series](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-discounts/set-up-a-discount-series/). You can also use it to view the details of an existing series. The columns on this tab depend on the options selected in the **Discount by** and **Break by** drop-down lists. 1. Go to the [Discounts (AR209500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/discounts-ar209500/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. Enter a **Pending break amount** or a **Pending break quantity** depending on your choice in the **Break by** drop-down list. 1. Enter a **Pending discount percent** or a **Pending discount amount**, depending on your choice in the **Discount by** drop-down list. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Calculate line-level discounts for tiers defined by amounts /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-discounts/calculate-line-level-discounts-for-tiers-defined-by-amounts page You can define tiers (for a line-level discount) by amounts or by quantities. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Calculate line-level discounts for tiers defined by amounts You can define tiers (for a line-level discount) by amounts or by quantities. ## Introduction You can define tiers (for a line-level discount) by amounts or by quantities. The calculation method for line-level discounts depends on whether you want to apply the discount to item price or to the extended item price. Required setting before you start: [Apply line discount to Item price or Extended item price](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-preferences/apply-line-discount-to-item-price-or-extended-item-price/). ## Apply line discount to extended price If the system is configured to apply line discounts to extended item price and the tiers are defined by line amounts, the system calculates discounts like this: 1. The line amount (that is, the extended price of the item) is compared to the first break point. If the amount is less than the first break point in the sequence, the discount equals zero and the system does no further comparison. 1. The line amount is compared to the next break point. If the amount is greater than or equal to this break point, but less than the next break point or greater than the last break point, the system calculates the discount like this: + If the discount is a fixed amount, the fixed amount for this tier is deducted from the line amount. + If the discount is a percentage, the percent (specified for this tier) of the line amount is calculated and deducted from the line amount. + The system does no further comparison. 1. The system continues to compare; it repeats step 2 until it finds a discount or has checked the last break point. ### Example A customer buys an item whose unit cost is $95. If the sequence for the line-level discount has tiers defined by the amounts, with the discounts expressed as percentages, the system subtracts the discount amount calculated as a percent (defined for the appropriate tier) of the extended item’s price, from the extended price. Let us say that the sequence is specified with the following break points: + £1000: 5% + £2000: 10% + £5000: 20% For a line with 10 items (the extended price is £950), the discount is zero. For a line with 20 items (for an extended price of £1900), the discount is £95 (5%). And for a line with 60 items (and an extended price of £5700), the discount is £1140 (20%). ## Apply line discount to item price If the system is configured to apply line discounts to item prices for discounts with break points defined as amounts, you should specify the break points to be compared to prices. The system calculates discounts like this: 1. The line item's price is compared to the first break point. If the item price is less than the first break point in the sequence, the discount equals zero and the system does no further comparison. 1. The item price is compared to the next break point. If the price is greater than or equal to this break point but less than the next break point, the system calculates the discount like this: + If the discount is a fixed amount, the fixed amount for this tier is deducted from the item's unit price, and the system recalculates the extended price. + If the discount is a percentage, the system calculates and deducts the percent (specified for this tier) of the unit price from the item's unit price. + The system does no further comparison. 1. The system continues to compare; it repeats step 2 until it finds a discount or has checked the last break point. If the system is configured to apply line discounts to item prices, and a sequence is broken down by the quantity of the item, the line quantity of the item is compared to the quantities selected as break points. In that case, the system calculates the discount like this: + If the discount is defined as a percentage, the specified percent is deducted from the item price and then the discounted price is multiplied by the item quantity. + If the discount is defined as a fixed amount, the specified fixed amount is deducted from the item price and then the discounted price is multiplied by the item quantity. ### Example A customer buys different items with prices £95, £210, and £600. If a sequence for a line-level discount has tiers defined by the amounts with the discounts expressed as percentages, the discount amount is calculated as the percent (defined for the appropriate tier) of the item price and the system subtracts it from the price. Suppose that you have specified the sequence with the following break points: + £100: 5% + £200: 10% + £500: 20% For a line with 10 units of the item priced at £95, the discount will be zero. For a line with 20 units of the item priced at £210, the discount will be £21.10 per unit with the discount for the line at £21.0 multiplied by the quantity. And for a line with one item priced at £600, the discount will be £120 per unit. > [!NOTE] > If you need information on discount calculation for prorated discounts, see: [Calculate prorated discounts](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-discounts/calculate-prorated-discounts/).

Related pages

Concepts

Calculate document-level discounts with tiers defined by amounts /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-discounts/calculate-document-level-discounts-with-tiers-defined-by-amounts page In Visma Net, the algorithms used to calculate customer discounts allow you to give customers the maximum discount for the ordered goods. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Calculate document-level discounts with tiers defined by amounts In Visma Net, the algorithms used to calculate customer discounts allow you to give customers the maximum discount for the ordered goods. ## Introduction When you enter a discount sequence, you can specify the same discount for all amounts or quantities, or you can create tiers by specifying the break points and the particular discounts for these tiers. For more information, see: [The principles of customer discounts](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-discounts/the-principles-of-customer-discounts/), [About Discount codes](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-discounts/about-discount-codes/), and [About customer discounts and sequences for discounts](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-discounts/about-customer-discounts-and-series-for-discounts/). > [!NOTE] > When you create discounts and specify break points as the discountable quantities of the item, you should specify the quantities in the units of measure (UOMs) that are used to define the item's base units. Even if you do not specify UOMs, the system calculates discounts as if the quantities were specified in base units. ## Calculation principles You can only create tiers for document-level discounts, if you define break points as amounts. The discount can be defined as a fixed amount, or a percentage of the document amount. When the system processes a sales order or an invoice and finds a matching discount (based on the application conditions), the system compares the discountable amount to the break points in the discount sequence. This comparing works like this: 1. The document amount is compared to the first break point. If the amount is less than the first break point in the sequence, the discount equals zero and the system does no further comparison. 1. The document amount is compared to the next break point. If the amount is greater than or equal to this break point but less than the next break point, the system calculates the discount as follows: + If the discount is a fixed amount, the fixed amount for this tier is deducted from the document amount. + If the discount is a percentage, the percent (specified for this tier) of the document amount is calculated and deducted from the document amount. + If the discount is a quantity of a free item, the quantity defined for this tier is used. + The system does not perform any further comparison. 1. The system continues to compare, and repeats step 2 until it finds a discount or has checked the last breakpoint. ### Example 1 If a sequence for a document-level discount has tiers defined by amounts with the discounts expressed as percentages, the system subtracts the discount amount corresponding to the appropriate tier from the document total. Suppose that you have specified a sequence with the following breakpoints: + £1000: 5% + £2000: 7% + £5000: 10% For a document with £900 total, the discount is zero, while for a document with £2500, it is £175 (7%), and for a document with total of £9000, the discount is £900 (10%). ### Example 2 Next, suppose that a sequence for a document-level discount is broken down by amount, with the discounts expressed as fixed amounts that are subtracted from the total amount. Furthermore, suppose that you have specified the sequence with the following break points: + £1000: £100 + £2000: £225 + £3000: £350 For purchase orders with amounts less than £1000, your company will receive a discount of zero. The discount for an order with a total between £1000 and £1999.99 is £100, the discount on an order between £2000 and £2999.99 is £225, and the discount for an order of £3000 or more is £350. ## What is next? [Calculate line-level discounts for tiers defined by amounts](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-discounts/calculate-line-level-discounts-for-tiers-defined-by-amounts/)

Related pages

Concepts

Calculate prorated discounts /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-discounts/calculate-prorated-discounts page Discount sequences can be prorated if you select the Prorate discounts check box in the Discounts window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Calculate prorated discounts Discount sequences can be prorated if you select the Prorate discounts check box in the Discounts window. ## Introduction Discount sequences can be prorated if you select the **Prorate discounts** check box in the Discounts window. For prorated discount sequences, the discount amount (or the quantity of free items) is calculated in such a way that the customer cannot try to split a sales order to get a greater discount, or a larger quantity of free items. The **Prorate discounts** option is applicable to discount sequences with discountable quantities as well as with discountable amounts. ## Example This example concerns a prorated group-level discount defined for quantity tiers. The sequence defines the discount with the following tiers: + 10 units: 1 unit of the free item + 20 units: 2 units of the free item + 40 units: 3 units of the free item To determine the discount for a discountable quantity larger than one break point, but less than the next break point, the system treats the discountable quantity as a combination of break point quantities, using the largest possible break point quantities. It then calculates the discount according to the breakpoints used. With prorated discounts, a sales order for 50 units would yield 4 units of the free item: 3 (for 40 units) + 1 (for 10 units) = 4. For an order of 70 units, the discount is 6 units of the free item: 3 (for 40 units) + 2 (for 20 units) + 1 (for 10 units) = 6.

Related pages

Concepts

Process customer ledger documents /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-customer-ledger-documents section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Process customer ledger documents Process customer ledger documents - overview /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-customer-ledger-documents/process-customer-ledger-documents-overview page In general, you use the Customer ledger workspace specifically for sales made on credit. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Process customer ledger documents - overview In general, you use the Customer ledger workspace specifically for sales made on credit. In general, you use the Customer ledger workspace specifically for sales made on credit. During the implementation of this workspace in your system, the following customer ledger settings and entities were defined, making it easy for you to process customer ledger documents: + Number series for customer ledger documents and the related general ledger batches in the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. + Customer accounts to uniquely identify each of your clients and hold their information and settings. + Credit and collection policies, which include terms of sales, customer credit verification rules, overdue charges, statements, and dunning letters. + The goods and services (defined as stock items in the system) that your company sells to your customers. + Sales prices and discount policies. With these entities defined, users in your company can record and process documents in Visma Net quickly and accurately, with minimal manual actions. The system fills in the most of the needed information automatically. ## Topics + [About types of customer ledger documents](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-customer-ledger-documents/about-types-of-customer-ledger-documents/) + [About the customer ledger document processing flow](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-customer-ledger-documents/about-the-customer-ledger-document-processing-flow/) + [About changing the processing of customer ledger documents](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-customer-ledger-documents/about-changing-the-processing-of-customer-ledger-documents/) + [About tracking customer ledger documents](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-customer-ledger-documents/about-tracking-customer-ledger-documents/) + [About customer ledger ageing reports](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-customer-ledger-documents/about-customer-ledger-ageing-reports/) + [About schedules for recurring documents](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-customer-ledger-documents/about-schedules-for-recurring-documents/) + [Enter a cash sale](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-customer-ledger-documents/enter-a-cash-sale/) + [Release customer documents](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-customer-ledger-documents/release-customer-documents/) + [Track customer prepayments](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-payments-and-applications/track-customer-prepayments/) + [View invoices paid with a specific payment document](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/view-invoices-paid-with-a-specific-payment-document/) + [Schedule recurring documents](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-customer-ledger-documents/schedule-recurring-documents/) + [Generate recurring documents](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-customer-ledger-documents/generate-recurring-documents/)

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

About types of customer ledger documents /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-customer-ledger-documents/about-types-of-customer-ledger-documents page In Visma Net, customer ledger documents are differentiated by document types. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About types of customer ledger documents In Visma Net, customer ledger documents are differentiated by document types. In Visma Net, customer ledger documents are differentiated by document types. Multiple document types help you track documents more easily and make your sales history with a customer clearer. Customer ledger document types can be divided in two groups based on their method of creation: + Manual: Users create customer ledger documents to record their financial relationship with customers. The following documents can be created by a user: **Invoice**, **Debit note**, **Credit note**, **Payment**, **Prepayment**, **Customer refund**, **Cash sale**, and **Cash return**. + Automatic: The system creates customer ledger documents when a user have run the appropriate processes. The following documents are created by the system: **Overdue charge**, **Void payment**, **Credit write-off**, and **Balance write-off**. > [!NOTE] > A user cannot create customer ledger documents of these types manually. In this topic, you will read about when and why each type of an customer ledger document is used in Visma Net. ## Invoice You use this document type to record your request for payment for goods sold or services rendered to a customer. The system includes the sum of all open customer documents with the **Invoice** type in the customer balance, which is displayed in the **Balance** field in the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window. Thus, balances of open invoices increase the customer's balance. You use the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window to create and process a document of this type. To identify invoices, the system uses the number series specified in the **Invoice number series** field on the **General settings** tab of the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. ## Payment You use this document type to record a customer payment for goods or services sold. Also, you can use this type to record a customer's prepayments, if you do not need to track prepayments separately. The system includes the sum of all open customer payment documents with the **Payment** type in the customer balance, which it displays in the **Balance** field in the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window. Thus, balances of open payments decrease the customer's balance. You can apply outstanding documents to a payment before or after you release it. You use the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window to create and process a document of this type. To identify payments, the system uses the number series specified in the **Payment number series** field on the **General settings** tab of the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. > [!NOTE] > If the **Manual numbering** check box is selected for the specified number series in the [Number series (CS201010)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/number-series-cs201010/) window, the system validates each new reference number you enter in order to prevent the creation of payments and prepayments with the same reference number. ## Prepayment You use this document type if you want to distinguish customer payments from prepayments. The system displays the sum of all open customer payment documents with the **Prepayment** type separately in the **Prepayments balance** field in the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window. Also, balances of open prepayments decrease the customer's balance. You can apply outstanding documents to a prepayment before or after you release it. > [!NOTE] > The customer prepayment balance is displayed with a minus sign in the **Prepayments balance** field in the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window. You use the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window to create and process a document of this type. To identify prepayments, the system uses the number series specified in the **Payment number series** field on the **General settings** tab of the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. > [!NOTE] > If the **Manual numbering** check box is selected for the specified number series in the [Number series (CS201010)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/number-series-cs201010/) window, the system validates each new reference number you enter in order to prevent the creation of payments and prepayments with the same reference number. ## Debit note and credit note You use these document types if you want to adjust the balances of the previously issued invoices or in other cases when corrections are needed. The system includes the sum of all open customer documents with these types in the customer balance for the customer, which is displayed in the **Balance** field in the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window. The balances of open debit notes increase the customer's balance, and the balances of open credit notes decrease customer's balance. You use the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window to create and process documents of these types. To identify these documents, the system uses the numbering sequences specified in the **Debit note number series** and **Credit note number series** fields, respectively, on the **General settings** tab of the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. ## Customer refund You use this document type to record a refund to the customer for returned goods, an overpaid amount, or an unused amount of a prepayment. A customer refund must be fully applied to an open payment, prepayment, or credit note before you release the refund. To perform a refund for a closed payment document, first reverse the applications of the payment document, and then create a refund for the payment document. When you release a customer refund, the system changes its status to **Closed** because its amount was fully applied. The balances of refunds do not affect the customer's balance. You use the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window to create and process a document of this type. To identify refunds, the system uses the number series specified in the **Payment number series** field on the **General settings** tab of the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. ## Cash sale You use this document type to record a quick sale or a sale for which the services rendered or goods sold are paid immediately by either cash or credit card. Cash sales do not affect the customer's balance. You use the [Cash sales (AR304000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/cash-sales-ar304000/) window to create and process a document of this type. To identify cash sales, the system uses the number series specified in the **Invoice number series** field on the **General settings** tab of the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. ## Cash return You use this document type to record a return of sold goods, which you refunded immediately by either cash or credit card refund. Also, the system creates a document of this type when you reverse a cash sale. Cash returns do not affect the customer's balance. You use the [Cash sales (AR304000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/cash-sales-ar304000/) window to create and process a document of this type. To identify cash returns, the system uses the number series specified in the **Invoice number series** field on the **General settings** tab of the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. ## Void payment The system creates a document of this type when you void a payment document of the **Payment**, **Prepayment**, or **Balance write-off** type that was erroneously recorded or is otherwise invalid. When you release a document of this type, the system reverses the original payment transactions. The system increases the customer's balance by the balance of voided payment. To identify documents of this type, the system uses the reference number of the voided payment document. ## Overdue charge The system creates documents of this type when you run the process to collect overdue charges by using the [Calculate overdue charges (AR507000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/calculate-overdue-charges-ar507000/) mass processing window. The system includes the sum of all open customer documents with the **Overdue charge** type in the customer balance for the customer, which is displayed in the **Balance** field in the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window. Thus, balances of open charges increase the customer's balance. To identify overdue charges, the system uses the number series specified in the **Overdue charge number series** field on the **General settings** tab of the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. ## Write-off balance and credit The system creates documents of the **Balance write-off** and **Credit write-off** type when you write off balances and credits of multiple documents at once by using the [Write-off balances and credits (AR505000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/write-off-balances-and-credits-ar505000/) mass processing window. The system decreases the customer's balance by the written-off balance and increases the customer's balance by the written-off credit. To identify documents of this type, the system uses the number series specified in the **Write-off number series** field on the **General settings** tab of the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

About the customer ledger document processing flow /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-customer-ledger-documents/about-the-customer-ledger-document-processing-flow page Typically, a customer ledger document goes through the following states during its life cycle: 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About the customer ledger document processing flow Typically, a customer ledger document goes through the following states during its life cycle: ## 1. Recorded Documents that have been entered but not released. Recorded documents do not affect the balances of customers and general ledger accounts. Recorded documents may be processed further or may be just deleted from the system. ## 2. Released Documents that have been released but not closed. Released documents affect the balances of customers and general ledger accounts, and require further processing. Released documents cannot simply be deleted from the system. Their effect on balances may be reversed. ## 3. Closed Documents that have been released and closed. Closed documents had affected balances of customers and general ledger accounts when they were closed. Closed documents do not require further processing and cannot be deleted from the system. Their effect on balances may be reversed.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

About changing the processing of customer ledger documents /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-customer-ledger-documents/about-changing-the-processing-of-customer-ledger-documents page In Visma Net, you can require that a user performs additional steps during the processing of customer ledger documents, by using settings located under the Data entry settings section on the General settings tab of the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About changing the processing of customer ledger documents In Visma Net, you can require that a user performs additional steps during the processing of customer ledger documents, by using settings located under the Data entry settings section on the General settings tab of the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window. For more information: [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/). ## Deferring the release of customer ledger documents You select the **Hold documents on entry** check field to indicate to the system that a new document should be saved as a draft. That is, the **Hold** check field is selected by default, and the system saves each new document with the **On hold** status until a user clears the check field. When the user clears the check field, the system changes the document status to **Balanced**. > [!NOTE] > For documents with the **Invoice** type, the system may instead change the document status to either **Pending print** or **Pending email**. The **Hold documents on entry** setting affects system behaviour in the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/), [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/), and [Cash sales (AR304000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/cash-sales-ar304000/) windows. The system behaviour controlled by this option applies to all document types that can be created in these windows. ## Making the entry of amounts error-proof You select the **Validate document totals on entry** check field to prevent any actions from being performed on a document (that is still editable) until a user types the total amount of the document in the **Amount** field, which is displayed in the data entry window if the check box is selected. The amount that the user enters must be equal to the amount calculated by the system. The **Validate document totals on entry** setting affects system behaviour in only the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window. The system behaviour controlled by this option applies to all document types that can be created on this window. ## Ensuring that the document is printed or emailed You select the **Require invoice printing before release** check box to prevent an invoice from being released until a user prints the invoice for those customers who prefer to receive printed copies. The system assigns the **Pending print** status to the invoice when a user creates the invoice or clears the **Hold** check box if both the following conditions are met: + The **Print invoices** check box is selected for the customer account on the **Invoicing settings** tab of the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window. + The **Printed** check box is cleared for the invoice on the **Invoicing address** tab of the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window. You select the **Require invoice emailing before release** check box to prevent an invoice from being released until a user sends the invoice by email to those customers who prefer to receive invoices by email. The system assigns the **Pending email** status to the invoice when a user creates the invoice or clears the **Hold** check box if both the following criteria are met: + The **Send invoices by email** check box is selected for the customer account on the **Invoicing settings** tab of the Customers window. + The **Emailed** check box is cleared for the invoice on the **Invoicing address** tab of the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window. These settings affect system behaviour in only the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window. The system behaviour controlled by this option applies to all document types that can be created in this window. ## Making the entry of an external reference number foolproof You select the **Require payment reference on entry** check box to prevent any actions from being performed on a document (that is still editable) until a user types the external reference number of the document in the **Payment ref.** field, which is displayed in the window. You can turn on auto-numbering for this field when you configure a payment method. The **Require payment reference on entry** setting affects system behaviour on the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) and [Cash sales (AR304000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/cash-sales-ar304000/) windows. The system behaviour controlled by this option applies to all document types that can be created on these windows. ## Affecting the processing of batches The processing workflow of batches generated in the Customer ledger workspace is controlled by settings in the **Posting and retention settings** section on the **General settings** tab of the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. By using these settings, you can do the following: + Prevent the automatic posting of the batches generated when a document is released. To do this, you clear the **Automatically post on release** check box. + Switch on the summarising of amounts of document lines that contain the same sales account in one transaction. To do this, you select the **Post summary on updating genera ledger** check box and make sure that the **Summary** option is specified for the sales account in the **Post option** column in the [Chart of accounts (GL202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/chart-of-accounts-gl202500/) window. For details: See the description of the check box in [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

About tracking customer ledger documents /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-customer-ledger-documents/about-tracking-customer-ledger-documents page A customer ledger document goes through the following states during its life cycle: 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About tracking customer ledger documents A customer ledger document goes through the following states during its life cycle: 1. Recorded: Documents that have been entered but not released 1. Released: Documents that have been released but not closed 1. Closed: Documents that have been released and closed In Visma Net, you can track information about customer ledger documents in each state by using inquiries and reports in the workspace. ## Tracking recorded customer ledger documents To track documents that have been entered but not released (and have the **On hold**, **Pending print**, **Pending email**, or **Balanced** status), you can use the following inquiry and reports: + [Customer details (AR402000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-details-ar402000/): You select a specific customer and select the **Include unreleased documents** check box to view the list of unreleased documents associated with the customer, along with the documents with the other processing stages (which you can filter out by using simple filters). + [Unreleased transactions (detailed) (AR610500) report](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/unreleased-transactions-detailed-ar610500/): You can view all the customer ledger documents that were created but not released or select a specific document type and view only documents of that type. Documents are shown with all details and listed by the financial period, the document date, and the customer of the document. + [Open customer ledger documents (AR656000) report](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/open-customer-ledger-documents-ar656000/): You can specify a range of financial periods to view the list of customer ledger documents that have not yet been released. You can access this report by selecting a financial period and clicking the **Unreleased documents** button in the window toolbar of the [Close financial periods (AR509000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/close-financial-periods-ar509000/) window. ## Tracking released customer ledger documents To track released documents (which have the **Open** status), you can use the following inquiry and reports: + [Customer details (AR402000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-details-ar402000/): You select a specific customer and make sure that the **Show all documents** and **Include unreleased documents** check boxes are cleared to view the list of open documents associated with the customer. + [Customer documents (AR621500) report](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/customer-documents-ar621500/): You can view the customer ledger documents for all customers or select a specific customer and view only the documents of that customer. Documents are arranged by type, date, and customer account. Document amounts are shown in the original currency and in the base currency. + [Customer documents (detailed) (AR622000) report](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/customer-documents-detailed-ar622000/): You can view all the documents released in the specified financial period or select a specific document type and view only the documents of that type. Documents are arranged by type, date, and customer account. The details include the batch number and batch transactions. Document amounts are shown in the original currency and in the base currency. + [Aged past due (AR631000) report](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/aged-past-due-ar631000/) and [Aged past due (currency) (AR631100) report](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/aged-past-due-currency-ar631100/): You can view the documents for all customers or select a particular customer to view only the documents of that customer. Documents are listed by statement cycle and by customer, broken down by ageing periods. You use these reports to determine which documents are overdue for payment and for how long. + [Aged outstanding (AR631500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/aged-outstanding-ar631500/) and [Aged outstanding (currency) (AR631600) report](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/aged-outstanding-currency-ar631600/): You can view the documents for all customers or select a particular customer to view only the documents of that customer. Documents are listed by statement cycle and by customer, broken down by ageing periods. These reports are designed to show when you should expect to get payments for the outstanding documents. + [Aged period sensitive (AR630500) report](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/aged-period-sensitive-ar630500/): You can view the documents (by statement cycle and by customer) that are outstanding at the end of the specified period, broken down by ageing periods. The balances are arranged by days past due on the last day of the specified period. All the amounts are shown in the base currency. ## Tracking closed customer ledger documents To track processed documents that have the **Closed** status, you can use the [Customer details (AR402000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-details-ar402000/) inquiry. You select a specific customer and select the **Show all documents** check box to view the list of closed documents associated with the customer along with the documents with other processing stages (which can be filtered out by using simple filters).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

About customer ledger ageing reports /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-customer-ledger-documents/about-customer-ledger-ageing-reports page In Visma Net there are reports, described in the following sections, that can be used by your collection personnel to determine which invoices are overdue for payment. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About customer ledger ageing reports In Visma Net there are reports, described in the following sections, that can be used by your collection personnel to determine which invoices are overdue for payment. These reports can also be used by management to determine the effectiveness of the credit and collections functions. ## Aged past due You use the [Aged past due (AR631000) report](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/aged-past-due-ar631000/) and its multi-currency version, [Aged past due (currency) (AR631100) report](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/aged-past-due-currency-ar631100/), to determine which documents are overdue for payment and for how long. These reports show all open documents recorded in the system, regardless of the current business date or the date specified in the **Ageing date** field in the report window. That is, the reports show open customer ledger documents, even if they are posted to periods later than the ageing date period. The documents are grouped by statement cycle and by customer. > [!NOTE] > To age overdue customer balances at the end of the particular period, use the [Aged period sensitive (AR630500) report](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/aged-period-sensitive-ar630500/). For each customer, the report shows the outstanding customer balance in the system and lists open documents, which are broken down by ageing periods. That is, the balances of the documents are sorted into columns that represent ageing buckets. The system forms ageing buckets by using the ageing periods defined for the customer's statement cycle. In the report, debit documents are aged based on their due date and the ageing date specified for the report (in the **Ageing date** field). If the due date of a debit document is earlier than the ageing date, the document balance is reflected in the **Current** column of the report. Otherwise, the document balance is reflected in the corresponding ageing bucket. Credit documents are aged based on their document date and the ageing date specified for the report if the **Age credits** check box is selected in the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. By default, the check box is cleared and the credit amounts are shown in the **Current** column. With the check box selected, if the document date of a credit document is earlier than the ageing date, the document balance is reflected in the **Current** column of the report. Otherwise, the document balance is reflected in the corresponding ageing bucket. ## Aged outstanding The [Aged outstanding (AR631500) report](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/aged-outstanding-ar631500/) and its multi-currency version, [Aged outstanding (currency) (AR631600) report](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/aged-outstanding-currency-ar631600/), are designed to show when you should expect to get payments for the outstanding documents. These reports show all open documents recorded in the system, regardless of the current business date or the date specified in the **Ageing date** field in the report window. That is, the reports show open customer ledger documents, even if they are posted to periods later than the ageing date period. The documents are grouped by statement cycle and by customer. > [!NOTE] > To age overdue customer balances at the end of the particular period, use the [Aged period sensitive (AR630500) report](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/aged-period-sensitive-ar630500/). For each customer, the report shows the outstanding customer balance in the system and lists open documents, which are broken down by ageing periods. That is, the balances of the documents are sorted into columns that represent ageing buckets. The system forms ageing buckets by using the ageing periods defined for the customer's statement cycle. In the report, debit documents are aged based on their due date and the ageing date specified for the report (in the **Ageing date** field). If the due date of a debit document is later than the ageing date, the document balance is reflected in the **Current** column of the report. Otherwise, the document balance is reflected in the corresponding ageing bucket. Credit documents are aged based on their document date and the ageing date specified for the report if the **Age credits** check box is selected in the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. By default, the check box is cleared and the credit amounts are shown in the **Current** column. With the check box selected, if the document date of a credit document is later than the ageing date, the document balance is reflected in the **Current** column of the report. Otherwise, the document balance is reflected in the corresponding ageing bucket. ## Aged period sensitive You use the [Aged period sensitive (AR630500) report](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/aged-period-sensitive-ar630500/) to determine the state of the open documents at the end of a particular period. The report shows the customer ledger documents that are open at the end of the financial period you select in the **Financial period** field in the report window. The documents are grouped by statement cycle and by customer. The report ages the balances of the debit and credit document in the same way as the [Aged past due (AR631000) report](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/aged-past-due-ar631000/) does. For details, see the Aged past due section in this topic.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Enter a cash sale /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-customer-ledger-documents/enter-a-cash-sale section You can use a cash sale document to record an invoice that is fully paid at the time of its creation. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Enter a cash sale You can use a cash sale document to record an invoice that is fully paid at the time of its creation. You can use a cash sale document to record an invoice that is fully paid at the time of its creation. You create a cash sale document by using the [Cash sales (AR304000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/cash-sales-ar304000/) window. When the cash sale document is released, a batch is created. 1. Go to the [Cash sales (AR304000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/cash-sales-ar304000/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the **Type** field of the The top part, select **Cash sale**. 1. In the **Application date** field, select the date of the cash sale document. By default, the current date is selected in the field, but you can select another date. The **Application period** field will be filled out automatically, based on the selected document date. 1. In the **Customer** field, select the customer. 1. Check the customer location and change it if needed. 1. In the **Payment method** field, check the customer's default payment method. The cash sale must be paid by a method based on cash, check, or credit card. 1. Make sure the document currency matches the currency of the customer payment. The currency may be overridden only if the **Allow currency override** check box is selected for the customer in the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window. 1. In the **Payment ref.** field, enter the reference number of the customer payment. 1. Optional: Enter a description of the cash sale. 1. In the columns of the **Document details** tab, enter the details of the cash sale document, following the instructions below for each line (transaction): 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. Optional: In the **Item ID** column, enter the item ID of the particular non-stock item or service paid for by the customer. 1. Optional: Enter the description of the transaction. 1. Optional: Enter the quantity of the item or service. 1. Optional: In the **UoM** column, enter the unit of measure used with the quantity. 1. Optional: In the **Unit price** column, enter the price per unit. 1. In the **Ext. price** column, enter the sale amount if the amount has not been filled in automatically (as it is when you have specified the quantity and the unit price). 1. Optional: To offer the customer a discount on this item or service, in the **Discount** column, enter the discount percentage. The system calculates the discount amount automatically as the extended price of the item multiplied by the discount percentage. 1. Check the **Amount** column, which displays the total for the line item (calculated by deducting the discount amount from the extended price). 1. Check the **Account** column and change it if needed. 1. Make sure the **Subaccount** column, which the system fills in, in accordance with the rule in the **Combine sales Sub. from** field of the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window, has the value you want, and change it if necessary. 1. Optional: Select the **Commissionable** check box if commission is paid on the line amount. 1. Make sure the correct salesperson is specified, and select another salesperson if needed. 1. Optional: In the **Deferral code** column, select the deferral code defined in the system if the expenses related to the item or service must be recognised in future periods. 1. Optional: On the **Finance charges** tab, add the applicable charges or fees for processing this payment in the bank. For each applicable charge, do the following: 1. Click **Add row** to append a new row to the table. 1. In the **Entry type** column, select the entry type that designates the bank charge that applies to this cash sale. 1. In the **Amount** column, type the charge amount that applies to this document. 1. To save the document with the **On hold** status, make sure the **Hold** check box is selected. 1. To save the document with the **Balanced** status, follow the steps below: + In the **Payment amount** field of the **Invoice top part**, enter the total amount of the cash sale. + Make sure the **Hold** check box is cleared. 1. In the window toolbar, click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

Release customer documents /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-customer-ledger-documents/release-customer-documents section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Release customer documents 1. Go to the [Release customer documents (AR501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/release-customer-documents-ar501000/) window. 1. If you want to release specific documents, select the check box next to the documents you want to release. If you want to release all the documents in the window, you do not have to select any documents. 1. To release the invoices you have selected, click **Release**. To release all available invoices at once, click **Release all**. Once you have released the invoices, their statuses change to **Open** and you see the ![icon-confirmation](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-confirmation.png) icon.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

About schedules for recurring documents /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-customer-ledger-documents/about-schedules-for-recurring-documents page Certain documents in the Customer ledger workspace repeat regularly, such as lease and rental invoices. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About schedules for recurring documents Certain documents in the Customer ledger workspace repeat regularly, such as lease and rental invoices. That is, at regular intervals, documents with the same amount and most of the same document settings need to be entered. To automate the entry of recurring documents, you can create schedules for them. A schedule defines how many times and how often a specific document or specific documents should be repeated. You can set up a maximum number of times the schedule may be executed (or allow an unlimited number of executions) or set an expiration date. In this topic, you will read about the steps you need to perform to schedule document generation, to run a schedule, and to process the generated documents. ## Scheduling the generation of documents Each time you need to schedule the generation of a customer ledger document, you perform these steps: 1. You create a document in the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window, which will serve as a template for the future documents generated as a result of running a schedule. 1. You create a schedule in the [Recurring transactions (AR203500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/recurring-transactions-ar203500/) window and specify its settings. 1. You add a template document to the schedule, either during schedule creation or later. > [!NOTE] > Only the documents of the following types **Invoice**, **Debit note**, and **Credit note**, and with the following statuses **Balanced, Pending print** or **Pending email** can be scheduled. Once you have added a template document to a schedule, the system changes its status to **Scheduled**. You can assign one document or multiple documents to a schedule. As an alternative to steps 1–3, if you need to schedule only one document, in the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window, you click **Actions** - **Add to schedule** in the window toolbar to create a new schedule for this document. 1. Optional: You can attach to a schedule the scanned documents or electronic versions of the documents that are the basis for the schedule you have created. Also, you can attach a file or multiple files for each document in the table in the [Recurring transactions (AR203500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/recurring-transactions-ar203500/) window explaining why this document is generated periodically. Once you have finished the scheduling, you run the schedule regularly by using the [Generate recurring transactions (AR504000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/generate-recurring-transactions-ar504000/) window. When these documents are generated, you process them as you do for regular documents. ## Running schedules To generate documents in accordance with the schedule, you can use the following windows: + [Recurring transactions (AR203500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/recurring-transactions-ar203500/): To run the selected schedule. + [Generate recurring transactions (AR504000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/generate-recurring-transactions-ar504000/): To run one schedule or multiple schedules listed in the table. When you run a schedule, the system uses the template document to generate similar documents. The documents generated by a schedule can differ from the template document as follows: + Date: The date of each document is determined by the schedule you have configured. + Reference number: A new reference number is generated for each document in accordance with the number series specified in the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. + VAT rate: If a VAT or taxes are applied to a document, the system calculates VAT and taxable amounts in the document by using the VAT rates effective on the date of the document creation. Thus, in documents generated according to the same schedule, the VAT amounts can differ. You can find the VAT rate used by the system in each particular document on the **VAT Details** tab of the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window. + Currency rate: If a currency of a document differs from the base currency set in the system, the system uses for conversion the currency exchange rate effective on the date of the document creation. No matter how many times you run the schedule, documents will be generated only as required by the schedule. The system determines whether it should generate documents depending on the current date, the schedule's start and expiration date, the schedule type, and the date when the documents were last generated. After the required documents have been generated, the system updates the **Last executed on** date in the [Recurring transactions (AR203500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/recurring-transactions-ar203500/) window. Thus, no documents will be generated ahead of time, but missing documents can be generated by running the schedule once for each missed date. For example, imagine that you schedule an invoice to be generated weekly on each Tuesday with an unlimited number of times. If you run the schedule every week on Wednesday, one invoice will be generated each time. If you run this schedule every day, the invoices will be created only on Tuesdays. If you run this schedule only on the last Wednesday of each month, run it four times to generate one invoice each time. When you run a schedule in the [Generate recurring transactions (AR504000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/generate-recurring-transactions-ar504000/) window, you can generate documents ahead of time. You specify the current date in the **Start on** field, select the **On this date** option button in the **Stop** section, and specify a future date. Thus, you define a date range within which the system will run a schedule. The system checks every date in this range and generates documents only on dates that comply with the frequency settings of the schedule. You can view the documents generated by a schedule on the **Generated documents** tab of the [Recurring transactions (AR203500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/recurring-transactions-ar203500/) window. Generated documents have the **Balanced** status and can be released or posted, as any other documents can. If needed, you can change the amounts of the transactions. To view and edit a generated document, use the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window. When necessary corrections are made, the document can be saved only if its status remains **Balanced**. ## Editing template documents You can edit the template document (that is, the document with the **Scheduled** status) any time you need to. On the next schedule run, the system will use the modified version of the document for generating documents. Also, you can remove a scheduled document from the table on the **Document list** tab of the [Recurring transactions (AR203500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/recurring-transactions-ar203500/) window by using **Delete row** in the table toolbar. The system changes the status of the document to **Voided** and does not use the document any more for generating documents.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Schedule recurring documents /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-customer-ledger-documents/schedule-recurring-documents section You use the Recurring transactions (AR203500) window to create a schedule and add a template document or documents to this schedule. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Schedule recurring documents You use the Recurring transactions (AR203500) window to create a schedule and add a template document or documents to this schedule. For more information: [Recurring transactions (AR203500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/recurring-transactions-ar203500/). ## Before you start Create a document (or multiple documents if they should be generated according to the same schedule) by using the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window. Save each document with the **Balanced** status. Do not release it. > [!NOTE] > The documents of the following types **Invoice**, **Debit note**, and **Credit note**, and with the following statuses **Balanced**, **Pending print** or **Pending email** can be added as the template documents to a schedule. If you want to use a document that is already closed, copy and paste it to a new document. 1. Go to the [Recurring transactions (AP203500)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/recurring-transactions-ap203500/) window. 1. In The top part, in the **Description** field, add a description of the schedule. 1. In the **Start date** field, select the start date for the schedule. By default, the current date is selected. 1. Place limitations on the schedule execution in one of the following ways: + In the **Expiration date** field, enter the date when the schedule expires, or select the **Never expires** check box. + In the **Execution limit (times)** field, enter the maximum number of times the schedule should be executed, or select the **No limit** check box. 1. Specify how often the document should be generated: + To generate the document daily or every **x** days, do the following: 1. In the **Schedule type** section, select **Daily**. 1. In the **Every day(s)** field of the **Daily** section, type an integer to specify the number of days between document generation. For example: To generate a document every day, enter 1, and to generate a document every other day, enter 2. + To generate the document weekly or every **x** weeks, do the following: 1. In the **Schedule type** section, select **Weekly**. 1. In the **Every week(s)** field of the **Weekly** section, type an integer to specify the number of weeks between document generation. 1. Select the appropriate check box or check boxes in the **Weekly** group of elements to specify the day or days of the week when the documents should be generated. + To generate the document monthly or every **x** months, do the following: 1. In the **Schedule type** section, select **Monthly**. 1. In the **Every month(s)** field of the **Monthly** section, enter an integer to specify the number of months between document generation. 1. Select when the document should be generated: either the day of the month or the week in the month and day of the week (such as the first Monday of the month). + To generate the document every **x** financial periods, do the following: 1. In the **Schedule type** section of the top part, select **By financial period**. 1. In the **Every period(s)** field, type an integer to specify the frequency of document generation by financial period. 1. Specify whether the document should be generated on the first day of the financial period, the last day of the financial period, or a specific day of the period. 1. Make sure the **Active** check box is selected for the schedule. 1. In the window toolbar, click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). 1. Optional: For user reference, attach a scanned copy or electronic version of the document on which this schedule is based. To do this, drag the file from the folder on your computer and drop it in the top part. 1. On the **Document list** tab, repeat the following steps for each document you want to add: 1. Click **Add row** in the table toolbar. 1. In the **Type** column, select the type of a document to be added. 1. In the **Reference no** column, select the document by its reference number. 1. Optional: To attach an electronic version of the related document or a scanned image of it, click ![icon-attach](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-attach.png), and select and upload the document. 1. In the window toolbar, click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

Generate recurring documents /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-customer-ledger-documents/generate-recurring-documents page You generate a document in accordance with the schedule by using the Generate recurring transactions (AR504000) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Generate recurring documents You generate a document in accordance with the schedule by using the Generate recurring transactions (AR504000) window. For more information: [Generate recurring transactions (AR504000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/generate-recurring-transactions-ar504000/). You generate a document in accordance with the schedule by using the [Generate recurring transactions (AR504000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/generate-recurring-transactions-ar504000/) window. You can then view and edit the generated documents if needed, using the drill-down capabilities available in the window. 1. Go to the [Generate recurring transactions (AR504000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/generate-recurring-transactions-ar504000/) window. 1. To select the schedules by the range of due dates, do the following: 1. Select the start date in the **Start on** field. 1. Click the **On this date** option button, and in the unlabelled adjacent field, select the date that ends the range of due dates. 1. To run a specific number of schedules, do the following: 1. Select the start date in the **Start on** field. 1. Click the **After running this number of schedules** option button, and in the unlabelled adjacent field, type the number. 1. Do one of the following: + To run all listed schedules, on the window toolbar, click **Run all**. + To run only selected schedules, select the unlabelled check box of each schedule you want to run; then click **Run selected** in the window toolbar. Once processing is completed, you can click a link in the **Schedule ID** column to navigate to the [Recurring transactions (AR203500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/recurring-transactions-ar203500/) window, where on the **Generated documents** tab, you can view the list of generated invoices.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

Generate recurring transactions /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-customer-ledger-documents/generate-recurring-transactions page You can use this window to view all active schedules, and run all the listed schedules or just the ones you select. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Generate recurring transactions You can use this window to view all active schedules, and run all the listed schedules or just the ones you select. 1. Go to the [Generate recurring transactions (AR504000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/generate-recurring-transactions-ar504000/) window. 1. In the **Start on** field you can enter the start date of the date range for the selected schedules. Leave this field empty to display all schedules that were due earlier. 1. In the **Stop** section, select **On this date** if you want to enter an end date of the date range for the schedule selection. Or select **After running this number of schedules** to set the number of schedules where the process will stop running. 1. In the bottom part of this window you can view the details of a selected schedule by clicking **View schedule**. You can also create a new schedule if you click **New schedule**. This will open the [Recurring transactions (AR203500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/recurring-transactions-ar203500/) window. 1. Click **Run selected** to run only the schedules that you have selected in the list. Click **Run all** to run all the listed schedules.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

Process invoices /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Process invoices Process invoices - overview /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/process-invoices-overview page In general, you use the Customer ledger workspace specifically for sales made on credit. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Process invoices - overview In general, you use the Customer ledger workspace specifically for sales made on credit. In general, you use the Customer ledger workspace specifically for sales made on credit. During the implementation of this workspace in your system, the following Customer ledger settings and entities were defined, making it easy for you to process customer ledger documents: + Number series for customer ledger documents and the related general ledger batches in the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. + Customer accounts to uniquely identify each of your clients and hold their information and settings. + Credit and collection policies, which include terms of sales, customer credit verification rules, overdue charges, statements, and dunning letters. For details, see: [Manage credit policy - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/manage-credit-policy-overview/). + The goods and services (defined as stock items in the system) that your company sells to your customers. For details on recording services, see: [Manage non-stock items - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-non-stock-items/manage-non-stock-items-overview/). + Sales prices and discount policy, as described in [Manage sales prices - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/multiple-price-lists/manage-sales-prices-overview/) and [Manage discounts](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-discounts/). With these entities defined, users in your company can record and process documents in Visma Net quickly and accurately, with minimal manual actions. The system fills in the most of the needed information automatically. ## Topics + [About invoice processing flow](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/about-invoice-processing-flow/) + [About invoice recording](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/about-invoice-recording/) + [About invoice releasing](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/about-invoice-releasing/) + [About correction of a released invoice](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/about-correction-of-a-released-invoice/) + [About rounding of document amounts](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/about-rounding-of-document-amounts/) + [About schedules for recurring documents](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-customer-ledger-documents/about-schedules-for-recurring-documents/)

Related pages

Concepts

About Know your customer (KYC) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/about-know-your-customer-kyc page Know your customer, KYC, is a process for financial institutes to know their customers' identity, financial operations and risk profile. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About Know your customer (KYC) Know your customer, KYC, is a process for financial institutes to know their customers' identity, financial operations and risk profile. The KYC process is one of the measures to comply with European Union legislation on anti-money laundering. As of 1 July 2022, PEPPOL introduced new KYC requirements, which affects the activation of AutoInvoice in Visma Net. ## What is PEPPOL? PEPPOL refers to the Pan-European Public Procurement On-Line project. PEPPOL facilitates standards for the development of electronic documents, and provides the network and infrastructure allowing for documents such as e-invoices, to be sent and received in a standardised way, regardless of the financial systems used by the senders and receivers. PEPPOL enables access to its infrastructure through access points, one of them being AutoInvoice. As an access point, AutoInvoice uses the PEPPOL eDelivery Network to send and receive invoices. OpenPEPPOL AISBL, the PEPPOL coordinating authority, requires that each access point service provider must have a written service contract with its customers carrying forward the minimum requirements defined by OpenPEPPOL. Furthermore, the ownership of PEPPOL participants acting in the role as sender or receiver of documents exchanged over the PEPPOL eDelivery Network, shall be identified and verified in the message exchange between access points (see [PEPPOL compliance policy, version 1.0](https://peppol.eu/wp-content/uploads/2019/02/PEPPOL-Compliance-Policy_v1.0_PUBLISHED.pdf) ). This new KYC requirement takes effect from 1 July 2022. ## How Visma Net complies to KYC requirements As of 1 July 2022, all new companies and branches wanting to use AutoInvoice for sending and receiving invoices, will need to sign the KYC verification agreement from AutoInvoice. This is done in Visma Sign, where a company signatory can view and sign the KYC verification agreement. Access to Visma Sign is granted via a KYC verification email containing a link and password. After completing the KYC process, the new company or branch will be able to use AutoInvoice. To receive the KYC verification email when activating AutoInvoice, click the **Activate AutoInvoice** button in the [AutoInvoice settings (CS10250S)](/visma-net-erp/help/management/management-windows/autoinvoice-settings-cs10250s/) window, the **The AutoInvoice setting** section. The KYC verification email will be sent to the customer administrator's email address, and can then be forwarded to a company signatory. In case AutoInvoice is already activated but your company or branch is not yet verified, click the **Verify KYC** button in the same section and fill in the company signatory's email address you want the email to be sent to. New companies will receive the KYC verification email to the customer administrator's email address automatically, provided that AutoInvoice is activated when the company is created. This email can then be forwarded to a company signatory.

Related pages

Tasks

About invoice processing flow /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/about-invoice-processing-flow page In the Sales invoices (AR301000) window, customer ledger documents of the following types can be entered directly: Invoice, Credit note, and Debit note. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About invoice processing flow In the Sales invoices (AR301000) window, customer ledger documents of the following types can be entered directly: Invoice, Credit note, and Debit note. For more information: [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/). A document with the **Overdue charges** type is generated by the system only, but you can further process it by using this window. The processing flow described below applies to documents of all these types. > [!NOTE] > Documents with the **Credit write-off** type can be only viewed on this window. For details on writing off credits, see: [Write-off methods - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/write-off-methods/write-off-methods-overview/). This topic describes the stages of processing these documents and the statuses that indicate these stages. ## Processing stages During all the stages of processing an invoice, Visma Net assigns the document a status that indicates its current state within the processing flow. The main stages are the following: 1. **Recording**: In this stage, you create a document or you enter all the necessary information into the system. When you save the document for the first time, the system assigns a unique reference number to it for tracking purposes. By default, the system assigns to the document the **Balanced** status when you initially save it. This status indicates that the user has finished editing the document and is ready to release it. (You still can edit a document with this status, however.) Alternatively, you can select the **Hold** check box to indicate that this document is not ready to be released; this changes the status of the document to **On hold**. For details, see: [About invoice recording](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/about-invoice-recording/). > [!NOTE] > This stage does not apply to a document with the **Overdue charges** type, which is generated only by the system. For details, see: [About overdue charges](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/overdue-charges/about-overdue-charges/). 1. **Releasing**: You can release a document only if it has the **Balanced** status. When you release the document, the system changes its status to **Open**, updates the customer's balance, and generates a general ledger batch with the document transactions. This status indicates to users and the system that the document is pending a customer payment. For details, see: [About invoice releasing](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/about-invoice-releasing/). 1. **Closing**: When the full amount of the document is paid manually or automatically, by one payment for the full amount or by multiple payments, the system changes the status of the document to **Closed** and decreases the balances of the documents involved in the application. The system may change the balance of the customer if documents with different currencies are involved. For details on applying payments and closing invoices, see: [Processing payments and applications - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-payments-and-applications/processing-payments-and-applications-overview/). In addition to the actions you perform during the main stages, you may need to do the following: + Print an invoice, note, or an overdue charge and send it to a customer by postal mail or electronically. + Correct an amount of a released document by issuing a credit or debit note. + Reverse a released document. ## Changes to the workflow of an invoice As described above, the three primary statuses the system assigns to an invoice are **Balanced**, **Open**, and **Closed**. In Visma Net, you can require a user to perform additional steps during the recording of an invoice; these steps cause the invoice to be assigned additional statuses. You can use invoice-wide settings, located under the **Data entry settings** section on the **General settings** tab of the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window, to change the processing flow of invoices. For details, see: [About changing the processing of customer ledger documents](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-customer-ledger-documents/about-changing-the-processing-of-customer-ledger-documents/). ## Invoice printing and emailing Before you release an invoice or note, your company's internal policies might require you to print it (to send it to the customer by mail), email it (to send it to the customer electronically), or both print it and email it. To implement such policies, you need to perform the following steps: + Select the **Require invoice printing before release** or **Require invoice emailing before release** check box (or both) on the **General settings** tab of the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. + Make sure that the printing and emailing preferences of your customers are configured for customer classes, as described in the **Default printing and emailing settings** section of the [About customer classes](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/preliminary-configuration/about-customer-classes/) topic. + Make sure that the corresponding mailings are configured, as described in the [Manage mailings - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-mailings/manage-mailings-overview/) topic. To print and email customer ledger documents before release, use the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window or [Send invoices (AR508000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/send-invoices-ar508000/) mass-processing window. See [Print invoice](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/print-invoice/) and [Send invoices by email](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-mailings/send-invoices-by-email/) for more information. When the user prints or emails the invoice or memo (or does both), the system selects the **Printed** or **Emailed** check box (or both) on the document entry window. The document is considered printed or emailed if the corresponding check box is selected. These settings can be viewed on the **Invoicing address** tab of the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window, in the **Print and email options** section. The **Printed** and **Emailed** settings are affected only by the related actions performed in the [Send invoices (AR508000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/send-invoices-ar508000/) window.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

About invoice recording /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/about-invoice-recording page An invoice is a request for payment for goods sold or services rendered. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About invoice recording An invoice is a request for payment for goods sold or services rendered. In Visma Net, a customer ledger invoice holds the amount and cost of products or services that have been provided by your company, as well as the due date by which the customer should send payment for the goods or services that have been purchased. In this topic, you will read about the sources of invoice creation, the groups of settings that make up a customer ledger invoice, and the way the system uses the settings of the related entities to automatically fill in settings for the invoice, thus saving you time. ## Invoice creation sources In Visma Net, a user can manually enter a customer ledger invoice by using the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window. An invoice can also be generated by the system (and is available for working with on the same window) as a result of the following processes: + Invoicing of a contract, as described in [About contract invoicing](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-invoicing/about-contract-invoicing/) + Invoicing of a project, as described in [About project invoicing](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/manage-allocations-and-invoicing-rules/about-project-invoicing/) + Processing of a sales order, as described in [About sales order processing options](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/about-sales-order-processing-options/) + Scheduling of a recurring invoice, as described in [About schedules for recurring documents](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-customer-ledger-documents/about-schedules-for-recurring-documents/) If a user initiates the invoicing process from a workspace other than Customer ledger, the system generates an invoice with the **Balanced** status and may release it automatically, depending on the settings of the particular invoicing process. If a user runs a invoicing process from the Customer ledger workspace, the system generates an invoice with the **On hold** or **Balanced** status, depending on whether the **Hold documents on entry** check box is selected or cleared in the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. This setting also controls the initial status of an invoice a user enters manually. For step-by-step instructions on recording an invoice manually, see: [Create an invoice](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/create-an-invoice/). ## Document structure Regardless of how an invoice is generated, it has the same groups of settings, which are described in this topic. In the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window, a customer ledger invoice has the **Invoice** type, but the settings described below are the same for other types of documents that can be created in this window. The settings of these documents can be grouped as follows: + **Summary**: The settings that are located in the top part of the window define the general information used when the invoice is issued and processed. When you create a new document, the system inserts the current business date and the corresponding post period automatically. When you select the ID of the customer account, the system uses the customer data to automatically fill in most settings needed for processing the invoice; these settings can be manually overridden. + **Processing details**: This group of settings, spread across all tabs of the window except **Document details**, define how the invoice is to be processed further and how VAT and sales commissions are to be calculated. The system fills in the values for these settings automatically when you select a customer account, but most default settings can be overridden. + **Document details**: Each product or service that you sell to the customer is specified in a separate line of the table on the **Document details** tab. An invoice may have one line or multiple lines. Each line includes settings that define the item to be sold, the sales account used for the transaction, the VAT category, and the line discount. When you add a line, the system uses values from the customer location to automatically fill in the default sales account, VAT category, and salesperson. If you specify only the amount to be invoiced in the **Manual amount** column, the system calculates the applicable VAT and commissions, and the invoice is ready for further processing. Alternatively, for each line, you can specify the non-stock item or stock item and the quantity to be sold. In this case, the system automatically fills in the unit price of the item and then calculates the total price and the applicable taxes and discounts. Also, you can upload the details of the invoice from an Excel file. When you save the document for the first time, the system generates a unique reference number for the invoice in accordance with the number series assigned to invoices on the **General settings** tab of the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. ## Application of payment terms The due date of the document is calculated based on the payment terms associated with the customer, as are the days when the cash discount is available. By default, the system associates the document with the payment terms specified for the selected customer account, but you can change the default setting. If you do, the system automatically calculates the new due date and the end of the cash discount period. The system calculates the cash discount amount after you have added at least one line to the document details. For details on the calculation of the payment period and cash discount period, see: [About payment terms](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/payment-terms/about-payment-terms/). ## VAT application If the calculation of VAT is configured in your system, the system calculates the applicable taxes for each invoice and records the VAT amounts to the document. On each line, the system fills in a VAT category automatically. For more information about how this VAT category is set, see: [About suggested VAT categories](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/about-suggested-vat-categories/). You can edit the VAT category on each line. You can view the list of the applied VAT on the **VAT details** tab of the window. ## Discount application For each line, you can specify a manual discount offered to a customer, which may be a percent of the total amount or a manually entered amount. The system stores the discount details in the document and does not generate a separate transaction to be posted to General Ledger accounts. If the **Customer and supplier discounts** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window, you can configure various types of discounts that can be applied manually or automatically. The system generates separate transactions for discounts with the **Group-level** or **Document-level** types only. For details, see: [Manage discounts](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-discounts/). ## Commission calculation Commissions can be calculated on a per-invoice or per-payment basis, depending on the **Salesperson commission by** option selected in the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. Commission is calculated on the invoice amount for all salespersons associated with the invoice. For details on configuring and processing commissions, see: [Manage commissions - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-commissions/manage-commissions-overview/). ## Payment application When you enter an invoice and the specified customer has open payments, prepayments and credit notes, the system displays these documents on the **Applications** tab of the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window. By default, the system sorts these documents by their document type (credit notes, payments, and prepayments) and reference number in ascending order. You can manually specify the paid amount in the **Amount paid** column for the payment document or credit note that you select. Alternatively, you can click **Apply automatically** in the table toolbar. In this case, the system fills in the **Amount paid** column, starting with the first document in the list, until the invoice balance is fully paid. When you release the invoice, the system does the following: 1. Creates and releases application records for the open payment documents that have a non-zero value specified in the **Amount paid** column. 1. Decreases the balances of the invoice and the applied payments or credit notes. 1. If the balances of the invoice and the applied documents are zero, changes the status of these documents to **Closed**; otherwise, the status remains **Open**. The system excludes payments and prepayments from the list of payment documents that can be applied to the invoice if they meet at least one of the following criteria: + The open payment document is linked to a sales order. That is, the payment document has a reservation record or multiple reservation records on the **Orders to apply** tab of the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window. For details, see [About payment reservation for sales orders](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/manage-document-types-and-work-flows/about-payment-reservation-for-sales-orders/). + The open payment document was put on hold. That is, a user selected the **Hold** check box for the payment document with the **Open** status in the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window, and the system changed the document status from **Open** to **Reserved**. > [!NOTE] > To release the payment from hold, clear the **Hold** check box.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

About invoice releasing /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/about-invoice-releasing page In Visma Net, invoices that can be released manually have the following document types in the Sales invoices (AR301000) window: Invoice, Debit note, and Overdue charge. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About invoice releasing In Visma Net, invoices that can be released manually have the following document types in the Sales invoices (AR301000) window: Invoice, Debit note, and Overdue charge. For more information: [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/). The information in this topic applies to documents of these types. When you release an invoice, the system does the following: + Changes the status of the invoice to **Open**, so it appears in the list of the customer's outstanding documents. In the open invoice, you can edit the cash discount date and the due date until the document is settled + Increases the customer's balance + Generates a general ledger batch of transactions to update the asset and income accounts > [!NOTE] > An invoice with the **Credit note** type can also be released manually in the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window, but the release of a credit note affects the balances of general ledger accounts and customers differently. This topic describes the windows you may use to release an invoice and the generation of the general ledger batch. ## Release an invoice You can release an invoice only if it has the **Balanced** status. In Visma Net, you can release an invoice by using one of the following windows: + Sales invoices: You release an invoice by clicking the **Release** button on the window toolbar. For details, see: [Release an invoice](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/release-an-invoice/). + Release customer documents: You use this mass-processing window to release a particular invoice or multiple invoices at once. For details, see: [Release customer documents](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-customer-ledger-documents/release-customer-documents/). ## Generate a general ledger batch When you release an invoice, the system generates a batch of transactions to record the sale to the general ledger. The invoice includes all the information the system needs to generate the batch. The following two accounts are usually involved: + The asset account specified in the **Customer ledger account** field on the **Financial details** tab + The income account specified for each line in the **Account** column on the **Document details** tab You can view the details of the batch associated with an invoice by clicking the link in the **Batch no.** field on the **Financial details** tab of the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window. For a one-line invoice, the following transactions will be recorded to the general ledger when the invoice is released. |Account|Debit|Credit| |---|---|---| |Customer ledger account|Amount|0.0| |Sales account|0.0|Amount| If the calculation of taxes is configured in your system, the system calculates the applicable VAT for each invoice. The system records the VAT amount to the liability account specified for each involved VAT in the **VAT payable account** field on the **General ledger accounts** tab of the [VAT (TX205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/vat-tx205000/) window. Thus, for a one-line invoice with a VAT, the following transactions will be recorded to the general ledger when the invoice is released. |Account|Debit|Credit| |---|---|---| |Customer ledger account|Amount + VAT Amount|0.0| |Sales account|0.0|Amount| |VAT payable account|0.0|VAT amount| If the **Customer and supplier discounts** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window and you have configured manual or automatic discounts with the **Group-level** or **Document-level** type, the system adds separate transactions for applied discounts to the batch. The amount of the discount applied is recorded to the expense account specified in the **Discount account** field on the **General ledger accounts** tab of the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window. Thus, for a one-line invoice with a tax and a document-level discount applied, the following transactions will be recorded to the general ledger when the invoice is released. |Account|Debit|Credit| |---|---|---| |Customer ledger account|Amount + VAT amount|0.0| |Sales account|0.0|Amount| |Discount account|Discount total|0.0| |VAT payable account|0.0|VAT amount| If the **Invoice rounding** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window, one more account may be involved: the rounding account, which is updated by the amounts resulting from rounding the document total. The small amount resulting from rounding may be posted as a debit or a credit, depending on its sign. If an invoice is in the base currency, the system uses the rounding gain and loss accounts specified in the **Rounding settings** section of the [General ledger preferences (GL102000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/general-ledger-preferences-gl102000/) window. If an invoice is in a foreign currency, the system uses the accounts specified for this currency in the [Currencies (CM202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/currency-management/currency-management-windows/currencies-cm202000/) window. For details, see: [About rounding of document amounts](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/about-rounding-of-document-amounts/). Thus, for a one-line invoice with a VAT and the rounding is set to increase the invoice total, the following transactions will be recorded to the general ledger when the invoice is released. |Account|Debit|Credit| |---|---|---| |Customer ledger account|Rounded amount + VAT amount|0.0| |Sales account|0.0|Amount| |VAT payable account|0.0|VAT amount| |Rounding gain / Loss account|0.0|Rounding difference amount| If the invoice is in a foreign currency, its details must be recalculated in the base currency of your system. To record the difference resulting from rounding during currency conversion, the system uses the rounding gain and loss accounts specified for the document currency in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. The small amount resulting from the currency rounding may be posted as a debit or a credit, depending on its sign. For details, see: [About currency rounding rules](/visma-net-erp/help/currency-management/configure-currency/about-currency-rounding-rules/). Commission amounts are visible for the invoice, but commission-related transactions are not included in the batch. To calculate commissions and generate appropriate transactions, use the [Calculate commissions (AR505500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/calculate-commissions-ar505500/) window.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

About invoice response messages /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/about-invoice-response-messages page Invoice response messages are messages sent from the ERP system of the receiver of a sales invoice (the customer) to the ERP system of the sender of the sales invoice (you). 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About invoice response messages Invoice response messages are messages sent from the ERP system of the receiver of a sales invoice (the customer) to the ERP system of the sender of the sales invoice (you). ## How to activate and update invoice response messages? You can activate receiving invoice response messages in the [AutoInvoice settings (CS10250S)](/visma-net-erp/help/management/management-windows/autoinvoice-settings-cs10250s/) window and you can then find the messages in the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) and [Customer invoices (SO303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/customer-invoices-so303000/) windows in the **Business level status** field in the **Invoice address** tab. You can update the status by clicking the **Actions** button and selecting **Poll invoice status**. ## What are invoice response messages and what are they used for? An invoice response message informs you about: + the status of the invoice during its processing by the customer, + any actions needed from your side. Apart from predefined status messages, the customer can send the following, which you find in the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) and [Customer invoices (SO303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/customer-invoices-so303000/) windows: + a predefined **Reason code**, which clarifies the **Business level status**, + a predefined **Action code**, which gives information about what action needs to be taken + manual messages ( **Reason** and **Action** fields) in addition to or instead of the respective codes. These are imported as is in the ERP system.

Related pages

Windows

About correction of a released invoice /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/about-correction-of-a-released-invoice page You may need to decrease the outstanding amount of an invoice when the invoice overcharged the customer or the customer reported receiving damaged goods. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About correction of a released invoice You may need to decrease the outstanding amount of an invoice when the invoice overcharged the customer or the customer reported receiving damaged goods. On the other hand, you may need to increase the amount of an invoice due to additional expenses being incurred during delivery of the goods or services listed in the original invoice. In Visma Net, the amount of a released invoice, which increases a customer's debt, cannot be changed directly in the released document. In the open (released) invoice, you can edit only the cash discount date and the due date until the document is settled. The closed invoice cannot be edited at all. Thus, the correction of an invoice can be performed only by issuing an additional document (credit or debit note) that affects the customer's balance (credit or debit note). In some cases, it is possible to use the correct invoice functionality directly in the invoice. In this topic, you will read about the ways to correct a released invoice. ## Use the Correct invoice action An invoice with no payments linked to it and no invoice lines from the [Shipments (SO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/shipments-so302000/) or [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window can be corrected by using the **Correct invoice** action in the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window. The system creates a new correction invoice which is a copy of the original invoice. The system also creates a sales credit note for the original invoice in the background. After you make your corrections and save and release the corrected invoice, the original invoice will be matched against the automatically created sales credit note. On both the corrected and original invoice, there will be a button in the window toolbar with direct links to each other, for you to quickly review the changes. For step-by-step instructions on using the **Correct invoice** action, see: [Correct a released sales invoice (new)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/correct-a-released-sales-invoice/). ## Decrease the amount of an invoice You issue a credit note, which will be used to decrease a customer's debt, by using the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window or the same window you use to create an invoice. The credit note is independent from the original invoice, with no direct reference to it. You can, however, enter the original invoice reference number in the **Description** field for the note. A credit note may have multiple lines or one summary line. Credit notes do not have due dates and may be numbered differently from invoices. The release of a credit note decreases the customer's balance. The application of a released credit note against invoices, debit notes, and overdue charges decreases the outstanding amount of these documents by the amount of the credit note. When you release a credit note, the system generates a batch of general ledger transactions that update the asset and income accounts. For details on the general ledger accounts involved, see [About invoice releasing](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/about-invoice-releasing/). The following transactions will be posted to the General ledger workspace when a one-line credit note with a VAT is released. |Account|Debit|Credit| |---|---|---| |Customer ledger account|0.0|Amount + VAT amount| |Sales account|Amount|0.0| |VAT payable account|VAT amount|0.0| Once a credit note has been applied to an outstanding document, the system generates a batch in only the following cases: + You have written off some balance along with the application. In this case, the system generates a batch to update the asset account specified for the outstanding document in the **Customer ledger account** field on the **Financial details** tab of the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window, and the expense account specified in the **Account** field in the [Reason codes (CS211000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/reason-codes-cs211000/) window for the reason code you have used to write off the balance. + The credit note or the outstanding document to which you want to apply the credit note is in a foreign currency. The system generates a batch to update the balance of the realised gain or loss (RGOL) account by the amount resulting from the difference in the exchange rate on the outstanding document date and the credit note date. The RGOL account is specified for each currency in the [Currencies (CM202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/currency-management/currency-management-windows/currencies-cm202000/) window. For step-by-step instructions on creating and applying a credit note, see [Create a credit note](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/create-a-credit-note/) and [Apply a credit note to open documents](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/apply-a-credit-note-to-open-documents/). ## Increase the amount of an invoice It is not possible to increase the outstanding amount of an open invoice (which has been released) or the paid amount of a closed one. You instead issue a debit note by using the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window. When you release this document, it increases the debt of the customer; the debit note does not change the balance of any invoice and should be paid as a separate document. The debit note doesn't contain a direct reference to any original invoice, but you can enter the reference number of the original invoice in the **Description** field. Debit notes may be numbered differently from invoices. A debit note is processed similarly to an invoice. For details on the recording and release of a debit note, see: [About invoice and processing flow](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/about-invoice-processing-flow/). ## Reverse an invoice When you reverse an invoice, its status and outstanding amount do not change. You can reverse an invoice in the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window in one of the following ways: + By clicking the **Reverse** action for the invoice. The system automatically generates a credit note with details similar to those of the invoice; you then need to release and apply to the original invoice. For step-by-step instructions of how to reverse an invoice, see: [Reverse an invoice](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/reverse-an-invoice/). + By manually creating a credit note for the full balance of the invoice and then applying the credit note to the invoice. > [!NOTE] > If you are reversing a closed invoice, before applying a credit note, you need to reverse the application of the document used to close this invoice, thus causing the invoice to again be assigned the **Open** status.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

About rounding of document amounts /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/about-rounding-of-document-amounts page Your company policy or local regulations may require that you round the total amounts on invoices. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About rounding of document amounts Your company policy or local regulations may require that you round the total amounts on invoices. In Visma Net, you can enable the **Invoice rounding** functionality in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. With this functionality enabled, the system will round the document total amount according to the rounding rules that you have set up for Customer ledger and Supplier ledger workspaces. (You set up separate rules for each of these workspaces.) > [!NOTE] > The line total, tax total, and other subtotals (if any) of a document are not rounded. For detailed instructions on configuring the rounding of document totals, see [Set up document amount rounding](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/set-up-document-amount-rounding/). In this topic, you will read about the steps you perform to set up rounding and the details of how the rounding rules are applied. ## Rounding setup In Visma Net, rounding is determined by parameters that define the rounding rule, rounding precision, and rounding limit. You use the following windows to specify these settings: + [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/): You use this window to specify the rounding rule and the precision that apply to the customer ledger documents of the following types: **Invoice**, **Credit note**, **Debit note**, **Overdue charge**, and **Cash sale**. + [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/): You use this window to specify the rounding rule and the precision that apply to the supplier ledger documents of the following types: **Invoice**, **Credit adjustment**, **Purchase debit note**, and **Prepayment**. + [General ledger preferences (GL102000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/general-ledger-preferences-gl102000/): You use this window to specify the system-wide rounding limit (the maximum rounding difference, which is the difference between the rounded and original document amount). The system applies rounding rules to documents in all currencies (base and foreign). The rounding limit is set in the base currency but is applied to documents in foreign currencies as well. The system always recalculates the amounts of an invoice in a foreign currency to amounts in the base currency of your system, including the rounding difference. The system compares the rounding difference recalculated to the base currency with the rounding limit, and issues a warning if the limit is exceeded. The rounding difference should be recorded to specific rounding gain and loss accounts. Depending on the policies established in your company, you can use a single gain account and a single loss account (and the corresponding subaccounts, if applicable) to be used for all currencies, or you can use different gain and loss accounts (and corresponding subaccounts) for each currency used by your company. You use the [General ledger preferences (GL102000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/general-ledger-preferences-gl102000/) window to specify the rounding gain and loss accounts (and subaccounts, if enabled in your system) for the base currency, and you use the [Currencies (CM202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/currency-management/currency-management-windows/currencies-cm202000/) window to specify the gain and loss accounts and subaccounts for each of the foreign currencies used by your customers and suppliers. ## Rounding rules To set up rounding for documents, you select the rounding rule and precision. The following rounding rules are available: Nearest : To round each total amount to the nearest multiple of the smallest unit. Up : To round each total amount up to the next multiple of the smallest unit. Down : To round each total down to the previous multiple of the smallest unit. Use the currency precision : To temporarily not use rounding if it is activated in your system. If this option is selected, for each document, the system will round the document total according to the precision specified for the document currency. The precision of the base currency is specified in the [Branches (CS102000)](/visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/organisation-structure-windows/branches-cs102000/) window, and the precision of foreign currencies is defined in the [Currencies (CM202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/currency-management/currency-management-windows/currencies-cm202000/) window. In addition to selecting the rounding rule, you select the rounding precision or the smallest unit to be used for document amounts. The following options are available: 0.1 : To round the totals to multiples of 0.10 0.5 : To round the totals to multiples of 0.5 1.0 : To round the totals to integers 10.0 : To round the totals to multiples of 10 100.0 : To round the totals to multiples of 100 The table below illustrates the results of rounding with different rules and precisions applied to the sample value of €1734.57. |Rule/precision|0.1|.05|1.0|10|100| |---|---|---|---|---|---| |**Nearest**|€1734.6|€1734.5|€1735|€1740|€1700| |**Up**|€1734.6|€1735.0|€1735|€1740|€1800| |**Down**|€1734.5|€1734.5|€1734|€1730|€1700|

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

About sending direct debit invoices /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/about-sending-direct-debit-invoices page Direct debit is a payment method in which a third party is granted permission to take payments from a bank account. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About sending direct debit invoices Direct debit is a payment method in which a third party is granted permission to take payments from a bank account. In setting up a direct debit transaction, authorisation must be given in order to permit the party seeking payments to make the withdrawals from your account. Essentially, you give a company permission to take an amount at a time specified by that organisation. Once you have set up the authorisation, the amount is taken automatically (as opposed to you needing to take additional action to make the payment, such as entering credit card details or initiating a bank transfer). In Visma Net, you use bank deposits to track customer payments that you deposit to the bank in bulk. See [About the preparation of deposits](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/track-cash-payments/about-the-preparation-of-deposits/). When you enter into the system payments intended for such deposits, the payments are temporarily recorded to special **clearing** cash accounts. For direct debit, you have to set up clearing cash accounts in Visma Net. See [Cash accounts (CA202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-accounts-ca202000/). Clearing accounts should be set as the default cash accounts for associated payment methods. Create an invoice /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/create-an-invoice section You create a customer ledger invoice by using the Sales invoices (AR301000) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create an invoice You create a customer ledger invoice by using the Sales invoices (AR301000) window. For more information: [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/). 1. Go to the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window. 1. In the window toolbar, click **![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png)** to initiate a database entry for a new document. 1. In the **Type** field in the top part, select **Invoice**. 1. In the **Date** field, change the current business date if needed. The **Post period** field is filled in automatically based on the selected document date. 1. In the **Customer** field, select the customer associated with the document. 1. In the **Location** field, check the customer location, and change it if necessary. 1. Make sure the document currency is the one you need, and select another if necessary. This currency may be overridden only if the **Allow currency override** check box is selected for the customer in the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window. 1. In the **Terms** field, check the payment terms associated with the customer. The due date of the invoice is calculated based on the payment terms. The payment terms may allow a cash discount to be taken and specify its terms. 1. Optional: In the **Customer order** field, enter the reference number from the original customer document. 1. Optional: In the **Description** field, add a brief description of the invoice. 1. On the **Document details** tab, enter the details of the invoice, doing the following for each line (transaction): 1. In the table toolbar, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) to append a row to the table. 1. Optional: In the **Item ID** column, enter the ID of the particular item sold or service provided to the customer. 1. Optional: In the **Transaction descr.** column, enter a description of the transaction if it has not been filled in automatically. 1. Optional: Enter the quantity of the item sold. 1. Optional: In the **UoM** column, enter the unit of measure for the item if it has not been filled in automatically. 1. Optional: In the **Unit price** column, enter the price per unit if it has not been filled in automatically. 1. In the **Ext. price** column, enter the extended price of the specified stock item or service if it has not been calculated automatically. 1. Optional: To offer the customer a discount on this item or service, enter the discount percentage in the **Discount** column or the discount amount in the **Discount amount** column. If you enter a percentage, the system will calculate the discount amount automatically by multiplying the extended price of the item by the discount percentage. 1. Check the **Amount** column, which displays the total for the line item. The system calculates this total by deducting the discount amount (if any) from the extended price. 1. Check the **Account** column and change it if needed. 1. Check the **Subaccount** column if applicable, which by default is filled in by the system in accordance with the rule in the **Combine sales sub. from** field of the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window; you can change the default subaccount if necessary. 1. Check the salesperson associated with the customer. You can change the salesperson if needed. 1. Optional: In the **Deferral code** column, select a deferral code if the expenses related to the item or service must be recognised in future periods. 1. Optional: Select the **Commission** check box if a commission is paid on the line item amount. 1. If you want to save the document with the **On hold** status, make sure the **Hold** check box is selected. 1. If you want to save the document with the **Balanced** status, do one of the steps below, and make sure the **Hold** check box is cleared: + If the **Amount** field is available in the top part of the window, enter the total amount of the invoice in this field. + If the **Amount** field is not available in the window, make sure the total amount of the document is displayed correctly in the **Balance** field. 1. In the **Cash discount** field in the top part, check the cash discount amount of the document. This field may be filled in automatically, based on the payment terms of the customer. 1. In the window toolbar, click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Change customer or customer location on sales invoice /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/change-customer-or-customer-location-on-sales-invoice section In Visma Net, you can change the customer or customer location on a sales invoice, even when it already has lines. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Change customer or customer location on sales invoice In Visma Net, you can change the customer or customer location on a sales invoice, even when it already has lines. If you want to change the customer or customer location to one with a different VAT calculation, on a sales invoice with lines, consider the following to make sure the VAT calculation is changed as well. ## Before you start Make sure the **Recalculate VAT when customer is changed on document** check box in the [Organisations (CS101500)](/visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/organisation-structure-windows/organisations-cs101500/) window is selected. See also: [Recalculate VAT when customer is changed on document](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/help/vat/set-up-calculation/recalculate-vat-when-customer-is-changed-on-document/). 1. Do you want to change the customer location? + If **Yes**, make sure that the **Export type** is filled in for the location in the [Customer locations (CR303010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-locations-cr303010/) window. + If **No**, continue to step 2. 1. In the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window on the invoice, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) in the **Customer** or **Location** field and select a new customer or location. **Result**: the **VAT details** tab and the VAT category on the lines will be updated accordingly if the new customer or location has a different VAT calculation.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Print invoice /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/print-invoice page You can print selected invoices and memos by using the Send invoices (AR508000) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Print invoice You can print selected invoices and memos by using the Send invoices (AR508000) window. For more information: [Send invoices (AR508000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/send-invoices-ar508000/). You can print selected invoices and memos by using the [Send invoices (AR508000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/send-invoices-ar508000/) window. You should print invoices or notes to send them to the customer before release if the **Require invoice/note printing before release** check box is selected in the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window and the settings of the customer require the printing of these documents or the **Print invoices** check box is selected in the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window. For customers with this check box selected, each invoice that is created and is not on hold is assigned the **Pending print** status. After you have printed the document, its status is changed to **Balanced**, and you can release it. 1. Make sure the printer is connected to your computer and ready for printing. 1. Go to the [Send invoices (AR508000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/send-invoices-ar508000/) window. 1. In the **Action** field of the Selection area, select the **Print invoice/note** action. 1. Optional: For invoices associated with contract servicing, select the user or the work group (in the **Assigned to** or **Work group** field) to whom the documents are assigned. > [!NOTE] > You can use filtering to display only specific documents in the table. 1. In the table, select the unlabeled check boxes for the documents you intend to print. 1. In the window toolbar, click **Process**. Each document will appear in a new browser tab. 1. For each document to be printed, do the following: 1. In the window toolbar, click **Print**; the browser opens the **Print dialog box**. 1. Select the appropriate options, and then click **OK**. The selected pages will be printed.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Send invoice attachments through AutoInvoice /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/send-invoice-attachments-through-autoinvoice section In Customer ledger you can add attachments on invoices. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Send invoice attachments through AutoInvoice In Customer ledger you can add attachments on invoices. You can send PDF files with the invoice through AutoInvoice. 1. Go to the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window. 1. Go to the **Attachments** tab and select the desired attachments in **Send the file to AutoInvoice**. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). 1. Click **Actions** and choose **Send to AutoInvoice**. Release an invoice /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/release-an-invoice page To release a particular invoice or note, use the Sales invoices (AR301000) window, as described below. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Release an invoice To release a particular invoice or note, use the Sales invoices (AR301000) window, as described below. For more information: [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/). To release a particular invoice or note, use the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window, as described below. You can also release multiple invoices and notes at a time, as described in: [Release customer documents.](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-customer-ledger-documents/release-customer-documents/) 1. Go to the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window. 1. Optional: to search and filter invoices by their type, select a type in the **Type** field of the top part. 1. Bring up the particular invoice or note you want to release by taking one of the following actions: + Use the search field in the upper right corner of the window. + Click on a column's name, and use the filter and/or search field. + To navigate among invoices or notes, click the appropriate navigation buttons until you see the document. 1. Select the invoice or note you want to release by clicking on its **Ref. no.** or double-clicking the line. 1. Check the status of the document: + If the status is **On hold**, enter the control total in the **Amount** field (if applicable), and clear the **Hold** check field to change the status to **Balanced**. + If the status is **Balanced**, proceed to the next step. 1. Click **Release**. The released document is assigned the **Open** status.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Reverse an invoice /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/reverse-an-invoice section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Reverse an invoice 1. Go to the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window. 1. In the **Reference no.** field, select the invoice with the status **Open**. > [!NOTE] > You must release the invoice and its status has to be **Open** or **Closed** for you to proceed. 1. Click **Actions** - **Reverse**. The invoice type now changes to **Credit note**. 1. Optional: Change the **quantity** and the **unit price**. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). 1. Click **Reports** - **Preview invoice/note** to preview the credit note. 1. Click **Release**. The status changes to **Open** and ![icon-confirmation](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-confirmation.png) becomes visible. 1. Click **Reports** - **Print invoice/note**, to print it. 1. Go to the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window to match the invoice and credit note and to close them. For step-by-step instructions of how to match a credit note to an invoice, see: [Apply a credit note to open documents](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/apply-a-credit-note-to-open-documents/). ## What is next? Once the invoice is released, you send it to the customer. How the invoice is sent depends on the customer's **Print and e-mail settings**, if the options **Send invoices by email** or **Send invoices to AutoInvoice** are selected. See: [Set up e-mail invoices for one customer](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/set-up-e-mail-invoices-for-one-customer/) and [Send one invoice to AutoInvoice](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/send-one-invoice-to-autoinvoice/). You can release and post a batch of invoices / credit notes from the [Release customer documents (AR501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/release-customer-documents-ar501000/) window, and you can also send a batch from the **Print invoice** window. See: [Release customer documents](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-customer-ledger-documents/release-customer-documents/) and [Send several invoices or credit notes to AutoInvoice](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-mailings/send-several-invoices-or-credit-notes-to-autoinvoice/). Create a credit note /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/create-a-credit-note section To credit a customer if, for example, the customer received damaged goods or the invoice mistakenly overcharged the customer, you create a credit note by using the Sales invoices (AR301000) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create a credit note To credit a customer if, for example, the customer received damaged goods or the invoice mistakenly overcharged the customer, you create a credit note by using the Sales invoices (AR301000) window. For more information: [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/). To apply a credit note that was previously released (as described in [Release an invoice](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/release-an-invoice/) ) to customer ledger documents or to create a customer refund, see: [Apply a credit note to open documents](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/apply-a-credit-note-to-open-documents/). 1. Go to the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window. 1. In the window toolbar, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) to initiate a database entry for a new document. 1. In the **Type** field of the top part, select **Credit note**. 1. In the **Date** field, enter the credit note date. The **Post period** field is filled in automatically based on the selected document date. 1. Select the customer associated with the credit note. 1. In the **Location** field, check the customer location, and change it if necessary. 1. Optional: In the **Customer order** field, enter the reference number assigned by the customer to the customer document. 1. Make sure the document currency is the one you need, and change it if necessary. The currency may be overridden only if the **Allow currency override** check box is selected for the customer in the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window. 1. Optional: In the **Description** field, add a brief description of the credit note or the reference number of the original invoice. 1. On the **Document details** tab, enter the details of the credit note, performing the following steps for each line (transaction): > [!NOTE] > A credit note must include at least one line. 1. In the table toolbar, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) to append a row to the table. 1. Optional: In the **Item ID** column, enter the ID of the item sold or the service provided to the customer. 1. Optional: In the **Transaction descr.** column, enter a description of the transaction. 1. Optional: Enter the quantity of the item sold. 1. Optional: In the **UoM** column, enter the unit of measure for the item. 1. Optional: In the **Unit price** column, enter the price per unit. 1. In the **Manual amount** column, enter the amount for the line. If you have specified a stock item, the system calculates the manual amount by multiplying its unit price and the quantity sold, but you can override this calculated price. 1. Check the **Account** column and change it if needed. 1. Check the **Subaccount** column if applicable, which the system fills in by default based on the rule in the **Combine sales sub. from** field of the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window; you can manually change the subaccount if necessary. 1. Check the salesperson associated with the customer. You can change the selected salesperson if needed. 1. Optional: In the **Deferral code** column, select a deferral code if the expenses related to the item or service must be recognised in future periods. 1. To save the document with the **On hold** status, make sure the **Hold** check box is selected. 1. To save the document with the **Balanced** status, do one of the steps below, and make sure the **Hold** check box is cleared: + If the **Amount** field is available in the top part of the window, enter the total amount of the credit note. + If the **Amount** field is not available in the window, make sure the total amount of the document is displayed correctly in the **Balance** field. 1. In the window toolbar, click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

Apply a credit note to open documents /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/apply-a-credit-note-to-open-documents section After you have created a credit note (as described in Create a credit note ), the note should be released; see Release an invoice for details. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Apply a credit note to open documents After you have created a credit note (as described in Create a credit note ), the note should be released; see Release an invoice for details. For more information: [Create a credit note](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/create-a-credit-note/), [Release an invoice](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/release-an-invoice/). After you have created a credit note (as described in [Create a credit note](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/create-a-credit-note/)), the note should be released; see [Release an invoice](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/release-an-invoice/) for details. You then close the credit note in one of the following ways: + Apply the credit note to open invoices, debit notes, and overdue charges. If you apply the credit note to any of these documents, it receives the **Closed** status. + If a customer has already paid an overcharging invoice, create a customer refund, which you apply to the credit note to return the money to the customer. For step-by-step instructions, see [Issue a refund](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/issue-a-refund/). + If the credit note was created to credit a customer that was overcharged based on documents that have been paid and documents that have not been paid, you can apply part of the credit note against unpaid invoices and the rest of the credit note balance against a customer refund. 1. Go to the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window. 1. In the **Type** field in the top part, select **Credit note**. 1. Select the appropriate reference number for the credit note in the **Ref. no.** field. 1. Check the date of the credit note in the **Date** field; by default, the current date is selected, but you can select another date. The **Financial period** field is filled in automatically based on the selected credit note date. 1. In the columns of the **Documents to apply** tab, enter the documents to which the credit note should be applied, following the steps below to add each line (document): 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) in the table toolbar to append a row to the table. 1. In the **Document type** column, select the appropriate option to apply the credit note to an invoice, debit note, or overdue charge. 1. In the **Reference no.** column, select a document by its ID from the list of documents. (The system includes in this list documents associated with the current customer that have the **Open** status and the selected document type.) 1. Check the information in the other columns of this table, which are filled out automatically when you select a document. 1. Check the **Applied to documents** field; the system automatically inserts the total amount of the applied documents. 1. To release the credit note, make sure the **Hold** check box is cleared, and click **Release** button in the window toolbar.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Create and release an invoice /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/create-and-release-an-invoice section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create and release an invoice > [!NOTE] > If you are using direct debit as payment, see [Get started with direct debit](/visma-net-erp/help/work-processes/direct-debit/get-started-with-direct-debit/). 1. Go to the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window. 1. If necessary, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) to add a new document. In the **Type** field, **Invoice** is always the default choice. 1. In the **Customer** field, select the customer. Most fields are filled in with the information on the specific customer. 1. Enter the general invoice information in the upper part of the window. The fields marked with \* are mandatory. 1. On the **Document details** tab, add the invoice lines. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) to add a new invoice line. 1. Optional: Enter the **Item ID**. 1. Enter any relevant information for each line. For example: Quantity, amount, discount, account and sub-account. Some fields are filled in automatically. > If you are using AutoInvoice to send invoices, the **Transactions description** is mandatory. 1. Continue with the other tabs and enter the relevant information. If you use direct debit as payment follow the steps below: 1. Go to the **Financial details** tab. 1. In the **Payment method** field, check that you have the correct direct debit **Core** or **B2B**. 1. In the **Cash account** field, select the cash account where the direct debit will be collected. 1. Go to the **Invoice address** tab. 1. Under the **Direct debit information** area, check if the **Mandate ID** is correct. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). 1. Optional: Select **Reports** - **Preview invoice/note** to preview the invoice. 1. Click **Release**. Once the invoice is released, the status changes to **Open** and. ![icon-confirmation](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-confirmation.png) is displayed 1. Optional: If the **Print invoices** check box is selected in the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window, click **Reports** - **Print invoice/note** to print the invoice. See: [Print an invoice.](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/print-an-invoice/) When you use direct debit as a payment method, the generated invoice will show information about the mandate, and that the invoice amount will automatically be deducted from the customer's bank account. ## What is next? Once the invoice is released, you send it to the customer. How the invoice is sent depends on the customer's **Print and e-mail settings**, if the options **Send invoices by email** or **Send invoices to AutoInvoice** are selected. See: [Set up e-mail invoices for one customer](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/set-up-e-mail-invoices-for-one-customer/) and [Send one invoice to AutoInvoice](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/send-one-invoice-to-autoinvoice/). You can release and post a batch of invoices / credit notes from the [Release customer documents (AR501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/release-customer-documents-ar501000/) window, and you can also send a batch from the **Print invoice** window. See: [Release customer documents](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-customer-ledger-documents/release-customer-documents/) and [Send several invoices or credit notes to AutoInvoice](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-mailings/send-several-invoices-or-credit-notes-to-autoinvoice/).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Set up document amount rounding /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/set-up-document-amount-rounding section Your company policy or local regulations may require that you round the amounts on invoices. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Set up document amount rounding Your company policy or local regulations may require that you round the amounts on invoices. Your company policy or local regulations may require that you round the amounts on invoices. For more information, see: [About rounding of document amounts](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/about-rounding-of-document-amounts/). You set up the rounding rules and rounding precision for supplier ledger invoices by using the [Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-ledger-preferences-ap101000/) window, and for customer ledger invoices by using the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. ## Before you proceed 1. In the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window, make sure that the **Invoice rounding** check box is selected, which indicates that the functionality is enabled. For details, see: [About enabling functionalities](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/about-enabling-functionalities/). 1. Make sure the rounding gain and loss accounts (and subaccounts), if they are used in your system) for the base currency are specified in the [General ledger preferences (GL102000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/general-ledger-preferences-gl102000/) window, and that the accounts and subaccounts for each foreign currency used by your customers and suppliers are specified in the [Currencies (CM202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/currency-management/currency-management-windows/currencies-cm202000/) window. ## Set up rounding rules for supplier ledger invoices 1. Go to the [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) window. 1. If you want to enter the rounding amount manually, select the **Enter rounding amount manually** check box. 1. If you want to use automatic rounding, go the **Rounding for invoices** field and select one of the 1. In the **Rounding rule for invoices** field, select one of the following rules to be used to round the totals of supplier ledger invoices: + **Use the currency precision**: To round the total amount of each document according to the precision of the currency of the document. With this option selected, the system will process the documents as if the document rounding feature is not enabled for supplier ledger documents. + **Nearest**: To round the total amount of each document to the nearest multiple of the smallest unit selected as the rounding precision. + **Up**: To round each total amount up to the next multiple of the smallest unit selected as the rounding precision. + **Down**: To round each total amount down to the previous multiple of the smallest unit selected as the rounding precision. 1. In the **Rounding precision** field, select the smallest unit (rounding precision) to which the totals will be rounded. Select one of the following precision options to be used for rounding: + **0.1**: To round the totals to multiples of 0.10 + **0.5**: To round the totals to multiples of 0.5 + **1.0**: To round the totals to integers + **10.0**: To round the totals to multiples of 10 + **100.0**: To round the totals to multiples of 100 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). > [!NOTE] > The system will use the same rounding precision for all currencies. ## Set up rounding rules for customer ledger invoices 1. Go to the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. 1. In the **Rounding rule for invoices** field, select one of the following rules to be used to round the totals of customer ledger invoices: + **Use the currency precision**: To round the total amount of each document according to the precision of the currency of the document + **Nearest**: To round the total amount of each document to the nearest multiple of the selected smallest unit selected as the rounding precision + **Up**: To round each document total amount up to the next multiple of the smallest unit selected as the rounding precision + **Down**: To round each document total down to the previous multiple of the smallest unit selected as the rounding precision 1. In the **Rounding precision** field, select the precision to which the totals will be rounded. Select one of the following available precision options as the smallest unit to which the amounts should be rounded: + **0.1**: To round the totals to multiples of 0.10 + **0.5**: To round the totals to multiples of 0.5 + **1.0**: To round the totals to integers + **10.0**: To round the totals to multiples of 10 + **100.0**: To round the totals to multiples of 100 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Check sent email status for AutoInvoice /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/check-sent-email-status-for-autoinvoice page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Check sent email status for AutoInvoice 1. Go to the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window. 1. Go to the **Invoice address** tab. 1. Under **AutoInvoice**, check if the **Sent to AutoInvoice** check box is selected. This indicates that the invoice is sent to AutoInvoice. 1. Check the **AutoInvoice status**: 1. **Sent to AutoInvoice**: > [!NOTE] > Awaiting processing. 1. **Pending** > [!NOTE] > The invoice is pending and has not been sent yet from the **Pending emails** (SM507000) window. You can from this window send the invoice **before** the system's scheduled dispatch of emails. 1. **Sent** > [!NOTE] > The invoice is sent and you can find it in the overview of **Sent emails** (CO409080). 1. **Error** > [!NOTE] > Contact Support if this is the status. ## What is next? If you regret sending an email due to an incorrect attachment or receiver of the email, you can still delete or do your changes in the email in the Pending emails window. See [Change the recipient address for a pending email](/visma-net-erp/help/email/manage-emails/change-the-recipient-address-for-a-pending-email/).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Check sent email status /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/check-sent-email-status page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Check sent email status ## Before you start In the [Pending emails (SM507000)](/visma-net-erp/help/email/email-windows/pending-emails-sm507000/) window, you can send the invoice **before** the system's scheduled dispatch of emails. 1. Go to the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window. 1. Go to the **Invoice address** tab. 1. Under **Print and email options**, check if the **Emailed** check box is selected. This shows that the invoice is sent by email. ## What is next? If you regret sending an email due to an incorrect attachment or receiver of the email, you can still delete or do your changes as instructed in: [Change the recipient address for a pending email](/visma-net-erp/help/email/manage-emails/change-the-recipient-address-for-a-pending-email/). In the [Sent emails (CO409080)](/visma-net-erp/help/email/email-windows/my-sent-emails-co409080/) window, you can see an overview over all your sent emails. Correct a sales invoice /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/correct-a-sales-invoice section You correct a customer ledger invoice differently depending on whether the invoice was released (and has the Open or Closed status) or was not released (and has the Balanced, On hold, or Scheduled status). 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Correct a sales invoice You correct a customer ledger invoice differently depending on whether the invoice was released (and has the Open or Closed status) or was not released (and has the Balanced, On hold, or Scheduled status). In this topic, you will read about the way to correct an invoice that has not been released. ## Correct an invoice that has not been released 1. Go to the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window. 1. Locate the invoice you want to correct by typing in the search field in the upper right corner or clicking on a column's name, and use the filter and/or search field. 1. Select the invoice you want to correct by clicking on its **Ref. no.** or double-clicking the line. 1. Make your corrections on the invoice. 1. To save the invoice with the **On hold** status, make sure the **Hold** check box is selected. 1. To save the invoice with the **Balanced** status, do one of the steps below and then make sure the **Hold** check box is cleared: + If the **Amount** field of the top part is displayed in the window, enter the total amount of the invoice in this field. (The **Amount** field is visible when the **Validate document totals on entry** check box is selected in the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window.) + If the **Amount** field is not displayed in the window, make sure the total amount of the invoice is displayed correctly in the **Balance** field. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). ## Correct an invoice that has been released In an open invoice, you can edit only the cash discount date and the due date until the document is settled. Other corrections cannot be done directly in the invoice. A closed invoice cannot be edited at all. For released invoices you correct differently depending on whether there are payments linked to the invoice or invoice lines from the [Shipments (SO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/shipments-so302000/) or [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window. + To correct a released invoice with no payments linked to it and no invoice lines from the [Shipments (SO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/shipments-so302000/) or [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window, see: [Correct a released sales invoice (new)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/correct-a-released-sales-invoice/). + To correct a released invoice with payments linked to it or invoice lines from the [Shipments (SO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/shipments-so302000/) or [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window, select one of the following ways: + Reverse the invoice to reverse the impact of the invoice. For step-by-step instructions of how to reverse an invoice, see: [Reverse an invoice](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/reverse-an-invoice/). + Issue a credit note to decrease the outstanding amount of an invoice. For step-by-step instructions of how to create and apply a credit note, see: [Create a credit note](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/create-a-credit-note/) and [Apply a credit note to open documents](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/apply-a-credit-note-to-open-documents/). + Issue a debit note to increase the outstanding amount of an invoice.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

Correct a released sales invoice /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/correct-a-released-sales-invoice page You correct a customer ledger invoice differently depending on whether the invoice was released (and has the Open or Closed status) or was not released (and has the Balanced, On hold, or Scheduled status). 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Correct a released sales invoice You correct a customer ledger invoice differently depending on whether the invoice was released (and has the Open or Closed status) or was not released (and has the Balanced, On hold, or Scheduled status). In this topic, you will read about the ways to correct an invoice that has been released. In an open (released) invoice, you can edit only the cash discount date and the due date until the document is settled. Other corrections cannot be done directly in the invoice. A closed invoice cannot be edited at all. For released invoices you correct differently depending on whether there are payments linked to the invoice or invoice lines from the [Shipments (SO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/shipments-so302000/) or [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window. ## Correcting an invoice with no payments linked to it and no invoice lines from the Shipments (SO302000) or Sales orders (SO301000) window 1. Go to the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window. 1. Search the invoice you want to correct by clicking on a column's name and filter or search, or by typing in the search field in the upper right corner. Select the invoice you want to correct by clicking on its **Ref. no.** or double-clicking the line. 1. Select **Correct invoice** in the **Actions** drop-down list. 1. The system asks if you want to correct the invoice, answer **Yes**. The system creates a new correction invoice which is a copy of the original invoice. The system also creates a sales credit note for the original invoice in the background. (The original invoice will remain in status **Open** until the new corrected invoice is released.) 1. On the new correction invoice, make your corrections. 1. Save and release. The original invoice will be matched against the automatically created sales credit note, and change status to **Closed**. On both the corrected and original invoice, there will be a button in the window toolbar with direct links to each other, for you to quickly review the changes. ## Correcting an invoice with payments linked to it or invoice lines from the Shipments (SO302000) or Sales orders (SO301000) window, or when an invoice is closed + Reverse the invoice to reverse the impact of the invoice. For step-by-step instructions of how to reverse an invoice, see: [Reverse an invoice](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/reverse-an-invoice/). + Issue a credit note to decrease the outstanding amount of an invoice. For step-by-step instructions of how to create and apply a credit note, see: [Create a credit note](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/create-a-credit-note/) and [Apply a credit note to open documents](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/apply-a-credit-note-to-open-documents/). + Issue a debit note to increase the outstanding amount of an invoice.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

Send an invoice /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/send-an-invoice section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Send an invoice 1. [Create an invoice](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/create-and-release-an-invoice/). 1. Click **Release**. The status changes to **Open** and. ![icon-confirmation](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-confirmation.png) is displayed 1. Select the distribution type: 1. Click **Actions** and select **Email invoice/note**., and the invoice is sent to the recipient address that has been defined for this customer. ![icon-confirmation](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-confirmation.png) is displayed Or 1. Click **Reports** and select **Print invoice/note** (to send by regular mail). 1. In the **Invoice/note form** window, click **Print**. The **Print** window is displayed. 1. In the **Print** window, select the desired layout and number of copies and change any other settings if you like, and click **Print**.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Send one invoice to AutoInvoice /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/send-one-invoice-to-autoinvoice section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Send one invoice to AutoInvoice ## Before you start As of 1 July 2022, new branches need to verify their company in the [AutoInvoice settings (CS10250S)](/visma-net-erp/help/management/management-windows/autoinvoice-settings-cs10250s/) window to be able to use AutoInvoice. See also: [About Know your customer (KYC)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/about-know-your-customer-kyc/). [Prepare to use AutoInvoice for an existing customer.](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/prepare-to-use-autoinvoice-for-an-existing-customer/) 1. [Create an invoice](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/create-an-invoice/) and release it., and the status changes to **Open**. ![icon-confirmation](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-confirmation.png) is displayed 1. Click **Actions**, and select **Send to AutoInvoice**. ![icon-confirmation](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-confirmation.png) is displayed, and the invoice is sent to AutoInvoice. Attachments that you add on the **Attachments** tab will be automatically sent to AutoInvoice if you have selected option **Automatically mark file attachments to be sent to AutoInvoice** in the **AutoInvoice settings** window for the active branch. When you use direct debit as a payment method, the generated invoice will show information about the mandate, and that the invoice amount will automatically be deducted from the customer's bank account. ## What is next? For more information about the statuses of the invoices you have sent to AutoInvoice, see: [Poll the invoice status](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/poll-the-invoice-status/).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Email an invoice from preview in a report /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/email-an-invoice-from-preview-in-a-report page If the Do not email check box is selected on the Invoice address tab and the invoice is released, you cannot send the invoice as an email from the Sales invoices window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Email an invoice from preview in a report If the Do not email check box is selected on the Invoice address tab and the invoice is released, you cannot send the invoice as an email from the Sales invoices window. 1. Go to [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/). 1. Click **Reports** and select **Preview invoice/note**. 1. Click **Send** to open the **Email activity** window. > [!NOTE] > You will not use the invoice notification in this email, but a default notification.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Email an invoice or a credit note /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/email-an-invoice-or-a-credit-note section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Email an invoice or a credit note ## Before you start There are several ways of emailing an invoice or a credit note from the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window. You can either email an invoice with a few clicks via the **Actions** button, or you can preview and email an invoice via the **Reports** button. Instead of emailing to the registered contact on your customer, you can also enter a new email address in the invoice preview, or override the existing email address. It is also possible to email an invoice to a customer that you have already registered **not to** receive any emails. See also: [Set customer print and email preferences.](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/set-customer-print-and-email-preferences/) 1. Go to the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window. 1. In the **Reference no.** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select the invoice. 1. Click **Actions** and select **Email invoice/note**. When the invoice is sent to the [Pending emails (SM507000)](/visma-net-erp/help/email/email-windows/pending-emails-sm507000/) window,. ![icon-confirmation](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-confirmation.png) is displayed When you use direct debit as a payment method, the generated invoice will show information about the mandate, and that the invoice amount will automatically be deducted from the customer's bank account. ## What is next? If you regret sending an email due to an incorrect attachment or email recipient, you can make changes in the [Pending emails (SM507000)](/visma-net-erp/help/email/email-windows/pending-emails-sm507000/) window. For more information, see: [Change the recipient address for a pending email](/visma-net-erp/help/email/manage-emails/change-the-recipient-address-for-a-pending-email/). To get an overview of all your outgoing emails, go to the [Sent emails (CO409080)](/visma-net-erp/help/email/email-windows/my-sent-emails-co409080/) window.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Override an email address /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/override-an-email-address section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Override an email address 1. Go to the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window. 1. On the **Invoice address** tab, under **Contact information**, select **Override contact**. 1. Enter the new email address for this invoice. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Email an invoice to an unregistered contact /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/email-an-invoice-to-an-unregistered-contact section You can email the invoice to another contact than the email address registered on the customer. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Email an invoice to an unregistered contact You can email the invoice to another contact than the email address registered on the customer. 1. Go to the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window. 1. In the **Reference no.** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select the invoice. 1. Click **Reports** and select **Print invoice/note**. 1. In the preview of the invoice, click **Send**. 1. In the **Email activity** window, enter the email address or click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to search for recipients. 1. Click **Send**. ## What is next? If you have sent your email to a the wrong recipient, see [Change the recipient address for a pending email](/visma-net-erp/help/email/manage-emails/change-the-recipient-address-for-a-pending-email/). You can also get an overview of all your outgoing emails.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Poll the invoice status /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/poll-the-invoice-status section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Poll the invoice status 1. You are here: In the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window, with your invoice released and sent to AutoInvoice. 1. Click **Actions** and select **Poll invoice status**. The system polls the status and when it is finished, you see the ![icon-confirmation](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-confirmation.png) icon. 1. Click the **Invoice address** tab. 1. Under the **AutoInvoice** section: + Find the **AutoInvoice status** field. You see the status of your invoice. > Available statuses are: > > + Sent to AutoInvoice - awaiting processing. > + Pending - awaiting delivery. > + Sent - the invoice is sent. > + Error - to check why an error occurred, you have to go to AutoInvoice. + In the **Sending method** field, you see the value **Consumer** if the invoice was sent as banking e-invoice, or the value **Standard**, if it was sent as a regular e-invoice. This field is populated as soon as you create the invoice and select the customer, so you can check the sending method before the actual sending to AutoInvoice. + In the **AutoInvoice sent by** field, you see the service that was used to send the invoice.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Close customer invoices open due to rounding differences /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/close-customer-invoices-open-due-to-rounding-differences page If the customer has made a payment for an invoice with rounding differences, the customer's balance will be open. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Close customer invoices open due to rounding differences If the customer has made a payment for an invoice with rounding differences, the customer's balance will be open. You can do the depreciation in an easy way in Visma Net. ## Closing open customer invoices with rounding differences 1. Go to the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window. 1. Select the check box **Enable write-offs** and enter a write-off limit (e.g. 0.99) for the customers you would like to make a depreciation. You can make this a default setting when you create new customers. You do this in the [Customer classes (AR201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-classes-ar201000/) window. 1. Go to the [Reason codes (CS211000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/reason-codes-cs211000/) window and create a new code for write-offs. 1. Go to the [Write-off balances and credits (AR505000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/write-off-balances-and-credits-ar505000/) window. 1. Select the invoices you would like to depreciate and click **Process** to update the vouchers. You have now got a voucher with correct roundings which will close the invoice. Preview an invoice /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/preview-an-invoice section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Preview an invoice 1. Go to the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window. 1. In the **Reference no.** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select the invoice. The invoice must have the status **Balanced**. 1. Click **Reports**. 1. From the drop-down list, select **Preview invoice/note**. The invoice is displayed in the **Invoice/note form** window, where you can send, print, create a PDF, or export the invoice to other formats.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Print an invoice /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/print-an-invoice section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Print an invoice 1. Go to the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window. 1. In the **Reference no.** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select the invoice. 1. Click the **Reports** button and select **Print invoice/note**. The invoice is displayed. 1. Hover over the invoice to see the ![icon-print](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-print.png) icon, and click it. The invoice is displayed in Window's **Print** window. 1. In the **Print** window, select the layout, and do any other settings that you find necessary. 1. Click the **Print** button. See also: [Print several invoices or credit notes](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-mailings/print-several-invoices-or-credit-notes/). When you use direct debit as a payment method, the generated invoice will show information about the mandate, and that the invoice amount will automatically be deducted from the customer's bank account.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Add text to invoices /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/add-text-to-invoices section In some situations, you might need to add additional text on invoices. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Add text to invoices In some situations, you might need to add additional text on invoices. ## Adding additional text 1. Go to the [Report texts (AR20200S)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/report-texts-ar20200s/) window. 1. Add the **report text code** and a **name**. Remember to use a meaningful name. 1. Write the text you need. You can have two different texts on each customer class. 1. **Save** this text block. 1. Go to the [Customer classes (AR201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-classes-ar201000/) window. 1. Select the correct **customer class** and open tab **Report text settings**. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. Under **Notification ID**, choose if the text block is added to **Invoices** or **Dunning letters**. 1. Under **Report text ID**, select the text block you created before. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). The text will now be added when creating invoices/dunning letters for this customer class. Process payments and applications /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-payments-and-applications section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Process payments and applications Processing payments and applications - overview /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-payments-and-applications/processing-payments-and-applications-overview page In general, you use the Customer ledger workspace specifically for sales made on credit. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Processing payments and applications - overview In general, you use the Customer ledger workspace specifically for sales made on credit. During the implementation of this workspace in your system, the following Customer ledger settings and entities were defined, making it easy for you to process customer ledger documents: + Number series for Customer ledger documents and the related general ledger batches in the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. + Customer accounts to uniquely identify each of your clients and hold their information and settings. + Credit and collection policies, which include terms of sales, customer credit verification rules, overdue charges, statements, and dunning letters. For details, see: [Manage credit policy - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/manage-credit-policy-overview/). + The goods and services (defined as stock items in the system) that your company sells to your customers. For details on recording services, see: [Manage non-stock items - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-non-stock-items/manage-non-stock-items-overview/). + Sales prices and discount policy, as described in [Manage sales prices - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/multiple-price-lists/manage-sales-prices-overview/) and [Manage discounts](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-discounts/). With these entities defined, users in your company can record and process documents in Visma Net quickly and accurately, with minimal manual actions. The system fills in the most of the needed information automatically. ## Topics + [About payment processing flow](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/about-payment-processing-flow/) + [About payment recording](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-payments-and-applications/about-payment-recording/) + [About manual payment application](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/about-manual-payment-application/) + [About automatic payment application](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-payments-and-applications/about-automatic-payment-application/) + [About release of payments and prepayments](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-payments-and-applications/about-release-of-payments-and-prepayments/) + [About release of application records](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-payments-and-applications/about-release-of-application-records/) + [About refund processing](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/about-refund-processing/) + [Enter a payment document](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/enter-a-payment-document/) + [Pay a specific outstanding document](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-payments-and-applications/pay-a-specific-outstanding-document/) + [Form a list of applications manually](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/form-a-list-of-applications-manually/) + [Form a list of applications automatically](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/form-a-list-of-applications-automatically/) + [Correct an application record](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/correct-an-application-record/) + [Apply a payment document automatically](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-payments-and-applications/apply-a-payment-document-automatically/) + [Release a payment document](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/release-a-payment-document/) + [Issue a refund](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/issue-a-refund/) + [Void a payment or prepayment document](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/void-a-payment-or-prepayment-document/)

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

About payment recording /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-payments-and-applications/about-payment-recording page In Visma Net, you can create the following types of payment documents: Payment, Prepayment, and Customer refund. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About payment recording In Visma Net, you can create the following types of payment documents: Payment, Prepayment, and Customer refund. The information in this topic applies to documents of all these types. > [!NOTE] > In this topic, the term **payment** is used for payment documents of the three mentioned types if a type is not stated explicitly. In this topic, you will read about the windows you may use to create a payment, the structure of a payment document, and other details. ## Payment creation sources In Visma Net, a user can manually enter a customer ledger payment from the following windows: + [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window. You create a payment document here from scratch. For step-by-step instructions, see [Enter a payment document](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/enter-a-payment-document/) and [Issue a refund](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/issue-a-refund/). + [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window, by using the **Enter payment/apply memo** action. The system opens the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window where a payment document with the **Payment** type is created automatically: The elements of the window are filled in with the customer information, the invoice amount is specified as the document amount, and the application record of the invoice is added. You simply release the payment the system has created, and the system releases the application record as well and closes both documents. For step-by-step instructions, see [Pay a specific outstanding document](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-payments-and-applications/pay-a-specific-outstanding-document/). ## Document structure Regardless of how a payment document is created, it has the same groups of settings, which are described in this topic: The top part : Settings that are located in the top part of the window define the general information required for issuing the payment. When you create a new document, the system inserts the current business date as the date of application and the corresponding post period. When you select the ID of the customer account, the system uses the customer as a source to automatically fill in most settings needed for processing the payment. All settings filled in by the system can be manually overridden. **Financial details**: This group of settings, located on the **Financial details** tab, defines the general ledger accounts where the payment transactions are recorded after a user releases the payment. The system fills in the values for these settings automatically when you select a customer account, but they can be manually overridden. When you create a new document, the system also inserts the current business date as the payment date and the corresponding post period. Application details : Each outstanding document that you want to pay with the payment is specified in a separate line of the table on the **Applications** tab. The payment document can be applied to multiple outstanding documents. For each line, you specify the amount to be paid in the **Amount paid** column. For details, see [About manual payment application](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/about-manual-payment-application/). Balance details : Read-only elements in the top part of the window display how the amount of the payment document has been distributed and currently available balance (the amount that is not applied). The system updates the values of these elements when you modify application details. When you save the document for the first time, the system generates a unique reference number for the payment document in accordance with the numbering sequence assigned to corresponding payment document on the **General settings** tab of the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. ## Registration of bank charges If bank charges for customer payments are configured in your system, you can specify the amounts of these charges on each payment document that is processed by the bank on the **Finance charges** tab. The amount of finance charges is displayed in the top part in the following fields: Finance charges : The total of finance charges included in the payment amount. That is, the entry type used to record the charge has the **Deduct from payment** check box cleared in the [Entry types (CA203000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/entry-types-ca203000/) window. Deducted charges : The total of finance charges deducted from the payment amount. That is, the entry type used to record the charge has the **Deduct from payment** check box selected in the [Entry types (CA203000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/entry-types-ca203000/) window. For details, see [About the registration of finance charges](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/track-cash-payments/about-the-registration-of-finance-charges/). ## Attachment of the original document For user reference, you can attach to each entered payment a scanned image of the original customer document or an electronic version of the customer document.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

About automatic payment application /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-payments-and-applications/about-automatic-payment-application page Manually applying payment documents to invoices may require a significant amount of time if your company sells a lot in a financial period. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About automatic payment application Manually applying payment documents to invoices may require a significant amount of time if your company sells a lot in a financial period. To ease this process, Visma Net provides the functionality to automate the application of payment documents. In this topic, you will read about the auto-application options offered by the system, as well as their configuration and implementation details. ## Auto-application use cases You can use automatic application of a payment document in the following cases: + You work with a customer who purchases very frequently; therefore, there are a lot of invoices and payments involved. For this customer, you can turn on automatic application of new payments to outstanding documents associated with the customer account. + You want to apply all open payment documents recorded in the system to outstanding documents at some particular time, such as before preparing customer statements. You use the [Apply payments automatically (AR506000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/apply-payments-automatically-ar506000/) mass processing window for this purpose. + It is common in your company to receive payments in advance and you want to apply open payment documents when you record the related invoice. For details on applying payments when recording invoices, see [About invoice recording](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/about-invoice-recording/). ## Auto-application for a customer account Suppose that your company has customers who purchase frequently and you want to save time on the application of their payment documents with the **Payment** type to outstanding documents. For such customers, you select the **Apply payments automatically** check box on the **Financial settings** tab of the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window. When you release a new payment (with the **Balanced** status) of one of these customers in the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window, the system automatically applies the payment to any outstanding documents of this customer. > [!NOTE] > For auto-application to occur, when you release the payment, it must not have any outstanding documents specified on the **Documents to apply** tab. The system forms the list of outstanding documents and distributes the payment amount as follows: > [!NOTE] > The system sorts outstanding documents in descending order by their due date and then their reference number. 1. If the customer account has open documents of the **Credit note** type, the system adds them at the top of the list. The balances of the open credit notes increase the balance that can be applied to outstanding documents. 1. If the **Apply payments to overdue charges first** check box is selected in the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window and the customer account has open documents of the **Overdue charge** type, the system distributes the available payment balance among these documents. If the available payment balance, including the balances of any open credit notes, has not been fully applied, the system searches for outstanding documents of other types. 1. If the customer account has outstanding documents, the system applies the available payment balance to the first document in the list. If the available payment balance, including the balances of any open credit notes, has not been fully applied, the system applies the rest of the balance to the next document in the list and continues this process until the available payment balance is fully applied. > [!NOTE] > If the **Multi-branch support** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window, the system searches among all outstanding documents associated with the customer account, regardless of the branch specified for the documents. The system creates application records for each paid outstanding document and releases the application records simultaneously with the payment. ## Auto-application for multiple documents Before you prepare statements for your customers, we recommend that you apply open payment documents from customers to any corresponding invoices and calculate any overdue charges, to avoid incorrect calculation of aged balances. For a statement cycle, if the **Require payment application before statement** check box is selected in the [Statement cycles (AR202800)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/statement-cycles-ar202800/) window, the system will issue a warning if you try to process statements while there are open payments of customers involved in the statement cycle. > [!NOTE] > You can review the list of open documents of the customers by using Visma Net reports, as described in [About payment processing flow](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/about-payment-processing-flow/). If there are open payment documents and credit notes, you can go through these documents one by one and apply them to the outstanding documents manually, as described in [About manual payment application](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/about-manual-payment-application/), or you can use the [Apply payments automatically (AR506000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/apply-payments-automatically-ar506000/) mass processing window. In this window, you select a statement cycle or multiple statement cycles to specify the group of customers for which the system will run the auto-application process. When you run the process (by clicking **Process** or **Process a ll** in the window toolbar), the system does the following for each customer that is assigned to the selected statement cycles: 1. Searches for all open payments and prepayments, and sorts these documents in ascending order by the document date, document type, and reference number. If you have selected the **Apply credit notes** check box in the window, the system includes open credit notes in the list of payment documents. 1. Searches for all open debit notes, invoices, and overdue charges, and sorts these documents in ascending order by due date. If the **Apply payments to overdue charges first** check box is selected in the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window, the system moves any overdue charges to the top of the list. 1. Applies any found credit notes (if included) and payment documents to the outstanding documents one by one by creating the corresponding application records, starting with the first credit note or payment document and the first outstanding document. 1. If you have selected the **Release batch when finished** check box in the window, releases application records and closes documents whose balance becomes 0. If you have not selected this check box, you need to release application records manually for each payment document in the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window or by using the [Release customer documents (AR501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/release-customer-documents-ar501000/) mass processing window. For details, see [About release of payments and prepayments](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-payments-and-applications/about-release-of-payments-and-prepayments/). > [!NOTE] > If the **Automatically post on release** option is selected in the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window, the system also posts the released batches. After the process is complete, for each payment document, you can view the list of applications that have been saved but not yet released on the **Documents to apply** tab of the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window. You can track the history of released payment applications by using the **Application history** tab of the window. For step-by-step instructions, see [View invoices paid with a specific payment document](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/view-invoices-paid-with-a-specific-payment-document/). ## Auto-application to documents of child customer accounts If the **Parent-Child Customer Relationship** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window and parent-child relations between customer accounts are configured, you can include the open documents of child accounts in the process of automatic payment application. In the [Apply payments automatically (AR506000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/apply-payments-automatically-ar506000/) mass processing window, in the **Include child documents** field, you can select the types of open documents of child accounts that should be included in the process of payment application. The system will process first the open documents of the child accounts and then the open documents of the parent account. For details, see [Manage parent-child relationships - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-parent-child-relationship/manage-parent-child-relationships-overview/). ## Exclusion from the automatic application of payment documents The system excludes payments and prepayments from the list of payment documents that can be applied to outstanding documents if they meet at least one of the following criteria: + The open payment document is linked to a sales order. That is, the payment document has a reservation record or multiple reservation records on the **Orders to apply** tab of the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window. For details, see [About payment reservation for sales orders](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/manage-document-types-and-work-flows/about-payment-reservation-for-sales-orders/). + The open payment document was put on hold. That is, a user selected the **Hold** check box for the payment document with the **Open** status in the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window, and the system changed the document status from **Open** to **Reserved**. > [!NOTE] > To release the payment from hold, clear the **Hold** check box. Thus, the system ignores these payment documents when you record an invoice and want to perform an application, as well as when you initiate the auto-application process in the [Apply payments automatically (AR506000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/apply-payments-automatically-ar506000/) mass processing window.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

About release of payments and prepayments /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-payments-and-applications/about-release-of-payments-and-prepayments page This topic contains information that applies to releasing documents of the Payment and Prepayment type. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About release of payments and prepayments This topic contains information that applies to releasing documents of the Payment and Prepayment type. ## Introduction ## In this topic This topic describes: + The windows you may use to release a payment or prepayment. + What happens in the system after release. + The details of the general ledger batch generated after release. ## When and where to release a payment and prepayment The following table displays when and where (pre)payments can be released. |When a payment or prepayment has the status|Then it can be released in|For instructions on how to release, see| |---|---|---| |**Balanced**|[Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/)|[Release a payment document](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/release-a-payment-document/)| |[Release customer documents (AR501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/release-customer-documents-ar501000/)|[Release customer documents](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-customer-ledger-documents/release-customer-documents/)|| ## System processes after releasing payments and prepayments The following tables give an overview of what happens in the system after the release of a (pre)payment. ### Payments ||Payment|||| |---|---|---|---|---| |System change|without applications|partially applied|fully applied|voided| |Status changes to|**Open**|**Open**|**Closed**|#### Closed **Note**: the status of the payment changes to **Voided**.| |Paid documents' balances are|not applicable|decreased **Note**: if paid document's balance becomes 0, its status changes to **Closed**.|decreased **Note**: if paid document's balance becomes 0, its status changes to **Closed**.|increased **Note**: if paid document's status was **Closed**, the status changes to **Open**.| |Customer's balance is|decreased with payment amount|+ decreased with paid amount + decreased with available payment balance|decreased with paid amount|increased with voided amount| |Application records are released|not applicable|yes|yes|yes, any reversed application records are released| |General ledger batch is created|yes|yes|yes|yes| ### Prepayments ||Prepayment||| |---|---|---|---| |System change|without applications|partially applied|fully applied| |Status changes to|**Open**|**Open**|**Closed**| |Paid documents' balances are|not applicable|decreased **Note**: if paid document's balance becomes 0, its status changes to **Closed**.|decreased **Note**: if paid document's balance becomes 0, its status changes to **Closed**.| |Customer's balance is|not applicable|decreased with paid amount|decreased with paid amount| |Customer's prepayment balance is|increased with prepayment amount|increased with available prepayment amount|not applicable| |Application records are released|not applicable|yes|yes| |General ledger batch is created|yes|yes|yes| ## General ledger batch after release of payment and prepayment The following sections give information about the general ledger batch created after the release of a (pre)payment. ### Involved accounts When a payment or prepayment is released, the system generates a general ledger batch to update the involved asset accounts with the (pre)payment transactions. Usually, this involves the following accounts retrieved from other fields in the system: |Account type|Specified in the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window's field for|Corresponding field in [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window, General ledger accounts tab, per document type| |---|---|---| |Asset|the **Customer ledger account** on the **Financial details** tab.|Payment: #### Customer ledger account| |Prepayment: 1. **Prepayment account** (if set) 1. **Customer ledger account**||| |Cash|the **Cash account** in the top part.|not applicable| ### Recorded transactions The transactions recorded in the general ledger batch differ depending on the below described specifications. #### Payments and prepayments with no designated prepayment account After the release of a payment or a prepayment with no designated prepayment account, regardless of whether the payment or prepayment is without applications, partially or fully applied, the following transactions will be recorded: |Account|Debit|Credit| |---|---|---| |Cash account|(Pre)payment amount|0.0| |Customer ledger account|0.0|(Pre)payment amount| #### Prepayments with designated prepayment account For a prepayment with a designated prepayment account that differs from the customer ledger account used to record payments to, the recorded transactions differ depending on whether the prepayment is without applications, partially applied or fully applied. ##### Prepayment without applications After the release of a prepayment without applications, the following transactions will be recorded: |Account|Debit|Credit| |---|---|---| |Cash account|Prepayment amount|0.0| |Customer ledger account for prepayments|0.0|Prepayment amount| ##### Partially applied prepayment After the release of a partially fully applied prepayment, with a designated customer ledger account that differs from the customer ledger account used to record outstanding documents to, the following transactions will be recorded: |Account|Debit|Credit| |---|---|---| |Cash account|Prepayment amount|0.0| |Customer ledger account for prepayments|0.0|Paid amount (prepayment amount - applied amount)| |Customer ledger account for invoices|0.0|Applied amount| ##### Fully applied prepayment After the release of a partially fully applied prepayment, with a designated customer ledger account that differs from the customer ledger account used to record outstanding documents to, the following transactions will be recorded: |Account|Debit|Credit| |---|---|---| |Cash account|Prepayment amount|0.0| |Customer ledger account for invoices|0.0|Prepayment amount| ### Batch details and additional transactions The following sections explain where to view the batch details and where to find more information on additional transactions. #### View batch details You can view the batch details by clicking the link in the **Batch no.** field on the **Financial details** tab of the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window. #### Bank charge and application record transactions The following additional transactions may be generated and included in the batch: |Transaction type|For details, see| |---|---| |Bank charge|[Finance charge transactions](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/track-cash-payments/finance-charge-transactions/)| |Application record|[About release of application records](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-payments-and-applications/about-release-of-application-records/)|

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

About release of application records /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-payments-and-applications/about-release-of-application-records page In most cases, when you release applications records, the system does not generate any transactions that need to be posted to the general ledger. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About release of application records In most cases, when you release applications records, the system does not generate any transactions that need to be posted to the general ledger. The system generates additional transactions when any of the following need to be recorded: + The applied cash discount + The written-off balance + The realised gain or loss (RGOL) incurred if payments and outstanding documents are in a foreign currency + The amount transferred between different customer ledger accounts that are involved in an application. This topic describes the windows you may use to release application records of a payment document and the details of releasing application records, as well as the details of the generation of the general ledger batch. ## Release payment applications In Visma Net, you can add application records to a payment document when you record the payment document and after you have released it. In both cases, you can use either of the following windows when you need to release an application record: + [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/): You release an application record for an open payment by clicking the **Release** button on the window toolbar. + [Release customer documents (AR501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/release-customer-documents-ar501000/): You use this mass-processing window to release the application records for a particular open payment or multiple open payments. Each time you release an application record for a payment document, the system does the following: + For the payment document, updates the **Application date** and **Application period** fields in the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window with the date when the application record is released. + Moves the application record from the **Documents to apply** tab to the **Application history** tab. + Generates any application transactions. + Decreases the available payment balance for the applied amount. If the available payment balance becomes 0, the system changes the payment status to **Closed**. When you add application records to a payment document with the **On hold** or **Balanced** status and then release the payment document, the system simultaneously releases its application records. If the application records require some transactions to be recorded, the system adds these transactions to a general ledger batch with the payment transactions. You can view the batch details by clicking the link in the **Batch no.** field on the **Financial details** tab of the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window or by clicking the link in the **Batch number** column on the **Application history** tab of this window. > [!NOTE] > The system displays the batch number in the **Batch number** column on the **Application history** tab even if there were no application transactions. In this case, the batch will contain only payment transactions. When you add application records to a released payment document (with the **Open** status), you release only application records. If the application records require some transactions to be recorded, the system generates an additional general ledger batch with the application transactions. You can view the batch details by clicking the link in the **Batch number** column on the **Application history** tab of the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window. ## Release an application with a cash discount When you add an invoice for which a cash discount is valid to the **Documents to apply** tab, the system automatically fills in the **Cash discount taken** column for the invoice with the cash discount amount defined by the payment terms associated with the invoice. You can decrease the cash discount amount, if needed. When you then release a payment with an application record that contains an applied cash discount, the system generates a batch of the following transactions. |Account|Debit|Credit| |---|---|---| |Cash account|Payment amount|0.0| |Customer ledger account|0.0|Payment amount + Cash discount amount| |Cash discount account|Cash discount amount|0.0| ## Release an application with a written-off balance You write off some balance along with the application by specifying the amount and the reason code in the **Balance write-off** and **Write-off reason code** columns, respectively. When you release a payment with an application record that contains a written-off amount, the system generates a batch of the following transactions. |Account|Debit|Credit| |---|---|---| |Cash account|Payment amount|0.0| |Customer ledger account|0.0|Payment amount + Write-off amount| |Bad debts|Write-off amount|0.0| ## Release an application with a RGOL Suppose that you apply a payment in a foreign currency to an outstanding document in the same foreign currency and the exchange rate on the invoice date is less than the exchange rate on the payment date. When you release the payment with its application record, the system generates a batch of the following transactions in the foreign currency. |Account|Debit|Credit| |---|---|---| |Cash account (foreign currency)|Payment amount (in the foreign currency)|0.0| |Customer ledger account|0.0|Payment amount (in the foreign currency)| |Realised gain / loss account|0.0|0.0| If you view the batch in the base currency by clicking the **View base** button in the top part of the [Journal transactions (GL301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/journal-transactions-gl301000/) window, the system displays the same transaction in the base currency. |Account|Debit|Credit| |---|---|---| |Cash account (foreign currency)|Payment amount (in the base currency)|0.0| |Customer ledger account|0.0|Payment amount - RGOL amount (in the base currency)| |Realised gain / loss account|0.0|RGOL amount (in the base currency)| ## Release an application with different customer ledger accounts Suppose that you recorded a payment document to some customer ledger account and did not specify any application records. When you release this payment, the system generates the batch with the payment transactions as follows. |Account|Debit|Credit| |---|---|---| |Cash account|Payment amount|0.0| |Customer ledger account of the payment|0.0|Payment amount| You can view the batch details by clicking the link in the **Batch no.** field on the **Financial details** tab of the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window. Then you apply this open payment to an outstanding document that was recorded to another customer ledger account. When you release the application record, the system generates a batch of the following transactions. |Account|Debit|Credit| |---|---|---| |Customer ledger account of the payment|Payment amount|0.0| |Customer ledger account of the outstanding document|0.0|Payment amount| You can view the batch details by clicking the link in the **Batch number** column on the **Application history** tab of the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Pay a specific outstanding document /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-payments-and-applications/pay-a-specific-outstanding-document section You can enter a customer payment received for a specific outstanding document by using the Sales invoices (AR301000) window as a starting point. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Pay a specific outstanding document You can enter a customer payment received for a specific outstanding document by using the Sales invoices (AR301000) window as a starting point. For more information: [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/). 1. Go to the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window. 1. In the **Type** field of the top part, select the type of the outstanding document: **Invoice**, **Credit note**, **Debit note**, **Credit write-off**, or **Overdue charge**. 1. Select the document by the reference number, or navigate to it. 1. Check the status of the document. You can enter a payment for an outstanding document only if it has the **Open** status. 1. In the **Actions** menu in the window toolbar, select **Enter payment/apply note**. This action causes the system to navigate to the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window. The system automatically fills in most of the fields in the Selection area; check this information. Also, the payment is automatically applied to the outstanding document; check the information in the **Documents to apply** tab. 1. Enter a reference to the customer payment in the **Payment ref.** field. Depending on the settings you have established, this field might be filled in automatically by the system. 1. Optional: Add a description of the payment. 1. In the **Payment amount** field, check the amount of the customer payment. 1. To save the customer payment with the **Balanced** status, make sure the **Hold** check box is cleared. 1. In the window toolbar, click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). 1. Optional: Click **Release** in the window toolbar. When the payment document is released, it is assigned the **Closed** status because the amount of the document applied to the payment is equal to the payment amount.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Track customer prepayments /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-payments-and-applications/track-customer-prepayments page You can track customer prepayments in the following windows: 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Track customer prepayments You can track customer prepayments in the following windows: + [Customer summary (AR401000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-summary-ar401000/): Displays prepayment balances + [Customer details (AR402000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-details-ar402000/): Shows prepayments from individual customers + [Balance by general ledger account (AR632000) report](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/balance-by-general-ledger-account-ar632000/): Displays all prepayments collected on the prepayment account To track customer prepayments, you use a special liability account, the **prepayment account**, to record prepayments from customers. > [!NOTE] > If you want to set a default prepayment account to be used for each new customer a user creates, in the [Customer classes (AR201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-classes-ar201000/) window, specify the prepayment account and subaccount for each of the customer classes that might be used when a user creates a new customer. You can change the prepayment account and subaccount for a particular customer in the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window. The system credits this account by default when a user enters a new prepayment from the customer. ## View prepayment balances 1. Go to the [Customer summary (AR401000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-summary-ar401000/) window. 1. In the **Branch** field of the top part, select the branch for which you want to view prepayments. 1. In the **Period** field, select the financial period, or leave the field blank to view all open prepayments. 1. In the **Customer ledger account** field, select the prepayment account. In the table, you can view the list of customers with the prepayment balances calculated for the selected criteria. The **Total prepayments** field of the top part shows the total amount of customer prepayments calculated, based on the selected criteria. > [!NOTE] > You can adjust the list by changing the selection criteria. ## View prepayments by customer 1. Go to the [Customer details (AR402000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-details-ar402000/) window. 1. In the **Branch** field of the top part, select the branch for which you want to view prepayments. 1. In the **Customer** field, select the customer whose prepayments you want to view. 1. In the **Customer ledger account** field, select the prepayment account. In the table, you can view the list of prepayments that match the selected criteria. The **Prepayments balance** field of the top part displays the total amount of customer prepayments calculated, based on the selected criteria. ## View all prepayments 1. Go to the [Balance by general ledger account (AR632000) report](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/balance-by-general-ledger-account-ar632000/). 1. On the **Report parameters** tab, specify the report parameters that fit your information needs. > [!NOTE] > If you leave the **Branch** field blank, you get information on all branches. 1. In the window toolbar, click **Run report**. 1. Find the prepayment account in the report to view all prepayments that fit the specified criteria. Additionally, you can use filtering to display only specific documents in the report. For example: After you set the report parameters and before you run the report, you can add filter condition lines to the **Additional filtering conditions** table on the **Additional sort and filters** tab as follows: + To view only documents collected on the prepayment account with account ID 140000, use the settings shown in the table below. |Property|Condition|Value| |---|---|---| |Account.AccountCD|Equals|140000| + To view only prepayments, use the settings shown in the table below. |Property|Condition|Value| |---|---|---| |ARRegister.DocType|Equals|Prepayment|

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Apply a payment document automatically /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-payments-and-applications/apply-a-payment-document-automatically page You can initiate the process of payment auto-application by using the Apply payments automatically (AR506000) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Apply a payment document automatically You can initiate the process of payment auto-application by using the Apply payments automatically (AR506000) window. For more information: [Apply payments automatically (AR506000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/apply-payments-automatically-ar506000/). You can initiate the process of payment auto-application by using the [Apply payments automatically (AR506000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/apply-payments-automatically-ar506000/) window. Customer payments and prepayments can be applied automatically to one invoice or multiple invoices, as well as to debit notes and overdue charges. For details, see: [About automatic payment application](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-payments-and-applications/about-automatic-payment-application/). ## Before you proceed Make sure that all needed customer ledger documents of the customer accounts for which you want to run the automatic application process have been released. You can review the list of customer ledger documents of customers by using Visma Net reports, as described in: [About payment processing flow](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/about-payment-processing-flow/). 1. Go to the [Apply payments automatically (AR506000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/apply-payments-automatically-ar506000/) window. 1. In the **Application date** field, select the date on which you want to perform the auto-application. By default, the current business date is displayed. The system records this date for each payment document or credit note (if any credit note was included in the automatic application process) in the **Application date** field on the top part of the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window. The **Application period** field is filled in automatically based on the selected date; the application will be performed for this financial period. 1. Optional: To include credit notes in the automatic application process, select the **Apply credit notes** check box. If you do, the balances of the open credit notes increase the balance that can be applied to outstanding documents. 1. Optional: To automatically release batches created as a result of the automatic application process, select the **Release batch when finished** check box. If this check box is cleared, the resulting batches receive the **Balanced** status and you will need to release the application records manually for each payment document in the [Payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window or for multiple payment documents by using the [Release customer documents (AR501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/release-customer-documents-ar501000/) mass processing window. 1. Do one of the following: + To initiate the automatic application process for the customer accounts that belong to all statement cycles listed in the table, click **Process all** in the window toolbar. + To initiate the automatic application process for the customer accounts that belong to particular cycles only, select the statement cycles you want to process by selecting the corresponding check boxes, and click **Process**. After the process is complete, for each payment document, you can view the list of applications that have been saved but not yet released on the **Documents to apply** tab of the [Payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window. The history of released payment applications can be tracked on the **Application history** tab of the window. For step-by-step instructions, see: [View invoices paid with a specific payment document](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/view-invoices-paid-with-a-specific-payment-document/).

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

Match incoming payments /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-payments-and-applications/match-incoming-payments page After the payments are processed in the AutoPay inbox (CA50400S) window, you need to match them automatically from the Process incoming payments (AR305000) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Match incoming payments After the payments are processed in the AutoPay inbox (CA50400S) window, you need to match them automatically from the Process incoming payments (AR305000) window. For more information: [AutoPay inbox (CA50400S)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/autopay-inbox-ca50400s/), [Process incoming payments (AR305000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/process-incoming-payments-ar305000/). After the payments are processed in the [AutoPay inbox (CA50400S)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/autopay-inbox-ca50400s/) window, you need to match them automatically from the [Process incoming payments (AR305000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/process-incoming-payments-ar305000/) window. 1. Go to the [Process incoming payments (AR305000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/process-incoming-payments-ar305000/) window. 1. If you have defined a default cash account for this window, you will see all the payments that have been imported from AutoPay. 1. If you do not use a default account or want to match payments from a different account, select the account in the **Cash account** field. The system displays all imported payments for that account in the table. 1. If you do not want to include matches with 0 relevance, select the **Display only relevant matches** check box. 1. Click **Match automatically**. The system now tries to match the imported incoming payments with the customer ledger invoices in the system. The matching is based on payment reference and/or invoice numbers. For payments that the system has matched automatically, you see that the **Ready to process** check box is selected. These are now ready for processing. ## What is next? If the payments were matched automatically: [Process matched incoming payments](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-payments-and-applications/process-matched-incoming-payments/) Or, if the system could **not** automatically match payments, you need to review these transactions.

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

Match a bank transaction or incoming payment line to different documents /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-payments-and-applications/match-a-bank-transaction-or-incoming-payment-line-to-different-documents section In the Process bank transactions (CA306000) and Process incoming payments (AR305000) windows, you can split a bank transaction or incoming payment line in the left table into different lines to process them against corresponding, multiple documents. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Match a bank transaction or incoming payment line to different documents In the Process bank transactions (CA306000) and Process incoming payments (AR305000) windows, you can split a bank transaction or incoming payment line in the left table into different lines to process them against corresponding, multiple documents. For more information: [Process bank transactions (CA306000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/process-bank-transactions-ca306000/), [Process incoming payments (AR305000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/process-incoming-payments-ar305000/). You can match a bank transaction or incoming payment against multiple, different documents, for example, documents from different workspaces. > [!NOTE] > You can activate automatic splitting of payments on bank statements and/or incoming payments import by selecting the **Automatic split of batch payment from customers into payments per customer** check box on the **Bank statements settings** and/or **Incoming payments settings** tab in the [Cash management preferences (CA101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-management-preferences-ca101000/) window. You then only need to process them in the respective windows. 1. Go to the [Process bank transactions (CA306000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/process-bank-transactions-ca306000/) or [Process incoming payments (AR305000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/process-incoming-payments-ar305000/) window. 1. Select a cash account in the top part. 1. In the left pane table, select the line that you want to match. 1. In the **Create payment** tab (in the [Process incoming payments (AR305000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/process-incoming-payments-ar305000/) window) or **Create document** tab (in the [Process bank transactions (CA306000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/process-bank-transactions-ca306000/) window), fill in the required information and select the first document to match. If an amount is remaining, the **Split** button will appear. 1. Click **Split** and a new line will appear below the original line in the left table, marked with an arrow. > [!NOTE] > The original line will be adjusted with a new amount and the **Ready to process** check box will be selected. The new line will have the unapplied amount in the **Receipt** or **Disbursement** field, depending on whether the unapplied amount is positive or negative. 1. Select the new line and perform the same procedure as in Step 4 to match it against a different document. > [!NOTE] > You can continue splitting as long as the line has an unapplied amount. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). The system selects the **Ready to process** check box in the left pane table. 1. You can now continue processing the lines.

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

Create a new payment or document /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-payments-and-applications/create-a-new-payment-or-document section For bank transactions and incoming payments with no match, you can create a new document or payment to match manually. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create a new payment or document For bank transactions and incoming payments with no match, you can create a new document or payment to match manually. 1. Go to the [Process bank transactions (CA306000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/process-bank-transactions-ca306000/) or [Process incoming payments (AR305000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/process-incoming-payments-ar305000/) window. 1. Select a cash account in the top part. 1. In the left pane table, select the line that you want to match. 1. In the **Create payment** tab (in the [Process bank transactions (CA306000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/process-bank-transactions-ca306000/) window) or **Create document** tab (in the [[Process incoming payments (AR305000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/process-incoming-payments-ar305000/)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/process-bank-transactions-ca306000/) window), select the **Create** check box. > [!NOTE] > If the details of an imported bank transaction or incoming payment include an invoice number in the **Invoice no.** field, the system searches for an open invoice that has the same reference number after you have selected the **Create** check box. If an invoice is found, the system fills in fields on the tab automatically with the data from the invoice and applies the amount to the invoice, and the line is ready for processing. Note that the bank transaction or incoming payment amount may differ from the invoice total. 1. Optional: In [Process bank transactions (CA306000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/process-bank-transactions-ca306000/), you can attach a file to the new document or the transaction. Drag the file to the **Create payment** tab area or click **Attach file** and select **Add file...** on the tab to open the **Upload file dialog box**. 1. In the **Workspace** field, select the workspace where the document originated. 1. If you in Step 6 selected **Cash management**: 1. Specify the **Entry type ID**. > [!NOTE] > Make sure that all needed entry types are listed under the **Entry types** tab of the selected cash account in the [Cash accounts (CA202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-accounts-ca202000/) window. 1. Optional: in the **VAT Zone** field, change or specify the **VAT Zone** that applies to the transaction. 1. Optional: in the **Tran. descr.** field, you can change the transaction description for the new document. 1. Add a row in the table and specify the required fields. 1. If you in Step 6 selected **Supplier ledger** or **Customer ledger**: 1. Select the **Customer/Supplier no.**, **Location** and **Payment method**. 1. Optional: in the **Tran. descr.** field, you can change the transaction description for the new document. 1. You can select documents to be added to the table via the **Select documents** button, load documents to the table via the **Load documents** button, or add a row in the table and specify the required fields. 1. Optional: you can change the cross rate by adding the **Cross rate** column to the table and edit it, if the **Multi-currency accounting** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000).](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). The system selects the **Ready to process** check box in the left pane table. 1. You can now continue processing the lines.

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

Process matched incoming payments /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-payments-and-applications/process-matched-incoming-payments section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Process matched incoming payments 1. Go to the [Process incoming payments (AR305000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/process-incoming-payments-ar305000/) window and select a **Cash account**. 1. When you have reviewed the transactions, click **Process**. The system now reconciles all matching transactions. After processing, in the first column, a ![Success](/media/visma-net-erp/Success.png) or ![icon-error](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-error.png) is displayed for each processed line to indicate if the processing was successful or not. 1. Optional: hover over the ![icon-error](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-error.png) icon on each line to read why the specific line could not be processed. Resolve the error and repeat Step 1 and 2. 1. Optional: go to the [Process bank transactions (CA306000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/process-bank-transactions-ca306000/) window again and select the same **Cash account** as you did in Step 1. All matched transactions have now disappeared from the table, leaving only the ones that were not successfully processed and had no match. 1. Optional: click **Settings for matching** to match more of the remaining transactions. In the **Settings for matching** dialog box, you can **temporarily** change the settings for matching, for example date settings or the weight settings for the relevance calculation. Click **Process** again. > [!NOTE] > The settings you make in the **Settings for matching** dialog box are reset to default when you leave the [Process incoming payments (AR305000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/process-incoming-payments-ar305000/) window. > [!NOTE] > To set new, permanent settings for matching, go to the [Cash management preferences (CA101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-management-preferences-ca101000/) window and click the **Incoming payments settings** tab. These settings are common for the matching of payments in the customer ledger and the supplier ledger.

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

Customer payments /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Customer payments Click the links below to learn more about a topic you are interested in. Use the breadcrumb links in the upper left corner to see your location, navigate backwards or go to the starting point. About payment processing flow /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/about-payment-processing-flow page In the Customer payments (AR302000) window, you can create the following types of customer ledger documents: Payment, Prepayment, and Customer refund. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About payment processing flow In the Customer payments (AR302000) window, you can create the following types of customer ledger documents: Payment, Prepayment, and Customer refund. For more information: [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/). A document with the **Voided payment** type is generated by the system only, but you can further process it by using this window. The processing flow described below applies to documents of all these types. > [!NOTE] > Documents with the **Balance write-off** type can be only viewed on this window. For details on writing off credits, see [Write-off methods - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/write-off-methods/write-off-methods-overview/). In this topic, we use the term **payment** to describe documents of the **Payment**, **Prepayment**, and **Customer refund** types, if a type is not stated explicitly. This topic focuses on the processing stages of a document and the statuses that indicates these stages. ## Process stages When you receive a payment from a customer, you create a corresponding document in the system. When you save the document for the first time, the system assigns a unique reference number to it for tracking purposes and a status that indicates the current state of the document within its processing flow. The main stages are the following: 1. **Recording**: In this stage, you create a payment or provide all the necessary information to the system. By default, the system assigns to the payment the **Balanced** status when you save it for the first time. This status indicates that the user has finished editing the payment and it is ready to be released, although you still can edit a payment with this status. Alternatively, if you select the **Hold** check box to indicate to the system that this payment is not ready to be released, the system changes the payment status to **On hold**. For details, see: [About payment recording](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-payments-and-applications/about-payment-recording/). 1. **Application**: In this stage, you specify the list of the outstanding documents to which the system should apply the payment. You can do this while you record the payment or after you have released the payment. You can fully or partially apply the payment amount to an outstanding document, or distribute the payment amount among multiple outstanding documents. The system creates application records, which include the paid amount, for each included outstanding document. The system does not change the payment status during this stage; it remains **Balanced**, **On hold** (if **Hold** is selected), or **Open** (if the payment has been released). For details, see: [About manual payment application](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/about-manual-payment-application/). 1. **Releasing a payment**: You can release a payment only if it has the **Balanced** status. When you release the payment, the system checks the available payment balance and processes the payment accordingly. If the available payment balance is zero (that is, if the payment has been fully applied to an outstanding document), the system changes the statuses of both the payment and the paid document to **Closed**. If the available payment balance is not zero, the system changes the payment status to **Open**. This status indicates to users and to the system that the payment is ready to be applied to the outstanding documents of a customer. For details, see: [About release of payments and prepayments](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-payments-and-applications/about-release-of-payments-and-prepayments/). 1. **Releasing application records**: If you specify a list of outstanding documents for a payment with the **Open** status, you should release the application records after you have finished distributing the payment amount between the outstanding documents. You can fully or partially apply the payment amount to outstanding documents. When you release the applications, the system checks the available payment balance. Based on this data, the system processes the payment differently, in one of the following ways: + If the payment amount is fully applied to an outstanding document, the system does the following: releases application records; changes the statuses of the payment and the paid document to **Closed**; and decreases the balances of the paid document and the payment. The system may change the balance of the customer, if documents with different currencies are involved. + If the payment amount is partially applied, the system leaves the payment status as **Open**; it also decreases the balances of the paid document, the payment, and the customer. If some outstanding documents were fully paid with the applied amount, the system changes the status of the paid document to **Closed**. In addition to the actions you perform during the main stages, you may need to do the following: + Register finance charges that may accompany a payment. For details, see: [About the registration of finance charges](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/track-cash-payments/about-the-registration-of-finance-charges/). + Correct a released payment by voiding it and recording the correct one. For step-by-step instructions, see: [Void a payment or prepayment document](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/void-a-payment-or-prepayment-document/). + Reserve a payment with the **Open** status by selecting the **On hold** check box for the payment. + Allocate a payment for a sales order if the **Distribution** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. For details, see: [About payment reservation for sales orders](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/manage-document-types-and-work-flows/about-payment-reservation-for-sales-orders/). ## Affecting a payment document flow You can use invoice-wide settings, located under **Data entry settings** on the **General settings** tab of the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window, to change the processing flow of invoices. For details, see: [About changing the processing of customer ledger documents](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-customer-ledger-documents/about-changing-the-processing-of-customer-ledger-documents/). In Visma Net, you can require users to perform additional steps during the recording of a payment by using settings located under **Data entry settings** on the **General settings** tab of the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. For details, see: [About changing the processing of customer ledger documents](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-customer-ledger-documents/about-changing-the-processing-of-customer-ledger-documents/).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

About release of payments and prepayments /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/about-release-of-payments-and-prepayments page This topic contains information that applies to releasing documents of the Payment and Prepayment type. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About release of payments and prepayments This topic contains information that applies to releasing documents of the Payment and Prepayment type. ## Introduction ## In this topic This topic describes: + The windows you may use to release a payment or prepayment. + What happens in the system after release. + The details of the general ledger batch generated after release. ## When and where to release a payment and prepayment The following table displays when and where (pre)payments can be released. |When a payment or prepayment has the status|Then it can be released in|For instructions on how to release, see| |---|---|---| |**Balanced**|[Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/)|[Release a payment document](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/release-a-payment-document/)| |[Release customer documents (AR501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/release-customer-documents-ar501000/)|[Release customer documents](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-customer-ledger-documents/release-customer-documents/)|| ## System processes after releasing payments and prepayments The following tables give an overview of what happens in the system after the release of a (pre)payment. ### Payments ||Payment|||| |---|---|---|---|---| |System change|without applications|partially applied|fully applied|voided| |Status changes to|**Open**|**Open**|**Closed**|#### Closed **Note**: the status of the payment changes to **Voided**.| |Paid documents' balances are|not applicable|decreased **Note**: if paid document's balance becomes 0, its status changes to **Closed**.|decreased **Note**: if paid document's balance becomes 0, its status changes to **Closed**.|increased **Note**: if paid document's status was **Closed**, the status changes to **Open**.| |Customer's balance is|decreased with payment amount|+ decreased with paid amount + decreased with available payment balance|decreased with paid amount|increased with voided amount| |Application records are released|not applicable|yes|yes|yes, any reversed application records are released| |General ledger batch is created|yes|yes|yes|yes| ### Prepayments ||Prepayment||| |---|---|---|---| |System change|without applications|partially applied|fully applied| |Status changes to|**Open**|**Open**|**Closed**| |Paid documents' balances are|not applicable|decreased **Note**: if paid document's balance becomes 0, its status changes to **Closed**.|decreased **Note**: if paid document's balance becomes 0, its status changes to **Closed**.| |Customer's balance is|not applicable|decreased with paid amount|decreased with paid amount| |Customer's prepayment balance is|increased with prepayment amount|increased with available prepayment amount|not applicable| |Application records are released|not applicable|yes|yes| |General ledger batch is created|yes|yes|yes| ## General ledger batch after release of payment and prepayment The following sections give information about the general ledger batch created after the release of a (pre)payment. ### Involved accounts When a payment or prepayment is released, the system generates a general ledger batch to update the involved asset accounts with the (pre)payment transactions. Usually, this involves the following accounts retrieved from other fields in the system: |Account type|Specified in the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window's field for|Corresponding field in [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window, General ledger accounts tab, per document type| |---|---|---| |Asset|the **Customer ledger account** on the **Financial details** tab.|Payment: #### Customer ledger account| |Prepayment: 1. **Prepayment account** (if set) 1. **Customer ledger account**||| |Cash|the **Cash account** in the top part.|not applicable| ### Recorded transactions The transactions recorded in the general ledger batch differ depending on the below described specifications. #### Payments and prepayments with no designated prepayment account After the release of a payment or a prepayment with no designated prepayment account, regardless of whether the payment or prepayment is without applications, partially or fully applied, the following transactions will be recorded: |Account|Debit|Credit| |---|---|---| |Cash account|(Pre)payment amount|0.0| |Customer ledger account|0.0|(Pre)payment amount| #### Prepayments with designated prepayment account For a prepayment with a designated prepayment account that differs from the customer ledger account used to record payments to, the recorded transactions differ depending on whether the prepayment is without applications, partially applied or fully applied. ##### Prepayment without applications After the release of a prepayment without applications, the following transactions will be recorded: |Account|Debit|Credit| |---|---|---| |Cash account|Prepayment amount|0.0| |Customer ledger account for prepayments|0.0|Prepayment amount| ##### Partially applied prepayment After the release of a partially fully applied prepayment, with a designated customer ledger account that differs from the customer ledger account used to record outstanding documents to, the following transactions will be recorded: |Account|Debit|Credit| |---|---|---| |Cash account|Prepayment amount|0.0| |Customer ledger account for prepayments|0.0|Paid amount (prepayment amount - applied amount)| |Customer ledger account for invoices|0.0|Applied amount| ##### Fully applied prepayment After the release of a partially fully applied prepayment, with a designated customer ledger account that differs from the customer ledger account used to record outstanding documents to, the following transactions will be recorded: |Account|Debit|Credit| |---|---|---| |Cash account|Prepayment amount|0.0| |Customer ledger account for invoices|0.0|Prepayment amount| ### Batch details and additional transactions The following sections explain where to view the batch details and where to find more information on additional transactions. #### View batch details You can view the batch details by clicking the link in the **Batch no.** field on the **Financial details** tab of the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window. #### Bank charge and application record transactions The following additional transactions may be generated and included in the batch: |Transaction type|For details, see| |---|---| |Bank charge|[Finance charge transactions](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/track-cash-payments/finance-charge-transactions/)| |Application record|[About release of application records](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-payments-and-applications/about-release-of-application-records/)|

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

About manual payment application /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/about-manual-payment-application page After you have received a payment document from a customer and recorded it in the system, you then need to apply this payment document to the customer's outstanding documents to close the sale. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About manual payment application After you have received a payment document from a customer and recorded it in the system, you then need to apply this payment document to the customer's outstanding documents to close the sale. When you receive a payment from a customer, in Visma Net, you create a corresponding payment document of the **Payment** or **Prepayment** type by using the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window. Payment documents of this type can be applied to the following types of outstanding documents: **Invoice**, **Debit note**, and **Overdue charge**. In this topic you will read about how to apply a payment to a specific outstanding document or multiple outstanding documents. The topic describes how to perform additional operations, such as giving a cash discount, changing a cross rate, writing off a balance, and applying a payment to outstanding documents that belong to child customer accounts. ## Paying a specific outstanding document Usually a payment document that you receive from a customer references the outstanding document it should be applied to. In this case, you can use one of the following forms as a starting point to pay the document: + [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/): You select the outstanding document here and then click the **Enter payment/apply note** action. The system redirects you to the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window, where the system has filled on most of the settings of a new payment, which is almost ready for release. For step-by-step instructions, see [Pay a specific outstanding document](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-payments-and-applications/pay-a-specific-outstanding-document/). + [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/): In this window, you record the payment you have received from the customer, specify the outstanding document in the table on the **Documents to apply** tab, and release the payment. For step-by-step instructions on recording a payment, see [Enter a payment document](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/enter-a-payment-document/). In both cases, the system creates an application record (including the paid amount) for the outstanding document. When you release the payment, the system releases the application record simultaneously. You can track the history of payment applications on the **Application history** tab of the payment document. For step-by-step instructions, see [View invoices paid with a specific payment document](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/view-invoices-paid-with-a-specific-payment-document/). ## Paying multiple outstanding documents You use the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window to pay multiple outstanding documents. In general, you perform the following steps: 1. You record a payment, which you may or may not release. For step-by-step instructions, see: [Enter a payment document](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/enter-a-payment-document/). 1. You window the list of documents to be paid. You can window it manually or you can direct the system to window the list of outstanding documents of the customer to be paid with the payment. 1. You distribute the payment amount among the manually added outstanding documents or modify the paid amount filled in by the system, if needed, for each automatically added outstanding document. 1. If you have released the payment before forming the list of applications, you click **Release** in the window toolbar and the system releases the application records you have created. If you have not released the payment yet, you click **Release** and the system releases the payment and its application records. You can track the history of payment applications by using the **Application history** tab of the payment document. For step-by-step instructions, see: [View invoices paid with a specific payment document](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/view-invoices-paid-with-a-specific-payment-document/). ## Forming the list of outstanding documents manually You form the list of outstanding documents by adding documents to the table on the **Documents to apply** tab one by one; you distribute the payment amount as you prefer. For step-by-step instructions, see: [Form a list of applications manually](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/form-a-list-of-applications-manually/). If there are open documents of the **Credit note** type, you can add them to the list only if the list will include some outstanding documents when you finish forming the list. The system uses balances of the added credit notes for application to an outstanding document. In other words, the system applies the sum of the payment and credit note's balances to the sum of the outstanding documents' balances. The system creates application records for each included outstanding document, with the amount applied specified in the **Amount paid** column. When you release the payment, the system releases the application record simultaneously. ## Forming the list of outstanding documents automatically For the system to form the list of outstanding documents, you click **Load documents** on the table toolbar and specify selection criteria in the **Load options** dialog box. The system loads to the table the list of the outstanding documents of the customer that meet your specified criteria, with documents sorted in descending order by the parameters you have specified. By default, the sorting order is by due date and reference number. The system forms the list as follows: 1. If the customer account has open documents of the **Credit note** type, the system adds them at the top of the list. The balances of the open credit notes increase the balance that can be applied to outstanding documents. 1. If the **Apply payments to overdue charges first** check box is selected in the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window and the customer account has open documents of the **Overdue charge** type, the system distributes the available payment balance among these documents. If the available payment balance, including the balances of any open credit notes, has not been fully applied, the system searches for outstanding documents of other types. 1. If the customer account has outstanding documents, the system applies the available payment balance to the first document in the list. If the available payment balance, including the balances of any open credit notes, has not been fully applied, the system applies the rest of the balance to the next document in the list and continues this process until the available payment balance is fully applied. > [!NOTE] > If the **Multi-branch support** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window, the system searches among all outstanding documents associated with the customer account, regardless of the branch specified for the documents. The system creates application records for each outstanding document that is included, with the amount applied specified in the **Amount paid** column. When you release the payment, the system releases the application record simultaneously. For step-by-step instructions, see [Form a list of applications automatically](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/form-a-list-of-applications-automatically/). ## Distributing the payment amount When you add an outstanding document to the table on the **Documents to apply** tab, the system automatically fills the **Amount paid** column as follows: + If the balance of the outstanding document is less than the payment available balance, the system fills the **Amount paid** column with the document balance. + If the balance of the outstanding document is more than the payment available balance, the system fills the **Amount paid** column with the payment balance. + If the payment amount is not specified and therefore the available balance of the payment is 0, the system fills the **Amount paid** column with the document balance and warns you that the payment is out of balance. You can specify a payment amount that is equal to the value the system added to the **Amount paid** column. Alternatively, you can specify a smaller amount and adjust the value in the **Amount paid** column accordingly. If you specify a larger amount, you can add other outstanding documents to fully apply the payment. In the top part of the window, you can see the balance of the payment that is available for further application in the **Available balance** field and the balance that has been applied in the **Applied to documents** field. ## Correcting the list of applications When you window the list of outstanding documents on the **Documents to apply** tab, the system creates an application record for each line. You can add new documents and remove or modify already-added documents until you release the application records by clicking **Release** in the window toolbar. When you release the application records, the system moves these records to the **Application history** tab, where you can view (but not modify) the list of the applied documents. If you have mistakenly applied a customer payment or prepayment to the wrong document, you can correct an application record. If the application record has not yet been released, you simply remove the incorrect line from the table on the **Documents to apply** tab. If the application record has been released, you reverse the released application record on the **Application history** tab by clicking the mistaken record and then clicking **Reverse application** in the table toolbar. When you click the button, the system does the following: + Adds the reversed application record to the **Documents to apply** tab with the negative application amount in the **Amount paid** column + Changes the status of the payment and of the applied document to **Open** + Changes the available balance and the application amount in accordance with the amount of the application that was reversed You then release the reversed application record, and the system moves it to the **Application history** tab. If you have mistakenly applied a customer refund to the wrong document and released the refund with its applications, you can correct the application record similarly. The only difference is that a customer refund cannot have an available balance after it was released. Thus, you must fully apply the available refund balance right after you have reversed the incorrect application record. You then release both the reversed application records and the new ones. For step-by-step instructions, see [Correct an application record](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/correct-an-application-record/). ## Recording a cash discount You can give a customer a discount for early payment when you apply the payment amount to an outstanding document. If you have configured payment terms for the customer that define the cash discount period and the discount amount, the system automatically calculates whether to add a cash discount. If the cash discount period of the document has not ended, the system fills in the **Cash discount taken** column for the document with the discount amount after you have added the document to the table on the **Documents to apply** tab. You can change the discount amount if needed. If the payment terms of the customer do not define any cash discount, you can fill in the **Cash discount taken** column for the document with the discount amount after you have added the document, and correct the applied amount in the **Amount paid** column. For details on configuring payment terms with a cash discount, see: [About payment terms](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/payment-terms/about-payment-terms/). ## Writing off a balance If write-offs are enabled and configured in the system, as described in [About write-off setup](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/write-off-methods/about-write-off-setup/), you can write off an amount along with the application. For each document that you add for the application, you can specify the amount to write off in the **Balance write-off** column and the reason code in the **Write-off reason code** column. The total amount of write-offs is displayed in the **Write-off amount** field in the top part. > [!NOTE] > You can use only reason codes that are defined for balance write-offs or reason codes with the **Balance write-off** option selected in the **Usage** field on the [Reason codes (CS211000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/reason-codes-cs211000/) window. When you release such applications, the system does not create a document of the **Balance write-off** type. The system stores write-off details in the document and generates a separate transaction to post to general ledger accounts. ## Changing the cross rate If the **Multi-currency accounting** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window and multiple currencies and their exchange rates are configured in the system, you can change the cross rate along with the application, if needed. For instance, suppose you had issued an invoice in a foreign currency, and then you received a payment in this foreign currency. Your company does not have a bank account in the foreign currency, and the bank used some currency rate to translate the payment amount to the currency of your bank account. In this case, you record the payment to a cash account that represents your bank account and apply it to the invoice. The rate used by the bank may differ from the rate you used to record the invoice. To make the payment amount and the invoice amount equal, you can adjust the rate in the **Cross rate** column for the applied invoice. When you release the payment and its applications, the balance of the realised gain or loss (RGOL) account is updated by the amount resulting from the difference in the exchange rates used to record the invoice and the payment. If your company has a bank account in the foreign currency (so there is a cash account in the system that represents this bank account), you record the payment in a foreign currency to this cash account. When you release the payment and its applications, the balance of the RGOL account is updated by the amount resulting from the difference in the exchange rate on the invoice date and the payment application date. ## Applying a payment to documents of child customer accounts If the **Parent-child customer relationship** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window and parent-child relations between customer accounts are configured, you can add to the list of outstanding documents those that belong to child customer accounts. For details, see: [Manage parent-child relationships - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-parent-child-relationship/manage-parent-child-relationships-overview/). ## Reserving a payment for future application You can reserve an open payment for future application. To mark an open payment as reserved, you select the **Hold** check box for the payment document with the **Open** status in the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/)window. The system changes the document status from **Open** to **Reserved**. Reserved payments cannot be applied to outstanding documents and are excluded from the auto-application process. To release the payment from hold, clear the **Hold** check box.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

About refund processing /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/about-refund-processing page In Visma Net, payment documents that can be released manually have the following document types on the Customer payments (AR302000) window: Payment, Prepayment, Customer refund, Credit note, Balance write-off, and Voided payment. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About refund processing In Visma Net, payment documents that can be released manually have the following document types on the Customer payments (AR302000) window: Payment, Prepayment, Customer refund, Credit note, Balance write-off, and Voided payment. For more information: [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/). The information in this topic applies to documents of the **Customer refund** type. This topic describes the windows you may use to release a customer refund and outlines the details of releasing refunds and their application records, as well as the details of the generation of the general ledger batch. ## Release a customer refund When you are recording a customer refund, you must fully apply its available balance to one open payment, prepayment, or credit note (or multiple documents of these types) before you release the refund. For step-by-step instructions, see [Issue a refund](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/issue-a-refund/). You distribute the entire available refund balance among the open payment documents you add to the table on the **Documents to apply** tab of the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window. The system creates application records for each document listed on the tab and includes the applied amount. Thus, the available refund balance becomes zero. When you release a customer refund, the system does the following: + Changes the refund status to **Closed**. + Releases the application records. + Decreases the balances of the paid documents. If the balance of a paid document becomes zero, the system changes its status to **Closed**. + Increases the customer's balance by the refund amount, if the refund is applied to a document of the **Payment** or **Credit note** type. + Decreases the customer's prepayment balance by the refund amount, if the refund is applied to a payment document of the **Prepayment** type. + Generates a general ledger batch to update the involved asset accounts. The following refund transactions are recorded to the general ledger when the refund and its applications are released. |Account|Debit|Credit| |---|---|---| |Cash account|0.0|Amount| |Customer ledger account|Amount|0.0| You can view the batch details by clicking the link in the **Batch no.** field on the **Financial details** tab of the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window. When you release a refund, the general ledger batch may contain, in addition to the refund transactions, some transactions generated by its application records. For details, see [About release of application records](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-payments-and-applications/about-release-of-application-records/).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

About customer payment methods /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/about-customer-payment-methods page In Visma Net, you can use payment methods configured for use in Customer ledger with any customer account. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About customer payment methods In Visma Net, you can use payment methods configured for use in Customer ledger with any customer account. In Visma Net, you can use payment methods configured for use in Customer ledger with any customer account. You can configure multiple payment methods that are available for all customers by default. You can use a payment method that is available by default as a template to create a **customer payment method**, which is an instance of a payment method that has been tailored for use with a specific customer account. In this topic, you will read about how to create a payment method that is available by default, how to set up a customer payment method, and how to set up a particular payment method to be used by default with a customer account. ## Payment methods for customers A payment method is available by default if it has been configured as follows in the [Payment methods (CA204000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/payment-methods-ca204000/) window: + The payment method is active or the **Active** check box is selected. + The payment method is based on the **Cash** means of payment. + The payment method is marked for use in Customer ledger or the **Use in customers** check box is selected. + The payment method does not require an account number or the **Require account number** check box is cleared on the **Settings for customer ledger** tab. When you create a new customer account, the system automatically adds these default payment methods to the account. This is done because these payment methods can be used without any customer-specific details being specified. That is, for these payment methods, you generally do not need to use the [Customer payment methods (AR303010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payment-methods-ar303010/) window to specify a customer-specific instance of the payment method. You can start recording customer documents by using the available payment methods. ## Customer payment method setup You set up customer payment methods by using the [Customer payment methods (AR303010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payment-methods-ar303010/) window. You may need to create a customer payment method in the following cases: + If you want to modify the settings of available by default payment method. For example, you might decide to record a cash payment from a particular customer on another cash account. You can see all payment methods used by a customer on the **Payment methods** tab of the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window. This tab displays both payment methods that are available by default (for those payment methods, the **Override** check box is cleared) and customer payment methods (for those methods, the **Override** check box is selected). All active payment methods (those listed on this tab) can be used for payments by this customer. Inactive methods do not appear on the list of the customer's payment methods. Also, on the **Payment methods** tab, you can create a new customer payment method by clicking **Add payment method**, and view or edit the details of an existing customer payment method by selecting the method and clicking **View payment method**. ## Default customer payment method You can specify the default payment method for the particular customer by selecting the **Is default** check box for the selected payment method on the **Payment methods** tab in the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window. You can specify a default payment method for a customer class. Then when you create a new customer account and associate it with this customer class, the system does one of the following: + If the payment method is generic (it is already present in the customer account), the system marks it as the default one. + If this payment method requires any specific information, you have to provide this information to be able to save the new customer account. After the new customer account is successfully added, the payment method is listed on the **Payment methods** tab in the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window for this customer and marked as the default method. When you enter customer payments in the Customer ledger workspace, you should first select the customer. Once you do, certain elements on the window are filled in with the settings associated with the selected customer account and its default location and default payment method. The default payment method provides the identifier of the cash account. If you select a payment method other than the default one, the identifier of the cash account will change to the one associated with the selected payment method. The default payment method and the cash account associated with it can be overridden on customer payments. ## On-the-fly creation of a customer payment method If the Inventory module is enabled in your system, you can create a new customer payment method on the fly as you enter a sales order for the customer. On-the-fly creation mostly is used for customer payment methods that represents the credit or debit card. ## Customer payment method deletion You can delete customer payment methods that are no longer needed by using the **Delete** button in the toolbar of the [Customer payment methods (AR303010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payment-methods-ar303010/) window. > [!NOTE] > A customer payment method that is associated with a processing centre can be deleted if all the authorised transactions made with this payment method are captured

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Add customer payment methods /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/add-customer-payment-methods section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Add customer payment methods 1. Go to the [Customer payment methods (AR303010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payment-methods-ar303010/) window. 1. In the **Customer** field click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select a customer. 1. In the **Payment method** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select the associated payment method to the customer.. 1. In the **Cash account** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select a cash account (optional). 1. On the **Payment method details** tab, double-click the **Value** field in order to enter the account number. Depending on your selection in step 2, you might also need to enter additional information about the payment method. The value in the **Description** column comes from the **Payment method** settings in the Cash management workspace. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). By default, the **Active** check box is selected to indicate that the payment method is active. Deselect if you do not want this payment method to be active. ## What is next? For information on how to use a CID configuration, see [Select a CID for payment methods](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-preferences/select-a-cid-for-payment-methods/).

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

Enter a payment document /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/enter-a-payment-document section To enter a document that corresponds to a payment received from a customer, you use the Payments (AR302000) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Enter a payment document To enter a document that corresponds to a payment received from a customer, you use the Payments (AR302000) window. For more information: [Payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/). To enter a document that corresponds to a payment received from a customer, you use the [Payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window. You can then apply the payment to invoices, debit notes, and overdue charges, as described in [Form a list of applications automatically](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/form-a-list-of-applications-automatically/). 1. Go to the [Payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the **Type** field of the top part, select **Payment** or **Prepayment**. 1. Check the date of the document in the **Application date** field. This field is filled in automatically based on the current date, but you can select another date. When you release the payment, the system uses the date specified here to fill in the **Payment date** field on the **Financial details** tab. After the payment is released, you use the **Application date** field to specify the date of the application records release. 1. In the **Customer** field, select the customer. The system uses the customer as a source to automatically fill in window elements with default values for the location, payment method, cash account and other customer-related settings. 1. In the **Location** field, check the customer location and change it if needed. 1. In the **Payment method** field, check the method of payment. You can change it if multiple payment methods can be accepted from the customer. Payment methods are specified on the **Payment methods** tab of the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window. 1. In the **Cash account** field, check the cash account. You may change it to another cash account that is allowed for the selected payment method; if you want to use a cash account allowed for another payment method, you need to change the payment method first. 1. Make sure the document currency matches the currency on the customer payment, and select another currency if necessary. The currency may be overridden only if the **Allow currency override** check box is selected for the customer in the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window. 1. Check the **Payment ref.** field: The system automatically inserts a reference number if for the selected customer payment method, the **Suggest next number** check box is selected on the **Allowed cash accounts** tab of the [Payment methods (CA204000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/payment-methods-ca204000/) window. Otherwise, enter the payment reference number. 1. Optional: Add a brief description of the payment. 1. In the **Payment amount** field, enter the total amount paid according to the customer payment. 1. Optional: Attach a scanned image of the original customer document to this payment. To do this, click **Files** on the window title bar. 1. Optional: On the **Finance charges** tab, add the charges or fees applied by the bank for processing. For each charge, do the following: 1. Click **Add row** to append a new row to the table. 1. In the **Entry type** column, select the entry type that designates the bank charge applied to this payment. 1. In the **Amount** column, type the charge amount applied to this document. For details on configuring the processing of charges, see: [About the registration of finance charges](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/track-cash-payments/about-the-registration-of-finance-charges/). 1. Do one of the following to prepare the payment document for further processing in accordance with your company's policies: + To save the document with the **On hold** status, make sure the **Hold** check box is selected. + To save the document with the **Balanced** status, make sure the **Hold** check box is cleared. 1. In the window toolbar, click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

Create a payment for a sales invoice /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/create-a-payment-for-a-sales-invoice section Follow the steps below to create a payment for a sales invoice. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create a payment for a sales invoice Follow the steps below to create a payment for a sales invoice. 1. Go to the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window. 1. In the top part, select **Payment** in the **Type** field. 1. In the **Customer** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select the customer. **Result**: all fields marked with \* are filled in automatically. 1. Fill in the **Payment ref.** field if it is required and not filled in by the system. 1. Optional: select **Hold** if you want to save this payment as a draft. Remember that you have to deselect it before you release the payment. 1. In the **Payment amount** field, enter the paid amount. 1. On the **Documents to apply** tab, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) to add a document. 1. The document type **Invoice** is already selected. 1. Select the **Reference no.** for the invoice. **Result**: Visma Net retrieves all the information related to this invoice. 1. Check that the paid amount and the invoiced amount (under **Amount paid** ) are identical. If they are not the same, the **Amount paid** field is highlighted. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). 1. Make sure the check box **Hold** is not selected and click **Release**. **Result**:, and the payment is recorded in your company's ledgers. ![icon-confirmation](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-confirmation.png) is displayed

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

View invoices paid with a specific payment document /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/view-invoices-paid-with-a-specific-payment-document page To check which invoices, debit notes, and overdue charges a customer payment or prepayment is applied to, you open the payment document in the Customer payments (AR302000) window and check the application history. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # View invoices paid with a specific payment document To check which invoices, debit notes, and overdue charges a customer payment or prepayment is applied to, you open the payment document in the Customer payments (AR302000) window and check the application history. For more information: [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/). > [!NOTE] > You can see which payment documents were applied to a particular invoice on the **Applications** tab of the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window. 1. Go to the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window. 1. In the **Type** field of the top part, select the type of the payment. 1. In the **Ref. no.** field, select the payment whose applications you want to view. 1. On the **Application history** tab, check the application log. > [!NOTE] > This tab shows the history of applications rather than the list of documents paid by this payment. When an invoice is applied, the system adds a row with the invoice data, and the applied amount is listed in the **Amount paid** column. When an invoice application is reversed, the system adds a row with the invoice data and shows the reversed paid amount (that is, the amount with the negative sign) in the **Amount paid** column. 1. Optional: use filtering to narrow the documents listed on the **Application history** tab. For example: to track the application history of the invoice with the **000460** reference number, do the following:

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Release a payment document /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/release-a-payment-document page Follow the steps below to release a particular payment document in the Customer payments (AR302000) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Release a payment document Follow the steps below to release a particular payment document in the Customer payments (AR302000) window. For more information: [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/). ## Before you start This topic describes how to release a particular document in the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window. For instructions on how to release multiple payment documents at a time, see: [Release customer documents](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-customer-ledger-documents/release-customer-documents/). The following document types can be released manually in the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window: + **Payment**, + **Credit note**, + **Prepayment**, + **Customer refund**, + **Balance write-off** 1. In the **Type** field of the top part, select one of the following options: + **Payment**, + **Credit note**, + **Prepayment**, + **Customer refund**, + **Balance write-off** 1. Bring up the particular payment document you want to release by taking one of the following actions: + To navigate among documents, click the appropriate navigation buttons until you see the document. + Click the selector button in the **Ref. no.** field, and do the following: 1. If you see the needed document in the table, proceed to step 3. 1. Select the column you want to search by clicking its header. 1. Type the search string in the **Search** field in the lower-left corner, and press Enter. The system highlights items in the column that contain the text. 1. Double-click the needed document to display its details on the window. 1. Check the status of the document, and do one of the following: + If the status is **On hold**, clear the **Hold** check box to change the status to **Balanced**. + If the status is **Balanced**, proceed to the next step. 1. Click **Release**. The released document is assigned the **Open** status.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Match customer documents in Customer ledger /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/match-customer-documents-in-customer-ledger section You can match invoices and credit notes to close the documents. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Match customer documents in Customer ledger You can match invoices and credit notes to close the documents. 1. Go to the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window. 1. Under **Type**, select **Credit note**. 1. Select the **Reference no.** of the credit note. 1. Add a new row and select the original invoice. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png) and **Release**. Match a credit note with an invoice /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/match-a-credit-note-with-an-invoice section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Match a credit note with an invoice 1. Go to the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window. 1. In the **Type** field, select **Credit note**. 1. In the **Reference no.** field, select the credit note. 1. On the **Documents to apply** tab, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) to add a new invoice line. 1. The document type **Invoice** is already selected. 1. Select the **Reference no.** for the invoice. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). 1. Make sure **Hold** is not selected, and click **Release** to match the credit note with the invoice. > [!NOTE] > Once the invoice and the credit note have been matched and released, the status changes to **Closed** and the system displays ![icon-confirmation](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-confirmation.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

Correct an application record /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/correct-an-application-record section If you have mistakenly applied a customer payment, prepayment, or refund to the wrong document, you can correct the application record. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Correct an application record If you have mistakenly applied a customer payment, prepayment, or refund to the wrong document, you can correct the application record. > [!NOTE] > After you have corrected the application record, you can apply the payment document to other documents. For more information, see: [Form a list of applications manually](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/form-a-list-of-applications-manually/) or [Form a list of applications automatically](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/form-a-list-of-applications-automatically/). You correct an application record differently depending on whether the application record has been released or not. In either case, you use the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window. ## Remove an application record that has not been released 1. Got to the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window. 1. In the **Type** field, select the document type. 1. Select the document whose application record you want to correct. 1. On the **Documents to apply** tab, leave only the documents you want to apply by doing the following: 1. Select the document you don't want to apply. 1. In the table toolbar, click **Delete row**. 1. Repeat the previous two steps for each document you don't want to apply. 1. In the window toolbar, click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). ## Reverse a released application record 1. Got to the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window. 1. In the **Type** field, select the type of the payment. 1. In the **Reference no.** field, select the number of the document whose application record you want to correct. 1. On the **Application history** tab, select the application you want to reverse. 1. In the table toolbar, click **Reverse application**. 1. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for each application you want to reverse. 1. In the window toolbar, click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). 1. If you have reversed application records for a customer refund, you must fully apply its available balance before you complete the next step. For step-by-step instruction, see: [Form a list of applications manually](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/form-a-list-of-applications-manually/) or [Form a list of applications automatically](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/form-a-list-of-applications-automatically/). 1. Click **Release** to release the reversed application records.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

Form a list of applications automatically /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/form-a-list-of-applications-automatically section You can apply a customer payment or prepayment to any number of invoices, debit notes, and overdue charges by using the Payments (AR302000) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Form a list of applications automatically You can apply a customer payment or prepayment to any number of invoices, debit notes, and overdue charges by using the Payments (AR302000) window. For more information: [Payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/). If there are open credit notes for the customer, they also can be used in payment application. In the top part of the window, the **Available balance** field holds the balance of the payment that is available for further application, and the **Applied to documents** field contains the balance that has been applied. For details on the application of a payment document, see: [About manual payment application](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/about-manual-payment-application/); for instructions about how to enter a payment into the system, see: [Enter a payment document](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/enter-a-payment-document/). 1. Go to the [Payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window. 1. In the **Type** field in the top part, select **Payment** or **Prepayment**, depending on the document you want to apply. 1. In the **Reference no.** field, select the reference number of the payment or prepayment. 1. On the **Documents to apply** tab, manually compose the list of outstanding documents to be paid with the payment document, by doing the following for each line (outstanding document): 1. In the table toolbar, click **Add row** to append a row to the table. 1. In the **Doc. type** column, select the type of the outstanding document. 1. In the **Reference no.** column, select the reference number of the outstanding document. The system fills in appropriate values in the other columns automatically. 1. Optional: In the **Amount paid** column, modify the applied amount, if needed. 1. Optional: If you want to give the customer a cash discount, in the **Cash discount taken** column, enter or modify the amount of the cash discount. 1. Optional: If you want to write off some balance, in the **Balance write-off** column, enter the amount you want to write off and in the **Write-off reason code** select the reason code, which defines an account where the system records the written-off amount. 1. Optional: If the payment document and the outstanding document are in a foreign currency, you may need to adjust the cross rate in the **Cross rate** column. You can adjust the list by adding and removing documents and by typing the application amounts for each document. The application amount may not exceed the payment amount. 1. If the payment document for which you have formed the list of the outstanding documents has the **On hold** or **Balanced** status, you can proceed as follows: + To save the document with the **On hold** status, make sure the **Hold** check box is selected, and click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). + To save the document with the **Balanced** status, make sure the **Hold** check box is cleared, and click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). + To release the payment document and its applications, make sure the **Hold** check box is cleared, and click **Release**. When the payment is released, its status changes to **Closed** if the application amount is equal to the payment amount. If the application amount is less than the payment amount, the status of the released payment document changes to **Open**. 1. If the payment document for which you have formed the list of the outstanding documents has the **Open** status, proceed as follows: + To save the document with the **Open** status and the list of applications you have formed, click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). + To release the applications, click **Release**. When the application records are released, the status of the payment changes to **Closed** if the application amount is equal to the payment amount. If the application amount is less than the payment amount, the status of the released payment document remains **Open**.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

Form a list of applications manually /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/form-a-list-of-applications-manually section You can apply a customer payment or prepayment to any number of invoices, debit notes, and overdue charges by using the Customer payments (AR302000) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Form a list of applications manually You can apply a customer payment or prepayment to any number of invoices, debit notes, and overdue charges by using the Customer payments (AR302000) window. For more information: [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/). You can apply a customer payment or prepayment to any number of invoices, debit notes, and overdue charges by using the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window. If there are open credit notes for the customer, they also can be used in payment application. In the top part of the window, the **Available balance** field holds the balance of the payment that is available for further application, and the **Applied to documents** field contains the balance that has been applied. For details on the application of a payment document, see [About manual payment application](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/about-manual-payment-application/); for instructions about how to enter a payment into the system, see: [Enter a payment document](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/enter-a-payment-document/). 1. Go to the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window. 1. In the **Type** field in the top part, select **Payment** or **Prepayment**, depending on the document you want to apply. 1. In the **Reference no.** field, select the reference number of the payment or prepayment. 1. On the table toolbar of the **Documents to apply** tab, click **Load documents** to open the **Load options dialog box**. 1. Optional: In the dialog box, select the customer documents by specifying any of the following criteria: + The date range of the documents to be loaded, by using the **From date** and **To date** fields + The range of reference numbers for documents to be loaded, by using the **Start ref. no** and **End ref. no** fields + The maximum number of documents to be selected from the database that comply with any other criteria you have specified You can also specify the way the system should order the documents on the list, by selecting an option in the **Order by** section. By default, the **Due date, Reference no.** option button is selected. 1. Click **Load**. On the **Documents to apply** tab, the system displays the list of the open invoices and notes that match any criteria specified in the dialog box and that have a total applied amount equal to the payment amount. If there are open credit notes, they are displayed at the top of the list. If you have specified no criteria, the system loads the documents according to the order option selected by default until the application total is equal to the payment total. > [!NOTE] > You can manually adjust the list by adding and removing documents and by typing the application amounts for each document. The application amount may not exceed the payment amount. 1. If the payment document for which you have formed the list of the outstanding documents has the **On hold** or **Balanced** status, you can proceed as follows: + To save the document with the **On hold** status, make sure the **Hold** check box is selected, click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). + To save the document with the **Balanced** status, make sure the **Hold** check box is cleared, click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). + To release the payment document and its applications, make sure the **Hold** check box is cleared, and click **Release**. > [!NOTE] > When you the payment document, the status of the payment changes to **Closed** if the application amount is equal to the payment amount. If the application amount is less than the payment amount, the status of the released payment document changes to **Open**. 1. If the payment document for which you have formed the list of the outstanding documents has the **Open** status, you can proceed as follows: + To save the document with the **Open** status and the list of applications you have formed, click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). + To release the applications, click **Release**. When the application records are released, the status of the payment changes to **Closed** if the application amount is equal to the payment amount. If the application amount is less than the payment amount, the status of the released payment document remains **Open**.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

Void a payment or prepayment document /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/void-a-payment-or-prepayment-document section Incoming payments can be voided if errors were made or the payments are otherwise invalid. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Void a payment or prepayment document Incoming payments can be voided if errors were made or the payments are otherwise invalid. Incoming payments can be voided if errors were made or the payments are otherwise invalid. Voiding a payment reverses the original payment transactions. You can use the [Payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window to void a customer payment or prepayment that has been applied to invoices. 1. Go to the [Payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window. 1. In the **Type** field, select the payment type. 1. In the **Reference no.** field, select the document you want to void. 1. In the window toolbar, click **Void**. The system does the following: + Reverses the payment application in full. + Changes the status of the payment document to **Voided**. + Creates a document with the **Voided payment** type with the same reference number as the payment or prepayment. You use this document in the remaining steps of this procedure. 1. Optional: In the **Application date** field, change the date of the voided payment. The date specified in this field should be the date when the vosided payment is released ( **Payment date** ) and when the related batch was created ( **Transaction date** ). 1. In the window toolbar, click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png) to save the voided payment. 1. Make sure the **Hold** check box is cleared. 1. In the window toolbar, click **Release**.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

Void a customer refund /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/void-a-customer-refund page Customer refunds can be voided if errors have been made or the refunds are otherwise invalid. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Void a customer refund Customer refunds can be voided if errors have been made or the refunds are otherwise invalid. Customer refunds can be voided if errors have been made or the refunds are otherwise invalid. Voiding a refund reverses the original refund transactions. You can use the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window to void a customer refund that has been applied to customer payments, prepayments, or credit notes. 1. Go to the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window. 1. In the **Type** field, select the **Customer** refund type. 1. In the **Reference no.** field, select the document you want to void. 1. In the window toolbar, click **Void**. The system does the following: + Reverses the refund in full. + Changes the status of the customer refund to **Voided**. + Creates a document with the **Voided refund** type that has the same reference number as the customer refund has. You use this document in the remaining steps of this procedure. 1. Optional: In the **Date** field in the top part, change the date of the voided refund. The date specified in this field should be the date when the voided refund is released (payment date) and when the related batch was created (transaction date). 1. In the window toolbar, click **Save** to save the voided refund. 1. Make sure the **Hold** check box is cleared. 1. In the window toolbar, click **Release**.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Issue a refund /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/issue-a-refund section You can issue a customer refund for a payment, prepayment, or credit note by using the Customer payments (AR302000) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Issue a refund You can issue a customer refund for a payment, prepayment, or credit note by using the Customer payments (AR302000) window. For more information: [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/). > [!NOTE] > This window cannot be used for payment via AutoPay. To create a customer refund via AutoPay, see [Customer refunds via AutoPay](/visma-net-erp/help/work-processes/customer-refunds-via-autopay/). A customer refund is used when the company needs to return money to a customer, such as when the customer overpays or returns an item. ## Before you proceed You can issue a refund for a document with an **Open** status; thus, you should make sure the document for which you want to issue a refund has this status. If the document status is **Closed**, reverse the document applications and release the reversed application records. After the reversal, you can issue a customer refund for the document. For more information, see [Correct an application record](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/correct-an-application-record/). 1. Go to the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window. 1. In the window toolbar, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the **Type** field of the top part, select **Customer refund**. 1. Check the date of the customer refund in the **Payment date** field on the **Financial details** tab. This field is filled in automatically based on the current date, but you can select another date. 1. Check the date of the application records in the **Application date** field. This field is filled in automatically, based on the selected document date. By default, the current date is selected, but you can select another date. 1. In the **Customer** field, select the customer you want to refund. 1. In the **Location** field, select a different customer location than the default one, if required. 1. Make sure the document currency is the one you need, and change it if necessary. In the **Payment method** field, select the payment method that can be used for refunds. The currency may be overridden only if the **Allow currency override** check box is selected for the customer in the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window. > [!NOTE] > Make sure you do not select the payment method associated with the clearing account that is used to hold customers' undeposited payments. > [!NOTE] > You cannot select a payment method that is used for payment via AutoPay (the check box **Create batch payment (customer and supplier ledgers)** cannot be selected for the payment method in the [Payment methods (CA204000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/payment-methods-ca204000/) window). 1. In the **Payment ref.** field, enter the payment reference number. 1. Optional: Enter a description of the refund. 1. On the **Documents to apply** tab, enter the credit notes, prepayments, or payments for which you are issuing the customer refund, performing the steps below for each refunded document: 1. Click **Add row** on the table toolbar to append a new row to the table. 1. In the **Document type** column, select **Credit note**, **Payment**, or **Prepayment**, depending on the document for which the customer refund is issued. 1. In the **Reference no.** column, select the document you want to refund. 1. Optional: In the **Amount paid** column, correct the refund amount to be paid for the document. 1. In the **Payment amount** field of the top part, enter the total amount of the refund. 1. Prepare the customer refund for further processing in accordance with your company policies by doing one of the following: + To save the refund with the **On hold** status, make sure the **Hold** check box is selected. + To save the refund with the **Balanced** status, make sure the **Hold** check box is cleared. 1. In the window toolbar, click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). 1. Optional: If the refund has the **Balanced** status, click **Release** to release the customer refund and its application records.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

Manage contracts /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage contracts Manage contracts - overview /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/manage-contracts-overview page By using Visma Net contracts, you can invoice your customers recurrently. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage contracts - overview By using Visma Net contracts, you can invoice your customers recurrently. By using Visma Net contracts, you can invoice your customers recurrently. You can configure different combinations of terms and services to satisfy your and your customers' needs. Some contracts may include services that your company provides—such as cable TV service, Internet access, or web account hosting—to customers during a specified period of time. Other contracts may contain service agreements to maintain and repair a product during the warranty period of the manufacturer or after it has expired. Such contracts include a number of cases (often called tickets) that may be solved during the warranty period. A case is used to track efforts, such as work time spent to repair a device and related phone calls and emails, to resolve a particular issue. To start using contracts, you need to activate the **Contract management**functionality in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. Contract-related windows appear on the site map after you have activated this functionality. This topic will help you to configure and use contracts. It describes contract preparation, the contract life cycle, and the most common contract-related tasks. + [About prior configuration of contracts](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/prior-configuration/about-prior-configuration-of-contracts/) + [About contract preparation](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-preparation/about-contract-preparation/) + [About the contract life cycle](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/about-the-contract-life-cycle/) + [About contract setup and activation](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-setup-and-activation/about-contract-setup-and-activation/) + [About contract usage recording](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-usage-recording/about-contract-usage-recording/) + [About contract invoicing](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-invoicing/about-contract-invoicing/) + [Make changes to contract services](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/make-changes-to-contract-services/) + [About contract renewal](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-renewal/about-contract-renewal/) + [Contract examples - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-examples/contract-examples-overview/)

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Prior configuration /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/prior-configuration section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Prior configuration About prior configuration of contracts /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/prior-configuration/about-prior-configuration-of-contracts page Contracts come in various types, depending on the industry and company, but most contain similar elements and are maintained similarly. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About prior configuration of contracts Contracts come in various types, depending on the industry and company, but most contain similar elements and are maintained similarly. Visma Net provides capabilities that ease the processes of contract creation and maintenance. You need to configure the following Visma Net entities before creating a contract: ## Contract template A contract template serves as the base for a contract and provides it with the default settings. For each type of contract (such as a service agreement or support plan) your company has with its customers, you can set up a contract template. Then, when you create a contract, you select the appropriate contract template, which causes the default settings to be filled in. A contract template may also provide a list of products and services that you want to sell. These services and products are represented by contract items, which you configure separately. ## Customer account The customer account that you select for a contract provides the invoicing and location details that are specific to the customer. When you create a contract, in addition to specifying the contract template, you specify the customer account, which causes the system to fill in appropriate settings that are specific to the customer. ## Discount codes If you want to give the customer a discount for services provided recurrently through the contract, you should configure a discount code, which determines the discount rate, the application rules, and the non-stock items it is applied to. You can later specify this discount code when you create a contract. For details on configuring discounts, see: [Manage discounts](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-discounts/). This topic will help you to configure contract templates and contract items.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

About contract templates /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/prior-configuration/about-contract-templates page A contract template, which is required for creating a contract, provides invoicing, refund, and renewal settings. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About contract templates A contract template, which is required for creating a contract, provides invoicing, refund, and renewal settings. A template for a particular type of contract can include as many details as are needed for a typical contract of the type. A template might provide all the contract details except for the customer name and location, or it may contain only a few settings in addition to the required ones. A contract template may or may not determine the list of contract details, which are the services and products that you want to sell. These services and products are represented by contract items, which you configure separately. The list of details is created by adding the contract items to a contract template. When you are creating a contract and you select the contract template to base it on, the list is copied to the contract. You can modify the list of items if this is allowed by the contract template (that is, if the **Enable template items override** check box is selected). To prepare a contract template, you do the following: + Configure the contract template. + Configure the contract items that you want to add to the contract template, if any. + Add the contract items to the contract template.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Configure a contract template /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/prior-configuration/configure-a-contract-template section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Configure a contract template ## Before you proceed Make sure that the contract items you want to include in the contract template are properly configured. For details, see: [Configure a contract item](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/prior-configuration/configure-a-contract-item/). If you want to invoice customers for the number of cases, you should also configure a designated non-stock item. For details see: [Set up invoicing by the number of cases](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-examples/usage-based-contracts/set-up-invoicing-by-the-number-of-cases/). 1. Go to the [Contract templates (CT202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/contract-templates-ct202000/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. Optional: Specify the ID manually in the **Contract template** field. The unique ID of a contract template is formed in accordance with the **TMCONTRACT** segmented key. If the **Contract template** field contains the `` place holder, it means that auto-numbering is enabled for a key segment and the ID is assigned automatically. 1. In the **Description** field, type a brief description of this contract template, including any relevant comments. 1. In the **Contract settings** section of the **Summary** tab, do the following: 1. In the **Contract type** field, select the expiration policy. The following options are available: + **Renewable**: Select this option if you are going to renew contracts based on this template. The renewal process changes the expiration date of a contract of this type and generates an invoice for a renewal fee, if there is one. A contract should be renewed during its grace period; otherwise, the renewal process changes the contract status to **Expired** and creates a copy of the contract with the **Draft** status. + **Expiring**: Select this option if you are not going to renew contracts based on this template. If you run the renewal process for such a contract, the contract status changes to **Expired** and a copy of the contract is created with the **Draft** status. + **Unlimited**: Select this option if you want contracts based on this template to have no expiration date. A contract of this type can be terminated only. 1. In the **Duration** fields, type the number of units and select the duration unit to specify the period when a contract based on this template is valid. 1. Select the **Refundable** check box if you want to refund the setup and renewal fee when a contract based on this template is terminated. The setup fee is refunded if both the contract and the contract item are marked as refundable. If a renewal fee is collected on activation, it is refunded along with the setup fee. If the contract is terminated, recurring charges are refunded in proportion to unused services. 1. If you have selected the **Refundable** check box, type the appropriate number of days in the **Refund period** field. If a contract based on this template is terminated during this period, the customer may claim a refund. 1. Select the **Renew automatically** check box if you want the contract based on the template to be available for mass processing and displayed in the [Renew contracts (CT502000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/renew-contracts-ct502000/) window. 1. In the **Grace period** field, type the number of days after the expiration date when services under a contract are still provided and the contract can be renewed according to its type. When you invoke the **Renew contract** action after the end of the grace period, a copy of the contract with the **Draft** status is created, regardless of the contract type. 1. In the **Currency** field, select the currency to be used for invoicing the customer. The customer's currency should match the template currency. You can include only contract items priced in the same currency. 1. Select the **Enable template items override** check box if you want to allow users to modify the list of contract items for each contract based on this template. 1. Select the **Automatically release customer documents** check box if you want Customer ledger documents generated during contract invoicing to be released automatically; otherwise, they will keep the **Balanced** status. The **Undo last action** command in the [Customer contracts (CT301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-contracts-ct301000/) window is not available for actions that involve released documents. 1. Optional: In the **Effective from** and **Discontinue after** fields, specify the period of time when the contract template is available for creating contracts based on it. 1. In the **Invoicing settings** section, do the following: 1. In the **Invoicing period** field, select the time period the contract invoicing schedule should be divided into. The following options are available: **Week**, **Month**, **Quarter**, **Year**, **Statement based**, and **On demand**. With the **On demand** option, invoicing is not scheduled and you can invoice a contract on any date. This option cannot be used with contract items that have recurring pricing configured and are not assigned to a deposit contract item. 1. In the **Invoice to** field, select the account that is to be invoiced for the contract. The following options are available: **Parent account**, **Customer account**, and **Specific account**. 1. In the **Invoicing schedule starts on** field, select the starting point of the contract invoicing schedule. The following options are available: **Setup date** and **Activation date**. The contract expiration date is calculated based on this setting. 1. In the **Invoicing format** field, select the format of invoices for invoicing contracts based on the template. The following options are available: + **Summary**: Contract item usage is summed up and shown as one line with the total quantity and total sum. The expense claims are shown individually. + **Detail**: Each contract item usage occurrence is shown as a separate line. 1. In the **Case count item** field, select the non-stock item used for counting cases associated with the contract. You can invoice a customer for the number of cases accumulated. For details, see: [Set up invoicing by the number of cases](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-examples/usage-based-contracts/set-up-invoicing-by-the-number-of-cases/). 1. To add contract items to a contract template, switch to the **Details** tab, and do the following: 1. On the table toolbar, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). In the **Item code** column, select the contract item you want to offer to customers. The system fills related columns with the appropriate values automatically. You can change the item description and quantity within the allowed limits. 1. Repeat step 8.a for each contract item you want include in the contract template. 1. In the top part, select the **Active** check box to make the template available for creating contracts based on it. 1. In the window toolbar, click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). Now you can proceed to contract preparation.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

About contract Items /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/prior-configuration/about-contract-items page In Visma Net, a contract item defines the services and products, along with price and provision policies, that you want to offer to customers. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About contract Items In Visma Net, a contract item defines the services and products, along with price and provision policies, that you want to offer to customers. In Visma Net, a contract item defines the services and products, along with price and provision policies, that you want to offer to customers. A service or product provided as part of a contract is defined as a non-stock item. Thus, before you create contract items, you should consider what services and products you will offer to your customers through contracts; you then create non-stock items for each product and service. For each non-stock item, you specify the base price (which is used to calculate the contract item price) and the General ledger sales account and subaccount used to record item-related transactions. For details on configuring non-stock items, see [About non-stock item support](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stock-and-non-stock-items/about-non-stock-item-support/). Once you have configured the appropriate non-stock items, you configure the contract items. A contract item has three parts: ## 1. Setup You configure this part of a contract item to specify the non-stock item you want to provide during contract setup and define the pricing policy to be used to calculate the setup price. Also, this part of the contract item is used to configure the deposit contract item used in retainer contracts. ## 2. Renewal When you configure this part of a contract item, you specify the non-stock item you want to provide during contract renewal and define the pricing policy to be used to calculate the renewal price. You can configure the renewal price to be dependent on the setup price. ## 3. Recurring When you configure this part of a contract item, you define the policy for the recurring invoicing, specify the non-stock item you want to provide recurrently, and define the pricing policy to be used to calculate the recurring price. For items that are provided recurrently, you can specify a price for extra usage. When item usage exceeds the included usage, the extra amount can be invoiced at another price. You can configure both the recurring and extra usage prices to be dependent on the setup price. > [!NOTE] > All non-stock items included in a contract item should be priced in the same currency. For a contract item, you can configure all three of the parts listed above, any two parts, or only one part. For example: You might provide a customer with Visma Net first and then provide support services recurrently. In this case, you would assign the Visma Net to the setup part and support services to the recurring part of the contract item.

Related pages

Concepts

Configure a contract item /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/prior-configuration/configure-a-contract-item section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Configure a contract item ## Before you proceed Make sure that non-stock items are properly configured for each service you want to include in a contract item. For details on configuring non-stock items, see: [About non-stock item support](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stock-and-non-stock-items/about-non-stock-item-support/). The offered instruction is divided into four parts: general settings (required), setup, renewal, and setting up recurring invoicing. You can refer to the parts that you need to configure the contract item you want to offer and skip other parts. 1. Go to the [Contract items (CT201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/contract-items-ct201000/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. Optional: Specify the ID manually in the **Contract item** field. The unique ID of a contract item is formed in accordance with the **CONTRACTITEM** segmented key. If the **Contract item** field contains the `` place holder, it means that auto-numbering is enabled for the key segment and the ID is assigned automatically. 1. In the **Description** field, type a brief description of the services included. 1. In the top part of the **Price options** tab, do the following: 1. In the **Maximum allowed quantity** and **Minimum allowed quantity** fields, type the quantity limits for the provided services. 1. In the **Default quantity** field, type the service quantity that is included in the contract by default. This value can be modified in a template or a contract within the allowed limits (which are defined by **Maximum allowed quantity**and **Minimum allowed quantity**). If service usage has exceeded the included quantity, the difference is considered extra usage. Allowed quantity limits are not applied to extra usage. 1. In the **Currency ID** field, select the currency of this contract item. You should use non-stock items priced in one currency within each contract item. 1. To set up pricing for a service to be provided as a part of contract setup, in the **Setup and renewal** area, do the following: 1. In the **Setup item** field, select the non-stock item you want to provide and invoice when contract setup occurs. 1. In the **Setup pricing** field, select the pricing policy. The following options are available: + **Use item price**: Select this option if you want to use the base price of the non-stock item. If a price is configured for a customer price class and a customer that purchases this service belongs to this price class, then the price from the customer price class is used. + **Percent of item price**: Select this option if you want the price to be calculated by applying the percent specified in the **Item price/percent** field to the base price of the non-stock item. + **Enter manually**: Select this option if you want to specify the price manually in the **Item price/percent** field. Selecting this option means you can not modify the price later in the contract. 1. (Skip this step if you have selected **Use item price** in the **Setup pricing** field.) In the **Item price/percent** field, type the item price or percent, depending on the pricing policy you have selected. 1. Skip the **Retain rate** and **Deposit** elements, which are used only for creating a contract item to serve as a prepayment. For details, see: [Create a deposit contract item](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-examples/retainer-contracts/create-a-deposit-contract-item/). 1. Select the **Refundable** check box if you want to allow the amount the customer paid for setup to be refunded in case of contract termination. The setup fee is refunded if both the contract template and this contract item are marked as refundable. If the renewal fee is collected on activation, it is refunded along with the setup fee. Recurring charges are refunded in proportion to unused services in case of termination. 1. Select the **Prorate setup** check box if you want to allow the amount the customer paid for setup to be invoiced in proportion to unused services in case of termination or changes in contract terms. 1. Optional: If you have finished specifying settings for the contract item, click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). Otherwise, proceed with the part of instruction you need. 1. To set up pricing for a service to be provided when contract renewal occurs, on the **Setup and renewal** area, do the following: 1. In the **Renew item** field, select the non-stock item you want to provide and invoice when contract renewal occurs. 1. Select the **Collect renewal fee on activation** check box if you want to invoice the customer for services provided on renewal both at the moment of contract activation and at contract renewal. For a usage example, see: [About fixed-price contracts](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-examples/about-fixed-price-contracts/). 1. In the **Renewal pricing** field, select the pricing policy. The following options are available: + **Use item price**: Select this option if you want to use the base price of the non-stock item. If a price is configured for a customer price class and a customer that purchases this service belongs to this price class, then the price from the customer price class is used. + **Percent of item price**: Select this option if you want the price to be calculated by applying the percent specified in the **Item price/percent** field to the base price of the non-stock item. + **Percent of setup price**: Select this option if you want the price to be calculated by applying the percent specified in the **Item price/percent** field to the setup price of the contract item. + **Enter manually**: Select this option if you want to specify the price manually in the **Item price/percent** field. Selecting this option means you can not modify the price later in the contract. 1. (Skip this step if you have selected the **Use item price** option in the **Renewal pricing** field.) In the **Item price/percent** field, type the item price or percent, depending on the pricing policy you selected. 1. Optional: If you have finished specifying settings for the contract item, click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). Otherwise, proceed with the part of the instruction you need. 1. To set up pricing for service to be provided recurrently, in the **Recurring invoicing** area, do the following: 1. In the **Invoice type** field select the invoicing policy. The following options are available: + **None**: Select this option if you are not going to invoice the customer recurrently, and the elements of the **Recurring invoicing** area become unavailable. + **Prepaid**: Select this option if you want to invoice the customer at the beginning of the scheduled invoicing period. + **Postpaid**: Select this option if you want to invoice the customer at the end of the scheduled invoicing period. 1. In the **Recurring item** field, select the non-stock item that you want to provide and invoice recurrently. 1. Select the **Reset usage on invoicing** check box if you want the contract item usage to be reset after the invoicing for a previous invoicing period has been performed. If this check box is selected, the included quantity is set per invoicing period. If this check box is cleared, the included quantity is set for the whole duration of the contract, so clear the check box only if the invoicing period is equal to the contract duration. 1. In the **Recurring pricing** field, select the pricing policy. The following options are available: + **Use item price**: Select this option if you want to use the base price of the non-stock item. If a price is configured for a customer price class and a customer that purchases this service belongs to this price class, then the price from the customer price class is used. + **Percent of item price**: Select this option if you want the price to be calculated by applying the percent specified in the **Item price/percent** field to the base price of the non-stock item. + **Percent of setup price**: Select this option if you want the price to be calculated by applying the percent specified in the **Item price/percent** field to the setup price of the contract item. + **Enter manually**: Select this option if you want to specify the price manually in the **Item price/percent** field. Selecting this option means you can not modify the price later in the contract. 1. (Skip this step if you have selected **Use item price** in the **Recurring pricing** field.) In the **Item price/percent** field, type the item price or percent, depending on the pricing policy selected. 1. In the **Extra usage pricing** field, select the pricing policy to be applied to the service price if the customer has exceeded the service included quantity. The following options are available: + **Use item price**: Select this option if you want to use the base price of the non-stock item. If a price is configured for a customer price class and a customer that purchases this service belongs to this price class, then the price from the customer price class is used. + **Percent of item price**: Select this option if you want the price to be calculated by applying the percent specified in the **Item price/percent** field to the base price of the non-stock item. + **Percent of setup price**: Select this option if you want the price to be calculated by applying the percent specified in the **Item price/percent** field to the setup price of the contract item. + **Enter manually**: Select this option if you want to specify the price manually in the **Item price/percent** field. Selecting this option also allows to modify the price later in the contract. 1. (Skip this step if you have selected **Use item price** in the **Extra usage pricing** field.) In the **Item price/percent** field, type the item price or percent, depending on the pricing policy selected. 1. Optional: In the **Deposit item** field, select the deposit contract item you want to tie to the contract item you are configuring. > [!NOTE] > The deposit item is used only with contract items that offer service provided recurrently. For details on configuring, see: [About retainer contracts](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-examples/retainer-contracts/about-retainer-contracts/). 1. In the window toolbar, click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Contract preparation /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-preparation section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Contract preparation About contract preparation /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-preparation/about-contract-preparation page To create a new contract in the Customer contracts (CT301000) window, you select a template and a customer account. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About contract preparation To create a new contract in the Customer contracts (CT301000) window, you select a template and a customer account. For more information: [Customer contracts (CT301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-contracts-ct301000/). To create a new contract in the [Customer contracts (CT301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-contracts-ct301000/) window, you select a template and a customer account. This window is filled in with default values provided by the selected template and the customer account. You may then change the included quantity of contract items within the allowed limits and modify invoicing information. You can modify the list of contract items if such modifications are allowed in the selected contract template. Also, you can change the prices if the pricing policy of the contract item allows it. A newly created contract has the **Draft** status. ## Contract IDs Contract IDs are based on the **CONTRACT** segment key, which inherits its structure from the **PROJECT** segment key. To be able to distinguish contracts from projects in lookup lists, reserve one segment of the key for a value designating whether an ID belongs to projects or contracts. Consider two examples of defining the keys: 1. You can configure two segments in the **PROJECT** segment key: a two-letter segment with two possible values ( **PR** and **CT** ) to designate the type of ID, and a 10-character auto-numbered segment to identify the particular project or contract. For the second segment of the **CONTRACT** key, you can assign a different numbering sequence to maintain the numbers for contracts independently from those of projects. 1. If you decide to define a one-segment structure for the **PROJECT** key with an auto-numbered segment, you can assign different numbering sequences to the **PROJECT** and **CONTRACT** keys. Create the sequence intended for projects with **PR** as a prefix, and define the sequence intended for contracts with the **CT** prefix.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Configure a contract /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-preparation/configure-a-contract section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Configure a contract ## Before you proceed Make sure that the contract template you want to base the contract on is active (the **Active** check box is selected), the date of contract creation is later than the **Effective from** date and sooner than the **Discontinue after** date of the template, and the template currency matches the customer currency. If you want to apply a discount to the contract, make sure that it is properly configured. 1. Go to the [Customer contracts (CT301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-contracts-ct301000/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. Optional: Specify the ID manually in the **Contract ID** field. If the field contains the **<NEW>** place holder, it means that auto-numbering is enabled for a key segment and the system assigns the ID automatically. 1. In the top part, do the following: 1. In the **Contract template** field, select the contract template that the new contract should be based on. The system automatically fills in the invoicing policy settings and the list of services with the default values from the selected template. 1. In the **Customer** field, select the customer account you want to configure the contract with. 1. Optional: Change the customer location and contract description. 1. On the **Summary** tab, do the following: 1. In the **Setup date** field (and optionally the **Activation date** field), specify the dates of the contract being signed and the start services being provided. These dates are to be displayed by default and can be changed in the **Activate contract dialog box**, which opens when you invoke the **Set up contract** or **Activate contract** action. The fields become read-only after the respective action has been performed. 1. Optional: Modify the following settings if needed: **Grace period**, **Renew automatically**, and **Invoice information**. 1. Optional: In the **Contract management** section, assign the contract owner and salesperson. 1. On the **Details** tab, do the following: 1. In the **Promo code** field, select the discount to be applied to the prices of items. 1. If the contract template allows modification of the contract items included, change the quantity and description of items, add new items, and delete listed items, as needed. (Use the applicable buttons in the table toolbar to add and delete rows.) Also, you can enter new prices for non-stock items that have the pricing policy set to the **Enter manually** option. 1. In the window toolbar, click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). After the contract preparation is finished, you can proceed to signing and activating it.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

About the contract life cycle /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/about-the-contract-life-cycle page If you have a contract with the Draft status and the contract details reflect your agreement with a customer, you activate the contract to initiate its life cycle. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About the contract life cycle If you have a contract with the Draft status and the contract details reflect your agreement with a customer, you activate the contract to initiate its life cycle. If you have a contract with the **Draft** status and the contract details reflect your agreement with a customer, you activate the contract to initiate its life cycle. The contract life cycle consists of mandatory stages: setup and activation, fulfillment, and expiration. The life cycle may include the following optional stages: changes to contract services, contract renewal, and contract termination. This article describes the contract life cycle stages in detail. A contract life cycle may consist of the following stages: ## 1. Setup and activation (mandatory) Once you have prepared a contract, you can initiate it. If the services covered by a contract require setup before contract activation, you may initiate invoicing for the setup separately. For example, contracts involving Internet access may require installation of a router or other equipment. You initiate the contract setup: the contract becomes effective and the customer is invoiced for any services associated with setup. At this point, you can no longer modify the terms and scope of the contract. When setup is finished, you activate the contract and start to invoice the customer recurrently. If you do not need to separate the setup of the contract and the activation, these steps can be done simultaneously. For details, see: [About contract setup and activation](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-setup-and-activation/about-contract-setup-and-activation/). ## 2. Fulfillment (mandatory) During this stage, the longest of the contract life cycle, the customer uses services described in the contract, and invoicing is performed according to the terms defined in the contract and the contract items. For details, see [About contract usage recording](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-usage-recording/about-contract-usage-recording/) and [About contract invoicing](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-invoicing/about-contract-invoicing/). ## 3. Changes to services (optional) You or the customer may want to change (upgrade or downgrade) a set of services within the scope of an active contract. Both contract upgrading and downgrading are done in two steps: preparation and activation. During preparation, contract invoicing and the provision of services are done according to the initial settings of the contract. For details, see: [Make changes to contract services](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/make-changes-to-contract-services/). ## 4. Expiration (mandatory) Each time you run the contract invoicing process, it checks whether the next invoicing date exceeds or equals a contract expiration date. If it does, the contract invoicing process sets the next invoicing day equal to the contract expiration date. The next time you run the contract invoicing process, it generates invoice for the contract usage and changes the contract status to **Expired**. You can not record any usage for expired contracts. Expired contracts can be either renewed or terminated: ### Renewal (optional) The renewal scenario depends on the expired contract type, which is defined by the contract template. There are three types of contracts: #### Renewable During the renewal process, the system changes the expiration date of a contract and generates an invoice for the renewal fee, if any. After renewal is completed, the contract is again in the fulfilment stage. A contract should be renewed during its grace period; otherwise, the renewal process creates a copy of the contract with the **Draft** status. You need to activate the copied contract to start the provision of services. #### Expiring A contract of this type expires at the end of its duration, but it is available for a renewal operation—manual or automatic (if scheduled). When such a contract is renewed, a copy of the expired contract is created with the **Draft** status, and you need to activate the copied contract to start the provision of services. #### Unlimited A contract of this type has no expiration date and can be terminated only. For details about renewing contracts, see: [About contract renewal](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-renewal/about-contract-renewal/). ### Termination (optional) You can terminate an expired contract if you are not going to renew or copy it. Also, contract termination may be done at any point in the contract life cycle, if you or the customer decide to terminate the relationship defined by a contract. When you initiate contract termination, the system gathers information on the not yet invoiced usage of a contract and issues an invoice or a credit memo, if needed. The termination date must be within the current invoicing period (between the **Last invoicing date** and the **Next invoicing date**).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Contract setup and activation /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-setup-and-activation section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Contract setup and activation About contract setup and activation /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-setup-and-activation/about-contract-setup-and-activation page The way you initiate a contract may depend on the services you provide. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About contract setup and activation The way you initiate a contract may depend on the services you provide. You may want the contract signing and the start of provision to occur at different times. For example: You might need some time to install the equipment required for the provision of services and you may want to invoice the customer for this equipment before installation. In this case, the recurring invoicing schedule should begin at the start date of provision. If you don't need to separate the time of contract signing and service provision, you can perform these two actions simultaneously. In Visma Net, contract signing is referred to as **contract setup**. The date when the contract is signed is called the **setup date**. The start of the provision of services is referred to as **contract activation**, and the date of contract activation is called the **activation date**. Note that you can record service usage for only activated contracts.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Set up a contract /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-setup-and-activation/set-up-a-contract page You use the Customer contracts (CT301000) window to set up a contract. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Set up a contract You use the Customer contracts (CT301000) window to set up a contract. For more information: [Customer contracts (CT301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-contracts-ct301000/). You use the [Customer contracts (CT301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-contracts-ct301000/) window to set up a contract. The setup operation is available for contracts that have the **Draft** status only. 1. In the **Contract ID** field, select the contract you want to initiate. 1. Review the contract details to ensure that the contract meets the intentions of the parties, and make any needed changes. 1. Click **Actions**, and select the **Set up contract** action. 1. In the **Set up contract dialog box**, specify the date of contract setup and click **OK**. When the operation completes, the following actions occur: + The contract gets the **Pending activation** status. + The setup date becomes unavailable for editing. + If the invoicing schedule starts on the setup date, the **Expiration date** field and the **Invoicing schedule** section are filled with details. + An invoice is issued for any service to be provided on setup. If the invoicing schedule starts on the setup date, the invoice also includes a renewal fee if such a fee is configured to be collected on contract activation. You can view the invoice details on the **Sales history** tab of the window. You cannot enter contract usage at this point; to proceed, you need to activate the contract.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Activate a contract /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-setup-and-activation/activate-a-contract page You use the Customer contracts (CT301000) window to activate a contract. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Activate a contract You use the Customer contracts (CT301000) window to activate a contract. For more information: [Customer contracts (CT301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-contracts-ct301000/). You use the [Customer contracts (CT301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-contracts-ct301000/) window to activate a contract. This operation is available only for contracts with the **Pending activation** status. 1. In the **Contract ID** field, select the contract you want to activate. 1. Click **Actions**, and then select the **Activate contract** action. 1. In the **Activate contract dialog box**, specify date of contract activation and click **OK**. ## When the operation is completed, the following actions occur + The contract gets the **Active** status. + The activation date becomes unavailable for editing. + If the invoicing schedule starts on the activation date, the **Expiration date** field and the **Invoicing schedule** section are filled with details. + An invoice for prepaid services is issued. If the invoicing schedule starts on the activation date, the invoice also includes a renewal fee if the fee is configured to be collected on contract activation. You can view the invoice details on the **Sales history** tab of the window. Now you can proceed with usage recording. For details, see [About contract usage recording](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-usage-recording/about-contract-usage-recording/).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Set up and activate a contract simultaneously /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-setup-and-activation/set-up-and-activate-a-contract-simultaneously page In the Customer contracts (CT301000) window, you can simultaneously set up and activate a contract. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Set up and activate a contract simultaneously In the Customer contracts (CT301000) window, you can simultaneously set up and activate a contract. For more information: [Customer contracts (CT301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-contracts-ct301000/). In the [Customer contracts (CT301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-contracts-ct301000/) window, you can simultaneously set up and activate a contract. This operation is available for contracts with the **Draft** status only. 1. Review the contract details to ensure that the contract meets the intentions of the parties, and make any needed changes. 1. Click **Actions**, and select the **Set up and activate contract** action. 1. In the **Activate contract** dialog box, specify the date of contract activation and click **OK**. This operation triggers the following actions: + The contract gets the **Active** status. + The setup and activation dates become unavailable for editing. + The **Expiration date** field and the **Invoicing schedule** section are filled with details, based on the template settings. + An invoice is issued for the setup and prepaid services. The invoice also includes a renewal fee if such a fee is configured to be collected on contract activation. You can view the invoice details on the **Sales history** tab of the window. Now you can proceed with usage recording. For details, see: [About contract usage recording](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-usage-recording/about-contract-usage-recording/).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Contract usage recording /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-usage-recording section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Contract usage recording About contract usage recording /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-usage-recording/about-contract-usage-recording page After contract activation, your company can start providing the services defined by the contract. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About contract usage recording After contract activation, your company can start providing the services defined by the contract. After contract activation, your company can start providing the services defined by the contract. The contract is invoiced in accordance with its invoicing schedule. Invoicing is performed for usage accumulated during an invoicing period. If the contract is invoiced on demand, invoicing is performed for usage accumulated up to the date of the invoicing. Contract usage is the sum of used units of each non-stock item associated with the contract. You can associate a non-stock item with the contract directly or through such system entities as cases, activities, and expense claims. You may want to track the usage of a particular non-stock item during a invoicing period or the whole duration of the contract. To track usage, you create a contract item, specify this non-stock item as the one provided recurrently, and add the item to a contract template. When a contract based on this template is activated, contract items that have non-stock items provided recurrently are listed on the **Recurring summary** tab of the [Customer contracts (CT301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-contracts-ct301000/) window. Here you can view the usage of the contract item, which is the sum of the used units of the non-stock item provided recurrently. You can affect the contract usage in the following ways: ## Using cases You can associate a case with a contract. To recognise the invoiceable time of a case as a contract item usage, you should assign a non-stock item that is provided recurrently to a case class that is invoiced on a per-case basis. When a case of this class is closed and released, its invoiceable time is added to the usage of the contract item. The invoiceable time of cases associated with non-stock items that are not included in the contract is presented on the invoice as a separate line. For details on using contracts for cases invoicing, see [About usage-based contracts](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-examples/usage-based-contracts/about-usage-based-contracts/). ## Using case activities If a case belongs to a case class that is invoiced on a per-activity basis, you can associate the case with a contract as well. When a case activity is completed and released, the respective transaction can be viewed in the [Contract usage (CT303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/contract-usage-ct303000/) window. The invoiceable time of activities associated with non-stock items that are not included in the contract is presented on the invoice as a separate line. For details on using contracts for activities invoicing, see [About usage-based contracts](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-examples/usage-based-contracts/about-usage-based-contracts/). ## Using expense claims You can associate the details of expense claims with a contract. After an expense claim is invoiced, a transaction for the details associated with a contract can be viewed in the [Contract usage (CT303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/contract-usage-ct303000/) window. The quantity of details associated with non-stock items that are not included in the contract is presented on the invoice as a separate line. For details on managing expense claims, see [Process expense claims](/visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/process-expense-claims/about-processing-expense-claims/). ## Using non-stock items You can associate the usage of any non-stock item with a contract by using the [Contract usage (CT303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/contract-usage-ct303000/) window. The usage of non-stock items that are not included in the contract is presented on the invoice as a separate line. For details on entering usage transactions, see [Enter contract usage](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-usage-recording/enter-contract-usage/). You can enter item usage for past, current, and future invoicing periods. If you have entered transactions with a date in a past invoicing period, they will be invoiced in the next invoicing period. If you have entered a transaction with a date in the future, the transaction will be invoiced in the invoicing period that contains the date. When you run a contract invoicing process, the system checks the date of transactions and invoices those with a date before or the same as the current business date. Records of usage transactions are presented as invoice details according to the invoicing format settings of the applicable contract template.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Enter contract usage /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-usage-recording/enter-contract-usage section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Enter contract usage 1. Go to the [Contract usage (CT303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/contract-usage-ct303000/) window. 1. In the **Contract ID** field, select the contract you want to enter usage for. 1. On the **Transactions not yet invoiced** tab, do the following: 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) in the window toolbar. The customer account associated with the contract is selected by default as well as the customer location, the current business date, and the branch from which you are signed in. You can modify the values of all fields except for the customer account. 1. In the **Item ID** column, select the non-stock item that you want to invoice the customer for. 1. In the **Quantity** column, type the number of used units. 1. In the window toolbar, click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). 1. Repeat step 3 for each transaction. You run the contract invoicing process to invoice the entered transactions. For details on contract invoicing, see: [About contract invoicing](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-invoicing/about-contract-invoicing/).

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

View contract usage /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-usage-recording/view-contract-usage page You use the Contract usage (CT303000) window to view all usage transactions associated with a contract. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # View contract usage You use the Contract usage (CT303000) window to view all usage transactions associated with a contract. For more information: [Contract usage (CT303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/contract-usage-ct303000/). You use the [Contract usage (CT303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/contract-usage-ct303000/) window to view all usage transactions associated with a contract. To view the usage of contract items provided recurrently, you use the [Customer contracts (CT301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-contracts-ct301000/) window. ## View all contract transactions 1. In the **Contract ID** field, select the contract you want to view transactions for. 1. To view uninvoiced transactions, click the **Transactions not yet invoiced** tab, which shows the list of transactions that are not yet invoiced. 1. To view invoiced transactions, click the **Transaction history** tab. The list of invoiced transactions is displayed. You can select a post period to narrow the results. ## View contract item usage 1. In the **Contract ID** field, select the contract you want to view usage for. 1. Click the **Recurring summary** tab, and view the list of contract items provided recurrently in the table. For each contract item listed in the table, you can view: + In the **Included** column: The usage included in the contract by default and invoiced at the recurring price. (If the included usage is exceeded, the customer is invoiced for additional units at the price for extra usage specified in the respective contract item.) + In the **Used** column: The usage accumulated for the current invoicing period. + In the **Used total** column: The total usage accumulated from the contract activation date.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

Contract invoicing /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-invoicing section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Contract invoicing About contract invoicing /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-invoicing/about-contract-invoicing page After contract usage has been recorded, you should begin invoicing for the usage. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About contract invoicing After contract usage has been recorded, you should begin invoicing for the usage. After contract usage has been recorded, you should begin invoicing for the usage. When you run the contract invoicing process, the system produces an invoice. This topic describes the source of invoice details and common invoicing scenarios. ## Source of invoice details The system gets most details for the invoice by using the non-stock item that is used to track this usage, as described in [About contract usage recording](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-usage-recording/about-contract-usage-recording/). The non-stock item provides the following information: Basis for unit price : The unit price is calculated by using the base price of the non-stock item. If a price is configured for a customer price class and a customer that purchases this service belongs to this price class, then the price from the customer price class is used. If the non-stock item is included in the contract item, then the system calculates the unit price by applying the rules specified in the contract item to the non-stock item base price or the price from the customer price class. Sales account : This is the general ledger account used to record sale transactions of this non-stock item. You specify the sales account by using the **General ledger accounts** tab of the [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) window. Sales subaccount : The sales subaccount is the subaccount used to record sale transactions of this non-stock item. The subaccount is combined automatically according the rules defined in the **Combine sales sub.** from field in the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) windows. VAT category : This is the category Visma Net uses to calculate the VAT applied to supplying goods or services. ## Common invoicing scenarios In Visma Net, you can configure different invoicing scenarios to suit your business needs. You can invoice a customer on a schedule or on demand, as described below: Scheduled invoicing : Scheduled invoicing is the most common way to invoice customers recurrently. The duration of the contract is divided into equal time intervals, which are the invoicing periods. Invoicing is performed once in an invoicing period, causing one invoice to be generated per invoicing period. The system calculates invoicing dates by using the date when the contract's invoicing schedule is started and the contract's invoicing period—which is used as an incrementation step. You can select one of the following steps: week, month, quarter, or year. The invoicing schedule for a contract can be viewed on the **Summary** tab in the [Customer contracts (CT301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-contracts-ct301000/) window. Here you can see the start date of the invoicing schedule, the invoicing period, the date of the last invoice, and the date of the next invoice. When you run contract invoicing, the system generates an invoice with the next invoicing date and shifts the schedule dates on the incrementation step. Invoices can be viewed on the **Sales history** tab of a contract. Additionally, you can define for each recurrent contract item whether it is invoiced at the beginning of the invoicing periods or at the end of it. If you have not invoiced a contract for two or more periods, you have to run the invoicing process for each missed period. Invoicing on demand : You can provide services on demand, rather than recurrently. In this case, you might want to perform contract invoicing any time services have been provided. An invoice with the date you have specified is generated each time you run contract invoicing. You can run contract invoicing for a particular contract in the [Customer contracts (CT301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-contracts-ct301000/) window, use the mass-processing [Run contract invoicing (CT501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/run-contract-invoicing-ct501000/) window to run invoicing for multiple contracts, or configure the automation schedule functionality for contract invoicing.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Run contract invoicing /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-invoicing/run-contract-invoicing page You use the Customer contracts (CT301000) window to run the invoicing process for a contract as long as the contract has the Active or Pending upgrade status. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Run contract invoicing You use the Customer contracts (CT301000) window to run the invoicing process for a contract as long as the contract has the Active or Pending upgrade status. For more information: [Customer contracts (CT301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-contracts-ct301000/). You use the [Run contract invoicing (CT501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/run-contract-invoicing-ct501000/) window to run the invoicing process for a number of contracts at once. 1. Go to the [Customer contracts (CT301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-contracts-ct301000/) window. 1. In the **Contract ID** field, select the contract you want to invoice. 1. Click **Actions** and then select **Run contract invoicing**. If the selected contract is configured to be invoiced on demand, the **Invoicing on demand dialogue box** is displayed, where you can enter the invoice date. If the operation completes successfully, the green check mark appears in the window toolbar. After the operation completes, you can view and further process the generated invoice in the **Sales history** tab of the window. ## Run invoicing process for multiple contracts 1. Go to the [Run contract invoicing (CT501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/run-contract-invoicing-ct501000/) window. 1. In the **Invoicing date** field, select the date of invoicing. The list of contracts that require invoicing on that date is generated. 1. Optional: Narrow the list of contracts by selecting any combination of a contract template, customer class, and particular customer. 1. Do one of the following: + To invoice all listed contracts, click **Process all**. + To invoice only selected contracts, select the unlabelled check boxes for the contracts you want to invoice, and click **Process**. If the contracts were invoiced successfully, the system marks them with green check marks. When you initiate invoicing for all contracts or selected ones, invoices are generated for each contract and each customer involved. You can view and further process generated invoices on the **Sales history** tab of the [Customer contracts (CT301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-contracts-ct301000/) window for each contract. Also, you can use invoice-related windows for further processing. For details, see: [Process invoices - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/process-invoices-overview/).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Make changes to contract services /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/make-changes-to-contract-services section Changing a contract's terms of provision may involve changes in services, prices, or quantities. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Make changes to contract services Changing a contract's terms of provision may involve changes in services, prices, or quantities. Changing a contract's terms of provision may involve changes in services, prices, or quantities. You can add or delete services, change the included quantity, or apply a discount. Note that you can change the set of provided services for contracts that are based on templates that allow overriding of contract items. Contract upgrades and downgrades are performed in two stages: preparation and activation. During the preparation stage, you modify provisioning terms, but contract invoicing and service provision are performed according to the initial settings of the contract. When the changes are activated, contract invoicing and service provision are performed according to the new settings. You use the Customer contracts (CT301000) window to change services of a contract with the **Active** status as follows: 1. Go to the [Customer contracts (CT301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-contracts-ct301000/) window. 1. In the **Contract ID** field, select the contract you want to upgrade. 1. Click **Actions**, and select **Upgrade contract**. This gives the contract the **Pending upgrade** status, which means that you can change the terms of provision. 1. On the **Details** tab, modify the list of services or their quantity, or apply a discount. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). 1. Click **Actions**, and select the **Activate upgrade** action. In the **Activate contract dialog box**, specify the date of contract activation and click **OK**. If the operation is completed successfully, the green check mark appears in the window toolbar.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

Contract renewal /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-renewal section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Contract renewal About contract renewal /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-renewal/about-contract-renewal page When a contract has expired, you and your customer may want to continue the relationship under the same terms. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About contract renewal When a contract has expired, you and your customer may want to continue the relationship under the same terms. When a contract has expired, you and your customer may want to continue the relationship under the same terms. In this case, you can renew an expired contract to avoid the provision of services being interrupted. The contract renewal process and its outcome are defined by the contract type. Contracts of the following types can be renewed: ## Renewable When you renew a contract of this type, the expiration date is shifted by the duration; apart from that, contract stays unchanged. The renewal fee, if one is configured, is invoiced. After renewal is completed, the contract is again in the fulfillment stage. A contract can be renewed either manually or automatically (if scheduled). ## Expiring When you renew a contract of this type, a copy of an expired contract is created with the **Draft** status. You can modify contract details, if required, and activate it on the date of your choice. > [!NOTE] > If you want to renew a contract after the end of the grace period, a copy of the contract with the **Draft** status is created, regardless of the original contract type. You can track contracts that are about to expire by using the [Expiring customer contracts](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/expiring-customer-contracts-ct401000/) (CT401000) window.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Renew a contract /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-renewal/renew-a-contract page You use the Customer contracts (CT301000) window to renew a single contract. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Renew a contract You use the Customer contracts (CT301000) window to renew a single contract. For more information: [Customer contracts (CT301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-contracts-ct301000/). You use the [Customer contracts (CT301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-contracts-ct301000/) window to renew a single contract. To renew a number of contracts at once, you use the [Renew contracts (CT502000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/renew-contracts-ct502000/) window. 1. Go to the [Customer contracts (CT301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-contracts-ct301000/) window. 1. In the **Contract ID** field, select the contract you want to renew. 1. Click **Actions**, and select **Renew contract**. If the operation is completed successfully, one of the following occurs: + For a renewable contract, the expiration date is shifted by its duration and the renewal fee is invoiced. After the renewal operation is completed, you can view and further process the generated invoice on the **Sales history** tab of the [Customer contracts (CT301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-contracts-ct301000/) window. + For an expiring contract, another contract (which is a copy of the expiring contract with a new ID) is created with the **Draft** status. You can view all related contracts (both parent and child) on the **Contract history** tab of the [Customer contracts (CT301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-contracts-ct301000/) window. ## Renew multiple contracts You can also renew multiple contracts at once, as long as each of the contracts has the **Renew automatically** check box selected in the [Customer contracts (CT301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-contracts-ct301000/) window. To renew multiple contracts, do the following: 1. Go to the [Renew contracts (CT502000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/renew-contracts-ct502000/) window. 1. In the **Renewal date** field, select the start date of the date range in which the contracts will expire. The list of contracts that expire during the specified range (and thus require renewal) is generated. 1. Optional: Expand or narrow the list of contracts by narrowing the list of contracts to be displayed by selecting the customer class, the contract template, or both. 1. Do one of the following: + To renew all listed contracts, click **Process all**. + To renew only selected contracts, select the empty check boxes for the contracts you want to renew, and click **Process**. If the contracts are renewed successfully, the system marks them with green check marks. You can view and further process the generated invoices on the **Sales history** tab of the [Customer contracts (CT301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-contracts-ct301000/) window for each contract. Also, you can use invoice-related windows for further processing. For details, see: [Process invoices - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/process-invoices-overview/).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Contract examples /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-examples section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Contract examples Contract examples - overview /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-examples/contract-examples-overview page Visma Net provides you with different scenarios of invoicing a customer for the usage of services you offer with the contracts functionality, as the following topics describe. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Contract examples - overview Visma Net provides you with different scenarios of invoicing a customer for the usage of services you offer with the contracts functionality, as the following topics describe. Visma Net include the following, each of which is described in its own topic: + [About fixed-price contracts](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-examples/about-fixed-price-contracts/) + [About usage-based contracts](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-examples/usage-based-contracts/about-usage-based-contracts/) + [About retainer contracts](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-examples/retainer-contracts/about-retainer-contracts/) ## Contracts with invoicing on demand You may want to have the ability to provide a customer with any service or solution you have at any time and invoice the customer as needed. To implement such a scenario, do the following: 1. Create an active contract template with the invoicing period set to the **On demand** option, and do not add any contract items. Prepare a contract with the **Draft** status based on this template. For details, see [About contract preparation](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-preparation/about-contract-preparation/). 1. Set up and activate the contract. The contract status is changed to **Active** and you can proceed with the contract usage recording. For details, see [About contract setup and activation](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-setup-and-activation/about-contract-setup-and-activation/). 1. For the contract, enter the usage of the non-stock items that correspond to the services or solutions provided to this customer. For details, see [Enter contract usage](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-usage-recording/enter-contract-usage/). 1. Invoice the contract any time you need to. For details, see [Run contract invoicing](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-invoicing/run-contract-invoicing/).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

About fixed-price contracts /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-examples/about-fixed-price-contracts page You may offer services at a price that is not based on the service's usage, as with a fee for internet connection or domain name registration. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About fixed-price contracts You may offer services at a price that is not based on the service's usage, as with a fee for internet connection or domain name registration. You generally collect such a fee on a schedule, for example, once a year or on a monthly basis. Consider an example: You offer domain name registration and maintenance for a year with renewal. To implement such a scenario, do the following: 1. By using the [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) window, create **Domain name registration** and **Maintenance** non-stock items that represent services you offer. 1. In the [Contract items (CT201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/contract-items-ct201000/) window, configure a contract item as follows: + In the **Setup item** field, select the **Domain name registration** non-stock item, and specify the pricing policy for the setup item. You provide a domain name and invoice for it during the contract setup stage. + In the **Renewal item** field, select the **Maintenance** non-stock item, and specify the pricing policy for the renewal item. You provide a maintenance item only after renewal and invoice for it when the contract is renewed. + To invoice the customer for maintenance during the first year, select the **Collect renewal fee on activation** check box. The fee for the renewal item will be included in the first invoice. + Fill in other required parameters (and any optional ones) at your discretion. For details on configuring contract items, see: [Configure a contract item](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/prior-configuration/configure-a-contract-item/). 1. By using the [Contract templates (CT202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/contract-templates-ct202000/) window, create a contract template as follows: + Set the **Contract type** to **Renewable** and the **Duration** to **1 Year**. + Specify **Year** as the **invoicing period**. + In the **Invoicing schedule starts on** field, select **setup date**. + Fill in other required parameters (and any optional ones) at your discretion. + Add the contract item you have configured to the contract template. For details on configuring a contract template, see: [Configure a contract template](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/prior-configuration/configure-a-contract-template/). 1. Set up and activate the contract. An invoice for domain name registration and maintenance is issued automatically as the result of the setup procedure. For more information, see: [About contract setup and activation](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-setup-and-activation/about-contract-setup-and-activation/). 1. Renew the contract in a year. An invoice for maintenance only is issued automatically as the result of the renewal procedure. For details, see: [About contract renewal](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-renewal/about-contract-renewal/). You can combine fixed-price contract items with ones that are invoiced based on usage. For example: Suppose that you provide bandwidth or disk space along with a domain name. In this case, you could include in one contract item a domain name as the setup item and some quantity of disk space as the recurring item, or you could create separate contract items.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Usage-based contracts /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-examples/usage-based-contracts section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Usage-based contracts About usage-based contracts /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-examples/usage-based-contracts/about-usage-based-contracts page You may offer services at a price that depends on the usage of the service, such as support hours, disk space, or support cases. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About usage-based contracts You may offer services at a price that depends on the usage of the service, such as support hours, disk space, or support cases. The contracts functionality of Visma Net can help you to track and invoice the usage of a particular service. You can invoice customers for services at the regular price and at an extra usage price, and you can provide some quantity for free. You can track the usage of the services that are provided recurrently within a invoicing period as well as for the whole contract duration. ## Annual support with free options If you offer annual support with free options, you can use Visma Net to implement the following scenarios. Each scenario is described briefly below; see the **Settings for the examples** table for the settings you would use to implement the scenario. You can also refer to procedures that walk you through implementation of each scenario. + **Annual support with hours for free**: To implement this scenario, use the settings listed in the appropriate column of the table below. To implement scenarios in which the contract covers annual support with free hours, do the following: Annual support that includes free hours might be structured as in the following examples: + **The first 10 hours for free**: You could offer a contract for annual support with the first 10 hours free and additional hours invoiced at €100 per hour. The contract is invoiced monthly. + **10 hours for free each month**: You might offer a contract for annual support with 10 hours free each month and other hours invoiced at €100 per hour. The contract is invoiced monthly. + For a case class that is invoiced by case, follow the [Set up per-case invoicing](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-examples/usage-based-contracts/set-up-per-case-invoicing/) procedure. + For a case class that is invoiced by activity, follow the [Set up per-activity invoicing](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-examples/usage-based-contracts/set-up-per-activity-invoicing/) procedure. + **Annual support with cases for free**: To implement this scenario, too, you use the settings listed in the appropriate column of the table below. Annual support that includes free cases might be structured as in the following examples: + **The first 10 cases for free**: You might offer a contract for annual support with the first 10 cases free and additional cases invoiced at €100 per case. The contract is invoiced monthly. + **10 cases for free each month**: You could offer a contract for annual support with 10 free cases each month and additional cases invoiced at €100 per case. The contract is invoiced monthly. To implement a scenario in which the contract covers annual support with free cases, follow the [Set up invoicing by the number of cases](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-examples/usage-based-contracts/set-up-invoicing-by-the-number-of-cases/) procedure. ## Settings for the examples This table shows the settings you would use to implement each of the scenarios described above. |Entity|Annual support with hours for free|Annual support with cases for free| |---|---|---| |**Non-stock item** (Use the Non-stock items window.)|+ **Item ID** = **SUPPORTHOURS** + **Item status** = **Active** + **Type** = **Labor** + **UOMs** = **Hours**|+ **Item ID** = **CASENUMBER** + **Item status** = **Active** + **Type** = **Non-stock item** + **UOMs** = **ITEM**| |**Contract item** (Use the Contract items window.)|+ **Default quantity** = **10** + **Recurring item** = **SUPPORTHOURS** + **Reset usage on invoicing**: + Cleared for the **The first 10 hours for free** scenario + Selected for the **10 hours for free each month** scenario + **Recurring pricing** = **Enter manually** + **Item price/percent** = **0** + **Extra usage pricing** = **Enter manually** + **Item price/percent** = **100**|+ **Default quantity** = **10** + **Recurring item** = **CASENUMBER** + **Reset usage on invoicing**: + Cleared for the **The first 10 cases for free** scenario + Selected for the **10 cases for free each month** scenario + **Recurring pricing** = **Enter manually** + **Item price/percent** = **0** + **Extra usage pricing** = **Enter manually** + **Item price/percent** = **100**| |**Contract template** (Use the Contract templates window.)|+ **Duration** = **1 Year invoicing** + **Period** = **Month**|+ **Duration** = **1 Year invoicing** + **Period** = **Month** + **Case count item** = **CASENUMBER**| > [!NOTE] > Fill in settings that are not mentioned in the table at your discretion.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Set up per-case invoicing /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-examples/usage-based-contracts/set-up-per-case-invoicing page To invoice a customer recurrently and on a per-case basis for time and overtime, perform the following steps: 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Set up per-case invoicing To invoice a customer recurrently and on a per-case basis for time and overtime, perform the following steps: 1. By using the [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) window, create a non-stock item of the **Labour** type to represent hours. For details, see: [About non-stock item support](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stock-and-non-stock-items/about-non-stock-item-support/). 1. In the [Contract items (CT201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/contract-items-ct201000/) window, create a contract item. In the **Recurring item** window, specify the non-stock item created in Step 1 as the one provisioned recurrently. Also, specify the recurring and extra usage prices of this item. Fill in other required parameters (and any optional ones) at your discretion. For details, see [Configure a contract item](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/prior-configuration/configure-a-contract-item/). 1. By using the [Contract templates (CT202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/contract-templates-ct202000/) window, create an active contract template with scheduled invoicing. Add the contract item created in Step 3 to the contract template. For more information, see [Configure a contract item](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/prior-configuration/configure-a-contract-item/). 1. Initiate the contract in the way that suits your needs; now you can proceed with the contract fulfillment. See: [About contract setup and activation](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-setup-and-activation/about-contract-setup-and-activation/) for details. 1. Invoice the contract according to its schedule, as described in: [About contract invoicing](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-invoicing/about-contract-invoicing/).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Set up per-activity invoicing /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-examples/usage-based-contracts/set-up-per-activity-invoicing page To invoice a customer recurrently and on a per-activity basis for time and overtime, perform the following steps: 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Set up per-activity invoicing To invoice a customer recurrently and on a per-activity basis for time and overtime, perform the following steps: 1. By using the [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) window, create a non-stock item of the **Labour** type to represent hours. For details, see: [About non-stock item support](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stock-and-non-stock-items/about-non-stock-item-support/). 1. In the [Contract items (CT201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/contract-items-ct201000/) window, create a contract item. In the **Recurring item** field, specify the non-stock item created in Step 1 as the one provisioned recurrently. Also, specify the recurring and extra usage prices of this item. Fill in other required parameters (and any optional ones) at your discretion. For details, see: [Configure a contract item](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/prior-configuration/configure-a-contract-item/). 1. By using the [Contract templates (CT202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/contract-templates-ct202000/) window, create an active contract template with scheduled invoicing. Add the contract item created in Step 3 to the contract template; see: [Configure a contract template](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/prior-configuration/configure-a-contract-template/) for more information. 1. Initiate the contract in the way that suits your needs; now you can proceed with the contract fulfilment. For details, see: [About contract setup and activation](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-setup-and-activation/about-contract-setup-and-activation/). 1. Invoice the contract according to its schedule. [About contract invoicing](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-invoicing/about-contract-invoicing/). For more information, see:

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Set up invoicing by the number of cases /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-examples/usage-based-contracts/set-up-invoicing-by-the-number-of-cases page To invoice a customer recurrently for a number of cases, perform the following steps: 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Set up invoicing by the number of cases To invoice a customer recurrently for a number of cases, perform the following steps: 1. By using the [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) window, create a non-stock item. Specify the item's unit of measure and price, and fill in other details at your discretion. For details, see: [About non-stock item support](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stock-and-non-stock-items/about-non-stock-item-support/). 1. In the [Contract items (CT201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/contract-items-ct201000/) window, create a contract item. In the **Recurring item** field, specify the non-stock item created in Step 1 as the one provisioned recurrently. Also, specify the recurring and extra usage price of this item. Fill in other required parameters (and any optional ones) at your discretion. For details, see: [Configure a contract item](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/prior-configuration/configure-a-contract-item/). 1. By using the [Contract templates (CT202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/contract-templates-ct202000/) window, create an active contract template with scheduled invoicing. Add the contract item created in Step 2 to the contract template, and in the **Case count item** field, specify the non-stock item you created in Step 1. For details, see: [Configure a contract template](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/prior-configuration/configure-a-contract-template/). 1. Initiate the contract in the way that suits your needs; now you can proceed with the contract fulfilment. For more information, see: [About contract setup and activation](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-setup-and-activation/about-contract-setup-and-activation/). 1. As needed, enter contract usage in the following way: + Directly for the non-stock item you have configured, by using the [Contract usage (CT303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/contract-usage-ct303000/) window. For details, see: [Enter contract usage](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-usage-recording/enter-contract-usage/). 1. Invoice the contract according to its schedule. For more information, see: [About contract invoicing](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-invoicing/about-contract-invoicing/).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Retainer contracts /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-examples/retainer-contracts section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Retainer contracts About retainer contracts /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-examples/retainer-contracts/about-retainer-contracts page In some cases, a contract includes a retainer along with the services to be provided. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About retainer contracts In some cases, a contract includes a retainer along with the services to be provided. In some cases, a contract includes a retainer along with the services to be provided. The customer pays the retainer at contract setup. The customer is then charged for the actual usage of services according to its invoicing schedule, and the cost of provided services is deducted from the retainer. In Visma Net, a retainer is referred to as a **deposit contract item**. You configure a contract item marked as a deposit (by selecting the **Deposit** check box). This contract item represents a retainer that the customer should pay at contract setup. Then you assign this deposit contract item to contract items that represent services. That is, you specify a deposit contract item in the **Deposit item** field for each contract item whose cost of usage is to be deducted from the retainer. After required contract items are configured, you add them, except for the deposit contract item, to a contract template designed for retainer contracts. When you add a contract item to a contract template, the system checks whether it has a deposit contract item attached; if there is one, it checks whether it has been added already. If a contract item has a deposit item attached that is not yet present in the contract template, this deposit contract item is added automatically. You create a retainer contract based on the contract template configured for this purpose and activate it. When you provide services to a customer, the usage of the services is recorded in the contract. The customer is invoiced according to its invoicing schedule, and invoices are issued as a result of the invoicing process. Each provided service and the retainer are displayed as separate lines in the invoice. The customer is invoiced for each service usage according to the pricing policy defined in the **Recurring pricing** field of the respective contract item. When the retainer has been spent, the customer is invoiced for each service usage according to the pricing policy defined in the **Extra usage pricing** field of the respective contract item. If a customer wants to replenish a retainer, this can be done with the contract upgrade procedure. You can change the deposit contract item quantity if the contract template allows overriding of contract items. For details, see: [Make changes to contract services](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/make-changes-to-contract-services/). ## Retainer contract restrictions 1. The contract template must contain only one deposit contract item. The system does not allow a contract template to be saved if there are multiple deposit contract items. 1. The contract must be of either the **Expiring** type or the **Unlimited** type. The contract type is defined by the **Contract type** setting of the contract template that the contract is based on.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Configure a retainer contract /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-examples/retainer-contracts/configure-a-retainer-contract page To configure a retainer contract, perform the following steps: 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Configure a retainer contract To configure a retainer contract, perform the following steps: 1. By using the [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) window, configure a non-stock item. In the **Sales account** field on the **General ledger accounts** tab, we recommend that you specify a designated liability account to post related transactions instead of an income one. 1. In the [Contract items (CT201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/contract-items-ct201000/) window, create a deposit contract item. For details, see: [Create a deposit contract item](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-examples/retainer-contracts/create-a-deposit-contract-item/). 1. Also in the [Contract items (CT201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/contract-items-ct201000/) window, create a service contract item that is provided recurrently and assign the deposit contract item to it. 1. By using the [Contract templates (CT202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/contract-templates-ct202000/) window, create a contract template at your discretion. You do not add the deposit contract item to a contract template directly; you instead add the service contract item to the contract template, and the deposit contract item assigned to it is added automatically. For details, see: [Configure a contract template](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/prior-configuration/configure-a-contract-template/). 1. Initiate the contract in the way that suits your needs. The invoice that includes the prepayment sum is issued and you can proceed with contract fulfilment. For details, see: [About contract setup and activation](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-setup-and-activation/about-contract-setup-and-activation/). 1. Enter contract usage. For details, see: [About contract usage recording](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-usage-recording/about-contract-usage-recording/). 1. Invoice the contract according to its schedule. For details, see: [About contract invoicing](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-invoicing/about-contract-invoicing/).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Create a deposit contract item /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-examples/retainer-contracts/create-a-deposit-contract-item section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create a deposit contract item ## Before you proceed By using the [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) window, you must create a non-stock item to be used for the creation of deposit contract items. No special settings are required for this item; we recommend only that in the **Sales account** field on the **General ledger accounts** tab of the window, you specify a designated liability account to post deposit-related transactions to. For details on configuring non-stock items, see: [About non-stock item support](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stock-and-non-stock-items/about-non-stock-item-support/). 1. Go to the [Contract items (CT201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/contract-items-ct201000/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. Optional: In the **Contract item** field, specify the unique ID of the deposit contract item. IDs of contract items are formed in accordance with the **CONTRACTITEM** segmented key. If the **Contract item** field contains the `` place holder, it means that auto-numbering is enabled for a key segment and the system will assign the ID automatically. Otherwise, you should specify the ID manually. 1. In the **Description** field, type a brief description of the deposit contract item. 1. In the top part of the **Price options** tab, do the following: 1. In the **Maximum allowed quantity** and the **Minimum allowed quantity** fields, type the limits of the retainer quantity. 1. In the **Default quantity** field, type the quantity of retainers that is included in the contract by default. This value can be modified in a contract template or a contract, as long as it is within the allowed limits. 1. In the **Currency ID** field, select the currency of the contract item. Within each contract item, you should use non-stock items priced in the same currency. 1. In the **Setup and renewal** section, do the following: 1. In the **Setup item** field, select the non-stock item you have configured. 1. In the **Setup pricing** field, select the pricing policy. The following options are available: + **Use item price**: The base price of the non-stock item is used. If a price is configured for a customer price class and a customer that purchases this service belongs to this price class, then the price from the customer price class is used. + **Percent of item price**: The price is a percentage calculated by applying the percent specified in the **Item price/percentage** field to the base price of the non-stock item. + **Enter manually**: The price is specified manually and can not be changed later in a contract. 1. In the **Retain rate** field, specify the percent of the deposit amount at which the user viewing contract details will receive a system warning. 1. Select the **Deposit** check box to mark this contract item as the one to be used as the retainer. 1. Select the **Refundable** check box if you want to allow the retainer to be refunded if the contract is terminated. The retainer is refunded if both the contract template and the deposit contract item are marked as refundable. The balance of the retainer at the date of termination is refunded. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). Now you can proceed to creating a contract item that represents a service provided recurrently. When you create the service contract item in the [Contract items (CT201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/contract-items-ct201000/) window, you specify the deposit contract item you have configured in the **Deposit item** field on the **Price options** tab of this window.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Manage non-stock items /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-non-stock-items section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage non-stock items Manage non-stock items - overview /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-non-stock-items/manage-non-stock-items-overview page The sections below provide the description of how you can manage non-stock items if the Inventory module has been disabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage non-stock items - overview The sections below provide the description of how you can manage non-stock items if the Inventory module has been disabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window. For more information: [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/). The sections below provide the description of how you can manage non-stock items if theInventory module has been disabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. For details on managing non-stock items when the Inventory moduleis enabled, see: [About non-stock item support](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stock-and-non-stock-items/about-non-stock-item-support/). Non-stock items may be "products" that consist of no physical entity and thus cannot bestocked in warehouses (as with labour, services, or charges) or physical entities for which youdo not need to track quantities in a warehouse because very small quantities are required.Manystores sell items that cannot be found on their shelves (for instance, product warranties) orservices (such as product assembly, installation, and customisation). Since non-stock items do not require tracking of quantities, you can maintain only standardcosts and base price information for them. ## Types of non-stock items Visma Net supports the following types of non-stock items: Non-stock item : A general type of non-stock item generally bought for internal needs orfor using in sales but not for selling separately Labour : A non-stock item mostly used as a source of general ledger accounts for recordingsales of labour Service : A non-stock item to designate service fees Charge : A non-stock item that represents specific type of charges Expense : A non-stock item that represents specific type of expense ## Settings for non-stock items You can maintain information about non-stock items and their properties by using the [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) window available in the Customer ledger and Supplier ledger workspaces.The listbelow describes some of the settings that you can provide for a non-stock item by using thiswindow: + **Item ID**: Every non-stock item is assigned a unique identifier based on the **INVENTORY** segmented key. You can configure item IDs by specifying settings forthe **INVENTORY** segmented key in the [Segment keys (CS202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/segment-keys-cs202000/) window. For the key, you can define how many segments it is to have, what valuesmay be used, whether these values should be validated, and whether auto-numbering should beused in one of the segments. If required, you can change the ID for any non-stock itemmanually by using the [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) window. + **Units of measure**: For each non-stock item, you can select the unit of measure (UoM)used as base unit for the item and specify conversion rules for them and for other UoMs usedfor the item. You can select UoMs from the list of those available for the item class or typenew UoMs manually. Note that every conversion rule is specified with respect to the UoM chosenas the item's base unit. + **General ledger accounts and subaccounts**: The general ledger accounts and subaccountsused for non-stock items are limited to sales accounts, and expense accounts. Correspondingsubaccounts are used to detail records within each account. The default expense subaccountis generated according to the rule specified in the **Combine expense sub.** from field inthe [Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-ledger-preferences-ap101000/) window, and the default sales subaccount isspecified in the **Combine sales sub.** from field in the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. + **Valuation method**: Only the standard cost method applies to non-stock items. + **Price information**: For non-stock items of all types, you can specify price classesand assign prices that become effective on specific dates. + **Attributes**: You can track additional information for non-stock items by using theattributes functionality. ## Labour items Non-stock items of the **Labour** type are processed in the system differently fromnon-stock items of other types. They are used as a source of general ledger accounts fortransactions that the system generates as a result of contract and project invoicing. For labouritems, you can track costs, define prices, and maintain the price lists. For more information,see: [About labour items](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-non-stock-items/about-labour-items/). ## Non-stock item costs To make it possible to enter the non-stock item cost and use it in the non-stock item pricecalculation, Visma Net enables you to maintain standard costs for non-stock items. The standard costs are determined outside of the system by cost experts, and the values shouldinclude some of the indirect and direct costs allocated. You can specify the standard cost for anon-stock item as a pending cost by using the **Price/cost information** tab of the [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) window. Along with the pending cost, you can specify a date when the cost willbecome effective.Standard costs are defined with respect to the base unit of the stock item. If you want to update standard costs for non-stock items, use the **Price/cost**information tab of the window: Enter a pending cost and the date for the new cost and selectthe **Update cost** action.The system displays only the last cost and current cost. Thehistorical costs that were effective before the last cost are not stored in the database. ## Prices for non-stock items You can maintain default prices for non-stock items and specify them for the base units in thebase currency. You can enter default prices individually for each non-stock item by using the [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) window and update them at any time on a per-item basis. Default prices have noexpiration dates and cannot be specified as based on item quantity. For more information, see:[About default prices](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-costs/about-default-prices/). ## Topics + [About labour items](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-non-stock-items/about-labour-items/)

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

About labour items /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-non-stock-items/about-labour-items page Among other products, your company may sell the labour of its employees, which is an item that consists of no physical entity and thus cannot be stored in warehouses. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About labour items Among other products, your company may sell the labour of its employees, which is an item that consists of no physical entity and thus cannot be stored in warehouses. Among other products, your company may sell the labour of its employees, which is an item that consists of no physical entity and thus cannot be stored in warehouses. In Visma Net, you can define a certain type of labour available for sale (that is, a type performed regularly by your company) by a labour item. A labour item is a non-stock item that contains information about the default price and the sales account to be used for transactions. The system extracts data from labour items for each invoice that the system generates when a case or an activity has been invoiced. You need to create a new labour item each time you want to sell the same type of labour at a different price (for instance, you might charge more for labour performed by an expert than for labour performed by a junior employee) or with a different sales account (for example, if you invoice a case associated with a different contract). To ensure that the system will be able to obtain the required information from each labour item when an invoice is generated, you need to associate this labour item with the appropriate entity (that is, an employee, a case, a project, or a contract), which may depend on the type of the invoicing process that you use. The uses of labour items are described in the topics below. If no labour items are specified for the appropriate entities, the system will not generate the invoice. ## Case invoicing For cases whose case class uses the **Per activity** invoicing mode, the system uses the first available labour item specified in the following places in the system (listed in the order in which the system performs the search for available labour item values): 1. The **Employee overrides** tab of the [Customer contracts (CT301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-contracts-ct301000/) window for the contract specified for the case being invoiced: On this tab, a specific labour item can be specified for a particular employee (selected in the **Employee** column). Also, the table can include a row with **All employees** selected in the **Employee** column and a particular labour item that will be used for all other employees. Moreover, on this tab, a separate labour item can be specified for each earning type. 1. The **Employees** tab of the [Projects (PM301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/projects-pm301000/) window for the project associated with the activities related to the case being invoiced: On this tab, labour items can be specified for a particular employee: one specific labour item for each earning type. 1. The **Labour item overrides** tab of the [Employees (EP203000)](/visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/organisation-structure-windows/employees-ep203000/) window for the employee who is the owner of the activities related to the case being invoiced: On this tab, a specific labour item can be specified for each earning type. 1. The **General info** tab of the [Employees (EP203000)](/visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/organisation-structure-windows/employees-ep203000/) window for the employee who is the owner of the activities related to the case being invoiced: On this tab, a labour item can be specified that is to be used for the employee regardless of the earning type. For further information about the invoicing of contract-related cases, see [About usage-based contracts](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-examples/usage-based-contracts/about-usage-based-contracts/). ## Activity invoicing When activities are being invoiced, the system uses the first available labour item specified in the following places in the system (listed in the order in which the system performs the search for available labour item values): 1. The **Employees** tab of the [Projects (PM301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/projects-pm301000/) window for the project associated with the activity being invoiced: On this tab, you can specify labour items for a particular employee, one specific labour item for each earning type. 1. The **Labour item overrides** tab of the [Employees (EP203000)](/visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/organisation-structure-windows/employees-ep203000/) window for the employee who is the owner of the activity being invoiced: On this tab, a specific labour item can be specified for each earning type. 1. The **General info** tab of the [Employees (EP203000)](/visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/organisation-structure-windows/employees-ep203000/) window for the employee who is the owner of the activity being invoiced: On this tab, a labour item can be specified that is to be used for the employee regardless of the earning type.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

Manage mailings /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-mailings section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage mailings Manage mailings - overview /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-mailings/manage-mailings-overview page Efficient processing of electronic documents can help organisations reduce costs and optimise investments, so they can stay competitive in today's dynamically changing economy. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage mailings - overview Efficient processing of electronic documents can help organisations reduce costs and optimise investments, so they can stay competitive in today's dynamically changing economy. Efficient processing of electronic documents can help organisations reduce costs and optimise investments, so they can stay competitive in today's dynamically changing economy. In Visma Net, for each customer, you can specify how your organisation sends documents to the business: electronically or through postal mail (on paper). For businesses that want to receive electronic documents, you can easily set up the sending of documents by email, such as invoices and customer statements. You can configure the system to simultaneously send emails to employees who oversee operations with particular customers. You can send the customer any of the following types of correspondence: ## Report-based You can use customer ledger reports to send invoices, notes, statements, and dunning letters by using the **Send** action in a report window. For a Visma Net report, you can control the look and feel in addition to the reporting functions. You can use the default look and feel of the report or customise the report by using the **Report Designer**. You can provide settings specifying who will receive the report-based email and which format should be used, as well as possibly a specific template to be used as the email body (for email personalisation). ## Window-related You can send an email regarding a specific invoice by using the **Send email** action jn the window that displays the document. These emails will be listed under the **Activity** menu in the window title bar. ## Mailings For each customer, you can configure a number of mailings. The mailing body is based on a notification template that may contain placeholders and can be modified easily. You can assign a report that will generate a document to be sent as a mailing attachment. A customer's mailing settings are used for mass processing documents and for emailing a particular invoice. Template-based emails can be used, for example, to notify customer contacts about expiration of their credit cards. When the system generates such emails for multiple customers, it replaces placeholders with the particular customer's information, such as card type, partial card number, and expiration date. For details on mailings, see: [About mailings for customers](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-mailings/about-mailings-for-customers/). By default, the actual sending of the emails is not performed right away. Emails sent by all the mentioned ways are gathered in a queue in the [Pending emails (SM507000)](/visma-net-erp/help/email/email-windows/pending-emails-sm507000/) window, from which they can be sent. This topic will help you to configure and use mailings. It describes the mailing types, the workflow, and the most common tasks you will perform. ## Topics + [About mailings for customers](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-mailings/about-mailings-for-customers/) + [Set up mass processing of mailings](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-mailings/set-up-mass-processing-of-mailings/) + [Send invoices by email](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-mailings/send-invoices-by-email/)

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

About mailings for customers /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-mailings/about-mailings-for-customers page For each customer, you can configure a number of mailings. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About mailings for customers For each customer, you can configure a number of mailings. The mailing body is based on a notification template that may contain placeholders and can be modified easily. You can assign a report that will generate a document to be sent as a mailing attachment. A customer's mailing settings are used for mass processing documents and for emailing a particular invoice. Template-based emails can be used, for example, to notify customer contacts about expiration of their credit cards. When the system generates such emails for multiple customers, it replaces placeholders with the particular customer's information, such as card type, partial card number, and expiration date. In this topic you will read about ways to correspond with a customer, predefined mailings offered by Visma Net, their components and workflow. ## Mailing components A mailing is made up of the following: + **Identifier**: The mailing identifier or **Mailing ID** is used to configure a mailing workflow that uses automation steps. Visma Net provides a default mailing workflow for predefined mailings. + **Body**: A notification template can be assigned to any mailing to serve as the email body. The body consists of text that can be personalised while the email is generated with the help of placeholders used in the template. These placeholders are replaced with information from the customer record. You can modify a notification template to comply with your company policies. + **Attachment**: For a mailing, you can select a report that will generate a document to be sent as an attachment. A report holds data from the system constructed in the required format. Visma Net provides default reports to generate invoices, notes, statements, and dunning letters. A report may also provide text for the mailing body. You can select the attachment format from the list of supported formats. + You need to specify either a notification template or a report for a mailing. If a notification template is not specified, the text for the email body is taken from the report settings. + You can attach multiple reports in the same format or different formats to one mailing. + If the email body contains no specific text and the HTML format is selected in the email settings of the report, the report is inserted in the email body in the HTML format instead of being attached to the email. ## Mailing workflow The mailing workflow consists of the following steps: 1. **Mailing configuration**: You can set up mailings for a group of customers by using [Customer classes (AR201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-classes-ar201000/) window or for a specific customer, by using the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window. You can configure the list of mailings and recipients, as well as notification template and attachment settings. Customer class provides the default settings for the included customers, but these default settings can be overridden to make the mailing configuration more specific. Mailings modified for specific customer (in the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window) are marked as overridden (the **Overriden** check box is selected). If you change mailings configuration in a customer class, these changes affect mailings of all customers of this class, except those that were modified specifically for a customer (overridden). 1. **Mailing mass processing configuration**: You can control whether invoices and statements are available for mass emailing. For details, see [Set up mass processing of mailings](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-mailings/set-up-mass-processing-of-mailings/). 1. **Document preparation and preview**: Generally, you prepare the email and the attached document, if any, and then preview them in the [Pending emails (SM507000)](/visma-net-erp/help/email/email-windows/pending-emails-sm507000/) window. If mass-emailing is being done, the preparation of statements may be a time-consuming process; thus, mass preparation and preview of statements are separated. 1. **Email sending**: By default, the system doesn't perform the actual sending of the emails right away. Prepared emails are gathered in the queue shown on the [Pending emails (SM507000)](/visma-net-erp/help/email/email-windows/pending-emails-sm507000/) window; use this window when you're ready to actually send them. > [!NOTE] > This is the default email workflow; consult your system administrator to find out whether it has been modified. ## Predefined mailings for customers You can view the list of predefined mailings and add new ones by using the **Mailing settings** tab of the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. Here you can configure the basic settings of each mailing, these settings will be used by default when you add a mailing to a customer class or a customer. See table 1 below. When you create a new customer class all mailings (predefined and manually created) are added to new customer class by default. Also, if the Inventory workspace is activated, the mailings listed in the [Sales order preferences (SO101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-order-preferences-so101000/) window are added to new customer class. You can modify this list, leaving those that you need for customers of this class. See table 2 below. |Mailing|Purpose|Usage| |---|---|---| |INVOICE|To send customer invoices|To generate emails about multiple invoices, use the [Send invoices (AR508000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/send-invoices-ar508000/) window. To send a particular invoice, use the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window.| |STATEMENT|To inform customers about their balances with your organisation|To generate emails for multiple statements or a single statement, use the [Print statements (AR503500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/print-statements-ar503500/) window.| |STATEMENTMC|To inform customers about their balances (in multi-currency format) with your organisation|To generate emails for multiple statements or a single statement in multi-currency format, use the [Print statements (AR503500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/print-statements-ar503500/) window.| |DUNNINGLETTER|To inform customers and your employees (users) about past due balances of customers|To generate emails with dunning letters, use the [Print/release dunning letters (AR522000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/print-release-dunning-letters-ar522000/) window.| |Mailing|Purpose|Usage| |---|---|---| |QUOTE|To inform customers about their quotes|To generate the emails for multiple quotes, use the [Print/email orders (SO502000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/print-email-orders-so502000/) window. To generate an email for a particular quote, use the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window.| |PICK LIST|To define different reports for printing pick lists for different customer classes|To print multiple pick lists, use the [Process shipments (SO503000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/process-shipments-so503000/) window. To print a pick list for a particular order, use the [Shipments (SO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/shipments-so302000/) window.| |SALES ORDER|To inform customers about open sales orders|To generate the emails for multiple orders, use the [Print/email orders (SO502000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/print-email-orders-so502000/) window. To generate an email for a specific order, use the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window.| |SHIPMENT|To inform customers when their orders ship|To email one or more shipment confirmations, use the [Process shipments (SO503000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/process-shipments-so503000/) window.| |SO INVOICE|To inform customers that their invoices are ready for release|To generate the emails for multiple sales invoices, use the [Process sales invoices (SO505000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/process-sales-invoices-so505000/) window. To generate an email for a particular invoice, use the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window.|

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Send invoices by email /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-mailings/send-invoices-by-email page You can email invoices and notes by using one of the following windows: 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Send invoices by email You can email invoices and notes by using one of the following windows: + To email multiple invoices and other customer ledger documents at a time, use the [Send invoices (AR508000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/send-invoices-ar508000/) window. + To email one invoice or note, use the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window. Open the invoice in the window; in the **Actions** menu of the window toolbar, select the **Email invoice** action. ## Before you proceed Before you can email invoices and memos to customers, the respective mailing has to be configured in the system. You can use the [Set up a dunning letter mailing](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-dunning-letters/set-up-a-dunning-letter-mailing/) as an example of configuring a mailing. 1. Go to the [Send invoices (AR508000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/send-invoices-ar508000/) window. 1. In the **Action** field of the top part, select **Email invoice**. 1. Optional: For invoices associated with contract servicing, select the user or the work group (in the **Assigned to** or **Work group** field) to whom the documents are assigned. You can use filtering to display a narrower range of documents when you get into this window. 1. Do one of the following: + To send all listed invoices, click **Process all**. + To send the selected invoices, select the unlabeled check boxes for the documents you intend to email, and click **Process**. If the emails containing documents were generated successfully, the system marks them with green check marks. The system lists prepared emails in a queue in the [Pending emails (SM507000)](/visma-net-erp/help/email/email-windows/pending-emails-sm507000/) window, which you can use to review and actually send the emails. + What is next? [Check sent email status](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/check-sent-email-status/) If you regret sending an email due to an incorrect attachment or receiver of the email, you can still delete or do your changes in the email in the Pending emails window. See: [Change the recipient address for a pending email](/visma-net-erp/help/email/manage-emails/change-the-recipient-address-for-a-pending-email/).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Add other attachments to invoice sent by email /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-mailings/add-other-attachments-to-invoice-sent-by-email section To add other attachments to an invoice you send by email, you have to send the email from the Reports workspace. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Add other attachments to invoice sent by email To add other attachments to an invoice you send by email, you have to send the email from the Reports workspace. ## To email an invoice with additional attachment(s) 1. Go to the [Invoice - English (AR64101S)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/invoice-english-ar64101s/) window (or invoice layout in any language). 1. Click the **Document type** drop-down list and select **Invoice**. 1. In the **Reference number** field, enter or select the invoice number. 1. Click **Run report**. A PDF file with your invoice is displayed. 1. Click **Send**. The **Email activity** window opens. 1. In the top right corner of the window, click **Files**. A message tells you to save before you can go on, click **OK**. The **Files** dialogue box opens. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) to add other attachments to your email. The **Upload file** dialogue box is displayed. 1. Select your files and click **Upload**. 1. Close the **Files** dialogue box. In the top right corner of the **Email activity** window, you will see that the number of attachments has been updated. 1. Fill in the email address of the recipient, the subject (mandatory) and any message text that you want to include. 1. Click **Send**. Email several invoices or credit notes /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-mailings/email-several-invoices-or-credit-notes page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Email several invoices or credit notes ## Before you start Before you can see any documents in this window, they must have been released and activated for this distribution type. See: [Set customer print and email preferences](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/set-customer-print-and-email-preferences/) You can email selected documents, or mark them not to be emailed. 1. Go to the [Send invoices (AR508000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/send-invoices-ar508000/) window. 1. In the **Action** drop-down list, select **Email invoice/note**. A list is displayed, with all the documents that are available with the selected filter. 1. Select the documents you want to email. 1. Click the **Process** button to email only the selected documents, or click **Process all** to email them all. You can release and emailprint a single document from the[Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window. See: [Create and release an invoice](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/create-and-release-an-invoice/). ## What is next? [Check sent email status](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/check-sent-email-status/) If you regret sending an email due to an incorrect attachment or receiver of the email, you can still delete or do your changes in the email in the Pending emails window. See: [Change the recipient address for a pending email](/visma-net-erp/help/email/manage-emails/change-the-recipient-address-for-a-pending-email/).

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

Send several invoices or credit notes to AutoInvoice /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-mailings/send-several-invoices-or-credit-notes-to-autoinvoice section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Send several invoices or credit notes to AutoInvoice ## Before you start As of 1 July 2022, new branches need to verify their company in the [AutoInvoice settings (CS10250S)](/visma-net-erp/help/management/management-windows/autoinvoice-settings-cs10250s/) window to be able to use AutoInvoice. See also: [About Know your customer (KYC)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/about-know-your-customer-kyc/). To see invoices in the [Send invoices (AR508000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/send-invoices-ar508000/) window, they must have the status **Released** and you must check that you have activated AutoInvoice for the customer. See [Prepare to use AutoInvoice for an existing customer](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/prepare-to-use-autoinvoice-for-an-existing-customer/). 1. Go to the [Send invoices (AR508000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/send-invoices-ar508000/) window. 1. In the **Action** drop-down list, select **Send to AutoInvoice**. A list opens, which contains all the invoices that are available with the selected filter. 1. Select the invoices and credit notes in the table that you want to send to AutoInvoice. 1. Click the **Process** button to send only the selected invoices and credit notes to AutoInvoice, or click **Process all** to send them all to AutoInvoice.. ![icon-confirmation](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-confirmation.png) is displayed ## What is next? [Check sent email status for AutoInvoice](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/check-sent-email-status-for-autoinvoice/). If you regret sending an email due to an incorrect attachment or email recipient, you can: [Change the recipient address for a pending email](/visma-net-erp/help/email/manage-emails/change-the-recipient-address-for-a-pending-email/).

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

Print and send invoices or credit notes by regular mail /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-mailings/print-and-send-invoices-or-credit-notes-by-regular-mail page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Print and send invoices or credit notes by regular mail ## Before you start Before you can see any documents in this window, they must have been released and activated for this distribution type. See: [Set customer print and email preferences](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/set-customer-print-and-email-preferences/) 1. Go to the [Send invoices (AR508000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/send-invoices-ar508000/) window. 1. In the **Action** drop-down list, select **Print invoice/note**. A list opens, which contains all the invoices that are available with the selected filter. 1. Select the invoices/credit notes you want to print/send in the table. 1. Click the **Process** button to print/send only the selected invoices/credit notes, or click **Process all** to print/send all invoices/credit notes at once. 1. In the preview of the invoices, give the invoices a final quality check. 1. Click **Print**. You can also release and print an invoice from within the same window. See: [Create and release an invoice](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/create-and-release-an-invoice/)

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

Print several invoices or credit notes /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-mailings/print-several-invoices-or-credit-notes page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Print several invoices or credit notes ## Before you start Before you can see any documents in this window, they must have been released and activated for this distribution type. See: [Set customer print and email preferences](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/set-customer-print-and-email-preferences/) 1. Go to the [Send invoices (AR508000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/send-invoices-ar508000/) window. 1. In the **Action** drop-down list, select **Print invoice/note**. A list opens, which contains all the invoices that are available with the selected filter. 1. In the table, select the documents you want to print. 1. Click the **Process** button to print only the selected documents, or click **Process all** to print all the documents displayed in the table. 1. In the preview window, do a final quality check of each document. 1. Click **Print**. You can release and emailprint a single document from the[Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window. See: [Create and release an invoice](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/create-and-release-an-invoice/).

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

Set up mass processing of mailings /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-mailings/set-up-mass-processing-of-mailings section You can specify how the customer prefers to receive invoices and statements: printed and sent through postal mail, or sent electronically by email. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Set up mass processing of mailings You can specify how the customer prefers to receive invoices and statements: printed and sent through postal mail, or sent electronically by email. You can specify how the customer prefers to receive invoices and statements: printed and sent through postal mail, or sent electronically by email. Customer media type preferences also affect documents' availability for mass processing. By using the [Customer classes (AR201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-classes-ar201000/) window, you can specify these preferences on the customer class level, which provides default settings for customers of the class, as the following steps describe. (You can override these default settings for each customer individually.) If a document has already been printed or emailed, it is not listed on the mass processing forms. The system checks the values of the **Printed** and **Emailed** attributes for a document when it builds the list for mass processing, and the document is considered printed or emailed if the corresponding check box is selected. You can view the current values of these attributes on the **Invoicing address** tab of an invoice, in the **Print and email options** area. Attributes are affected only by respective actions performed in the [Send invoices (AR508000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/send-invoices-ar508000/) window. 1. Go to the [Customer classes (AR201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-classes-ar201000/) window. 1. In the **Class ID** field, select the customer class that you want to configure preferences for. 1. On the **General settings** tab, in the **Default print and email settings** area, do the following: 1. Select the **Print invoices** check box if you want to make invoices available for printing in the [Send invoices (AR508000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/send-invoices-ar508000/) 1. Select the **Send invoices by email** check box if you want to make invoices available for emailing in the [Send invoices (AR508000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/send-invoices-ar508000/) window. 1. Select the **Print statements** check box if you want to make statements available for printing in the [Print statements (AR503500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/print-statements-ar503500/) window. 1. Select the **Send statements by email** check box if you want to make statements available for emailing in the [Print statements (AR503500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/print-statements-ar503500/) window. 1. Select the **Multi-currency statements** check box if you want to make statements in multi-currency format available for printing and emailing in the [Print statements (AR503500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/print-statements-ar503500/) window. 1. In the window toolbar, click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Manage dunning letters /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-dunning-letters section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage dunning letters Manage dunning letters - overview /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-dunning-letters/manage-dunning-letters-overview page Dunning letters are letters of payment collection used to inform your customers of past-due invoices, debit notes, and overdue charges. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage dunning letters - overview Dunning letters are letters of payment collection used to inform your customers of past-due invoices, debit notes, and overdue charges. The form and content of dunning letters generally vary depending on the country in which you run your business. Usually, multiple letters are sent in a sequence. You can create the text of successive dunning letters, varying in tone and content from a polite first letter informing the customer about unpaid invoices to a last letter mentioning all allowable collection options. We recommend that these letters be sent at carefully selected intervals so that a customer with intent to pay has enough time between letters to settle all invoices before the arrival of the next letter. The functionality is available if the **Dunning letter management** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. The following topics describe how to set up and manage the dunning process. ## Topics + [About dunning process setup](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-dunning-letters/about-dunning-process-setup/) + [About dunning process by customer](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-dunning-letters/about-dunning-process-by-customer/) + [About dunning process by document](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-dunning-letters/about-dunning-process-by-document/) + [Set up the dunning process](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-dunning-letters/set-up-the-dunning-process/) + [Set up a dunning letter mailing](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-dunning-letters/set-up-a-dunning-letter-mailing/)

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

About dunning process setup /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-dunning-letters/about-dunning-process-setup page Visma Net provides you with capabilities that ease the process of producing dunning letters. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About dunning process setup Visma Net provides you with capabilities that ease the process of producing dunning letters. Visma Net provides you with capabilities that ease the process of producing dunning letters. For all customers, the dunning process checks customers' due documents and gives you the ability to prepare and send reminder letters of different levels of severity. To start producing dunning letters, you define the process settings that suit your company (one-time setup) and then you run the process when needed. As a result of executing the process, you have prepared dunning letters that can be emailed to customers or printed to be sent by postal mail. In this topic, you will read about the dunning process options offered by Visma Net and the general steps of setting up the process. ## Dunning process options In Visma Net, you can select how the system prepares dunning letters: by grouping overdue documents by customer account (the **By customer** option) or by grouping overdue documents by customer and by the dunning level of a document ( **By document** ). You select the appropriate option in the **Dunning process** field on the **Dunning settings** tab of the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. By default, the **By customer** option is set. If you want more manual control over the process, you can select the **By document** option. The dunning process workflow and the rules of generating dunning letters depend on the selected option. We recommend that you make the **Dunning process** selection when you begin implementing the process and keep that setting. You can switch from **By customer** to **By document**, but switching from **By document** to **By customer**is not recommended. You can use the following windows to view the history of dunning letters that have been produced: + [Dunning letter history by customer (AR408000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/dunning-letter-history-by-customer-ar408000/): Shows the history of dunning letters that have been produced for the selected customer account + [Dunning letter history by document (AR408500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/dunning-letter-history-by-document-ar408500/): Displays the history of dunning letters that have been produced for documents of the selected customer account ## Dunning level of a document In Visma Net, a dunning level is associated with a particular document (invoice or note). The system assigns a dunning level to a document that is equal to the level of the last dunning letter that included this document. If the document has not been included in a dunning letter yet, the system sets 0 dunning level for the document. You can view the current dunning level of a document in the **Dunning information** section on the **Financial details** tab of the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window. Also, in this section, you can view the date of the last released dunning letter that included this document. ## Exclusion from the dunning process You can exclude a customer account from the dunning process, regardless of the dunning process option selected. To do this for a customer, you should clear both the **Send dunning letters by email** and **Print dunning letters** check boxes in the **Print and email settings** section on the **Invoicing settings** tab of the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window. If you prepare dunning letters by document (that is, if the **By document** option is selected in the **Dunning process** field), you can exclude a particular document from the dunning process by selecting the **Revoked** check box that appears in the **Dunning Info** section of a document (the Sales invoices window). For instance, suppose that the dunning level of a particular document is 1, and it is time to prepare dunning letters; however, the customer has notified you that the invoice is settled, but due to bank holidays, the payment is late. By selecting the **Revoked** check box for the document, you can exclude this invoice from the dunning process to avoid negatively affecting your company's relations with this customer. > [!NOTE] > If you prepare dunning letters by customer, a particular document cannot be excluded from the dunning process. ## Dunning fee collection You may want to charge your customers for the expenses your company incurs while sending dunning letters. On the **Dunning settings** tab of the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window, you can specify the amount of the dunning fee for each level. You specify dedicated non-stock item that provides a sales account and a subaccount (if applicable) to register the collected fee, and a tax category. > [!NOTE] > Make sure that a correct account and a subaccount (if applicable) are specified for the non-stock item in the **Sales account** and **Sales sub.** fields on the **General ledger accounts** tab of the [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) window. When a dunning letter of a particular level is released, the system generates an invoice for customer with the fee amount specified for the level. This invoice is created with the **Balanced** status. You can adjust the fee amount, if needed, and then release the invoice in the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window. > [!NOTE] > If the dunning fee amount is set to zero, no invoice is generated. If you will not need to adjust any dunning fee invoices, you can configure the automatic release of the dunning fee invoices when a corresponding dunning letters are released. To do this, select the **Automatically release dunning fee documents** check box on the **Dunning settings** tab of the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. > [!NOTE] > The amount of the dunning fee is converted to the customer's currency if the **Enable currency override** check box is cleared in the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window. ## Appearance and content of dunning letters In Visma Net the [Dunning letter (AR661000) report](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/dunning-letter-ar661000/) is used to generate a printed version of a dunning letter. You can control the look and feel of this report in addition to the reporting functions. You can use the default look and feel of the report, or customise the report by using the Report Designer. You can provide settings specifying who will receive the report-based email and which format should be used, as well as possibly a specific template to be used as the email body (for email personalisation). By using the report window, you can print a dunning letter by using the **Print** action on the report toolbar or email it by using the **Send** action. By default, the system generates an email based on the **DunningLetterNotification** notification template, which you can edit by using the [Notification templates (SM204003)](/visma-net-erp/help/email/email-windows/notification-templates-sm204003/) window. If you want to print or email multiple letters at once, you can use the [Print/release dunning letters (AR522000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/print-release-dunning-letters-ar522000/) mass-processing window. The mass-emailing process requires the mailing with the **DUNNINGLETTER** identifier to be configured for the customer accounts that you plan to notify. ## Dunning process configuration You need to perform the following steps to set up the dunning process: 1. **Dunning process setup**: You can configure the process of generating and sending dunning letters on the **Dunning settings** tab of the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. You can specify the settings for the levels, the dunning fee details, and the sending criteria for each letter in the sequence. Also, you can define the number of days you offer a customer to settle the due document. 1. **Report modification**: If the default design of the [Dunning letter (AR661000) report](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/dunning-letter-ar661000/) window report does not suit you, you can modify it by using the Report Designer. 1. **Mailing configuration**: If you plan to send dunning letter by email, you need to configure the **DUNNINGLETTER** mailing for a customer class or a customer. If you want to send an email attachment with the details of due documents, select the [Dunning letter (AR661000) report](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/dunning-letter-ar661000/) to generate it. When you have finished setting up the process, you may proceed to preparing and sending dunning letters.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

About dunning process by customer /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-dunning-letters/about-dunning-process-by-customer page You select the By customer option in the Dunning process field on the Dunning settings tab of the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window to define that the system groups overdue documents by customer account when it prepares dunning letters. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About dunning process by customer You select the By customer option in the Dunning process field on the Dunning settings tab of the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window to define that the system groups overdue documents by customer account when it prepares dunning letters. For more information: [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/). In general, you prepare dunning letters as follows: 1. You select the customer accounts for which you want to prepare dunning letters and initiate the preparation. > [!NOTE] > Before you start preparing dunning letters, make sure that customers do not have open payments, prepayments and credit notes that can be applied against outstanding documents. 1. You print or send by email the prepared dunning letters. In this topic, you will read about the letter generation rules, the dunning process workflow, and the way the system changes the status of the dunning letter. ## Dunning letter generation rules When you group overdue documents by customer account, the generation of the letters is based on the following rules: + The letter of the **first** level is generated for a customer account if the customer has at least one invoice or note whose number of days past the due date exceeds the number of days specified for the first level in the **Days past due** field on the **Dunning settings** tab. The document is marked with the first dunning level when you initiate letter preparation. + The letter of the **second** level is generated if the customer has at least one document with the first level that is still unpaid and the number of days this document is past due exceeds the number specified for the second level in the **Days past due** field. If there are other overdue documents (with 0 level), the system includes in the letter these documents as well, and increases their dunning level to 1. The system increases the dunning level to 2 for the document whose number of days past due exceeds the number specified for the second level. + The letters of the **next** levels in the sequence are generated similarly to the letters of the second level. + The letter of the **last** level for the customer is generated if at least one document listed in the previous letter is unpaid and the number of days this document is past due exceeds the number of days specified for this level. When this letter is prepared, the system selects the **Final reminder** check box for this letter in the [Print/release dunning letters (AR522000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/print-release-dunning-letters-ar522000/) window. In this case, after letter generation, the customer account is excluded from the dunning process and can be selected on the [Manage credit holds (AR523000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/manage-credit-holds-ar523000/) window, so you can put this account on the credit hold. > [!NOTE] > If for some reason the process of dunning letters preparation was delayed for a period of time, the system will shift the dates of dunning letters generation for the period of the delay. In your company's dunning letters, you can notify customers receiving the letters about all open documents, unpaid (the due date is still in the future) and overdue (the due date has passed). To do this, you select the **Include other unpaid documents** check box on the **Dunning settings** tab of the Customer ledger preferences window. In the printed version of these letters, the unpaid due documents will be listed at the end, and the **Falling due** column contains the word **Current** instead of the due date. > [!NOTE] > The system generates the printed version of a dunning letter with the help of the [Dunning letter (AR661000) report](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/dunning-letter-ar661000/) report. You can use the default look and feel of the report or customise the report by using the Report designer. ## Dunning letter statuses During the processing of a dunning letter, the system changes the status of the letter as follows: Released : This status indicates that the dunning letter has been prepared and released and can be printed, sent by email, or voided. If a non-zero dunning fee was specified for the level of this letter (on the **Dunning settings** tab of the Customer ledger preferences window), the system also creates the invoice for the dunning fee during the release of the dunning letter. If the **Automatically release dunning fee documents** check box (on the **Dunning settings** tab of the Customer ledger preferences window) is selected, the system automatically releases the invoice when the corresponding dunning letter is released. Voided : This status indicates that the dunning letter has been voided, the system decreases the dunning level for each document that was included to this letter, and will process these documents when you prepare a dunning letter for this customer account again. ## Letter preparation You use the [Prepare dunning letters (AR521000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/prepare-dunning-letters-ar521000/) window to prepare dunning letters. The table lists the customer accounts that have at least one overdue document. You can generate dunning letters for all listed customers or only those you select. After you have selected the customer accounts that you want to process (by selecting the check boxes in their rows), you click **Process** (on the window toolbar) to prepare dunning letters. You can instead prepare dunning letters for all records in the table by clicking **Process all**. If the letters have been generated successfully, the system displays a green check mark on the window toolbar. The letters are prepared with the **Released** status and are ready for printing or emailing. > [!NOTE] > You can schedule the preparation of dunning letters to be performed automatically by using the automation schedule functionality. When a dunning letter is prepared, the system updates the information in the **Dunning letter info** section on the **Financial details** tab of the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window. For each document involved, the system updates the date of the last released dunning letter that included the document, and increases the document dunning level by one. ## Letter previewing and sending You use the [Print/release dunning letters (AR522000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/print-release-dunning-letters-ar522000/) window to print released dunning letters or initiate the emailing of them. In this window, you can print dunning letters to be sent through postal mail, or generate emails that you can preview before sending them in the [Pending emails (SM507000)](/visma-net-erp/help/email/email-windows/pending-emails-sm507000/) window. > [!NOTE] > This is the default workflow of sending emails; consult your system administrator to find out whether it has been modified. Letters from all branches can be sent separately or can be consolidated (on generation) into a single letter to the customer. This is controlled by the **Consolidate dunning letters for all branches** check box on the **General settings** tab of the Customer ledger preferences window. In the **Dunning letter from branch** field on this tab, you should also select the branch that will be specified as the sender.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

About dunning process by document /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-dunning-letters/about-dunning-process-by-document page You select the By document option in the Dunning process field on the Dunning settings tab of the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window to set that the system groups overdue documents by customer account and by document dunning level when it prepares dunning letters. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About dunning process by document You select the By document option in the Dunning process field on the Dunning settings tab of the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window to set that the system groups overdue documents by customer account and by document dunning level when it prepares dunning letters. For more information: [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/). You can prepare a separate dunning letter for each document, or you can group the documents of a customer account with different levels into one letter. If you group documents into one letter, in the printed version, the documents are grouped by level. In general, you prepare dunning letters as follows: 1. You select the documents for which you want to prepare dunning letters and initiate the preparation. > [!NOTE] > Before you start preparing dunning letters, make sure that customers do not have open payments, prepayments and credit notes that can be applied against outstanding documents. 1. Optional: You edit the lists of included documents (if needed) and release the prepared dunning letters. 1. You can skip this step if you have enabled the automatic release of letters. 1. You print or send by email the reviewed and released dunning letters. You can use the following windows to view the history of dunning letters that have been produced: + [Dunning letter history by customer (AR408000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/dunning-letter-history-by-customer-ar408000/): Displays the history of dunning letters that have been produced for the selected customer account + [Dunning letter history by document (AR408500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/dunning-letter-history-by-document-ar408500/): Shows the history of dunning letters that have been produced for documents of the selected customer account In this topic, you will read about the letter generation rules, the dunning process workflow, and the way the system changes the status of the dunning letter. ## Dunning letter generation rules When you group overdue documents by customer account and document dunning level, the generation of the letters is based on the following rules: + The letter of the **first** level is generated for a document for which the number of days past due exceeds the number of days specified for this level in the **Days past due** field on the **Dunning settings** tab. The document is marked with the first dunning level. + The letter of the **second** level is generated when the document (whose level is 1) is still unpaid and the number of days the document is past due exceeds the number of days specified for this level in the **Days past due**. The system increases the dunning level of the document. (If you have only two levels defined, see the description for the letter for the last level.) + The letters of the **next** levels in the series are generated similarly to the letters of the second level. + The letter of the **last** level for the document is generated if the document is still unpaid and the number of days the document is past due exceeds the number of days specified for this level. When this letter is prepared, the system selects the **Final reminder** check box for this letter in the [Print/release dunning letters (AR522000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/print-release-dunning-letters-ar522000/) window. In this case, the customer account can be selected on the [Manage credit holds (AR523000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/manage-credit-holds-ar523000/) window, so you can put this account on credit hold. The rest of the overdue documents of this customer account are still included in the dunning process. > [!NOTE] > If for some reason the process of dunning letters preparation was delayed for a period of time, the system will shift the dates of dunning letters generation for the period of the delay. If you want to notify customers receiving dunning letters about all open documents, unpaid (the due date is still in the future), due (the due date has passed), and overdue (the number of days past due has exceeded the number of days past due specified for the level), you select the **Include other unpaid documents** check box on the **Dunning settings** tab of the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. (Unpaid and due documents are marked with a level of zero.) With this check box selected, the system includes open documents as follows: If you prepare a dunning letter for a document associated with the first level, the system includes overdue, unpaid, and due documents. When you prepare the next dunning letter for this document, the system includes overdue and unpaid documents, but no due ones. ## Dunning letter statuses During the processing of a dunning letter, the system changes its status as follows: Draft : This status indicates that the dunning letter has been prepared and can be released. You can edit the list of customer documents included in the letter. If the **Automatically release dunning letters** check box is selected on the **Dunning settings** tab of the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window, the system skips the **Draft** status. Released : This status indicates that the dunning letter has been released and can be printed, sent by email, or voided. If a non-zero dunning fee was specified for the level of this letter (on the **Dunning settings** tab of the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window), the invoice for the dunning fee was also created during the release of the dunning letter. If the **Automatically release dunning fee documents** check box (on the **Dunning settings** tab of the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window) is selected, the system automatically releases the invoice when the corresponding dunning letter is released. Voided : This status indicates that the dunning letter has been voided, the system decreased the dunning level for each document that was included to this letter and these documents are available for preparing a new letter with the **Draft** status. ## Letter preparation You use the [Prepare dunning letters (AR521000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/prepare-dunning-letters-ar521000/) window to prepare dunning letters. The table lists the overdue documents grouped by customer and by document dunning level. For instance, if a customer account has two overdue documents with different levels, the system will display two rows in the table. If a customer account has two documents with the same level, the system will group the documents into one row. The way by which you select and process documents affects the contents of the letter prepared. If you want to prepare separate dunning letters for documents of the same customer account but each with a different dunning level, you should select a one document and click **Process** (in the window toolbar) and then select the next one and process it. If you want the system to group into one letter documents of the same customer but with different dunning levels, you should select all such documents and click **Process**. After you have selected the documents that you want to process (by selecting the check boxes in their rows), you click **Process** to prepare these dunning letters. You can instead prepare dunning letters for all records in the table by clicking **Process all**. If the letters have been generated successfully, the system displays a green check mark in the window toolbar. If the **Automatically release dunning letters** check box is cleared in the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window, the letters are prepared with the **Draft** status and you need to release them; if the check box is selected, the letters are prepared with the **Released** status and are ready for printing or emailing. > [!NOTE] > You can schedule the preparation of dunning letters to be performed automatically by using the automation schedule functionality. ## Letter editing and releasing If the **Automatically Release Dunning Letters** check box is cleared in the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window, each generated letter has the **Draft** status, and you can adjust the list of documents included for each letter or delete the draft of the letter itself. The [Print/release dunning letters (AR522000](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/print-release-dunning-letters-ar522000/) window displays the list of prepared dunning letters. You can highlight the row in the table with the letter you want to edit and click **View dunning letter**in the table toolbar. The system navigates you to the [Dunning letters (AR306000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/dunning-letters-ar306000/) window, where you can view and adjust the list of documents. If you have deleted either the documents from the list or the letter itself (with all the documents it included), the system will process these documents the next time you prepare dunning letters. On this window, you can exclude a particular document from the dunning process by selecting the document in the table and clicking **Revoke** in the table toolbar. The system removes the document from the list and marks it as excluded from the dunning process by selecting the **Revoked** check box in the **Dunning letter info** section on the **Financial details** tab of the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window for each document involved. (You can select or clear this check box in the Sales invoices window as well.) The deletion or exclusion of documents from the list may influence the level of the dunning letter that is displayed on the **Dunning letter level** in the top part of the window. The system uses the value of this field to define the dunning fee amount for which an invoice should be generated. If there are documents with different dunning levels included in the letter, the system sets the highest document level (that is, the level with the largest value) as the dunning level of the letter. If you delete documents with the highest level, the system decreases the level of the letter. By using the [Dunning letters (AR306000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/dunning-letters-ar306000/) window, you can also release the letter and then print or email it (or void it, if needed). In the [Print/release dunning letters (AR522000](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/print-release-dunning-letters-ar522000/) window, you can release groups of dunning letters by selecting the **Release dunning letter** action and processing the selected documents or all listed documents. When a dunning letter is released manually or automatically, the system updates the information in the **Dunning letter info** section on the **Financial details** tab of the Sales invoices window. For each document involved, the system updates the date of the last released dunning letter that included the document, and increases the document dunning level by one. ## Letter previewing and sending You use the [Print/release dunning letters (AR522000](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/print-release-dunning-letters-ar522000/) window to print released dunning letters or initiate the emailing of them. In this window, you can print dunning letters to be sent through postal mail, or generate emails that you can preview before sending them in the [Pending emails (SM507000)](/visma-net-erp/help/email/email-windows/pending-emails-sm507000/) window. > [!NOTE] > This is the default workflow of sending emails; consult your system administrator to find out whether it has been modified. Letters from all branches can be sent separately or can be consolidated (on generation) into a single letter to the customer. This is controlled by the **Consolidate dunning letters for all branches** check box on the **General settings** tab of the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. In the **Dunning letter from branch** field on this tab, you should also select the branch that will be specified as the sender.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Set up the dunning process /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-dunning-letters/set-up-the-dunning-process section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Set up the dunning process ## Before you proceed If you plan to charge a dunning fee, you need to create a non-stock item (or use existing one) that will provide an account and a subaccount (if applicable) to register the collected fee, and a VAT category. 1. Go to the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. 1. In the **Dunning process** field on the **Dunning settings** tab, select how the system prepares dunning letters. The following options are available: + **By customer**: Select this option if you want the system to prepare dunning letters by grouping overdue documents by customer account. When you select this option, the system selects the **Automatically release dunning letters** check box and sets it as read-only. + **By document**: Select this option if you want the system to prepare dunning letters by grouping overdue documents by customer and by document dunning level. 1. Optional: Select the **Automatically release dunning letters** check box if you want the system to automatically release dunning letters after preparation is completed. In this case, you will not be able to edit the list of overdue documents or delete the letter draft. The field is available for editing if the **By document** option was selected in the **Dunning process** field. 1. Select the **Include other unpaid documents** check box if you want the system to automatically include documents that are not yet overdue in the list of due documents in a dunning letter. This is the default value for the **Include other unpaid documents** check box in the [Prepare dunning letters (AR521000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/prepare-dunning-letters-ar521000/) window that you can change any time you prepare dunning letters. 1. Optional: If you want to collect a fee for each dunning letter you send (with the amount specified for each level), in the **Item ID** field, specify a non-stock item configured for this purpose. 1. Optional: Select the **Automatically release dunning fee documents** check box if you want the system to automatically release an invoice for the applicable dunning fee when the corresponding dunning letter is released. 1. In the table, do the following: 1. Add a row. The added row is filled with default values. The **Dunning letter level** column is read-only. 1. In the **Days past due** column, type the number of days to be used for comparison with the number of days the invoice is past its due date. 1. In the **Days to settle** column, type the number of days that will be added to the letter date to calculate the deadline date for the payment. The payment deadline date is included in the [Dunning letter (AR6611000) report](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/dunning-letter-ar661000/). 1. In the **Description** column, type the description of this level. 1. Optional: In the **Dunning fee** column, type the amount of the fee that will be assessed for this level. If you specify a dunning fee for any row, make sure that the non-stock item is specified; see Step 5. 1. In the window toolbar, click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). 1. Repeat Step 7 for each level you need.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Set up a dunning letter mailing /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-dunning-letters/set-up-a-dunning-letter-mailing section You use the default mailing with the DUNNINGLETTER identifier to send dunning letters via email. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Set up a dunning letter mailing You use the default mailing with the DUNNINGLETTER identifier to send dunning letters via email. You use the default mailing with the **DUNNINGLETTER** identifier to send dunning letters via email. To configure a mailing for a group of customers, you can create a customer class or use an existing class. In this case, the mailing configuration is copied to each customer account of this customer class. ## Before you proceed You should set up dunning process in the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. Make sure that the text of the email template **DunningLetterNotification** (used for the **DUNNINGLETTER** mailing) complies with your corporate policies. To do this, open the template by using the [Notification templates (SM204003)](/visma-net-erp/help/email/email-windows/notification-templates-sm204003/) window, and edit the template, if required. The look and feel of the attachment is defined with the [Dunning letter (AR6611000) report](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/dunning-letter-ar661000/). 1. Go to the [Customer classes (AR201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-classes-ar201000/) window. 1. In the **Class ID** field, select the customer class you want to configure the mailing for. 1. On the **Mailing settings** tab, in the **Mailings** table, do the following: The table may already have a row for the **DUNNINGLETTER** mailing with default settings. In this case, check that it is configured as described in the following substeps. 1. Add a row. In the **Mailing ID** column of the new row, select the **DUNNINGLETTER** mailing. 1. In the **Branch** column of the row, select the branch on behalf of which the emails for the mailing will be sent. Leave the **Branch** column blank to use the same mailing settings for all branches. 1. In the **Email account** column, select the email account the mailing is to be sent from. 1. In the **Report** column, select the report to be used for generating the dunning letter document, which will be sent as an attachment. 1. In the **Notification template** column, select the **DunningLetterNotification** notification template, which will be used to compose the body of the email. 1. In the **Format** column, select the attachment format. If the format specified in this mailing does not match the format preferences of a contact, the attachment will be sent in the format preferred by the contact. 1. Select the **Active** check box for the mailing. 1. In the **Recipients** table, add the types of contacts to receive dunning letters. The system will automatically load the actual email address that corresponds to the added contact type when a new customer account of this customer class is created. Select the attachment format preferred by the contact. Make sure the contact is active, and specify whether the contact should receive a blind carbon copy of the emails that will be generated for this mailing. 1. In the window toolbar, click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). You can adjust these mailing settings to serve the preferences of a particular customer by using the **Mailing settings** tab of the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window. After you complete these steps, you can prepare dunning letters and email them to inform your customers of invoices that are past due by using the [Prepare dunning letters (AR521000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/prepare-dunning-letters-ar521000/) and [Print/release dunning letters (AR522000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/print-release-dunning-letters-ar522000/) windows.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Prepare dunning letters by document /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-dunning-letters/prepare-dunning-letters-by-document page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Prepare dunning letters by document ## Before you start [Enable or disable dunning letter management](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-or-disable-dunning-letter-management/) [Make overdue and dunning settings in the Customer ledger preferences window](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-preferences/make-overdue-and-dunning-settings-in-the-customer-ledger-preferences/) [Set customer class print and email preferences](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-classes/set-customer-class-print-and-email-preferences/) [Set up dunning letter mailing for a customer class](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-classes/set-up-dunning-letter-mailing-for-a-customer-class/) For all customers, the dunning process checks customers' due documents and gives you the ability to prepare and send dunning letters of different severity levels. You can prepare a separate dunning letter for each document, or you can group the documents of a customer with different levels into one letter. > [!NOTE] > Before you start preparing dunning letters, make sure that customers do not have open payments, prepayments and credit memos that can be applied against outstanding documents. 1. Go to the [Prepare dunning letters (AR521000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/prepare-dunning-letters-ar521000/) window. 1. Optional: Select a **customer class**. 1. Optional: Select a **customer**. 1. In the table, select the documents you want to prepare dunning letters for. Select the **All overdue documents** radio button, to have the system create dunning letters from all overdue documents. Select the **Dunning letter level** radio button and enter the dunning letter levels you want to use in the **From** and **To** fields. 1. Click **Process** or **Process all**. ## What is next? To print or email the reviewed and released dunning letters, go to the **Print/release dunning letters** window.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Prepare dunning letters by customer /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-dunning-letters/prepare-dunning-letters-by-customer page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Prepare dunning letters by customer ## Before you start For all customers, the dunning process checks customers' due documents and gives you the ability to prepare and send dunning letters of different severity levels. The system groups overdue documents by customer when it prepares dunning letters. See: [Make overdue and dunning settings in the Customer ledger preferences](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-preferences/make-overdue-and-dunning-settings-in-the-customer-ledger-preferences/). > [!NOTE] > Before you start preparing dunning letters, make sure that customers do not have open payments, prepayments and credit notes that can be applied against outstanding documents. 1. Go to the [Prepare dunning letters (AR521000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/prepare-dunning-letters-ar521000/) window. 1. Optional: Select a **customer class**. 1. Optional: Select a **customer**. 1. In the table, select the customer you want to prepare dunning letters for. 1. Click **Process** or **Process all**. ## What is next? To print or email the reviewed and released dunning letters, go to the **Print/release dunning letters** window.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Add a text for dunning letters and reminders /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-dunning-letters/add-a-text-for-dunning-letters-and-reminders section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Add a text for dunning letters and reminders 1. Go to the [Report texts (AR20200S)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/report-texts-ar20200s/) window. 1. In the **Report text code** field, enter a code number or abbreviation, for example **RE1**. You can use both letters and numbers. 1. In the **Name** field, enter the name of the text, for example **First reminder**. 1. In the topmost text field, enter the desired text of your reminder or dunning letter. > [!NOTE] > There is also a second text field, which you can use if you want to add a message to the customer. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). > [!NOTE] > If you have additional payment reminders or dunning letters, you must create a text for each of them, and name them with unique names. > Repeat the procedure above to add another reminder text. Remember to use a unique code for each text. You can also create a fixed text that can be printed on invoices. ## What is next? [Make overdue and dunning settings in the Customer ledger preferences window](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-preferences/make-overdue-and-dunning-settings-in-the-customer-ledger-preferences/)

Related pages

Windows

Print/release dunning letters /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-dunning-letters/print-release-dunning-letters page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Print/release dunning letters 1. Go to the [Print/release dunning letters (AR522000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/print-release-dunning-letters-ar522000/) window. 1. In the **Action** field, select how you wish to process the dunning letters: Note that you have to either email or print each letter. 1. To display all letters in the table, check the box **Show all**. To display the letters created during a certain period, select the **Start date** and the **End date**. 1. Optional: To see the list of the documents included into a letter, click the row of the letter and click **View document**. 1. To apply the selected action to all letters, click **Process all**. 1. To apply the selected action to some of the letters, check the box in the beginning of their rows and click **Process**.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

Manage commissions /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-commissions section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage commissions Manage commissions - overview /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-commissions/manage-commissions-overview page In Visma Net, you can configure commission calculations that support your company's policies. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage commissions - overview In Visma Net, you can configure commission calculations that support your company's policies. The functionality is available if the **Commissions** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. The topics below provide information on configuring and processing commissions. ## Topics + [About commission configuration and calculation](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-commissions/about-commission-configuration-and-calculation/) + [Configure commissions](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-commissions/configure-commissions/) + [Prepare commissions](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-commissions/prepare-commissions/)

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

About commission configuration and calculation /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-commissions/about-commission-configuration-and-calculation page Commission configuration involves defining commission periods, creating salesperson accounts, assigning salespersons to customers, and choosing general commission calculation options. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About commission configuration and calculation Commission configuration involves defining commission periods, creating salesperson accounts, assigning salespersons to customers, and choosing general commission calculation options. Commission configuration involves defining commission periods, creating salesperson accounts, assigning salespersons to customers, and choosing general commission calculation options. You use the [Salespersons (AR205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/salespersons-ar205000/) window to set up individual salespersons' accounts. The **Salesperson ID** is the unique ID of the salesperson. Develop naming conventions for this ID and use the **SALESPERSON** segmented key to define these requirements. For more information, see [About ID segmentation](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/about-id-segmentation/). By using this window, you also assign a default commission percentage to each salesperson. At the bottom of the window, add a list of customers the salesperson works with and the commission percentages specific for customers if different from the default rate. (On a particular invoice, the salesperson's rate for the customer may be overridden.) Generally, commission is calculated once in a commission period, just before the period is closed. In Visma Net, you set the commission period for all salespeople in the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window, with the following options available: **By financial period**, **Monthly**, **Quarterly**, and **Yearly**. > [!NOTE] > A document is assigned to the earliest open commission period unless its date is later than the period end. Thus, if the document with the date matching the closed commission period appears in the system, the commission for it will be prepared in the currently open period. Some businesses pay commissions calculated on invoice amounts, while other businesses pay commissions only after customer payments are received. In Visma Net, you can select the option that fits your company policy in the Customer ledger preferences window, in the **Salesperson commission by** field. The following options of commission calculation are available: By invoice : Commission is calculated on the invoice amount when the invoice is released. By payments : Commission is calculated on the paid invoices only when the status of the invoice changes to **Closed**. In this case, any discount taken by the customer decreases the commission base. ## Commission processing Generally, information about salespersons associated with the sale and their commissions is specified on an invoice. You can split commission between multiple salespersons; to do this, you add multiple salespersons on an invoice and specify commission percentages for each of them manually. To calculate commissions for the commission period, use the [Calculate commissions (AR505500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/calculate-commissions-ar505500/) window. Commissions can be prepared for only the earliest open period. You cannot prepare commissions for a period if the previous period has the **Open** or **Prepared** status. To calculate commissions to salespersons for the commission period, you need to collect commission information over all invoices that were released (or closed if commissions are paid on paid invoices) during the commission period. Each document contains the commission details calculated based on the commission percentages of salespersons associated with the document. During commission preparation, the documents (invoices or payments) for which commission details have been added to the salespersons' totals are marked as processed in the chosen period. > [!NOTE] > Although commission is calculated on the invoices or paid invoices, corresponding commission transactions are not included in the batches generated for invoices or payments; commission amounts are stored with the appropriate documents. To actually pay commissions to the salespersons, you will need to enter all related transactions manually. Once commissions have been prepared, the commission period should be closed using the [Close commission period (AR506500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/close-commission-period-ar506500/) window. In this window, you can also view information about commissions earned by salespersons during any of the closed commission periods. ## Recalculating commissions If errors in assigning documents to salespersons are detected or important documents arrive later, you may need to recalculate commissions. If commissions have been prepared for the period, void them by using the [Close commission period (AR506500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/close-commission-period-ar506500/) window. If the period has been closed, reopen the period by clicking the appropriate action in the [Close commission period (AR506500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/close-commission-period-ar506500/) window and void the prepared commission. > [!NOTE] > You can reopen only the latest closed period, but only if commissions for later periods have not been prepared. Prepare commissions for the reopened period again, and close the period.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Configure commissions /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-commissions/configure-commissions section You can configure the commission period and define commission calculation parameters for all salespersons on the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Configure commissions You can configure the commission period and define commission calculation parameters for all salespersons on the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window. For more information: [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/). To set a default commission for a particular salesperson and specify a commission percent for each customer the salesperson works with, use the [Salespersons (AR205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/salespersons-ar205000/) window. ## Set the commission period and select a calculation option 1. Go to the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. 1. Go to the **General information** tab. 1. In the **Salesperson commission by** field of the **Salesperson commission settings** area, define the method of commission calculation by selecting one of the following options: + **Invoice**: This option calculates the commission on the invoice when it is released (whether it was paid or not). + **Payment**: This option calculates the commission on the paid invoice when it receives the **Closed** status. In this case, the commission base is decreased by the amount of any discount taken by the customer. 1. In the **Commission period type** field, select **Monthly**, **Quarterly**, **Yearly**, or **By financial period**. Commission is calculated once during the selected time period for all salespersons. 1. In the window toolbar, click **![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png)**. ## Set a salesperson default commission 1. Go to the [Salespersons (AR205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/salespersons-ar205000/) window. 1. Select the salesperson in the **Salesperson ID** field. 1. In the **Default commission %** field, specify the default percent of commission. This commission percent can be overridden for a particular invoice. 1. Optional: Create a list of customers the salesperson works with, and specify the particular commission percent for every customer, if it differs from the default commission percent. To add a customer the salesperson works with, perform the following steps: 1. In the table toolbar of the **Customers** tab, click **Add row** to append a new row to the table. 1. In the **Customer** column, select the customer the salesperson works with. 1. In the **Commission %** column, enter the commission percent to be used on sales for the specified customer. 1. In the window toolbar, click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Prepare commissions /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-commissions/prepare-commissions page You can prepare salespersons' commissions for the commission period by using first the Calculate commissions (AR505500) window and then the Close commission period (AR506500) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Prepare commissions You can prepare salespersons' commissions for the commission period by using first the Calculate commissions (AR505500) window and then the Close commission period (AR506500) window. For more information: [Calculate commissions (AR505500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/calculate-commissions-ar505500/), [Close commission period (AR506500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/close-commission-period-ar506500/). For information about how to define commission settings, see: [Configure commissions](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-commissions/configure-commissions/). ## Calculate the commissions 1. Go to the [Calculate commissions (AR505500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/calculate-commissions-ar505500/) window. 1. In the **Commission period** field, check the status of the commission period (that is, the period for which the commissions should be calculated; you can prepare commissions for only an open period). 1. In the table, check the list of salespersons with their commissions calculated for the commission period. 1. In the window toolbar, click **Process all** to initiate commission processing for the period, collecting commission information for applicable invoices. If the operation has completed successfully, the system changes the status of the commission period to **Prepared**. ## Close the commission period 1. Go to the [Close commission period (AR506500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/close-commission-period-ar506500/) window. 1. In the **Commission period** field, select the period you want to close. Select the **Status** check box. You can close the commission period only if it has the **Prepared** status. 1. In the table, check the list of salespersons with the commissions they earned for the commission period. 1. In the window toolbar, click **Action** and then **Close period** to initiate the process of collecting commission information and then close the period. If the operation completes successfully, the system changes the status of the commission period to **Closed**. > [!NOTE] > If new invoices or payments for the period arrive after you have prepared the commission, you need to repeat the process of preparing commissions. To do this, select the period and then click **Void commission** in the window toolbar.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

Manual payments /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manual-payments section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manual payments Click the links below to learn more about a topic you are interested in. Use the breadcrumb links in the upper left corner to see your location, navigate backwards or go to the starting point. About Manual payments /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manual-payments/about-manual-payments page In Visma Net, you can create incoming payments manually. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About Manual payments In Visma Net, you can create incoming payments manually. ## Introduction This is an advantage when you have transactions that are outside AutoPay. In the [Manual payments (AR30200S)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/manual-payments-ar30200s/) window, you can create incoming payments for open documents in the customer ledger, for example, for invoices, debit notes and overdue charges. You select eligible documents from the table, where you will find all not closed documents sorted on due date. The service automatically matches the invoice with the created incoming payment and automatically sets the invoice status to closed if the balance is 0,-. The service automatically uses the reference number series set under Customer Ledger setup for payments. ## Features in the Manual payments window These are some of the things you can do in the [Manual payments (AR30200S)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/manual-payments-ar30200s/) window. For a step- by-step description of how to process manual payments and an overview of the field names, see [Process several payments at once](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manual-payments/process-several-payments-at-once/). In the [Manual payments (AR30200S)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/manual-payments-ar30200s/) window, you can: + Create incoming payments based on existing invoices that have a due date earlier than or equal to today’s date. + Use the standard filter functions available in Visma Net. You can for example filter on a specific invoice number. + Edit the pay date, so overdue charges will be calculated correctly. + Change the paid amount, to pay more or less than the invoice. + Enter a text for the incoming payment (for example, who the payment is from, or which month it refers to). + Drill down to the invoice document in a pop-up window. + See the incoming payments reference that is created after processing.

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

Process several payments at once /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manual-payments/process-several-payments-at-once section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Process several payments at once ## Before you start In Visma Net, you can create several incoming payments at once. This is an advantage when you have transactions that are outside AutoPay. In the [Manual payments (AR30200S)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/manual-payments-ar30200s/) window, you can create incoming payments for open documents in the customer ledger, for example, for invoices, debit notes, and overdue charges. 1. Go to the [Manual payments (AR30200S)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/manual-payments-ar30200s/) window. 1. In the table area, you see all the unpaid invoices that have a due date before or on today’s date. 1. Optional: Filter on **Payment method** to make it easier to distinguish the documents that you want to work with. 1. Optional: Use the filter function in any field to tailor your view to your needs. 1. Click the check boxes to select the documents for which you want to create payments. 1. Click **Process**. The selected documents are processed and the system creates a **Reference number from Payments** for each one. to the left of each document that has been processed successfully. ![icon-confirmation](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-confirmation.png) is displayed > [!NOTE] > After processing you can create an Excel file with the resulting information for control purposes. To do so, click ![icon-excel](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-excel.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

Salespersons /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/salespersons section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Salespersons Click the links below to learn more about a topic you are interested in. Use the breadcrumb links in the upper left corner to see your location, navigate backwards or go to the starting point. Create a salesperson /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/salespersons/create-a-salesperson section The information you enter in this window is displayed on the Salespersons tab in the Customers (AR303000) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create a salesperson The information you enter in this window is displayed on the Salespersons tab in the Customers (AR303000) window. For more information: [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/). 1. Go to the [Salespersons (AR205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/salespersons-ar205000/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. Enter the next free **Salesperson ID**. If you are unsure of the next free number, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to open the **Select - Salesperson ID** window. The fields marked with \* are mandatory. 1. Enter the **Name** of your salesperson. The rest of the fields are optional. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

Change a salesperson /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/salespersons/change-a-salesperson section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Change a salesperson 1. Go to the [Salespersons (AR205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/salespersons-ar205000/) window. 1. In the **Salesperson ID** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select the salesperson you want to make changes to. 1. Make your changes. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

Delete a salesperson /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/salespersons/delete-a-salesperson section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Delete a salesperson 1. Go to the [Salespersons (AR205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/salespersons-ar205000/) window. 1. In **Salesperson ID**, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select the contact you want to delete. 1. Click ![icon-delete](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-delete.png). 1. Click **OK** to confirm that you want to delete the salesperson.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

Connect a customer to a salesperson /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/salespersons/connect-a-customer-to-a-salesperson section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Connect a customer to a salesperson 1. Go to the [Salespersons (AR205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/salespersons-ar205000/) window. 1. In **Salesperson ID**, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select your salesperson. 1. On the **Customers** tab, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the new row in the **Customer** column, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select the customer you want to connect to your salesperson. 1. Enter data in **Commission %**. Visma Net fills in the rest of the fields when you save. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

Disconnect a customer connection to a salesperson /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/salespersons/disconnect-a-customer-connection-to-a-salesperson section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Disconnect a customer connection to a salesperson 1. Go to the [Salespersons (AR205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/salespersons-ar205000/) window. 1. In the **Salesperson ID** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select the salesperson. 1. On the **Customers** tab, mark the line with the customer you want to disconnect from the salesperson. 1. Click ![icon-delete](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-delete.png). 1. Click **OK** to confirm that you want to disconnect the customer from the salesperson. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

Update a column for all order lines /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/salespersons/update-a-column-for-all-order-lines page For an order with existing lines, you can change some values on all order lines at once. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Update a column for all order lines For an order with existing lines, you can change some values on all order lines at once. You can do this in the [Sales orders (SO30100S)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so30100s/) window for the **Salesperson**, **Warehouse**, **Shipping rule**, **Requested on** and **Ship on** columns. This is particularly useful when your order has many lines. Follow the steps below to update one of the above mentioned columns for all existing order lines. 1. Open the order in the [Sales orders (SO30100S)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so30100s/) window. 1. Change the field that corresponds to the column you want to update for all order lines. The table below lists the field names and their corresponding columns in the **Order lines** tab. 1. Answer the question as follows: + Click **Yes** if you want to update all existing order lines with the newly selected value. + Click **No** if you only want newly added order lines to retrieve the newly selected value. > [!NOTE] > you cannot select the lines you want to update, the change will be applied to all existing lines. Customer ledger windows /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Customer ledger windows Customer ledger windows - overview /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-windows-overview page On the menu of Visma Net, the windows are grouped into workspace items on the left hand side of the screen. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Customer ledger windows - overview On the menu of Visma Net, the windows are grouped into workspace items on the left hand side of the screen. On the menu of Visma Net, the windows are grouped into workspace items on the left hand side of the screen. Each item contains a workspace with tiles and categories. This topic follows the listing of the category items in the Customer ledger workspace. ## Transactions [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) [Cash sales (AR304000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/cash-sales-ar304000/) [Sales price worksheets (AR202010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-price-worksheets-ar202010/) [Batch payments (AP305000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/batch-payments-ap305000/) ## Registers [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) [Contacts (CR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/contacts-cr302000/) [Customer locations (CR303010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-locations-cr303010/) [Customer payment methods (AR303010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payment-methods-ar303010/) [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) [Recurring transactions (AR203500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/recurring-transactions-ar203500/) [Sales prices (AR202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-prices-ar202000/) [Discounts (AR209500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/discounts-ar209500/) ## Processes [Release customer documents (AR501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/release-customer-documents-ar501000/) [Send invoices (AR508000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/send-invoices-ar508000/) [Prepare dunning letters (AR521000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/prepare-dunning-letters-ar521000/) [Print/release dunning letters (AR522000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/print-release-dunning-letters-ar522000/) [Reprint invoices (AR50801S)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/reprint-invoices-ar50801s/) [Manual payments (AR30200S)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/manual-payments-ar30200s/) [Payment info from AutoPay (AP50550S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/payment-info-from-autopay-ap50550s/) [Apply payments automatically (AR506000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/apply-payments-automatically-ar506000/) [Process customer refunds (AR50300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/process-customer-refunds-ar50300s/) [Manage credit holds (AR523000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/manage-credit-holds-ar523000/) [Write-off balances and credits (AR505000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/write-off-balances-and-credits-ar505000/) [Generate recurring transactions (AR504000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/generate-recurring-transactions-ar504000/) [Calculate overdue charges (AR507000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/calculate-overdue-charges-ar507000/) [Update discounts (AR502500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/update-discounts-ar502500/) [Generate VAT on cash discount (AR504500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/generate-vat-on-cash-discount-ar504500/) [Prepare statements (AR503000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/prepare-statements-ar503000/) [Print statements (AR503500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/print-statements-ar503500/) [Calculate commissions (AR505500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/calculate-commissions-ar505500/) [Close commission period (AR506500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/close-commission-period-ar506500/) [Close financial periods (AR509000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/close-financial-periods-ar509000/) [Validate customer balances (AR509900)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/validate-customer-balances-ar509900/) [Change customer details (AR50107S)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/change-customer-details-ar50107s/) ## Inquiries [Customer details (AR402000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-details-ar402000/) [Customer summary (AR401000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-summary-ar401000/) [Dunning letter history by customer (AR408000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/dunning-letter-history-by-customer-ar408000/) [Dunning letter history by document (AR408500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/dunning-letter-history-by-document-ar408500/) [Statement history summary (AR404000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/statement-history-summary-ar404000/) [Statement history details (AR404300)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/statement-history-details-ar404300/) [Incoming payments history (AR407000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/incoming-payments-history-ar407000/) [Customer statement history (AR404600)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-statement-history-ar404600/) [Commission details (AR403000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/commission-details-ar403000/) [Sales profitability analysis (AR409000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-profitability-analysis-ar409000/) [Customer list (AR40101S)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-list-ar40101s/) [Customer VAT zone deviation (AR40102S)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-vat-zone-deviation-ar40102s/) [Sales by item and customer (AR40103S)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-by-item-and-customer-ar40103s/) [Sales invoices - overview (AR40104S)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-invoices-overview-ar40104s/) [GDPR - personal data (GA000081)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/gdpr-personal-data-ga000081/) [Invoice history by item (AR40105S)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/invoice-history-by-item-ar40105s/) ## Reports [Balance by customer (AR632500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/balance-by-customer-ar632500/): Displays the outstanding balances of the selected customer (or all customers) during the chosen period. For each customer, documents are grouped by account and subaccount pair and listed by their reference numbers. All the amounts are shown in the base currency. [Customer summary (AR65050S)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/customer-summary-ar65050s/): Lists all the customers with their current balances, default currency, payment terms, VAT zone, and other related information. [Balance by general ledger account (AR632000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/balance-by-general-ledger-account-ar632000/): Displays the balances of the customer ledger accounts and activities on the accounts for the chosen period. Documents are grouped by account and subaccount pair and listed by their reference numbers. [Balance by customer (currency) (AR633000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/balance-by-customer-currency-ar633000/): Displays the outstanding foreign currency balances of the selected customer (or all customers) during the chosen period. [Aged past due (AR631000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/aged-past-due-ar631000/): Lists the customers with outstanding balances, which are broken down by days past due. [Aged past due (currency) (AR631100)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/aged-past-due-currency-ar631100/): Displays the customers with outstanding foreign currency balances. The balances are broken down by days past due. [Aged outstanding (AR631500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/aged-outstanding-ar631500/): Shows the list of customers with outstanding balances, with balances arranged by days outstanding. [Aged outstanding (currency) (AR631600)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/aged-outstanding-currency-ar631600/): Displays the list of customers with outstanding balances, with balances arranged by days outstanding. The foreign currency balances and amounts are shown in their original currency. [Aged period sensitive (AR630500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/aged-period-sensitive-ar630500/): Displays the list of customers with outstanding balances. The balances are arranged by days past due on the last day of the specified period. [Incoming payments (AR63050S)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/incoming-payments-ar63050s/): Displays the list of incoming payments. [Customer profiles (AR651000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/customer-profiles-ar651000/): Shows all the details from the database of the selected customer account or all customer accounts. [Customer history summary (AR652100)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/customer-history-summary-ar652100/): Shows a summary of balance history for customers whose balance has been changing during the date range you specify. [Customer specification (AR65200S)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/customer-specification-ar65200s/): Shows the ending and beginning balances of the selected customer. [Unreleased transactions (AR611000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/unreleased-transactions-ar611000/): Lists the customer ledger documents that were entered but not released. You can choose a specific customer or view the documents for all customers. [Unreleased transactions (detailed) (AR610500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/unreleased-transactions-detailed-ar610500/): Displays, with all details, the list of customer ledger documents of the chosen type that were entered but not released. [Customer documents (AR621500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/customer-documents-ar621500/): Lists all the documents released in Customer ledger for the specified financial period and for the selected customer (or all customers). [Customer documents (detailed) (AR622000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/customer-documents-detailed-ar622000/): Shows the details of documents of the selected type (or all types) released in Customer ledger for the specified financial period. The details include the batch number and batch transactions. [Batch register customers (AR620500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/batch-register-customers-ar620500/): Displays the list of all batches released in Customer ledger during the specified financial period. [Batch register customers (detailed) (AR621000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/batch-register-customers-detailed-ar621000/): Lists all batches (with details) released in Customer ledger during the specified financial period. [Open customer ledger documents (AR656000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/open-customer-ledger-documents-ar656000/): Lets you view and print the list of Customer ledger documents that are not yet released in the specified range of financial periods. [Daily sales profitability (AR676000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/daily-sales-profitability-ar676000/): Displays the net sales amounts, costs, margins, and margin percentages calculated on the sales to each customer during the specified date range. The report in detailed format shows the profitability data for each day within the specified date range. [Sales profitability by salesperson and customer (AR673000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/sales-profitability-by-salesperson-and-customer-ar673000/): Shows the net sales amounts, costs, margins, and margin percentages calculated for the sales performed by particular salespersons during the specified date range. The report in detailed format shows the data broken down by customer. [Sales profitability by customer and order (AR672000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/sales-profitability-by-customer-and-order-ar672000/): Shows the net sales amounts, costs, margins, and margin percentages on all sales to each customer during the specified date range. The report in detailed format shows the data broken down by sales order. [Sales profitability by customer class and customer (AR675000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/sales-profitability-by-customer-class-and-customer-ar675000/): Displays the net sales amounts, costs, margins, and margin percentages on all sales to customers of each customer class during the specified date range. In detailed format, this report shows the data broken down by sales to particular customers. [Sales profitability by item and order (AR671000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/sales-profitability-by-item-and-order-ar671000/): Displays the net sales amounts, costs, margins, and margin percentages for the items that were listed on the sales orders created in Visma Net during the specified date range. The report in detailed format shows the data broken down by sales orders. [Sales profitability by item class and item (AR674000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/sales-profitability-by-item-class-and-item-ar674000/): Shows the net sales amounts, costs, margins, and margin percentages calculated on item class basis on the sales occurred during the specified date range. The report in detailed format shows the data broken down by stock items. ## Preferences [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) [Payment terms (CS206500)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/payment-terms-cs206500/) [Statement cycles (AR202800)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/statement-cycles-ar202800/) [Overdue charges (AR204500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/overdue-charges-ar204500/) [Customer classes (AR201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-classes-ar201000/) [Customer price classes (AR208000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-price-classes-ar208000/) [Report texts (AR20200S)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/report-texts-ar20200s/) [Reason codes (CS211000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/reason-codes-cs211000/) [Item price classes (IN209000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/item-price-classes-in209000/) [Salespersons (AR205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/salespersons-ar205000/) [Discount codes (AR209000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/discount-codes-ar209000/) [Item classes (IN201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/item-classes-in201000/) Apply payments automatically (AR506000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/apply-payments-automatically-ar506000 page You use this window to initiate automatic payment application for the all open documents of the customers that belong to the statement cycle that you select in this window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Apply payments automatically (AR506000) You use this window to initiate automatic payment application for the all open documents of the customers that belong to the statement cycle that you select in this window. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You use this window to initiate automatic payment application for the all open documents of the customers that belong to the statement cycle that you select in this window. You should apply payments and calculate any overdue charges before preparing statements, to avoid incorrect calculation of aged balances. For details, see [About automatic payment application](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-payments-and-applications/about-automatic-payment-application/). ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Process Initiates the application process for the customer accounts that belong to the statement cycles you have selected by using the unlabeled check boxes in the table.
Process all Initiates the application process for customer accounts that belong to all statement cycles displayed in the table.
## The top part In this area, you can select the date of payment application and the financial period. Also, you can select whether to include credit notes in the auto-application process and whether to release batches with the application records when the process is complete.
Element Description
Date

The date when an application is performed. By default, the current business date is displayed.

The system records this date for each payment document or credit notes (if credit notes were included in the auto-application process) in the Date field on the top part of the Customer payments (AR302000) window.

Financial period The financial period when the application is performed. The field is filled in automatically, based on the selected date.
Apply credit notes

This check box indicates (if selected) that the system includes credit notes in the application process.

The balances of the open credit notes increase the balance that can be applied to outstanding documents.

Release batch when finished

This check box indicates (if selected) that the system releases batches with the application records when the process is complete.

If you leave the check box cleared, when the process is complete, you need to release the application records manually for each payment document in the Customer payments (AR302000) window or by using the Release customer documents (AR501000) mass processing window.

Include child documents

An indicator of the types of documents that belong to any child customer accounts that should be processed, along with the documents of these customer accounts. The following options are available:

None
Indicates that none of the documents of the child customer accounts should be processed.
Except credit notes
Indicates that the system should process all documents of the child accounts that meet other specified criteria, except for the documents with the Credit note type.
All types
Indicates that the system should process all documents of the child accounts that meet the other specified criteria. The option is available if the Apply credit note check box is selected in the window.

The option you select is used by the system for parent accounts that have child accounts with the Consolidate balance check box selected on the Invoicing information tab of the Customers (AR303000) window.

This box is available if the Parent-child customer relationship functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

For details, see: Manage parent-child relationships - overview.

## The table This table contains information about statement cycles. You can select the statement cycles to define a group of customer accounts for which the system will run the auto-application process.
Column Description
Cycle ID The unique ID of the statement cycle.
Last statement date The date when the statement was last prepared.
Description The description of the statement cycle.
Next statement date The date of the next statement, according to the cycle parameters.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Availability calculation rules (IN201500) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/availability-calculation-rules-in201500 page In this window, you can define the rules for calculating the availability of stock items that belong to a particular item class. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Availability calculation rules (IN201500) In this window, you can define the rules for calculating the availability of stock items that belong to a particular item class. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. > [!NOTE] > This window is only available if the **Inventory** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. You can add new rules, modify existing rules, and delete unused rules if they are not assigned to any item classes. For more information, see [About availability calculation](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-availability-data/about-availability-calculation/). You can view the availability data for each item in the [Inventory allocation details (IN402000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-allocation-details-in402000/) window. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The top part By using the elements in this part, you set the rules for calculating the availability of stock items that belong to the item class to which this availability calculation rule is assigned.
Element Description
Availability calculation rule The unique ID of the availability calculation rule. You can use up to 10 characters, both numbers and letters.
Description The description of the availability calculation rule.
Deduct qty. on open issues

If you select this check box, the system deducts (for items of the class) the quantities of issued items from the available quantities of these items.

The documents in the On hold and Balanced statuses are used for availability calculation.

Deduct qty. on sales on hold

If you select this check box, the system will deduct the quantities of the item on sales orders (of the SO, IN, and CS types) with the On hold, Credit hold, Pending approval, and Rejected statuses from the available quantity.

The quantity of each item on sales orders with these statuses is shown in the Sales order prepared field in the Inventory allocation details (IN402000) window.

Deduct qty. on sales orders

If you select this check box, the system will deduct (for items of the class) the quantities of items on sales orders with the Open status from the available quantities of these items.

The item’s quantity on these sales orders is shown in the Sales orders booked field in the Inventory allocation details (IN402000) window.

Deduct qty. on shipments

If you select this check box, the system will deduct (for items of the class) the quantities of shipped items from the available quantities of these items.

The item’s quantity on these sales orders is shown in the Sales orders shipped field in the Inventory allocation details (IN402000) window.

Deduct qty. allocated

If you select this check box, the system will deduct (for items of the class) the quantities of items being prepared for shipping (on unconfirmed shipments) and the quantities that were specifically allocated for sales orders (of the SA and SO types) from the available quantities of these stock items. The orders with the On hold, Credit hold, Rejected, Pending approval, and Open statuses are used for this calculation.

The item’s quantity on these sales orders is shown in the Sales orders allocated field in the Inventory allocation details (IN402000) window.

Deduct qty. of kit assembly demand

If you select this check box, the system will deduct (for items of the class) the quantities of items allocated for kit assembly from the available quantities of these items. The documents with the On hold and Balanced statuses are used for availability calculation.

Note

This check box is available only if the Kit assembly functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Deduct qty. on back orders

If you select this check box, the system will deduct (for items of the class) the quantities of items allocated to sales orders with the Back order status from the available quantity of these items.

The quantities on these sales orders are shown in the Back orders field in the Inventory allocation details (IN402000) window.

Include qty. on receipts If you select this check box, the system will include (for items of the class) the quantities of items on inventory receipts (with On hold and Balanced statuses) in the available quantities of these items.
Include qty. in transit If you select this check box, the system will include (for items of the class) the quantities of items in transit in the available quantities of these stock items. The documents with the On hold and Balanced statuses are used for availability calculation.
Include qty. on purchase order receipts If you select this check box, the system will include (for items of the class) the quantities of items on unreleased purchase receipts in the available quantities of these items.
Include qty. on purchase on hold

If you select this check box, the system will include (for items of the class) the quantities of items on purchase orders (with the statuses of On hold and Pending approval ) in the available quantities of these items.

The item quantity in the purchase orders with the On hold and Pending approval statuses is shown in the Purchase prepared field in the Inventory allocation details (IN402000) window.

Include qty. on purchase orders

If you select this check box, the system will include (for items of the class) the quantities of items on open purchase orders in the available quantities of these items.

The item quantity in the purchase orders with the Open status is shown in the Purchase orders field in the Inventory allocation details (IN402000) window.

Include qty. of kit assembly supply

If you select this check box, the system will include (for items of the class) the quantities of items that are kits and listed in the kit assembly documents in the available quantities of these items.

Note

This check box is available only if the Kit assembly functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Include qty. on returns

If you select this check box, the system will include (for items of the class) the quantities of items on return orders and on shipments with the Receipt operation selected (in the Shipments (SO302000) window) in the available quantities of these items. In particular, quantities are affected as follows:

  • The quantities on return orders with the On hold status are deducted from the Sales order prepared quantities.
  • The quantities on return orders with the Open status are deducted from the Sales orders booked quantities.
  • The quantities on unconfirmed shipments with the Receipt operation are deducted from the Sales orders allocated quantities.
  • The quantities on confirmed shipments are deducted from the Sales orders shipped quantities.

Thus, the quantities on shipments with the Receipt operation decrease the Total deduction quantities in the Inventory allocation details (IN402000) window.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

Calculate commissions (AR505500) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/calculate-commissions-ar505500 page In this window, you can collect information about commissions payable to salespersons for the earliest open commission period. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Calculate commissions (AR505500) In this window, you can collect information about commissions payable to salespersons for the earliest open commission period. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. Each invoice contains the commission details, which are calculated based on the number of salespersons associated with the invoice and their percentages. Commission earned can be collected over all the invoices or over the paid invoices only, depending on the **Salesperson commission by** option selected in the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. > [!NOTE] > We recommend that you prepare commissions once per commission period, just before closing the period. In commission calculation for the open commission period, all invoices that match the conditions of commission calculation and have dates earlier than the ending date of period are included. Thus, you need not recalculate commission for the period if some of the related documents are entered into the system later; they will be included in calculation for the next commission period. To repeat the process of preparing the commissions for the commission period if salespersons were incorrectly specified on invoices for the period, you must first void the prepared commissions by using the [Close commission period (AR506500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/close-commission-period-ar506500/) window, and then prepare them again. The window is available if the **Commissions** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Process all Initiates commission processing for the period.
Review commission period Navigates to Close commission period (AR506500) window so that you can close the period for which commissions have been prepared.
## The top part In this area, you can view read-only information for the commission period, which is the oldest open period on the list of commission periods.
Element Description
Commission period The period for which commissions should be collected. Commission periods are set in the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window.
Status The status of the commission period. You can prepare commissions only for an open period.
From The start date of the commission period.
To The end date of the commission period.
## The table This table displays the list of salespersons with their commissions calculated for the period specified in the upper area of the window.
Column Description
Salesperson ID The identifier of the salesperson whose commission is shown in the line.
Name The name of the salesperson as it was specified in the Salespersons (AR205000) window.
Documents The number of documents involved.
Commissionable amount The total amount of the documents that commission calculation was based on.
Commission amount The total amount of commissions for the salesperson during the specified period.
Average commission % The average commission percent on the documents during the specified period.
Minimum commission (%) The minimum commission percent during the specified period.
Maximum commission (%) The maximum commission percent during the specified period.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Calculate overdue charges (AR507000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/calculate-overdue-charges-ar507000 page You can use this window to find documents that are subject to overdue charges, calculate the exact amounts of overdue charges, and create appropriate documents for the charges. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Calculate overdue charges (AR507000) You can use this window to find documents that are subject to overdue charges, calculate the exact amounts of overdue charges, and create appropriate documents for the charges. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can use this window to find documents that are subject to overdue charges, calculate the exact amounts of overdue charges, and create appropriate documents for the charges. The overdue documents can be selected by statement cycle, customer class, and customer. As a result of processing, the system generates customer ledger documents of the **Overdue charge** type with the **Balanced** or **On hold** status depending on the value of the **Hold documents on entry** check box in the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. You can further process generated documents by using the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window. > [!NOTE] > The system calculates overdue charges for all customer accounts for which overdue charges are assigned, except for accounts with the **Inactive** or **On hold** status. This window is available if the **Overdue charges** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. Also make sure that the option **Apply overdue charges** is selected in the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window, the **General information** tab, the **Financial settings** section. ## The window toolbar
Element Description
Calculate Finds the overdue documents that meet the selection criteria and calculates the amounts of overdue charges for the documents in accordance with the overdue charge code settings in the Overdue charges (AR204500) window.
Process Processes the overdue charges for the documents you have selected, creating new customer ledger documents of the Overdue charge type with the Balanced or On hold status depending on the value of the Hold documents on entry check box in the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window.
Process all Processes the overdue charges for all the listed documents, creating new customer ledger documents of the Overdue charge type with the Balanced or On hold status depending on the value of the Hold documents on entry check box in the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window.
View last charge Navigates to the Sales invoices (AR301000) window and displays the details of the unreleased overdue charge document that had been generated for the selected overdue document.
## The top part You can use the elements in this area (described in the following table) to select the date and the financial period for the charges, and the criteria for the overdue documents to be displayed.
Element Description
Overdue charge date The date when overdue charges are calculated and appropriate documents are created.
Period The financial period to which the document’s transactions should be posted.
Statement cycle The statement cycle for which you want to display data. Leave the field blank if you want to calculate charges for all cycles. If the Set default overdue charges by statement cycle check box is selected in the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window, you must specify the statement cycle.
Customer class The customer class for which you want to display data. The field is available if the Set default overdue charges by statement cycle check box is cleared in the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window.
Customer The customer account for which you want to display data. The field is available if the Set default overdue charges by statement cycle check box is cleared in the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window.
## The table This table contains the list of overdue documents with relevant details for each document, including the amounts of overdue charges. > [!NOTE] > Overdue documents appear in the table only after you click **Calculate** in the window toolbar to find overdue documents and calculate overdue charges for them.
Element Description
Included An unlabelled check box that you select to include the document for processing.
Type The type of customer ledger document for which overdue charges were calculated: Invoice, Debit note, or Overdue charge.
Reference no. The reference number of the document, which was assigned by a number series. By clicking the number, you can navigate to the Sales invoices (AR301000) window, where you can view document details.
Date The date of the document.
Due date The date when payment for the document is due, in accordance with the payment terms.
Customer The customer for whom this document is intended, by its ID.
Customer name The customer’s complete name as it appears in the system.
Currency The currency of the original document.
Amount The amount of the original document.
Open balance The amount of the original document to which payments were not applied.
Last payment date The date of the last applied payment.
Last charge date The date of the last overdue charge document generated for this document.
Overdue days The number of days this document is past due since its due date or, if overdue charges were previously calculated, since the last charge date.
Charge currency The currency used for the overdue charges.
Charge amount The amount of the charge.
Branch

The branch as retrieved from the Branch field on the Financial details tab in the Sales invoices (AR301000) window.

This column is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Cash sales (AR304000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/cash-sales-ar304000 section You can use this window to record cash sales; those for which the services rendered are paid immediately. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Cash sales (AR304000) You can use this window to record cash sales; those for which the services rendered are paid immediately. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can use this window to record cash sales; those for which the services rendered are paid immediately. The resulting document generated upon release of a cash sale is a fully paid invoice, which can be cleared right away. The default status of a newly created document is defined by the **Hold documents on entry** and **Validate document**totals on entry options in the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. If the **Hold documents on**entry option is selected, the default status will be **On hold**, whether or not the document is balanced. For more information, see: [About types of customer ledger documents](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-customer-ledger-documents/about-types-of-customer-ledger-documents/). If a cash sale is subjected to bank charges for payment processing, you can specify these charges on the **Finance charges** tab. As with other customer payments, a cash sale can be included in a batch deposit. For details, see: [About the preparation of deposits](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/track-cash-payments/about-the-preparation-of-deposits/). ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Release Releases balanced cash sale documents.
Reverse Generates a cash return document with transactions reversed with respect to the original document. If a processing centre confirms voiding or refunding, the system marks the cash return document as Closed.
Actions

Provides the following menu commands, which you can click to invoke actions:

Email invoice/note
Sends the selected document as an email to the customer for the INVOICE mailing.
Send email
Opens the Activity dialog box,which you can use to create an email.
Reclassify general ledger batch
Opens the Reclassify transactions (GL506000) window, on which you can initiate the reclassification process. For more information, see Process splitting.
Inquiries Provides the Customer details menu command, which you can click to quickly navigate to the Customer details (AR402000) inquiry window.
Reports

Provides the following menu commands, which you can click for quick access to reports:

Unreleased transactions (detailed)
Navigates to the Unreleased transactions (AR611000) report.
Customer documents (detailed)
Navigates to the Customer documents (detailed) (AR622000) report.
Invoice/note
Navigates to the Invoice/note (AR641000) report.
## The top part In the top part of the window, you can create a new cash sales document or select an existing document for modification.
Element Description
Type

The document type. The following types are available:

Cash sale
A document that contains a list of goods sold or services provided that were paid in full immediately.
Cash return
A document that reverses the transactions generated by the cash sale document.
Ref.no The reference number of the document, as automatically generated by the system in accordance with the number series assigned to cash sales in the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window.
Status

The status of the document, which is one of the following:

On hold
The user can edit the document but cannot release it.
Balanced
The Detail total value of the document plus the VAT total value equals the Balance value. The document maybe released, or it may be edited and saved with the On hold or Balanced status.
Open
The document has been released. As payments are applied to the document, its balance decreases.
Closed
The balance of the document is zero.
Hold A check box that indicates (if selected) that the document is a draft and has the On hold status. Such a document may be edited and cannot be released.
Date The date when the customer ledger document was created. By default, for a new document, it is the current business date, but the date may be changed.
Post period The period to which the document should be posted. By default, it is the current period, but the period can be changed. The ability to post to closed periods is controlled by the Allow posting to closed periods check box in the General ledger preferences (GL102000) window.
Payment ref. The reference number of the customer payment.
Invoice text Any user-provided description of the cash sale document.
Customer The customer associated with the document.
Location The relevant customer location.
Payment method The payment method used by the customer to pay for the invoice.
Description The description of the payment method.
Cash account The cash account debited as a result of the cash sale transaction.
Currency The currency of the document. Initially, it is the customer’s default currency, but you can change it if the Allow currency override check box is selected in the Customers (AR303000) window for this customer. To view or change the exchange rate, click the second field, which contains the exchange rate, to invoke the Rate selection dialog box.
Project

The project with which this document is associated, or the code indicating that this document is not associated with any project; the non-project code is specified in the Project accounting preferences (PM101000) window.

This field appears only if the Customer ledger workspace has been integrated with the Projects module in the Project accounting preferences (PM101000) window.

Detail total The document total, as calculated for all items on the Document details tab.
VAT taxable total

The document total that is a subject to value-added tax (VAT).

This field is available only if the VAT reporting functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

VAT exempt total

The total VAT amount that is exempted from charging.

This field is available only if the VAT reporting functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

VAT total The document VAT amount; the details are shown on the VAT details tab.
Balance For an open customer ledger document, the balance after any cash discount was taken.
Rounding diff.

The difference between the original document amount and the rounded amount.

The field appears only if the Invoice rounding functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Payment amount The amount of the customer payment.
Cash discount taken

The cash discount amount that has been or will be taken on the document, which the system calculates based on the specified payment terms. If a document has the On holdor Balanced status, you can change the amount of the calculated cash discount.

If you change the cash discount amount, the system recalculates the taxable and VAT amounts of the document if the applied taxes have Calculate on set to Calc. on item amount or Calc. on document amount and Cash discount set to Reduces taxable amount in the VAT (TX205000) window.

Changes you make to the cash discount amount do not affect the taxable and VAT amounts of the document if the applied taxes have Calculate on set to Extract from item amount and Cash discount set to Reduces taxable amount in the VAT window.

Finance charges The total on all finance charges applied to this document.
Deducted charges The total amount of the bank charges that were deducted by the bank from the payment amount on the cash account. Even if the charges were actually deducted by the bank, the original payment amount is shown in the top part.
## The Document details tab On this tab, you can specify the line details for a new customer ledger document or view the details of the document selected in the upper area of the window.
Button Description
View schedule Navigates to the Deferral schedule (DR201500) window and displays the details of the schedule for the selected line of the document (if any different deferral codes were assigned to different lines of the document in the Deferral code column).
Column Description
Branch The branch that sells the line item or provides theservice.
Item ID The item ID of the line item, if applicable. Only anon-stock item can be selected.
Transaction descr. Any brief comment relevant to the transaction. The alphanumeric string may contain up to 30 characters.
Quantity The quantity of items (goods or services) of a particular type sold to the customer.
UoM The unit of measure (UoM) for the item.
Unit price The price set for the item with respect to the specified unit.
Manual amount A check box that indicates (if selected) that the discount has been applied manually. With this check box selected, you can enter either the discount percent or the discount amount. This column is available only if the Customer and supplier discounts feature is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Discount percent The percent of the discount that has been applied manually. If the Manual discount check box is selected, you can enter the percent manually and the discount amount will be calculated automatically.
Discount amount The amount of the line-level discount that has been applied manually to this line. If the Manual discount check box is selected, you can enter the discount amount manually and the discount percent will be calculated automatically.
Amount The amount after the discount has been applied.
Manual discount A check box that indicates (if selected) that the discount has been applied manually. With this check box selected, you can enter either the discount percent or the discount amount. This column is available only if the Customer and supplier discounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Account The sales account used for the transaction. See also: About suggested sales accounts.
Subaccount The corresponding subaccount used for this transaction.
Project task The particular task of the project with which this document line is associated. This column appears if the Projects module has been activated and integrated with this workspace.
Salesperson ID The salesperson responsible for the sale.
Original deferral schedule

A read-only column filled in by the system in the Cash return documents created by the reversing process. It shows the identifier of the deferral schedule associated with the original Cash sale document.

Note

If a Cash return document is created manually, then you can select a deferral schedule to be reversed.

In the original documents, this column remains empty.

Deferral code

The deferral code assigned to the line item, if any.

Note

Only active deferral codes are shown in the lookup. If you manually enter an inactive code, you will get an error message that the code is inactive.

Term start date The start date of the term.
Term end date The end date of the term.
VAT category The VAT category (if applied) for the transaction. The category represents the type of goods or services. See also: About suggested VAT categories.
Commissionable A check box that indicates (if selected) that commission is paid on the line item amount. The column is available if the Commissions functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
## The Financial details tab This tab contains information about the customer's VAT zone and payment terms. Also, the tab specifies the work group associated with the document and the commissions calculated on document details. For a released customer ledger document, the tab contains the reference to the batch that implements transactions. ### The Link to general ledger section
Element Description
Batch no. The ID of the batch that updates the appropriate account balances with the amounts of the document transactions on posting.
Branch The branch with which this document is associated.
Customer ledger account The asset account specified as the default account for the customer.
Customer ledger sub. The corresponding subaccount used for the customer.
Original document The original document in general ledger.
### The Payment info section
Element Description
Terms The payment terms used in relations with the customer.
Cleared A check box that indicates (if selected) that the cash sale has been cleared with the bank.
Clear date The date when the cash sale document has been cleared with the bank.
Batch deposit A check box that indicates (if selected) that the cash sale should be deposited. You can change this option if the status of cash account has been changed. Deposits can be performed only from a clearing account.
Deposited A check box that indicates (if selected) that the cash sale has been deposited.
Batch deposit date The date when the cash sale was deposited.
Batch deposit no. The reference number of the batch deposit that includes this cash sale.
### The VAT info section
Element Description
Customer VAT zone By default, the VAT zone associated with the customer location, as specified in the Customer locations (CR303010) window. If this VAT zone is not specified, it is the VAT zone assigned to the selling branch.
### The Assigned to section
Element Description
Work group ID The work group associated with the document, if any.
Owner ID The employee who owns (is responsible for) the document.
## The Invoice address tab This tab displays the invoice address of the customer and the contact information for invoicing purposes. ### The Invoice address section
Element Description
Override address A check box that indicates (if selected) that the invoicing address is not the default invoicing address of the customer.
Address 1 The first line of the invoicing address.
Address 2 The second line of the invoicing address.
Postcode The postal code for the invoicing address. An input mask for postal codes be set in the Countries/counties/postcodes (CS20400S) window.
City The city of the customer’s invoicing address.
Country The customer’s country.
County The state or province of the customer.
### The Invoice contact section
Element Description
Override contact A check box that you select to override the default contact information and type new information in the following elements.
Business name The name of the business.
Attention The department or person to be noted on the attention line, if this line is used by your company.
Phone 1 The phone number of the contact person.
Email The email address of the contact person.
### The Print and email options section
Element Description
Printed A check box that indicates (if selected) that the document was printed.
Emailed A check box that indicates (if selected) that the document was emailed.
Do not print A check box that indicates (if selected) that this document should not be sent to the customer as a printed document.
Do not email A check box that indicates (if selected) that this document should not be sent to the customer by email.
## The VAT details tab The table on this tab contains information related to the taxes to be paid on the cash sale and is filled out automatically for a new document after you click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). The table toolbar includes only standard buttons.
Column Description
VAT ID The identifier of a VAT applied to the document.
VAT rate The VAT rate of the VAT.
Taxable amount The taxable amount for the VAT, calculated at the document level.
VAT amount The VAT amount for the specific VAT, calculated at the document level.
## The Salesperson commission tab This tab displays the commissions that can be calculated for the document. You calculate commissions in the [Calculate commissions (AR505500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/calculate-commissions-ar505500/) window. The tab is available if the **Commissions** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. The table toolbar includes only standard buttons. ### The top part
Element Description
Default salesperson The identifier of a salesperson to be used by default for each invoice line.
Total commissionable The total amount used to calculate commissions for all salespersons involved.
Commission amt. The total amount of commissions on the document.
## The Finance charges tab This tab contains a list of charges applied to the cash sale by the bank for payment processing. The table toolbar includes only standard buttons.
Column Description
Entry type The charge, selected by its entry type ID. You can select the entry type from the list of entry types associated with the cash account.
Description A detailed description of the entry type to be used as finance charge.
Offset account The account that is used for this finance charge.
Offset subaccount The corresponding subaccount for this finance charge.
Amount The amount of the finance charge.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Change customer details (AR50107S) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/change-customer-details-ar50107s page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Change customer details (AR50107S) This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Process Click this to change the column information of the customer(s) you have selected in the table.
Process all Click this to change the column information of all customers that are displayed in the table, according to the filter you have set in the top part of the window.
## The top part ### The Filter values section
Element Description
Customer class The customers included in the customer class selected here will be displayed in the table.
Status The customers whose status is accordant with the status you select here will be displayed in the table.
VAT zone ID The customers whose VAT zone is accordant with the VAT zone you select here will be displayed in the table.
### The Change values section
Element Description
Change column information

Select the column you want to change. The options are:

  • Customer class
  • VAT zone
  • Exclude from EC sales list (Brexit) When you select this, the check box Exclude from EC sales list will be selected for the customer(s) you want to change this column for.
New customer class When you select Customer class as the column you want to change, here you can select the new customer class to which you want to change.
Update the customer’s settings with the customer class defaults When you select Customer class as the column you want to change, you can select this check box if you want to update the customer’s settings with the default settings of the new customer class.
New VAT zone ID When you select VAT zone as the column you want to change, here you can select the new VAT zone ID to which you want to change.
## The table
Column Description
Customer no. The ID of the customer.
Customer name The name of the customer.
VAT zone The current VAT zone of the customer.
Location ID The location ID of the customer.
Address The address of the customer.
Postcode The postcode of the customer.
City The city of the customer.
Country The country of the customer.
Corporate ID The corporate ID of the customer.
Attention The attention line as it is used in your company’s business letters, which would be used to direct the letter to the proper person if the letter is not addressed to any specific person. Inherited from the customer details in the Customers (AR303000) window.
Phone 1 The phone number of the customer.
Email The email of the customer.
Last sale The date when the last sale was made to the customer.
Status The status of the customer.
Customer class The customer class to which the customer belongs.
Exclude EC sales list When this check box is selected, the customer on the row and their transactions will not be included in the EC sales list.
Close commission period (AR506500) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/close-commission-period-ar506500 page In this window, you can view information about commissions earned by salespersons during the selected commission period. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Close commission period (AR506500) In this window, you can view information about commissions earned by salespersons during the selected commission period. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. In this window, you can view information about commissions earned by salespersons during the selected commission period. You can also close a commission period for which commissions have been calculated in the [Calculate commissions (AR505500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/calculate-commissions-ar505500/) window. Also, you can reopen the last closed period and void any prepared commissions. Before you open the latest closed period, make sure the commission for the current period has not been calculated or has been voided. The window is available if the **Commissions** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Actions
Void commissions
Removes information about prepared commissions from the document database. Reopen a period if you need to void commission for the closed period.
Close period
Closes the selected commission period. Only a period for which commission has been prepared (calculated) can be closed.
Reopen period
Reopens the last closed period, so that the commission for the period can be voided and recalculated.
## The top part In this area, you can select a commission period to view its details or to close it.
Element Description
Commission period The period for which commissions should be calculated. Commission periods are defined in the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window.
Status

A read-only box that displays the status of the commission period. The following values are used:

Prepared
Commission was calculated for the period.
Closed
The period is closed.
Open
The commission was not yet calculated for the period.
From A read-only field that shows the start date of the commission period.
To A read-only field that shows the end date of the commission period.
## The table In this table, you can view the list of salespersons, which includes summary information about commissions they have earned during the selected period.
Column Description
View details Navigates to the Commission details (AR403000) window so you can view the details of the commission for the selected period.
Salesperson ID The unique ID of the salesperson whose commission is shown in the row.
Type The type of the salesperson, which can be one of the following options: Supplier or Employee. This column is available only if the Payroll functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Name The name of the salesperson as it was specified in the Salespersons (AR205000) window.
Commissionable amount The total amount of the documents that was used as the base for commission calculation.
Commission amount The total amount of commissions for the salesperson during the specified period.
Payroll processed date The date when the commission was processed in the Payroll module. Available only if the Payroll functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Close financial periods (AR509000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/close-financial-periods-ar509000 page You can use this window to close active financial periods in the Customer ledger workspace, which is a prerequisite to closing a period in the General ledger workspace. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Close financial periods (AR509000) You can use this window to close active financial periods in the Customer ledger workspace, which is a prerequisite to closing a period in the General ledger workspace. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can use this window to close active financial periods in the Customer ledger workspace, which is a prerequisite to closing a period in the General ledger workspace. The financial period can be closed in the General ledger workspace only if it has been closed in the Supplier ledger, Customer ledger, Cash management, Inventory, and Fixed assets workspaces. Generally, posting transactions to closed periods is not allowed. To allow posting to closed periods, select the **Allow posting to closed periods** check box in the [General ledger preferences (GL102000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/general-ledger-preferences-gl102000/) window. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Close periods

Initiates the process of closing the selected financial periods.

Note

The green OK icon appears if the closing operation was completed successfully. The red icon indicates that the operation was cancelled because some necessary conditions were not met.

Unreleased documents Opens the Unreleased customer ledger document report so you can view documents that are not released in the selected period (documents that have On hold, Balanced, Pending print, or Pending email status).
## The table This table displays all currently active financial periods for the earliest year that has active periods. A period can be closed only if there no documents with the **On hold**, **Balanced**, **Pending print**, or **Pending email** status to be posted to this period. You select one or more periods for closing and click **Close periods**. When you close a given financial period, all preceding active periods will be closed as well.
Column Description
Period The identifier of the financial period.
Description The description of the financial period.
Active A check box that indicates (if selected) that the financial period is active.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

Commission details (AR403000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/commission-details-ar403000 page You can use this window for quick inquiries about commissions payable to salespersons on sales to specific customers. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Commission details (AR403000) You can use this window for quick inquiries about commissions payable to salespersons on sales to specific customers. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can use this window for quick inquiries about commissions payable to salespersons on sales to specific customers. You can select a salesperson, a commission period, a customer, and a specific customer location. You can then view the commission information and drill down to the details of the payment or invoicing document. Before you can view the commission for an open period, collect the commission information by using the [Calculate commissions (AR505500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/calculate-commissions-ar505500/) window. For more information, see: [About commission configuration and calculation](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-commissions/about-commission-configuration-and-calculation/). The window is available if the **Commissions** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. ## The top part You can use the elements in this area to select a salesperson and commission period to view the summary on all customers meeting these criteria. Also, you can specify a customer and one of the customer's locations to view more details.
Element Description
Salesperson ID The salesperson whose commission details you want to view. Leave this field blank to view the commissions for all salespersons.
Commission period The commission period for which you want to display data. Periods are configured in the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window.
Customer A customer associated with the salesperson. You can select a customer from the list or leave the field blank to view documents for all customers.
Location The customer location related to the sales, if a customer has been specified.
## The table This table contains the list of documents matching the criteria specified in the top part.
Column Description
Doc. type The type of document. If the commission is calculated on open invoices, it is a type of invoice document ( invoice or note ). If the commission is calculated on payments, it is one of the payment document types.
Ref. no. The identification number of the document for which the commission is calculated. Click the link to view the details of the document.
Original doc. type If the commission is calculated on payments, this is the type of the invoice document on which the specified payment is based. If the commission is calculated on open invoices, this column is empty.
Original ref. no. The identification number of the invoice document on which the specified payment is based. Click the link to view the details of the document.
Doc. amount The document amount.
Commissionable amount The amount that was used as a base for commission calculation.
Commission (%) The commission percent used for the document.
Commission amount The commission amount earned by the salesperson on the document.
Customer no. The customer to whom the goods or services were sold.
Customer name The name of the customer as it is stored in the system.
Location The customer location related to the sales.
Location name The name of the customer location.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Contract items (CT201000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/contract-items-ct201000 page You can use this window to create and maintain contract items. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Contract items (CT201000) You can use this window to create and maintain contract items. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can use this window to create and maintain contract items. Contract items are non-stock items to be provided to a customer under a contract. You define item quantity limits and pricing for item setup, recurring invoicing and renewal. The contract item quantity can be changed within specified limits in a template or in a contract itself. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The window toolbar The window toolbar includes only standard buttons. ## The top part By using the elements in this area, you can create a new contract item or select an existing item for editing.
Element Description
Contract item The unique identifier of a contract item specified in accordance with the CONTRACTITEM segmented key.
Description A description of the contract item, with any relevant comments.
## The Price options tab This tab provides quantity and price settings for contract items. ### The Price options tab elements
Element Description
Maximum allowed quantity This is the maximum quantity of the contract item that a customer may buy under the contract.
Minimum allowed quantity This is the minimum quantity of the contract item that a customer may buy under the contract.
Default quantity This is the contract item quantity included by default. It can be overridden within the allowed limits for the item in a contract template and a contract based on this template.
Currency ID

The currency of the item price.

You should use contract items priced in the same currency in one template.

Setup price A read-only field that displays contract item price for setup, calculated based on settings configured under the Setup and renewal section.
Recurring price A read-only field that displays contract item recurring price, calculated based on settings configured under the Recurring invoicing section.
Extra usage price A read-only field that displays contract item price for extra usage, calculated based on settings configured under the Recurring invoicing section.
Renewal price A read-only field that displays contract item price for renewal, calculated based on settings configured under the Setup and renewal section.
### The Setup and renewal section
Element Description
Setup item The unique alphanumeric identifier of a non-stock item to be provided on a contract setup.
Setup pricing

The setup item pricing policy. The following options are available:

Use item price
The non-stock item base price is used. If there is a price configured for a customer price class and a customer that purchases this service belongs to this price class then the price from the customer price class is used.
Percent of item price
The price is a percentage calculated by applying percent specified in the Item price/percentage field to the non-stock item base price.
Enter manually
The price is specified manually and can not be changed later in a contract.
Item price/percent The setup item price or percent to be applied to the non-stock item price.
Retain rate A percent of deposit original amount. The system displays a warning on a contract screen when deposit balance gets to the percentage point.
Deposit A check box that, if selected, indicates that the contract item is treated as a deposit.
Refundable A check box that, if selected, indicates that the setup price of the contract item is refundable.
Prorate setup A check box that, if selected, indicates that the setup price of the contract item is invoiced in proportion to unused services in case of contract terms change.
Renewal item The unique alphanumeric identifier of a non-stock item to be provided on a contract renewal.
Collect renewal fee on activation A check box that, if selected, indicates that a customer is invoiced for item renewal in the first invoicing period.
Renewal pricing

The renew item pricing policy. The following options are available:

Use item price
The non-stock item base price is used. If there is a price configured for a customer price class and a customer that purchases this service belongs to this price class then the price from the customer price class is used.
Percent of item price
The price is a percentage calculated by applying percent specified in the Item price/percent field to the non-stock item base price.
Percent of setup price
The price is a percentage calculated by applying percent specified in the Item price/percent field to the contract item setup price.
Enter manually
The price is specified manually and can not be changed later in a contract.
Item price/percent The renew item price or percent to be applied to the non-stock item price.
### The Recurring invoicing section
Element Description
Invoice type

The recurring invoicing policy. The following options are available:

None
recurring invoicing is not performed.
Prepaid
customer is invoiced at the beginning of scheduled invoicing period.
Postpaid
customer is invoiced at the end of scheduled invoicing period.
Recurring item The unique identifier of a non-stock item customer is invoiced for recurrently.
Reset usage on invoicing A check box that, if selected, indicates that contract item usage is reset after the invoicing for a previous invoicing period has been performed.
Recurring pricing

The recurring item pricing policy. The following options are available:

Use item price
The non-stock item base price is used. If there is a price configured for a customer price class and a customer that purchases this service belongs to this price class then the price from the customer price class is used.
Percent of item price
The price is a percentage calculated by applying percent specified in the Item price/percent field to the non-stock item base price.
Percent of setup price
The price is a percentage calculated by applying percent specified in the Item price/percent field to the contract item setup price.
Enter manually
The price is specified manually and can not be changed later in a contract.
Item price/percent The recurring item price or percent to be applied to the non-stock item price.
Extra usage pricing

The recurring item pricing policy. It is applied to service price if customer exceeded service included quantity. The following options are available:

Use item price
The non-stock item base price is used. If there is a price configured for a customer price class and a customer that purchases this service belongs to this price class then the price from the customer price class is used.
Percent of item price
The price is a percentage calculated by applying percent specified in the Item price/percent field to the non-stock item base price.
Percent of setup price
The price is a percentage calculated by applying percent specified in the Item price/percent field to the contract item setup price.
Enter manually
The price is specified manually.
Item price/percent The price for recurring item extra usage or percent to be applied to the non-stock item price.
Deposit item The unique identifier of a deposit assigned to the non-stock item customer is invoiced for recurrently.
## The Used in contract templates tab The **Used in contract templates** tab contains the list of contract templates the selected contract item is added to.
Column Description
Contract template The unique alphanumeric identifier of a contract template.
Description The contract template description.
## The Active contracts tab The **Active contracts** tab contains the list (in a tabular format) of an active contracts the selected item is included to. A contract is considered active if its status is not **Draft**, **Cancelled**, or **Expired**.
Column Description
Contract ID The unique alphanumeric identifier of a contract.
Customer The customer associated with the contract.
Status The contract status. For details, see: Customer contracts (CT301000).
Setup date The date of the contract setup.
Expiration date The date when contract expires.
Description The contract description, which includes any related comments.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Contract templates (CT202000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/contract-templates-ct202000 page You can use this window to create and maintain contract templates. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Contract templates (CT202000) You can use this window to create and maintain contract templates. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can use this window to create and maintain contract templates. A contract template defines the settings for all contracts that are based on the template. The following settings are basic for contracts built on this template: renewal and refund policy, duration, currency, invoicing format, and case invoicing settings. Each contract with a customer must be based on a contract template. When you create a new contract by using the [Customer contracts (CT301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-contracts-ct301000/) window, you select the appropriate template, and the system fills in the settings of the template. For details, see: [About contract preparation](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-preparation/about-contract-preparation/). ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The top part By using the elements in this area, you can create a new contract template or select an existing template for editing.
Element Description
Contract template The unique identifier of the contract template, which is specified in accordance with the TMCONTRACT segmented key.
Description

A description of the contract template, with any relevant comments.

> [!NOTE] > This field supports the multi-language functionality, where you can translate the entered text to multiple languages. For more information, see: About multi-language support

Active A check box that indicates (if selected) that the template is available for selection.
## The Summary tab This tab provides general settings for contracts that are based on this template. ### The Contract settings section
Element Description
Contract type

The type of contract to be based on this template, which can be one of the following options:

Renewable
The contract expires at the end of its duration and can be renewed during its grace period manually or automatically (if it is scheduled). If you renew such a contract, the system changes the contract expiration date and generates an invoice for a renewal fee, if one applies.
Expiring
The contract expires at the end of its duration. A copy of an expired contract can be created by using the Renew contract action in the Customer contracts (CT301000) window or by using the Renew contracts (CT502000) mass processing window. The new contract is created with the Draft status and should be activated.
Unlimited
The contract has no expiration date and can be terminated only.
Duration The duration of the contract, in the specified units. Select the number of units, and select one of the following units in the adjacent field: Year, Quarter, Month, or Custom (days).
Refundable A check box that indicates (if selected) that recurring charges are to be refunded in proportion to unused services, but the setup and renewal fee is to be refunded according to the settings defined for each involved contract item in the Contract items (CT201000) window.
Refund period The number of days after the contract setup date the customer may claim a refund.
Mass renewal

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the contract is available for mass processing and is to be displayed in the Renew contracts (CT502000) window starting on the date that is the number of days before expiration specified in the Renewal point field.

The check box provides a default value for the contracts to be based on the template.

Renewal point

The number of days before the contract expiration date when the system starts to display the contract in the Renew contracts (CT502000) window if the Mass renewal check box is selected for the contract.

The fields provides a default value for the contracts to be based on the template.

Grace period

The period of time (in days) after the contract expiration date when services under a contract are provided and the contract can be renewed according to its type. After the end of the grace period, you cannot renew the contract. If you invoke the Renew contract action in the Customer contracts (CT301000) window after the grace period, the system creates a copy of the contract with the Draft status.

The field provides a default value for the contracts to be based on the template.

Currency The currency to be used for invoicing the customer.
Enable template item override A check box that indicates (if selected) that the list of contract items included in the template can be changed for each contract based on this template.
Automatically release customer documents A check box that indicates (if specified) that the customer documents generated in the process of contract invoicing will be released automatically; otherwise, they will have the Balanced status.
Effective from The date when the template starts to be available for new contracts that you want to base on it.
Discontinue after The date after which the template becomes unavailable for selection when you create a new contract.
### The Invoicing settings section
Element Description
Invoicing period

The invoicing period for the contracts based on the template.

The following options are available: Week, Month, Quarter, Half a year, Year, Statement-based, and On demand. The On demand option means that invoicing is not scheduled and you can invoice a contract on any date; this option cannot be used with contract items that have recurring pricing configured, except for items that are tied up with a deposit item or have a default quantity of zero.

For details on deposit contract items, see: About retainer contracts.

Invoice to

The customer account to be billed for a contract.

The following options are available: Parent account, Customer account, and Specific account.

Invoicing schedule starts on

The starting point of the invoicing schedule: Setup date or Activation date.

The contract expiration date is calculated based on this setting.

Invoicing format

The format of an invoice that is issued as a result of contract invoicing. The following options are available:

Summary
Usage for a contract item is summed up and showed as one line with a total quantity and total sum. The expense claims are not summed up and showed individually.
Detail
Each contract item usage occurrence is shown as a separate line.
Invoice description In this field, you can specify the formulas for invoice descriptions by using the standard formula editor. For more information about formulas, see: About formulas.
Line description In this field, you can specify the formulas for line descriptions by using the standard formula editor. For more information about formulas, see: About formulas.
### The Case invoicing settings section
Element Description
Case count item

The non-stock item used for counting cases associated with the contract based on this template.

For details, see: Set up invoicing by the number of cases.

## The Details tab This tab lists the contract items that will be provided for contracts based on the template. Contract items are defined in the [Contract items (CT201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/contract-items-ct201000/) window. You can use this tab to include new contract items or to modify the quantity of each contract item to be included by default for a contract based on the contract template.
Column Description
Item code The unique alphanumeric identifier of the contract item.
Description A read-only field that shows the description of the contract item.
Quantity

The quantity of the contract item that is included by default in a contract based on this template.

You can modify this quantity within the allowed limits set for the contract item in the Contract items (CT201000) window.

If you plan to use the template for creating retainer contracts or contracts that are invoiced on demand and add to the template some recurring contract items, we recommend that you specify a quantity of zero.

Setup price A read-only box that shows the fee of the item to be invoiced on contract setup.
Recurring price A read-only field that shows the fee for the included quantity of the item to be invoiced recurrently.
Extra usage price A read-only field that shows the fee of the item to be invoiced as extra usage of the item.
Renewal price A read-only field that shows the fee of the item to be invoiced on contract renewal.
## The Contracts tab The **Contracts** tab lists contracts that have been created in the [Customer contracts (CT301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-contracts-ct301000/) window based on the selected template. The system adds a row to this table each time you save a newly defined contract based on the template.
Column Description
Contract ID The unique alphanumeric identifier of the contract based on this template.
Customer The customer associated with the contract.
Status The contract status, which can be Draft, Pending activation, Active, Expired, Cancelled, or Pending upgrade.
Setup date The date of the contract setup.
Expiration date The date when the contract expires.
Description The description provided for the contract.
## The Attributes tab By using this tab, you can define a list of attributes for the classification of contracts. The attributes you define here are displayed on the **Attributes** tab of the [Customer contracts (CT301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-contracts-ct301000/) window for each contract based on this template. A user can not save a new contract if a value for a required attribute is not specified.
Column Description
Attribute ID The attribute name.
Description The description of the attribute.
Sort order A number representing the position of the attribute in the resulting list of attributes.
Required A check box that indicates (if selected) that the user must provide a value for the attribute.
Internal A check box that indicates (if selected) that the attribute is not available on the Self-service portal.
Control type The type of control (element) used for the attribute. This can be one of the following options: Text, Check box, Combo box, Multi select combo, or Date/time.
Default value The default value for the attribute.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Contract usage (CT303000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/contract-usage-ct303000 page By using this window, you can view invoiced and not yet invoiced usage of existing contracts. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Contract usage (CT303000) By using this window, you can view invoiced and not yet invoiced usage of existing contracts. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can also enter usage data, if needed. ## The top part In this area, you select an existing contract to view its usage and invoicing history.
Element Description
Contract ID The contract for which you want to view usage information.
## The Transactions not yet invoiced tab This tab contains various information about the not yet invoiced activities related to the contract.
Column Description
Branch The appropriate branch.
Item ID The non-stock item to be invoiced.
Description A description of the non-stock item.
UoM The unit of measure used for the item.
Quantity A number of units used for the item.
Date The date of the activity, case, applied labour, or other usage (for the item).
Case ID The link to the case whose invoicing resulted in this transaction. This column is displayed only if the Customer management functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
## The Transactions history tab This tab displays information about the items of a contract that were invoiced. You can use the elements in the upper area of the tab to select a particular post period to view only specific usage in the table.
Element Description
Post period The post period for which you want to view invoicing information.
Column Description
Branch The appropriate branch.
Item ID The non-stock item.
Description A description of the non-stock item.
UoM The unit of measure used for the item.
Quantity The used quantity of the item (in the units of measure).
Date The date of the activity, case, applied labour, or other usage (for the item).
Type The type of the customer ledger document.
Reference no. The reference number of the invoice. You can click the link to navigate to the Sales invoices (AR301000) window so you can view invoice details.
Invoicing date The date when the invoice was issued.
Case ID The ID of the case whose invoicing resulted in this transaction.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Payment terms (CS206500) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/payment-terms-cs206500 page You can use this window to define multiple types of payment terms that are commonly used by suppliers in their relations with your company and by your company in its relations with customers. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Payment terms (CS206500) You can use this window to define multiple types of payment terms that are commonly used by suppliers in their relations with your company and by your company in its relations with customers. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. Payment terms include the instalment option (one payment or multiple instalments), the payment schedule, and the terms for a cash discount (for only the single instalment option). Also, payment terms can be used as a schedule for overdue charges. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The General information section You use the elements in this area to define a new set of payment terms and its settings, or to select an existing set of terms and view its settings.
Element Description
Terms ID The unique identifier for these payment terms. The alphanumeric string may contain up to 10 characters.
Description A detailed description of the payment terms. This alphanumeric string may contain up to 30 characters.
Visible to

The target audience for which the terms are visible, which can be one of the following:

All
The terms can be assigned to both suppliers and customers.
Suppliers
The terms can be assigned to suppliers only.
Customers
The terms can be assigned to customers only.
Disabled
The terms are removed from the selection lists for both suppliers and customers.
## The Due day settings section
Element Description
Due date type

The method of due date calculation. The following options are available:

Fixed number of days
The payment is due a fixed number of days after a sale or purchase. You should specify the number of days as Due day 1.
Day of next month
The payment is due on a particular day of the next month; you should also specify the day of the month as Due day 1.
End of the month
The payment is due at the end of the current month.
End of next month
The payment is due at the end of the next month.
Day of the month
The payment is due on a particular day of the current month. You should also specify the day of the month as Due day 1.
Fixed number of days starting next month
The payment is due a fixed number of days starting the next month after a sale or purchase. You should specify the number of days as Due day 1.
Custom
With this option, you specify two due days that could be used; which due day is to be used depends on the time interval set for the document’s date. For example: You may specify one due day for documents issued in the first part of the month, and the second due day for documents issued in the second part of the month. You use the remaining elements in the Due date settings section to set the due days and their respective date ranges.
Move due date if on the weekend If the due date on the invoice falls onto a weekend (Saturday or Sunday), use the options in the drop-down to calculate it to the Friday before the due date or the Monday after it. With the option Keep the exact date the due date remains unchanged.
Due day 1 The first due day, which is used with certain Due date type options. Specify the number of days if the Fixed number of days option is selected, the day of the month if the Day of next month or Day of the month option is selected, and the first due day if the Custom option is selected.
Day from 1 The start day of the date range for documents due on the first due day; this element is used with the Custom option only.
Day to 1 The end day of the date range for documents due on the first due day; this element is used with the Custom option only.
Due day 2 The second due day; this element is used with the Custom option only.
Day from 2 The start day of the date range for documents due on the second due day; this element is used with the Custom option only.
Day to 2 The end day of the date range for documents due on the second due day; this element is used with the Custom option only.
## The Cash discount settings section In this section, you provide the details of the cash discount included with this set of payment terms. You can specify a cash discount only if the **Single** instalment type is selected in the **Instalments settings** section.
Element Description
Discount type

The method of calculating the cash discount period, which can be one of the following options:

Fixed number of days
If this option is selected, the discount is available a set number of days after the document date. In the Discount day field, you should also specify the number of days.
Day of next month
With this option selected, the discount is available until a particular day in the next month (that is, the month after the document date). In the Discount day field, you should specify the day of the next month.
End of month
When you select this option, the discount is available through the end of the month (that is, the month of the document date).
End of next month
With this option selected, the discount is available through the end of the next month (that is, the month after the document date).
Day of the month
If this option is selected, the discount is available until the particular day of the month when the document was issued. In the Discount day field, you should specify the day of the month.
Fixed number of days starting next month
When you select this option, the discount is available a set number of days starting the next month (that is, the month after the document date). In the Discount day field, you should specify the number of days.
Discount day The number of days or the particular day of the month, depending on the Discount type; this field is unavailable for some options.
Discount (%) The percent of the discount.
Delay days With the amount of days defined here, the cash discount will be considered when registering the payment on the invoice. For example, the cash discount date is set to the 1st of the month, the Delay days field has value 2. You register the payment on the 3rd of the month, and cash discount amount will be used.
## The Instalment settings section By using these elements, you can define how documents should be paid: in a single payment or in multiple instalments. If the amount is due in multiple instalments, you can also specify a percentage and a due date for each instalment; the due date for the first instalment is specified in the **Due day settings** section. Discounts are not available for multiple-instalment payment terms.
Element Description
Instalment type

The type of instalment, which can be one of the following options:

Single
If you select this option, other elements in this section become unavailable. You should also select the due date and other options for the single payment.
Multiple
If you select this option, payment is due in multiple instalments. You should also specify the method, frequency, and schedule of the instalments.
Number of instalments The specific number of instalments; this field is unavailable if the Split by percent in table option is selected as the Instalment method.
Instalment frequency

The frequency of instalments; this field is unavailable if the Split by percent in table option is selected as the Instalment method. The following options are available:

Weekly
The second instalment will be a week after the first one, and so on.
Monthly
The second instalment will be a month after the first one, and so on.
Semi-monthly
The second instalment will be a half of a month after the first one, and so on.
Instalment method

The method by which the amounts of instalments are calculated. Select one of the following options:

Equal parts
The document total amount (with all the applicable taxes added) is divided into equal parts. The schedule of payments is defined by the due date, instalment frequency, and number of instalments specified.
VAT in the first instalment
The amount of the document (its total before taxes) is divided into equal parts, and the VAT amount is added to the first instalment. The schedule of payments is defined by the instalment frequency and number of instalments specified.
Split by percent in table
The instalment amounts are calculated according to the percentages specified for each instalment in the Instalments schedule table below this section.
## The Instalments schedule table
Column Description
Days The number of days from the due date on which a particular instalment is due. You must use an integer between 0 (due date) and 31.
Percent The percent of a document total. As you add a new instalment, the percent is automatically adjusted to make all instalments total 100 percent.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Customer classes (AR201000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-classes-ar201000 page In this window, you can create customer classes, which are groups of customers with similar properties. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Customer classes (AR201000) In this window, you can create customer classes, which are groups of customers with similar properties. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. In this window, you can create customer classes, which are groups of customers with similar properties. These classes make it easier to create customer accounts in the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window: Once you select a class for a customer you are entering, the system inserts the settings you have defined for the class, such as default accounts and subaccounts, into the corresponding window elements. (You can override these values, if needed.) To ease the creation of customer classes, specify an existing customer class as the default one in the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. After you do this, when you create a new customer class, its elements will be populated with values from the default customer class. (You can overwrite any of these values.) For more information about customer classes, see: [About customer classes](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/preliminary-configuration/about-customer-classes/). ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The window toolbar The window toolbar includes standard and window-specific buttons. The window-specific buttons are listed below.
Button Description
Apply restriction settings to all customers Updates the security settings for all customers of the class. If you have changed the default restriction group for the selected customer class (on the General settings tab of this window, Default general settings section), clicking this action will include all customers of the class in the specified group and exclude them from the group previously specified as the default one.
## The top part In this area, you can select a class by its identifier and view its information, or you can specify the summary information for a class you are creating.
Element Description
Class ID The unique identifier of the class. You can use an alphanumeric string of up to 10 characters.
Description

A detailed description of the customer class.

> [!NOTE] > This field supports the multi-language functionality, where you can translate the entered text to multiple languages. For more information, see: About multi-language support

## The General information tab This tab is used to store general settings for the customer class. You can specify as few or as many default settings as you'd like. > [!NOTE] > Changes to class settings will not affect existing records of customers of the class; however, when you create a customer account by using the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window and fill in the **Customer class** field, the new customer gets the most up-to-date class settings. ### The Default general settings section
Element Description
Country The country of customers of the class.
VAT zone ID The default VAT zone for customers of the class.
Require VAT zone A check box that means (if selected) that the VAT zone value is required for customers of the class. If the check box is cleared, the VAT zone is optional for these customers.
Default location ID from branch

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the identifier of the branch the user is currently signed in to is used by default as the identifier of the customer’s main location instead of theMAIN (default).

This field is available only when the Business account locations functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Default restriction group The restriction group to which newly created customers of the class are assigned by default. To assign existing customers of the class to the default group, click Apply restriction settings to all suppliers in the toolbar.
Salesperson ID The salesperson to make sales to customers of the class.
Export type

The export type defined for the customer class.

See also: About export types.

Document language The language of the documents to be printed to the customers of the class.
Currency ID The default currency, by its ID, that is used in operations with customers of this class.
Enable currency override A check box that indicates (if selected) that the currency may be overridden in operations with customers of the class; that is, you can select a currency other than the default currency for individual documents.
Currency rate type The default currency rate type used in operations with customers of this class.
Enable rate override A check box that means (if selected) that users may override the currency rate type in operations with customers of the class, selecting a currency rate type other than the default one for individual documents
Group/document discount limit (%)

The maximum percentage of group-level and document-level discounts allowed per document for customers of this class.

This value will be used for validation of discounts in sales orders and invoices. If for an order or invoice, the percentage of the total discount exceeds the specified limit, the system will display a warning on the Discount detailstab of the appropriate window. The percentage of the total discount for a document is calculated as follows: the total of the Discount amt. column (on theDiscount details tab) divided by the value of the Detail total field in the top part of the appropriate window.

Price class ID The identifier of the price class.
### The Default delivery settings section
Element Description
Ship via The carrier whose service will be used by default for customers of the class.
Shipping terms The shipping terms to be assigned by default to customers of the class.
Shipping rule

The way shipments for orders should be created by default for a customer of this class. Select one of the following options:

Ship only when complete
The shipment can be created only if all the goods on the order are available for shipping.
Back orders allowed
If the quantity of the goods is not sufficient for order fulfillment, or some of the line items are not currently available, a back order should be created.
Cancel remainder
The shipment is created for any quantity of the items, and the remainder on the order is cancelled.
Warning when missing VAT registration ID When this check box is selected, the system displays a warning when VAT registration ID is missing on the item.
Warning when missing corporate ID When this check box is selected, the system displays a warning when corporate ID is missing on the order.
### The Default credit verification settings section
Element Description
Credit verification

The credit verification rule for customers of the class. The following options are available:

Days past due
Defines the credit period as a certain number of days past the due date of the invoice. The number of days is specified as the Credit days past due in this section.
Credit limit
Does not allow the customer to exceed the credit limit amount (the Credit limit in this section).
Limit and days past due
Causes both rules to be applied: The customer’s debt should not exceed the credit limit, and the payment date should not exceed the due date of an invoice by more days than Credit days past due specifies.
Disabled
Uses no credit verification in relations with customers of the class.
Credit limit The credit limit amount for customers of the class if the Credit limit or Limit and days past due option is selected in the Credit verification field.
Amount over limit The maximum amount allowed over the credit limit for customers of the class.
Credit days past due The duration of the credit period. This value is used if the Days past due or Limit and days past due option is selected in the Credit verification field.
### The Default financial and payment settings section
Element Description
Terms The default payment terms of the customer class; terms are defined in the Payment terms (CS206500) window.
Statement cycle ID The default statement cycle to be used for customers of this class.
Payment method The payment method used by default in relations with these customers.
Apply payments automatically A check box that indicates (if selected) that payment application may be performed automatically for customers of the class.
Apply overdue charges

A check box that indicates (if selected) that overdue charges can be applied to these customers.

This check box is available if the Overdue charges functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Overdue charge ID

The overdue charge to be applied for customers of this class.

The option is available if the Overdue charges functionality has been enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Enable write-offs A check box that indicates (if selected) that balance and credit write-offs are allowed for customers of this class.
Write-off limit

The maximum value that may be written off for customers of the class. All balances and credits that are less than this value may be written off.

This field is available only if the Enable write-offs check box is selected.

Exclude debt collection A check box that, if selected, will exclude the customer invoices connected to this customer class to be sent to debt collection. You can reverse this setting on the Customer classes (AR201000) window, tab General information, by de-selecting the check box Exclude debt collection.
### The Default customer properties section
Element Description
Webhook notification The check box you select to enable Webhook notifications for the customer class.
### The Default print and email settings section
Element Description
Print invoices A check box that indicates (if selected) that invoices can be printed in the Send invoices (AR508000) window.
Send invoices by email A check box that indicates (if selected) that invoices can be sent by email to customers of the class by using the Send invoices (AR508000) window.
Print dunning letters

A check box that indicates (if selected) that dunning letters can be printed for sending to customers of the class by using the Print/release dunning letters (AR522000) window.

This field is available only if the Dunning letter management functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Send dunning letters by email

A check box that indicates (if selected) that dunning letters canbe sent by email to customers of the class by using the Print/release dunning letters (AR522000) window.

This field is available only if the Dunning letter management functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Print statements A check box that indicates (if selected) that statements can be printed for sending to customers of the class in the Print statements (AR503500) window.
Send statements by email A check box that indicates (if selected) that statements can be sent by email to customers of the class by using the Print statements (AR503500) window.
Multi-currency statements A check box that indicates (if selected) that statements will be printed or sent by email in multi-currency format for customers of the class.
Statement type

The statement type used by default in relations with customers of the class:

Open item
A statement includes all open items for the customer.
Balance brought forward
The amount outstanding from the previous statement is shown at the beginning of the statement.
### The Send AutoInvoice Route section
Element Description
Send invoices to AutoInvoice Select this check box if you are using AutoInvoice and want to send invoices directly to this service.
Send invoices to AutoInvoice as banking e-Invoice (Norway) A check box that, if selected, indicates that you can send invoices to AutoInvoice as banking e-invoices. This applies to Norway only.
Print

When this check box is selected, a new element is added into the outgoing invoice called MediaType that will be populated with the Print value. The customer language is also retrieved from the Customers (AR303000) window from the Document language field. This is used in Sweden when the printing service is activated.

This check box is only visible when you have not enabled PEPPOL invoice in the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000).

You can only select this check box if you select the Send invoices to AutoInvoice check box.

Exclude invoice PDF

When selected, this enables the possibility to not generate and imbed invoice PDF while sending electronic invoices via the PEPPOL BIS invoice format.

This check box is only visible when you have enabled PEPPOL invoice in the in the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000).

You can only select this check box if you select the Send invoices to AutoInvoice or Send invoices to AutoInvoice as banking e-Invoice (Norway) check box.

Use the first AutoInvoice attachment to view invoice

When this check box is selected, the first attachment marked to be sent to AutoInvoice will be the visible invoice for the receiver. This only applies if an attachment exists on the invoice, else the pure XML will be used to generate a readable version of the invoice for the receiver.

This check box is only visible when you have enabled PEPPOL invoice in the in the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000).

You can only select this check box if you select the Send invoices to AutoInvoice or Send invoices to AutoInvoice as banking e-Invoice (Norway) check box and the Exclude invoice PDF check box.

## The General ledger accounts tab This tab holds the default general ledger accounts and corresponding subaccounts of customers of the class.
Element Description
Customer ledger account The asset account that stores the balance of the customers of this class.
Customer ledger sub. The subaccount for the asset account that stores the balance of the transactions related to customers of this class.
Cash discount account The expense account used to record cash discount amounts received by customers of this class.
Cash discount sub. The subaccount used with the expense account to record the discount amounts received by customers of this class.
Sales account The income account used to record sales made to the customers of this class.
Sales - non-taxable account The non-taxable sales account used to record sales made to the customers of this class.
Sales - EU account The EU sales account used to record sales made to the customers of this class.
Sales - export account The export sales account used to record sales made to the customers of this class.
Sales sub. The subaccount used to record sales made to customers of the class.
Discount account

The expense account used to record trade discount amounts received by customers of this class.

This field is available only if the Customer and supplier discounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Discount sub.

The subaccount used with the expense account to record the discount amounts received by customers of this class.

This field is available only if the Customer and supplier discounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Prepayment account The account to record prepayments received from customers of the class.
Prepayment sub. The corresponding subaccount.
Freight account The income account used to record the freight charges for shipping the goods to customers of this class.
Freight sub. The subaccount used with the income account to record the freight charges for shipping the goods to customers of this class.
Unrealised gain account

The account to record unrealised gains calculated on transactions with customers of this class.

If no account is selected in this column, the account specified in the Currencies (CM202000) window will be used.

Unrealised gain sub.

The corresponding subaccount to record unrealised gains on transactions with customers of this class.

If no subaccount is selected in this column, a subaccount will be generated according to the rule specified in the Combine gain/loss sub. from field in the Currency management preferences (CM101000) window.

Unrealised loss account

The account to record unrealised losses calculated on transactions with customers of this class.

If no account is selected in this column, the account specified in the Currencies (CM202000) window will be used.

Unrealised loss sub.

The corresponding subaccount to record unrealised losses on transactions with customers of this class.

If no subaccount is selected in this column, the subaccount will be generated according to the rule specified in the Combine gain/loss sub. from field in the Currency management preferences (CM101000) window.

## The Attributes tab This tab contains the list of customer attributes associated with the class. You can select an attribute from the list of attributes defined in your system. To add a new attribute, use the [Attributes (CS205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/attributes-cs205000/) window. The table toolbar includes only standard buttons.
Element Description
Attribute ID The name of the attribute, which serves as its identifier. An alphanumeric string of up to 10 characters may be used.
Description A detailed description of the attribute. Use an alphanumeric string of up to 50 characters.
Sort order A number that represents the order of the attribute for sorting in reports.
Required A check box that indicates (if selected) that the attribute value is required for all customers of the class.
Internal A check box that indicates (if selected) that the attribute is not available for portal users.
Control type The type of control for the attribute: Text, Combo, Multi select combo, Lookup, Check field, or Date/time.
Default value The default value of the attribute.
## The Mailing settings tab The **Mailing settings** tab contains the list of the predefined mailings for customers of the class. Mailings are used to send electronic versions of documents(by email) to customers and company employees overseeing operations with customers of the class. The mailing settings specified here will be used as default values for mailings configured for particular customers. You can select mailings for the customer class from the list of predefined mailings available in the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window and in the [Sales order preferences (SO101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-order-preferences-so101000/) window (if the Inventory module is enabled in the system). The **Mailing settings** tab provides default values for mailings to be configured for particular customers. Emails for active mailings will be generated and sent to customer contacts and company employees when a user invokes the action specific to the mailing on appropriate processing forms. Such emails can contain customer statements, invoices, or dunning letters in any of the available formats. The tab includes the **Mailings** table, with the list of mailings, and the **Recipients** table, with the list of recipients. In the **Recipients** table, you can specify default types of customer contacts, not particular contacts. Only employees of your company can be specified as email recipients at the customer class level. ### The Mailings table By using this table you can view and modify the list of mailings to be available by default for customers of the class. The settings here are used as follows: + To provide default values for mailing settings for customers of the class, + To specify the mailings to be used to inform employees of your company, if needed, about changes in the documents of customers of this class.
Element Description
Mailing ID The unique identifier of this mailing.
Branch The branch for which this mailing is defined.
Email account The system email account to be used by default for sending emails for this mailing to customers of the class. If no account is specified, the default system account will be used.
Report The customer ledger report to be used by default as the email body for the mailing, if this mailing uses a report rather than a mailing template.
Notification template The email template to be used for generating personalised emails for this mailing, if a template is used. For each mailing, you can specify either a report or an email template. By default, a notification template specified in the Notification template column on the Mailing settings tab of the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window is inserted in this column (if any).
Format The format in which the report, if a report is used, will be sent by default if a recipient has no preferences. Select one of the following options: HTML, Excel, or PDF.
Active A check box that indicates (if selected) that this mailing is active. Emails will be sent for only active mailings.
### The Recipients table Use the **Recipients** table to view and modify the list of default recipients for mailings. This list is used primarily to provide default contact types for the customer class; if necessary, you can also specify an employee of your company to receive electronic copies of documents of customers of this class.
Element Description
Contact type

The type of contact to receive the mailing:

Primary
The contact specified as the customer’s primary contact
Invoicing
The contact specified as the customer’s remittance contact
Shipping
The contact specified as the customer’s shipping contact
Employee
The employee of your company who handles the documents of customers of the class or is otherwise associated with the customers
Contact ID

The particular recipient of the selected type.

A recipient can be specified only if Employee has been specified in the Contact type column. This employee will by default receive emails with documents of all customers of the class.

Format The format in which the document (formatted according to the selected report if applicable) will be sent for recipients of this type by default. Select one of the following options: HTML, Excel, or PDF.
Active A check box that indicates (if selected) that this contact or contact type is active. Only active recipients will receive emails for the mailing.
Bcc A check box that indicates (if selected) that the contacts of this type will by default receive blind carbon copies (Bcc) of the emails for this mailing.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Customer contracts (CT301000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-contracts-ct301000 page By using this window, you can create and maintain contracts for customer service. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Customer contracts (CT301000) By using this window, you can create and maintain contracts for customer service. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. By using this window, you can create and maintain contracts for customer service. When you are creating a new contract, you can select the contract template you want to base it on. For more details, see [About contract setup and activation](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-setup-and-activation/about-contract-setup-and-activation/). ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Actions

Provides the following menu commands, which you can click to invoke actions:

Set up contract
Initiates contract setup. You can modify the contract setup date in the Set up contract dialog box that opens. By default, the contract setup date is the date specified in the Setup date field on the Summary tab of this window (the Contract settings section). When the operation has completed successfully, the contract gets the Pending activation status and an invoice is generated for the contract items that have a setup price specified.
Activate contract
Initiates the provision of contract services. You can modify the contract activation date in the Activate contract dialog box that opens. By default, the activation date is the date specified in the Activation date field on the Summary tab (the Contract settings section). When the operation has completed successfully, the contract gets the Active status and an invoice is generated for contract items that have a prepaid recurring price specified. (The recurring price is invoiced in proportion to the services to be used.)
Set up and activate contract
Initiates contract setup and service provision on the same date. You can modify the contract setup and activation date in the Activate contract dialog box that opens. By default, this date is the date specified in the Activation date field on the Summary tab (the Contract settings section).
Run contract invoicing
Initiates the invoicing process for the contract according to the invoicing schedule. After the operation has completed, you can view and further process the generated invoice on the Customer ledger history tab of the current window.
Renew contract
Initiates contract renewal according to the type of the contract. For details, see: About contract renewal.
Terminate contract
Cancels the contract (the contract status is changed to Cancelled ); no services will be provided.
Upgrade contract
Initiates the contract upgrade. The contract is given the Pending upgrade status and contract details can be edited. If you run contract invoicing for such contracts, it is performed according to the settings of the previous contract.
Activate upgrade
Initiates the provision of contract services according to the new settings that you have specified when the contract status was Pending upgrade. For details, see: Make changes to contract services.
Undo last action
Cancels the last action performed on this contract. This menu command is unavailable when the contract has the Draft status and when the last action involved released documents. After an action is undone, the Undo last action command becomes available again after another action is performed on a contract. The list of actions performed is available on the Contract history tab of this window.
Change ID
Brings up the Specify new ID dialog box, where you can type the new contract identifier.
Inquiries

Provides the following menu command, which you can click for quick access to an inquiry window:

Contract usage
Navigates to the Contract usage (CT303000) window so you can view the usage of the contract.
### The Set up contract dialog box This dialog box opens when you click the **Set up contract** action. By using this dialog box, which includes the following elements, you can modify the date of the contract setup.
Element Description
Setup date

The date of contract setup.

By default, this box contains the date specified in the Setup date field on the Summary tab of the contract.

OK (button) Initiates the selected operation.
Cancel (button) Closes the dialog box without performing the selected operation.
### The Activate contract dialog box This dialog box opens when you click the **Activate contract** or **Set up and activate contract** action. By using this dialog box, which includes the following elements, you can modify the date of the contract activation.
Element Description
Activation date

The date of contract activation.

By default, this box contains the date specified in the Activation date field on the Summary tab of the contract.

OK (button) Initiates the selected operation.
Cancel (button) Closes the dialog box without performing the selected operation.
### Specify new ID This dialog box opens when you select the **Change ID** action. By using the dialog box, you can modify the identifier of the contract.
Element Description
Contract ID The new contract identifier.
OK (button) Changes the contract identifier to the new one.
## The top part You use the elements in this area to create a new contract based on a specific template or to select an existing contract for editing.
Element Description
Contract ID The unique identifier of a contract, which is specified in accordance with the configuration of the CONTRACT segmented key. The CONTRACT segmented key inherits its structure from the PROJECT segmented key.
Contract template The contract template that is used as a base for the contract.
Status

The status of the contract, which is one of the following:

Draft
The contract has not been activated and cannot yet be used.
Pending activation
The contract is set up and needs to be activated so that you can start providing services and initiate recurring invoicing (if required).
Active
The contract is activated and should be used as the basis for invoicing.
Expired
The contract has expired and can be renewed within the grace period.
Cancelled
The contract has been cancelled and is no longer used.
Pending upgrade
The contract is being prepared for upgrade and can be edited and invoiced. Contract invoicing is performed according to the settings of the previous contract.
Customer The customer associated with the contract.
Location The customer location associated with the contract.
Description

The description of the contract, which includes any related comments.

> [!NOTE] > This field supports the multi-language functionality, where you can translate the entered text to multiple languages. For more information, see: About multi-language support

Balance A read-only field that displays the sum of the balances of open invoices associated with the contract.
## The Summary tab You use this tab to configure the general settings of a new contract or to view the settings of an existing contract. ### The Contract settings section
Element Description
Setup date The contract setup date. For contracts with the Draft status, in this field, you select the setup date, which will be displayed by default and can be changed in the Set up contract dialog box (which opens when you click the Set up contract action). This field is read-only after the contract has been set up.
Activation date The contract activation date. For contracts with the Draft or Pending activation status, you use this field to select the date, which will be displayed by default and can be changed in the Activate contract dialog box (which opens when you click the Activate contract action). This field is read-only after the contract has been activated.
Expiration date A read-only field that displays the date when the contract will expire. The date is calculated automatically according to the contract invoicing schedule.
Termination date A read-only field that displays the date when the contract was cancelled, if applicable.
Grace period (in days) The period of time after the expiration date when the renewable contract can be renewed. After the end of the grace period, only a copy of this contract with the Draft status can be created when you click the Renew contract action (that is, you cannot renew the same contract).
Mass renewal A check box that, if selected, indicates that this contract is available for mass processing and is to be displayed in the Renew contracts (CT502000) window.
Renewal point x Days before expiration

The number of days before the contract expiration date when the system starts to display the contract in the Renew contracts (CT502000) window if the Mass renewal check box is selected for the contract.

The accepted maximum value in the field is 3650 days (10 years).

Currency A read-only field that displays the currency to be used for contract invoicing.
### The Invoicing schedule section
Element Description
Invoicing schedule starts on A read-only field that displays the start date of the first invoicing period. The date, which is calculated automatically according to the contract invoicing schedule, is displayed after contract activation.
Invoicing period

The type of invoicing schedule, which can be one of the following options: Week, Month, Quarter, Half a year, Year, Statement-based, or On demand.

The invoice date is calculated based on the selected option and the date when the invoicing schedule is started. The On demand option means that invoicing is not scheduled and you can invoice the contract on any date.

The option cannot be used with contract items that have recurring pricing configured, except for items that are tied up with a deposit item or have a default quantity of zero. For details on deposit contract items, see: About retainer contracts.

Last invoicing date A read-only field that shows the date when the invoicing was performed most recently.
Next invoicing date The date of the next invoicing invoice, according to the invoicing schedule.
### The Invoice information section
Element Description
Invoice to

The setting that defines the customer account to be invoiced for a contract. The following options are available:

Parent account
The account to be invoiced is the parent account of the customer account specified in the Customer field of the top part of this window.
Customer account
The account to be invoiced is the account specified in the Customer field of the top part of this window.
Specific account
The account to be invoiced is the account specified in the Account field of the current section of the Summary tab.
Account The specific account that is to be invoiced for contract services. This field is available only if the Specific account option is selected in the Invoice to field.
Location The customer location associated with the account the contract is invoiced to.
Invoice description In this field, you can specify the formulas for invoice descriptions by using the standard formula editor. The field is available for editing only when the Enable overriding formulas in contracts check box is selected in the Contract templates (CT202000) window. For more information about formulas, see: About formulas.
Line description In this field, you can specify the formulas for line descriptions by using the standard formula editor. The field is available for editing only when the Enable overriding formulas in contracts check box is selected in the Contract templates (CT202000) window. For more information about formulas, see: About formulas.
### The Contract management section
Element Description
Owner The owner of the contract.
Salesperson The salesperson associated with the contract.
Case count item A non-stock item used for counting cases associated with the contract. For details, see: Set up invoicing by the number of cases.
## The Details tab This tab lists the contract items provided under the contract. The list of contract items is loaded automatically from the template you have selected. You can modify the list of items if the **Enable template item override** check box is selected for the template in the [Contract templates (CT202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/contract-templates-ct202000/) window.
Element Description
Effective from The date when the contract was set up or upgraded. This field is available for editing when the contract has the Pending upgrade status. You may select a date here that is to be displayed by default and can be changed in the Activate contract dialog box, which opens when you click the Activate upgrade action.
Promo code The code of the discount to be applied.
Pending setup

A read-only field that displays information as follows:

  • If the contract status is Draft, the total of setup fees (item setup price multiplied by included quantity)
  • If the contract status is Pending upgrade, the total difference of setup fees before upgrade and during upgrade setup (the item setup price multiplied by the difference in quantity)
Pending recurring

A read-only field that displays information as follows:

  • If the contract status is Draft, the total of recurring fees (item recurring price multiplied by included quantity)
  • If the contract status is Pending upgrade, the total difference of recurring fees before upgrade and during upgrade setup (item recurring price multiplied by the difference in quantity)
Pending renewal A read-only field that displays the total of renewal prices (item renewal price multiplied by included quantity). This field is displayed for contracts that have the Draft or Pending upgrade status.
Total pending A read-only field that displays the total pending amount. This field is displayed for contracts that have the Draft or Pending Upgrade status.
Current setup A read-only field that displays the total of setup fees (item setup price multiplied by included quantity). This field is populated with this sum on contract activation or upgrade.
Current recurring A read-only field that displays the total of recurring fees (item recurring price multiplied by included quantity). This field is populated with this sum on contract activation or upgrade.
Current renewal A read-only field that displays the total of renewal prices (item renewal price multiplied by included quantity). This field is populated with the sum on contract activation or upgrade.
Column Description
Item code The identifier of the contract item.
Description A description of the item, with any relevant comments.
Included The contract item quantity included by default. It can be overridden within the allowed limits. For recurring contract items, if any are added to retainer contracts or contracts that are invoiced on demand, we recommend that you specify an included quantity of zero.
Difference The quantity difference if the contract status is Pending upgrade.
Setup price The contract item price for setup.
Setup discount (%) The discount percent applied to the setup price.
Recurring price The contract item recurring price.
Extra usage price The contract item price for extra usage.
Recurring discount (%) The discount percent applied to the recurring price.
Renewal price The contract item price for renewal.
Renewal discount (%) The discount percent applied to the renewal price.
## The Recurring summary tab This tab lists the contract items that have a recurring price configured.
Element Description
Recurring total A read-only field that displays the total sum to be invoiced for the current invoicing period.
Extra usage total A read-only field that displays the total sum to be invoiced for extra usage for the current invoicing period.
Total due A read-only field that displays the total amount to be invoiced for the current invoicing period.
Column Description
Item code The identifier of the contract item.
Description A description of the item, with any relevant comments.
Item ID The identifier of the non-stock item the customer is invoiced for recurrently.
UoM The unit of measure used for invoicing. The UoM is the contract currency for deposit contract items.
Invoice type The item invoicing policy defined in the contract item. The invoicing type is Deposit for deposit contract items.
Included The item quantity the customer is invoiced for at the recurring price.
Recurring price The recurring price of the item.
Recurring discount (%) The discount percent applied to the recurring price.
Extra usage price The price of extra usage of the item.
Not yet invoiced The item quantity for which the customer is to be invoiced for the current invoicing period.
Used total The item quantity used from contract activation until the current business date.
## The Employee overrides tab The tab displays a list of the associations between the earning type, the labour item, and the employee. An association is used to determine the labour item to be used as the source of the price and sales accounts for recording contract usage if this labour item is not explicitly defined in the case class for the earning type specified in the released activity. For details, see [About usage-based contracts](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-examples/usage-based-contracts/about-usage-based-contracts/).
Column Description
Type of hour The identifier of the type of hour.
Description The description of the type of hour.
Labour item The identifier of the non-stock item (of the Labour type) used as a source of the price and sales account to record the contract usage.
Employee The identifier of the employee. If the employee is not selected, the value is All employees.
Employee name The name of the employee.
## The Contract history tab
Button Description
View contract Opens a new window with the Customer contracts (CT301000) window so you can view the related contract details.
### Table columns
Column Description
Action The action performed for the contract.
Date The date when the action was performed.
User The user who performed the action.
Related contract The ID of any related contract. The related contract is either derived from the current contract or served as a derivation for the current contract. The field is populated by the system during the renewal process. For details, see: Renew a contract.
## The Sales history tab The tab displays the list of documents related to the contract.
Column Description
Type The type of customer ledger document.
Invoice no. The invoice number of the document. By clicking the number, you can navigate to the Sales invoices (AR301000) window, where you can view the details of the document.
Post period The financial period to which the invoice transactions are posted.
Date The date of the invoice.
Due date The due date of the invoice.
Status The status of the invoice.
Amount The amount of the invoice.
Balance The balance of the invoice if it was paid partially.
Payment method The customer default payment method.
## The Attributes tab The list of attributes defined in the selected template. You can use available attributes for classification of contracts.
Column Description
Attribute The attribute name.
Required A check box that indicates (if selected) that the user must provide a value for the attribute.
Value The value for the attribute.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Customer details (AR402000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-details-ar402000 page You use this window to track outstanding balances for each customer. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Customer details (AR402000) You use this window to track outstanding balances for each customer. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can select the branch, customer, financial period, currency, and customer ledger account–subaccount pair used for the customer; you then view the list of documents associated with the customer. By default the window displays the list of open customer documents for the selected customer (with the **Open** status), but you can add to the list closed documents and unreleased documents by selecting the **Show all documents** and **Include unreleased documents** check boxes correspondingly. You can also print other reports based on this information, which are listed under **Reports** in the upper part of the window. > [!NOTE] > Cash sales transactions are shown as split into **Cash sale** and **Cash sale invoice** transactions. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Actions

Provides the following menu commands, which you can click to invoke actions:

Enter new invoice
Navigates to the Sales invoices (AR301000) window, so that you can enter a new invoice for the customer.
Enter new payment
Navigates to the Customer payments (AR302000) window, so that you can enter a new payment for the customer.
Pay invoice
Navigates to the Supplier payments (AP302000) window, so that you can enter a new payment for the selected invoice.
Reports

Provides the following menu commands, which you can click for fast access to reports:

Balance by customer
Navigates to the Balance by customer (AR632500) report.
Customer history
Navigates to the Customer history (AR652000) report.
Aged past due
Navigates to the Aged past due (AR631000) report.
Aged outstanding
Navigates to the Aged outstanding (AR631500) report.
Customer documents
Navigates to the Customer documents (AR621500) report.
## The top part You use the elements in this area to select a financial period, a customer, and the currency of the operations. Also, you can select a particular customer ledger account with the corresponding subaccount.
Element Description
Company The company for which you want to view data. By default, it is the company you have access to.
Branch The branch for which you want to view data. By default, it is the branch you have access to.
Customer The customer whose open documents you want to view. Obligatory.
Period The financial period for which you want to view the data. If you make no selection, information related to all open periods will be displayed.
Currency The currency used with the specified customer.
Customer ledger account The customer ledger account used for the customer.
Customer ledger sub The corresponding subaccount.
Show all documents A check box that indicates (if selected) that closed documents (with the Closed status) are included in the list. The check box is not displayed if a financial period is selected in the Period field.
Include unreleased documents A check box that indicates (if selected) that unreleased documents (with the On hold and Balanced statuses) are included in the list.
Balance by documents A read-only field that displays the total balance recalculated for all customer’s documents matching the selected criteria. The balance will not change based on whether the Open documents only option is selected because Closed documents do not affect the balance.
Current balance A read-only field that displays the customer balance retrieved from the account history records in the database.
Prepayments balance The balance of customer prepayments calculated for the selected criteria.
Balance discrepancy

A read-only field that displays the difference between the Balance by documents value and the sum of Current balance and

Prepayment balance values. If unreleased documents are not included, the value should be equal to zero; if it’s not zero, there are errors in the database.

Include child accounts

A check box that you select to view documents of both the parent account and its child accounts. The Balance by documents, Current balance, Prepayment balance, and Balance discrepancy fields (in the top part of the window) will display the consolidated balance for parent accounts that have child accounts for which the Consolidate balance check box is selected on the Invoicing settings tab of the Customers (AR303000) window.

The field is available if the Parent-child customer relationship functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

## The table The table contains the list of documents matching the criteria specified in the top part. The amounts or balances on customer payments are shown as negative values.
Column Description
Customer The customer number.
Branch The branch ID.
Type The type of customer ledger document: Invoice, Credit note, Debit note, Payment, Overdue charge, or Prepayment.
Reference no. The identifier of the document as it was assigned by the number series.
Post period The period to which the document transactions should be posted.
Date The date when the document was created.
Due date The due date of the document.
Status The status of the document.
Currency The currency of the document.
Original amount (currency) The amount in the currency of the document (before discount).
Balance (currency) The balance of the document in the specified currency.
Cash discount taken (currency) The cash discount taken in the specified currency.
Orig. amount The original amount of the document, before payment application, in the base currency.
Balance The balance of the document, if a payment was applied, in the base currency.
Cash discount taken The amount of cash discount received by the customer on the document.
RGOL amount The total amount of realised gain or loss (RGOL) incurred as the result of currency rate fluctuation.
Payment method The payment method used by the customer for the document.
Sales invoice no./payment no. The reference number of the original customer document.
Invoice text A detailed description of the document.
Period beg. balance The balance of the account at the beginning of the selected financial period.
Period beg. balance in currency The account balance in the specified currency at the start of the selected financial period.

Related pages

Concepts

Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000 section You use this window to configure the Customer ledger workspace. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) You use this window to configure the Customer ledger workspace. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. Settings defined in this window include number series for customer ledger documents, document and payment processing options, and mailing settings. Some settings in this window cannot be changed once the workspace is in use, such as the number series assigned for invoices, debit andcredit notes, and customer payments. Other settings can be changed at will. ## The window toolbar The window toolbar includes only standard buttons. ## The General information tab The general settings for the Customer ledger workspace include the number series used for customer documents and for financial charges. Also, you can set various document processing options. > [!NOTE] > You can use different number series for each document type or the same series for multiple types. In the latter case, the system assigns all documents numbers (identifiers) from the same series, based on the order they were entered or generated, so two successive identifiers may refer to documents of different types. ### The Number series section
Element Description
General ledger batch number series The number series used for batches originating in the Customer ledger workspace.
Invoice number series The number series used for customer ledger invoices. A customer ledger invoice is created for each original customer document, invoice, note, or financial charge.
Payment number series The number series used for customer payments.
Debit note number series The number series used for debit adjustments.
Credit note number series The number series used for credit adjustments.
Write-off number series The number series used for write-off documents.
Overdue charge number series The number series used for overdue charges. The option is available if the Overdue charges functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Price worksheet number series The number series used for price worksheets.
Dunning fee number series The number series used for dunning fees.
### The Posting settings section
Element Description
Automatically post on release A check box that indicates (if selected) that transactions will be automatically posted to the General ledger workspace once they are released in the Customer ledger workspace.
Post summary when updating the general ledger

A check box that indicates (if selected) that customer ledger documents will be posted to the General ledger workspace with summarised row amounts if particular criteria are met. That is, if multiple rows in a customer ledger document specify the same account (and subaccount, if any) and branch (if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window), then in the general ledger batch, these rows will be combined into one row with the summarised amount. Note: The summarised transaction amounts can be posted to an account (and subaccount, if any) only if both the Post summary when updating the general ledger check box is selected in this window and the Summary option is specified for an account in the Post option column in the Chart of accounts (GL202500) window.

Note

The general ledger batch can contain multiple documents if the Consolidated posting to general ledger functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window. For details, see Overview of the functionalities.

Activate migration mode

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the user can release documents in Customer ledger and Supplier ledger (both invoices and payments) without creating a General ledger batch in the General ledger.The balance will still be added to the customer or supplier.

Stock items can also be selected.

The Sales and Purchases workspaces cannot be used.

### The Data entry settings section
Element Description
Default customer class ID The customer class to be used as the default class. When you create a new class by using the Customer classes (AR201000) window, the settings defined for the class specified here will be inserted. (You can change any of these settings.)
Combine sales sub. from

The subaccount mask that defines the rule of selecting segment values for the sales subaccount to be used in data entry windows in the Customer ledger workspace. To set up the rule, select a segment, press F3, and select the source of the segment value, which is one of the following options:

C
Subaccount associated with the branch
E
Subaccount associated with the employee
I
Subaccount associated with the item
L
Subaccount associated with the customer location
S
Subaccount associated with the salesperson

For a segment, the characters designating each option are repeated as many times there are characters in the segment. See: About combined subaccounts for more information.

Rounding rule for invoices

The rule to be used for invoice total amount rounding, which is one of the following:

Use currency precision
To round the amounts to the precision supported for the currency of the document
Nearest
To round each invoice total to the nearest multiple of the smallest unit (specified in the Rounding precision field)
Up
To round up each invoice total to the next multiple of the smallest unit
Down
To round down each invoice total to the previous multiple of the smallest unit

This field is available only if the Invoice rounding functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Rounding precision

The smallest unit for invoice amount rounding; this list is not available if the Use currency precision option is selected in the Rounding rule field. Select one of the following options:

0.05
To round each total to a multiple of 0.05
0.10
To round each total to a multiple of 0.1
0.50
To round each total to a multiple of 0.5
1.00
To round each total to a multiple of 1
10.00
To round each total to a multiple of 10
100.00
To round each total to a multiple of 100

This field is available only if the Invoice roundingfunctionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Hold documents on entry A check box that means (if selected) that documents will get the On hold status by default when they are saved.
Validate document totals on entry A check box that means (if selected) that totals of new documents will be validated on entry.
Require payment reference on entry A check box that means (if selected) that users must fill in the Payment ref. field in data entry windows in the Customer ledger, Cash management, and Sales workspaces.
Hold document on failed credit check A check box that indicates (if selected) that new invoices and notes are placed on hold and cannot be released for customers that failed the credit check. If the check box is not selected, new documents can be saved and processed regardless of the credit check result, although the system warns users about customers that failed their credit check.
### The Payment settings section
Element Description
Automatic payment method This value will automatically be set when you open the Process customer refunds (AR50300S) window.
Manual payment method This value will automatically be set when you open the Manual payments (AR30200S) window.
Direct debit payment method This value will automatically be set when you open the Send direct debit invoices (AR50850S) window.
### The Data processing settings section
Element Description
Age credits A check box that means (if selected) that credit notes and open payments will be aged on customer statements and reports along with invoices and debit notes according to the ageing periods defined in the Statement cycles (AR202800) window. If the check box is cleared, credit notes and open payments will appear as the current documents.
Set default overdue charges by statement cycle A check box that means (if selected) that overdue charges specified for the statement cycle are applied to an overdue document. If the check box is not selected, overdue charges specified for the customer class are applied. The option is available if the Overdue charges functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Calculate on overdue charge documents A check box that means (if selected) that overdue charges will be calculated on overdue charge documents as well as on invoices; thus, the amount of overdue charges compounds. The option is available if the Overdue charges functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Apply payments to overdue charges first A check box that indicates (if selected) that payments will be applied to overdue charges first and only after that to outstanding invoices, starting with those having the earliest dates, if the Apply payments automatically check box is selected for a customer in the Customers (AR303000) window. The option is available if the Overdue charges functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
### The Salesperson commission settings section
Element Description
Salesperson commission by

The way commissions for all salespersons are calculated:

Invoice
On the invoices associated with a salesperson, whether the invoices are paid or not
Payment
On only the paid invoices
Commission period type The way commission is paid: Monthly, Quarterly, Yearly, or By financial period.
### The Consolidation settings section
Element Description
Consolidate statements for all branches A check box that indicates (if selected) that statements from different branches should be consolidated.
Statement from branch The branch to appear on the consolidated statements.
Consolidate dunning letters for all branches A check box that indicates (if selected) that dunning letters from different branches should be consolidated.
Dunning letter from branch The branch to appear on the consolidated dunning letters.
### The Default write-off reason codes section
Element Description
Reason code balance write-off The reason code that is used by default when you perform a balance write-off operation.
Reason code credit write-off The reason code that is used by default when you perform a credit write-off operation.
### The VAT recalculation settings section This section is available only if the VAT reporting feature is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window.
Element Description
Automatically release credit notes A check box that indicates (if selected) that VAT credit notes generated for the invoices that are fully paid within the cash discount period will be released automatically when you process them in the Generate VAT on cash discount (AR504500) window.
Credit note description

The description to be used for the credit note, which is generated for a document that was paid early and that adjusts the VAT and taxable amounts.

> [!NOTE] > This field supports the multi-language functionality, where you can translate the entered text to multiple languages. For more information, see: About multi-language support

### The Customer refund settings section
Element Description
Payment message prefix The prefix that will be used in outgoing payment messages.
## The Price/discount settings tab By using this tab, you can select options that affect price calculation, price history retention, and discount application. ### The Price maintenance section
Element Description
Default rate type The default rate type to be used for calculation of prices in foreign currencies. The field provides a rate type to be used by default when you work with sales prices.
Always calculate the price from the base currency

A check box that indicates (if selected) that if a document uses a non-base currency, then the item price (sales or default) is converted to a price in the currency of the document, based on the item price expressed in the base currency. Thus, when you add an item to a document (an order or invoice) that uses a non-base currency, the system suggests the price of the item based the value of this check box:

Cleared
The system looks for a sales price of the item in the document currency, and if a sales price is found, the system suggests this item price for the document. If a sales price is not found, the system converts the default price of the item to the document currency and suggests the converted default price.
Selected
The system looks for a sales price of the item in the base currency, and if the sales price is found, the system converts this price to the document currency and suggests this item price for the document. If a sales price is not found, the system converts the default price of the item to the document currency and suggests it.
Load sales prices by alternative item ID A check box that (if selected) makes it possible to specify prices in sales price worksheets by the alternative IDs of items, so that the system will find and populate the corresponding item IDs automatically.
### The Price retention section
Element Description
Retention type

The way the history of prices, which is defined by using the Sales price worksheets (AR202010) window, will be retained. Select one of the following options:

Last price
The last defined price is kept.
Fixed number of months
The history of price changes is kept for the number of months specified in the Number of months field. The period is calculated back from the effective date of a worksheet that contains respective price record.
Note

By default, Retention type is set to Fixed number of months and Number of months is set to 0, which means that the history of prices will be kept forever.

Number of months The number of months the history of price changes should be kept. This field is available if the Fixed number of months option is selected in the Retention type field.
### The Discounts section This section is available only if the **Customer and supplier discounts** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window.
Element Description
Line discount basis

The way the line discount will be applied. Select one of the following options:

Manual amount
The discount will be applied to the line amount.
Unit price
The discount will be applied to the item’s unit price.
Apply quantity discounts to

The way the system applies the discounts defined by quantity. Select one of the following options:

The UoM on the document line
The system applies the discount to the quantity in the document line’s unit of measure (UoM).
The base UoM
The system converts the quantity in the document line’s UoM to the quantity in the base UoM and applies discounts based on the calculated base quantity.
Apply line discounts specific to A check box that indicates (if selected) that any line-level discounts should be skipped if there is a special price for the line item that is defined for this particular customer.
## The Dunning settings tab By using the **Dunning settings** tab, you can define how the system prepares dunning letters: by grouping overdue documents by customer account; or by grouping overdue documents by customer and by the dunning level of a document. The amount of the dunning letter fee (and which accounts are used for recording this fee), and what intervals are used for sending dunning letters. This tab is available only if the **Dunning letter management** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. ### The Dunning process settings section In this section, you define how the documents are grouped when the system prepares dunning letters and which documents you want to prepare letters for.
Element Description
Dunning process

The way the system groups overdue documents when prepares dunning letters. Select one of the following options:

By customer
The system prepares dunning letters by grouping overdue documents by customer account. With this option selected, the system selects the Automatically release dunning letters check box and sets it as read-only.
By document
The system prepares dunning letters by grouping overdue documents by customer and by document dunning level.
Note

We recommend that you select the way of setting a level from the very beginning and keep that setting. You can switch from By customer to By document, but switching from By document to By customer is not recommended.

Automatically release dunning letters A check box that indicates, if selected, that dunning letters are automatically released after preparation is completed. The field is available for editing if the By document option was selected in the Dunning process field.
Include other unpaid documents A check box that indicates (if selected) that the system includes in dunning letters the unpaid documents that are not due yet. This is the default value for the Include other unpaid documents check box in the Prepare dunning letters (AR521000) that you can change any time you prepare dunning letters.
Include credit note documents

A check box that indicates, if selected, that the dunning letter will contain credit notes.

This is the default value for the Include credit note documents check box in the Prepare dunning letters (AR521000) window that you can change any time you prepare dunning letters.

### The Dunning fee settings section In this section, you define the accounts to which you want to record the dunning letters fee, if your company charges one.
Element Description
Dunning fee item The non-stock item that provides an account and a subaccount (if applicable) to register the collected fee, and a VAT category.
Automatically release dunning fee documents A check box that indicates (if selected) that an invoice for the dunning fee is automatically released when the corresponding dunning letter is released. Otherwise, you need to release it manually by using the Sales invoices (AR301000) window.
### The table columns
Element Description
Dunning letter level An integer that indicates the order in which a letter of this level should be sent.
Days past due The number of days that should pass after the due date for at least one customer document before the system may generate a dunning letter of this level.
Days to settle The number of days that are added to the letter date to calculate the deadline for the payment.
Description Any comment that is relevant to a dunning letter of this level.
Dunning fee The amount of the dunning letter fee, if your company charges one, for this level.
Days to due The number of days to the due date.
Report text code The code of the report text that will be included in the dunning letter.
## The Reporting settings tab The **Reporting settings** tab contains the list of the predefined mailings for customers. Mailings are used to send electronic versions of documents (by email) to customers and company employees overseeing operations with customers. Mailing settings specified here will be used as default values for mailing settings of customer classes, which in turn will provide default values for mailings configured for particular customers. Emails for active mailings will be sent to customer contacts and company employees when an employee (a user) performs specific processing. Such emails can contain customer statements, invoices, or dunning letters. Also, customers can be notified about credit card expiration. The tab includes the **Default sources** table, with the list of mailings, and the **Default recipients** table, with the list of recipients. ### The Default sources table You use the **Default source** table to view the list of predefined mailings and select any of them for use in the Customer ledger workspace. The table toolbar includes only standard buttons.
Column Description
Mailing ID

The unique ID of the mailing. The mailings available in the Customer ledger workspace are listed below:

INVOICE
To send invoices by email
DUNNINGLETTER
To inform users and customers about customers’ outstanding balances.
STATEMENT
To inform users and customers about customers’ outstanding balances (in the base currency)
STATEMENTMC
To inform users and customers about customers’ outstanding balances (in multi-currency format)
Default email account The system email account to be used by default for sending emails for this mailing. If no account is specified, the default system account will be used.
Report The customer ledger report that, by default, will be used to structure the information available in the document. The document will be sent as an attachment. A notification template, if selected next, is used to window an email body, otherwise an email body is taken from the report settings.
Notification template

The email template to be used by default to generate personalised emails for this mailing, if a template is selected for this mailing.

Note

You need to specify either a notification template or a report for a mailing at least. If a notification template is not specified, text for email body is taken from the report settings.

The system inserts this template by default in the Notification template column on the Mailing settings tab in the Customer classes (AR201000) window when you add a mailing in the Mailings table.

Format The format in which the document (if a report is used) will be sent by default if no other preferences are specified in the Customers (AR303000) window for the particular customer contacts. Select one of the following options: HTML, Excel, or PDF.
Active A check box that indicates (if selected) that this mailing is active. Emails will be generated only for active mailings.
### The Default recipients table By using the **Default recipients** table, you can view and modify default types of recipients for the mailing selected in the**Default sources** table. Contact types specified here are used as default values for the contact types of customer classes.
Element Description
Contact type

The type of contact to receive mailings. You select one of the following options:

Primary
A primary contact of the customer
Remittance
A remittance contact of the customer
Shipping
A shipping contact of the customer
Employee
An employee of your company who handles documents of specific customer classes or specific customers, or is otherwise associated with the classes or customers
Contact ID The ID of the mailing recipient. A particular recipient can be selected only if you have selected Employee as the contact type. This employee, if one is selected, will receive emails about changes in the documents of all customers.
Format The format in which the report (if applicable) will be sent by default. Select one of the following options: HTML, Excel, or PDF.
Active A check box that indicates (if selected) that the contact or contact type is active. Only active recipients receive the emails for the mailing.
Bcc A check box that indicates (if selected) that the contact (or contact of this type) will receive a blind carbon copy (Bcc) of the emails for this mailing.
## The Payment settings tab On this tab, you can create new payment configurations. ### The top part
Element Description
Select configuration Click icon-select and double-click to select your preferred CID configuration.
Status The status of the configuration. To hide/view CID code on outgoing invoices, set the status to Inactive/Active accordingly. The Editing status allows you to edit the predefined format of the CID.
Branch The branch in which the configuration is applied. If you have multiple branches, you can add different settings for each branch.
Payment method The payment method to which you want your configuration to apply.
Digit counter The number of digits to be used in the payment references with this configuration.
Description The name for the new configuration.
Display mask The display mask to be used to control the format of dates and numeric values.
Reference modulus The modulus for the new configuration.
Reference weight The weight or relevance of the modulus.
Amount check digit The digit that is used for checking of amount.
Amount weight The weight or relevance of the amount.
### The table columns
Element Description
Element Choose the elements that will make up the new configuration.
Fixed value A fixed value in the element, if any.
Number of positions The number of digits the element should have.
Leading/trailing zeros The value that shows if leading/trailing zeros will be used in the elements or now.
## The AutoInvoice settings tab For more information about the settings to be defined here for the use of AutoInvoice, see [Settings in Customer ledger preferences](/visma-net-erp/help/work-processes/b2c/settings-in-customer-ledger-preferences/).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Customer list (AR40101S) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-list-ar40101s page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Customer list (AR40101S) This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
View customer Opens the Customers (AR303000) window so that you can view the selected customer account.
## The top part
Element Description
Customer class The customer class for which you want to display the customer accounts.
Status

The status of the customer accounts you want to display. You can select one of the following options:

Active
accounts that are in use.
On hold
accounts that are not completed; editing or additional information is needed.
Credit hold
accounts for which no invoices may be entered, because some payments have not been received.
Inactive
accounts that are set to Inactive.
One time
accounts marked as one-time customers.
Country The customer’s country.
AutoInvoice validation (B2B) When this check box is selected, the AutoInvoice validation is used on the displayed customers.
AutoInvoice validation (B2C) When this check box is selected, the AutoInvoice validation is used on the displayed customers.
## The table
Column Description
Customer no. The ID of the customer account.
Customer name The name of the customer as it is displayed in the system.
Address 1 The first line of the customer’s address.
Postcode The customer’s postcode.
City The customer’s city.
Country The customer’s country.
Corporate ID The customer’s company ID, associated with the location.
Attention The customer’s main contact attention line.
Phone 1 The default phone number of the customer.
Email The email address of the customer as a business entity.
Last sale The date when the last sale has been made to the customer.
Status The status of the customer. Accordant with the status selected in the top part of the window.
Customer class The class to which the customer is assigned. Accordant with the customer class selected in the top part of the window.
Address 2 The second line of the customer’s address.
Address 3 The third line of the customer’s address.
County The customer’s county or province.
Finvoice contract ID The ID of the customer’s Finvoice contract, if applicable.
Finvoice intermediator ID The ID of the customer’s Finvoice intermediator, if applicable.
Phone 2 An additional phone number of the customer.
Print dunning letters A check box that, if selected, indicates that dunning letters for the customer can be printed in the Print/release dunning letters (AR522000) window.
Print invoices A check box that, if selected, indicates that invoices for the customer can be printed in the Send invoices (AR508000) window.
Send dunning letters by email A check box that, if selected, indicates that you can send dunning letters for the customer by email in the Print/release dunning letters (AR522000) window.
Fax The fax number of the customer.
Send invoices to AutoInvoice When this check box is selected, invoices for the customer are sent to AutoInvoice.
Send invoices to AutoInvoice as banking e-Invoice (Norway) When this check box is selected, invoices for the customer are sent to AutoInvoice as a banking e-invoice. This applies to Norway only.
Send statements by email A check box that, if selected, indicates that statements for the customer can be sent by email to the customer in the Print statements (AR503500) window.
Terms The ID of the payment terms used in operations with the customer.
Send invoices by email A check box that, if selected, indicates that you can send invoices for the customer by email in the Send invoices (AR508000) window.
VAT registration ID The customer’s taxpayer ID associated with the location.
VAT zone The VAT zone of the customer’s default location.

Related pages

Tasks

Customer locations (CR303010) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-locations-cr303010 page In this window, which is available only if the Business account locations functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window, you can define the locations of businesses. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Customer locations (CR303010) In this window, which is available only if the Business account locations functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window, you can define the locations of businesses. For more information: [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/). This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The top part In this area, you can select a customer and create a new location for it, or select an existing location for editing.
Element Description
Business connection The customer this location is associated with.
Location ID

The identifier of the location; an alphanumeric string of up to six characters may be used.

The system automatically assigns the identifier (MAIN) to the first location associated with the customer. For each additional location, you can specify the identifier.

Active

A check box that you select if the location is active.

For auditing purposes, locations cannot be removed. If the location is not used, mark it as inactive by clearing the check box.

Location name

A descriptive name to help users recognise the location.

You can enter an alphanumeric string of up to 30 characters.

## The General information tab On this tab, you can specify the location's contact and address information. The tab has elements organised in sections to make it easier to find information. ### The Location contact section
Element Description
Same as main

A check box that you select if the contact information is the same as the company’s main information.

If this check box is selected, the elements below it are populated with this information.

Company name This location’s legal business name.
Attention Information about the contact person.
Email The location’s default email address.
Web The website address (if any) related to the location.
Phone 1 The primary phone number of the location.
Phone 2 An additional phone number of the location.
Fax The default fax number of the location.
### The Location address section
Element Description
Same as main

A check box that you select if the location address is the same as the customer’s main address.

The system then populates the elements below with this address.

Address 1 The first line of the address of this location.
Address 2 The second line of the address.
Postcode The location’s postal code.
City The city of the location.
Country The country of the location.
County The county or province of the location.
View on map A button you can click to view the location on a map.
VAT registration ID The optional VAT registration ID associated with the location. An input mask or regular expression can be set to validate this value.
Corporate ID The organisation number to be used for the customer location.
VAT zone The VAT zone associated with the location.
Export type

The export type defined for the customer location.

See also: About export types.

VAT exemption number If this location is VAT exempt, the exemption number.
EDI code The EDI code to be used for the customer location.
GLN The GLN to be used for the customer location.
Shipping branch The location of your company that will be used to ship the goods to the customer location.
Price class The price class that is associated with the customer location. A price class, defined in the Customer price classes (AR208000) window, indicates the price level offered to the location.
Default project The project associated with this location by default, or a non-project code indicating that no projects are associated by default.
### The Shipping instructions section
Element Description
Warehouse

The warehouse to issue the goods to the location.

This field appears only if the Warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Ship via The carrier used for shipping the goods to the customer location.
Shipping terms The shipping terms used in relations with the location.
Shipping zone The shipping zone used to calculate the freight charge when your company ships goods to the location.
FOB point The location at which title for the shipment passes from your company to the customer location.
Residential delivery A check box that indicates (if selected) that the shipment will be delivered to a residential area.
Saturday delivery A check box that indicates (if selected) that the shipment may be delivered on Saturday.
Insurance A check box that indicates (if selected) that insurance is required for the order.
Shipping rule

The option that defines how the orders should be fulfilled for this customer location. You can use one of the following options:

Ship only when complete
only completely fulfilled orders are allowed.
Back orders allowed
back orders are allowed if some items are out of stock.
Cancel remainder
the ordered quantity can be shipped partially, and the quantity remaining after the first shipment will be cancelled.
Order priority The priority of sales orders of this location. (This setting has no business logic tied to it in the current version and can be used for informational purposes only.)
Lead time (days) The number of days required for shipped goods to reach the location.
Calendar The calendar associated with the location. Calendar settings are defined in the Work calendar (CS209000) window.
### The Excise duty section This tab section is only available if the **Excise duty** functionality in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window is enabled.
Check box Description
Exclude from duty calculation

A check box that you select if you want the location to be excluded from excise duty calculations. Orders and invoices with items connected to excise duties will display excise duty amounts and totals, but these will always be 0.

Released invoices with excise duty items are traceable in the Sales/returns excluding excise duty (EF402000) window.

## The General ledger accounts tab On this tab, you can specify the general ledger accounts associated with the location.
Element Description
Same as default location A check box that indicates (if selected) that the accounts to be used for this location are those specified for the default customer location.
Customer ledger account The asset account used to record the account balance for this location.
Customer ledger sub. The corresponding subaccount.
Sales account The account used to record sales to this location; you must specify this account.
Sales - non-taxable account The account used to record non-taxable sales to this location.
Sales - EU account The account used to record the EU sales to this location.
Sales - export account The account used to record the export sales to this location.
Sales sub. The corresponding subaccount; you must specify a subaccount.
Discount account The expense account to record the discount received by the customer location.
Discount sub. The corresponding subaccount.
Freight account The account to record freight charges for sales orders.
Freight sub. The corresponding subaccount.
## The AutoInvoice settings tab Fields to be used when sending electronic invoices in PEPPOL BIS 3.0 format. ### The PEPPOL scheme section
Element Description
Endpoint

Seller electronic address identification scheme identifier. The identification scheme identifier of the seller electronic address.

Example value: 0088

Party identification

Buyer identifier identification scheme identifier. The identification scheme identifier of the Buyer identifier.

Example value: 0088

Party legal

Seller legal registration identifier identification scheme identifier. The identification scheme identifier of the Seller legal registration identifier.

Example value: 0007

### The References section
Element Description
Accounting cost ref.

Invoice line buyer accounting reference. A textual value that specifies where to book the relevant data into the buyer’s financial accounts.

Example value: 4217:2323:2323

Originator document ref.

Tender or lot reference. The identification of the call for tender or lot the invoice relates to.

Example value: PPID-123

Contract document ref.

Contract reference. The identification of a contract.

Example value: 123Contractref

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Customer payment methods (AR303010) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payment-methods-ar303010 page You can use this window to specify details for the payment methods used by particular customers. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Customer payment methods (AR303010) You can use this window to specify details for the payment methods used by particular customers. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can use this window to specify details for the payment methods used by particular customers. You may assign each customer any number of payment methods and, for payment methods that can involve multiple sets of details, any number of these detail sets. ## The top part In this area of the window, you can specify the customer for which you want to add a customer payment method and the payment method that will be used as a template. The layout of this area and of the **Payment method details** tab depends on the settings of the selected payment method.
Element Description
Customer The customer whose payment method you want to view or add; select a customer from the list of customers defined in the system.
Payment method The payment method used as a template for a customer payment method you are currently viewing; select a payment method to use its settings for creating a new customer payment method.
Active A check box that indicates (if selected) that the selected customer payment method is active (that is, available for recording payments).
Cash account

The cash account to accrue customer payments made by this payment method, if it differs from the default cash account specified for the payment method selected. You can select an account from the list of cash accounts allowed for the payment method.

If the field is empty, the system will use the default cash account of the selected payment method.

Description The description of the selected payment method.
## The Payment method details tab The specific elements on this tab depend on the selected payment method, which is defined in the [Payment methods (CA204000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/payment-methods-ca204000/) window.
Column Description
Description A description of the column. Depending on the selected payment method you will see different descriptions here.
Value Enter the value, for example a bank account number.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Customer payments (AR302000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000 page You can use this window to enter incoming payments and apply them against the customer's open items, as well as to create customer refunds. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Customer payments (AR302000) You can use this window to enter incoming payments and apply them against the customer's open items, as well as to create customer refunds. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can use this window to enter incoming payments and apply them against the customer's open items, as well as to create customer refunds. Also, you can add charges applied by the bank for payment processing, and release a payment document. If the payment document still has a non-zero balance after it has been applied to customer invoices and notes, you can apply its balance against additional invoices or notes. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## What to do from this window + [Match a credit note with an invoice](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/match-a-credit-note-with-an-invoice/) + [Enter a payment document](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/enter-a-payment-document/) + [Release a payment document](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/release-a-payment-document/) + [Create a payment for a sales invoice](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/create-a-payment-for-a-sales-invoice/) + [Apply a credit note to open documents](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/apply-a-credit-note-to-open-documents/) + [Correct an application record](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/correct-an-application-record/) + [View invoices paid with a specific payment document](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/view-invoices-paid-with-a-specific-payment-document/) + [Form a list of applications automatically](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/form-a-list-of-applications-automatically/) + [Form a list of applications manually](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/form-a-list-of-applications-manually/) + [Issue a refund](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/issue-a-refund/) + [Void a payment or prepayment document](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/void-a-payment-or-prepayment-document/) + [Void a customer refund](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/void-a-customer-refund/) + [Match customer documents in Customer ledger](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/match-customer-documents-in-customer-ledger/) + [Create a voided payment](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/create-a-voided-payment/) ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Release Releases the payment, automatically creating a batch of appropriate transactions.
Void The system creates the document of the Voided refund type with a negative amount. For the voided refund, you can specify the application date, period, and description, and then release the voided refund.
Inquiries Provides the Customer details and Customer documents menu command, which you can click for quick access to the respective windows.
Reports

Provides the following menu commands, which you can click for quick access to reports:

Unreleased transactions (detailed)
Navigates to the Unreleased transactions (detailed) (AR610500) report.
Customer documents (detailed)
Navigates to the Customer documents (detailed) (AR622000) report.
## The top part Here, you can enter a new payment or select one of the existing documents for viewing its details or for editing.
Element Description
Type

The type of a document. The following types are available:

Payment
A document recording a payment received from the customer. One payment may be applied to multiple invoices, debit notes, and overdue charges.
Credit note
A document crediting the customer, which may be used as a base for a customer refund or applied against invoices and debit notes.
Prepayment
A document recording a customer prepayment. One prepayment may be applied to one or multiple invoices, debit notes, and overdue charges.
Customer refund
A payment, designed to reimburse the customer, that can be applied to credit notes.
Voided payment
A payment that was voided.
Voided refund
A refund that was voided.
Balance write-off
A document that writes off a customer’s small balance that won’t be paid.
Ref. no

The unique identifier for the payment. This number is automatically generated by the system for a new payment document, based on the number series in the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window.

Note

If the Manual numbering check box is selected for the specified numbering sequence in the Number series (CS201010), the system validates each new reference number you enter in order to prevent the creation of payments and prepayments with the same reference number.

Status

The status of the customer payment, which for a new document is either Balanced or On hold. (The default status of a new document is controlled by the Hold documents on entry option in the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window.) The status of an existing document can be one of following:

On hold
A user can edit the document but cannot release it. If you clear the Hold check box when you finish editing, the document status changes to Balanced.
Balanced
The credit and debit totals are equal for the newly created customer ledger and it can be released. To change the status of the document to Balanced, clear the Hold check box.
Open
The document is released, but the application amount is less than the payment amount.
Reserved
The document has been released and then put on hold. A user selected the Hold check box for the document with the Open status and the system changed the document status from Open to Reserved. Reserved payments could not be applied to outstanding documents and are excluded from the auto-application process. You can clear the Hold check box to release the payment from hold.
Closed
The document has been released and closed (application amount is equal to the payment amount).
Voided
The document has been voided.
Hold

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the document is a draft with the On hold status.

This check box is unavailable for debit adjustments.

Date The date when a payment is applied to a document (invoice or note). The field displays the current business date for unapplied or partially applied payments and the latest application date for the closed payment. You can apply a payment to a number of documents on different application dates. Also, you can use the Balance by customer (AR632500) report to view application dates of the documents.
Financial period The financial period to which the payment should be applied, which the system fills in based on the date.
Payment ref.

A secondary payment reference identifier, which can be:

  • a system-generated number, if the Suggest next customer ledger no. check box is selected for the used cash account in the Payment methods (CA204000) window, or
  • an external reference number entered manually (such as a bank check number).

The system requires a payment reference number if the Require payment reference on entry check box is selected in the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window.

This field is not available for credit notes.

Customer The customer who issued the payment.
Location

The customer location associated with the sale. Once the customer is selected, this field displays the customer’s default location ID, which can be changed.

This element appears only if the Business account locations functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Payment method The customer’s default payment method; this field is not available for credit notes.
Description The identifier or description of the customer’s default payment method.
Cash account The default cash account associated with the payment method; this field is not available for credit notes. If this is a clearing cash account, the payment will be included in a batch deposit.
Currency

The currency of the payment document.

Once the customer is selected, the system inserts the customer’s default currency, but it may be changed if the customer’s settings allow currency overriding.

Invoice text A user-defined description of the payment. The description may contain up to 50 alphanumeric characters.
Payment amount The total of the payment that is entered manually.
Applied to documents The total of the documents to which payment is to be applied. The total is displayed until payment release.
Applied to orders The total of the orders for which payment is reserved, minus the amount transferred to invoice.
Available balance The amount that has not been applied. This value is non-zero if the payment amount is greater than the document amount.
Write-off amount The amount that has been written off.
Finance charges The total on all finance charges applied to this document.
Deducted charges

The total amount of bank charges deducted by bank from the payment amount on your cash account (bank account).

Even if the charges were actually deducted by bank, the original payment amount is shown in the top part.

ROT or RUT payment (check box) (check box)

A check box that you select to indicate that this is a payment from Skatteverket for ROT and RUT.

Note

By selecting this check box, you can filter on ROT/RUT payments in a generic inquiry.

## The Documents to apply tab This tab includes the list (in a tabular format) of the customer's open documents to which the incoming payment is to be applied. Click **Load documents** in the table toolbar to specify a date range, a range of reference numbers, or both, and the system adds to the list the customer's documents that meet the criteria. If there are open credit notes matching the specified criteria, they appear at the top of the list.
Button Description
Load documents Opens the Load options dialog box, where you can specify criteria for loading the customer’s open invoices or debit notes.
Column Description
Branch The branch for which the payment has been created.
Doc. type

The type of document to which the payment is applied. The selection depends on the type of the payment document selected in the top part of the window:

  • A payment may be applied against the documents of the following types: Invoice, Credit note, Debit note, and Overdue charge.
  • A credit note, prepayment, and balance write-off may be applied against the documents of the following types: Invoice, Debit note, and Overdue charge.
  • A customer refund may be applied against the documents of the following types: Credit note, Payment, and Prepayment.
Note

The Overdue charge option is available if the Overdue charges functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Ref. no

The reference number of the invoice or note to which the payment is applied.

If you click this number, the Sales invoices (AR301000) window opens, on which you can view the details of the selected document.

Customer The identifier of the customer.
Amount paid The amount to be paid which is displayed in the currency of the document that is selected in the window.
Cash discount taken The cash discount to be taken.
Balance write-off The amount to be written off.
Write-off reason code

A reason code that defines an account and subaccount to be used for writing off credits or balances.

You must select a reason code if the balance write-off amount is non-zero.

Date The creation date of the customer ledger document.
Due date The due date of the customer ledger document.
Cash discount date The date through which the customer can take a cash discount.
Balance The balance of the document after the cash discount is taken and the amount is paid.
Cash discount balance The unused amount of the cash discount, in case of partial payment.
Description A description of the document.
Currency The currency of the customer ledger document.
Post period The period to which the payment transactions are to be posted.
Customer order A reference to a document of the customer, such as a purchase order number.
Cross rate A cross rate that you can optionally specify between the currency of the payment and currency of the original document.
### The Load options dialog box You use this dialog box, which opens when you click **Load documents** in the table toolbar, to add to the list of the customer's open documents the documents that meet the criteria you specify.
Element Description
From date The earliest date for the documents to be displayed.
To date The latest date for the documents to be displayed.
From ref. no. The document reference number to start with.
End ref. no. The document reference number to end with.
Max. number of documents

The maximum number of documents to be selected from the database.

The default value is 999. That is, the system selects 999 records from the database that comply specified criteria, applies additional filters, if needed, and displays the resulted list of records.

Include child documents

A field where you can select an option to indicate to the system the types of documents that belong to the child customer accounts of the selected parent account that should be loaded along with the documents of the currently selected customer account. The following options are available:

None
Indicates that the system should load none of the documents of the child customer accounts.
Except credit notes
Indicates that the system should load all documents of the child accounts that meet the other specified criteria, except for the documents with the Credit note type.
All
Indicates that the system should load all documents of the child accounts that meet the specified criteria.

The field is available if both of the following conditions are met:

Order by

An option you can select to order the listed documents, which can be one of the following:

Due date, ref. no.
The system loads the list of the documents sorted in ascending order first by due date and then by reference number. This option is selected by default.
Doc. date, ref. no.
The system loads the list of the documents sorted in ascending order first by document date and then by reference number.
Ref. no.
The system loads the list of the documents sorted in ascending order by reference number.
Load (button) Loads the documents matching the specified criteria to the table and closes the dialog box.
Cancel (button) Closes the dialog box.
## The Application history tab This tab is used to store the history of the payment applications. As a result of each application, a batch of journal transactions is generated. All application batches are displayed on this tab.
Button Description
Reverse application

Cancels the payment application.

The button is not available for a document of the Balance write-off type.

To reverse an application for this document type, void the document (Balance write-off) and release the voiding.

The system sets the Voided status to the document ( Balance write-off ) and opens the invoice it has been applied to.

Column Description
Branch The branch to which the document belongs.
Batch number The ID of the batch that contains appropriate transactions. If you click this number, the Journal transactions (GL301000) window opens, where you can view the details of the batch.
Type The type of document to which the payment was applied.
Ref. no The reference number of the customer ledger document to which the payment was applied. If you click this number, the Sales invoices (AR301000) window opens, where you can view the details of the customer ledger document.
Customer The customer who issued the payment.
Amount paid The amount that was actually paid which is displayed in the currency of the document that is selected in the window.
Cash discount taken The cash discount taken during the application.
Balance write-off The amount that has been written off.
Financial period The financial period of the payment application.
Date The date of the document (invoice or debit memo).
Due date The due date of the customer ledger document.
Cash discount date The last date when the cash discount for the customer was available.
Balance The remaining amount after the cash discount was taken and certain amount was paid.
Cash discount balance The unused amount of a cash discount, in case of partial payment.
Description A description of the document.
Currency The currency of the payment document.
Post period The period to which payment transactions were posted.
Customer order A reference to the customer document, such as a purchase order number.
VAT adjustment A check box automatically selected by the system if the customer ledger document specified in this row is subject to VAT adjustment.
VAT Credit note

The reference number of the VAT credit note generated in the Generate VAT on cash discount (AR504500) window for the customer ledger document specified in this row.

This reference number is specified by the system automatically once the VAT credit note is generated.

VAT doc. no. The number of the VAT document.
## The Orders to apply tab This tab includes the list of the customer's open orders for which the incoming payment is to be reserved. Click **Load orders** in the table toolbar to specify a date range (and, if needed, a range of reference numbers) to add the customer's specific orders to the list.
Button Description
Load orders Opens the Load options dialog box so that you can add the customer’s orders to the list.
Column Description
Order type The order type for which the payment is to be reserved. A customer ledger payment may be reserved for the order types that generate customer ledger documents of the Invoice or Debit note type.
Order no.

The reference number of the order for which the payment is reserved.

By clicking this number, the Sales orders (SO301000) window opens, in which you can view the order details

Status

The status of the document, which is assigned automatically and can be one of the following options:

On hold, Credit hold, Open, Back order, Shipping, Cancelled, Invoiced, or Completed.

For details on statuses, see: About sales order processing options.

Applied to order The total amount reserved for the order.
Transferred to invoice The amount that has been applied to invoice.
Date The creation date of the order.
Due date The due date of the order.
Cash discount date The date through which the customer can take a cash discount.
Balance The balance of the order after the cash discount is taken and the amount is paid.
Description A description of the order.
Order total The total amount of the document.
Currency The currency of the document.
Invoice no. The reference number of the invoice generated for the order.
Invoice date The date of the invoice.
### The Load options dialog box You use this dialog box, which opens when you click **Load orders** in the table toolbar, to select the order to reserve the payment for.
Element Description
Branch The branch in the company to which the order belongs.
To date The latest date for the documents to be displayed.
From date The earliest date for the documents to be displayed.
End order no. The order number to end with.
Start order no. The order number to start with.
Max. number of documents

The maximum number of documents to be selected from the database.

The default value is 999. That is, the system selects 999 records from the database that comply specified criteria and applies additional filters, if needed.

Order by

An option you can select to order the documents on the list, which can be one of the following:

  • Order date, order no.
  • Order no.
Load (button) Displays the documents matching the specified criteria and closes the dialog box.
Cancel (button) Closes the dialog box.
## The Financial details tab This tab contains information about the customer ledger account and subaccount used in the payment document, as well as the date and period of the document. For a released payment, it contains the reference to the batch that implements appropriate transactions. ### The Link to general ledger section
Element Description
Batch no. The batch that contains appropriate transactions. You can click the batch number to view the batch.
Branch The branch that had applied this payment.
Customer ledger account The asset account specified as the default customer ledger account for the customer.
Customer ledger sub. The corresponding default subaccount for the customer.
Project

The project with which this document is associated, or the code indicating that this document is not associated with any project; the non-project code is specified in the Project accounting preferences (PM101000) window.

This field appears only if the Customer ledger workspace has been integrated with the Projects module in the Project accounting preferences (PM101000) window.

Project task

The particular task of the project with which this document is associated.

This field appears only if the Customer ledger workspace has been integrated with the Projects module in the Project accounting preferences (PM101000) window.

### The Payment information section
Element Description
Payment date The date of the payment release.
Payment period The period associated with the payment date.
Cleared A check box that indicates (if selected) that the payment has been cleared with the bank.
Clear date The date when the payment has been cleared with the bank.
Batch deposit

A check box that indicates (if selected) that payment should be deposited.

You can change this option if the status of the cash account has been changed. Payments can be deposited only from a clearing cash account.

Deposited A check box that indicates (if selected) that payment was deposited.
Batch deposit date The date of the deposit.
Batch deposit no. The number of the deposit that includes the payment.
Payment message A free-form message connected with the payment, max. 140 characters.
## The Finance charges tab This tab contains a list of charges and fees applied to the payment by the bank for processing. For example, if you receive a customer payment where the bank has withdrawn a fee, you can register this bank fee together with the payment. > [!NOTE] > Finance charges cannot be specified for customer refunds, credit notes, and prepayments.
Column Description
Entry type

The charge, selected by its entry type ID.

You can select the entry type from the list of entry types associated with the cash account.

Note

A finance charge will be posted as a cash transaction and will not affect the customer ledger.

Description A detailed description of the entry type.
Offset account The account that is used for this charge.
Offset subaccount The corresponding subaccount for this charge.
Amount The amount of the charge.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Customer price classes (AR208000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-price-classes-ar208000 page In this window, you can add, edit, view, and delete customer price classes, which are classes that group customers by the price level offered to them. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Customer price classes (AR208000) In this window, you can add, edit, view, and delete customer price classes, which are classes that group customers by the price level offered to them. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. In this window, you can add, edit, view, and delete **customer price classes**, which are classes that group customers by the price level offered to them. If no other price classes are defined in the system, all customers are assigned to the **BASE** price class. For each customer price class, you can create price lists in the [Sales prices (AR202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-prices-ar202000/) window. ## The table This table displays all the customer price classes defined in the system. You can add, edit, and delete classes.
Column Description
Price class ID The unique identifier for the price class. An alphanumeric string of up to 10 characters may be used.
Description

A detailed description of the class. An alphanumeric string of up to 50 characters may be used.

> [!NOTE] > This field supports the multi-language functionality, where you can translate the entered text to multiple languages. For more information, see: About multi-language support

Sort order An integer indicating the order in which this class will be displayed on reports. The price class with the lowest value will be displayed as the leftmost column in all price classes.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Customer statement history (AR404600) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-statement-history-ar404600 page You can use this window to view the statement history for a particular customer and drill down to the details of each statement. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Customer statement history (AR404600) You can use this window to view the statement history for a particular customer and drill down to the details of each statement. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Print statement Navigates to the Customer statement report generated for the selected customer.
## The top part In this area, select a customer to view the statement history for this customer.
Element Description
Customer The customer by its ID.
## The table This table contains the list of statements printed for the customer selected above. You can print a statement, if needed.
Column Description
Statement cycle The statement cycle by ID.
Statement date The date of the statement.
Statement balance The customer balance (in the base currency) as shown on the statement.
Overdue balance The overdue balance (in the base currency) as shown on the statement.
Currency The currency used by the customer.
FC statement balance The customer balance in the specified currency.
FC overdue balance The overdue amount in the specified currency.
Do not print A check box that indicates (if selected) that the statement should not be printed.
Printed A check box that indicates (if selected) that the statement was printed.
Do not email A check box that indicates (if selected) that the statement should not be sent by email.
Emailed A check box that indicates (if selected) that the statement was sent by email.
On-demand statement When this check box is selected, you can generate statements on demand.
Prepared on The date when the statement was prepared.

Related pages

Windows

Customer summary (AR401000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-summary-ar401000 page You can use this window to view outstanding customer balances by the criteria you select, such as the customer class, the financial period, and the account-subaccount pair used for the customers of the class. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Customer summary (AR401000) You can use this window to view outstanding customer balances by the criteria you select, such as the customer class, the financial period, and the account-subaccount pair used for the customers of the class. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The window toolbar The window toolbar includes standard buttons and a window-specific button. The window-specific button is listed below.
Button Description
Reports

Provides the following menu commands, which you can click for quick access to reports:

Balance by customer
Navigates to the Balance by customer (AR632500) report
Customer history
Navigates to the Customer history (AR652000) report
Aged past due
Navigates to the Aged past due (AR631000) report
Aged outstanding
Navigates to the Aged outstanding (AR631500)
## The top part By using the elements in this area, you can select the criteria of customers to be listed in the table.
Element Description
Company The company for which you want to display data. By default, it is the company you have access to.
Branch The branch for which you want to display data. By default, it is the branch you have access to.
Period The financial period for inquiry. If you leave the field blank, information related to all open periods will be displayed.
Customer class The customer class selected for inquiry. You can leave the field blank to list customers of all classes.
Customer ledger account The customer ledger account used for customers to be listed.
Customer ledger sub. The corresponding subaccount.
Currency ID The currency for which you want to display data. You can leave the field blank to view the balances in the all currencies used by the customers if you select the Split by currency check box or in the base currency if you clear the Split by currency check box.
Split by currency A check box that you select to view the customer balances by currency. This check box is visible only if the Currency field is blank.
Only customers with balance A check box that you select to display information on only customers that carry non-zero balances. Clear the check box to display all customers.
By financial period A check box that you select to display balances calculated by financial period rather than by document date. Clear the check box to view the balances calculated by document date.
Consolidate by parent

A check box that you select to indicate to the system to display the consolidated balance for parent accounts that have child accounts for which the Consolidated balance check box is selected on the Invoicing info tab of the Customers (AR303000) window.

The child accounts are excluded from the list if the check box is selected. The field is available if the Parent-child customer relationship functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Total balance A read-only field that shows the total balance for the customers of the selected class or all classes calculated using the specified criteria.
Total prepayments The total amount of customer prepayments calculated for the selected criteria.
Total unrealised gain/loss The total amount of unrealised gains and losses calculated for transactions matching the selected criteria.
## The table The table contains the list of customers matching the criteria you have specified in the top part.
Column Description
Customer no. The unique ID of the customer, which is also a link. Click the link to navigate to the Customer details (AR402000) window with the details of this customer.
Customer name The customer name as it appears in the documents.
Last activity period The last period when any transactions related to the customer were released.
Currency ID The currency used by the customer.
Beginning balance (currency) The beginning balance on documents in the specified currency.
Ending balance (currency) The ending balance on documents in the specified currency.
Prepayment balance (currency) The balance of prepayments made in the specified currency.
Sales PTD (currency) Period-to-date sales made in the specified currency.
Payments PTD (currency) Period-to-date payments made in the specified currency.
Cash Discount Taken PTD (currency) The cash discount total on cash discounts takes in the specified currency.
Overdue charges PTD (currency) Period-to-date overdue charges in the specified currency.
Credit notes currency PTD The total on credit notes made in the specified currency.
Debit notes currency PTD The total on debit notes made in the specified currency.
Prepayments PTD (currency) The total on prepayments made in the specified currency.
Beginning balance

The customer’s outstanding balance in the base currency at the start of the specified period.

If no period is specified, the column shows the balance at the start of the last activity period.

Ending balance

The customer’s outstanding balance in the base currency at the end of the specified period.

If no period is specified, the column shows the balance at the end of the last activity period.

Prepayment balance The unapplied amount of the customer prepayments.
Sales PTD

The total amount (in the base currency) of the period-to-date (PTD) sales for the specified period.

If no period is specified, the column displays the total sales amount during the last activity period.

Payments PTD

The total amount of the period-to-date payments (in the base currency) received from the customer for the specified period.

If no period is specified, the column displays the total payment amount during the last activity period.

Cash discount taken PTD

The total period-to-date amount of cash discounts received by the customer for the specified period.

If no period is specified, the column displays the total on all the cash discounts taken by the customer during the last activity period.

Realised gain/loss PTD

The total PTD amount of realised gains and losses received as the result of operations with the customer.

If no period is specified, the column displays the total realised gain or loss (RGOL) amount for the customer during the last activity period.

Credit notes PTD

The total PTD amount of credit notes received from the customer.

If no period is specified, the column displays the total credit note amount for the customer during the last activity period.

Debit notes PTD

The total PTD amount of debit notes received from the customer.

If no period is specified, the column displays the total of the debit notes for the customer during the last activity period.

Unrealised gain/loss The amount of unrealised gain or loss calculated for open documents.
Prepayments PTD The amount of prepayments received during this period until the current date.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Customer VAT zone deviation (AR40102S) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-vat-zone-deviation-ar40102s page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Customer VAT zone deviation (AR40102S) This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
View batch If you select a line in the table, you can click View batch to see the journal transactions for this line. You can also click the link in the Batch no. column to open the Journal transactions (GL301000) window.
View document If you select a line in the table, you can click View document to see the supplier document for this line. You can also click the link in the Reference no. column to open the Sales invoices (AR301000) window.
View customer Opens the Customers (AR303000) window so that you can view the customer account.
## The top part
Element Description
From period The period from when you want to list customers with VAT zone deviations.
To period The period to when you want to list customers with VAT zone deviations.
Document type

Use this field if you want to filter the list on specific document types:

  • Invoice - lists only sales invoices with a VAT zone deviation.
  • Debit note - lists only debit notes with a VAT zone deviation.
  • Credit note - lists only credit notes with a VAT zone deviation.
  • Overdue charge - lists only overdue charges with a VAT zone deviation.
  • Credit write-off - lists only credit write-offs with a VAT zone deviation.
Ref. no. Use this field if you want to see customer VAT deviation for a specific reference number.
## The table
Column Description
Batch no. The batch number that the customer document belongs to.
Invoice no. The reference number of the document. You can click the link to view document details.
Type The type of customer ledger document: Invoice, Credit note, Debit note, Payment, Overdue charge, or Prepayment.
Customer The customer’s ID.
Customer name The name of the customer.
Customer ledger account The customer ledger account of the customer.
Customer ledger sub. The customer ledger subaccount of the customer.
Invoice text A detailed description of the document.
Currency The currency of the document.
Total amount The total document amount.
Document VAT zone The VAT zone selected for the document.
Customer VAT zone The VAT zone selected for the customer.
VAT total The total VAT amount on the document.
Date The date of the customer document.
Post period The post period of the customer document.
Customers (AR303000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000 page With this window, you can create customer accounts and view the details of existing accounts. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Customers (AR303000) With this window, you can create customer accounts and view the details of existing accounts. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can enter the needed number of locations and contacts for any customer. When you create a new customer account, first assign the customer to a customer class. This saves you time on data entry because the system inserts the default values of the class into the appropriate window elements; you can override any of these default settings. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## What to do from this window + [Create a customer](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/create-a-customer/) + [Make customer-specific changes](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/make-customer-specific-changes/) + [Set direct debit preferences for a customer](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/set-direct-debit-preferences-for-a-customer/) + [Connect contact to customer](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/connect-contact-to-customer/) + [Delete customer](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/delete-customer/) + [Enable write-offs for customer](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/enable-write-offs-for-customer/) + [Add general information for a customer](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/add-general-information-for-a-customer/) + [Add a payment method and a bank account to a customer](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/add-a-payment-method-and-a-bank-account-to-a-customer/) + [Add invoicing settings for a customer](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/add-invoicing-settings-for-a-customer/) + [Add delivery settings for a customer](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/add-delivery-settings-for-a-customer/) + [Set up e-mail invoices for one customer](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/set-up-e-mail-invoices-for-one-customer/) + [Configure mailing settings for dunning letters for a customer](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/configure-mailing-settings-for-dunning-letters-for-a-customer/) + [Set customer print and email preferences](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/set-customer-print-and-email-preferences/) + [Prepare to use electronic invoices for customers](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/prepare-to-use-electronic-invoices-for-customers/) + [Prepare to use AutoInvoice for a new customer](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/prepare-to-use-autoinvoice-for-a-new-customer/) + [Prepare to use AutoInvoice for an existing customer](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/prepare-to-use-autoinvoice-for-an-existing-customer/) + [Set up invoice mailing for a customer](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/set-up-invoice-mailing-for-a-customer/) + [Over ‘Gegevens aanvullen en controleren’](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/online-help/o2c/ar-ap303000-complete-and-verify-data/) + [About ‘Complete and verify data’](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/online-help/o2c/ar-ap303000-complete-and-verify-data-uk/) + [Over ‘Gegevens aanvullen en controleren’](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/online-help/o2c/ar-ap303000-complete-and-verify-data/) + [About ‘Complete and verify data’](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/online-help/o2c/ar-ap303000-complete-and-verify-data-uk/) ## The window toolbar
Button Description
View on map A button you can click to view the customer’s location on a map.
Actions

Provides the following menu commands, which you can click to invoke actions:

View supplier
Opens the Suppliers (AP303000) window so that you can view this customer’s supplier account if this customer has a supplier account too.
New invoice
Navigates to the Sales invoices (AR301000) window so that you can create a new invoice.
View business account
This window is currently not in use.
New payment
Navigates to the Customer payments (AR302000) window, which you can use to define a new payment for the customer.
Write-off balance
Navigates to the Write-off balances and credits (AR505000) window.
New sales order
Navigates to the Sales orders (SO301000) window so that you can create a new sales order for this customer.
Add location
Opens the Customer locations (CR303010) window, so that you can add a new location for the customer or edit the existing locations.
Add contact
Opens the Contacts (CR302000) window, so that you can add a new contact person for the customer or edit the existing contacts.
Add payment method
Opens the Customer payment methods (AR303010) window, so that you can add a new payment method for the customer or edit existing payment methods.
Extend to supplier
Opens the Suppliers (AP303000) window, so that you can define this customer as a supplier and add supplier-specific information.
View restriction groups
Navigates to the Restriction groups by customer (AR102010) window, which you can use to view the restriction groups this customer is a member of.
Generate statement on demand
This action is currently not in use.
Regenerate last statement
Initiates the regeneration and preparation of the customer’s most recent statement.
Change ID
Gives you the ability to change the ID of the currently selected customer.
Inquiries

Provides the following menu commands, which you can click for quick access to inquiry windows:

  • Sales prices: Navigates to the Sales prices (AR202000) window, where you can view or edit sales prices for the selected customer.
  • Customer details: Navigates to the Customer details (AR402000) window, where you can view detailed information on the customer balance.
  • Customer statement history: Navigates to the Customer statement history (AR404600) window, where you can view the statement history for the selected customer and drill down to the details of each statement.
  • Sales by item and customer: Navigates to the Sales by item and customer (AR40103S) window, where you can view detailed information about sales by item and customer.
Reports

Provides the following menu commands, which you can click for quick access to reports:

## The top part By using the elements in the top part, you can create a new customer account or select an existing account for editing.
Element Description
Customer no.

The number of the customer account, which is defined by the BIZACCT segmented key or by the CUSTOMER segmented key (which inherits its structure from the BIZACCT key). When you are creating a new customer, you must specify an ID.

Note

You can later change the customer number by selecting Change ID from the Actions menu in the toolbar.

Customer name The name of the customer to appear in the system, which may be a trade name or a doing-business-as (DBA) name.
Status

The status of the customer account. You can select one of the following options:

Active
The account is in use, and the customer appears on all selection lists.
On hold
This account is not completed; editing or additional information is needed.
Credit hold
Because some payments haven’t been received, invoices may not be entered for the customer account.
Inactive
The account is not available for selection.
One time
The account is marked as a one-time customer.
Balance The total balance of all open documents of the customer including the total balance of prepayments. This read-only field appears only if you select an existing customer.
Prepayment balance The total amount of unapplied prepayments calculated for the customer. This read-only field appears only if you select an existing customer.
Consolidated balance

The total balance of the parent customer account, including balances of its child accounts for which the Consolidate balance check box is selected in the Invoicing settings tab of this window. The amount includes the balances of all open documents and prepayments.

The field is available if the Parent-child customer relationship functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window, and is only visible in the top part of the parent customer account.

Retained balance This field is not in use for the customer ledger.
## The General information tab You can use this tab to enter the main contact information of the customer's company, as well as the payment terms and the credit verification rule applied to the customer. If you are defining a new customer, you should first specify its customer class on this tab; once you do, various elements in the window will be filled with the class settings. ### The Main address section
Element Description
Address 1 The first line of the customer’s address.
Address 2 The second line of the address.
Address 3 The third line of the address.
Postcode The customer’s postcode. You can set up an input validation rule for the country’s postcodes in the Countries/counties/postcodes (CS20400S) window.
City The customer’s city.
Country The customer’s country.
County The customer’s county or province.
View on map A button you can click to view the customer’s location on a map.
### The Main contact section
Element Description
Company name The legal business name of the customer to appear on the documents.
Attention The attention line as it is used in your company’s business letters. This line will be used to direct the letter to the proper person or department.
Email The email address of the customer as a business entity.
Web The customer’s website address.
Phone 1 The default phone number of the customer.
Phone 2 An additional phone number of the customer.
Fax The fax number of the customer.
Account ref. Your company’s account number in the customer’s system.
### The Financial settings section
Element Description
Customer class The class to which the customer is assigned. Once you select the customer class (which is required), the system fills in various elements in this window automatically with the values specified for the specified class; you can, however, change these values.
Terms The type of payment terms used in operations with the customer. You define payment terms in the Payment terms (CS206500) window.
Statement cycle ID The default statement cycle to be used for the customer.
Document language

The language in which the documents of the customer will be created.

This field is also used when using the multi-language functionality. For more information, see: About multi-language support.

Apply payments automatically A check box that indicates (if selected) that payments should be applied automatically to the customer’s documents.
Apply overdue charges

A check box that indicates (if selected) that you may apply overdue charges to this customer.

Note

The overdue charges will be applied to the documents created after you have selected this check box. That is, the system will calculate the overdue charges for the newly created invoices only. The overdue charges will not be calculated for the invoices created earlier than you have selected this check box.

To set up the system to calculate the overdue charges for a document created earlier than you have selected this check box, you can select the Apply overdue charge check box for the document on the Financial details tab of the Sales invoices (AR301000) window.

The option is available if the Overdue charges functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Enable write-offs A check box that indicates (if selected) that balance and credit write-offs are allowed.
Exclude EC sales list Select this check box if you want this customer to be excluded from the EC sales list (AR40501S).
Write-off limit The maximum value that may be written off during each application line. Balances and credits that are less than this value may be written off.
Currency ID The currency used in operations with the customer, which you can select from the list of currencies defined in the system.
Enable currency override A check box that indicates (if selected) that users may override the currency specified as the default for the customer.
Currency rate type The currency rate type used for the customer.
Enable rate override A check box that indicates (if selected) that users may override the currency rate specified as the default for the customer.
Auto load documents

Select how documents for this customer will be automatically loaded in the Process bank transactions (CA306000) window for matching.

The following options are available:

Use Cash management settings
To use the setting for automatic loading of documents that is set in the Cash management preferences (CA101000) window, the Bank statement settings tab. This is the default.
First exact doc. amount, then all documents
All documents will be automatically loaded after the ones with exact matching document amounts have been loaded.
Document with exact amount
The system searches the documents that have the exact matching amount with the transactions and loads only them.
Disabled
Automatic loading is not in use.
Exclude debt collection A check box that, if selected, will exclude the customer invoices connected to this customer class to be sent to debt collection. You can reverse this setting on the Customers (AR303000) window, tab General information, by de-selecting the check box Exclude debt collection.
### The Customer properties section
Element Description
Webhook notification

When this check box is selected and saved for a customer, you will be notified regarding changes. The Webhook notifications tab appears when you select the specific customer.

More information about webhooks, see: About Webhooks.

### The Credit verification rules section
Element Description
Credit verification

The credit rule applied to this customer. The following options are available:

Days past due
Specifies that payment should not exceed the due date of the invoice beyond the credit period (which is a certain number of days past due). This credit period is specified as the Credit days past due.
Credit limit
Doesn’t allow this customer to exceed its credit limit, which is specified in the Credit limit field.
Limit and days past due
Applies both rules to the customer debt: It should not exceed the credit limit, and the payment date should not exceed the due date of an invoice by more days than the credit period.
Disabled
Uses no credit verification in relations with this customer.
Credit limit

The amount, if applicable, that serves as a credit limit for the customer.

If the selected customer account is involved in the parent-child relationship, the field displays the credit limit of the group (parent account and its child accounts).

Credit days past due The maximum number of days by which the customer payment may exceed the invoice date. This value is used if the Days past due or Limit and days past due option is selected in the Credit verification field.
Unreleased balance

The balance of unreleased documents.

If the selected customer account is a parent account, the field displays the total balance of unreleased documents of the parent account and of its child accounts. For the child accounts the field displays individual balance.

Balance of open orders

The total balance of customer’s open orders, which is the sum of uninvoiced amounts of all orders to the customer except the orders that are assigned the On hold status.

If the selected customer account is a parent account, the field displays the total balance of open orders of the parent account and of its child accounts. For a child account the field displays individual balance.

Remaining credit limit

The credit limit that is not used regarding the current balance.

If the selected customer account is in a parent-child relationship, the field displays the remaining credit limit that applies to new sales orders and invoices of the parent account and its child accounts.

First due date

The due date of the earliest open invoice, if either Days past due or Limit and days past due option is selected in the Credit verification field, otherwise the value is not displayed.

If the selected customer account is a parent account, the field displays the due date of the earliest open invoice among all the open invoices associated with a parent account of its child accounts. For a child account the field displays the due date of the earliest open invoice associated with this account.

## The Invoicing settings tab This tab is used to store the customer's default payment information and the invoicing address. ### The Invoice address section
Element Description
Same as main A check box that indicates (if selected) that the invoicing address is the same as the main address. If you select this check box, the elements below are populated with the main contact information. If the check box is cleared, you can enter different information.
Address 1 The first line of the invoicing address.
Address 2 The second line of the invoicing address.
Address 3 The third line of the invoicing address.
Postcode The postcode. An input mask for the postcode can be set in the Countries/counties/postcodes (CS20400S) window.
City The customer’s city.
Country The customer’s country.
County The county or province of the customer.
View on map A button you can click to view the location on a map.
### The Invoice contact section
Element Description
Same as main A check box that indicates (if selected) that the invoicing contact information is the same as the main information, and the elements below will be populated by the main address information specified on the General settings tab.
Company name The name of the customer’s department as it should appear on the invoicing documents, if it is different from the customer name.
Attention The attention line as it is used in your company’s business letters. This line will be used to direct the letter to the proper person or department.
Phone 1 The remittance contact person’s phone number.
Phone 2 An additional phone number for the contact person, in case there are invoicing questions.
Fax The fax number of the contact person.
Email The contact person’s email address.
Web The customer’s invoicing-related web page.
### The Parent info section This section is available if the **Parent-child customer relationship** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window.
Element Description
Parent account

The parent account of the currently selected customer account.

The availability of this field and the list of accounts that can be selected here depend on whether the Consolidate balance and Consolidate statements check boxes are selected for the selected customer account. If both check boxes are cleared, the field is always available and a business account of any type can be specified as the parent account.

If at least one of the check boxes is selected, a business account of the Customer or Customer and supplier type should be specified as the parent account of the selected customer account. This field is disabled if the displayed customer account has child accounts (because an account cannot be both a child and a parent).

For details, see: About setting up parent-child relationships.

Consolidate balance

A check box that indicates, if selected for a child account, that the balances of child accounts are included in the parent balance; in this case, the consolidated balance is shown in the Consolidated balance field in the top part of the corresponding parent account.

You can apply the payments and credit notes of the parent account to the documents of this child account. In addition, you can select the Share credit policy check box to apply the credit policy configured for the parent account to the new sales orders and invoices of its child accounts.

The check box value set for a parent account provides the default value of the check box for its child accounts. If you change the value for a parent account, the system will prompt you to change the value for all child accounts.

For details, see: About balance consolidation.

Consolidate statements

A check box that indicates, if selected for a child account, that documents of the child accounts are included in the statements generated for the parent account.

The check box value set for a parent account provides the default value of the check box for its child accounts. If you change the value for a parent account, the system will prompt you to change the value for all child accounts.

For details, see: About credit policy application.

Shared credit policy

A check box that indicates, if selected for a child account, that the credit policy (a combination of the credit verification rules and credit limit) defined for its parent account will be applied to the new sales orders and invoices of the child account. The check box becomes available for selection, if the Consolidate balance check box has been selected for this account.

The check box value set for a parent account provides the default value of the check box for its child accounts. If you change the value for a parent account, the system will prompt you to change the value for all child accounts.

For details, see: About credit policy application.

### The Print and email settings section
Element Description
Print invoices A check box that, if selected, indicates that invoices can be printed in the Send invoices (AR508000) window. The default value of the setting is provided by the customer class.
Send invoices by email A check box that, if selected, indicates that you can send invoices by email by using the Send invoices (AR508000) window. The default value of the setting is provided by the customer class.
Send dunning letters by email

A check box that, if selected, indicates that you can send dunning letters by email by using the Print/release dunning letters (AR522000) window.

The default value of the setting is provided by the customer class. This field is available only if the Dunning letter management functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Print dunning letters

A check box that, if selected, indicates that dunning letters can be printed in the Print/release dunning letters (AR522000) window.

The default value of the setting is provided by the customer class. This field is available only if the Dunning letter management functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Send statements by email

A check box that, if selected, indicates that statements can be sent by email to the customer in the Print statements (AR503500) window.

The default value of the setting is provided by the customer class.

Multi-currency statements

A check box that indicates (if selected) that this customer’s statements must be printed in multi-currency format.

If the check box is cleared, the system will print statements for the customer in the base-currency format. The check box is displayed if the Multi-currency accounting functionality is enabled in your system.

Print statements A check box that, if selected, indicates that statements can be printed in the Print statements (AR503500) window. The default value of the setting is provided by the customer class.
Statement type

The statement type used by default in relations with the customer, which can be one of the following:

Open item
The statement includes all open items for the customer.
Balance brought forward
The amount outstanding from the previous statement is shown at the beginning of the statement.
### The Send AutoInvoice Route section
Element Description
Send invoices to AutoInvoice Select this check box if you are using AutoInvoice and want to send invoices directly to this service.
Send invoices to AutoInvoice as banking e-Invoice (Norway) A check box that, if selected, indicates that you can send invoices to AutoInvoice as banking e-invoices. This applies to Norway only.
Print

When this check box is selected, a new element is added into the outgoing invoice called MediaType that will be populated with the Print value. The customer language is also retrieved from the Document language field in the General information tab. This is used in Sweden when the printing service is activated.

This check box is only visible when you have not enabled PEPPOL invoice in the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000).

You can only select this check box if you select the Send invoices to AutoInvoice check box.

Exclude invoice PDF

When selected, this enables the possibility to not generate and imbed invoice PDF while sending electronic invoices via the PEPPOL BIS invoice format.

This setting is only visible when you have enabled PEPPOL invoice in the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000).

You can only select this check box if you select the Send invoices to AutoInvoice or Send invoices to AutoInvoice as banking e-Invoice (Norway) check box.

Use the first AutoInvoice attachment to view invoice

When selected, the system opens the first document attached to AutoInvoice. This way, you save time by not having to check the attachments manually.

This check box is only visible when you have enabled PEPPOL invoice in the in the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000).

You can only select this check box if you select the Send invoices to AutoInvoice or Send invoices to AutoInvoice as banking e-Invoice (Norway) check box and the Exclude invoice PDF check box.

### The Default payment method section
Element Description
Default payment method The default payment method used for the customer.
Cash account The cash account to be used for the default payment method.
Description The identifier or description of the customer’s default payment method.
Account used for payment The type of the account used for payments, such as Domestic payment.
### The Payment method details table This section holds the details of the payment method used by the customer if such details have been configured in the [Payment methods (CA204000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/payment-methods-ca204000/) window.
Element Description
Description The name of a user-defined column configured to contain a detail of the payment method.
Value The value of this payment method detail.
## The Delivery settings tab This tab contains information required for delivering goods and services to the customer. ### The Shipping address section
Element Description
Same as main

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the delivery address is the same as the customer’s main address. If you select this check box, the elements below are populated with the main contact information specified on the General settings tab.

If the check box is not selected, you can change the delivery address.

Address 1 The first line of the delivery address.
Address 2 The second line of the delivery address.
Address 3 The third line of the delivery address.
Postcode The customer’s postal code. If an input mask is set for the country postal codes, provide a valid code that matches the input mask.
City The customer’s delivery location city.
Country The customer’s country. By default, it is the country of your company.
County The customer’s county or province.
View on map A button you can click to view the customer location on the map.
### The Shipping contact section This tab contains information required for delivering goods and services to the customer.
Element Description
Same as main A check box that indicates (if selected) that the customer’s main information is used as its shipping info, and the elements below display the main company information.
Company name The business name of the customer’s shipping location, if it’s different from the customer name.
Attention The attention line as it is used in your company’s business letters, which would be used to direct the letter to the proper person if the letter is not addressed to any specific person.
Email The email address of the customer’s department to be used in case of delivery problems.
Web The customer’s website address.
Phone 1 The default phone number of the customer’s receiving department.
Phone 2 An additional phone number of the customer’s receiving department.
Fax The fax number of the customer’s receiving department.
### The Default location settings section
Element Description
Location name A description of the customer location.
VAT zone

The VAT zone of the customer’s default location.

If a customer has been converted from a prospect account or extended from a supplier account, the customer’s VAT zone is by default set to the VAT zone (if any) specified for the original account. You can override the default value.

Corporate ID The customer’s company ID, associated with the location.
VAT registration ID The customer’s taxpayer ID associated with the location.
GLN The global location number. This is an internationally standardised location ID used in electronic data interchange, used by AutoInvoice.
EDI code An ID for the entire electronic data exchange used by AutoInvoice
Invoice to default location

A check box that you select to indicate that sales invoices and sales order for this customer automatically have the default invoice address and invoice contact.

The invoice address and invoice contact can be overridden manually for each sales invoice in the Sales invoices (AR301000) window, the Invoice address tab, and each sales order in the Sales orders (SO301000) window, the Financial settings tab.

Shipping branch The branch of your company that will be used to ship the goods to the customer.
Price class ID The price class assigned to the customer. A price class, defined in the Customer price classes (AR208000) window, indicates the price level offered to the customer and can be used as a condition to be met for a discount application.
### The Shipping instructions section
Element Description
Warehouse

The warehouse to issue the goods to the customer.

This field appears only if the Warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Ship via The carrier used to ship the goods.
Shipping terms The shipping terms used for the customer.
Shipping zone ID The identification of the shipping zone of the customer to be used to calculate freight.
FOB point The location at which the title for the shipment passes from your company to the customer.
Residential delivery A check box that you select to indicate that delivery will not be performed to a business.
Saturday delivery A check box that you select to indicate that this customer allows delivery on Saturdays.
Insurance A check box that informs a user (if selected) that insurance is required for the order.
Shipping rule

The way the orders should be fulfilled for this customer. You can use one of the following options:

Shipping complete
Only completely fulfilled orders are allowed.
Back orders allowed
Back orders are allowed for the customer if some items are out of stock.
Cancel remainder
Orders should be shipped even if the quantities shipped are less than the quantities specified on the order. If all the requested items are out of stock, the order should be cancelled.
Order priority The priority of sales orders of this customer. (This setting has no business logic tied to it in the current version and can be used for informational purposes only.)
Lead time (days) The number of days preceding the due date for the shipping title to reach the customer.
### Intrastat
Element Description
Mode of transportation

Intrastat is the system for collecting information and producing statistics on the trade in goods between countries of the European Union (EU).

The mode of transportation denotes how the goods is transported. Available values are:

0 - Unknown

1 - Transport by sea

2 - Transport by rail

3 - Transport by road

4 - Transport by aeroplane

5 - Consignments by post

7 - Fixed transport installations

8 - Transport by inland waterway

## The Locations tab This tab contains a table showing the customer's locations. You can select any location as the default one. This tab is available only if the **Business account locations** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. The **MAIN** location is always automatically created for the customer when you enter the customer's main address.
Button Description
Add location Opens the Customer locations (CR303010) window, so you can enter a new customer location.
Set as default Selects the Is default check box for the selected location. Only one location can be selected as the default one.
Column Description
Active A check box that indicates (if selected) that the location is active. If the check box is cleared, the location will not be available for selection when users create customer documents.
Is default A check box that indicates (if selected) that the location has been set as the default customer location. You cannot directly select or clear this check box; to make a location the default location, you select the location and click Set as default in the toolbar.
Location ID The unique ID of the location.
Location name A descriptive name of the customer’s location.
City The city of the customer’s location.
Country The country of the customer’s location.
County The county or province of the customer’s location.
VAT zone A VAT zone associated with the county.
Price class ID The price class to be used by default for this customer location.
Sales account The account selected in the Sales account field in the Customer locations (CR303010) window.
Sales sub. The corresponding subaccount.
EDI code An ID for the entire electronic data exchange used by AutoInvoice.
GLN The global location number. This is an internationally standardised location ID used in electronic data interchange, used by AutoInvoice.
## The Payment methods tab This tab contains the list of payment methods that can be accepted from the customer. You can select any method as the default one.
Button Description
Add payment method Navigates to the Customer payment methods (AR303010) window, so that you can define a new payment method for the customer.
View payment method Navigates to the Customer payment methods (AR303010) window, so that you can view the details of the customer payment method. Customer payment methods have the Override check box selected.
Column Description
Is default A check box that indicates (if selected) that the payment method is the default one for the customer. You select this check box to mark the payment method as the default one for this customer.
Payment method The payment method ID.
Description The description of the payment method.
Cash account The cash account associated with the payment method.
Active A check box that indicates (if selected) that the payment method is used in the system.
Override A check box that indicates (if selected) that the payment method is specific to the customer (that is, it was created by using the Customer payment methods (AR303010) window).
## The Contacts tab This tab displays a table showing the customer's contact persons and their information. To add a new contact, click **Add contact**. To view or change the details of a particular contact, click the link in the **Name** field, which opens the [Contacts (CR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/contacts-cr302000/) window for the contact.
Button Description
Add contact Opens the Contacts (CR302000) window in a pop-up window so that you can enter a new contact.
Set as default Selects the Is default check box for the selected contact person. Only one contact can be selected as the default one.
Column Description
Active A check box that indicates (if selected) that the contact is active.
Is default A check box that indicates (if selected) that the contact person is the default one for the customer.
Position The position the contact person has in his or her company.
Name The contact person’s name. You can click the link in this column to open the Contacts (CR302000) window in a pop-up window.
City The contact person’s city.
Email The contact person’s email address.
Phone 1 The contact person’s phone number.
## The Salespersons tab The **Salespersons** tab contains the list of salespersons associated with the customer's locations.
Column Description
Salesperson ID The ID of the salesperson who is assigned to the customer.
Name The salesperson’s name.
Location ID The customer location associated with the salesperson.
Location name A descriptive name of the customer location.
Commission % The commission percent used for the salesperson. The column is available if the Commissions functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Default A check box that indicates (if selected) that this salesperson is the default salesperson for this customer.
## The Child accounts tab This tab contains the list of child customers that belong to a selected parent together with their balance information. This is only visible when selecting a parent customer in the customer field and if the **Parent-child customer relationship** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window
Column Description
Customer no

The number of the customer account, which is defined by the BIZACCT segmented key or by the CUSTOMER segmented key (which inherits its structure from the BIZACCT key). When you are creating a new customer, you must specify an ID.

Note

You can later change the customer number by selecting Change ID from the Actions menu in the toolbar.

Customer name . The name of the customer to appear in the system, which may be a trade name or a doing-business-as (DBA) name.
Balance The total balance of all open documents of the customer including the total balance of prepayments. This read-only field appears only if you select an existing customer.
Prepayment balance The total amount of unapplied prepayments calculated for the customer. This read-only field appears only if you select an existing customer.
Unreleased balance

The balance of unreleased documents.

If the selected customer account is a parent account, the field displays the total balance of unreleased documents of the parent account and of its child accounts. For the child accounts the field displays individual balance.

Balance of open orders

The total balance of customer’s open orders, which is the sum of uninvoiced amounts of all orders to the customer except the orders that are assigned the On hold status.

If the selected customer account is a parent account, the field displays the total balance of open orders of the parent account and of its child accounts. For a child account the field displays individual balance.

First due date

The due date of the earliest open invoice, if either Days past due or Limit and days past due option is selected in the Credit verification field, otherwise the value is not displayed.

If the selected customer account is a parent account, the field displays the due date of the earliest open invoice among all the open invoices associated with a parent account of its child accounts. For a child account the field displays the due date of the earliest open invoice associated with this account.

Consolidate balance

The total balance of the parent customer account, including balances of its child accounts for which the Consolidate balance check box is selected in the Invoicing settings tab of this window. The amount includes the balances of all open documents and prepayments.

The field is available if the Parent-child customer relationship functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window, and is only visible in the top part of the parent customer account.

Consolidate statement

A check box that indicates, if selected for a child account, that documents of the child accounts are included in the statements generated for the parent account.

The check box value set for a parent account provides the default value of the check box for its child accounts. If you change the value for a parent account, the system will prompt you to change the value for all child accounts.

For details, see: About credit policy application.

Share credit policy A check box that indicated, if selected that the credit policy configured for the parent account applies to the new sales orders and invoices of its child accounts.
Statement cycle The default statement cycle to be used for the customer.
## The Attributes tab This tab contains the list of customer attributes defined in the associated customer class. Attributes defined in the business account class or supplier class to which the related business account or supplier (if any) belongs may also be listed on this tab. You specify the value of the attributes from the list, if required.
Column Description
Attribute The description of the attribute.
Required A check box that indicates (if selected) that specifying the attribute value is required.
Value The value of the attribute.
## The Activities tab This tab has a table with the list of activities associated with the customer. You use this tab to associate particular tasks, events, and other activities with the customer.
Button Description
Add task Opens the Task (CR306020) window so you can create a new task.
Add event Opens the Event (CR306030) window so you can create a new event.
Add email Opens the Send (CR306015) window so you can send an email to the customer.
Add activity Contains a menu with options that correspond to the list of available activity types. By clicking on a menu option, you open the Activity (CR306010) window, which you use to create an activity of the corresponding type.
Column Description
Type The type of the activity.
Summary The description provided for the activity.
Status The status of the activity.
Start date The start date and time of the activity.
Created at The date and time when the activity was created.
Time spent The total time spent on the activity.
Work group The work group the activity is assigned to (if any).
Owner The username of the user to whom the activity is assigned.
Related entity description The entity that this activity is associated with.
Created by The user who has created the activity.
Project

The project with which the activity is associated, or the code indicating that this activity is not associated with any project; the non-project code is specified in the Project accounting preferences (PM101000) window.

This field appears if the Customer ledger workspace has been integrated with the Projects module in the Project accounting preferences (PM101000) window.

Project task

The task in the project with which the activity is associated.

This field appears if the Customer ledger workspace has been integrated with the Projects module in the Project accounting preferences (PM101000) window.

Released A check box that indicates whether or not the activity is released.
## The General ledger accounts tab This tab shows the default general ledger accounts for this customer. For a new customer, the accounts and subaccounts initially displayed on this tab are, by default, those specified for the customer class you have selected on the **General information** tab; however, you can select other accounts and subaccounts.
Element Description
Customer ledger account The asset account that stores the balance of the transactions related to the customer.
Customer ledger sub. The subaccount used for the customer.
Sales account The income account used to record sales made to the customer. By default, it is the account specified for the customer class. You must specify this account.
Sales non-taxable account The account for non-taxable sales.
Sales - EU account The account for sales within the European Union.
Sales - export account The account for export sales.
Sales sub. The subaccount used to record the sales made to the customer. You must specify the subaccount.
Discount account

The expense account used to record discount amounts received by the customer. You must specify the account if you plan to use configurable discounts.

This field is available only if the Customer and supplier discounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

For details, see: Manage discounts.

Discount sub.

The subaccount (if any) used with the expense account to record the discount amounts received by the customer. You must specify this subaccount if you plan to use configurable discounts.

This field is available only if the Customer and supplier discounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Freight account The income account used to record the freight charges for delivering goods to the customer.
Freight sub. The corresponding subaccount used to record freight charges applied for delivering the goods to the customer.
Cash discount account The expense account used to record cash discount amounts received by the customer due to its payment terms. You must specify the account.
Cash discount sub. The subaccount used with the expense account to record the discount amounts received by the customer due to its payment terms. You must specify this subaccount.
Prepayment account The asset account to accumulate prepayments to the customer.
Prepayment sub. The subaccount used with the prepayment account to record the prepayment amounts sent to the customer.
## The Mailing settings tab The **Mailing settings** tab displays the mailings that can be used for the customer. Mailings are used to set up the sending of electronic versions of specific documents to the customer contacts and company employees that are specified as recipients for the customers. For example, emails for the **INVOICE** mailing are sent when a user clicks **Email invoice** in the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window toolbar for the selected invoice. By default, on this tab, mailings selected for the customer class are listed, but you can select other mailings from the lists defined in the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) and [Sales order preferences (SO101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-order-preferences-so101000/) windows. For an overview of the functionality, see: [About mailings for customers](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-mailings/about-mailings-for-customers/). The tab includes the **Mailings** table, with the list of mailings, and the **Recipients** table, which has the list of recipients. ### The Mailings table In this table, you can view and modify the list of mailings to be used for the customer. Initial settings from the customer class can be overridden for any customer.
Column Description
Mailing ID The unique ID of the mailing.
Branch The branch of the organisation on behalf of which this mailing will be set up.
Email account The system email account to be used by default for sending emails to the customer for this mailing. If no account is specified, the system account specified for the customer class will be used.
Report The Customer ledger report to be used to structure the information from the document, if a report is selected for the mailing rather than an email template (notification template).
Notification template The notification template to be used to generate personalised emails for the mailing. For each mailing, either a report or a notification template can be specified.
Format The format in which the report-based document, if applicable, will be sent by default if the recipient has no other preferences. Select one of the following options: HTML, Excel, or PDF.
Active A check box that indicates (if selected) that this mailing is active. Only active mailings are used to generate emails.
Overridden A check box that indicates (if selected) that the default mailing for the customer class has been changed.
### The Recipients table By using the this table you can select recipients (one per line) for the mailing selected in the Mailings table.
Column Description
Contact type

The type of contact to receive emails. Specify one of the following options:

Primary
The contact specified as the customer’s primary contact
Invoicing
The contact specified as the customer’s invoicing contact
Shipping
The contact specified as the customer’s shipping contact
Employee
An employee of your company who handles the customer’s documents or is otherwise associated with the customer
Contact
Any additional contact of the customer
Document contact
The contact specified on the document, e.g. the sales order or invoice.
Contact ID The particular recipient of the selected type.
Email The email address of this recipient.
Format The format in which the report (if applicable) will be sent to this recipient. Select one of the following options: HTML, Excel, or PDF.
Active A check box that indicates (if selected) that this contact is active. Only active recipients receive the emails for the mailing.
To A check box that indicates (if selected) that this contact will be the main recipient for this mailing.
Bcc A check box that indicates (if selected) that this contact will receive a blind carbon copy (bcc) of the email for this mailing.
## The Other invoice settings tab The Finvoice invoices are in use in Finland only.
Column Description
Finvoice contract ID The ID of the customer’s Finvoice contract.
Finvoice intermediator ID The ID of the customer’s Finvoice intermediator.
## The Direct debit tab The Direct debit functionality is in use in the Netherlands only.
Column Description
Mandate ID The unique ID for the direct debit mandate.
Mandate description The description of the direct debit mandate.
Date of signature The date the customer signed the direct debit mandate.
Is default If you select this check box, you indicate which mandate is used as default value in a sales invoice if more than one mandate is linked to the customer.
One time If you select this check box, you indicate that this is a one-time mandate.
BIC (SWIFT) The BIC code of the customer’s bank account.
IBAN The IBAN of the customer’s bank account.
Last collection date The date of the last direct debit transaction for this mandate.
Max. amount The maximum amount that can be collected for this mandate in a single transaction.
Expiration date The date when the mandate expires.
Branch The ID of the branch being used.
## The Webhook notifications tab This tab is visible for a customer, if the **Webhook notifications** check box on the **General information** tab is selected and saved for that specific customer. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}View notification feedback{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Webhook notification feedback** window where the message from the third-party integrator is visible.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Resend notification{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Resends the notification.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Success{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} If the message has been sent successfully, the value in the column is **True**. If it failed, the value is **False**. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Event{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Represents the event category indicating if an entity has been created or updated. One of the following statuses will appear: + **Entity created** + **Entity updated** + **Entity deleted** - only available for accounts + **Document status changed** + **External action triggered** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Status{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Indicates the status of the message: + **Sent** + **Resent** + **Available** + **Consumed** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Source{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Indicates the source of the event: Visma Net : If the source is this, the status can be **Sent** or **Resent** APIs : If the source is this, the status is **Available**. It is ready to be sent to third party-integrators. External integrator : If the source is this, the status is **Consumed**. The customer confirms receiving the message. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Document status{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Indicates that a document has a new status. For example, when a sales order is changed from status **On hold** to **Open**. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}User{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates which user made a change to the entity.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Date{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates the date when the change was made.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Message{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates the detailed message identifier that has been sent.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Discount codes (AR209000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/discount-codes-ar209000 page You can use this window to add, edit, view, and delete the discount codes defined in your company. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Discount codes (AR209000) You can use this window to add, edit, view, and delete the discount codes defined in your company. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can use this window to add, edit, view, and delete the discount codes defined in your company. To complete the configuration of discounts, you specify discount sequences for each discount code in the [Discounts (AR209500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/discounts-ar209500/) window. This window is available only if the **Customer and supplier discounts** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. ## The Discount codes table This table contains all the discount codes defined in the system and can be used to create new discounts.
Column Description
Discount code The unique code for the discount. You can use up to 10 characters, both letters and numbers.
Description A brief description of the discount. Use an alphanumeric string of up to 50 characters.
Discount type

The type of the discount, which can be one of the following options:

Line
The discount applies to a document line.
Document
The discount applies to the document amount.
Group
The discount applies to multiple lines in the same document.
Applicable to

The entity to which the discount may be applied. For a Line or Group discount, you can select one of the following options:

Customer
The discount is applied if the document refers to a specific customer.
Item
The discount is applied if the document refers to a specific item.
Item price class
The discount is applied if the document refers to items of specific price class.
Customer and item
The discount is applied if the document refers to a specific customer and specific item.
Customer and item price class
The discount is applied if the document refers to a specific customer and items of a specific price class.
Customer price class
The discount is applied if the document refers to a customer of a specific customer price class.
Customer price class and item
The discount is applied if the document refers to a customer of a specific price class and a specific item.
Customer price class and item price class
The discount is applied if the document refers to a customer of a specific price class and to items of a specific price class.
Warehouse
The discount is applied if the document refers to a specific warehouse. (This option appears only if the Warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.)
Warehouse and item
The discount is applied if the document refers to a specific item sold from a specific warehouse. (This option appears only if the Warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.)
Warehouse and customer
The discount is applied if the document refers to a specific customer and a specific warehouse. (This option appears only if the Warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.)
Warehouse and item price class
The discount is applied if the document refers to a specific warehouse and items of a specific price class. (This option appears only if the Warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.)
Warehouse and customer price class
The discount is applied if the document refers to a specific warehouse and to a customer of a specific price class. (This option appears only if the Warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.)
Branch
The discount is applied if the document refers to a specific branch.
Unconditional
The discount is applied to all documents unconditionally.

For a document discount, the following options are available:

Customer
The discount is applied if the document refers to a specific customer.
Customer and branch
The discount is applied if the document refers to a specific customer and a specific branch.
Customer price class
The discount is applied if the document refers to a customer of specific customer price class.
Customer price class and branch
The discount is applied if the document refers to a customer of a specific customer price class and a specific branch.
Unconditional
The discount is applied to all documents unconditionally; this option is mostly used for promotional discounts.
Applied to deferred revenue A check box that (if selected) indicates that a discount should be applied to a component price while computing a deferred revenue for the component. This option is applied to the Line discounts only. This check box is only available if the Deferred revenue management functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Manual A check box that (if selected) indicates that this discount is excluded from automatic searches for the best available discount. A user can, however, add manual discounts to a document line or to a document.
Exclude from discountable amount A check box that (if selected) indicates that the line amount is excluded from the amount that is the base for any applicable Group or Document discount. This option is available for only line-level discounts.
Skip document discounts A check box that indicates (if selected) that after this discount has been applied, no other applicable discounts should be applied. This option is available to only Group discounts.
Auto-numbering A check box that you select to use auto-numbering for generating IDs for series based on this discount code. By default, the discount code will be used as a prefix for generating series IDs, but you can instead specify in the Last number column a series of characters to be used as a template for auto-numbering.
Last number The last ID used for the series if series IDs are auto-numbered. If you enter a series of characters here before any series is created, the character series will be used as a template for auto-numbering. The character series may contain up to 10 characters with digits at the end. The last letter used divides the character series into a prefix and the integer to be auto-incremented. If no value is specified, the discount code will be used as a prefix.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Discounts (AR209500) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/discounts-ar209500 page You use this window to define the series for discount codes. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Discounts (AR209500) You use this window to define the series for discount codes. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You use this window to define the series for discount codes. A discount series specifies exactly how the discount is calculated, based on the amount or quantity of the line item, or on the amount of the document. A series for a discount includes a list of breakpoints, with each break point specifying the range of line amounts, line quantities, or document amounts that are qualified for the specific discount amount or percentage. This window is available only if the **Customer and supplier discounts** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Update discounts Opens the Update discounts dialog box, which you can use to select pending discount series by their start date (pending date) for updating. As a result of updating, the current discount amounts (or per cents) become the last discount amounts (or per cents), and the pending discount amounts (or per cents) become the current discounts.
### The Update discounts dialog box You use this dialog box to select discount series by pending date and to update the discounts.
Element Description
Filter date The latest pending date to select discount series for updating.
OK (button) Updates the discounts that are selected based on the specified date.
Cancel (button) Cancels your selection and closes the dialog box.
## The top part In this part you can create a new discount series for the discount and specify its general options, or select an existing series and view its options.
Element Description
Discount code The code of the discount for which you want to create a new series or view an existing one.
Series

The ID of the series defined for the discount. An alphanumeric string of up to 10 characters can be used.

An ID will be generated by the system if auto-numbering is selected for the discount in the Discount codes (AR209000) window.

Active

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the series is active.

Active series for the same discount should not have overlapping time intervals, or if they do, the series should apply to different entities.

Promotional

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the series is a promotional discount.

For promotional discount series, you must specify the effective date and the expiration date ( End date ).

Description A brief description of the series. An alphanumeric string of up to 30 characters can be used.
Discount by

The way the discount for the series is specified. The following options are available:

Percent
The discount is specified by a percentage.
Amount
The discount is specified by a fixed amount.
Free item
The discount is defined by a specific quantity of a certain free item added to an order. This option is used only with group-level discounts.
Break by

The way the breakpoints for this discount series are specified. Select one of the following options:

Quantity
The ranges for the series are formed by the specified quantities.
Amount
The ranges for the series are formed by the specified amounts.
Prorate discount

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the discount can be prorated.

With prorated discounts, the amount of the discount (or the number of free items) is calculated as if the order is split into multiple orders, so that the customer can get the largest possible discount. To determine the amount of the discount (or the number of free items) for a discountable quantity larger than one break point but less than the next break point, the system treats the discountable quantity as a combination of break point quantities, by using the largest possible break point quantities.

It then calculates the discount amount (or the number of free items) according to the breakpoints used.

Effective date The date when the series becomes effective. This field appears for the series if the Promotional check box is selected.
Expiration date The date when the promotional discount expires. This field appears for the series if the Promotional check box is selected.
Last update date A read-only field that shows the date when the discount series was last updated. This field appears only for a non-promotional discount series; the system inserts a value if the series has been updated at least once.
## The Discount breakpoints tab You use the **Discount breakpoints** tab to create a breakdown series defined in accordance with the options selected in the top part, or to view the details of an existing series. The columns on this tab's table generally depend on the options selected in the **Discount by** and **Break by** fields. ### If Quantity is selected as the Break by option, the table has the following columns
Column Description
Break quantity The quantity of items (break quantity) that starts the new range for a discount level for the currently effective series. Any break quantity should be specified in the base units.
Discount percent The discount percent to be currently used for the quantities that exceed this break quantity if the Percent option is selected as Discount by.
Discount amount The discount amount to be used for the quantities that exceed this break quantity if the Amount option is selected as Discount by.
Pending break quantity The quantity of items (break point) that starts the new range for the pending (not yet effective) series.
Pending discount percent The discount percent to be used with the pending break point for the pending series if the Percent option is selected as Discount by.
Pending discount amount The amount to be used as the discount for the pending series if the Amount option is selected as Discount by.
Pending date The start date for the pending series.
Last break quantity The quantity of item (break point) that started the range for the discount series used before the effective date.
Last discount percent The discount percent used for the break point for the discount series that was in effect before the effective date.
Last discount amount The amount used as the discount for the discount series that was in effect before the effective date.
Last date The date when the current series became effective.
### If Amount is selected as the Break by option, the table has the following columns
Column Description
Break amount The line or document amount (break point) that starts the new range for the currently effective series.
Discount percent The discount percent to be used for the amounts that exceed this break amount for the currently effective series.
Effective date The date when the current series has became effective.
Pending break amount The amount (break point) that starts the new range for the pending series (one that is not yet in effect).
Pending discount percent The discount percent to be used for the break point in the pending series.
Pending date The start date for the pending series.
Last break amount The amount (break point) that started the new range for the previously effective series (the one that was used before the effective date).
Last discount percent The percentage used for the break point in the previously effective series.
### If Amount is selected as the Break by option and Free item as the Discount by option, the table has the following columns
Column Description
Break amount The line amount (break point) that starts the new range for the currently effective series.
Free item qty. The quantity of the free item to be added as the discount to orders for this discount series.
Pending date The start date for the pending series.
Pending break amount The amount (break point) that starts the new range for the pending series (the one that is not yet in effect).
Pending free item qty. The quantity of the free item to be added as the discount to orders for the pending discount series.
Effective date The date when the current series has became effective.
Last break amount The amount (break point) that started the new range for the previously effective series (the one that was used before the effective date).
Last free item qty. The quantity of the free item that was used as the discount for the previously effective series.
### Table columns (the Promotional check box is selected)
Column Description
Break amount The line amount (break point) that starts the new range for the promotional series.
Discount amount The amount of the discount for this range for the promotional series.
## The Free item tab The **Free item** tab of the window displays the free item that is added as the discount, as well as the free item pending to be added and the free item previously added. This tab appears only if **Free item** is selected in the **Discount by** field.
Element Description
Free item The free item (by its item ID) that is added to orders as the discount for this series.
Pending free item The free item (by its item ID) that will be added to orders as the discount for this series, starting on the date specified in the Pending date column on the Discount breakpoints tab.
Last free item The free item (by its item ID) that had been added to orders as the discount for this series before the date shown in the Last date column on the Discount breakpoints tab.
Last update date A read-only field that shows the date when this discount series has been updated last.
## The Items tab The **Items** tab of the window has a table showing the items to which the discount series is applicable. This tab appears only if one of the options that includes **Item** (**Item**, **Customer and item**, or **Customer price class and item**) is selected in the **Applicable to** column in the [Discount codes (AR209000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/discount-codes-ar209000/) window for this discount code.
Column Description
Item ID The stock or non-stock item, by its item ID, to which the series can be applied.
Description The description of the item.
## The Item price classes tab The **Item price classes** tab of the window has a table with the item price classes to which the discount series is applicable. This tab appears only if one of the options that includes **Item price class** (**Item price class**, **Customer and item price class**, or **Customer price class and item price class**) is selected in the **Applicable to** column in the [Discount codes (AR209000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/discount-codes-ar209000/) window for this discount code.
Column Description
Price class ID The item price class to which the series is applicable.
Description The description of the item price class.
## The Customers tab The **Customers** tab of the window has a table with the customers to which the discount series is applicable. This tab appears only if one of the options that includes **Customer** (**Customer**, **Customer and item**, or **Customer and item price class**) is selected in the **Applicable to** column in the [Discount codes (AR209000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/discount-codes-ar209000/) window for this discount code.
Column Description
Customer The customer to which the series is applicable.
Description The business name of the customer.
## The Customer price classes tab The **Customer price classes** tab of the window has a table with the customer price classes to which the discount series is applicable. This tab appears only if one of the options that includes **Customer price class** (**Customer price class**, **Customer price class and item**, or **Customer price class and item price class**) is selected in the **Applicable to** column in the [Discount codes (AR209000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/discount-codes-ar209000/) window for this discount code.
Column Description
Customer price class ID The customer price class to which the series is applicable.
Description The description of the customer price class.
## The Warehouses tab The **Warehouses** tab of the window has a table that lists the warehouses to which the discount series is applicable. This tab appears only if one of the options that includes **Warehouse** (**Warehouse**, **Warehouse and item**, **Warehouse and customer price class**, **Warehouse and customer**, or **Warehouse and item price class**) is selected in the **Applicable to** column in the [Discount codes (AR209000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/discount-codes-ar209000/) window for this discount code.
Column Description
Warehouse ID The warehouse to which the series can be applied.
Description The description of the warehouse.
## The Branches tab The **Branches** tab of the window has a table showing the branches to which the series can be applied. This tab appears only if the **Branch** option is selected in the **Applicable to** column in the [Discount codes (AR209000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/discount-codes-ar209000/) window for this discount code.
Column Description
Branch The branch to which the series can be applied.
Description The description of the branch.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Dunning letter history by customer (AR408000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/dunning-letter-history-by-customer-ar408000 page By using this window, you can view the history of produced dunning letters for the selected customer account. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Dunning letter history by customer (AR408000) By using this window, you can view the history of produced dunning letters for the selected customer account. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. By using this window, you can view the history of produced dunning letters for the selected customer account. For more information on producing dunning letters, see: [About managing dunning letters](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-dunning-letters/manage-dunning-letters-overview/). This window is available only if the **Dunning letter management** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. ## The top part In the top part, select a customer and date range to view the history of dunning letters for this customer.
Element Description
Customer The customer account, by its ID.
Start date The start date in the date range for which you want to display the history of dunning letters.
End date The end date in the date range for which to display the history of dunning letters.
## The table This table contains the list of dunning letters that were generated for the customer during the date range specified in the top part.
Button Description
View dunning letter Opens the Dunning letters (AR306000) window, where you can view the list of documents included in the letter.
Column Description
Branch The branch for which you want to display data. Only displayed if you are using multiple branches.
Customer The customer account associated with the dunning letter, by its ID.
Customer name The customer name.
Dunning letter level The level of the dunning letter.
Status

The status of the dunning letter, which can be one of the following:

Draft
This status indicates that the dunning letter has been prepared and can be released. You can edit the list of customer documents included in the letter.
Released
This status indicates that the dunning letter is released and can be printed or voided. If a dunning fee amount was specified for the level of this letter on the Dunning settings tab of the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window, the invoice for the dunning fee is created and released as well.
Voided
This status indicates that the dunning letter is voided and that the customer documents listed in this letter are available for preparing a new letter with the Draft status.
Overdue balance The total overdue amount owed by the customer.
Dunning letter date The creation date of the dunning letter.
Number of documents The number of documents listed in the letter.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Dunning letter history by document (AR408500) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/dunning-letter-history-by-document-ar408500 page By using this window, you can view the history of produced dunning letters for documents of the selected customer account. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Dunning letter history by document (AR408500) By using this window, you can view the history of produced dunning letters for documents of the selected customer account. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. For more information on producing dunning letters, see [About managing dunning letters](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-dunning-letters/manage-dunning-letters-overview/). This window is available only if the **Dunning letter management** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. ## The top part In the top part you specify a customer, date range, and range of the dunning letter levels to view the history of the documents.
Element Description
Customer The customer account, by its identifier.
Start date The start date in the date range for which you want to display the history of the documents.
End date The end date in the date range for which you want to display the history of the documents.
Element Description
From The starting level in the range of dunning letter levels for which you want to display the history of documents.
To The ending level in the range of dunning letter levels for which you want to display the history of documents.
## The table This table contains the list of customer documents that were included in the dunning letters generated for the customer during the date range specified in the top part.
Button Description
View dunning letter Opens the Dunning letters (AR306000), where you can view the list of documents included in the letter.
Column Description
Customer The customer account, by its identifier.
Type The type of the document.
Invoice no. The reference number of the document. You can click the link to view document details.
Document balance The balance of the document.
Due date The due date of the document.
Dunning level The dunning level of the document.
Dunning letter status

The status of the dunning letter, which can be one of the following:

Draft
The dunning letter has been prepared and can be released. You can edit the list of customer documents included in the letter.
Released
The dunning letter is released and can be printed or voided. If a dunning fee amount was specified for the level of this letter (on the Dunning settings tab of the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window), the invoice for the dunning fee is created and released as well.
Voided
The dunning letter is voided and the customer documents listed in this letter are available for preparing a new letter with the Draft status.
Dunning letter date The creation date of the dunning letter.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Dunning letters (AR306000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/dunning-letters-ar306000 page If you have selected the dunning process by document, by using this window, you can adjust the list of documents included in a letter with the Draft status—that is, you can remove a document from the current letter or exclude it from the dunning process. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Dunning letters (AR306000) If you have selected the dunning process by document, by using this window, you can adjust the list of documents included in a letter with the Draft status—that is, you can remove a document from the current letter or exclude it from the dunning process. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. When you have finished making adjustments, you can release the draft and then print, email, or void the released letter. If you have selected the dunning process by customer, by using this window you can print, email, or void the released letter. For more information on producing dunning letters, see [Manage dunning letters - overview.](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-dunning-letters/manage-dunning-letters-overview/) This window is available only if the **Dunning letter management** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. This window is not displayed in the navigation pane. You access the window by selecting a record and clicking **View dunning letter** on one of the following windows: + [Print/release dunning letters (AR522000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/print-release-dunning-letters-ar522000/) + [Dunning letter history by customer (AR408000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/dunning-letter-history-by-customer-ar408000/) + [Dunning letter history by document (AR408500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/dunning-letter-history-by-document-ar408500/) ## The window toolbar The window toolbar includes standard and window-specific buttons. The window-specific buttons are listed below.
Button Description
Release Releases the selected dunning letter.
Void Voids the selected dunning letter.
Print Prints the selected dunning letter.
## The top part In the top part you can view the letter status, level and date, as well as the customer account for which the letter was generated. If an amount of the dunning fee was specified for the level of the letter, the link to the invoice is displayed after you release the letter.
Element Description
Status

The status of the dunning letter, which can be one of the following:

Draft
This status indicates that the dunning letter has been prepared and can be released. You can edit the list of customer documents included in the letter.
Released
This status indicates that the dunning letter has been released and can be printed, emailed or voided. If a dunning fee amount was specified for the level of this letter (on the Dunning settings tab of the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window), the invoice for the dunning fee is created and released as well.
Voided
This status indicates that the dunning letter is voided and that the dunning level of documents listed in this letter is decreased and these documents are available for preparing a new letter.
Dunning letter level

The level of this dunning letter. The system uses the value of this box to define for which dunning fee amount the invoice should be generated.

If there are documents with different dunning level are included in the letter, the system uses the highest level (among document levels) to set as the dunning level of the letter. You can delete documents with the highest level to decrease the level of the letter.

Customer The customer associated with the dunning letter, by its ID.
Dunning letter date The creation date of this dunning letter.
Fee ref. no. The reference number of the invoice that was created for the dunning fee amount specified for this level of the dunning letter. The invoice is created when you release the dunning letter. You can click the link to view document details.
## The table This table contains the list of customer documents to be included in the dunning letter.
Button Description
Revoke Excludes the selected document from the dunning process. The action is available for dunning letters with the Draft status. After you have excluded a document, you can again include the document in the dunning process by clearing the Revoked check box on the Financial details tab of the Sales invoices (AR301000) window.
Column Description
Type The type of the document.
Ref. no. The reference number of the document. You can click the link to view document details.
Due date The due date of the document.
Original document amount The original document amount.
Overdue balance The overdue amount of the document.
Dunning letter date The creation date of the dunning letter.
Dunning level The dunning level of the document.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Expiring customer contracts (CT401000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/expiring-customer-contracts-ct401000 page In this window, you can view contracts that will expire soon, as well as auto-renewable contracts, which have the Renew automatically check box selected. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Expiring customer contracts (CT401000) In this window, you can view contracts that will expire soon, as well as auto-renewable contracts, which have the Renew automatically check box selected. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. In this window, you can view contracts that will expire soon, as well as auto-renewable contracts, which have the **Renew automatically** check box selected. Contracts may be selected by customer class, contract template, and expiration period. ## Expiration window Use the elements in this area to specify the criteria for selecting contracts.
Element Description
Start date The start date of the date range for which you want to display contracts.
Duration The number of days included in the date range. The system will display contracts with expiration dates in this date range.
Show contracts available for mass renewal A check box that you select to include the auto-renewable contracts that will expire during the specified date range.
Customer class The class of the customers with similar settings. Leave the field blank to show information on all classes.
Contract template A contract template used for contracts with similar settings. Leave the field blank to show information on all templates.
## The table This table contains the list of contracts matching the criteria set in the top part. You can select a contract and view its details.
Column Description
Contract ID The contract’s ID. Click the ID to navigate to the Customer contracts (CT301000) window to see the details of the selected contract.
Description A description of the contract.
Contract template The template used for the contract.
Contract type The type of contract.
Customer The customer associated with the contract, by ID.
Customer name The name of the customer.
Status The status of the contract.
Setup date The date of the contract setup.
Expiration date The date when the contract expires.
Mass renewal A check box that, if selected, indicates that the contract is available for mass processing and is to be displayed in the Renew contracts (CT502000) window.
Last invoicing date The date of the most recent invoicing for the contract.
Next invoicing date The date of the next invoicing for the contract.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

GDPR - personal data (GA000081) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/gdpr-personal-data-ga000081 page The General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR) is a legal framework that sets guidelines for the collection and processing of personal information from individuals who live in the European Union (EU). 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # GDPR - personal data (GA000081) The General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR) is a legal framework that sets guidelines for the collection and processing of personal information from individuals who live in the European Union (EU). This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. With the help of the details registered in this window, you can provide the users with the information you have stored about them in the system if they request it. ## The top part In the top part, select the user for whom you want to view the stored information.
Element Description
Contact The user whose details are registered.
## The table This table contains the details of the user that are used when collecting personal data on the user.
Column Description
Display name The name of the user that is used in the different windows of the system.
Address 1 The first address line of the user’s address.
Address 2 The second address line of the user’s address.
Address 3 The third address line of the user’s address.
Postcode The postcode of the user’s address.
City The city of the user’s address.
County The county of the user’s address.
Country The country of the user’s address.
Email The email address of the user.
Phone 1 The telephone number 1 of the user.
Phone 2 The telephone number 2 of the user.
Phone 3 The telephone number 3 of the user.
Fax The user’s fax number.
Date of birth The user’s date of birth.
Created by The user who has registered the user details.
Created on The date when the user details have been created.
Last modified by The user who has last modified the details of the user.
Last modified The date when the details of the user have been last modified.
Generate recurring transactions (AR504000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/generate-recurring-transactions-ar504000 page You use this window to run a schedule or multiple schedules that automatically generate the customer ledger documents based on the template document or documents. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Generate recurring transactions (AR504000) You use this window to run a schedule or multiple schedules that automatically generate the customer ledger documents based on the template document or documents. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. For more information, see [Schedules for recurring documents](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-customer-ledger-documents/about-schedules-for-recurring-documents/). The schedules to be processed are filtered by the date that you specify in the **Execution date** field. You also need to specify the condition on which the system will stop running the schedules. When you run a schedule, the system uses the original (**Scheduled**) documents as templates to generate similar documents. For each processed schedule, after the required documents have been generated, the system updates the **Last executed** date. No matter how many times you run the schedule, documents will be generated only as required by the schedule. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Run Runs the schedules you have selected (by using the unlabelled check boxes in the table) and generates documents with an Open status.
Run all Runs all schedules in the table.
New schedule Navigates to the Recurring transactions (AR203500) window, from which you can create a new schedule.
## The top part You use the elements in this area to specify the criteria that the system uses for selecting the schedules to be loaded to the table and determining when the schedule executions should be stopped.
Element Description
Execution date

The date that the system uses to filter the schedules to be loaded to the table. Those schedules whose Next execution date is earlier than or equal to the date specified in this field are loaded. Clear the field to display all schedules.

By default, the current business date is displayed.

Stop on execution date An option button that indicates that the date you specify in the Execution date field will be used as the date when the system stops running the schedules.
Stop after number of executions An option button that indicates that the system stops running schedules when the specified number of schedule executions have been performed. You specify the number of schedule executions in the field located near this option button.
## The table The table contains the list of active schedules that match the settings you have specified. You can select the check boxes to include schedules for processing.
Column Description
Included An unlabeled check box that you can use to select this schedule for processing.
Schedule ID

The schedule’s unique ID.

By clicking the number, the system opens the Recurring transactions (AR203500) window as a dialog window; in this window, you can view the details of the selected schedule.

Description The user-defined description of the schedule.
Start date The start date for the schedule.
Expiration date The expiration date for the schedule.
Executed (times) The number of times the documents attached to the schedule were generated.
Execution limit (times) The maximum number of times the schedule may be executed.
Next execution The date when the documents should be generated next.
Last executed The date when the documents were last generated, according to the schedule.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Generate VAT on cash discount (AR504500) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/generate-vat-on-cash-discount-ar504500 page In this window, you can view the list of documents that were paid in full within the cash discount period and to which a VAT calculated based on cash discounts has been applied (that is, a VAT with the Reduce taxable amount on early payment option selected in the Cash discount field in the VAT (TX205000) window). 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Generate VAT on cash discount (AR504500) In this window, you can view the list of documents that were paid in full within the cash discount period and to which a VAT calculated based on cash discounts has been applied (that is, a VAT with the Reduce taxable amount on early payment option selected in the Cash discount field in the VAT (TX205000) window). For more information: [VAT (TX205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/vat-tx205000/). This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. In this window, you can view the list of documents that were paid in full within the cash discount period and to which a VAT calculated based on cash discounts has been applied (that is, a VAT with the **Reduce taxable amount on early payment** option selected in the **Cash discount** field in the [VAT (TX205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/vat-tx205000/) window). You can generate credit notes for the documents you select or for all listed documents. After the generated credit note or notes are released, the cash discount amounts will be applied to the appropriate documents, and the documents will be closed. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Process Initiates the process of generating credit notes for the documents you have selected in the table.
Process all Initiates the process of generating credit notes for all listed documents.
## The top part Here, you can select specific parameters for filtering the documents to be shown in the table below.
Element Description
Date

The date, which you select to view unprocessed documents with payment dates earlier than or the same as the selected date.

By default, the current business date is selected.

Branch The branch for which you want to view documents. By default, the company branch is specified.
Customer

The customer whose documents you want to view. You can leave this field empty to view the documents of all customers.

Note

If the parent-child relationships are established between customer accounts (that is, if the Parent-child customer relationship functionality is enabled in your system in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window), and if the parent company has paid the invoice of the child company, you can create the credit note for the child company by selecting the customer that represents the parent company in this field (or by leaving this field empty).

Consolidate credit notes by customer

A check box that indicates (if selected) that one credit note will be generated for multiple documents grouped by the branch, customer, customer location, currency, customer ledger account (and customer ledger subaccount, if any), and VAT zone.

The check box is selected by default. If you clear this check box, a separate credit note will be generated for each document.

Credit note date

The date to be used as the date of the credit note.

This option is required if the Consolidate credit notes by customer check box is selected in this window. By default, the current business date is selected.

Period

The financial period, which you select to post credit notes.

This option is required if the Consolidate credit notes by customer check box is selected in this window. By default, it is the period of the current business date.

## The table This table contains the list of documents for which early payments were made.
Column Description
Branch The branch to which the document in the row relates.
Customer The customer specified in the document of this row.
Doc. type The type of the document in this row.
Ref. no. The number that identifies the document in the system.
Doc. date The document date.
Currency The currency of the document.
Amount The total document amount.
Cash discount The amount of the cash discount applied to the document.
Payment terms The payment terms specified for the document.
Payment ref. no. The number that identifies the related payment in the system.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

Import incoming payments (AR305500) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/import-incoming-payments-ar305500 page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Import incoming payments (AR305500) This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The top part
Element Description
Cash account In the table will be displayed the incoming payments with the cash account that you select here.
Ref. no. Select the reference number of the document you want to process or create a new one.
Import date The date when the payment was imported.
## The table
Buttons Description
Unhide transaction Click this to unhide a selected transaction. This will clear the Processed and Hidden check boxes for the transaction. The transaction becomes available for processing in the Process incoming payments (AR305000) window.
Unmatch Click this to unmatch a matched transaction.
View matched document Click this to view the details of the matched document.
Column Description
Matched This check box is selected by default, it the transaction has been matched.
Processed This check box is selected by default, it the transaction has been processed.
Hidden This check box is selected by default, it the transaction has been hidden.
Trans. ID The ID of the transaction.
Ext. ref. no. The reference number of the transaction.
Trans. date The original date of the transaction.
Trans. descr. The description of the transaction.
Receipt The amount of the receipt.
Disbursement The amount of the disbursement.
Invoice no. The internal reference number for the invoice/credit note that has been paid.
Orig. receipt The original amount of the receipt.
Orig. disbursement The original amount of the disbursement.
Applied rule The rule that was applied when matching the payment.
Account from bank The bank account or IBAN from which the payment was paid for the customer transactions. In some formats, it contains the IBAN or bank account from which you have paid to the supplier.
Archive code The code of the document in the archive.
Business account The supplier or customer associated with the document, by its account ID.
Business account name The name of the supplier or customer associated with the document.
Entry type ID The ID of an entry type that is used as a template for a new cash transaction to be created to match the selected bank transaction.
Invoice number list When a line refers to more than one invoice number, the invoice numbers are listed here.
Location The location of the supplier or customer.
Module The module from which the transaction originates.
Name from bank The name of the bank that processed the document.
Payee name The payee name, if any, specified for a transaction.
Payment method The payment method that was used for the transaction.
Payment number list When a line refers to more than one payment reference, the payment reference numbers are listed here.
Payment ref. no. The reference number of the payment.
Trans. code The code of the transaction.
Workspace The involved workspace in the system.
Incoming payments history (AR407000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/incoming-payments-history-ar407000 page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Incoming payments history (AR407000) This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The top part
Element Description
Cash account In the table will be displayed the incoming payments with the cash account that you select here.
From date The date from which the transactions will be displayed in the table.
To date The date until which the transactions will be displayed in the table.
Statement no. The number of the statement whose transactions you want to view.
## The table
Element Description
Statement no. The number of the statement from which the transaction comes.
Ext. ref. no. The reference number of the payment.
Match type

The available match types are:

  • Matched to payment
  • Matched to invoice
  • Created
  • Hidden
Trans. date The original date of the transaction.
Trans. descr. The description of the transaction.
Receipt The amount of the disbursement.
Disbursement The amount of the receipt.
Invoice no. The internal reference number for the invoice/credit note that has been paid.
Entry type ID The ID of an entry type that is used as a template for a new cash transaction to be created to match the selected bank transaction.
Applied rule The rule that was applied when matching the payment.
Workspace The workspace from which the transaction originates.
Type The type of the original transaction.
Ref. no. The reference number of the invoice to which the transaction belongs.
Business account The supplier or customer associated with the document, by its account ID.
Business account name The name of the supplier or customer associated with the document.
Location The location of the supplier or customer.
Payee name The payee name, if any, specified for a transaction.
Payment method The payment method that was used for the transaction.
Trans. ID The ID of the transaction.
Trans. code The code of the transaction.

Related pages

Concepts

Invoice history by item (AR40105S) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/invoice-history-by-item-ar40105s page You use this inquiry to list all invoices from the Customer ledger that are released. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Invoice history by item (AR40105S) You use this inquiry to list all invoices from the Customer ledger that are released. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. > [!NOTE] > This inquiry is based on customer invoice lines, regardless if they have a connection to a sales order. ## The top part
Element Description
Item ID Select the item you want to view the invoice history for.
Item class The item class of the items to be included in the report. Leave the field blank to include requests for items of multiple classes.
Subaccount The subaccount for which you want to view information for the item.
Customer The customer that has ordered the goods or services.
Customer class The class of the customers to be included in the report.
Salesperson The salesperson for whom you want to view information. Leave the field blank to view information on all salespersons.
Group by salesperson Groups the lines of the table per salesperson.
From period The first financial period for the date range the inquiry will cover.
To period The last period for the date range the inquiry will cover.
Start date The starting date in the date range for which you want to display the history of sales.
End date The ending date in the date range for which you want to display the history of sales.
## The table
Column Description
Salesperson The salesperson associated with the sale.
Item ID The sold stock or non-stock item, by its item ID. You can click the link to view the details of the item in the Stock items (IN202500) or Non-stock items (IN202000) window.
Item description The description provided for the item.
Quantity The total ordered quantity of the item.
Cost of goods sold The accumulated COGS balance from the sales order lines for the item.
Sales The accumulated sales balance from the sales order lines for the item.
Profit The profit for the sold item (calculated: Sales - COGS).
Margin The margin for the sold item (calculated: profit as percentage of Sales).

Related pages

Windows

Manage credit holds (AR523000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/manage-credit-holds-ar523000 page By using this window, you can place customers that have overdue invoices and have received the final dunning letters on credit hold; you can also release them from credit hold after they have paid. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage credit holds (AR523000) By using this window, you can place customers that have overdue invoices and have received the final dunning letters on credit hold; you can also release them from credit hold after they have paid. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Process Initiates the processing, based on the selected action, of the customer accounts you have selected.
Process all Initiates the processing of all customer accounts listed in the table.
## The top part Here, you can select the action to be performed if you click **Process** or **Process all**. Also, you can specify the time interval during which the final dunning letters were generated.
Element Description
Action

The operation the system performs if you click Process or Process all. The following options are available:

  • Apply credit hold: Prevents users from creating any new sales orders for the selected customers.

If you select this option, the table will include only the customers eligible for applying the credit hold. In other words, the table will include the customers for which the final dunning letters were generated and the credit hold was not applied. This rule applies only when the Show all check box is not selected.

  • Release credit hold: Takes the selected customer accounts off hold so that new sales orders can be created.

If you select this option, the table will include only the customers eligible for releasing the credit hold. In other words, the table will include the customers for which the final dunning letters were generated and the credit hold was applied. This rule applies only when the Show all check box is not selected.

Show all A check box that you select to have the table include all the customers for which the final dunning letters were generated in the specified date range. If you do not select this check box, the table will display the customers as specified in the description of the Action field.
Start date

The starting date of the date range within which the final dunning letters were generated.

Date selection is available only if the Apply credit hold action is selected.

End date

The ending date of the date range within which the final dunning letters were generated.

Date selection is available only if the Apply credit hold action is selected.

## The table This table contains the list of customers for which the final dunning letters were generated in the specified date range.
Column Description
Customer no. An ID of the customer account.
Customer name The name of the customer.
Dunning letter date

The date when the final letter was generated.

The column is available if the Dunning letter management functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Overdue balance The overdue amount owed by the customer.
Customer balance The total amount of the open customer documents.
Status The status of the customer account.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

Manual payments (AR30200S) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/manual-payments-ar30200s section In this window, you can create incoming payments for open documents in the customer ledger, for example, for invoices, debit notes, and overdue charges. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manual payments (AR30200S) In this window, you can create incoming payments for open documents in the customer ledger, for example, for invoices, debit notes, and overdue charges. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Process

Click the check boxes to select the documents for which you want to create payments and click Process. The selected documents are processed and the system creates a Reference number from Payments for each payment.

icon-confirmation is displayed to the left of each document that has been processed successfully.

## The top part
Element Description
Due date less than or equal to The due date of the documents to be displayed in the table is less than or equal to the date you select here.
Payment method The payment methods of the documents to be displayed in the table. If you do not select anything here, in the table are displayed documents with all payment methods.
## The table
Button Description
View document View the sales invoice connected with the document selected in the table.
View payment View the payment invoice connected with the document selected in the table.
Column Description
Document type

The type of the document. The options are:

  • Invoice
  • Debit note
  • Credit note
  • Overdue charge
  • Credit write-off
Invoice ref. no. The invoice number. Sort and drill down to see the invoice.
Customer The customer’s ID.
Customer name The customer’s name.
Amount The document amount.
Balance The balance of the document.
Amount paid The actual amount paid.
Payment date The date of the payment release. You can edit the pay date, so that overdue charges will be calculated correctly.
Payment period The period associated with the payment date.
Ref. no. from Payments Shows the reference number after you have processed the payments.
KID-number The customer identification number from the payment.
Date The date on the invoice.
Currency The currency used on the invoice.
Due date The due date of the document.
Cash account The cash account connected with the invoice.
Payment method The description of the payment method used on the invoice.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Overdue charges (AR204500) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/overdue-charges-ar204500 page In this window, you can define overdue charges to be used for late payments in the collection process. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Overdue charges (AR204500) In this window, you can define overdue charges to be used for late payments in the collection process. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. In this window, you can define overdue charges to be used for late payments in the collection process. You define the overdue charges by creating overdue charge codes. You can create as many overdue charge codes (particular overdue charge entities with its own settings) as needed. For details, see: [About overdue charges](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/overdue-charges/about-overdue-charges/). Before you create an overdue charge code, you need to create appropriate payment terms by using the [Payment terms (CS206500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/payment-terms-cs206500/) window that define the due date for paying the documents of the **Overdue charge** type. This window is available if the **Overdue charges** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The General settings section This section contains several sections with various information about the overdue charges. You use the elements in this section to define a new overdue charge code and its settings, or to select an existing code and view its settings.
Element Description
Overdue charge ID The unique ID for the overdue charge code. You can use up to 10 characters, both numbers and letters.
Description A description of the overdue charge code. You can use up to 30 characters, both numbers and letters
Calculation method

The way the system calculates charges for overdue documents. The following options are available:

Interest on open entries
The overdue document is subject to charges until it is closed. To calculate the charges for the days past due, the system uses the document’s open balance as of the date of calculation. If overdue charges have been recorded for the document, the system calculates the charges for the number of days since the date of the last overdue charges.
Interest on open, partially paid, and paid entries
The overdue document is subject to charges until it is closed. To calculate the charges for the days past due, the system uses the document’s open balance for each of these days. If overdue charges have been recorded for the document, the system calculates the charges for the number of days since the date of the last overdue charges.
Interest on paid entries
The overdue document becomes subject to charges at the moment it is closed. To calculate the charges for the days past due, the system uses the document’s open balance for each of these days.
Terms The payment terms that apply to generated documents of the Overdue charge type. You create payment terms by using the Payment terms (CS206500) window to provide a schedule for paying this overdue charge.
Base currency A check box that indicates (if selected) that the system will calculate the overdue charge by using the base currency. If the check box is cleared, the system will calculate the overdue charge by using the currency of an overdue document.
Overdue charge account The account to which collected overdue charges are recorded.
Overdue charge subaccount The corresponding subaccount.
VAT category The VAT category, if applicable to this overdue charge and overdue fee (if any).
## The Overdue fee settings section You use the elements in this section to define an overdue fee that is associated with the selected overdue charge code.
Element Description
Fee amount The amount of the fee for an overdue charge document (if your company charges any). If the Base currency check box is selected, the fee is charged in the base currency. If the check box is cleared, the fee is charged in the currency of the overdue document.
Fee account The account to which the overdue fee is recorded.
Fee subaccount The corresponding subaccount.
Description

A description of the overdue fee.

> [!NOTE] > This field supports the multi-language functionality, where you can translate the entered text to multiple languages. For more information, see: About multi-language support

## The Charging settings section You use the elements in this section to define the criteria the system uses for generating a document of the **Overdue charges** type.
Element Description
Total threshold The minimum amount of overdue charges that should initiate the generation of a document of the Overdue charge type.
Charging method

The way the system charges an overdue document. An overdue charge can be defined either as a fixed amount or as a percentage (annual rate) on a document’s open balance for the number of days late. The following options are available:

  • Fixed amount: The system charges overdue documents for a fixed amount. You specify the fixed amount in the Amount field, which appears when you select the Fixed amount charging method.

  • Percent with threshold: The system calculates the overdue charge as a percentage of the document’s open balance for the number of days late. (You specify the percentage in the Rates table, which appears once you select this charging method.) Then the system compares the calculated overdue charge amount with the threshold amount (which you enter in the Threshold field) and does either of the following:

    • If the amount of overdue charges is less than the specified threshold amount, the system does not charge the document.
    • If the amount of overdue charges is greater than or equal to the threshold amount, the system charges the document for the calculated charge amount.
  • Percent with min. amount: The system calculates the overdue charge as a percentage of the document’s open balance for the number of days late. (You specify the percentage in the Rates table, which appears once you select this charging method.) Then the system compares the calculated charge amount with the minimum amount (which you enter in the Min. amount field) and does either of the following:

    • If the amount of overdue charges is less than the minimum amount, the system charges a document for the minimum amount.
    • If the amount of overdue charges is greater than or equal to the minimum amount, the system charges a document for the calculated charge amount.
Amount

The amount that the system uses as the fixed charge amount for overdue documents when the Fixed amount charging method is applied.

This field is available if the Fixed amount option is selected in the Charging method field.

Threshold

The threshold amount of overdue charges, which defines whether to charge an overdue document when the Percent with threshold charging method is applied.

This field is available if the Percent with threshold option is selected in the Charging method field.

Min. amount

The minimum amount that the system uses to charge an overdue document when the Percent with min. amount charging method is applied.

This field is available if the Percent with min. amount option is selected in the Charging method field.

## The Rates table You use the elements in this table to define rates and their effective start date. The system uses the percent rate in the row that has the most recent start date at the time of overdue charge calculation. This table is only available if the **Percent with threshold** or **Percent with min. amount** option is selected in the **Charging method** field.
Element Description
Start date The date when the rate in this row becomes effective.
Percent rate The annual percentage rate to be used to calculate an overdue charge.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Packaging types (CS207600) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/packaging-types-cs207600 page You use this window to create and maintain the list of packages used by your company for shipping goods by using different carriers. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Packaging types (CS207600) You use this window to create and maintain the list of packages used by your company for shipping goods by using different carriers. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You use this window to create and maintain the list of packages used by your company for shipping goods by using different carriers. Such parameters of packages as dimensions, tare weight, and maximum weight capacity are used for automatic packaging and for freight calculation for shipments. ## The table This table provides information about the packages to be used for shipping. > [!NOTE] > After you have added a new package to the list and saved it, the system will reorder the items alphabetically.
Column Description
Box ID The ID of the type of packages. An alphanumeric string of up to 15 characters may be used.
Description A description of the content of the package.
Tare weight The weight of an empty package of this type, may include the weight of any packaging material used to pack items inside the package.
Max. weight The maximum weight a package of that type can hold.
Weight UoM The unit of measure used for the weight as specified in the Inventory preferences (IN101000) window.
Max. volume The maximum volume of items that can fit into a package of the type.
Volume UoM The unit of measure used for the volume as specified in the Inventory preferences (IN101000) window.
Length

The length of the package.

Note

For information purposes only; the value is not used in any calculation.

Width

The width of the package.

Note

For information purposes only; the value is not used in any calculation.

Height

The height of the package.

Note

For information purposes only; the value is not used in any calculation.

Active by default If you select this check box, the package will be added by default to the list of packages on the Packages tab of the Ship via codes (CS207500) window for each new ship via code.

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

Prepare dunning letters (AR521000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/prepare-dunning-letters-ar521000 page In this window, you can generate dunning letters (letters of payment collection) for customers that have unpaid and overdue invoices. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Prepare dunning letters (AR521000) In this window, you can generate dunning letters (letters of payment collection) for customers that have unpaid and overdue invoices. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. In this window, you can generate dunning letters (letters of payment collection) for customers that have unpaid and overdue invoices. The intervals between successive dunning letters of different levels are defined on the **Dunning settings** tab of the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. After you generate dunning letters by using the current window, you can review and process them further in the [Print/release dunning letters (AR522000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/print-release-dunning-letters-ar522000/) window. The window is available if the **Dunning letter management** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Process Initiates the process of generating dunning letters for the selected records or those for which you have selected the unlabeled check boxes in the table.
Process all Initiates the process of generating dunning letters for all the records in the table.
## The top part Here, you can make selections to narrow the list of records.
Element Description
Customer class The customer class for which you want to display data. You can select a particular customer class to view only customers of the class that have overdue balances, or leave the field blank to view all customers with overdue balances.
Customer The name of the customer.
Dunning letter date The date to be specified on the generated letters.
Include other unpaid documents A check box that you select to include unpaid documents that are not yet due in the preparation of dunning letters.
Include credit note documents A check box that indicates, if selected, that the dunning letter will contain credit notes.
Split by documents reference number A check box that indicates, if selected, that the table below will contain information split by the documents reference number. If not selected, the table will contain documents grouped by customer.
This section is displayed if **Dunning process** is set to **By document** on the **Dunning settings** tab of the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window.
Element Description
All overdue documents The option button that you select to include all the overdue documents of a customer into the dunning letters preparation process.
Dunning letter level The option button that you select to include into the dunning letters preparation process those overdue documents whose level is in the range specified in the From and To fields.
From The starting level of the range. The field is available if the Dunning letter level option is selected.
To The ending level of the range. The field is available if the Dunning letter level option is selected.
## The table The table contents depends on the option selected in the **Dunning process** field on the **Dunning settings** tab of the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window: By customer : The table lists the customer accounts that have at least one overdue document. By document : The table lists the overdue documents grouped by customer and by document dunning level. For instance: If a customer account has two overdue documents with different levels, the system will display two rows in the table. If a customer account has two documents with the same level, the system will group the documents into one row.
Column Description
Customer class The customer class of the customer.
Customer The identifier of the customer.
Customer name The name of the customer.
Earliest due date The due date of the oldest overdue invoice of the customer.
Branch The branch on behalf of which the letter will be sent. If one consolidated letter is generated for all branches, the branch selected as the letter sender on the General settings tab of the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window is shown.
Overdue balance The overdue amount that is due from the customer (sum of open invoices, overdue charges and debit notes).
Number of overdue documents The number of overdue documents of the customer for which a dunning letter of the current level (by customer or by document) has not been prepared yet.
Customer balance The total balance of all open documents of the customer including the total balance of prepayments.
Number of documents The number of overdue and other unpaid documents of the customer for which a dunning letters of the current level (by customer or by document) has not been prepared yet.
Dunning letter level The level of the dunning letter to be generated for the customer.
Last dunning letter date The date of the previous dunning letter, if any has been generated.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Prepare statements (AR503000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/prepare-statements-ar503000 page In this window, you can prepare statements for selected statement cycles or for all cycles. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Prepare statements (AR503000) In this window, you can prepare statements for selected statement cycles or for all cycles. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Process Initiates processing of the statements for the cycles you have selected in the table.
Process all Initiates processing of statements for all cycles listed in the window.
## The Statements table In this table, you can select the statement cycles you want to process. Statements will be prepared in the format required for printing or for sending by email, as specified for each customer or customer class. To view and further process statements, use the [Print statements (AR503500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/print-statements-ar503500/) window. You can get a detailed statement history through inquiries.
Column Description
Prepare for The date for which you want to prepare statements.
Cycle ID The unique ID of the cycle.
Description The description of the statement cycle.
Last statement date The date when the statements for the cycle were last generated.
Last finance charge date The date when overdue charges were last calculated for the customers.
Schedule type The selected statement cycle processing option. The following values are available: The end of the month, A fixed day of the month, and Custom.
Next statement date The date when the statements should be generated next, according to the cycle settings.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Send invoices (AR508000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/send-invoices-ar508000 page From this window, you can print the customer ledger documents for those customers who prefer to receive printed copies of the documents (the Print invoices check box is selected for the customer account). 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Send invoices (AR508000) From this window, you can print the customer ledger documents for those customers who prefer to receive printed copies of the documents (the Print invoices check box is selected for the customer account). This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can also email selected documents for those customers who prefer to receive documents by email (that is, the **Send invoices by email** check box is selected for the customer accounts in the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window, the **Invoicing settings** tab) or mark them to indicate that they should not be emailed. For details, see: [Send invoices by email](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-mailings/send-invoices-by-email/). ## What to do from this window + [Send several invoices or credit notes to AutoInvoice](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-mailings/send-several-invoices-or-credit-notes-to-autoinvoice/) + [Email several invoices or credit notes](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-mailings/email-several-invoices-or-credit-notes/) + [Send invoices by email](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-mailings/send-invoices-by-email/) + [Print invoice](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/print-invoice/) + [Print several invoices or credit notes](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-mailings/print-several-invoices-or-credit-notes/) + [Print and send invoices or credit notes by regular mail](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-mailings/print-and-send-invoices-or-credit-notes-by-regular-mail/) ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Process Initiates processing, based on the selected action, of the documents you have selected in the table.
Process all Initiates processing of all documents, with the specific type of processing dependent on the action selected, listed in the table.
View document Displays the selected document in the window in which it was originally created.
## The top part Here, you can select the type of processing to be done if you click **Process** or **Process all**. Also, for invoices associated with contract servicing, you can select invoices by the user or work group that owns them.
Element Description
Action

The processing action to be taken. The following options are available:

  • Mark as do not email: Marks the selected documents as ones that should not be emailed.

  • Email invoice/note: Generates emails for the selected documents (or all documents) in accordance with the INVOICE mailing settings.

  • Print invoice/note: Initiates the process of printing the selected documents (or all documents) for sending by mail.

  • Poll invoice status: Updates the status of the AutoInvoice column in the table.

    • Sent to AutoInvoice, awaiting processing
    • Pending, awaiting delivery
    • Sent, the invoice is sent
    • Error, to check why an error occurred, you have to go to AutoInvoice

If applicable, it also updates the Business level status found in the Sales invoices (AR301000) window.

  • Send to AutoInvoice: Select this action to send this invoice to AutoInvoice.

    Note

    As of 1 July 2022, new branches need to verify their company in the AutoInvoice settings (CS10250S) window to be able to use AutoInvoice. See also: About Know your customer (KYC).

  • Print overdue charge: Initiates the process of printing the selected documents (or all documents) for sending by mail.

Show all A check box that indicates to the system (if selected) to display all the documents with a status other than Closed, regardless of specified selection criteria.
Show closed invoices/credit notes

(This check box appears when you select the Poll invoice status or the Send to AutoInvoice action.)

When this check box is selected, the system will display all documents with the Closed status.

Start date The starting date of the date range within which documents were created.
End date The ending date of the date range within which documents were created.
## The table This table contains the list of documents that match the criteria specified in the to part and were not printed or emailed before (that is, the **Printed** or **Emailed** check box is cleared in the document settings).
Column Description
Type The type of the document: Invoice, Debit note, Credit note, Overdue charge, or Credit write-off.
Invoice no. The unique ID of the document. You can click the link to view the details of the selected document in the Sales invoices (AR301000) window.
Date The date of the document.
Post period The financial period of the document.
Customer The customer associated with the document.
Customer name The name of the customer as it appears on the documents.
Due date The due date of the document in accordance with the payment terms assigned to the customer.
Amount The amount of the document.
Cash discount The cash discount amount available for the document.
Currency The currency of the document.
Customer order The document reference number used by the customer.
Printed A check box that indicates (if selected) that the document was printed.
Do not print A check box that indicates (if selected) that printing of this document is not mandatory for further processing.
Emailed A check box that indicates (if selected) that the document was emailed.
Do not email A check box that indicates (if selected) that emailing of this document is not mandatory for further processing.
Send to AutoInvoice A check box that indicates (if selected) that the document will be sent to AutoInvoice.
Sent to AutoInvoice A check box that indicates (if selected) that the document was sent to AutoInvoice.
AutoInvoice status The status of the invoice in AutoInvoice.
Sending method Here you can select the sending method: Standard or Consumer.
AutoInvoice sent by Here you can filter the invoices on the manner it was sent to AutoInvoice. The options are: Home network, Email, Print, Print PRIORITY, e-invoice, Bank network, N/A.
AutoInvoice error message If the invoice has an error in AutoInvoice, the error message from AutoInvoice is displayed here.

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

Process customer refunds (AR50300S) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/process-customer-refunds-ar50300s page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Process customer refunds (AR50300S) This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Create customer refunds Click this to create customer refunds and to open a window, where you can view the status of your refunds and send them to AutoPay.
## The top part ### The Filter documents on section
Element Description
Payment method Select the payment method you want to filter on.
Cash account Select the cash account you want to filter on.
Date before Select the date before you want to filter on.
Customer Select the customer you want to filter on.
### The Input section
Element Description
Payment method Select the preferred payment method. You can only select from payment methods that have the Create batch payment (customer and supplier ledgers) check box selected in the Payment methods (CA204000) window.
Cash account The Cash account is automatically displayed, but you can select another one if you want to.
Payment date In the Payment date field, select the date you want the refund to take place.
Currency The currency of the refund. If you have a cash account that uses foreign currency, you can use the View base button to view the amount(s) in the base currency instead of the foreign currency.
Customer The customer to whom the refund will be paid.
Post period The post period of the refund.
### The Calculation section
Element Description
GL balance General ledger balance
Available balance Available balance
Selection total The total of the selected documents
Bank balance Bank balance
Documents to pay The number of documents to pay.
## The table
Column Description
Doc. type The document type of the payment to be refunded.
Ref. no. The reference number of the document.
Customer The number of the customer to whom the refund will be paid.
Customer name The name of the customer to whom the refund will be paid.
Customer account The account of the customer to which the refund will be paid.
Payment ref. no. The reference number of the payment refund.
Pay separately Select this if you want to pay the refund separately.
Payment date In the Payment date field, select the date you want the refund to take place. The suggested date is today’s date.
Amount paid In the Amount paid column, verify the suggested amount or change the amount you want to refund.
Balance The remaining balance of the payment that can be refunded.
Currency The currency of the balance.
Balance (original currency) The balance of the payment in the original currency.
Reprint invoices (AR50801S) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/reprint-invoices-ar50801s page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Reprint invoices (AR50801S) This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Process Initiates reprinting of the documents you have selected in the table.
Process all Initiates reprinting of all documents listed in the table.
View document Shows the document connected with the invoice/note selected in the table.
## The top part
Element Description
Action

The processing action to be taken. The following option is available:

Reprint invoice/note
Initiates the process of printing the selected documents (or all documents) for sending by mail.
Sent to AutoInvoice
when you select this option, the table displays all documents that were sent to AutoInvoice during the selected date range. You can then initiate the process of printing selected documents (or all documents) for sending by mail.
Start date The starting date of the date range within which documents were created.
End date The ending date of the date range within which documents were created.
## The table
Column Description
Type The type of the document: Invoice, Debit note, Credit note, Overdue charge, or Credit write-off.
Invoice no. The unique ID of the document. You can click the link to view the details of the selected document in the Sales invoices (AR301000) window.
Date The date of the document.
Post period The financial period of the document.
Customer The customer associated with the document.
Customer name The name of the customer as it appears on the documents.
Due date The due date of the document in accordance with the payment terms assigned to the customer.
Amount The amount of the document.
Cash discount The cash discount amount available for the document.
Currency The currency of the document.
Customer order The document reference number used by the customer.

Related pages

Windows

Print/release dunning letters (AR522000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/print-release-dunning-letters-ar522000 page You can use this window to release, email and print the dunning letters that were created in the Prepare dunning letters (AR521000) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Print/release dunning letters (AR522000) You can use this window to release, email and print the dunning letters that were created in the Prepare dunning letters (AR521000) window. For more information: [Prepare dunning letters (AR521000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/prepare-dunning-letters-ar521000/). This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. The window is available if the **Dunning letter management** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Process Initiates processing, based on the selected action, of the letters you have selected in the table.
Process all Initiates processing, based on the selected action, of all letters listed in the table.
## The top part Here, you can select the action to be performed if you click **Process** or **Process all**, as well as the date range when the letters were generated.
Element Description
Action

The processing action to be taken if you click Process or Process all. Select one of the following options:

Print dunning letter
Initiates the process of printing each dunning letter for sending by mail.
Email dunning letter
Initiates the process of sending each dunning letter electronically to customers.
Mark as: do not email
For each dunning letter, selects the Do not email check box.
Mark as: do not print
For each dunning letter, selects the Do not print check box.
Release dunning letter
Initiates the process of releasing dunning letters with the Draft status. If a dunning fee amount is specified for this level, the system creates and releases an invoice for the fee amount. This invoice does not include the due documents listed in the letter.
Show all A check box that you select to indicate to the system that all letters should be displayed, no matter dates specified and what kind of processing they require, printing, emailing, or other.
Start date The date that starts the date range during which the dunning letters were generated.
End date The date that ends the date range during which the dunning letters were generated.
## The table This table contains the list of dunning letters that were generated during the date range specified in the top part.
Button Description
View dunning letter Opens the Dunning letters (AR306000) window, where you can view the list of documents included into the letter.
Column Description
Branch The branch for which you want to display data.
Customer The customer associated with the dunning letter, by its ID.
Customer name The name of the customer.
Dunning letter date The creation date of the dunning letter.
Dunning letter level The level of the dunning letter.
Overdue balance The total overdue amount owed by the customer.
Final reminder A check box that indicates (if selected) that this dunning letter is a final reminder. In this case, the customer account for which such letter was prepared can be selected in the Manage credit holds (AR523000) window, so you can put this account on credit hold.
Do not print A check box that indicates (if selected) that this dunning letter should not be printed.
Printed A check box that indicates (if selected) that this dunning letter has been printed.
Do not email A check box that indicates (if selected) that this dunning letter should not be emailed.
Emailed A check box that indicates (if selected) that this dunning letter has been emailed.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Print statements (AR503500) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/print-statements-ar503500 page You use this window to print or email statements for the selected statement cycle in accordance with customer settings. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Print statements (AR503500) You use this window to print or email statements for the selected statement cycle in accordance with customer settings. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You use this window to print or email statements for the selected statement cycle in accordance with customer settings. Also, you can view unprocessed statements or already-processed statements. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Process Initiates processing of the statements you have included (by selecting the unlabelled check boxes in the table) for the selected cycle.
Process all Initiates processing of all statements (listed in the window) of the selected cycle.
Inquiries

List of inquiries you can navigate to from this window:

## The top part Here, you can specify selection criteria to narrow the statements displayed in the table. Statements were prepared in the format required for printing or sending by email (or both), as specified for each customer or customer class, and can be either sent by email or printed for mailing.
Element Description
Actions

The action to be applied to the statements selected for processing:

Print statement
Select this action to print statements prepared for printing.
Email statement
Select this action to generate emails for statements in accordance with the STATEMENT mailing settings.
Mark as: do not email
Select this option to mark statements as not requiring emailing.
Mark as: do not print
Select this option to mark statements as not requiring printing.
Regenerate statement
Select this action to regenerate and prepare the most recent customer statements.
Statement cycle A statement cycle whose statements will be processed.
Statement date The date of the statements.
Branch The branch for which you want to view statements.
Foreign currency statements A check box that indicates (if selected) that foreign currency statements should be included in processing.
Show all A check box that indicates (if selected) that all statements (processed or not) will be displayed in the table.
Message In this field, you can write a free-form message connected with the statement.
## The table This table displays the statements matching the criteria defined in the top part. You can use the unlabelled check boxes to select statements for processing.
Column Description
Customer The unique identifier of the customer.
Customer name The name of the customer.
Statement balance The balance of the customer’s statement in the base currency.
Overdue balance The overdue balance of customer’s statement in the base currency.
Currency The currency of the statement.
FC statement balance The balance of the statement in the foreign currency.
FC overdue balance The overdue balance of customer’s statement in the foreign currency.
FC statement balance A check box that indicates (if selected) that the statement is in the foreign currency.
Do not print A check box that indicates (if selected) that it is not required to print the statement in accordance with the customer settings in the Customers (AR303000) window.
Printed A check box that indicates (if selected) that the statement has been printed in accordance with the customer settings in the Customers (AR303000) window.
Do not email A check box that indicates (if selected) that it is not required to email the statement to the customer in accordance with the customer settings in the Customers (AR303000) window.
Emailed A check box that indicates (if selected) that the statement has been emailed in accordance with the customer settings in the Customers (AR303000) window.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Process incoming payments (AR305000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/process-incoming-payments-ar305000 section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Process incoming payments (AR305000) This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## What to do from this window + [Match incoming payments](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-payments-and-applications/match-incoming-payments/) + [Create a new payment or document](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-payments-and-applications/create-a-new-payment-or-document/) + [Match a bank transaction or incoming payment line to different documents](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-payments-and-applications/match-a-bank-transaction-or-incoming-payment-line-to-different-documents/) + [Process matched incoming payments](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-payments-and-applications/process-matched-incoming-payments/) ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Status description Click this to open a dialogue box that shows you the statuses of the active document, such as “Remaining balance available”.
Match automatically

When you click this, the system tries to match the imported incoming payments with the customer ledger invoices in the system. The matching is based on payment reference and/or invoice numbers.

For payments that the system has matched automatically, you see that the Ready to process check box is selected. These are now ready for processing.

Process

Initiates the processing of transactions with the Ready to process check box selected. The processing takes place on all lines that are ready for processing, regardless of any filters set on the table.

After processing, in the first column, a Success or icon-error is displayed for each processed line to indicate if the processing was successful or not. You can hover over the icon to read the line-specific message. Successfully processed lines do not show up again for the selected cash account.

Setting for matching

In the Settings for matching dialog box, you can temporarily change the settings for matching, for example date settings or the weight settings for the relevance calculation.

The settings you make here disappear when you leave the window.

### The Settings for matching dialog box In this dialog box, you can specify preferences for matching and relevance calculation. By default, the system uses the values specified on the **Incoming payments settings** tab in the [Cash management preferences (CA101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-management-preferences-ca101000/) window. These values remain effective during your session unless you specify new values. #### The Disbursement date matching section
Element Description
Days before bank transaction date

The maximum number of days allowed between the date of a cash management transaction (disbursement) and the date of the selected transaction on the bank statement.

The system considers the disbursement a matching one if the difference falls within the specified date range.

Days after bank transaction date

The maximum number of days allowed between the date of the selected transaction on the bank statement and the date of a receipt.

The system considers the disbursement a matching one if the difference falls within the specified date range.

Allow matching to credit note

A check box that (if selected) indicates that the system will automatically match the receipt bank transactions to credit notes by the reference number prior to matching them to the purchase invoices.

If the check box is cleared (the default value), the receipt bank transactions are always matched to the purchase invoices.

#### The Receipt date matching section
Element Description
Days before bank transaction date

The maximum number of days allowed between the date of cash management transaction (receipt) and the date of the selected transaction on the bank statement.

The system considers the receipt a matching one if the difference falls within the specified date range.

Days after bank transaction date

The maximum number of days allowed between the date of the selected transaction on the bank statement and the date of a receipt.

The system considers the receipt a matching one if the difference falls within the specified date range.

#### The Weights for relevance calculation section
Ref. no. weight The relative weight of the evaluated difference between the reference numbers of the bank transaction and the cash management transaction.
Consider empty ref. no. as matching

A check box that (if selected) specifies that a bank transaction with an empty reference number is considered as matching to a cash transaction with an empty reference number.

If this check box is cleared (the default value), transactions with empty reference numbers are not considered as matching.

Doc. date weight The relative weight of the evaluated difference between the dates of the bank transaction and the cash management transaction.
Doc. payee weight The relative weight of the evaluated difference between the names of the customer (or supplier) on the bank transaction and the cash management transaction.
#### The Date range for relevance calculation section
Element Description
Average delay payment clearing The average number of days for a payment to be cleared with the bank.
Estimated deviation (days) The number of days before and after the average delay date during which 50% of payments are generally cleared.
Skip voided transactions during matching A check box that you select to make the system skip voided transactions during the reconciliation process.
Save and close (button) By clicking this button it saves the settings during your working session and closes the dialog box.
## The top part
Element Description
Cash account If you do not use a default account or want to match payments from a different account, select the account in the Cash account field. The system displays all imported payments for that account in the table.
Display only relevant matches Invoices matching the criteria set up in the Settings for matching dialog box are automatically displayed and matched on the relevance factor. If you do not want to display invoices with 0 match relevance, select the Display only relevant matches check box.
## The table
Button Description
Unmatch Click this to unmatch the selected match.
Unmatch all Click this to unmatch all matches that have been done this time.
Hide selected

Click this to hide the transactions that are selected in the Hide column from the table. This undoes all changes to the selected transactions and marks them as processed.

To be able to view and process a hidden transaction again, select the transaction in the Import incoming payments (AR305500) window and click Unhide transaction.

Undo split

Click this to undo the splitting of the selected split line.

If you have processed one or more of the split lines, you will not be able to undo the split on the not processed lines.

Column Description
Ready to process A check box that, if selected, indicates to the system that this transaction is ready to be processed. Namely, the transaction has been matched to the transaction in the system or details of a new document (to match this transaction) were specified.
Trans. date The original date of the transaction.
Trans. descr. The description of the transaction.
Disbursement The amount of the disbursement.
Receipt The amount of the incoming payment.
Orig. receipt The original amount of the receipt.
Orig. disbursement The original amount of the disbursement.
Trans. code The code of the transaction.
Hide A check box which you can select for each transaction you want to hide. After you have made your selection, click the Hide selected button.
Account from bank The bank account or IBAN from which the payment was paid for the customer transactions. In some formats, it contains the IBAN or bank account from which you have paid to the supplier.
Archive code The code of the document in the archive.
Customer/Supplier no The supplier or customer associated with the document, by its account ID.
Customer/Supplier name The name of the supplier or customer associated with the document.
Entry type ID The identifier of the entry type that was used to create a document to match the transaction.
Invoice no. The internal reference number for the invoice/credit note that has been paid. The system uses this column to make a lookup against the reference number on the purchase invoice if it is a disbursement and on the sales invoice if it is a receipt.
Invoice number list When a line refers to more than one invoice number, the invoice numbers are listed here.
Location The location of the supplier or customer.
Match type

The available match types are:

  • Matched to payment
  • Matched to invoice
  • Created
  • Hidden
Workspace The workspace from which the transaction originates. This field is displayed if the Supplier ledger or Customer ledger option is selected in the Workspace field.
Name from bank The name of the bank that processed the document.
Payee name The payee name, if any, specified for a transaction.
Payment method The payment method that was used for the transaction.
Payment number list When a line refers to more than one payment reference, the payment reference numbers are listed here.
Payment ref. no. The reference number of the payment.
Ext. ref. no. The reference number of the invoice.
Trans. ID The ID of the transaction.
Trans. entry date The entry date of the transaction.
## Right pane: Match to payment tab The tab provides a list of payments that the system has evaluated as matching the transaction selected in the table on the left pane. If you have manually selected a particular transaction in the table, you will see the payments that have the same amount and are matched by the date range specified on the **Settings for matching** dialog box, or on the **Incoming payments settings** tab of the [Cash management preferences (CA101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-management-preferences-ca101000/) window if you did not specify any preferences in the dialog box. For the matching document you choose among the listed ones, you select the check box in the **Matched** column. If you have invoked auto-matching and the system has found more than one matching document, you need to manually specify the match.
Column Description
Matched A check box that you select to match the document in this row to the transaction selected in the left pane.
Match relevance The coefficient of the match relevance, which is less than or equal to 1 and is calculated automatically for the selected transaction in the left pane and this document.
Workspace The workspace in which the document was entered.
Trans. type The document type to which the selected payment from the left part can be applied.
Orig. doc. number The ID of the document, as assigned by the corresponding numbering series.
Document ref. The number of the corresponding external document, if one exists.
Description A detailed description of the document.
Doc. date The date of the transaction or document.
Post period The post period of the payment.
Incoming payment The document amount or transaction amount if it is a receipt.
Disbursement The document amount or transaction amount if it is a disbursement.
## Right pane: The Match to invoice tab The tab provides a list of invoices that the system has evaluated as matching the transaction selected in the table on the left pane. If you have manually selected a particular transaction in the table, you will see the invoices that have the same amount and are matched by the date range specified on the **Settings for matching** dialog box, or on the **Incoming payments settings** tab in the [Cash management preferences (CA101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-management-preferences-ca101000/) window if you did not specify any preferences in the dialog box. If you choose a matching document among the listed ones, you select the check box in the **Matched** column. If you have invoked auto-matching and the system has found more than one matching document, you need to manually specify the match.
Element Description
Customer/Supplier no. The number of the customer or the supplier account.
Location The business account location associated with the document.
Payment method The payment method associated with the document.
Account no. The account to which the payment has been made.
Update bank account

You can update the IBAN/BBAN from the imported bank payment line.

In the Cash management preferences (CA101000) window under Bank statement settings, select the check box Update bank account on customer/supplier from Process bank transactions. When the payment line contains a bank account from the bank and you select a customer/supplier, a lookup against the default IBAN/BBAN will be done.

If the customer’s/supplier’s bank account is empty or different, the button Update bank account will appear. If you click the button the customer/supplier is updated with the account from the bank.

### The table
Column Description
Matched A check box that you select to match the document in this row to the transaction selected in the left pane.
Match relevance The coefficient of the match relevance, which is less than or equal to 1 and is calculated automatically for the selected transaction in the left pane and this document.
Released A check box that indicates (if selected) that the invoice has been released.
Workspace The workspace in which the document was entered.
Type The document type to which the selected payment from the left part can be applied.
Ref. no. The reference number of the document. Click the link to view the details of the document.
Ext. ref. no The supplier’s reference number.
Doc. date The date of the document.
Amount The document amount.
Customer/Supplier no. The number of the customer or the supplier account.
Customer/Supplier name The name of the customer or the supplier, associated with the document.
Description The invoice text provided for the document.
Branch

The branch on which the document is created.

This column is only available if the Multi-Branch support check box is selected and enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

## Right pane: The Create document tab By using this tab, for payments with no match, you can create new documents of the type determined by the workspace of origin and the type of transaction (receipt or disbursement). See also:[Create a new payment or document](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-payments-and-applications/create-a-new-payment-or-document/). ### The top part
Element Description
Create Select this check box to initiate creating a new document for the selected transaction. Clear the check box to delete any information you have specified for the new document.
Clear rule A button that clears the applied rule and the settings the system has configured by using the applied rule.
Create rule

Click this button to navigate to the Bank transaction rules (CA204500) window where you can create a new rule, view and modify the details of the rule and save it for future use.

Note

You can define rules to create documents originating in the Cash management workspace only.

Cash account details/ Customer details/ Supplier details

Click this button to open the cash account, supplier ledger or customer ledger window as a pop-up to see the details of the selected document.

The name of the button changes depending on the selected workspace. In the Cash management preferences (CA101000) window, the Bank statement settings tab, you can define which window will be opened for the different workspaces.

If no window has been selected, the following windows will be opened:

  • Cash management opens the Cash account details (CA303000) window with the active cash account selected.
  • Supplier ledger opens the Supplier details (AP402000) window with the selected supplier selected. If the supplier number is empty, the window opens without a supplier selected.
  • Customer ledger opens the Customer details (AR402000) window with the selected customer selected. If the customer number is empty, the window opens without a customer selected.
Workspace

The workspace where the document originated.

Select one of the following workspaces:

  • Supplier ledger
  • Customer ledger
  • Cash management
Entry type ID

The ID of an entry type that is used as a template for a new cash transaction to be created to match the selected transaction.

The field is displayed if the Cash management option is selected in the Workspace field.

VAT zone

Change or specify the VAT zone or VAT category that applies to the transaction if necessary.

The VAT calculation mode is set to Gross by the system, and the VAT category field is updated with the default value when the VAT zone is selected.

The field is displayed if the Cash management option is selected in the Workspace field.

VAT calculation mode This field has a read-only value that always shows Gross.
Trans. descr. The description of the selected transaction that can be modified. These changes affect the description in the new document only; the description of the imported bank transaction or incoming payment remains unchanged (the table in the left pane).
Customer/Supplier no.

The ID and name of the customer or the supplier, associated with the document.

This field is visible if the Supplier ledger or Customer ledger option is selected in the Workspace field.

Location

The location of the supplier or customer.

This field is visible if the Supplier ledger or Customer ledger option is selected in the Workspace field.

Payment method

The payment method used by the customer or supplier for the document.

This field is visible if the Supplier ledger or Customer ledger option is selected in the Workspace field.

Invoice no.

The internal reference number for the invoice/credit note that has been paid.

The system uses this column to make a lookup against the reference number on the purchase invoice if it is a disbursement and on the sales invoice if it is a receipt.

This field is displayed if the Supplier ledger or Customer ledger option is selected in the Workspace field.

Total amount The total amount of the document.
Amount used

The amount of the transaction for which the documents

This field is displayed if the Cash management option is selected in the Workspace field.

Remaining balance

The balance of the transaction for which you can add the documents.

This field is displayed if the Cash management option is selected in the Workspace field.

Application amount

The amount of the application for this payment.

This field is displayed if the Supplier ledger or Customer ledger option is selected in the Workspace field.

Unapplied balance

The unapplied balance of the document.

This field is displayed if the Supplier ledger or Customer ledger option is selected in the Workspace field.

Write-off amount

The total amount of write-offs specified for documents to be applied.

This field is displayed if the Customer ledger option is selected in the Workspace field.

Split

(button)

Click this button to split the selected line in the left table into different lines. The button only appears when there is a remaining amount to match. To read more about this functionality, go to Match a bank transaction or incoming payment line to different documents.

If the Automatic split of batch payment from customers into payments per customer check box is selected on the Incoming payments settings tab in the Cash management preferences (CA101000) window, payments will be automatically split on incoming payments import.

Allow unapplied balance Select this check box to process payments in situations where you need to overrule the setting Do not create payment when bank payment amount is not fully applied. This check box is available only if the setting Do not create payment when bank payment amount is not fully applied is selected in the Bank statement settings tab in the Cash management preferences (CA101000) window and the unapplied balance is different from 0.
### The table for documents that originated in the Cash management workspace In this table, you can add the documents to which you want to split the transaction amount. You cannot add documents that originated in the Customer ledger and Supplier ledger workspaces.
Column Description
Branch

The branch that created the document.

This column is only available if the Multi-Branch support check box is selected and enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Description The description of the document. By default, this is the description in the Trans. descr. field in the top part of this tab, and you can edit it.
Quantity The quantity of the item.
Price The price for the item.
Amount The total amount for all items.
Offset cash account

The cash account to be updated by the document.

By default, it is an offset cash account defined with the entry type selected in the Entry type ID field, but you can change this account.

The field is displayed if the selected entry type is used for payments reclassification.

Offset account

The account to be updated by the document.

By default, it is an offset account defined with the entry type selected in the Entry type ID field, but you can change this account.

Description A description of the account.
Offset subaccount The corresponding subaccount to be used for the document.
Item ID The ID of the non-stock item used as a transaction subject.
VAT category The default value is based upon what you selected in the VAT zone field.
Non-invoiceable

A check box that indicates (if selected) that this document line is non-invoiceable in the project.

This column appears only if the Projects module has been enabled and integrated with this workspace

Project

The project with which this document is associated, or the non-project code indicating that this document is not associated with any project.

The Non-project code is specified in the Project accounting preferences (PM101000) window.

The Project accounting check box is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

That is, the Cash management check box must be selected in the Visibility settings section on the General information tab in the Project accounting preferences (PM101000) window.

The column is hidden by default.

Project task

The particular task of the project with which this document is associated.

The column is available if the Project accounting check box is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

That is, the Cash management check box must be selected in the Visibility settings section on the General information tab in the Project accounting preferences (PM101000) window.

The column is hidden by default.

### The table for documents that originated in the Supplier ledger and Customer ledger workspaces In this table, you can add the documents to which you want to apply the new payment. You cannot add documents that originated in the Cash management workspace.
Button Description
Select documents

By clicking the button, the Select documents pop-up window appears. Here you can select multiple documents using the date and branch filters on the top and the Select all documents option.

You need to select a Customer/Supplier no. in the top part of this tab for documents to be displayed in this pop-up window.

If you click the button and there is no conversion rate between the cash account’s currency and none of the documents’ currencies of the selected Customer/Supplier no., a message appears. It notifies that you need to define the exchange rate for the currency of this cash account in the Currency rates (CM301000) window.

Load documents

By clicking the button, the customer or the supplier documents will load in the table, until the sum of their amounts reach the Total amount in the top part, starting with the oldest documents.

If you click the button and there is no conversion rate between the cash account’s currency and none of the documents’ currencies of the selected Customer/Supplier no., a message appears. It notifies that you need to define the exchange rate for the currency of this cash account in the Currency rates (CM301000) window.

#### The Select documents pop-up window This pop-up window appears when you have clicked the **Select documents** button. Here you select Supplier ledger or Customer ledger documents that you want to apply to the respective incoming payment. ##### The top part
Element Description
Up to due date The last due date up to which you want to filter the documents.
Branch

The branch on which you want to select the documents.

By default the cash account’s branch is selected.

Currency The cash account’s currency.
Total amount The total amount of the transaction selected in the main window.
Application amount

The total value of the selected documents.

This amount is always less than or equal to the Total amount.

Unapplied balance The difference between Total amount and Application amount.
Trans. descr. The transaction description of the transaction selected in the main window.
##### The table
Button Description
Select all documents Click this to select all documents until the sum of their amounts reach the Total amount in the top part.
Column Description
Select document Check box for selecting the documents.
Branch

The branch on which you want to select the documents.

By default the cash account’s branch is selected.

Document type The type of the document to which the payment selected in the left table can be applied to.
Ref. no. The reference number of the Supplier ledger or Customer ledger document to which the payment selected in the left table can be applied to.
Date The date when the Supplier ledger or Customer ledger document was created.
Post period The financial period in which the document is posted.
Due date The date when the Supplier ledger or Customer ledger document is due to be paid.
Amount in cash account currency The document amount converted in the cash account’s currency.
Balance in cash account currency The document balance converted in the cash account’s currency.
Customer/supplier The customer or supplier number from the customer/supplier document.
Description The description from the supplier or customer documents.
Amount The document amount paid in the original currency.
Balance The document balance amount in the original currency.
Currency The currency of the document.
Customer order/supplier ref. The document’s original customer order/supplier reference as assigned by the customer/supplier (for informational purposes).
External reference/buyer’s order no. The external reference number/buyer’s order number of the transaction.
Customer name/supplier name The customer name/supplier name associated with the document.
Location The customer or supplier location.
#### The table
Column Description
Document type The type of the document to which the payment selected in the left table can be applied.
Ref. no. The reference number of the Supplier ledger or Customer ledger document to which the payment selected in the left table can be applied.
Customer order The original reference number or ID assigned by the customer to the customer document (for informational purposes).
Customer name The customer name associated with the document.
Customer

The parent or child customer associated with the document, by its customer number.

The Parent-child customer relationship can be enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window

For more information about parent-child relationship, see: Manage parent-child relationships - overview

Invoice text The text from the customer documents.
External ref. The external reference number of the transaction.
Amount paid The amount paid for this document.
Balance The amount of the document after the specified amount was paid.
Date The date when the Supplier ledger or Customer ledger document was created.
Currency The currency of the document.
Balance write-off The amount to be written off.
Branch

The branch on which the document is created.

This column is only available if the Multi-Branch support check box is selected and enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Cash discount balance The unused amount of the available discount, if any.
Cash discount taken The amount of cash discount taken due to prompt payment.
Cross rate

A cross rate that you can optionally modify between the currency of the payment and currency of the original document.

The column is hidden by default and available if the Multi-currency accounting check box is selected and enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Post period The financial period in which the document is posted.
With. tax The amount of tax withheld (if withholding taxes are applicable).
With. tax balance The difference between the amount of the tax to be withheld and the actual withheld amount (if any withholding taxes are applicable).
Write-off reason code A reason code that defines an account and subaccount to be used for writing off balances. You must select a reason code if the balance write-off amount is non-zero.
Description The description from the supplier documents.
Supplier ref. The document’s original reference number as assigned by the supplier (for informational purposes).

Related pages

Tasks

Recurring transactions (AR203500) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/recurring-transactions-ar203500 page You use this window to create and maintain schedules for the customer ledger documents that repeat regularly. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Recurring transactions (AR203500) You use this window to create and maintain schedules for the customer ledger documents that repeat regularly. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You use this window to create and maintain schedules for the customer ledger documents that repeat regularly. You create a schedule and add one document or multiple documents of the following types to this schedule: **Invoice**, **Debit note**, and **Credit note**. You can also add documents to an existing schedule or schedules. Only the documents with the **Balanced**, **Pending print**, or **Pending email** statuses can be scheduled. Once you assign a document to a schedule, its status changes to **Scheduled**. A schedule defines how often and how many times generation of the assigned documents should repeat. The system uses the original documents as templates to generate similar documents with transaction dates and some other details changed. In this window, you can also view the details of the active and completed schedules. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Run now Initiates the process of running a schedule and generating documents according to the schedule.
## The top part Here, you can create a new schedule and edit or delete any of the existing schedules.
Element Description
Schedule ID

The ID of the schedule.

A new schedule gets its unique identifier in accordance with the number series assigned to schedules in the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window.

Active A check box that indicates (if selected) that the schedule is active. When the check box is cleared, the schedule cannot be used.
Start date The start date for the schedule.
Expiration date A date that, if set, indicates when the schedule expires. This field is unavailable if the Never expire check box is selected.
Never expires A check box that indicates (if selected) that no expiration date is set.
Execution limit (times) The maximum number of times the schedule can be executed. This field is unavailable when the No limit option is selected.
No limit A check box that indicates (if selected) that the schedule should be continued into future financial periods indefinitely; when you select this check box, the Execution limit field becomes unavailable.
Description A description for the schedule.
Last executed A read-only field that displays the date when the documents were last generated. If no documents have been generated according to the schedule, the box is unavailable.
Next execution A read-only field that displays the date when the schedule should be executed next, based on the schedule parameters.
Executed (times)

A read-only field whose value shows how many times the schedule was executed or how many times the documents were generated.

A 0 here indicates that the schedule has not been executed yet and no documents have been generated.

Schedule type

The frequency at which documents should be generated. Click one of the following option buttons, which are described in detail in the next sections:

Daily
The documents should be generated daily or every x days.
Weekly
The documents should be generated once a week or once every x weeks.
Monthly
The documents should be generated once per month or once every x months.
By financial period
The documents will be generated only once per financial period or once every x financial periods.

Select the schedule type, and enter the settings specific to the type in the corresponding section (described below).

### The Daily section
Element Description
Every An integer that specifies the time period (in days) when the document is generated. For example: 1 means every day and 2 means every other day, starting on the Start date
### The Weekly section
Element Description
Every An integer that specifies the time period (in weeks) when the document is generated. You can also select the day of the week when the document is generated.
### The Monthly section
Element Description
Every

An integer that specifies the time period (in months) for document generation.

For example: A 3 here would generate documents every three months.

For this schedule type, you should enter an integer and select one of the option buttons below this field.

On day

An option button that you select if you want to select a particular day of the month.

If you select this button, you should select the day of the month for the invoice in the adjacent field.

On the

An option button that you can select if you want to select a particular day of the week within the month.

If you select this button, you should also select the ordinal number in the left field that specifies the week in the month, and the day of the week in the right field. For example: 2nd Thursday.

### The By financial period section
Element Description
Every

An integer that specifies the interval for document generation, measured in financial periods.

In addition to selecting this integer, you should select one of the following option buttons, which determine when documents should be generated.

Start of the financial period An option button that sets the start date of the financial period as the day when documents should be generated.
End of period An option button that sets the end date of the financial period as the day when documents should be generated.
Fixed day of the period

An option button that you use if documents should be generated on a particular day of the financial period.

If you select this button, select the particular day in the field.

## The Document list tab On the **Document list** tab, you can assign one document or multiple documents to the schedule. You can select documents from the list of those with a status of **Balanced**. Other columns in the row display the selected document's details.
Column Description
Type The type of the customer ledger document. Documents of the following types may be scheduled: Invoice, Debit note, and Credit note.
Ref. no The ID number of the original document, which is used as a template to generate documents. Other columns in the row are read-only and display the details of the original document.
Customer The ID of the customer whose document is being scheduled.
Customer name The customer’s name.
Date The date of the transactions.
Post period The financial period to which the document transactions should be posted.
Amount The amount of the original document.
Currency The currency used for the document.
Invoice text The user-defined description of the document.
## The Generated documents tab This tab contains a table showing the documents that have been generated as a result of this schedule being run.
Column Description
Type The document type, which can be one of the following: Invoice, Debit note, and Credit note.
Ref. no The reference number of the generated document.
Customer The customer whose document was scheduled.
Customer name The customer’s name, as it appears on the documents.
Status The status of the generated document.
Date The date of the transactions.
Post period The financial period to which the generated transactions should be posted.
Amount The amount of the generated document.
Currency The currency used for the document.
Invoice text The description of the document.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Release customer documents (AR501000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/release-customer-documents-ar501000 page This window can be used to release all ready-to-be-released ( Balanced ) documents or only selected ones. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Release customer documents (AR501000) This window can be used to release all ready-to-be-released ( Balanced ) documents or only selected ones. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This window can be used to release all ready-to-be-released (**Balanced**) documents or only selected ones. Whether documents will be posted automatically when they are released is defined by the **Automatically post on release** check box in the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Release Releases the customer ledger documents you have selected in the table, changes their status to Open, and creates unposted batches or posts batches directly to the General ledger, depending on whether the Automatically post on release check box is selected in the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window.
Release all Releases all the customer ledger documents on the list at once and changes their status to Open. Whether transactions are directly posted on release is defined by the Automatically post on release check box in the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window.
## The table The table contains all ready-to-be-released customer ledger documents and payments (those with a status of **Balanced**). To include a document, select the check box that precedes it. To select all the documents, select the check box in the column header.
Column Description
Type

The type of customer ledger document. The following types can be released:

Invoice
An invoice sent to the customer for goods sold or services provided
Debit note
A document that adjusts the debit amount in one previous invoice or multiple previous invoices
Credit note
A document that adjusts the credit amount in one previous invoice or multiple previous invoices
Payment
A customer payment
Voided payment
A payment that has been cancelled
Prepayment
A customer payment
Customer refund
A document created for a customer refund
Voided refund
A refund has been voided
Overdue charge
A document for overdue charges
Balance write-off
A document that writes off a customer’s small balance that will not be paid.
Credit write-off
A document created for a customer refund
Cash sale
A document created to record a sale paid immediately by cash
Cash return
A document that is used to record a return of sold goods, which is refunded immediately by cash refund. The system also creates a document of this type when you reverse a cash-sale. Cash returns do not affect the customer’s balance.
Ref. no. The identifier of the document. Clicking the link navigates to the Sales invoices (AR301000), Customer payments (AR302000), or Cash sales (AR304000) window, depending on the type of the selected document, and displays the details of the selected customer ledger document.
Customer The customer (by ID) referred to on this document.
Customer name The customer’s complete name as it should appear on the documents.
Customer order The document reference number used by the customer.
Status The status of the document. Only Balanced documents can be released.
Date The date when the document was created.
Post period The period to which the transactions of the document should be posted.
Amount The amount of the document.
Currency The currency used for the document.
Invoice text The user-provided description for the document.
Branch The ID of the branch.
Branch name The name of the branch.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Renew contracts (CT502000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/renew-contracts-ct502000 page You can use this window to view the automatically renewable contracts that will expire soon, as well as to renew contracts. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Renew contracts (CT502000) You can use this window to view the automatically renewable contracts that will expire soon, as well as to renew contracts. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The window toolbar
Element Description
Process Initiates the renewal of the contracts you have selected in the Contract column.
Process all Initiates the renewal of all the listed contracts at once.
## The top part Use the elements in this area to specify the criteria for selecting contracts to be listed in the table (and possibly included in the renewal process). You can select contracts by a customer class, a contract template, and the date range in which they will expire.
Element Description
Renewal date The start date of the date range in which the contracts will expire.
Element Description
Customer class The customer class for which contracts will be listed. Leave the field blank to view information on all classes.
Contract template The contract template used for contracts with similar settings. Leave the field blank to view information on all templates.
## The table This table contains the list of contracts matching the criteria you chose in the selection area. You can select any listed contract and view its details before renewing it. To select some of the contracts for renewal, select the corresponding check boxes and click **Process**. To renew all the listed contracts, click **Process all**.
Column Description
Contract The contract ID.
Description A description of the contract.
Contract template The template used for the contract.
Contract type The type of contract. Use one of the following options: Renewable or Expiring.
Customer no. The customer associated with the contract.
Customer name The name of the customer.
Status The status of the contract.
Setup date The setup date of the contract.
Expiration date The date when the contract expires.
Last invoicing date The most recent invoicing date for the contract.
Next invoicing date The next invoicing date for the contract.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Report texts (AR20200S) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/report-texts-ar20200s page You can use this window to write texts for dunning letters and reminders. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Report texts (AR20200S) You can use this window to write texts for dunning letters and reminders. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The top part
Element Description
Report text code

The code of the report text, max. 30 characters. The field is alphanumeric.

Example: RE1.

Name

The name of the report text code.

Example: Reminder 1.

Text fields

In the topmost text field, enter the desired text of your reminder or dunning letter.

In the second text field, you can for en example add a message to the customer.

You can use maximum 255 characters in these fields.

Related pages

Tasks

Run contract invoicing (CT501000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/run-contract-invoicing-ct501000 page You can use this window to perform invoicing for contracts. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Run contract invoicing (CT501000) You can use this window to perform invoicing for contracts. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can use this window to perform invoicing for contracts. Invoices are generated for each contract and for each customer involved. For details on the settings and methods used in contract invoicing, see: Contract invoicing. ## The window toolbar
Element Description
Process Initiates invoicing processing for the contracts that you have included by selecting the unlabelled check boxes in the table.
Process all Initiates invoicing processing for all the contracts listed in the table.
## The top part You use this area to configure the criteria for selecting contracts that you may want to invoice.
Element Description
Invoicing date The date that determines the contracts to be shown; contracts with a next invoicing date that is before or on the date you have selected here are to be displayed. The selected date serves as the invoice date for contracts with the invoicing period set to On demand.
Contract template The contract template that the contracts to be listed were based on. Leave the field blank to view contracts based on all templates.
Customer class The customer class of the contracts to be listed. Leave the field blank to view the contracts of customers of all classes.
Customer The customer whose contracts you want to invoice. Leave the field blank to see the contracts of all customers of the class (or all customers of all classes).
## The table This table contains the list of contracts matching the criteria specified in the top part. Only contracts with at least one not yet invoiced (but completed) invoicing period are displayed. If multiple invoicing periods were not invoiced for the contract, you should run the invoicing process once for each not yet invoiced period. You can select contracts by using the check boxes in the first column.
Column Description
Contract ID The contract identifier.
Description A description of the contract.
Customer The customer associated with the contract.
Customer name The name of the customer.
Last invoicing date The date when the contract was last invoiced.
Next invoicing date The date when the contract is to be invoiced next time.
Expiration date The date when the contract expires.
Contract template The contract template that the contract is based on.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Sales invoices (AR301000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000 section You can use this window to create, view, and modify customer ledger invoices, notes, and other documents. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Sales invoices (AR301000) You can use this window to create, view, and modify customer ledger invoices, notes, and other documents. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can use this window to create, view, and modify customer ledger invoices, notes, and other documents. For more information, see: [Process invoices - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/process-invoices-overview/). ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## What to do from this window + [Create an invoice](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/create-an-invoice/) + [Change customer or customer location on sales invoice](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/change-customer-or-customer-location-on-sales-invoice/) + [Create and release an invoice](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/create-and-release-an-invoice/) + [Correct a released sales invoice](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/correct-a-released-sales-invoice/) + [Reverse an invoice with ROT or RUT](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/reverse-an-invoice-with-rot-or-rut/) + [Pay a specific outstanding document](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-payments-and-applications/pay-a-specific-outstanding-document/) + [Poll the invoice status](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/poll-the-invoice-status/) + [Preview an invoice](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/preview-an-invoice/) + [Email an invoice from preview in a report](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/email-an-invoice-from-preview-in-a-report/) + [Email an invoice or a credit note](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/email-an-invoice-or-a-credit-note/) + [Print an invoice](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/print-an-invoice/) + [Send an invoice](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/send-an-invoice/) + [Email an invoice to an unregistered contact](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/email-an-invoice-to-an-unregistered-contact/) + [Override an email address](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/override-an-email-address/) + [Create a credit note](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/create-a-credit-note/) + [Correct a sales invoice](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/correct-a-sales-invoice/) + [Check sent email status](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/check-sent-email-status/) + [Check sent email status for AutoInvoice](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/check-sent-email-status-for-autoinvoice/) ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Release Releases the document.
Actions

Provides the following menu commands, which you can click to invoke actions:

  • Reverse and apply to note: For the selected invoice, creates a credit note for the same customer and applies it to the invoice. For invoices with items connected to excise duties, including invoices with an Excise duty total of 0, you can not use this action. For instructions on how to reverse these invoices, see Reverse an invoice with excise duty.

  • Email invoice/note: Sends the selected document as an email to the customer for the INVOICE mailing. For details on setting up mailings, see: About mailings for customers.

  • Send email: Opens the Send (CR306015) window, which you can use to create an email.

  • Enter payment/apply note: Opens the Customer payments (AR302000) window with the elements filled in with the customer information and with the invoice amount specified as the document amount. This action is only available if the document has a status of Open.

  • Reclassify general ledger batch: Opens the Reclassify transactions (GL506000) window, where you can initiate the reclassification process. For details, see: About reclassifying general ledger transactions.

  • Reverse: For the selected invoice, creates a credit note for the same customer.

  • Write-off: Navigates to the Write-off balances and credits (AR505000) window.

  • Add to schedule: Navigates to the Recurring transactions (AR203500) window, which you use to assign the document to a schedule.

  • Mark as: do not email: Selects the Do not email check box for the document.

  • Recalculate prices: Opens the Recalculate prices dialog box, which you use to specify options for updating the prices and discounts for the document.

  • Send to AutoInvoice: Will send the invoice to AutoInvoice.

    Note

    As of 1 July 2022, new branches need to verify their company in the AutoInvoice settings (CS10250S) window to be able to use AutoInvoice. See also: About Know your customer (KYC).

  • Poll invoice status: Updates the AutoInvoice status and Business level status under the AutoInvoice section of the Invoice address tab.

    • Sent to AutoInvoice: Awaiting processing.
    • Pending: Awaiting delivery.
    • Sent: The invoice is sent.
    • Error: To check why an error occurred, you have to go to AutoInvoice.

+

Generate e-Invoice XML draft:

Generates a draft version of the PEPPOL BIS 3.0 XML, so that you have the possibility to check the content and validate that all settings are correct, before you start using the PEPPOL BIS 3.0 format for electronic invoicing. It is also possible to use this action after you have sent the invoice to AutoInvoice.

The action can be used on all statuses except On hold , and becomes available if PEPPOL BIS 3.0 is activated and you have enabled the setting Send to AutoInvoice on the Invoice address tab.

Note

** The generated file is a draft and may not be used as a legal document.

Correct invoice
When using the Correct invoice feature, the system will automatically create a copy of the original invoice that you can further edit. When releasing this new invoice, the system will automatically create a sales credit note for the original invoice and match it against the chosen invoice to be corrected. The original invoice will remain in status Open until the new corrected document will be finally released, but will no further be included in the payment process. Correcting of invoices with lines from the Shipments (SO302000) or Sales orders (SO301000) windows is currently not supported.
Inquiries

Provides the following menu commands, which you can click for quick access to inquiry forms:

Customer details
Navigates to the Customer details (AR402000) window.
Sales invoice
Navigates to the Customer invoices (SO303000) window.
Customer documents
Navigates to the Customer documents (AR621500) window.
View proforma:
Navigates to the Pro forma invoices (PM307000) window. This menu command is available only if the invoice has originated from a proforma invoice.
Reports

Provides the following menu commands, which you click for fast access to the following reports:

Unreleased transactions (detailed)
Navigates to the Unreleased transactions (detailed) (AR610500) report.
Unreleased transactions
Navigates to the Unreleased transactions (AR611000) report.
Customer documents (detailed)
Navigates to the Customer documents (detailed) (AR622000) report.
Preview invoice/note
Navigates to a preview of the Invoice/note (AR641000) report.
Print invoice/note
Navigates to the Invoice/note (AR641000) report.
Print overdue charge
Navigates to the Overdue charge (AR643000) report.
### The Recalculate prices dialog box You use this dialog box to specify the options for updating prices and discounts for the invoice.
Column Description
Recalculate

The way prices and discounts are calculated. You can select one of the following options:

All lines
To recalculate prices and discounts for all lines of the document.
Current line:
To recalculate prices and discounts for the selected line of the document.
Set current unit prices A check box that indicates (if selected) that the system must update the item prices with the current prices.
Override manual prices

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the system must update the prices that have been modified manually (in the Unit price or Manual amount columns) with the current prices.

The check box is available for selection if the Set current unit prices check box is selected.

After the manual prices are overridden in the document, the system clears the Manual price check boxes in the appropriate document lines.

Recalculate discounts

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the system must recalculate the discounts for the current line or for the selected lines.

This check box is available only if the Customer and supplier discounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Override manual line discounts

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the system should cancel the manual discounts for the current line or all lines (depending on the option selected in the Recalculate field) and search for applicable automatic discounts.

This check box is only available if the Customer and supplier discounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

OK (button) Closes the dialog box and applies the selected options.
## The top part Here you can create a new document or select an existing customer ledger document for modification. The following table summarises the elements of this area.
Element Description
Type

The document type. The following types are available:

Invoice
A document that contains a list of goods sold or services provided.
Debit note
A document that adjusts the amount in previous undercharging invoices.
Credit note
A document that credits a customer for damaged goods or a previous overcharging invoice.
Overdue charge
A document that lists overdue charges to be paid on an outstanding document that is past due. The option is available if the Overdue charges functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Credit write-off
A document that writes off a small credit of the customer.
Invoice no. The invoice number of the customer ledger document in the system; for a new document, the <NEW> string is displayed, indicating that a new number will be generated.
Status

The status of the document, which can be one of the following:

On hold
You can edit the document but cannot release it.
Pending print
You can edit the document but should print the document before releasing it. After the document is printed, the document’s status changes to Balanced. The document is created with this status if the Require invoice/note printing before release check box is selected in the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window and if the Print invoices check box is selected for the customer for which the invoice is created in the Customers (AR303000) window.
Pending email
You can edit the document, but should send the document by email before releasing it. After the document is emailed, the document’s status changes to Balanced. The document is created with this status if the Require invoice/note emailing before release check box is selected in the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window and if the Send invoices by email check box is selected for the customer for which the invoice is created in the Customers (AR303000) window.
Balanced
The Detail total value of the document plus the VAT amount value equals the Balance value. The document may be released, or it may be edited and saved with the On hold or Balanced status.
Scheduled
The document is attached to a schedule. Scheduled documents are used as templates for generating similar documents, with the dates calculated according to the schedule settings. A document can be scheduled if its status is Balanced, or Pending print, or Pending email.
Voided
The document is no longer used for generating recurring transactions. The system changes the document status from Scheduled to Voided when a user has removed the document from the table on the Document list tab of the Recurring transactions (AR203500) window.
Open
The document has been released and cannot be edited. As payments are applied to the document, its balance decreases.
Closed
The balance of the document, which had been open, is equal to zero.
Hold

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the document is a draft.

A document with the On hold status may be edited and cannot be released.

Date

The date when the customer ledger document was created.

By default, for a new document, it is the current business date, but you can change the date.

Post period

The period to which the document should be posted.

By default, it is the current period, but you can change the period. The ability to post to closed periods is controlled by the Allow posting to closed periods check box in the General ledger preferences (GL102000) window.

Customer order The original reference number or ID assigned by the customer to the customer document (for informational purposes).
External ref. The external reference used in AutoInvoice.
Project

The project with which this document is associated, or the code indicating that this document is not associated with any project; the non-project code is specified in the Project accounting preferences (PM101000) window.

This field appears if the Customer ledger workspace has been integrated with the Projects module.

Invoice text Any user-provided description of the customer ledger document.
Customer The customer associated with the document. When the Parent-child customer relationship functionality is enabled in Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) and a child customer is selected in the child field first, the corresponding parent account is automatically populated in this field.
Child This field is only displayed when the functionality Paren-child customer relationship is enabled in Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)
Consolidate Invoices

When this check box is selected, invoices for the current child customer will be sent to the parent account. This overrides the information and settings in the Invoice address and Invoice contact sections.

The following invoice information is retrieved from the parent when this check box is selected:

  • Invoice contact,
  • Invoice address,
  • Payment terms,
  • Payment method.

This element is disabled if the displayed account is a parent account.

Location

The location of the customer related to the document.

By default, it is the default location of the selected customer.

Contact The contact associated with the customer.
Currency

The currency of the document.

By default, it is the customer’s default currency, but it can be changed if the Enable currency override check box is selected in the Customers (AR303000) window.

Exchange rate

The amount corresponding to the Currency field, and the name of the field is only visible if you hover over the field.

By clicking the field, the Rate selection dialog box opens. See description below.

View base (button)

When you click View base the following happens:

  • All amounts will be converted to your base currency.
  • In the Currency column, the text will be displayed as your base currency.

Click View currency again to return to the original view.

Terms The payment terms used in relations with the customer.
Due date The date when payment for the document is due, in accordance with the payment terms.
Cash discount date The end date of the cash discount period, which the system calculates by using the payment terms.
Detail total The document total, which the system calculates for all line items in the Document details tab.
Discount total

The discount total calculated for the document.

This total includes discounts of the Group and Document levels. The discounts of the Group and Document levels are listed on the Discount details tab; the Line discounts are shown on the Document details tab.

This field is only available if the Customer and supplier discounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

VAT taxable total

The document total that is subjected to VAT.

The VAT taxable amount is displayed in this field only if the Include in VAT taxable total check box is selected for the applicable VAT in the VAT (TX205000) window.

If the check box is cleared, this field is empty.

This field is only available if the VAT reporting functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Note

If the document contains multiple transactions with different taxes applied and each of the applied taxes has this check box selected, the taxable amount calculated for each line of the document will be added to the VAT taxable total field of the document.

VAT exempt total

The document total that is exempt from VAT.

This total is calculated as the taxable amount for the VAT with the Include in VAT exempt total check box selected in the VAT (TX205000) window. This field is only available if the VAT reporting functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

VAT total The VAT amount of the document, as defined on the VAT details tab.
Balance For an open customer ledger document, the balance after any cash discount was taken. For a document used in the application process, this is the balance after the payments were applied.
Rounding diff.

The difference between the original amount and the rounded amount.

The field only appears if the Invoice rounding functionality is activated.

For details, see: Set up document amount rounding.

Amount

The amount paid by the document.

The field appears for new documents if the Validate document totals on entry check box is selected in the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window. If the check box is cleared, then the field appears when the document status is Open.

Cash discount

The cash discount amount that has been or will be taken on the document, which the system calculates based on the specified payment terms.

If a document has the On hold or Balanced status, you can change the amount of the calculated cash discount.

If you change the cash discount amount, the system recalculates the taxable and tax amounts of the document if the applied taxes have Calculate on set to Calc. on item amount or Calc. on document amount and Cash discount set to Reduces taxable amount in the VAT (TX205000) window.

Changes you make to the cash discount amount do not affect the taxable and VAT amounts of the document if the applied taxes have Calculate on set to Extract from item amount and Cash discount set to Reduces taxable amount in the VAT (TX205000) window.

ROT or RUT deductible document Select this check box if the amount on this document is applicable for ROT or RUT deduction. The ROT and RUT details tab will appear and the columns RUT or ROT deductible, Item type, Type of work and Deductible amount will be displayed in the Document details tab table.
### The Rate selection dialog box
Element Description
Currency rate type ID

The currency rate type specified for the selected currency pair.

By default, it is the customer’s default currency rate type, but it can be changed if the Enable rate override check box is selected in the Customers (AR303000) window.

Effective date The date on which the currency rate in this row becomes effective.
Currency unit equivalents

View the currency conversion.

Note

It’s possible to change the currency rate for an individual invoice here without changing the currency rate type, but the currency rate will restore back to original if this invoice is corrected. Therefore, it’s recommended to create a new currency rate instead, which can then be applied to the individual invoice ( See also: Add a currency rate ).

OK (button) Closes the dialog box.
## The Document details tab On this tab, you can specify the line details for a new customer ledger document (invoice or note) or view the details of the document selected in the upper area of the window.
Button Description
View schedule Navigates to the Deferral schedule (DR201500) window and displays the details of the schedule for the selected line of the document (if any different deferral codes were assigned to different lines of the document in the Deferral code column).
Element Description
Branch The branch that sells the item or provides the service.
Item ID The item ID of the line item, if applicable.
Transaction descr. Any comments relevant to the transaction. The alphanumeric string may contain up to 30 characters.
Quantity The quantity of this item sold to the customer, expressed in the unit of measure specified in the UoM column.
UoM The unit of measure (UoM) for the item.
Unit price

The unit price set for the item or service.

If you want to update the unit price automatically to the current value (that is, the applicable sales or default price), you can use the Recalculate prices action.

If you have modified the unit price and saved the document, the value will not be updated by the system if you change the document date.

Manual amount

The manual amount, which is either the unit price multiplied by the quantity or a manually entered amount that may not be equal to the product of the unit price and the quantity.

If you want to update the manual amount automatically to the current value (that is, the applicable sales or default price multiplied by the item quantity), you can use the Recalculate prices action.

If you have modified the manual amount once and saved the document, the value will not be updated by the system if you change the document date.

Discount percent

The percent of the line-level discount that has been applied manually or automatically.

The system selects the Manual discount check box and calculates the discount amount after you have entered the percent manually and saved your changes or added a new line.

Discount amount

The amount of the line-level discount that has been applied manually or automatically to this line.

The system selects the Manual discount check box and calculates the line amount after you have entered the discount amount manually and save your changes or added a new line.

Amount

The amount after the discount has been applied.

The value of this read-only field is calculated automatically by deducting the discount amount from the manual amount.

Manual discount

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the discount has been applied manually.

If you clear the check box, the system clears entered discount percent, or discount amount, or selected discount code.

This column is only available if the Customer and supplier discounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Discount code

The code of the line discount that has been applied to this line automatically or manually.

This column is only available if the Customer and supplier discounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Account The sales account used for the transaction. See also:About suggested sales accounts.
Description The description of the account.
Subaccount The corresponding subaccount used to record this sale transaction.
Project task

The particular task of the project with which this document line is associated.

This column appears if the integration of the Projects module with Customer ledger has been enabled. That is, the Customer ledger check box must be selected in the Visibility settings section in the Project accounting preferences (PM101000) window.

Salesperson ID The ID of the applicable salesperson.
Original deferral schedule

A read-only column filled in by the system in the document created as a result of reversing an invoice, credit note, or debit note.

The column shows the ID of the deferral schedule associated with the reversed document.

Note

If a credit note document is created manually, then you can select a deferral schedule to be reversed.

In the reversed documents, this column remains empty.

Deferral code

The deferral code assigned to the stock item or non-stock item specified in this document line.

Upon release of the document, the system generates a deferral schedule (or schedules) based on the settings defined in this deferral code.

You can change the deferral code in this field manually if needed.

Note

If you change an MDA deferral code (the deferral code that indicates that an item is a package) to any non-MDA deferral code, the system will consider the item to not be a package and will ignore its components while generating a deferral schedule. That is, the system will generate the deferral schedule for the item based on the settings of the specified non-MDA deferral code.

Note

Only active deferral codes are shown in the lookup. If you manually enter an inactive code, you will get an error message that the code is inactive.

Term start date

The date when the process of deferred revenue recognition should start for the selected item; this date can be specified manually if the deferral code assigned to the item is based on the Flexible by periods, prorate by days or Flexible by days in period recognition method.

This column only appears if the Deferred revenue management functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Term end date

The date when the process of the deferred revenue recognition should finish for the selected item; this date can be specified manually if the deferral code assigned to the item is based on the Flexible by periods, prorate by days or Flexible by days in period recognition method.

This column only appears if the Deferred revenue management functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

VAT category

The VAT category (if applied) for the transaction. See also:About suggested VAT categories.

By default, it is the VAT category defined for the non-stock or stock item specified in the line; otherwise, the VAT category is the default VAT category of the VAT zone associated with the selected location of the customer.

Commissionable

A check box that indicates (if selected) that commission is paid on the line item amount.

The column is available if the Commissions functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

RUT or ROT deductible A check box that indicates (if selected) that the line item is ROT or RUT deductible, according to its settings in the Non-stock items (IN202000) window. This only applies to non-stock items.
Item type

The Item type applies to a ROT or RUT deductible document. You can edit this column. The type of the item, as selected in the Stock items (IN202500) or Non-stock items (IN202000) window, the ROT and RUT settings (Sweden) section, the Type field. For a stock item, this can be one of the following:

  • Material cost
  • Other cost.

For a non-stock item, this can be one of the following:

  • Service
  • Material cost
  • Other cost.

When there is no Type selected in the Stock items (IN202500) or Non-stock items (IN202000) window, Other cost is the default type.

Type of work The type of work the line item is related to, according to the item’s settings in the Non-stock items (IN202000) or Stock items (IN202500) window. You can edit this column.
Deductible amount Read-only column. The amount your client can deduct for the line item, if the item is ROT or RUT deductible.
Start date Sets the start date for the invoice period that the item is invoiced for. You can manually set this value for invoices created in the Customer ledger workspace. You can set it per invoice line and/or it can be retrieved from the corresponding field in the Invoice period settings section on the Financial details tab. The Start date field is set in the e-invoice if the invoice is sent in the PEPPOL format.
End date Sets the end date for the invoice period that the item is invoiced for. You can manually set this value for invoices created in the Customer ledger workspace. You can set it per invoice line and/or it can be retrieved from the corresponding field in the Invoice period settings section on the Financial details tab. The End date field is set in the e-invoice if the invoice is sent in the PEPPOL format.
Order no. The order number retrieved from the accordant order, if applicable.
Shipment no. The shipment number retrieved from the accordant confirmed shipment, if applicable.
Order type The order type retrieved from the accordant order, if applicable.
Base qty The quantity of the item sold to the customer, expressed in the base unit of measure. This quantity is used for calculating discounts if The base UoM is selected in the Apply quantity discounts to field on the Price/discount settings tab of the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window.
Disc. unit price The unit price after the discount percent has been applied.
Discount series

The ID of the discount series that has been applied to this line.

The column is hidden by default and only available if the Customer and supplier discounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Expense date The date of the corresponding expense claim.
External link A read-only column displaying the external link for the line, collected from the corresponding sales order.
Line no. The number of the item line on the invoice.
Manual price

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the unit price in this line has been corrected or specified manually.

The system automatically selects this check box for the line when you change the price in the Unit price column. If the check box is selected, when you change the unit of measure or quantity in the line, the unit price is not automatically refreshed with the price from the price list.

If you clear this check box, the system updates the unit price in the document line with the current price (if one is specified).

Order line no. The number of the item line on the corresponding order.
## The Financial details tab This tab contains information about the customer ledger account and subaccount used in the document and the customer's VAT zone. For a released customer ledger document, it also contains the reference to the batch that implements transactions. ### The Link to general ledger section
Element Description
Batch no. The ID of the batch that updates the appropriate account balances with the amounts of the document transactions when the batch is posted.
Branch The branch with which this invoice or note is associated.
Customer ledger account The liability account specified as the customer ledger account for the selected location of the customer.
Customer ledger sub. The corresponding subaccount used for the customer.
Original document If a credit note is currently selected in the top part of this window, this is the identifier of the document that was reversed with the credit note. If you click the link in this box, the current window opens with the details of the reversed document.
### The Payment information section
Element Description
Payment method The payment method that the customer will use to pay the document.
Description The identifier or description of the customer’s payment method.
Cash account The cash account associated with the payment method.
Payment ref. no The reference number of the payment.
Apply overdue charges

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the system will calculate overdue charges for this document. Clear the check box to exclude the document from the process of overdue charges being applied.

The check box is displayed after the document is released if the Apply overdue charges check box is selected for the selected customer in the Customers (AR303000) window.

Payment message Here you can enter a short message of alphanumeric characters.
### The VAT information section
Element Description
Customer VAT zone

The Customer VAT zone is by default set to the VAT zone associated with the selected location of the customer.

If no VAT zone is specified for the customer location, the customer VAT zone is the VAT zone assigned to the selling branch.

You can override the default value.

### The Assigned to section
Element Description
Work group ID The work group associated with the document, if any.
Owner The employee who owns (is responsible for) the document.
### The Invoice period dates section
Element Description
Start date The start date of the invoice period
End date The end date of the invoice period
### The References section
Element Description
Accounting cost ref. A textual value that specifies where to book the relevant data into the Buyer’s financial accounts.
Originator document ref. The identification of the call for tender or lot the invoice relates to.
Contract document ref. The identification of a contract.
Customer project The project number requested by the customer. When a project number is entered in this field, it will replace the internal project number when sending to AutoInvoice for VismaXML and PEPPOL BIS. When nothing is filled in, the internal project number will be sent to AutoInvoice.
### The Dunning info section This section is only available if the **Dunning letter management** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window.
Element Description
Dunning letter date The date of the last released dunning letter in which the document was listed.
Dunning level The dunning level of the document.
Revoked

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the document is excluded from the dunning process. Clear the check box if you want the system to process the document when you prepare dunning letters.

The field is displayed if the By document option is selected in the Dunning process field on the Dunning settings tab of the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window.

### The Debt collection information section This section is only available if you have a **Case number** entered. functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window.
Element Description
Case number The case number from debt collection for the invoice.
Case type

The case type from debt collection for the invoice. Collection notification

  • Collection
  • Payment notification
  • Legal collection
Case status

The case status from debt collection for the invoice.

  • Active
  • Paused
  • Closed, not paid
  • Closed and paid
Exclude from debt collection A check box that, if selected, will exclude the invoice from being sent to debt collection. This check box is inherited from the window Customers (AR303000). The check box will not be visible if the invoice has been sent to dept collection. This section will display information when you receive the case number from the debt collection.
### The Cash discount information section This section is only available if the document contains at least one tax that has the **Reduces taxable amount on early payment** option selected in the **Cash discount** field in the [VAT (TX205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/vat-tx205000/) window and if the document has a non-zero cash discount amount. The elements in this section display the calculated amounts if the document is paid during the cash discount period and a cash discount is applied to the document.
Element Description
Discounted doc. total The document total, which has been discounted due to the cash discount being applied; this occurs when the document has been paid within the cash discount period.
Discounted taxable total The taxable amount, which has been discounted due to the cash discount being applied to the document.
VAT on discounted price The VAT amount, which is calculated based on the price to which the cash discount has been applied.
## The Invoice address tab This tab displays the invoicing address of the customer and the contact information for invoicing purposes. The **Override address** and **Override contact** check boxes on this tab are selected by default if the **Invoice to default location** check box is not selected in the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window, the **Delivery settings** tab, for this customer. ### The Address section
Element Description
Override address

A check box you select to specify an invoice address other than the default invoice address of the customer.

When this check box is cleared, the invoice address to be used for this customer is the same as the default invoice address of the customer.

Address 1 The first line of the invoice address.
Address 2 The second line of the invoice address.
Address 3 The third line of the invoice address.
Postcode

The postcode for the invoicing address.

An input mask for the postcode can be set in the Countries/counties/postcodes (CS20400S) window.

City The city of the customer’s invoice address.
Country The customer’s country.
County The state or province of the customer.
### The Contact information section
Element Description
Override contact

A check box you select to specify contact info other than the default contact information of the customer.

When this check box is cleared, the contact info to be used for this customer is the same as the default contact information of the customer.

Business name The name of the business.
Attention The department or person to be noted on the attention line, if this line is used by your company.
Email The email address of the contact person.
Phone 1 The phone number of the contact person.
### The Print and email options section
Element Description
Printed A check box that indicates (if selected) that the document was printed.
Emailed A check box that indicates (if selected) that the document was emailed.
Do not print

A check box that indicates (if selected) that printing of this document is not mandatory for further processing and the document is not included in the list of documents available for mass-printing in the Send invoices (AR508000) window.

The default value of this setting depends on the value of the Print invoices check box in the Customers (AR303000) window.

Do not email

A check box that indicates (if selected) that emailing of this document is not mandatory for further processing and the document is not included into the list of documents available for mass-emailing in the Send invoices (AR508000) window.

The default value of this setting depends on the value of the Send invoices by email check box in the Customers (AR303000) window.

### The Report settings section
Element Description
Show description on order confirmation and invoice Select this check box to show the text in the Invoice text field on the invoice, and, if applicable, the sales order confirmation.
Print note on external sales documents Select this check box to print a note on external sales documents.
Print note on internal sales documents Select this check box to print a note on internal sales documents.
### The AutoInvoice section In this tab you find the AutoInvoice sending information. Here, you also find the invoice response message, if you have activated this functionality in the [AutoInvoice settings (CS10250S)](/visma-net-erp/help/management/management-windows/autoinvoice-settings-cs10250s/) window, and the customer has activated this from their side. For more information, see: [About invoice response messages](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/about-invoice-response-messages/).
Element Description
Sent to AutoInvoice A check box that indicates (if selected) that the document was sent to AutoInvoice.
Send to AutoInvoice A check box that indicates (if selected) that the document will be sent to AutoInvoice.
Sending method Indicates which path the AutoInvoice was sent by: Standard or Consumer.
AutoInvoice status

Shows the status of processing. Available statuses are:

Sent to AutoInvoice
Awaiting processing.
Pending
Awaiting delivery.
Sent
The invoice is sent.
Error
To check why an error occurred, you have to go to AutoInvoice.
AutoInvoice sent by

Shows how the invoice was sent. Possible values are:

  • Sent inside home network
  • Sent by email
  • Sent by print
  • Sent by print PRIORITY
  • Sent by print WORLD
  • Sent e-Invoice
  • Sent to bank network
  • Sent by N/A
Business level status

The status of the invoice as sent by the customer. It can be one of the following:

  • Message acknowledgment
  • In process
  • Under query
  • Conditionally accepted
  • Rejected
  • Accepted
  • Paid

To get the current status, click the Actions button and select Poll invoice status.

Reason code The reason given by the customer to clarify the business level status. This text is predefined, see this status clarification reason list global-css-new-window-16 for all possible reason codes.
Reason Text entered manually by the customer.
Action code The action the customer wants you to take for this invoice. This text is predefined, see this status clarification action list global-css-new-window-16 for all possible action codes.
Action Text entered manually by the customer.
### The Direct debit information section
Element Description
Mandate ID Shows the direct debit information from the Direct debit tab of the Customers (AR303000) window. The selected mandate is the default one for the branch selected on the Financial details tab of the invoice. The list will display only mandates linked to current branch or mandates without a branch set.
Sent to AutoPay A check box that indicates (if selected) that the document was sent to AutoPay.
Send to AutoPay A check box that indicates (if selected) that the document will be send to AutoPay.
## The VAT details tab The table on this tab contains information related to the VAT to be paid on the invoice. The table is filled out automatically for the invoice or note when you click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).
Column Description
VAT ID The ID of the VAT applied to the document.
Description The description of the VAT ID in clear language.
VAT rate The rate of the VAT.
Taxable amount The taxable amount for the VAT, which is calculated at the document level.
VAT amount The VAT amount for the specific VAT, which is calculated at the document level.
Reverse VAT A check box that indicates (if selected) that this is a reverse VAT.
Statistical VAT A check box that indicates (if selected) that this VAT will be calculated only for statistical purposes. Or, will be reported only, but not actually paid.
Pending VAT A check box that indicates (if selected) that this VAT is pending and will be recognised after completing the VAT recognition process.
Include in VAT exempt total A check box that indicates (if selected) that this VAT has a zero rate and is used to calculate a document subtotal that is actually exempt from VAT.
VAT type

The type of the VAT, which can be one of the following:

  • Sales
  • Use
  • VAT
  • Withholding
## The Salesperson commission tab This tab displays the commissions that can be calculated for the document. To calculate commissions, use the [Calculate commissions (AR505500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/calculate-commissions-ar505500/) window. The tab is available if the **Commissions** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window.
Element Description
Default salesperson The ID of a salesperson to be used by default for each invoice line. By default, it is a salesperson associated with the selected location of the customer.
Total commissionable The total amount used to calculate commissions for all salespersons involved.
Commission amt. The total amount of commissions on the document.
## The Discount details tab This tab has a table showing the **Document**- and **Group**-level discounts that were applied to the document. The **Line**-level discounts applied to the document (if any) are shown on the **Document details** tab. This tab is only available if the **Customer and supplier discounts** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. The table toolbar includes only standard buttons.
Column Description
Skip discount A check box that you select to cancel a Group - or Document -level discount for the document. Selecting the check box updates the total and the line amounts of the document but does not remove the record of the cancelled discount from the table.
Discount code The ID (code) of the discount applied to the document automatically or manually.
Series ID The ID of the discount series applied to the document.
Type The type of discount whose series was applied to the document.
Manual discount A check box that indicates (if selected) that the discount shown in this row has been applied manually. The discount was selected from the Group- or Document- level discounts for which the Manual check box is selected in the Discount codes (AR209000) window.
Discountable amt. The amount used as a base for discount calculation if the discount is defined as based on the amount.
Discountable qty. The quantity used as a base for discount calculation if the discount is defined as based on the item quantity.
Discount amt. The amount of the discount.
Discount percent The discount percent if by definition the discount is calculated as a percentage.
Free item The item ID of the free item if one is specified by the discount applied to the document.
Free item qty. The quantity of the free item to be added as the discount.
Order type The type of order.
Order no. The order number.
## The Applications tab The content of this tab depends on the type of the document selected in the top part. If a document with the **Invoice**, **Debit note**, or **Overdue charge** type and the **Open** or **Closed** status is selected, this tab displays the list of customer ledger payments that have been applied to the document. For invoices and debit notes with the **Balanced** status, the tab displays the list of open payments or credit notes (if any) that can be applied to the document. You can specify the exact amount to be paid with each document or click the **Apply automatically** button in the table toolbar to let the system to decide how to pay the invoice. The specified applications are applied when you release the invoice. If a document with the **Credit note** type and the **Open** or **Closed** status is selected, the tab displays the list of customer ledger invoices, debit notes, and overdue charges the selected credit note is applied to. For credit notes with the **Balanced** status, you can specify invoices, debit notes, and overdue charges to which this credit note is applied when you release it. You add documents for application by adding a row to the table and selecting the document type and reference number. The system automatically fills in the **Amount paid** field with the possible value, but you can change this value for each added document. The specified applications are applied when you release the credit note.
Button Description
View payment Opens the Customer payments (AR302000) window in a pop-up window so that you can view the document details or application, depending on the document type.
Apply automatically

Automatically applies the available payments to the document.

The button is displayed if the Invoice type is selected in the top part.

### If you select Invoice, Debit note, or Overdue charge in the top part, the table columns look like this
Column Description
Doc. type The type of payment document that was applied.
Reference no. The reference number of the document. When you click this number, the Sales invoices (AR301000) or Customer payments (AR302000) window opens in a pop-up window, depending on the document type, so that you can view the document details.
Customer The ID of the customer account.
Amount paid The amount that was actually paid which is displayed in the currency of the document that is selected in the window.
Cash discount taken The amount of the cash discount that was deducted from the invoice amount in case the invoice was paid during the cash discount period.
Payment date The date of the payment application.
Balance The balance of the document after the payment was applied.
Invoice text The description of the payment document.
Currency The currency of the payment document.
Payment period The period to which the payment transactions are posted.
Payment ref. The reference number used by the customer on its payment document.
Status The status of the payment document.
VAT adjustment A check box automatically selected by the system if the customer ledger document specified in this row is subject to VAT adjustment.
VAT credit note

The reference number of the VAT credit note generated in the Generate VAT on cash discount (AR504500) window for the customer ledger document specified in this row.

This reference number is specified by the system automatically once the VAT credit note is generated.

### If you select Credit note in the top part, the table columns look like this
Column Description
Document type The type of the document that was applied.
Reference no. The reference number of the applied document. By clicking this number, the document details window opens.
Customer The ID of the customer account.
Amount paid The amount that was actually paid which is displayed in the currency of the document that is selected in the window.
Date The date of the document.
Balance The balance of the document after the credit note was applied.
Invoice text The description of the document.
Currency The currency of the document.
Post period The period to which the document transactions are posted.
Customer order A reference to a document of the customer, such as a purchase order number (for informational purposes).
Status The status of the document.
## The ROT and RUT details (Sweden) tab This tab is displayed when you select the **ROT or RUT deductible document** check box in the top part of this window. ### The ROT and RUT settings section
Element Description
Distribute automatically (check box) (check box) When this check box is selected, the amount will be distributed equally among the specified personal IDs.
RUT (check box) (check box) Select this option if the work is related to RUT (cleaning, maintenance, laundry) deduction.
ROT (check box) (check box) Select this check box if the work is related to ROT (repairs, conversion, extension) deduction. When you select this, you need to fill in either the Property field, or the Apartment and Corporate ID fields.
Apartment The apartment number.
Property The property number.
Corporate ID The housing cooperative’s ID.
### The ROT and RUT distribution section Here you can add the person(s) who will receive the tax deduction.
Column Description
Personal ID (YYYYMMDDNNNN) The personal ID in the format YYYYMMDDNNNN.
Amount The amount distributed to this person. If the Distribute automatically check box is not selected, you can edit this field and manually distribute the amount among the personal IDs.
Over 65 A check box that you select to indicate that this person is over 65 years old. This is not done automatically.
### The ROT and RUT totals section
Elemant Description
Total deductible amount The total amount that is tax deductible.
Other cost The total amount for items of the Other cost type, including VAT.
Material cost The total amount for items of the Material cost type, including VAT.
Work price The total price of labour hours (items of the Service type), including VAT. This is the amount eligible for tax deduction.
Distributed amount or Undistributed amount

When the Distribute automatically check box is selected, this will display the total amount distributed among the specified personal IDs.

When the Distribute automatically check box is not selected, this will display the amount still to be distributed manually among the specified personal IDs.

### The Balancing documents for ROT and RUT deduction section This section appears after the invoice is balanced, which is either after releasing the invoice or when sending the claim, depending on your setting for **Balance invoices on** on the **ROT and RUT settings (Sweden)** tab in the [Organisations (CS101500)](/visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/organisation-structure-windows/organisations-cs101500/) or [Branches (CS102000)](/visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/organisation-structure-windows/branches-cs102000/) window. You can also invoke the balancing of invoices manually by using the **Balance** action in the [Claim ROT and RUT (AR531000)](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/claim-rot-and-rut-ar531000/) window.
Element Description
Balancing credit note ref. no. The automatically created balancing credit note to the customer, with the deductible amount. You can click the link to view the document.
Balancing debit note ref. no. The automatically created balancing debit note to Skatteverket (The Swedish Tax Agency), with the deductible amount. You can click the link to view the document.
## The Attachments tab
Button Description
View file Opens the File maintenance (SM202510) window.
Column Description
Send the file to AutoInvoice The selected files will be attached to the invoice.
Name The name of the attachment.
Created by The person who added the attachment.
Creation time The date and time the attachment was created.
Comment Shows the comment that you can enter in the File maintenance (SM202510) window.
File size The size of the attached file.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Sales prices (AR202000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-prices-ar202000 page You can use this window to review and edit all prices for items matching the selected criteria. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Sales prices (AR202000) You can use this window to review and edit all prices for items matching the selected criteria. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can use this window to review and edit all prices for items matching the selected criteria. Changes made here become effective immediately. Also, with one click, you can create a price worksheet containing all prices for items matching the selected criteria. For more information on sales prices, see: [Managing sales prices](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/multiple-price-lists/manage-sales-prices-overview/). ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Create price worksheet

Navigates to the Sales price worksheets (AR202010) window, where you proceed working with a price worksheet containing all price records matching the criteria that you have selected in the current window. By default, the new worksheet is created with the On hold status and the current business date.

Note

If the selection of records contains multiple records defined for the same item, but effective on different dates, the system forces you to specify particular date in the Effective as of field to eliminate duplicates (all records in the worksheet are to be effective on the same date.)

## The top part In this part, you can select sales prices for viewing and possibly revising by their price type, item, and effective date. You can display only the prices of items assigned to your work group (or another specific work group), or you can display only the prices of the items assigned to you.
Element Description
Price type

The type of prices you want to view. Select one of the following options:

All prices
Prices of all available types are displayed.
Base
Prices of the base type are displayed. The base price is used if there are no other more specific prices defined (promotional or customer-specific). This price type does not have any price codes.
Customer
Customer-specific prices are displayed. You can select a particular customer account in the Price code field to create a price list for this customer or to narrow the list of prices.
Customer price class
Prices specific to the price classes are displayed. You can select a particular price class in the Price code field to create a price list for all customers from this price class or to narrow the list of prices. For an item, you can set different prices for different customer price classes, which can be created and modified in the Customer price classes (AR208000) window.
Price code/Customer The customer or a customer price class for which you want to create or edit a price list. This field is available if the Customer or the Customer price class option is selected in the Price type field.
Effective as of A date that you select to view or edit prices effective on this exact date.
Item class ID The class of stock or non-stock items, by its ID, for which you want to review sales price information. Leave the field blank to view information on items of all item classes.
Item ID The item for which you want to view or edit prices.
Warehouse The warehouse in which the price applies.
Price class The item price class of the items for which you want to review sales price information. You can leave the field blank to view information on items in all item price classes.
Price manager

A field and the Me check box, which you can use as follows to select the price manager whose items you want to view:

  • Select the Me check box to view the items assigned to you. The field will contain your username.
  • Clear the Me check box and select another username to view the items assigned to the user.
  • Leave the fields blank to view items assigned to all users of the selected price work group or all groups.
Price work group

A field and the My check box, which you use as follows to select the price work group of the price manager of the items you want to view:

  • Select the My check box to view the items assigned to your price work group (or to a selected user in the group).
  • Clear the My check box and select a price work group in the unlabelled field to display the items assigned to the price work group (or to a particular price manager, if you select one, in the selected group).
  • Leave the field blank and clear the check box to view the items assigned to all price work groups.
## The Sales prices table This table displays the sales prices for items that match the criteria you have specified. You can view and edit the existing items and add new records.
Column Description
Price type The price type of the item: Base, Customer, or Customer price class.
Price code/Customer Depending on the price type, the price code is the identifier of the customer or customer price class. If the price type is Base, Price code is empty.
Price code description Depending on the price type, the price code description is the customer name or customer price class description.
Item ID The ID of the stock or non-stock item for which price information is listed.
Description The description of the item.
UoM The unit of measure (UoM) used for the item. You can select any of the units defined for this item and set a separate price for it.
Warehouse The warehouse in which the price applies.
Promotion A check box that indicates (if selected) that the price for this item is promotional. Promotional prices, which may overlap with regular prices, should have expiration dates after which they are not used.
Break qty.

The quantity to define a lower bound for a quantity tier with the specific price.

This column appears if the Volume pricing functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Price

The price for the item, which becomes effective immediately after you save your changes in this window. You can set any price as long as minimum markup validation is not configured for the Inventory workspace, which is the case when the No validation option is selected in the Validate min. markup field in the Sales order preferences (SO101000) window.

If minimal mark up validation is configured (that is, if the Warning or Set to minimum option is selected in the Validate min. markup field) and you enter a pending price lower than that allowed by the Min. markup % value for the item, you will get a warning or the pending price will be set to the minimum allowed.

The Min. markup % for the item is specified on the Price/cost information tab in the Stock items (IN202500) window or the similarly named tab in the Non-stock items (IN202000) window.

Currency The currency in which this price is specified.
VAT

The VAT amount that is included in the sales price. (This functionality can be used in countries where value-added or similar VATs are enforced.) This VAT will be used to correct the list of VATs that apply to a sales order line: If the list of VATs that apply to the sales order doesn’t include this VAT, the VAT amount will be deducted from the price.

For details, see: Sales price calculation.

Effective date The date when the price became effective.
Expiration date The date when the price expires.
Alt. item ID

The alternative ID of the item. You can upload prices in worksheets with alternative item IDs instead of item identifiers defined in the system, and to create alternative item IDs for stock items on release of worksheets.

To enable alternative item IDs, select the Load sales prices by alternative item ID check box on the Price/discount settings tab of the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Sales price worksheets (AR202010) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-price-worksheets-ar202010 page You can use this window to create sales price worksheets. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Sales price worksheets (AR202010) You can use this window to create sales price worksheets. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can use this window to create sales price worksheets. By using a worksheet, you can make changes to prices in a batch. Prices defined in a worksheet update sales prices when you release the worksheet; before you release it, you can save the changes. Prices in the released worksheet become effective on the date you have specified in the **Effective date** field. Also, you can create a worksheet with promotional prices and set an expiration date for the promotion. You can use a worksheet to calculate the pending prices for multiple items by using the price basis you specify. For more information on sales prices, see: [Manage sales prices - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/multiple-price-lists/manage-sales-prices-overview/). You can populate a worksheet by manually adding new rows, uploading prices from an Excel file, using Visma Net import scenarios, and clicking the **Add item** and **Copy prices** buttons. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Release

Updates sales price records. The release process validates records, ensuring that the following criteria are met:

  • Pending prices should be set for all records. If you do not want to update a price, delete the row from the table.
  • Regular prices for the same combination of a price type, price code, item ID, unit of measure (UoM), and currency may not overlap in time.
  • Promotional prices for the same combination of a price type, price code, item ID, UoM, and currency may not overlap in time.
Note

Promotional and regular prices for the same combination of a price type, price code, item ID, unit of measure, and currency may overlap each other in time.

## The top part Here, you can select a prices worksheet by its reference number to view its information, or you can create a worksheet.
Element Description
Ref. no. The reference number of the worksheet in the system; for a new document, the NEW string is displayed, indicating that a new number will be generated when you save the document. The number series used is defined in the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window.
Status

The status of the worksheet, which is one of the following:

On hold
Indicates that a user can edit the worksheet but cannot release it. The Hold check box is selected, and you should clear the check box when you are ready to release the worksheet.
Open
Indicates that the worksheet is ready to be released, but can be edited. The Hold check box is cleared. With the Open status, you can edit price records one by one, but you cannot use the Add item, Copy prices and Calculate pending prices buttons in the table toolbar.
Released
Indicates that the prices defined in the worksheet are added to the sales prices records. Prices in the released worksheet become effective on the date you have specified in the Effective date field.
Hold A check box that indicates (if selected) that the worksheet is a draft. Clear the check box to change the status of a worksheet from On hold to Open.
Description A brief description of the worksheet.
Effective date The date when the prices defined in the worksheet become effective.
Promotional A check box that indicates (if selected) that the prices defined in the worksheet are promotional and an expiration date must be specified. With the check box selected, the Overwrite overlapping prices check box is selected automatically and not available for editing.
Expiration date The date when promotional prices expire. This field becomes available if the Promotional check box is selected.
Overwrite overlapping prices

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the prices whose effective dates overlap with the effective dates of the worksheet will be overwritten by the prices defined in the worksheet.

Make the check box available by enabling retention of prices:

  1. Go to the Customer ledger preferences window, Price/discount settings tab
  2. Set Retention type to Fixed number of months
  3. Make sure the Promotional check box is cleared

Overwrite overlapping prices check box is selected automatically and not available for editing if:

  • the retention of prices is disabled
  • the Promotional check box is selected
## The Sales prices worksheet table This table displays the sales prices of items in the selected worksheet. You can view the existing items, upload the listed items with their pricing information, add items from inventory, or copy the existing list to another currency. For all the listed items, you can manually define new pending prices for all units used for the item, or you can direct the system to perform calculation of new pending prices.
Button Description
Add item Opens the Add item to worksheet dialog box so that you can load the list of items from the Inventory workspace.
Copy prices Opens the Copy prices dialog box so that you can copy prices from the selection you specify to a new price worksheet for another customer or customer price class.
Calculate pending prices Opens the Calculate pending prices dialog box so that you can calculate new pending prices or recalculate (update) pending prices by using the selected price basis.
Column Description
Price type The price type of the item: Base, Customer, or Customer price class.
Price code Depending on the price type, the price code is the identifier of the customer or customer price class. If the price type is Base, Price code is empty.
Item ID The ID of the stock or non-stock item for which price information is listed.
Description The description of the item.
UoM The unit of measure (UoM) used for the item. You can select any of the units defined for this item and set a separate price for it.
Warehouse The warehouse for which the price is defined. If this field is empty, the price applies to all warehouses. This column appears if the Multiple warehouses feature is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Break qty. The quantity to define a lower bound for a quantity tier with a specific price. This column appears if the Volume pricing functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Source price The price that serves as a source for calculating pending price of an item. When you add a new record, the value corresponds to the default price of the item, for which you add the record to the worksheet. However, when you are adding records by using the Copy prices dialog box, the value depends on the selection of a source.
Pending price The pending price for the item. You can set any price here and it becomes effective immediately after you release the worksheet.
Currency The currency in which this price is specified.
VAT The VAT whose amount is included in the sales price. (This functionality can be used in countries where value-added or similar taxes are enforced.) This VAT will be used to correct the list of VATs that apply to a sales order line: If the list of taxes that apply to the sales order doesn’t include this VAT, the VAT amount will be deducted from the price. For details, see: About sales price calculation.
Alt. item ID

The alternative ID of the stock or non-stock item for which you want to define the price. The system will search for the stock or non-stock item by the alternative item ID you specify in this column and populate the Item ID, Description, and UoM columns of the row with the settings of the item it finds. If the system does not find the specified alternative ID, when the price worksheet is released, the system will create a global alternative item ID and assign it to the item with the item ID that is specified in this row of the worksheet.

This column is hidden by default and appears if the Load sales prices by alternative item ID check box is selected on the Price/discount settings tab in the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window. For more information, see About item cross-references.

## The Add item to worksheet dialog box This dialog box opens when you click the **Add item** button. By using the dialog box, which includes the following elements, you can upload the list of items that match the criteria you have selected, with their default price information from the Inventory workspace. Each added item is assigned the price code and currency you specify in the dialog box.
Element Description
Item The item or items. Start typing in the field, and the system displays the list of items that contain the string you have typed in their identifier or description.
Item class ID The identifier of the class of stock or non-stock items that you want to add to a worksheet. Leave the field blank to add items of all item classes.
Price class ID The ID of the item price class of the items that you want to add to a worksheet. You can leave the field blank to add items in all item price classes.
Product manager

A field and the Me check box, which you can use as follows to select the product manager whose items you want to add:

  • Select the Me check box to add the items assigned to you. The field will contain your username.
  • Deselect the Me check box and select another username to add the items assigned to the user.
  • Leave the fields blank to add items assigned to all users of the selected price work group or all groups.
Work group

A field and the My check box, which you use as follows to select the price work group of the price manager of the items you want to add:

  • Select the My check box to add the items assigned to your price work group (or to a selected user in the group).
  • Deselect the My check box and select a price work group in the field to add the items assigned to the price work group (or to a particular price manager, if you select one, in the selected group).
  • Leave the field blank and deselect the check box to add the items assigned to all price work groups.
### The Price type to add section
Element Description
Price type

The type of price you want to assign to newly added items. Select one the following options:

Base
The base type is assigned to newly added items. The base price is used if there are no other more specific prices defined (promotional or customer-specific). This price type does not have any price codes.
Customer
The customer-specific price type is assigned to newly added items. You can select a particular customer in the Price code field to create a price worksheet for this customer.
Customer price class
The price class-specific price type is assigned to newly added items. You can select a particular price class in the Price code field to create a price worksheet for all customers from this price class.
Price code The price code is the identifier of the customer or customer price class (depending on the option selected in the Price type field) for which you want to create a price worksheet.
Currency The currency to be assigned to the prices of newly added items.
Warehouse The warehouse for which the price is defined. If this field is empty, the price applies to all warehouses. This column appears if the Multiple warehouses feature is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
### The table
Element Description
Item ID The identifier of the stock or non-stock item.
Item class ID The identifier of the class of stock or non-stock items.
Description The description of the stock or non-stock item.
Price class ID The identifier of the item price class.
Price work group The identifier of the price work group.
Price manager The price manager responsible for the pricing policy.
Add (button) Adds the selected items to the currently selected worksheet. The dialog box stays open so that you can change selection criteria and add more items. The Pending price column is blank for all added items.
Add and close (button) Adds the selected items to the currently selected worksheet and closes the dialog box. The Pending price column is blank for all added items.
Cancel (button) Closes the dialog box without adding items to the worksheet.
## The Copy prices dialog box This dialog box opens when you click the **Copy prices** button. By using the dialog box, which includes the following elements, you can add records to the currently selected worksheet, by copying items that match selection criteria and assigning the specified price code and currency to copied records. If source and destination currencies are different, you specify the type and date of the rate to be used for currency conversion.
Element Description
Price type

The price type of items you want to copy. Select one of the following options:

Base
Items with the base type are to be copied. This price type does not have any price codes.
Customer
Items with a customer-specific price type are to be copied. You can select a particular customer in the Price code field to narrow the selection.
Customer price class
Items with a price class-specific price type are to be copied. You can select a particular price class in the Price code field to narrow the selection.
Price code The price code is the identifier of the customer or customer price class (depending on the option selected in the Price type field) whose items you want to copy.
Source currency The currency of the items you want to copy.
Warehouse The warehouse whose prices should be copied. If this box is empty, the system will copy only the prices that have no warehouse specified. This field appears if the Multiple warehouses feature is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Effective as of The date that the effective date of the item prices should match.
Promotional price A check box that you select to copy items that have promotional prices.
### The Destination section
Element Description
Price type

The price type you want to assign to copies of items. Select one the following options:

Base
Items with the base type are to be copied. This price type does not have any price codes.
Customer
Copies are assigned with a customer-specific price type. You can select a particular customer in the Price code field to create a worksheet for the customer. You cannot change the source currency of items when you copy customer-specific prices.
Customer price class
Copies are assigned with a price class-specific price type. You can select a particular price class in the Price code field to create a worksheet for the customer. You can also specify a new currency in the Destination currency field.
Price code The price code is the identifier of the customer or a customer price class (depending on the option selected in the Price type field) you want to assign to copies of items.
Destination currency The currency to which you want to copy prices. If the source and destination currencies are different, you should specify conversion details in the Currency conversion section.
Warehouse The warehouse to which the copied prices will be assigned. This field appears if the Multiple warehouses feature is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
### The Currency conversion section
Element Description
Rate type The rate type to be used for currency conversion.
Currency effective date The date when the exchange rate for the destination currency becomes effective.
Copy (button) Copies the selected items, adds the copied items to the currently selected worksheet, and closes the dialog box. The Pending price column is blank for all items added.
Cancel (button) Closes the dialog box without adding items to the worksheet.
## The Calculate pending prices dialog box This dialog box opens when you click the **Calculate pending prices** button. By using the dialog box, which includes the following elements, you can calculate the new pending prices in the worksheet by using the selected price basis.
Element Description
% of original price The percentage at which the new pending prices will be calculated by using the selected price basis. By default, this is 100%, which reflects no change. If you specified 98%, the new prices would be 98% of the price selected as basis.
Decimal places The number of places after the decimal point to be shown for prices.
Update with zero price when basis is zero The check box the indicates, if selected, that the pending price parameter of the price record will be updated with the zero value if the selected price basis for this record is zero.
### The Price basis section
Element Description
Last cost + markup %

An option that you select to calculate prices based on the stock items’ last costs increased by the mark up percentage specified for the items.

Note

The option is not applicable for non-stock items.

Average/standard cost + markup % An option that you select to calculate prices based on the items’ average/standard costs increased by the markup percentage specified for the stock items. In case of non-stock items, the system uses the current cost, instead of the average or standard cost.
Source price An option that you select to calculate prices based on the values specified in the Source price column.
List price An option that you select to calculate prices based on the manufacturer’s suggested retail price.
Pending price An option that you select to calculate pending prices based on currently pending prices.
Replacement cost An option that you select to calculate pending prices based on the item’s replacement cost.
Update (button) Updates all pending prices in the currently selected worksheet with the new values.
Cancel (button) Closes the dialog box without updating prices.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Salespersons (AR205000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/salespersons-ar205000 page You can use this window to create new salesperson accounts and to modify existing accounts. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Salespersons (AR205000) You can use this window to create new salesperson accounts and to modify existing accounts. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can use this window to create new salesperson accounts and to modify existing accounts. For more information, see: [About commission configuration and calculation](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-commissions/about-commission-configuration-and-calculation/). ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The top part In this area, you can create a new salesperson account or select an existing salesperson account for viewing or editing its settings.
Element Description
Salesperson ID

The unique identifier of the salesperson.

Requirements for the ID are set by the SALESPER segmented key.

For more information, see: About ID segmentation.

Is active A check box that indicates (if selected) that the salesperson account is active.
Name The salesperson’s name as it should appear on documents.
Default commission %

The default percent of commission to be used for the salesperson.

The field is available if the Commissions functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Sales sub. The subaccount associated with the salesperson.
## The Customers tab This tab contains a list of the salesperson's customers, and the applicable location and the commission percentage associated with each.
Column Description
Customer no. The customer’s unique identifier. You can select a customer from the list of available customers.
Customer name A read-only column showing the customer’s name as it should appear on the documents.
Location A read-only column with the default location of the customer with whom the salesperson works.
Location name A read-only column that displays the name of the location.
Commission %

The commission percent on sales for the particular customer.

The field is available if the Commissions functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Default When this check box is selected, this salesperson is the default salesperson of the customer.
## The Commission history tab This tab displays the history of commissions for the salesperson. The tab is available if the **Commissions** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window.
Button Description
View details Navigates to the Commission details (AR403000) window and displays the details of the selected document.
Column Description
Commission period The commission period in which the commission was incurred. The commission periods are set in the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window.
Commissionable amount The amount used for commission calculation during the period. The commission is calculated on an invoice amount before VAT.
Commission amount The amount of commissions earned during the period.
Payroll processed date

The date when the commission was processed in the Payroll module.

This column is available only if the Payroll functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Sales profitability analysis (AR409000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-profitability-analysis-ar409000 page By using this window, you can view and export all the details you may need to analyse sales profitability. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Sales profitability analysis (AR409000) By using this window, you can view and export all the details you may need to analyse sales profitability. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. By using this window, you can view and export all the details you may need to analyse sales profitability. You specify the branch and the time range for which you want to get data, and the system displays the details of the transactions generated by the system when documents were released within the selected time frame. You can specify additional criteria to narrow the list of transactions. ## The top part You use the elements in this area to specify the branch and the date range for which you want to view the list of transactions, as well as other criteria to determine which transactions are listed.
Element Description
Branch The branch for which you want to view the list of transactions.
Date from The starting date in the date range for which you want to view the list of transactions.
Date to The ending date in the date range for which you want to view the list of transactions.
Completed transactions only A check box that indicates (if selected) that only completed transactions will be displayed. A transaction is considered completed if the inventory issue for the stock item sold in this transaction is released.
Salesperson The identifier and name of the salesperson that was involved in sales for the transactions to be listed. Leave the field blank to view broader range of results.
Item class The item class for which you want to view information. Leave the field blank to view the sales profitability information for all item classes.
Item The item for which you want to view information. Leave the field blank to view the sales profitability information for all items.
Customer class The customer class for which you want to view information. Leave the field blank to view the sales profitability information for all customer classes.
Customer The customer for which you want to view information. Leave the field blank to view the sales profitability information for all customers.
## The table This table contains the list of transactions posted during the date range specified in the top part.
Column Description
Branch The branch for which the transaction belongs.
Date The date of the invoice to which the transaction belongs.
Net sale The net sale amount of the sold item.
Cost

A value that is one of the following:

  • If a non-stock item is sold with the transaction, the item’s extended price
  • If a stock item is sold and the transaction is not completed, the item’s estimated cost
  • If a stock item is sold and the transaction is completed, the item’s final cost
Margin The difference between the net sale value and the cost.
Margin % A percentage of margin to net sale ratio.
Completed A check box that indicates (if selected) that the transaction is completed. That is, the inventory issue for a stock item sold with this transaction is released. If a non-stock item is sold, the transaction could not be completed.
Sales order no. The reference number of the sales order involved. Click the link to view the details of the sales order.
Sales order type The type of the sales order involved.
Type The type of the document whose release triggered the transaction generation (invoice or cash sale).
Item ID The identifier of the sold item.
Item description The description of the sold item.
Customer class The description of the customer class of the customer who purchased the item.
Customer The name of the customer who purchased the item.
Salesperson The name of the salesperson associated with the sale of the item.
Branch ID The identifier of the branch.
Customer no. The identifier of the customer who purchased the item.
Customer class ID The identifier of the customer class.
Released A check box that indicates (if selected) that the transaction is released.
Item class The item class description to which the sold item is assigned.
Row number The line number in this list.
Item class ID The identifier of the item class.
Salesperson ID The identifier of the salesperson associated with the sale of the item.

Related pages

Windows

Statement cycles (AR202800) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/statement-cycles-ar202800 page You can use this window to create statement cycles, which make it possible to track customers' outstanding balances and send electronic or printed statements to the customers. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Statement cycles (AR202800) You can use this window to create statement cycles, which make it possible to track customers' outstanding balances and send electronic or printed statements to the customers. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can use this window to create statement cycles, which make it possible to track customers' outstanding balances and send electronic or printed statements to the customers. You can define four ageing periods for customer ledger documents and use them to prepare a customer ledger ageing schedule at the end of each month. By analysing your customer ledger ageing schedule, you can more easily identify potential cash flow problems. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Regenerate last statement Initiates the process of again generating the most recent statement with an updated date.
## The General settings section
Element Description
Cycle ID The unique identifier of the cycle. An alphanumeric string of up to 10 characters can be used.
Description A detailed description of the statement cycle. An alphanumeric string of up to 30 characters can be used.
Schedule type

The day when the statement should be generated. The following options are available:

Weekly:
The statement will be generated each week, on the day specified in the Day of week 1 field.
Twice a month
The statement will be generated twice a month, on the days specified in the Day of month 1 and the Day of month 2 fields.
A fixed day of the month
The statement will be generated on the day specified in the Day of month 1 field.
The end of the month
The statement will be generated on the last day of each month.
The end of the financial period:
The statement will be generated on the last day of each financial period of the current financial year.
Day of month 1 The day of each month when the statement should be generated. The field is available if either Fixed day of the month or Twice a month is selected in the Schedule type field.
Day of month 2 The day of each month when the statement should be generated for the second time. This field is available only if the Twice a month option is selected.
Day of the week The day of each week when the statement should be generated. This field is available only if Weekly is selected in the Schedule type field. The default value is Sunday.
Last statement date A read-only field that displays the date when the statement was generated most recently.
Require payment application before statement A check box that indicates (if selected) that the payments should be applied to invoices before each statement is processed.
Print empty statements If you do not want the statements with no details to be printed, unselect this check box for statement cycles. After the process of preparing the statement, you can view these statements with the Do not print and Do not email check boxes selected in the Statement history details (AR404300), Customer statement history (AR404600), and Print statements (AR503500) window.
## The Ageing section You use this section to define four periods for ageing the customer ledger document. Each period is defined by the following elements.
Element Description
Use financial periods for ageing A check box that indicates (if selected) that the system uses the financial periods as ageing periods in customer statements and customer ledger ageing reports. If this check box is selected, the system uses the financial period to which the statement date or the ageing date belongs as the first ageing period.
Ageing period (days)

In the fields you can select the current period or the number of days the documents to be included overdue.

  • The first period includes documents that are past due or outstanding for the specified number of days or fewer.
  • The second and third periods include documents that are past due or outstanding for the number of days (or fewer) specified in this box and greater than the number of days specified for the previous period.
  • The fourth period includes documents that are more than x days past due or outstanding, where x is the number of days specified for the third period.
Description You can write and edit the descriptions of the defined ageing periods. The descriptions will be printed to the customer statement reports.
Age based on Select whether the age of the documents is based on their due date or document date.
## The Finance charge settings section
Element Description
Apply overdue charges A check box that indicates (if selected) that calculation of overdue charges is required for all customers assigned to the statement cycle.
Require overdue charge calculation before statement A check box that indicates (if selected) that the system should calculate overdue charges before processing a statement.
Overdue charge ID The overdue charges to be used for customers assigned to the statement cycle. The overdue charges that are actually applied depend on whether the Set default overdue charges by statement cycle check box in the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window is selected; if not, the charges from the customer class will be applied.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Statement history details (AR404300) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/statement-history-details-ar404300 page You can use this window to view the statement history for each statement cycle. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Statement history details (AR404300) You can use this window to view the statement history for each statement cycle. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can easily drill down to the details of the statement. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Customer statement history Navigates to the Customer statement history (AR404600) window.
Print statement Navigates to the Customer statement report generated for the selected customer.
## The top part You can use the elements in this area to select the statement cycle and the date when the statement was printed.
Element Description
Statement cycle The statement cycle by its ID.
Statement date The date when the statement was printed.
## The table The table shows the list of customers included in the statement printed on the specified date, along with such details as the balance and the currency used by the customer.
Column Description
Customer The unique identifier of the customer account in the system.
Customer name The name of the customer as it is stored in the system.
Statement balance The customer’s balance (in the base currency) on the statement.
Overdue balance The total amount that is overdue.
Currency One of currencies used by the customer.
FC statement balance The customer balance in the specified currency.
FC overdue balance The overdue amount in the specified currency.
FC statement A check box that indicates (if selected) that the multi-currency format of statement should be used.
Do not print A check box that indicates (if selected) that the statement should not be printed in accordance with the customer settings in the Customers (AR303000) window.
Printed A check box that indicates (if selected) that the statement was printed.
Do not email A check box that indicates (if selected) that the statement should not be sent by email.
Emailed A check box that indicates (if selected) that the statement was sent by email.
On-demand statement When this check box is selected, you can generate statements on demand.
Prepared on The date when the statement was prepared.

Related pages

Windows

Statement history summary (AR404000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/statement-history-summary-ar404000 page In this window, you can view the history of statements for each statement cycle during the specified period of time. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Statement history summary (AR404000) In this window, you can view the history of statements for each statement cycle during the specified period of time. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can easily drill down to the details of each statement.
Button Description
Statement history details Navigates to the Statement history details (AR404300) window.
Print statements Navigates to the Print statements (AR503500) report.
## The top part In this part, you can select the statement cycle and the date range for which you want to display data.
Element Description
Statement cycle The statement cycle for which data will be displayed. If you leave the field blank, information for all statement cycles will be displayed.
Include on-demand statements When this is selected, on-demand statements will also be displayed in the summary.
Start date The start date of the date range. By default, it is the start day of the current financial year.
End date The end date of the date range. By default, it is the current business date.
## The table This table displays the list of statements issued during the specified period of time.
Column Description
Statement cycle ID The ID of the statement cycle.
Statement date The date of the statement.
Description The description of the statement cycle.
Number of documents The number of documents included into the statement.
To print The number of statements requiring printing in accordance with the settings in the Customers (AR303000) window.
Printed The number of statements printed in accordance with the settings in the Customers (AR303000) window.
To email The number of statements requiring emailing in accordance with the settings in the Customers (AR303000) window.
Emailed The number of statements emailed in accordance with the settings in the Customers (AR303000) window.
No action The number of statements requiring no action in accordance with the settings in the Customers (AR303000) window.
Email completion (%) The percentage of statements that have been emailed (among all statements to be emailed).
Print completion (%) The percentage of statements that have been printed (among all statements to be printed).

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

Task (CR306020) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/task-cr306020 page By using this window, you can create a new task or view the details of an existing task. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Task (CR306020) By using this window, you can create a new task or view the details of an existing task. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Complete Changes the status of the task to Completed. This action is available only to the task owner.
Complete and follow-up Changes the task status to Completed and creates an task that has the same details as the current one but the Not started status. This action is available only to the task owner.
Cancel Cancels the task, changing its status to Cancelled. This action is available only to the user who created the task.
## The Details tab By using this tab, you can create a new task and view or edit the details of an existing task.
Element Description
Summary The task summary description, which can be used as its ID.
Start date The start date and time of the task.
Internal A check box that, if selected, indicates that the task is hidden from external users.
Due date The date and time when the task should be completed.
Completion (%) The estimation of the task completion, expressed as a percent.
Work group The workgroup the task is assigned to.
Owner The user the task is assigned to. By default, it shows the employee ID of the task creator.
Reminder This check box is not in use.
Remind at (date) This field is not in use.
Related entity description

The entity that this activity is associated with. For example: If you are creating an activity that is associated with a lead, this lead will be specified in the field by default.

To adjust the value, click the magnifier icon; as a result, the Select entity dialog box opens.

Parent A read-only field displaying the parent task this task is related to via the Related tasks tab of the parent task, if applicable.
Project The project associated with this task (or the non-project code indicating that this task is not associated with any project defined to the system); appears if the Projects module is activated.
Project task The particular project task with which this task is associated; appears if the Projects module has been activated. You can select only a project task of the selected project.
Priority The priority level of the task: Low, Normal, or High. These levels are used for informational purposes only; no specific functionality is associated with them.
Status

The status of the task. Select one of the following options:

Open
The task has been assigned to an owner.
Draft
The task has not been assigned yet.
In process
The task owner has started processing the task.
Cancelled
The user who created the task has cancelled it.
Completed
The task owner has finished processing the task.
Category The category of the task.
Completed at The date and time of task completion.
Time spent The time in days, hours, and minutes from task creation to completion.
Overtime The number of hours outside of work hours from task creation to completion.
Invoiceable time The number of invoiceable hours from task creation to completion.
Invoiceable overtime The number of billable overtime hours spent on the task.
You can use the editor area, found at the bottom of the tab, to add comments about the task. You can edit the text by using the buttons in the formatting toolbar, which give you the ability to edit text (including cut, copy, and paste), change its typographical treatment (including using boldface, italics, superscript, subscript, colour and highlighting), and format it (changing its alignment, indenting, or creating lists). ### The Select entity dialog box By using this dialog box, you can specify which entity relates to the activity whose data you are adjusting.
Element Description
Type The type of the related entity.
Entity The related entity of the type.
OK A button that causes your changes to be accepted and closes the dialog box.
Cancel A button that closes the dialog box and cancels the selection.
## The Related activities tab This tab displays a table that shows activities related to the task.
Button Description
Add email Opens the Send (CR306015) window, from which you can send an email.
Add activity Contains a menu with options that correspond to the activity types. By clicking on a menu option, you open the Activity (CR306010) window, which you use to create an activity of the corresponding type.
Column Description
Type The type of the activity.
Summary The description provided for the activity. With an email, it matches the content of the email subject field.
Status The status of the activity.
Start date The start date of the activity.
Created at The date and time when the activity was created.
Category The category of the task.
Invoiceable A check box that indicates (if selected) that the time spent on the activity can be invoiced.
Time spent The number of hours spent to complete the activity.
Overtime The number of hours outside of work hours spent to complete the activity.
Invoiceable time The number of hours spent to complete the activity that can be invoiced.
Invoiceable overtime The number of overtime hours spent to complete the activity that can be invoiced.
Work group The work group that the activity is assigned to (if any).
Owner The name of the user to whom the activity is assigned.
Created by The user who has created the activity.
Released A check box that indicates (if selected) that the activity has been released.
## The Related tasks tab This tab lists the tasks that are related to this task. This task will be set as the **Parent** for the tasks added here.
Button Description
Add related task Opens the Task (CR306020) window in a pop-up window.
Column Description
Subject The description of the task and a link to it.
Status The status of the task.
Start date The start date of the task.
Due date The due date of the task.
Completed at The date and time when the task was actually completed.
Update contract prices (CT503000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/update-contract-prices-ct503000 page You can use this window to update prices for contracts. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Update contract prices (CT503000) You can use this window to update prices for contracts. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can use this window to update prices for contracts. You change pricing options of a contract item, by using the [Contract items (CT201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/contract-items-ct201000/) window. Then, by using this window, you view the list of contracts that include modified contract item and select those you want to update with these changes. If a contract has the **Active** status you can update pricing options of a setup and renewal items. If a contract has the **Draft** or **Pending activation** status you can update pricing options of a setup, renewal, and recurring items. ## The window toolbar
Element Description
Update Updates the contracts you have selected by using the unlabelled check boxes in the table.
Update all Updates all the contracts listed in the table.
## The top part You use this area to select a modified contract item, and review its current pricing details and pricing details used in contracts that include the selected contract item.
Element Description
Item code The unique identifier of a contract item.
Setup pricing

A read-only field that displays the pricing policy defined for the setup item, which can be one of the following options:

Use item price
The applicable sales price of the non-stock item is used. If a sales price is not found, the default price of the non-stock item is used. For details, see: About multiple price lists.
Percent of item price
The price is a percentage calculated by applying the percent specified in the Item price/percentage field to the base price of the non-stock item.
Enter manually
The price is specified manually in the Item price/percent field and then can be changed in a contract.
Item price/percent A read-only field that displays the setup item price or percent to be applied to the non-stock item price.
Setup price A read-only field that displays the contract item price for setup, which is calculated based on the settings specified in the Setup pricing and Item price/percent fields.
Renewal pricing

A read-only field that displays the pricing policy defined for the renewal item, which can be the one of the following options:

Use item price
The applicable sales price of the non-stock item is used. If a sales price is not found, the default price of the non-stock item is used. For details, see: About multiple price lists.
Percent of item price
The price is a percentage calculated by applying the percent specified in the Item price/percent field to the non-stock item price.
Percent of setup price
The price is a percentage calculated by applying the percent specified in the Item price/percent field to the contract item setup price.
Enter manually
The price is specified manually in the Item price/percent field and then can be changed in a contract.
Item price/percent A read-only field that displays the renewal item price or percent to be applied to the non-stock item price.
Renewal price A read-only field that displays the contract item price for renewal, which is calculated based on the settings specified in the Renewal pricing and Item price/percent fields.
Recurring pricing

A read-only field that displays the pricing policy defined for the recurring item, which can be the one of the following options:

Use item price
The applicable sales price of the non-stock item is used. If a sales price is not found, the default price of the non-stock item is used. For details, see: About multiple price lists.
Percent of item price
The price is a percentage calculated by applying the percent specified in the Item price/percent field to the non-stock item price.
Percent of setup price
The price is a percentage calculated by applying the percent specified in the Item price/percent field to the contract item setup price.
Enter manually
The price is specified manually in the Item price/percent field and can not be changed later in a contract
Item price/percent A read-only field that displays the recurring item price or percent to be applied to the non-stock item price.
Recurring price A read-only field that displays the contract item recurring price, which is calculated based on the settings specified in the Recurring pricing and Item price/percent fields.
Extra usage pricing

A read-only field that displays the pricing policy defined for the recurring item, which is applied to the price if the customer has exceeded the included quantity of the service. It can be one of the following options:

Use item price
The applicable sales price of the non-stock item is used. If a sales price is not found, the default price of the non-stock item is used. For details, see: About multiple price lists.
Percent of item price
The price is a percentage calculated by applying the percent specified in the Item price/percent field to the non-stock item price.
Percent of setup price
The price is a percentage calculated by applying the percent specified in the Item price/percent field to the contract item setup price.
Enter manually
The price is specified manually in the Item price/percent field.
Item price/percent A read-only field that displays the recurring item price for extra usage or percent to be applied to the non-stock item price.
Extra usage price A read-only field that displays the contract item price for extra usage, which is calculated based on the settings specified in the Extra usage pricing and Item price/percent fields.
## The table This table contains the list of contracts that include the contract item specified in the top part. You can compare the pricing options of the contract item displayed in the Selection area with those used in contracts. You can select contracts by using the check fields in the first column.
Column Description
Identifier A read-only field that displays the contract identifier.
Status A read-only field that displays the status of a contract.
Setup pricing

A read-only field that displays the pricing policy currently used in the contract for the setup item, which can be the one of the following options:

Use item price
The applicable sales price of the non-stock item is used. If a sales price is not found, the default price of the non-stock item is used. For details, see: About multiple price lists.
Percent of item price
The price is a percentage calculated by applying the percent specified in the Item price/percentage field to the price of the non-stock item.
Enter manually
The price is specified manually in the item price/percent field and then can be changed in a contract.
Price/percent A read-only field that displays the setup item price or percent to be applied to the non-stock item price (currently used in the contract).
Setup price A read-only field that displays the contract item price for setup (currently used in the contract), which is calculated based on the settings specified in the Setup pricing and Price/percent fields.
Renewal pricing

A read-only field that displays the pricing policy currently used in the contract for the renewal item, which can be the one of the following options:

Use item price
The applicable sales price of the non-stock item is used. If a sales price is not found, the default price of the non-stock item is used. For details, see: About multiple price lists.
Percent of item price
The price is a percentage calculated by applying the percent specified in the Item price/percent field to the non-stock item price.
Percent of setup price
The price is a percentage calculated by applying the percent specified in the Item price/percent field to the contract item setup price.
Enter manually
The price is specified manually in the Item price/percent field and then can be changed in a contract.
Price/percent A read-only field that displays the renewal item price or percent to be applied to the non-stock item price (currently used in the contract).
Renewal price A read-only field that displays the contract item price for renewal (currently used in the contract), which is calculated based on the settings specified in the Renewal pricing and Price/percent fields.
Fixed recurring

The recurring invoicing policy. The following options are available:

None
recurring invoicing is not performed.
Prepaid
customer is invoiced at the beginning of scheduled invoicing period.
Postpaid
customer is invoiced at the end of scheduled invoicing period.
Price/percent A read-only field that displays the recurring item price or percent to be applied to the non-stock item price (currently used in the contract).
Recurring price A read-only field that displays the contract item recurring price (currently used in the contract), which is calculated based on the settings specified in the Recurring pricing and Price/percent fields.
Usage price

A read-only field that displays the pricing policy currently used in the contract for the recurring item, which is applied to the price if the customer has exceeded the included quantity of the service. It can be one of the following options:

Use item price
The applicable sales price of the non-stock item is used. If a sales price is not found, the default price of the non-stock item is used. For details, see: About multiple price lists.
Percent of item price
The price is a percentage calculated by applying the percent specified in the Item price/percent field to the non-stock item price.
Percent of setup price
The price is a percentage calculated by applying the percent specified in the Item price/percent field to the contract item setup price.
Enter manually
The price is specified manually in the Item price/percent field.
Price/percent A read-only field that displays the recurring item price for extra usage or percent to be applied to the non-stock item price (currently used in the contract).
Extra usage price A read-only field that displays the contract item price for extra usage (currently used in the contract), which is calculated based on the settings specified in the Extra usage pricing and Price/percent fields.

Related pages

Windows

Update discounts (AR502500) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/update-discounts-ar502500 page You use this window to make pending discount series effective ones. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Update discounts (AR502500) You use this window to make pending discount series effective ones. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. Pending series will appear in the list only if their start date is sooner than the specified pending date. You can update all of them or only the selected ones. While it updates discounts, the system performs the following steps for each selected series: + Removes from the database the last series (the one used before the currently effective series), if any + Marks the currently effective series, if any, as the last one + Marks the pending series as the currently effective one > [!NOTE] > For each discount, effective series, if defined for the same time interval, should not have intersecting lists of customers, items, or other entities. This window is available only if the **Customer and supplier discounts** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Process Processes the discounts you have selected in the table, replacing the currently effective series with pending series whose start dates have reached the date specified in the Max. pending discount date field.
Process all Processes all the listed discounts, replacing the currently effective series with pending series whose start dates have reached the Max. pending discount date.
## The top part Here, you can select the latest start date for pending discount series to be made effective.
Element Description
Max. pending discount date The date used to select pending series for updating; only pending series with later start dates than this date will be updated.
## The table This table contains the discount series with start dates that have reached the **Max. pending discount date**.
Column Description
Discount code The code of the discount whose series can be processed.
Series The identifier of the pending series of the discount.
Description The description provided for the series.
Discount by The way the discount is expressed: by percentage or by amount.
Break by

The way the discount breakdown series is specified, which is one of the following options:

Quantity
The ranges for the series are formed by specified quantities.
Amount
The ranges for the series are formed by specified amounts.
Effective date The date when the discount series becomes effective and can be applied to sales orders and invoices.
Last update date The date when the discount was last updated.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

Validate customer balances (AR509900) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/validate-customer-balances-ar509900 page In this window, you can validate customer balances, starting with the selected financial period. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Validate customer balances (AR509900) In this window, you can validate customer balances, starting with the selected financial period. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. Validation entails recalculating the balances based on the history records (released customer ledger documents) and matching them to the customer balances stored in the database. The system also uses the open sales orders to validate whether the customer balances exceed the credit limits specified for these customers. > [!NOTE] > We recommend that you validate the customer balances after you change the credit validation rules. > [!NOTE] > Also, you may run this process if there is any discrepancy between the customer balance and the total amount of all the released customer documents. Use the [Customer details (AR402000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-details-ar402000/) window to view if there is any discrepancy; use the [Customer history (AR652000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/customer-history-ar652000/) report for details on the customer account history. In the top part, you select a financial period (and, optionally, a customer class), and you can view the list of customers in the table. To validate the balances of all customers in the list, click **Process all**. To validate the balances of only particular customers, select the check boxes next to those customers and click **Process**. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Process Recalculates the balances for the customers you have selected in the table.
Process all Recalculates the balances for all the customers listed in the table.
## The top part You use this part to select a financial period and a customer class for which you want to validate customer balances.
Element Description
Period The financial period starting which you want to validate customer balances. By default, the system selects the earliest financial period that is open in Customer ledger.
Customer class The customer class for which you want to validate customer balances. If you make no selection, customers of all classes will be displayed.
## The table This table lists all customers or the customers of the class you selected.
Button Description
View Customer Navigates to the Customers (AR303000) window and displays the selected customer’s account details.
Column Description
Customer no. The customer who has balance to be validated. Click the ID to navigate to the Customers (AR303000) window to see the selected customer’s account details.
Customer class The class to which the customer belongs.
Customer name The name of the customer.

Related pages

Windows

Write-off balances and credits (AR505000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/write-off-balances-and-credits-ar505000 page You use this window to write off balances or credits. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Write-off balances and credits (AR505000) You use this window to write off balances or credits. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You use this window to write off balances or credits. You can select documents by customer, post period, and type of write-off operation. As a result of processing, the system does the following: 1. Generates documents of the **Balance write-off** or **Credit write-off** types depending on write-off operation you have selected. 1. Releases these documents regardless of the value of the **Hold documents on entry** check box in the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. 1. Generates batches of appropriate transactions with the **Unposted** or **Posted** status, depending on the value of the **Automatically post on release** check box in the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. 1. Applies each generated document to the corresponding document that you have written balance or credit off and closes both documents. For more information, see: [Write-off methods - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/write-off-methods/write-off-methods-overview/). ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Process Processes the write-offs for the documents you have selected in the table.
Process all Processes the write-offs for all the listed documents.
## The top part You can use the elements in this part to narrow the list of documents displayed in the table.
Element Description
Type The type of operation. The following types are available: Credit write-off and Balance write-off.
Doc. date The date when the write-offs are performed.
Post period The period to which the write-off transactions should be posted.
Branch The branch for which you want to display data. By default, it is the branch a user is currently logged in. If a user clears the box value, the system displays the documents from all the branches to which the user has access to.
Customer The customer whose balances or credits will be written off. You can select a customer from the list or leave the field blank to view the documents of all the customers.
Reason code A reason code that defines an account and subaccount to be used for writing off credits or balances. By default, the system uses reason codes you specified in the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window.
Limit The maximum balance of a document that may be a subject to the selected write-off operation. By default, it is the value specified for the customer (if selected) in the Write-off limit field in the Customers (AR303000) window. You can enter the specific limit manually, if needed.
Selection total A read-only box that shows the total amount on the selected documents.
## The table This table displays documents that have a balance no greater than the amount specified in the **Limit** field and match other criteria specified in the Selection area. Review the documents that may be subject to write-off.
Column Description
Branch The branch of the document.
Type

The type of customer ledger document. The following types can be processed, if the type of operation is set to Balance write-off:

Invoice
Created for an invoice sent to the customer for goods sold or services provided.
Credit note
Used for a document that adjusts the credit amount in previous invoices.
Overdue charge
Used for overdue charges.

The following types can be processed, if the type of operation is set to Credit write-off:

Debit note
Created for a document that adjusts the debit amount in previous invoices.
Payment
Created for a payment received from the customer.
Prepayment
Created for a prepayment received from the customer
Ref. no. The identifier of the document. If you click the link, the system opens the Sales invoices (AR301000) or Customer payments (AR302000) window, depending on the type of the selected document, and displays the details of the selected customer ledger document.
Customer The customer for whom this document is intended.
Customer name The customer’s name.
Date The date of the document.
Post period The post period of the document.
Currency

The currency of the document.

This column is available only if the Multi-currency accounting functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Foreign currency balance

The open balance of the document in the foreign currency to which payment was not applied.

This column is available only if the Multi-currency accounting functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Foreign currency amount The amount in foreign currency.
Amount The amount in base currency.
Balance The open balance of the document in the base currency to which payment was not applied.
Balance % Percentage of balance from the amount
Invoice text A detailed description for the document in which the amount will be written off.
Reason code A reason code used.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Customer ledger reports /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Customer ledger reports Customer ledger reports - overview /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/customer-ledger-reports-overview page With the wide variety of reports available for the Customer ledger workspace, you can promptly get vital information, analyse financial data by various criteria, review transactions efficiently, and track data edits. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Customer ledger reports - overview With the wide variety of reports available for the Customer ledger workspace, you can promptly get vital information, analyse financial data by various criteria, review transactions efficiently, and track data edits. Some reports have a standard version and a multi-currency version. Because the Customer ledger workspace is tightly integrated with other workspaces, such as General ledger and Cash management, you can find and analyse the exact information you need. By using flexible selection options and data links, you can easily drill down from a financial report to any supporting details. > [!NOTE] > Because the Customer ledger reports are generated by user request, they run on only accounts and subaccounts that the user is authorised to access, based on the user's roles and membership in restriction groups. The reports can be generated in multiple formats, including PDF and HTML. Also, you can print the report you generated or send the report by email. When you print a supplier customer document and send it by email, the system will use the notification template set on the **Mailing settings** tab in the [Suppliers window](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) [Customers window](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/). ## Customer ledger reports The Customer ledger workspace includes the following reports: ### Balance + [Aged past due (AR631000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/aged-past-due-ar631000/): Lists the customers with outstanding balances, which are broken down by days past due. + [Aged past due (currency) (AR631100)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/aged-past-due-currency-ar631100/): Displays the customers with outstanding foreign currency balances. The balances are broken down by days past due. + [Aged outstanding (AR631500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/aged-outstanding-ar631500/): Shows the list of customers with outstanding balances, with balances arranged by days outstanding. + [Aged outstanding (currency) (AR631600)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/aged-outstanding-currency-ar631600/): Displays the list of customers with outstanding balances, with balances arranged by days outstanding. The foreign currency balances and amounts are shown in their original currency. + [Aged period sensitive (AR630500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/aged-period-sensitive-ar630500/): Displays the list of customers with outstanding balances. The balances are arranged by days past due on the last day of the specified period. + [Balance by customer (AR632500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/balance-by-customer-ar632500/): Displays the outstanding balances of the selected customer (or all customers) during the chosen period. For each customer, documents are grouped by account and subaccount pair and listed by their reference numbers. All the amounts are shown in the base currency. + [Balance by customer (currency) (AR633000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/balance-by-customer-currency-ar633000/): Displays the outstanding foreign currency balances of the selected customer (or all customers) during the chosen period. + [Balance by general ledger account (AR632000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/balance-by-general-ledger-account-ar632000/): Displays the balances of the customer ledger accounts and activities on the accounts for the chosen period. Documents are grouped by account and subaccount pair and listed by their reference numbers. ### Window + [Customer statement MC, Dutch (AR64205S)](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/customer-statement-mc-dutch-ar64205s/): Shows the customer statement accordant with the selected details in Dutch. + [Customer statement MC, Danish (AR64206S)](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/customer-statement-mc-danish-ar64206s/): Shows the customer statement accordant with the selected details in Danish. + [Customer statement MC, English (AR64201S)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/customer-statement-mc-english-ar64201s/): Shows the customer statement accordant with the selected details in English. + [Customer statement MC, Norwegian (AR64204S)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/customer-statement-mc-norwegian-ar64204s/): Shows the customer statement accordant with the selected details in Norwegian. + [Customer statement MC, Swedish (AR64213S)](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/customer-statement-mc-swedish-ar64213s/): Shows the customer statement accordant with the selected details in Swedish. + [Customer statement MC, Swedish left address (AR64203S)](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/customer-statement-mc-swedish-left-address-ar64203s/): Shows the customer statement accordant with the selected details in Swedish, with the address information on the left side. + [Invoice/note (AR641000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/invoice-note-ar641000/): Prints the invoice. + [Invoice - English (AR64101S)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/invoice-english-ar64101s/): hows the invoice with the selected reference number in English. + [Invoice - Finnish (AR64102S)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/invoice-finnish-ar64102s/): Shows the invoice with the selected reference number in Finnish. + [Invoice - Swedish for Finland (AR64103S)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/invoice-swedish-for-finland-ar64103s/): Shows the invoice with the selected reference number in Swedish. + [Invoice - Norwegian (AR64104S)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/invoice-norwegian-ar64104s/): Shows the invoice with the selected reference number in Norwegian. + [Invoice - Dutch (AR64105S)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/invoice-dutch-ar64105s/): Shows the invoice with the selected reference number in Dutch. + [Invoice - Danish (AR64106S)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/invoice-danish-ar64106s/): Shows the invoice with the selected reference number in Danish. + [Invoice - Swedish left address (AR64108S)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/invoice-swedish-left-address-ar64108s/): Shows the invoice with the selected reference number in Swedish, address information on the left side. + [Invoice - Dutch pre-printed (AR64110S)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/invoice-dutch-pre-printed-ar64110s/): Shows the invoice with the selected reference number in Dutch on a pre-printed form. + [Invoice - Swedish (AR64118S)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/invoice-swedish-ar64118s/): Shows the invoice with the selected reference number in Swedish. + [Dunning letter (AR661000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/dunning-letter-ar661000/): Displays dunning letters that have been generated. + [Dunning letter, Danish (AR66106S)](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/dunning-letter-danish-ar66106s/) + [Dunning letter, Dutch (AR66105S)](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/dunning-letter-dutch-ar66105s/) + [Dunning letter, Norwegian (AR66104S)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/dunning-letter-norwegian-ar66104s/) + [Dunning letter, Swedish (AR66113S)](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/dunning-letter-swedish-ar66113s/) + [Dunning letter, Swedish left address (AR66103S)](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/dunning-letter-swedish-left-address-ar66103s/) + [Overdue charge (AR643000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/overdue-charge-ar643000/): Displays the selected invoice or note as a ready-to-print document. + [Overdue charge, Danish (AR64306S)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/overdue-charge-danish-ar64306s/) + [Overdue charge, Dutch (AR64305S)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/overdue-charge-dutch-ar64305s/) + [Overdue charge, Dutch pre-printed (AR64310S)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/overdue-charge-dutch-pre-printed-ar64310s/) + [Overdue charge, English (AR64301S)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/overdue-charge-english-ar64301s/) + [Overdue charge, Finnish (AR64302S)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/overdue-charge-finnish-ar64302s/) + [Overdue charge, Swedish (AR64318S)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/overdue-charge-swedish-ar64318s/) + [Overdue charge, Swedish for Finland (AR64303S)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/overdue-charge-swedish-for-finland-ar64303s/) + [Overdue charge, Swedish left address (AR64308S)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/overdue-charge-swedish-left-address-ar64308s/) ### Audit + [Customer documents (AR621500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/customer-documents-ar621500/): Lists all the documents released in Customer ledger for the specified financial period and for the selected customer (or all customers). + [Customer documents (detailed) (AR622000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/customer-documents-detailed-ar622000/): Shows the details of documents of the selected type (or all types) released in Customer ledger for the specified financial period. The details include the batch number and batch transactions. + [Customer history (AR652000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/customer-history-ar652000/): Shows the customer's balance history for the specified period of time. All the amounts are shown in the base currency. + [Customer history summary (AR652100)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/customer-history-summary-ar652100/): Shows a summary of balance history for customers whose balance has been changing during the date range you specify. + [Customer profiles (AR651000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/customer-profiles-ar651000/): Shows all the details from the database of the selected customer account or all customer accounts. + [Customer list (AR40101S)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-list-ar40101s/) + [Customer specification (AR65200S)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/customer-specification-ar65200s/): Shows the customer balance specification for the selected customers. + [Customer summary (AR65050S)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/customer-summary-ar65050s/): Lists all the customers with their current balances, default currency, payment terms, VAT zone, and other related information. + [Incoming payments (AR63050S)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/incoming-payments-ar63050s/): Shows the incoming payments for the selected cash account. + [Open customer ledger documents (AR656000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/open-customer-ledger-documents-ar656000/): Lets you view and print the list of Customer ledger documents that are not yet released in the specified range of financial periods. + [Unreleased transactions (AR611000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/unreleased-transactions-ar611000/): Lists the customer ledger documents that were entered but not released. You can choose a specific customer or view the documents for all customers. + [Unreleased transactions (detailed) (AR610500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/unreleased-transactions-detailed-ar610500/): Displays, with all details, the list of customer ledger documents of the chosen type that were entered but not released. ### Analysis + [Daily sales profitability (AR676000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/daily-sales-profitability-ar676000/): Displays the net sales amounts, costs, margins, and margin percentages calculated on the sales to each customer during the specified date range. The report in detailed format shows the profitability data for each day within the specified date range. + [Sales profitability by salesperson and customer (AR673000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/sales-profitability-by-salesperson-and-customer-ar673000/): Shows the net sales amounts, costs, margins, and margin percentages calculated for the sales performed by particular salespersons during the specified date range. The report in detailed format shows the data broken down by customer. + [Sales profitability by customer and order (AR672000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/sales-profitability-by-customer-and-order-ar672000/): Shows the net sales amounts, costs, margins, and margin percentages on all sales to each customer during the specified date range. The report in detailed format shows the data broken down by sales order. + [Sales profitability by customer class and customer (AR675000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/sales-profitability-by-customer-class-and-customer-ar675000/): Displays the net sales amounts, costs, margins, and margin percentages on all sales to customers of each customer class during the specified date range. In detailed format, this report shows the data broken down by sales to particular customers. + [Sales profitability by item and order (AR671000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/sales-profitability-by-item-and-order-ar671000/): Displays the net sales amounts, costs, margins, and margin percentages for the items that were listed on the sales orders created in Visma Net during the specified date range. The report in detailed format shows the data broken down by sales orders. + [Sales profitability by customer class and customer (AR675000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/sales-profitability-by-customer-class-and-customer-ar675000/): Displays the net sales amounts, costs, margins, and margin percentages on all sales to customers of each customer class during the specified date range. In detailed format, this report shows the data broken down by sales to particular customers. + [Sales profitability by item and order (AR671000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/sales-profitability-by-item-and-order-ar671000/): Displays the net sales amounts, costs, margins, and margin percentages for the items that were listed on the sales orders created in Visma Net during the specified date range. The report in detailed format shows the data broken down by sales orders. + [Sales profitability by item class and item (AR674000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/sales-profitability-by-item-class-and-item-ar674000/): Shows the net sales amounts, costs, margins, and margin percentages calculated on item class basis on the sales occurred during the specified date range. The report in detailed format shows the data broken down by stock items. Aged past due (AR631000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/aged-past-due-ar631000 section You use this report to determine which documents are overdue for payment and for how long. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Aged past due (AR631000) You use this report to determine which documents are overdue for payment and for how long. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You use this report to determine which documents are overdue for payment and for how long. The report shows all open documents recorded in the system, regardless of the current business date or the date specified in the **Ageing date** field in the report window. That is, the report shows open customer ledger documents, even if they are posted to periods later than the ageing date period. The documents are grouped by statement cycle and by customer, broken down by ageing periods. The amounts are in the base currency. ## Calculating ageing periods The system calculates ageing periods for this report based on the date you select in the **Ageing date** field on the **Report parameters** tab of this report form and on the statement cycle settings specified in the [Statement cycles (AR202800)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/statement-cycles-ar202800/) window as follows: + If the **Use financial periods for ageing** check box is selected for the statement cycle, the system will use aging periods that correspond to the financial periods; the zero aging period (the **Due date** column in the report) is the financial period of the **Ageing date** on the **Report parameters** tab. + If the **Use financial periods for ageing** check box is cleared for the statement cycle, the system will show the aging periods that are specified in the statement cycle. On the generated report, the selected financial period is displayed in the **Fin. period** field and the last date of the period is displayed in the **Aged on** field. ## Ageing outstanding documents The system distributes the open invoices, debit notes, and overdue charges over the financial periods or ageing periods depending on the statement cycle settings in the [Statement cycles (AR202800)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/statement-cycles-ar202800/) window: + If **Due date** is selected in the **Age based on** field for the statement cycle, the system will compare the due dates of outstanding documents with the **Ageing date** date you specify in this report window. The overdue balances are grouped by the ageing periods or financial periods specified for the applicable statement cycle, while the balances that are not overdue are displayed in the **Current** column of the report. + If **Document date** is selected in the **Age based on** field for the statement cycle, the system will compare the document dates of outstanding documents with the **Ageing date** date you specify in this report window. The balances of the documents with dates the same as or later than the ageing date are displayed in the **Current** column on this report. Other outstanding balances are broken down by the number of days from the **Aged on** of the report through the document date. For more information, see: [About customer ledger ageing reports](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-customer-ledger-documents/about-customer-ledger-ageing-reports/). ## Ageing credit amounts In the report, the amounts of open payments, prepayments, and credit memos are aged by periods if the **Age credits** check box is selected in the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/)window. If the credit amounts are aged, they are broken down by the number of days that have passed from the document date through the **Aged on** date. By default, the check box is cleared and the credit amounts show up in the **Current** column. See below for a description of each parameter on the **Report parameters** tab. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Report format

The format of the report. Select one of the following options:

Detailed
(default): To view outstanding customer documents.
Summary
To view outstanding customer balances.
Company

The company the report should cover.

Select a company, or leave the field blank to view data on all companies.

By default, the current company is selected. This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system, in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Branch

The branch the report should cover.

Select a branch, or leave the field blank to view data on all branches.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system, in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Customer class

The customer class for which you want to display data.

Select a customer class from the list of customer classes, or leave the field blank to view information for all classes.

Customer

The customer to be reported on, if any.

Select a customer by ID from the list of active customers, or leave the field blank to view information for all customers.

Project The project to be reported on, if any.
Ageing date

The date the system will use when calculating the ageing categories for the documents.

By default, the current date is used, but you can select another date.

Group by parent account

A check box you select to group customer accounts that are involved in parent-child relationship under a parent account and display consolidated balance of the group.

The system will group only those child accounts that have the Consolidate balance check box selected.

The check box is available if the Parent-child customer relationship functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window. For details, see: Manage parent-child relationships - overview.

## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

Aged past due (currency) (AR631100) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/aged-past-due-currency-ar631100 section This window is available only if the Multi-currency accounting functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Aged past due (currency) (AR631100) This window is available only if the Multi-currency accounting functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window. For more information: [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/). This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You use this multi-currency report to determine which documents are overdue for payment and for how long. The report shows all open documents recorded in the system, regardless of the current business date or the date specified in the **Ageing date** field in the report window. That is, the report shows open customer ledger documents, even if they are posted to periods later than the ageing date period. The documents are grouped by statement cycle and by customer, broken down by ageing periods. The amounts are shown in the currency of the document and in the base currency. ## Calculating ageing periods The system calculates ageing periods for this report based on the date you select in the **Ageing date** field on the **Report parameters** tab of this report form and on the statement cycle settings specified in the [Statement cycles (AR202800)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/statement-cycles-ar202800/) window as follows: + If the **Use financial periods for ageing** check box is selected for the statement cycle, the system will use aging periods that correspond to the financial periods; the zero aging period (the **Due date** column in the report) is the financial period of the **Ageing date** on the **Report parameters** tab. + If the **Use financial periods for ageing** check box is cleared for the statement cycle, the system will show the aging periods that are specified in the statement cycle. On the generated report, the selected financial period is displayed in the **Fin. period** field and the last date of the period is displayed in the **Aged on** field. ## Ageing outstanding documents The system distributes the open invoices, debit notes, and overdue charges over the financial periods or ageing periods depending on the statement cycle settings in the [Statement cycles (AR202800)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/statement-cycles-ar202800/) window: + If **Due date** is selected in the **Age based on** field for the statement cycle, the system will compare the due dates of outstanding documents with the **Ageing date** date you specify in this report window. The overdue balances are grouped by the ageing periods or financial periods specified for the applicable statement cycle, while the balances that are not overdue are displayed in the **Current** column of the report. + If **Document date** is selected in the **Age based on** field for the statement cycle, the system will compare the document dates of outstanding documents with the **Ageing date** date you specify in this report window. The balances of the documents with dates the same as or later than the ageing date are displayed in the **Current** column on this report. Other outstanding balances are broken down by the number of days from the **Aged on** of the report through the document date. For more information, see: [About customer ledger ageing reports](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-customer-ledger-documents/about-customer-ledger-ageing-reports/). ## Ageing credit amounts In the report, the amounts of open payments, prepayments, and credit memos are aged by periods if the **Age credits** check box is selected in the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/)window. If the credit amounts are aged, they are broken down by the number of days that have passed from the document date through the **Aged on** date. By default, the check box is cleared and the credit amounts show up in the **Current** column. See below for a description of each parameter on the **Report parameters** tab. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Report format

The format of the report. Select one of the following options:

Detailed
(default): To view outstanding customer documents.
Summary
To view outstanding customer balances.
Company

The company the report should cover.

Select a company, or leave the field blank to view data on all companies. By default, the current company is selected.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system, in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Branch

The branch the report should cover.

Select a branch, or leave the field blank to view data on all branches.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system, in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Customer class

The customer class for which you want to display data.

Select a customer class from the list of customer classes, or leave the field blank to view information on all classes.

Customer

The customer to be reported on, if any.

Select a customer by ID from the list of active customers, or leave the field blank to view information on all customers.

Ageing date

The date the system will use when calculating the ageing categories for the documents.

By default, the current date is used, but you can select another date.

Group by parent account

A check box you select to group customer accounts that are involved in parent-child relationship under a parent account and display consolidated balance of the group.

The system will group only those child accounts that have the Consolidate balance check box selected. The check box is available if the Parent-child customer relationship functionality is enabled in Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window. For details, see: Manage parent-child relationships - overview.

## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

Aged period sensitive (AR630500) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/aged-period-sensitive-ar630500 section You use this report to determine the state of the open documents at the end of a particular period. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Aged period sensitive (AR630500) You use this report to determine the state of the open documents at the end of a particular period. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You use this report to determine the state of the open documents at the end of a particular period. This report shows the documents (by statement cycle and by customer) that are outstanding at the end of the specified period, broken down by ageing periods. The balances are arranged by days past due on the last day of the specified period. All the amounts are shown in the base currency. ## Calculating ageing periods The system calculates ageing periods for this report based on the date you select in the **Ageing date** field on the **Report parameters** tab of this report form and on the statement cycle settings specified in the [Statement cycles (AR202800)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/statement-cycles-ar202800/) window as follows: + If the **Use financial periods for ageing** check box is selected for the statement cycle, the system will use aging periods that correspond to the financial periods; the zero aging period (the **Due date** column in the report) is the financial period of the **Ageing date** on the **Report parameters** tab. + If the **Use financial periods for ageing** check box is cleared for the statement cycle, the system will show the aging periods that are specified in the statement cycle. On the generated report, the selected financial period is displayed in the **Fin. period** field and the last date of the period is displayed in the **Aged on** field. ## Ageing outstanding documents The system distributes the open invoices, debit notes, and overdue charges over the financial periods or ageing periods depending on the statement cycle settings in the [Statement cycles (AR202800)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/statement-cycles-ar202800/) window: + If **Due date** is selected in the **Age based on** field for the statement cycle, the system will compare the due dates of outstanding documents with the **Ageing date** date you specify in this report window. The overdue balances are grouped by the ageing periods or financial periods specified for the applicable statement cycle, while the balances that are not overdue are displayed in the **Current** column of the report. + If **Document date** is selected in the **Age based on** field for the statement cycle, the system will compare the document dates of outstanding documents with the **Ageing date** date you specify in this report window. The balances of the documents with dates the same as or later than the ageing date are displayed in the **Current** column on this report. Other outstanding balances are broken down by the number of days from the **Aged on** of the report through the document date. For more information, see: [About customer ledger ageing reports](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-customer-ledger-documents/about-customer-ledger-ageing-reports/). ## Ageing credit amounts In the report, the amounts of open payments, prepayments, and credit memos are aged by periods if the **Age credits** check box is selected in the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/)window. If the credit amounts are aged, they are broken down by the number of days that have passed from the document date through the **Aged on** date. By default, the check box is cleared and the credit amounts show up in the **Current** column. See below for a description of each parameter on the **Report parameters** tab. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Report format

The format of the report. Select one of the following options:

Detailed
(default): To view outstanding customer documents.
Summary
To view outstanding customer balances.
Company The company the report should cover. Select a company, or leave the field blank to view data on all companies. By default, the current company is selected. This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system, in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) windoww.
Branch The branch the report should cover. Select a branch, or leave the field blank to view data on all branches. This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system, in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Period The financial period the system will use to calculate the ageing categories for the documents. By default, the current financial period is used.
Customer class

The customer class for which you want to display data.

Select a customer class from the list of customer classes, or leave the field blank to view information for all classes.

Group by parent account A check box you select to group customer accounts that are involved in parent-child relationship under a parent account and display consolidated balance of the group. The system will group only those child accounts that have the Consolidate balance check box selected. The check box is available if the Parent-child customer relationship functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window. For details, see: Manage parent-child relationships - overview.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Aged outstanding (AR631500) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/aged-outstanding-ar631500 section This report is designed to show when you should expect to get payments for the outstanding documents. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Aged outstanding (AR631500) This report is designed to show when you should expect to get payments for the outstanding documents. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report is designed to show when you should expect to get payments for the outstanding documents. The report shows all open documents recorded in the system, regardless of the current business date or the date specified in the **Ageing date** field in the report window. That is, the reports show open general ledger documents, even if they are posted to periods later than the ageing date period. The documents are grouped by statement cycle and by customer, broken down by ageing periods. The amounts are shown in the base currency. ## Calculating ageing periods The system calculates ageing periods for this report based on the date you select in the **Ageing date** field on the **Report parameters** tab of this report form and on the statement cycle settings specified in the [Statement cycles (AR202800)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/statement-cycles-ar202800/) window as follows: + If the **Use financial periods for ageing** check box is selected for the statement cycle, the system will use aging periods that correspond to the financial periods; the zero aging period (the **Due date** column in the report) is the financial period of the **Ageing date** on the **Report parameters** tab. + If the **Use financial periods for ageing** check box is cleared for the statement cycle, the system will show the aging periods that are specified in the statement cycle. On the generated report, the selected financial period is displayed in the **Fin. period** field and the last date of the period is displayed in the **Aged on** field. ## Ageing outstanding documents The system distributes the open invoices, debit notes, and overdue charges over the financial periods or ageing periods depending on the statement cycle settings in the [Statement cycles (AR202800)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/statement-cycles-ar202800/) window: + If **Due date** is selected in the **Age based on** field for the statement cycle, the system will compare the due dates of outstanding documents with the **Ageing date** date you specify in this report window. The overdue balances are displayed in the zero ageing period (the **Past due** column on the report), while the balances that are not overdue are grouped by the ageing periods or financial periods specified for the statement cycle. + If **Document date** is selected in the **Age based on** field for the statement cycle, the system will compare the document dates of outstanding documents with the **Ageing date** date you specify in this report window. The balances of the documents with dates earlier than the ageing date are displayed in the zero ageing period on the report. Other outstanding balances are broken down by the number of days from the **Aged on** of the report through the document date. For more information, see: [About customer ledger ageing reports](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-customer-ledger-documents/about-customer-ledger-ageing-reports/). ## Ageing credit amounts In the report, the amounts of open payments, prepayments, and credit memos are aged by periods if the **Age credits** check box is selected in the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/)window. If the credit amounts are aged, they are broken down by the number of days that have passed from the document date through the **Aged on** date. By default, the check box is cleared and the credit amounts show up in the **Current** column. See below for a description of each parameter on the **Report parameters** tab. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Report format

The format of the report. Select one of the following options:

Detailed
(default): To view outstanding customer documents.
Summary
To view outstanding customer balances.
Company

The company the report should cover.

Select a company, or leave the field blank to view data on all companies. By default, the current company is selected.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system, in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Branch

The branch the report should cover.

Select a branch, or leave the field blank to view data on all branches.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system, in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Customer class

The customer class for which you want to display data.

Select a customer class from the list of customer classes, or leave the field blank to view information on all classes.

Customer

The customer to be reported on, if any.

Select a customer by ID from the list of active customers, or leave the field blank to view information on all customers.

Ageing date

The date the system will use when calculating the ageing categories for the documents.

By default, the current date is used, but you can select another date.

Group by parent account

A check box you select to group customer accounts that are involved in parent-child relationship under a parent account and display consolidated balance of the group.

The system will group only those child accounts that have the Consolidate balance check box selected. The check box is available if the Parent-child customer relationship functionality is enabledthe Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window. For details, see: Manage parent-child relationships - overview.

## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

Aged outstanding (currency) (AR631600) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/aged-outstanding-currency-ar631600 section This multi-currency report is designed to show when you should expect to get payments for the outstanding documents. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Aged outstanding (currency) (AR631600) This multi-currency report is designed to show when you should expect to get payments for the outstanding documents. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. > [!NOTE] > This window is available only if the **Multi-currency accounting** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. This multi-currency report is designed to show when you should expect to get payments for the outstanding documents. The report shows all open documents recorded in the system, regardless of the current business date or the date specified in the **Ageing date** field in the report window. That is, the reports show open customer ledger documents, even if they are posted to periods later than the ageing date period. The documents are grouped by statement cycle and by customer, broken down by ageing periods. The amounts are shown in the currency of the document and in the base currency. ## Calculating ageing periods The system calculates ageing periods for this report based on the date you select in the **Ageing date** field on the **Report parameters** tab of this report form and on the statement cycle settings specified in the [Statement cycles (AR202800)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/statement-cycles-ar202800/) window as follows: + If the **Use financial periods for ageing** check box is selected for the statement cycle, the system will use aging periods that correspond to the financial periods; the zero aging period (the **Due date** column in the report) is the financial period of the **Ageing date** on the **Report parameters** tab. + If the **Use financial periods for ageing** check box is cleared for the statement cycle, the system will show the aging periods that are specified in the statement cycle. On the generated report, the selected financial period is displayed in the **Fin. period** field and the last date of the period is displayed in the **Aged on** field. ## Ageing outstanding documents The system distributes the open invoices, debit notes, and overdue charges over the financial periods or ageing periods depending on the statement cycle settings in the [Statement cycles (AR202800)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/statement-cycles-ar202800/) window: + If **Due date** is selected in the **Age based on** field for the statement cycle, the system will compare the due dates of outstanding documents with the **Ageing date** date you specify in this report window. The overdue balances are displayed in the zero ageing period (the **Past due** column on the report), while the balances that are not overdue are grouped by the ageing periods or financial periods specified for the statement cycle. + If **Document date** is selected in the **Age based on** field for the statement cycle, the system will compare the document dates of outstanding documents with the **Ageing date** date you specify in this report window. The balances of the documents with dates earlier than the ageing date are displayed in the zero ageing period on the report. Other outstanding balances are broken down by the number of days from the **Aged on** of the report through the document date. For more information, see: [About customer ledger ageing reports](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-customer-ledger-documents/about-customer-ledger-ageing-reports/). ## Ageing credit amounts In the report, the amounts of open payments, prepayments, and credit notes that are recorded to the future periods are aged by periods if the **Age credits** check box is selected in the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. If the credit amounts are aged, they are broken down by the number of days that will pass from the **Aged on** date through the document date. By default, the check box is cleared and the credit amounts show up in the **Current** column. See below for a description of each parameter on the **Report parameters** tab. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Report format

The format of the report. Select one of the following options:

Detailed
(default): To view outstanding customer documents.
Summary
To view outstanding customer balances.
Company

The company the report should cover.

Select a company, or leave the field blank to view data on all companies. By default, the current company is selected.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system, in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Branch

The branch the report should cover.

Select a branch, or leave the field blank to view data on all branches.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system, in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Customer class

The customer class for which you want to display data.

Select a customer class from the list of customer classes, or leave the field blank to view information about all classes.

Customer

The customer to be reported on, if any.

Select a customer by ID from the list of active customers, or leave the field blank to view information about all customers.

Ageing date

The date the system will use when calculating the ageing categories for the documents.

By default, the current date is used, but you can select another date.

Group by parent account

A check box you select to group customer accounts that are involved in parent-child relationship under a parent account and display consolidated balance of the group.

The system will group only those child accounts that have the Consolidate balance check box selected. The check box is available if the Parent-child customer relationship functionality is enabled in Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window. For details, see: Manage parent-child relationships - overview.

## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

Balance by customer (AR632500) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/balance-by-customer-ar632500 section This report displays the outstanding balances of the selected customer (or all customers) during the chosen period. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Balance by customer (AR632500) This report displays the outstanding balances of the selected customer (or all customers) during the chosen period. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report displays the outstanding balances of the selected customer (or all customers) during the chosen period. For each customer, documents are grouped by account–subaccount pair and listed by reference number. You can easily see each document's dates, original amount, and balance after payment application. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Report format

The format of the report. Select one of the following options:

Account summary
To view documents total of a customer that are open at the end of the reporting period grouped by Customer ledger account and subaccount.
Open documents
To view the list of documents that are open at the end of the reporting period.
Open + current period
To view documents that are open at the end of the reporting period along with documents posted or closed during the reporting period.
All documents (customer required)
To view all documents that have been posted before the end of the reporting period. You must specify a customer if you select this option.
Company

The company the report should cover.

Select a company, or leave the field blank to view data on all companies. By default, the current company is selected.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system, in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Branch

The branch the report should cover.

Select a branch, or leave the field blank to view data on all branches.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system, in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Period

The financial period for which you want to display data; you must specify a financial period.

The list of periods contains all the periods, including the closed ones.

Customer

The customer to be reported on, if any.

Select a customer by ID from the list of active customers, or leave the field blank to view information about all customers.

Include applications A check box you select to include applied documents.
Consolidate data by parent account

A check box you select to group customer accounts that are involved in parent-child relationship under a parent account and display consolidated balance of the group.

The system will group only those child accounts that have the Consolidate balance check box selected. The check box is available if the Parent-child customer relationship functionality is enabled the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window. For details, see: Manage parent-child relationships - overview.

## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

Balance by customer (currency) (AR633000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/balance-by-customer-currency-ar633000 section This window is available only if the Multi-currency accounting functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Balance by customer (currency) (AR633000) This window is available only if the Multi-currency accounting functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window. For more information: [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/). This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report displays the outstanding foreign currency balances of the selected customer (or all customers) during the chosen period. For each customer, documents are grouped by account–subaccount pair and listed by reference number. You can easily see each document's dates, original amount, and balance after payment application. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Report format

The format of the report. Select one of the following options:

Account summary
To view documents total of a customer that are open at the end of the reporting period grouped by Customer ledger account and subaccount.
Open documents
To view the list of documents that are open at the end of the reporting period.
Open + current period
To view documents that are open at the end of the reporting period along with documents posted or closed during the reporting period.
All documents (customer required)
To view all documents that have been posted before the end of the reporting period. You must specify a customer if you select this option.
Company

The company the report should cover.

Select a company, or leave the field blank to view data on all companies. By default, the current company is selected.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system, in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Branch

The branch the report should cover.

Select a branch, or leave the field blank to view data on all branches.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system, in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Period The financial period for which you want to display data; you must specify a financial period. The list of periods contains all the periods, including the closed ones.
Customer

The customer to be reported on, if any.

Select a customer by ID from the list of active customers, or leave the field blank to view information about all customers.

Include applications A check box you select to include applied documents.
Consolidate data by parent account A check box you select to consolidate data that is involved in parent-child relationship under a parent account.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

Balance by general ledger account (AR632000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/balance-by-general-ledger-account-ar632000 section This report displays the balances of the customer ledger accounts and activities on the accounts for the chosen period. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Balance by general ledger account (AR632000) This report displays the balances of the customer ledger accounts and activities on the accounts for the chosen period. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report displays the balances of the customer ledger accounts and activities on the accounts for the chosen period. Documents are grouped by account and subaccount pair and listed by their reference numbers. You can view each document's dates, original amount, and balance after payment application. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Report format

The format of the report. Select one of the following options:

Account summary
To view documents total that are open at the end of the reporting period grouped by customer ledger account and subaccount.
Customer summary
To view account documents total split by documents total of the customers.
Open documents
To view the list of documents that are open at the end of the reporting period grouped by customer ledger account, subaccount, and customer account.
Open + current period
To view documents that are open at the end of the reporting period along with documents posted or closed during the reporting period grouped by customer ledger account, subaccount, and customer account.
Company

The company the report should cover.

Select a company, or leave the field blank to view data on all companies. By default, the current company is selected.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system, in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Branch

The branch the report should cover.

Select a branch, or leave the field blank to view data on all branches.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system, in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Period

The financial period for which you want to display data; you must specify a financial period.

The list of periods contains all the periods, including the closed ones.

Include applications A check box you select to include applied documents.
Group by parent account

A check box you select to group customer accounts that are involved in parent-child relationship under a parent account and display consolidated balance of the group.

The system will group only those child accounts that have the Consolidate balance check box selected. The check box is available if the Parent-child customer relationship functionality is enabled the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window. For details, see: Manage parent-child relationships - overview.

## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Batch register customers (AR620500) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/batch-register-customers-ar620500 section This report lists all the batches released in Customer ledger for the specified financial period. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Batch register customers (AR620500) This report lists all the batches released in Customer ledger for the specified financial period. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report lists all the batches released in Customer ledger for the specified financial period. Transactions are listed by their date and shown with batch control totals in the base currency. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Company

The company the report should cover.

Select a company, or leave the field blank to view data on all companies. By default, the current company is selected.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system, in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Branch

The branch the report should cover.

Select a branch, or leave the field blank to view data on all branches.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system, in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Ledger

The ledger for which you want to display data.

You must select a ledger.

From period

The first financial period of the period range the report will cover.

By default, the current financial period is used.

To period

The last financial period of the period range the report will cover.

By default, the current financial period is used.

Created by The user who created a batch for whom you want to view information.
Last modified by The user who last modified a batch for whom you want to view information.
Include unposted transactions A check box that indicates (if selected) that information about unposted transactions will be included in the report.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

Batch register customers (detailed) (AR621000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/batch-register-customers-detailed-ar621000 section This report displays all customer ledger batches posted during the specified financial period. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Batch register customers (detailed) (AR621000) This report displays all customer ledger batches posted during the specified financial period. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report displays all customer ledger batches posted during the specified financial period. Batch details include accounts, subaccounts, document reference numbers, and debit and credit amounts. The batches are listed by their dates. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Company

The company the report should cover.

Select a company, or leave the field blank to view data on all companies. By default, the current company is selected.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system, in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Branch

The branch the report should cover.

Select a branch, or leave the field blank to view data on all branches.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system, in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Ledger

The ledger for which you want to display data.

You must select a ledger.

From period

The first financial period of the period range the report will cover.

By default, the current financial period is used.

To period

The last financial period of the period range the report will cover.

By default, the current financial period is used.

Created by The user who created a batch for whom you want to view information.
Last modified by The user who last modified a batch for whom you want to view information.
Include unposted transactions A check box that indicates (if selected) that information about unposted transactions will be included in the report.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

Customer documents (AR621500) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/customer-documents-ar621500 section This report lists all the documents released in Customer ledger (that is, with statuses Open, Closed, and Reserved ) that meet the criteria you specify. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Customer documents (AR621500) This report lists all the documents released in Customer ledger (that is, with statuses Open, Closed, and Reserved ) that meet the criteria you specify. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. Documents are arranged by type, date, and customer. Document amounts are shown in the original currency and in the base currency. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Company

The company the report should cover.

Select a company, or leave the field blank to view data on all companies. By default, the current company is selected.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system, in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Branch

The branch the report should cover.

Select a branch, or leave the field blank to view data on all branches.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system, in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

From period

The first financial period of the period range the report will cover.

By default, the current financial period is used.

To period

The last financial period of the period range the report will cover.

By default, the current financial period is used.

Document type

The type of document you want to view.

Select one of the available types, or leave the field blank to view documents of all types.

Customer

The customer for which you want to display data.

Select a customer, or leave the field blank to view documents of all customers.

Created by The user who created a batch for whom you want to view information.
Last modified by The user who last modified a batch for whom you want to view information.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

Customer documents (detailed) (AR622000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/customer-documents-detailed-ar622000 section This report shows the details of documents of the selected type (or of all types) released in Customer ledger (that is, with statuses Open, Closed, and Reserved ) for the specified financial period. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Customer documents (detailed) (AR622000) This report shows the details of documents of the selected type (or of all types) released in Customer ledger (that is, with statuses Open, Closed, and Reserved ) for the specified financial period. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report shows the details of documents of the selected type (or of all types) released in Customer ledger (that is, with statuses **Open**, **Closed**, and **Reserved**) for the specified financial period. Documents are arranged by type, date, and customer. The details include the batch number and batch transactions. Document amounts are shown in the original currency and in the base currency. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Company

The company the report should cover.

Select a company, or leave the field blank to view data on all companies. By default, the current company is selected.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system, in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Branch

The branch the report should cover.

Select a branch, or leave the field blank to view data on all branches.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system, in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Ledger

The ledger for which you want to display data.

You must select a ledger.

From period

The first financial period of the period range the report will cover.

By default, the current financial period is used.

To period

The last financial period of the period range the report will cover.

By default, the current financial period is used.

Document type

The type of document you want to view.

Select one of the available types, or leave the field blank to view documents of all types.

Ref. no.

The reference number of the document you want to display.

Select a document by its reference number, or leave the field blank to view all documents of the chosen type.

Created by The user who created a batch for whom you want to view information.
Last modified by The user who last modified a batch for whom you want to view information.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Customer profiles (AR651000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/customer-profiles-ar651000 section This report shows all the details (from the database) of a selected customer account or of all customer accounts. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Customer profiles (AR651000) This report shows all the details (from the database) of a selected customer account or of all customer accounts. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Customer

The customer by its ID.

Select a customer from the list of active customers, or leave the field blank to view information about all customers.

## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

Customer history (AR652000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/customer-history-ar652000 section This report displays a customer's balance history over the date range you specify. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Customer history (AR652000) This report displays a customer's balance history over the date range you specify. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Company

The company the report should cover.

Select a company, or leave the field blank to view data on all companies. By default, the current company is selected.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system, in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Branch

The branch the report should cover.

Select a branch, or leave the field blank to view data on all branches.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system, in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

From period

The first financial period of the period range the report will cover.

By default, the current financial period is selected.

To period

The last financial period of the period range the report will cover.

By default, the current financial period is selected.

Customer

The customer by its ID.

Select a customer from the list of active customers, or leave the field blank to view information about all customers.

## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

Customer history summary (AR652100) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/customer-history-summary-ar652100 section This report displays a summary of balance history for customers whose balance has been changing during the period range you specify. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Customer history summary (AR652100) This report displays a summary of balance history for customers whose balance has been changing during the period range you specify. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Company

The company the report should cover.

Select a company, or leave the field blank to view data on all companies. By default, the current company is selected.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system, in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Branch

The branch the report should cover.

Select a branch, or leave the field blank to view data on all branches.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system, in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

From period

The first financial period of the period range the report will cover.

By default, the current financial period is selected.

To period

The last financial period of the period range the report will cover.

By default, the current financial period is selected.

Show customers with no changes A check box that you select to include customer accounts that have no changes in balance history for the selected period range.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Customer summary (AR65050S) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/customer-summary-ar65050s section This report lists customers with their current balances, default currency, creditterms, VAT zone, and other related information. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Customer summary (AR65050S) This report lists customers with their current balances, default currency, creditterms, VAT zone, and other related information. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Hide zero balances A check box that you select toexclude from the report customers with balances of zero.
Hide inactive customers A check box that you select to exclude from the report customers that are inactive or customersfor which the Active check box is deselected in the Customers (AR303000) window.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Customer specification (AR65200S) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/customer-specification-ar65200s section This report shows the customer balance specification for the selected customers. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Customer specification (AR65200S) This report shows the customer balance specification for the selected customers. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Report parameters On the **Report parameters** tab, use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Branch The branch for which you want to view information. You can select a branch or make no selection to view information about all branches. By default, the current branch is selected. This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
From period The period starting from which the customer specification will be printed.
To period The period up to and including which the customer specification will be printed.
From customer no. The customer number starting from which the customer specification will be printed.
To customer no. The customer number up to and including which the customer specification will be printed.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Customer statement MC, English (AR64201S) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/customer-statement-mc-english-ar64201s section This report shows the customer statement accordant with the selected details in English. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Customer statement MC, English (AR64201S) This report shows the customer statement accordant with the selected details in English. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. See below for a description of each parameter on the **Report parameters** tab. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Branch

The branch the report should cover.

Select a branch, or leave the field blank to view data on all branches.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system, in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Statement date The date from which the statement is printed.
Statement cycle ID The ID of the statement cycle from which the statement is printed.
Message to the customer The free-form message you can write for the customer.
Customer no. The ID of the customer if which the statement is printed.
Send by email Select this to send the statement by email.
Print on paper Select this to print the statement on paper.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Customer statement MC, Norwegian (AR64204S) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/customer-statement-mc-norwegian-ar64204s section This report shows the customer statement accordant with the selected details in Norwegian. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Customer statement MC, Norwegian (AR64204S) This report shows the customer statement accordant with the selected details in Norwegian. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. See below for a description of each parameter on the **Report parameters** tab. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Branch

The branch the report should cover.

Select a branch, or leave the field blank to view data on all branches.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system, in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Statement date The date from which the statement is printed.
Statement cycle ID The ID of the statement cycle from which the statement is printed.
Message to the customer The free-form message you can write for the customer.
Customer no. The number of the customer if which the statement is printed.
Send by email Select this to send the statement by email.
Print on paper Select this to print the statement on paper.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Dunning letter (AR661000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/dunning-letter-ar661000 section Using this report, you can view dunning letters that were generated by using the Prepare dunning letters (AR521000) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Dunning letter (AR661000) Using this report, you can view dunning letters that were generated by using the Prepare dunning letters (AR521000) window. For more information: [Prepare dunning letters (AR521000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/prepare-dunning-letters-ar521000/). This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Dunning letter The dunning letter whose details will be displayed in the report.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

Dunning letter, Norwegian (AR66104S) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/dunning-letter-norwegian-ar66104s section This report lists the dunning letters and overdue balance by customer in Norwegian. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Dunning letter, Norwegian (AR66104S) This report lists the dunning letters and overdue balance by customer in Norwegian. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Dunning letter ID The dunning letter whose details will be displayed in the report in Norwegian.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Dunning letter, English (AR66101S) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/dunning-letter-english-ar66101s section This report lists the dunning letters and overdue balance by customer in English. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Dunning letter, English (AR66101S) This report lists the dunning letters and overdue balance by customer in English. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Dunning letter ID The dunning letter whose details will be displayed in the report in English.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Daily sales profitability (AR676000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/daily-sales-profitability-ar676000 section This report (available in the Summary and Detailed formats) displays the net sales amounts, costs, margins, and margin percentages calculated on the specific transactions to each customer during the specified date range. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Daily sales profitability (AR676000) This report (available in the Summary and Detailed formats) displays the net sales amounts, costs, margins, and margin percentages calculated on the specific transactions to each customer during the specified date range. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. Additionally, you can filter the data by transaction type, warehouse, and item. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Report format

The format of the report.

Select one of the following options:

Detailed
To view the profitability information for each order in the specified date range.
Summary
To view the summary data for each item for the specified date range.
Company

The company the report should cover.

Select a company, or leave the field blank to view data on all companies. By default, the current company is selected.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system, in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Branch

The branch the report should cover.

Select a branch, or leave the field blank to view data on all branches.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system, in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

From date

The start date of the date range of the report.

By default, the first date of the current period is selected.

To date The end date of the date range. By default, the current date is selected.
Document type

The type of document for which you want to view information.

The following options are available: Invoice, Debit note, Credit note, Cash sale, and Cash return. Leave the field blank to view a broader range of data.

Warehouse The warehouse for which you want to view information. Leave the field blank to view information on all warehouses. (This field appears only if the Multiple warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.)
Customer

The customer for which you want to display data.

Select a specific customer by its ID, or leave the field blank to view all the documents.

Item

The item for which you want to view information.

Leave the field blank to view the sales profitability information for all items.

Released transactions only

A check box you select to include in the report only the released transactions.

To view a broader range of data, make sure the check box is cleared.

Completed transactions only

A check box you select to include in the report only the completed transactions.

To view a broader range of data, make sure the check box is cleared.

## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

Incoming payments (AR63050S) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/incoming-payments-ar63050s section This report shows the incoming payments for the selected cash account. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Incoming payments (AR63050S) This report shows the incoming payments for the selected cash account. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Cash account The cash account whose incoming payments will be printed to the report.
Start date The date starting from which incoming payments will be printed to the report.
End date The date until which incoming payments will be printed to the report.
From ref. no. The reference number from which incoming payments will be printed to the report.
To ref. no. The reference number until which incoming payments will be printed to the report.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

Invoice/note (AR641000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/invoice-note-ar641000 section By using this report, you can view and print the current documents of the selected type. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Invoice/note (AR641000) By using this report, you can view and print the current documents of the selected type. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Document type The type of the document to be printed you select from the drop-down.
Ref. no. The reference number of the document to be printed.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Invoice - English (AR64101S) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/invoice-english-ar64101s section This report shows the invoice with the selected reference number in English. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Invoice - English (AR64101S) This report shows the invoice with the selected reference number in English. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. See below for a description of each parameter on the **Report parameters** tab. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Document type The type of the document to be printed you select from the drop-down.
Reference no. The reference number of the document to be printed.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Invoice - Finnish (AR64102S) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/invoice-finnish-ar64102s section This report shows the invoice with the selected reference number in Finnish. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Invoice - Finnish (AR64102S) This report shows the invoice with the selected reference number in Finnish. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. See below for a description of each parameter on the **Report parameters** tab. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Document type The type of the document to be printed you select from the drop-down.
Reference no. The reference number of the document to be printed.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Invoice - Swedish for Finland (AR64103S) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/invoice-swedish-for-finland-ar64103s section This report shows the invoice with the selected reference number in Swedish. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Invoice - Swedish for Finland (AR64103S) This report shows the invoice with the selected reference number in Swedish. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. See below for a description of each parameter on the **Report parameters** tab. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Document type The type of the document to be printed you select from the drop-down.
Reference no. The reference number of the document to be printed.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Invoice - Norwegian (AR64104S) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/invoice-norwegian-ar64104s section This report shows the invoice with the selected reference number in Norwegian. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Invoice - Norwegian (AR64104S) This report shows the invoice with the selected reference number in Norwegian. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. See below for a description of each parameter on the **Report parameters** tab. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Document type The type of the document to be printed you select from the drop-down.
Reference no. The reference number of the document to be printed.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Invoice - Dutch (AR64105S) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/invoice-dutch-ar64105s section This report shows the invoice with the selected reference number in Dutch. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Invoice - Dutch (AR64105S) This report shows the invoice with the selected reference number in Dutch. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. See below for a description of each parameter on the **Report parameters** tab. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Document type The type of the document to be printed you select from the drop-down.
Reference no. The reference number of the document to be printed.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Invoice - Danish (AR64106S) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/invoice-danish-ar64106s section This report shows the invoice with the selected reference number in Danish. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Invoice - Danish (AR64106S) This report shows the invoice with the selected reference number in Danish. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. See below for a description of each parameter on the **Report parameters** tab. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Document type The type of the document to be printed you select from the drop-down.
Reference no. The reference number of the document to be printed.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Invoice - Swedish left address (AR64108S) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/invoice-swedish-left-address-ar64108s section This report shows the invoice with the selected reference number in Swedish, address information on the left side. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Invoice - Swedish left address (AR64108S) This report shows the invoice with the selected reference number in Swedish, address information on the left side. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. See below for a description of each parameter on the **Report parameters** tab. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Document type The type of the document to be printed you select from the drop-down.
Reference no. The reference number of the document to be printed.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Invoice - Dutch pre-printed (AR64110S) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/invoice-dutch-pre-printed-ar64110s section This report shows the invoice with the selected reference number in Dutch on a pre-printed form. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Invoice - Dutch pre-printed (AR64110S) This report shows the invoice with the selected reference number in Dutch on a pre-printed form. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. See below for a description of each parameter on the **Report parameters** tab. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Document type The type of the document to be printed you select from the drop-down.
Reference no. The reference number of the document to be printed.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Invoice - Swedish (AR64118S) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/invoice-swedish-ar64118s section This report shows the invoice with the selected reference number in Swedish. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Invoice - Swedish (AR64118S) This report shows the invoice with the selected reference number in Swedish. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. See below for a description of each parameter on the **Report parameters** tab. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Document type The type of the document to be printed you select from the drop-down.
Reference no. The reference number of the document to be printed.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Overdue charge (AR643000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/overdue-charge-ar643000 section This report displays the selected invoice or note as a ready-to-print document. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Overdue charge (AR643000) This report displays the selected invoice or note as a ready-to-print document. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report displays the selected invoice or note as a ready-to-print document. ## The Report parameters tab You can use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Document type The type of the document to be printed. The type is Overdue charge by default.
Reference no. The reference number of the document to be printed.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Overdue charge, English (AR64301S) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/overdue-charge-english-ar64301s section This report shows the invoice with the selected reference number in English. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Overdue charge, English (AR64301S) This report shows the invoice with the selected reference number in English. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. See below for a description of each parameter on the **Report parameters** tab. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Document type The type of the document to be printed. The type is Overdue charge by default.
Reference no. The reference number of the document to be printed.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Overdue charge, Finnish (AR64302S) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/overdue-charge-finnish-ar64302s section This report shows the invoice with the selected reference number in Finnish. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Overdue charge, Finnish (AR64302S) This report shows the invoice with the selected reference number in Finnish. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. See below for a description of each parameter on the **Report parameters** tab. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Document type The type of the document to be printed. The type is Overdue charge by default.
Reference no. The reference number of the document to be printed.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Overdue charge, Swedish for Finland (AR64303S) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/overdue-charge-swedish-for-finland-ar64303s section This report shows the invoice with the selected reference number in Swedish. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Overdue charge, Swedish for Finland (AR64303S) This report shows the invoice with the selected reference number in Swedish. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. See below for a description of each parameter on the **Report parameters** tab. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Document type The type of the document to be printed. The type is Overdue charge by default.
Reference no. The reference number of the document to be printed.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Overdue charge, Norwegian (AR64304S) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/overdue-charge-norwegian-ar64304s section This report shows the invoice with the selected reference number in Norwegian. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Overdue charge, Norwegian (AR64304S) This report shows the invoice with the selected reference number in Norwegian. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. See below for a description of each parameter on the **Report parameters** tab. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Document type The type of the document to be printed. The type is Overdue charge by default.
Reference no. The reference number of the document to be printed.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Overdue charge, Dutch (AR64305S) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/overdue-charge-dutch-ar64305s section This report shows the invoice with the selected reference number in Dutch. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Overdue charge, Dutch (AR64305S) This report shows the invoice with the selected reference number in Dutch. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. See below for a description of each parameter on the **Report parameters** tab. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Document type The type of the document to be printed. The type is Overdue charge by default.
Reference no. The reference number of the document to be printed.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Overdue charge, Danish (AR64306S) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/overdue-charge-danish-ar64306s section This report shows the invoice with the selected reference number in Danish. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Overdue charge, Danish (AR64306S) This report shows the invoice with the selected reference number in Danish. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. See below for a description of each parameter on the **Report parameters** tab. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Document type The type of the document to be printed. The type is Overdue charge by default.
Reference no. The reference number of the document to be printed.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Overdue charge, Swedish left address (AR64308S) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/overdue-charge-swedish-left-address-ar64308s section This report shows the invoice with the selected reference number in Swedish, address information on the left side. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Overdue charge, Swedish left address (AR64308S) This report shows the invoice with the selected reference number in Swedish, address information on the left side. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. See below for a description of each parameter on the **Report parameters** tab. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Document type The type of the document to be printed. The type is Overdue charge by default.
Reference no. The reference number of the document to be printed.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Overdue charge, Dutch pre-printed (AR64310S) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/overdue-charge-dutch-pre-printed-ar64310s section This report shows the invoice with the selected reference number in Dutch on a pre-printed form. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Overdue charge, Dutch pre-printed (AR64310S) This report shows the invoice with the selected reference number in Dutch on a pre-printed form. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. See below for a description of each parameter on the **Report parameters** tab. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Document type The type of the document to be printed. The type is Overdue charge by default.
Reference no. The reference number of the document to be printed.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Overdue charge, Swedish (AR64318S) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/overdue-charge-swedish-ar64318s section This report shows the invoice with the selected reference number in Swedish. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Overdue charge, Swedish (AR64318S) This report shows the invoice with the selected reference number in Swedish. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. See below for a description of each parameter on the **Report parameters** tab. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Document type The type of the document to be printed. The type is Overdue charge by default.
Reference no. The reference number of the document to be printed.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Open customer ledger documents (AR656000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/open-customer-ledger-documents-ar656000 section With this report, you can view and print the list of customer ledger documents that are not yet released in the specified range of financial periods. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Open customer ledger documents (AR656000) With this report, you can view and print the list of customer ledger documents that are not yet released in the specified range of financial periods. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. > [!NOTE] > The report includes open documents that belong to deleted customer accounts. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
From period The first financial period of the period range the report will cover. By default, the current financial period is used.
To period The last financial period of the period range the report will cover. By default, the current financial period is used.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Sales profitability by customer and order (AR672000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/sales-profitability-by-customer-and-order-ar672000 section This report (available in the Summary and Detailed formats) shows the net sales amounts, costs, margins, and margin percentages of the sales to each customer during the specified date range. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Sales profitability by customer and order (AR672000) This report (available in the Summary and Detailed formats) shows the net sales amounts, costs, margins, and margin percentages of the sales to each customer during the specified date range. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. Additionally, you can filter the data by item. The window is available if the **Inventory** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Report format

The format of the report.

Select one of the following options:

Detailed
To view the profitability information for each order in the specified date range.
Summary
To view the summary data for each item for the specified date range.
Company

The company the report should cover.

Select a company, or leave the field blank to view data on all companies. By default, the current company is selected.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system, in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Branch

The branch the report should cover.

Select a branch, or leave the field blank to view data on all branches.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system, in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

From date

The start date of the date range of the report.

By default, the first date of the current period is selected.

To date

The end date of the date range.

By default, the current date is selected.

Customer

The customer for which you want to display data.

Select a specific customer by its ID, or leave the field blank to view information for all customers.

Item

The item for which you want to view information.

Leave the field blank to view the sales profitability information for all items.

Released transactions only

A check box you select to include in the report only the released transactions.

To view a broader range of data, make sure the check box is cleared.

Completed transactions only

A check box you select to include in the report only the completed transactions.

To view a broader range of data, make sure the check box is cleared.

## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

Sales profitability by customer class and customer (AR675000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/sales-profitability-by-customer-class-and-customer-ar675000 section This report (available in the Summary and Detailed formats) displays the net sales amounts, costs, margins, and margin percentages of all sales to each customer class and each customer during the specified date range. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Sales profitability by customer class and customer (AR675000) This report (available in the Summary and Detailed formats) displays the net sales amounts, costs, margins, and margin percentages of all sales to each customer class and each customer during the specified date range. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. Additionally, you can filter the data by item. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Report format

The format of the report.

Select one of the following options:

Detailed
To view the profitability information for each order in the specified date range.
Summary
To view the summary data for each item for the specified date range.
Company

The company the report should cover.

Select a company, or leave the field blank to view data on all companies. By default, the current company is selected.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system, in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Branch

The branch the report should cover.

Select a branch, or leave the field blank to view data on all branches.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system, in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

From date

The start date of the date range of the report.

By default, the first date of the current period is selected.

To date

The end date of the date range.

By default, the current date is selected.

Customer class

A particular customer class.

Select the customer class to view the sales data for only customers of this class, or leave it blank to view a broader range of data.

Customer The customer for which you want to display data. Select a specific customer by its ID, or leave the field blank to view information for all customers.
Item The item for which you want to view information. Leave the field blank to view the sales profitability information for all items.
Released transactions only A check box you select to include in the report only the released transactions. To view a broader range of data, make sure the check box is cleared.
Completed transactions only A check box you select to include in the report only the completed transactions. To view a broader range of data, make sure the check box is cleared.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

Sales profitability by item and order (AR671000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/sales-profitability-by-item-and-order-ar671000 section This report (available in the Summary and Detailed formats) displays the net sales amounts, costs, margins, and margin percentages for the items that were listed on the sales orders created in Visma Net during the specified date range. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Sales profitability by item and order (AR671000) This report (available in the Summary and Detailed formats) displays the net sales amounts, costs, margins, and margin percentages for the items that were listed on the sales orders created in Visma Net during the specified date range. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. Additionally, you can filter the data by customer. The window is available if the Inventory functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Report format

The format of the report.

Select one of the following options:

Detailed
To view the profitability information for each order in the specified date range.
Summary
To view the summary data for each item for the specified date range.
Company

The company the report should cover.

Select a company, or leave the field blank to view data on all companies. By default, the current company is selected.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system, in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Branch

The branch the report should cover.

Select a branch, or leave the field blank to view data on all branches. This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system, in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

From date

The start date of the date range of the report.

By default, the first date of the current period is selected.

To date

The end date of the date range.

By default, the current date is selected.

Customer

The customer for which you want to display data.

Select a specific customer by its ID, or leave the field blank to view information for all customers.

Item

The item for which you want to view information.

Leave the field blank to view the sales profitability information for all items.

Released transactions only

A check box you select to include in the report only the released transactions.

To view a broader range of data, make sure the check box is cleared.

Completed transactions only

A check box you select to include in the report only the completed transactions.

To view a broader range of data, make sure the check box is cleared.

## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

Sales profitability by item class and item (AR674000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/sales-profitability-by-item-class-and-item-ar674000 section This report (available in the Summary and Detailed formats) shows the net sales amounts, costs, margins, and margin percentages calculated for each stock item and item class based on the sales that occurred during the specified date range. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Sales profitability by item class and item (AR674000) This report (available in the Summary and Detailed formats) shows the net sales amounts, costs, margins, and margin percentages calculated for each stock item and item class based on the sales that occurred during the specified date range. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. Additionally, you can filter the data by customer. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Report format

The format of the report.

Select one of the following options:

Detailed
To view the profitability information for each order in the specified date range.
Summary
To view the summary data for each item for the specified date range.
Company

The company the report should cover.

Select a company, or leave the field blank to view data on all companies. By default, the current company is selected.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system, in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Branch

The branch the report should cover.

Select a branch, or leave the field blank to view data on all branches.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system, in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) windoww.

From date

The start date of the date range of the report.

By default, the first date of the current period is selected.

To date

The end date of the date range.

By default, the current date is selected.

Item class

A particular item class.

Select the item class to view the sales data for only this item class, or leave it blank to view a broader range of data.

Item

The stock item for which you want to view information.

Leave the field blank to view the sales profitability information for all stock items.

Customer

The customer for which you want to display data.

Select a specific customer by its ID, or leave the field blank to view all the documents.

Released transactions only

A check box you select to include in the report only the released transactions.

To view a broader range of data, make sure the check box is cleared.

Completed transactions only

A check box you select to include in the report only the completed transactions.

To view a broader range of data, make sure the check box is cleared.

## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

Sales profitability by salesperson and customer (AR673000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/sales-profitability-by-salesperson-and-customer-ar673000 section This report (available in the Summary and Detailed formats) shows the net sales amounts, costs, margins, and margin percentages calculated for the sales performed by particular salespersons during the specified date range. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Sales profitability by salesperson and customer (AR673000) This report (available in the Summary and Detailed formats) shows the net sales amounts, costs, margins, and margin percentages calculated for the sales performed by particular salespersons during the specified date range. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. The report in detailed format shows the data broken down by customer. Additionally, you can filter the data by item. The report is available if the **Commissions** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Report format

The format of the report.

Select one of the following options:

Detailed
To view the profitability information for each order in the specified date range.
Summary
To view the summary data for each item for the specified date range.
Company

The company the report should cover.

Select a company, or leave the field blank to view data on all companies. By default, the current company is selected.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system, in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Branch The branch the report should cover. Select a branch, or leave the field blank to view data on all branches. This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system, in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
From date

The start date of the date range of the report.

By default, the first date of the current period is selected.

To date

The end date of the date range.

By default, the current date is selected.

Salesperson

The salesperson for which you want to view information.

Leave the field blank to view information on all salespersons.

Customer

The customer for which you want to display data.

Select a specific customer by its ID, or leave the field blank to view information for all customers.

Item

The item for which you want to view information.

Leave the field blank to view the sales profitability information for all items.

Released transactions only

A check box you select to include in the report only the released transactions.

To view a broader range of data, make sure the check box is cleared.

Completed transactions only

A check box you select to include in the report only the completed transactions.

To view a broader range of data, make sure the check box is cleared.

## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}
Subscriptions accounting (AR677000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/subscriptions-accounting-ar677000 section You use this report for CMRR reporting. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Subscriptions accounting (AR677000) You use this report for CMRR reporting. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. It is available for Visma Net users and administrators who have the Contract management functionality enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Report format

The format of the report. Select one of the following options:

Detailed
To view the profitability information on the sales performed by each salesperson to particular customers during the specified date range.
Summary
To view the summary data for each salesperson for the specified date range.
From year

The start year of the date range of the report.

By default, the year of the current period is selected.

To year

The end year of the date range.

By default, the current business year is selected.

Template

The template for which you want to view information.

Leave the field blank to view information on all templates.

Contract

The contract for which you want to view information.

Leave the field blank to view information for all contracts.

## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

Unreleased transactions (AR611000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/unreleased-transactions-ar611000 section This report lists the customer ledger documents that were entered but not released. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Unreleased transactions (AR611000) This report lists the customer ledger documents that were entered but not released. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report lists the customer ledger documents that were entered but not released. You can view the documents for all customers or select a customer for which you want to view documents. Documents are listed by document type, financial period, and document date. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Company

The company the report should cover.

Select a company, or leave the field blank to view data on all companies. By default, the current company is selected.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system, in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Branch

The branch the report should cover.

Select a branch, or leave the field blank to view data on all branches.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system, in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

From period

The first financial period of the period range the report will cover.

By default, the current financial period is used.

To period

The last financial period of the period range the report will cover.

By default, the current financial period is used.

Customer

The customer for which you want to display data.

Select a specific customer by its ID, or leave the field blank to view all the documents.

Created by The user who created a batch for whom you want to view information.
Last modified by The user who last modified a batch for whom you want to view information.
Include transactions on hold A check box you select to include transactions with the On hold status.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Unreleased transactions (detailed) (AR610500) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/unreleased-transactions-detailed-ar610500 section This report displays the list of customer ledger documents, shown with all details, of the selected type that were entered but not released. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Unreleased transactions (detailed) (AR610500) This report displays the list of customer ledger documents, shown with all details, of the selected type that were entered but not released. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report displays the list of customer ledger documents, shown with all details, of the selected type that were entered but not released. You can select a specific document type or view all the documents. Documents are listed by the financial period, the document date, and the customer of the document. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Company

The company the report should cover.

Select a company, or leave the field blank to view data on all companies. By default, the current company is selected.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system, in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Branch

The branch the report should cover.

Select a branch, or leave the field blank to view data on all branches.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system, in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

From period

The first financial period of the period range the report will cover.

By default, the current financial period is used.

To period

The last financial period of the period range the report will cover.

By default, the current financial period is used.

Document type

The type of document you want to view.

Select one of the available types, or leave the field blank to view documents of all types.

Ref. no.

The reference number for which you want to display data.

Select a specific document by its reference number, or leave the field blank to view all the documents.

Created by The user who created a batch for whom you want to view information.
Last modified by The user who last modified a batch for whom you want to view information.
Include transactions on hold A check box you select to include transactions with the On hold status.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows